MAAPC620-ENG

Automation PC 620
User's Manual

Version: 2.68 (May 2015)

Model number: MAAPC620-ENG

All information contained in this manual is current as of its creation/publication. We reserve the
right to change the contents of this manual without warning. The information contained herein is
believed to be accurate as of the date of publication; however, Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-
Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. makes no warranty, expressed or implied, with regards to the products or
the documentation contained within this book. In addition, Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-
Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. shall not be liable in the event of incidental or consequential damages in
connection with or resulting from the furnishing, performance, or use of these products. The
software names, hardware names, and trademarks used in this manual are registered by the
respective companies.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 1

2 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68
 Chapter 1: General information

Chapter 2: Technical Data

Chapter 3: Commissioning

Chapter 4: Software

Chapter 5: Standards and certifications

Chapter 6: Accessories

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 3

4 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68
 Chapter 7: Maintenance / Servicing

Appendix A

Figure index

Table index

Model number index

Index

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 5

6 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Chapter 1: General information ..................................................... 23

1. Manual history .................................................................................................................... 23
2. Safety notices ..................................................................................................................... 32
2.1 Intended use .................................................................................................................. 32
2.2 Protection against electrostatic discharges ................................................................... 32
2.2.1 Packaging ............................................................................................................... 32
2.2.2 Guidelines for proper ESD handling ....................................................................... 32
2.3 Policy and procedures ................................................................................................... 33
2.4 Transport and storage ................................................................................................... 33
2.5 Installation ..................................................................................................................... 34
2.6 Operation ....................................................................................................................... 34
2.6.1 Protection against touching electrical parts ............................................................ 34
2.6.2 Environmental conditions - dust, humidity, aggressive gases ................................ 34
2.6.3 Programs, viruses, and dangerous programs ......................................................... 35
2.7 Environmentally-friendly disposal .................................................................................. 35
2.7.1 Separation of materials ........................................................................................... 35
3. Organization of safety notices ............................................................................................ 36
4. Directives ............................................................................................................................ 36
5. Model numbers ................................................................................................................... 37
5.1 System units .................................................................................................................. 37
5.2 CPU boards 815E (ETX) ............................................................................................... 38
5.3 CPU boards 855GME (ETX) ......................................................................................... 38
5.4 CPU boards 855GME (XTX) ......................................................................................... 39
5.5 Heat sink ....................................................................................................................... 39
5.6 Main memory ................................................................................................................. 40
5.7 Drives ............................................................................................................................ 40
5.8 Interface options ............................................................................................................ 42
5.9 Fan kits .......................................................................................................................... 42
5.10 AP Link cards .............................................................................................................. 42
5.11 Accessories ................................................................................................................. 42
5.11.1 Supply voltage connectors .................................................................................... 42
5.11.2 X2X and CAN plugs .............................................................................................. 43
5.11.3 Batteries ................................................................................................................ 43
5.11.4 CompactFlash cards ............................................................................................. 43
5.11.5 USB flash drives ................................................................................................... 45
5.11.6 Cables ................................................................................................................... 45
5.11.7 UPS module + accessories ................................................................................... 47
5.11.8 PCI Ethernet cards ................................................................................................ 47
5.11.9 Miscellaneous ....................................................................................................... 47
5.12 Software ...................................................................................................................... 48
6. Typical topologies ............................................................................................................... 51
6.1 APC620 embedded for central control and visualization ............................................... 51
6.2 APC620 as visualization device .................................................................................... 52

Chapter 2: Technical Data .............................................................. 53

1. Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 53

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 7

 Table of contents

1.1 Features ........................................................................................................................ 54

1.2 Structure / configuration APC620 with 1, 2, 3 and 5 PCI slots ...................................... 55
1.2.1 Selection guide - basic system ............................................................................... 56
1.2.2 Selection guide - Optional components .................................................................. 57
1.3 Structure / configuration APC620 embedded ................................................................ 59
2. Entire device ....................................................................................................................... 60
2.1 APC620, 1 PCI slot variant ............................................................................................ 60
2.1.1 Interfaces ................................................................................................................ 60
2.1.2 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 62
2.1.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 65
2.2 APC620, 2 PCI slot variant ............................................................................................ 66
2.2.1 Interfaces ................................................................................................................ 66
2.2.2 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 68
2.2.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 71
2.3 APC620, 3 PCI slot variant ............................................................................................ 72
2.3.1 Interfaces ................................................................................................................ 72
2.3.2 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 74
2.3.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 76
2.4 APC620, 5 PCI slot variant ............................................................................................ 77
2.4.1 Interfaces ................................................................................................................ 77
2.4.2 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 79
2.4.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 82
2.5 APC620 embedded variant ........................................................................................... 83
2.5.1 Interfaces ................................................................................................................ 83
2.5.2 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 85
2.5.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 88
2.6 Ambient temperatures for systems with an 815E CPU board (ETX) ............................. 89
2.6.1 Maximum ambient temperature .............................................................................. 90
2.6.2 Minimum ambient temperature ............................................................................... 91
2.6.3 How do you determine the maximum ambient temperature? ................................. 91
2.6.4 Temperature monitoring .......................................................................................... 92
2.7 Ambient temperatures for systems with an 855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX) ............. 93
2.7.1 Maximum ambient temperature .............................................................................. 94
2.7.2 Minimum ambient temperature ............................................................................... 95
2.7.3 How do you determine the maximum ambient temperature? ................................. 95
2.7.4 Temperature monitoring .......................................................................................... 96
2.8 Power management APC620 system unit with 1 PCI slot ............................................. 97
2.8.1 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX01-00 revision >= I0 .......................................... 97
2.8.2 Power calculation with 5PC600.SX01-00 revision >= I0 ......................................... 98
2.8.3 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX01-00 revision < I0 ............................................ 99
2.8.4 Power calculation with 5PC600.SX01-00 revision < I0 ......................................... 100
2.9 Power management APC620 system units with 2 PCI slots ....................................... 101
2.9.1 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX02-00 revision >= H0 and 5PC600.SX02-01 revision
>= K0) ............................................................................................................................ 101
2.9.2 Power calculation with 5PC600.SX02-00 revision >= H0 ..................................... 102
2.9.3 Power calculation with 5PC600.SX02-01 revision >= K0 ..................................... 103
2.9.4 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX02-00 revision < H0 and 5PC600.SX02-01 revision

8 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table of contents

< K0) .............................................................................................................................. 104

2.9.5 Power calculation with 5PC600.SX02-00 revision < H0 ....................................... 105
2.9.6 Power calculation with 5PC600.SX02-01 revision < K0 ........................................ 106
2.10 Power management APC620 system unit with 3 PCI slots ....................................... 107
2.10.1 5PC600.SF03-00 supply voltage ........................................................................ 107
2.10.2 Power calculation with system unit 5PC600.SF03-00 ........................................ 108
2.11 Power management APC620 system units with 5 PCI slots ..................................... 109
2.11.1 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX05-00 (revision >= H0) and 5PC600.SX05-01
(revision >= H0) ............................................................................................................. 109
2.11.2 Power calculation with system unit 5PC600.SX05-00 (revision >= H0) .............. 111
2.11.3 Power calculation with system unit 5PC600.SX05-01 (revision >= H0) .............. 112
2.11.4 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX05-00 (revision < H0) and 5PC600.SX05-01
(revision <= H0) ............................................................................................................. 113
2.11.5 Power calculation with system unit 5PC600.SX05-05 revision < H0 .................. 115
2.11.6 Power calculation with system unit 5PC600.SX05-01 revision < H0 .................. 116
2.12 Power management for the APC620 embedded system unit ................................... 117
2.12.1 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and 5PC600.SE00-02 .
117
2.12.2 Power calculation with 5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and 5PC600.SE00-02
118
2.13 Humidity specifications .............................................................................................. 119
2.14 Device interfaces ...................................................................................................... 121
2.14.1 Serial interface COM1 ......................................................................................... 123
2.14.2 Serial interface COM2 ......................................................................................... 124
2.14.3 X2X (only APC620 embedded) ........................................................................... 125
2.14.4 CAN (only APC620 embedded) .......................................................................... 125
2.14.5 CAN node number (only APC620 embedded) .................................................... 126
2.14.6 CAN terminating switch / LED (only APC620 embedded) .................................. 126
2.14.7 Status LEDs CAN / X2X (only APC620 embedded) ........................................... 127
2.14.8 POWERLINK (only APC620 embedded) ............................................................ 127
2.14.9 POWERLINK station number (only APC620 embedded) ................................... 129
2.14.10 Ethernet connection ETH (only APC620 embedded) ....................................... 129
2.14.11 Ethernet connection ETH1 ................................................................................ 130
2.14.12 Ethernet connection ETH2 ................................................................................ 132
2.14.13 USB port ........................................................................................................... 133
2.14.14 USB connection (only APC620 embedded) ...................................................... 134
2.14.15 +24 VDC supply voltage ................................................................................... 135
2.14.16 Monitor / Panel connection ............................................................................... 138
2.14.17 MIC, Line IN and Line OUT ports ...................................................................... 144
2.14.18 Add-on interface slot ......................................................................................... 145
2.14.19 Add-on UPS module slot ................................................................................... 146
2.14.20 AP Link Slot ...................................................................................................... 147
2.14.21 PCI slots ............................................................................................................ 147
2.14.22 Status LEDs ...................................................................................................... 150
2.14.23 Status LEDs Power, CF, Link (only APC620 embedded) ................................. 151
2.14.24 CompactFlash slot (CF1) .................................................................................. 152
2.14.25 Hard disk / CompactFlash slot (HDD/CF2) ....................................................... 153

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 9

 Table of contents

2.14.26 CompactFlash slots (only APC620 embedded) ................................................ 155

2.14.27 Power button ..................................................................................................... 156
2.14.28 Reset button ...................................................................................................... 156
2.14.29 PS/2 keyboard/mouse ....................................................................................... 157
2.14.30 Battery ............................................................................................................... 158
2.14.31 Hardware Security Key ..................................................................................... 160
2.14.32 Slide-in slot 1 drive slot ..................................................................................... 161
2.14.33 Slide-in slot 2 drive slot ..................................................................................... 162
2.15 Serial number sticker ................................................................................................. 163
2.16 Block diagram ............................................................................................................ 165
2.16.1 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX01-00 ................................................ 165
2.16.2 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX02-00 ................................................ 166
2.16.3 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX02-01 ................................................ 167
2.16.4 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SF03-00 ................................................ 168
2.16.5 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX05-00 ................................................ 169
2.16.6 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX05-01 ................................................ 170
2.16.7 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SE00-00 ................................................ 171
2.16.8 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SE00-01 ................................................ 172
2.16.9 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SE00-02 ................................................ 173
3. Individual components ...................................................................................................... 174
3.1 System units ................................................................................................................ 174
3.1.1 APC620 with 1, 2, 3 and 5 PCI slots ..................................................................... 174
3.1.2 APC620 embedded variations .............................................................................. 176
3.2 CPU boards 815E (ETX) ............................................................................................. 179
3.3 CPU boards 855GME (ETX) ....................................................................................... 181
3.4 CPU boards 855GME (XTX) ....................................................................................... 183
3.5 Heat sink ..................................................................................................................... 185
3.6 Main memory ............................................................................................................... 186
3.7 Drives .......................................................................................................................... 187
3.7.1 Add-on Solid State Drive 128 GB 24x7 ET - 5AC600.SSDI-00 ............................ 187
3.7.2 Replacement Solid State Drive 128 GB 24x7 ET - 5MMSSD.0128-00 ................. 191
3.7.3 Add-on hard disk 30 GB 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDI-00 ................................................ 195
3.7.4 Add-on hard disk 20 GB ET - 5AC600.HDDI-01 ................................................... 198
3.7.5 Add-on hard disk 40 GB 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDI-02 ................................................ 201
3.7.6 Add-on hard disk 60 GB 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDI-03 ................................................ 204
3.7.7 Add-on hard disk 80 GB 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDI-04 ................................................ 207
3.7.8 Add-on hard disk 40 GB 24x7 ET - 5AC600.HDDI-05 .......................................... 210
3.7.9 Add-on hard disk 80 GB 24x7 ET - 5AC600.HDDI-06 .......................................... 213
3.7.10 Add-on CompactFlash slot - 5AC600.CFSI-00 ................................................... 216
3.7.11 Slide-in CD-ROM - 5AC600.CDXS-00 ................................................................ 217
3.7.12 Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW - 5AC600.DVDS-00 ................................................ 220
3.7.13 Slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW - 5AC600.DVRS-00 ....................................... 223
3.7.14 Slide-in CF 2 slot - 5AC600.CFSS-00 ................................................................. 228
3.7.15 Slide-in USB FDD - 5AC600.FDDS-00 ............................................................... 230
3.7.16 Slide-in hard disk 30 GB 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDS-00 ............................................ 233
3.7.17 Slide-in hard disk 20 GB ET - 5AC600.HDDS-01 ............................................... 236
3.7.18 Slide-in hard disk 40 GB ET - 5AC600.HDDS-02 ............................................... 239

10 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table of contents

3.8 RAID system ............................................................................................................... 242

3.8.1 PCI RAID Controller ATA/100 - 5ACPCI.RAIC-00 ................................................ 243
3.8.2 PCI RAID storage 2 x 40 GB 24x7 - 5ACPCI.RAIS-00 ......................................... 245
3.8.3 PCI RAID storage 2 x 60 GB 24x7 - 5ACPCI.RAIS-01 ......................................... 248
3.8.4 PCI SATA RAID 2 x 60 GB 24x7 - 5ACPCI.RAIC-01 ........................................... 251
3.8.5 Replacement SATA HDD 60 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-02 ........................................... 256
3.8.6 PCI SATA RAID 2 x 160 GB 24x7 ET - 5ACPCI.RAIC-03 .................................... 259
3.8.7 Replacement SATA HDD 160 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-04 ......................................... 264
3.8.8 PCI SATA RAID 2 x 250 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-05 ................................................. 267
3.8.9 Replacement SATA HDD 250 GB - 5MMHDD.0250-00 ....................................... 271
3.9 Interface options .......................................................................................................... 274
3.9.1 Add-on CAN interface - 5AC600.CANI-00 ............................................................ 274
3.9.2 Add-on RS232/422/485 interface - 5AC600.485I-00 ............................................ 278
3.10 Fan kits ...................................................................................................................... 282
3.10.1 Fan kit 1 PCI - 5PC600.FA01-00 ........................................................................ 282
3.10.2 Fan kit 2 PCI - 5PC600.FA02-00 ........................................................................ 283
3.10.3 Fan kit 3PCI - 5PC600.FA03-00 ......................................................................... 285
3.10.4 Fan kit 5 PCI - 5PC600.FA05-00 ........................................................................ 286
3.11 AP Link cards ............................................................................................................ 288
3.11.1 AP Link SDL transmitter - 5AC600.SDL0-00 ...................................................... 288

Chapter 3: Commissioning .......................................................... 293

1. Installation ......................................................................................................................... 293
1.1 Important mounting information ................................................................................... 293
1.2 Drilling templates ......................................................................................................... 294
1.3 Mounting orientation .................................................................................................... 297
1.3.1 Standard mounting ................................................................................................ 297
1.3.2 Optional mounting orientations ............................................................................. 299
2. Cable connections ............................................................................................................ 306
2.1 Ethernet cable lengths for ETH1 ................................................................................. 306
3. Grounding concept ........................................................................................................... 307
4. Connection examples ....................................................................................................... 308
4.1 Selecting the display units ........................................................................................... 309
4.2 One Automation Panel 900 via DVI (onboard) ............................................................ 310
4.2.1 Basic system requirements ................................................................................... 310
4.2.2 Link modules ......................................................................................................... 311
4.2.3 Cables ................................................................................................................... 311
4.2.4 Possible Automation Panel units, resolutions und segment lengths ..................... 311
4.2.5 BIOS settings ........................................................................................................ 312
4.2.6 Windows graphics driver settings ......................................................................... 312
4.2.7 Windows touch screen driver settings .................................................................. 312
4.3 An Automation Panel 900 via SDL (onboard) ............................................................. 313
4.3.1 Basic system requirements ................................................................................... 313
4.3.2 Link modules ......................................................................................................... 314
4.3.3 Cables ................................................................................................................... 314
4.3.4 BIOS settings ........................................................................................................ 316

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 11

 Table of contents

4.3.5 Windows graphics driver settings ......................................................................... 316

4.3.6 Windows touch screen driver settings .................................................................. 316
4.4 An Automation Panel 800 via SDL (onboard) ............................................................. 317
4.4.1 Basic system requirements ................................................................................... 317
4.4.2 Cables ................................................................................................................... 318
4.4.3 BIOS settings ........................................................................................................ 319
4.4.4 Windows graphics driver settings ......................................................................... 319
4.4.5 Windows touch screen driver settings .................................................................. 319
4.5 An AP900 and an AP800 via SDL (onboard) .............................................................. 320
4.5.1 Basic system requirements ................................................................................... 320
4.5.2 Cables ................................................................................................................... 321
4.5.3 BIOS settings ........................................................................................................ 322
4.5.4 Windows graphics driver settings ......................................................................... 322
4.5.5 Windows touch screen driver settings .................................................................. 322
4.6 Four Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (onboard) .................................................. 323
4.6.1 Basic system requirements ................................................................................... 323
4.6.2 Link modules ......................................................................................................... 324
4.6.3 Cables ................................................................................................................... 324
4.6.4 BIOS settings ........................................................................................................ 327
4.6.5 Windows graphics driver settings ......................................................................... 327
4.6.6 Windows touch screen driver settings .................................................................. 327
4.7 One Automation Panel 900 unit via SDL (AP Link) ..................................................... 328
4.7.1 Basic system requirements ................................................................................... 328
4.7.2 Link modules ......................................................................................................... 329
4.7.3 Cables ................................................................................................................... 329
4.7.4 BIOS settings ........................................................................................................ 331
4.7.5 Windows graphics driver settings ......................................................................... 331
4.7.6 Windows touch screen driver settings .................................................................. 331
4.8 Four Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (AP Link) ................................................... 332
4.8.1 Basic system requirements ................................................................................... 332
4.8.2 Link modules ......................................................................................................... 333
4.8.3 Cables ................................................................................................................... 333
4.8.4 BIOS settings ........................................................................................................ 336
4.8.5 Windows graphics driver settings ......................................................................... 336
4.8.6 Windows touch screen driver settings .................................................................. 336
4.9 Two Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (onboard) and SDL (AP Link) .................... 337
4.9.1 Basic system requirements ................................................................................... 337
4.9.2 Link modules ......................................................................................................... 338
4.9.3 Cables ................................................................................................................... 338
4.9.4 BIOS settings ........................................................................................................ 340
4.9.5 Windows graphics driver settings ......................................................................... 340
4.9.6 Windows touch screen driver settings .................................................................. 340
4.10 Eight Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (onboard) and SDL (AP Link) ................ 341
4.10.1 Basic system requirements ................................................................................. 342
4.10.2 Link modules ....................................................................................................... 342
4.10.3 Cables ................................................................................................................. 343
4.10.4 BIOS settings ...................................................................................................... 345

12 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table of contents

4.10.5 Windows graphics driver settings ....................................................................... 345

4.10.6 Windows touch screen driver settings ................................................................ 345
4.11 Six AP900 and two AP800 devices via SDL (onboard) and SDL (AP Link) .............. 346
4.11.1 Basic system requirements ................................................................................. 347
4.11.2 Link modules ....................................................................................................... 347
4.11.3 Cables ................................................................................................................. 347
4.11.4 BIOS settings ...................................................................................................... 349
4.11.5 Windows graphics driver settings ....................................................................... 349
4.11.6 Windows touch screen driver settings ................................................................ 349
4.12 Internal numbering of extension units in AP800 devices ........................................... 350
5. Configuration of a SATA RAID array ................................................................................ 351
5.1 Create RAID set .......................................................................................................... 352
5.1.1 Create RAID set - Striped ..................................................................................... 353
5.1.2 Create RAID set - Mirrored ................................................................................... 354
5.2 Delete RAID set ........................................................................................................... 355
5.3 Rebuild mirrored set .................................................................................................... 356
5.4 Resolve conflicts ......................................................................................................... 357
5.5 Low level format .......................................................................................................... 358
6. Connection of USB peripheral devices ............................................................................. 359
6.1 Local on the APC620 .................................................................................................. 359
6.2 Remote connection to Automation Panel 900 via DVI ................................................ 360
6.3 Remote connection to Automation Panel 800/900 via SDL ........................................ 361
7. General instructions for performing temperature tests ..................................................... 362
7.1 Procedure .................................................................................................................... 362
7.2 Evaluating the temperatures in Windows operating systems ...................................... 362
7.2.1 Evaluation using B&R Control Center ................................................................... 362
7.2.2 Evaluation using the BurnIn tool from Passmark .................................................. 364
7.3 Evaluating the temperatures in an operating system other than Windows ................. 366
7.4 Evaluating the measurement results ........................................................................... 366
7.4.1 Example using an APC810 2-slot ......................................................................... 367
8. Compatibility / improvement from 855GME (XTX) to 855GME (ETX) .............................. 368
9. Known problems / issues .................................................................................................. 369

Chapter 4: Software ...................................................................... 371

1. BIOS options ..................................................................................................................... 371
1.1 815E (ETX) BIOS description ...................................................................................... 371
1.1.1 General information .............................................................................................. 371
1.1.2 BIOS setup and boot procedure ........................................................................... 371
1.1.3 BIOS setup keys ................................................................................................... 373
1.1.4 Main ...................................................................................................................... 375
1.1.5 Advanced .............................................................................................................. 384
1.1.6 Security ................................................................................................................. 407
1.1.7 Power .................................................................................................................... 409
1.1.8 Boot ....................................................................................................................... 414
1.1.9 Exit ........................................................................................................................ 415
1.1.10 Profile overview - BIOS default settings - 815E (ETX) ........................................ 416

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 13

 Table of contents

1.2 855GME (ETX) BIOS description ................................................................................ 425

1.2.1 General information .............................................................................................. 425
1.2.2 BIOS setup and boot procedure ........................................................................... 425
1.2.3 BIOS setup keys ................................................................................................... 427
1.2.4 Main ...................................................................................................................... 428
1.2.5 Advanced .............................................................................................................. 438
1.2.6 Security ................................................................................................................. 463
1.2.7 Power .................................................................................................................... 465
1.2.8 Boot ....................................................................................................................... 469
1.2.9 Exit ........................................................................................................................ 470
1.2.10 Profile overview - BIOS default settings - 855GME (ETX) .................................. 472
1.3 855GME (XTX) BIOS description ................................................................................ 481
1.3.1 General information .............................................................................................. 481
1.3.2 BIOS setup and boot procedure ........................................................................... 481
1.3.3 BIOS setup keys ................................................................................................... 482
1.3.4 Main ...................................................................................................................... 484
1.3.5 Advanced .............................................................................................................. 485
1.3.6 Boot ....................................................................................................................... 518
1.3.7 Security ................................................................................................................. 520
1.3.8 Power .................................................................................................................... 523
1.3.9 Exit ........................................................................................................................ 525
1.3.10 Profile overview - BIOS default settings - 855GME (XTX) .................................. 527
1.4 BIOS Error signals (beep codes) ................................................................................. 537
1.4.1 BIOS 815E (ETX) and 855GME (ETX) ................................................................. 537
1.4.2 BIOS 855GME (XTX) ............................................................................................ 537
1.5 Distribution of resources .............................................................................................. 539
1.5.1 RAM address assignment ..................................................................................... 539
1.5.2 DMA channel assignment ..................................................................................... 539
1.5.3 I/O address assignment ........................................................................................ 540
1.5.4 Interrupt assignments in PCI mode ....................................................................... 541
1.5.5 Interrupt assignments in APIC mode .................................................................... 542
1.5.6 Inter-IC (I²C) bus ................................................................................................... 545
1.5.7 System Management (SM) bus ............................................................................ 545
1.6 Location of the DIP switch in APC620 system units .................................................... 546
2. Upgrade information ......................................................................................................... 547
2.1 BIOS upgrade .............................................................................................................. 547
2.1.1 What information do I need? ................................................................................. 547
2.1.2 Upgrade BIOS for 815E (ETX) .............................................................................. 551
2.1.3 Upgrade BIOS for 855GME (ETX) ........................................................................ 552
2.1.4 Upgrade BIOS for 855GME (XTX) ........................................................................ 553
2.1.5 Windows XP Embedded and BIOS upgrade ........................................................ 554
2.2 Upgrade the firmware .................................................................................................. 555
2.2.1 Procedure ............................................................................................................. 555
2.3 Creating an MS-DOS boot diskette in Windows XP .................................................... 558
2.4 Creating a bootable USB flash drive for B&R upgrade files ........................................ 560
2.4.1 Requirements ........................................................................................................ 560
2.4.2 Procedure ............................................................................................................. 560

14 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table of contents

2.4.3 Where do I get MS-DOS? ..................................................................................... 561

2.5 Creating a bootable CompactFlash card for B&R upgrade files .................................. 562
2.5.1 Requirements ........................................................................................................ 562
2.5.2 Procedure ............................................................................................................. 562
2.5.3 Where do I get MS-DOS? ..................................................................................... 563
2.6 Upgrade problems ....................................................................................................... 563
3. Automation PC 620 with Automation Runtime .................................................................. 564
3.1 General information ..................................................................................................... 564
3.2 Support for Automation PC 620 embedded ................................................................ 564
3.2.1 ARwin .................................................................................................................... 564
3.2.2 ARemb .................................................................................................................. 564
3.3 Selection of devices .................................................................................................... 564
3.4 Visual Components graphic engine support ................................................................ 565
4. Automation PC 620 with MS-DOS .................................................................................... 566
4.1 Known problems .......................................................................................................... 566
5. Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional ......................................................... 568
5.1 Installation ................................................................................................................... 569
5.1.1 FAQ ....................................................................................................................... 569
5.2 Graphics drivers .......................................................................................................... 570
5.2.1 Installing the graphics driver for 815E (ETX) CPU boards .................................... 570
5.2.2 Graphics driver installation - 855GME (ETX / XTX) CPU boards ......................... 572
5.2.3 Graphics settings for Extended Desktop ............................................................... 573
5.2.4 Graphics settings for Dual Display Clone ............................................................. 575
5.2.5 FAQ ....................................................................................................................... 576
5.3 Touch screen driver ..................................................................................................... 578
5.3.1 Installation for Extended Desktop ......................................................................... 578
5.3.2 Installation for Dual Display Clone ........................................................................ 580
5.3.3 FAQ ....................................................................................................................... 582
5.4 Audio driver ................................................................................................................. 582
5.4.1 Installation ............................................................................................................. 582
5.5 Network driver ............................................................................................................. 583
5.5.1 Installation ETH1 ................................................................................................... 583
5.5.2 Installation ETH2 ................................................................................................... 583
5.6 Automation PC 620 embedded ................................................................................... 583
6. Automation PC 620 with Windows XP embedded ............................................................ 584
6.1 General information ..................................................................................................... 584
6.2 Features with FP2007 (Feature Pack 2007) ............................................................... 585
6.3 Installation ................................................................................................................... 586
6.4 Graphics drivers .......................................................................................................... 586
6.5 Touch screen driver ..................................................................................................... 586
6.6 Audio driver ................................................................................................................. 586
6.6.1 After a BIOS upgrade ............................................................................................ 586
6.7 Network driver ............................................................................................................. 587
6.8 FAQ ............................................................................................................................. 587
6.8.1 Why does the B&R device restart when shutdown? ............................................. 587
7. Automation PC 620 with Windows Embedded Standard 2009 ......................................... 588
7.1 General information ..................................................................................................... 588

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 15

 Table of contents

7.2 Features with WES2009 (Windows Embedded Standard 2009) ................................. 589
7.3 Installation ................................................................................................................... 590
7.4 Drivers ......................................................................................................................... 590
7.4.1 Touch screen driver .............................................................................................. 590
8. Automation PC 620 with Windows CE .............................................................................. 591
8.1 General information ..................................................................................................... 591
8.2 Windows CE 5.0 features ............................................................................................ 592
8.3 Windows CE 6.0 features ............................................................................................ 593
8.4 Differences between Windows CE 6.0 and Windows CE 5.0 ..................................... 593
8.5 Requirements .............................................................................................................. 594
8.6 Installation ................................................................................................................... 594
8.6.1 B&R Embedded OS Installer ................................................................................ 594
9. B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center ...................................... 595
9.1 Features ...................................................................................................................... 596
9.2 Installation ................................................................................................................... 597
9.3 SDL equalizer setting .................................................................................................. 598
9.4 UPS configuration ....................................................................................................... 599
9.4.1 Installing the UPS service for the B&R APC add-on UPS .................................... 599
9.4.2 Displaying UPS status values ............................................................................... 600
9.4.3 Changing UPS battery settings ............................................................................. 601
9.4.4 Updating UPS battery settings .............................................................................. 603
9.4.5 Saving UPS battery settings ................................................................................. 604
9.4.6 Configuring UPS system settings ......................................................................... 604
9.4.7 Changing additional UPS settings ........................................................................ 606
9.4.8 Procedure following power failure ......................................................................... 608

Chapter 5: Standards and certifications ..................................... 609

1. Applicable European directives ........................................................................................ 609
2. Overview of standards ...................................................................................................... 609
3. Emission requirements (emission) .................................................................................... 611
3.1 Network-related emissions .......................................................................................... 612
3.2 Emissions, electromagnetic emissions ........................................................................ 613
4. Requirements for immunity to disturbances (immunity) .................................................... 614
4.1 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) ..................................................................................... 615
4.2 High-frequency electromagnetic fields (HF field) ........................................................ 615
4.3 High-speed transient electrical disturbances (burst) ................................................... 616
4.4 Surges (surge) ............................................................................................................. 616
4.5 Conducted disturbances .............................................................................................. 616
4.6 Magnetic fields with electrical frequencies .................................................................. 617
4.7 Voltage dips, fluctuations and short-term interruptions ............................................... 618
4.8 Damped vibration ........................................................................................................ 618
5. Mechanical conditions ...................................................................................................... 619
5.1 Vibration operation ...................................................................................................... 619
5.2 Vibration during transport (packaged) ......................................................................... 620
5.3 Shock during operation ............................................................................................... 620
5.4 Shock during transport (packaged) ............................................................................. 620

16 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table of contents

5.5 Toppling ....................................................................................................................... 620

5.6 Free fall (packaged) .................................................................................................... 621
6. Climate conditions ............................................................................................................ 622
6.1 Worst case operation .................................................................................................. 622
6.2 Dry heat ....................................................................................................................... 622
6.3 Dry cold ....................................................................................................................... 622
6.4 Large temperature fluctuations .................................................................................... 623
6.5 Temperature fluctuations in operation ......................................................................... 623
6.6 Humid heat, cyclic ....................................................................................................... 623
6.7 Humid heat, constant (storage) ................................................................................... 623
7. Safety ................................................................................................................................ 624
7.1 Ground resistance ....................................................................................................... 625
7.2 Insulation resistance .................................................................................................... 625
7.3 High voltage ................................................................................................................ 626
7.4 Residual voltage .......................................................................................................... 626
7.5 Leakage current .......................................................................................................... 626
7.6 Overload ...................................................................................................................... 627
7.7 Defective component ................................................................................................... 627
7.8 Voltage range .............................................................................................................. 627
8. Other tests ........................................................................................................................ 628
8.1 Protection type ............................................................................................................ 628
8.2 Degree of pollution ...................................................................................................... 628
9. SDL flex cable - test description ....................................................................................... 629
9.1 Torsion ........................................................................................................................ 629
9.1.1 Test structure ........................................................................................................ 629
9.1.2 Test conditions ...................................................................................................... 629
9.1.3 Individual tests ...................................................................................................... 629
9.2 Cable drag chain ......................................................................................................... 630
9.2.1 Test structure ........................................................................................................ 630
9.2.2 Test conditions ...................................................................................................... 630
9.2.3 Individual tests: ..................................................................................................... 630
10. International certifications ............................................................................................... 631

Chapter 6: Accessories ................................................................ 633

1. Overview ........................................................................................................................... 633
2. Supply voltage connector (TB103 3-pin) .......................................................................... 638
2.1 General information ..................................................................................................... 638
2.2 Order data ................................................................................................................... 638
2.3 Technical data ............................................................................................................. 638
3. X2X and CAN plugs (4-pin) .............................................................................................. 640
3.1 General information ..................................................................................................... 640
3.2 Order data ................................................................................................................... 640
3.3 Technical data ............................................................................................................. 640
4. Replacement CMOS batteries .......................................................................................... 641
4.1 Order data ................................................................................................................... 641
4.2 Technical data ............................................................................................................. 641

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 17

 Table of contents

5. Interface covers 5AC600.ICOV-00 ................................................................................... 643

5.1 Order data ................................................................................................................... 643
5.2 Contents of delivery ..................................................................................................... 643
6. DVI - monitor adapter 5AC900.1000-00 ........................................................................... 644
6.1 Order data ................................................................................................................... 644
7. CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-06 ........................................................................... 645
7.1 General information ..................................................................................................... 645
7.2 Order data ................................................................................................................... 645
7.3 Technical data ............................................................................................................. 646
7.3.1 Temperature humidity diagram ............................................................................. 648
7.4 Dimensions .................................................................................................................. 648
7.5 Benchmark .................................................................................................................. 649
8. CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 ............................................................................ 650
8.1 General information ..................................................................................................... 650
8.2 Order data ................................................................................................................... 650
8.3 Technical data ............................................................................................................. 651
8.3.1 Temperature humidity diagram ............................................................................. 653
8.4 Dimensions .................................................................................................................. 653
8.5 Benchmark .................................................................................................................. 654
9. CompactFlash cards - 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 .......................................................................... 655
9.1 General information ..................................................................................................... 655
9.2 Order data ................................................................................................................... 655
9.3 Technical data ............................................................................................................. 656
9.3.1 Temperature humidity diagram ............................................................................. 658
9.4 Dimensions .................................................................................................................. 658
10. CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02 .......................................................................... 659
10.1 General information ................................................................................................... 659
10.2 Order data ................................................................................................................. 659
10.3 Technical data ........................................................................................................... 659
10.4 Dimensions ................................................................................................................ 661
10.5 Calculating the lifespan ............................................................................................. 662
11. USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00 .............................................................................. 668
11.1 Features .................................................................................................................... 668
11.2 Technical data ........................................................................................................... 669
11.3 Dimensions ................................................................................................................ 671
11.4 Dimensions with front cover ...................................................................................... 672
11.5 Contents of delivery ................................................................................................... 672
11.6 Interfaces ................................................................................................................... 672
11.7 Installation ................................................................................................................. 673
11.7.1 Mounting orientation ........................................................................................... 673
11.8 Front cover 5A5003.03 for the USB Media Drive ...................................................... 673
11.8.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 673
11.8.2 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 674
11.8.3 Installation ........................................................................................................... 674
12. USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01 ............................................................................ 675
12.1 Features .................................................................................................................... 675
12.2 Technical data ........................................................................................................... 676

18 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table of contents

12.3 Dimensions ................................................................................................................ 678

12.4 Dimensions with front cover ...................................................................................... 679
12.5 Contents of delivery ................................................................................................... 679
12.6 Interfaces ................................................................................................................... 679
12.7 Installation ................................................................................................................. 680
12.7.1 Mounting orientation ........................................................................................... 680
12.8 Front cover 5A5003.03 for the USB Media Drive ...................................................... 680
12.8.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 680
12.8.2 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 681
12.8.3 Installation ........................................................................................................... 681
13. USB flash drive ............................................................................................................... 682
13.1 General information ................................................................................................... 682
13.2 Order data ................................................................................................................. 682
13.3 Technical data - 5MMUSB.xxxx-00 ........................................................................... 683
13.3.1 Temperature humidity diagram ........................................................................... 684
13.4 Technical data - 5MMUSB.2048-01 .......................................................................... 685
13.4.1 Temperature humidity diagram ........................................................................... 686
14. HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00 ............................................................... 687
15. Cables ............................................................................................................................. 692
15.1 APC620 internal supply cable 5CAMSC.0001-00 ..................................................... 692
15.1.1 Order data ........................................................................................................... 692
15.1.2 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 692
15.2 DVI cable 5CADVI.0xxx-00 ....................................................................................... 693
15.2.1 Order data ........................................................................................................... 693
15.2.2 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 694
15.2.3 Flex radius specification ...................................................................................... 694
15.2.4 Cable specifications ............................................................................................ 695
15.3 SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-00 ..................................................................................... 696
15.3.1 Order data ........................................................................................................... 696
15.3.2 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 697
15.3.3 Flex radius specification ...................................................................................... 697
15.3.4 Cable specifications ............................................................................................ 698
15.4 SDL cable with 45° plug 5CASDL.0xxx-01 ................................................................ 699
15.4.1 Order data ........................................................................................................... 699
15.4.2 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 700
15.4.3 Flex radius specification ...................................................................................... 700
15.4.4 Cable specifications ............................................................................................ 701
15.5 SDL cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-10 .............................................................. 702
15.5.1 Order data ........................................................................................................... 702
15.5.2 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 703
15.5.3 Flex radius specification ...................................................................................... 703
15.5.4 Cable connection ................................................................................................ 704
15.5.5 Cable specifications ............................................................................................ 705
15.6 SDL flex cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03 ............................................................................... 706
15.6.1 Order data ........................................................................................................... 706
15.6.2 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 707
15.6.3 Flex radius specification ...................................................................................... 708

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 19

 Table of contents

15.6.4 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 708

15.6.5 Structure ............................................................................................................. 709
15.6.6 Cable specifications ............................................................................................ 710
15.7 SDL flex cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-13 ........................................................ 711
15.7.1 Order data ........................................................................................................... 711
15.7.2 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 712
15.7.3 Flex radius specification ...................................................................................... 713
15.7.4 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 713
15.7.5 Cable connection ................................................................................................ 714
15.7.6 Cable specifications ............................................................................................ 715
15.8 RS232 cable 9A0014-xx ............................................................................................ 716
15.8.1 Order data ........................................................................................................... 716
15.8.2 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 716
15.8.3 Cable specifications ............................................................................................ 717
15.9 USB cable 5CAUSB.00xx-00 .................................................................................... 718
15.9.1 Order data ........................................................................................................... 718
15.9.2 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 718
15.9.3 Cable specifications ............................................................................................ 719
16. Uninterruptible power supply .......................................................................................... 720
16.1 Order data ................................................................................................................. 721
16.2 Features .................................................................................................................... 721
16.3 Requirements ............................................................................................................ 721
16.4 Individual components ............................................................................................... 724
16.4.1 Add-on UPS module 5AC600.UPSI-00 ............................................................... 724
16.4.2 Battery unit 5AC600.UPSB-00 ............................................................................ 726
16.4.3 UPS connection cable ......................................................................................... 730
17. External UPS .................................................................................................................. 731
17.1 General information ................................................................................................... 731
17.2 Order data ................................................................................................................. 732
18. PCI Ethernet cards ......................................................................................................... 733
18.1 PCI Ethernet card 10/100 - 5ACPCI.ETH1-01 .......................................................... 733
18.1.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 733
18.1.2 Driver support ..................................................................................................... 734
18.1.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 734
18.2 PCI Ethernet card 10/100 - 5ACPCI.ETH3-01 .......................................................... 735
18.2.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 735
18.2.2 Driver support ..................................................................................................... 736
18.2.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 736
19. Replacement fan ............................................................................................................. 737
20. SRAM module - 5AC600.SRAM-00 ................................................................................ 738
20.1 Technical data ........................................................................................................... 738
20.2 Driver support ............................................................................................................ 739
20.3 Installation ................................................................................................................. 740
21. Power supplies ............................................................................................................... 741
21.1 Model numbers and brief technical overview ............................................................ 742
21.1.1 Single-phase power supplies .............................................................................. 742
21.1.2 Three-phase power supplies ............................................................................... 742

20 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table of contents

Chapter 7: Maintenance / Servicing ............................................ 743

1. Changing the battery ........................................................................................................ 743
1.1 Battery status evaluation ............................................................................................. 744
1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................... 744
2. Changing the CompactFlash ............................................................................................ 746
3. Fan kit installation and replacement ................................................................................. 747
3.1 Procedure for APC620 with 1 PCI slot ........................................................................ 747
3.2 Procedure for APC620 with 2 PCI slot ........................................................................ 750
3.3 Procedure for APC620 with 3 PCI slot ........................................................................ 753
3.4 Procedure for APC620 with 5 PCI slot ........................................................................ 757
4. Slide-in drive - installation and exchange ......................................................................... 762
4.1 Installation procedure .................................................................................................. 762
4.2 Exchange procedure ................................................................................................... 763
5. Installing the UPS module ................................................................................................ 765
5.1 Automation PC 620 without add-on interface module ................................................. 765
5.1.1 APC620, 1 PCI slot ............................................................................................... 765
5.1.2 APC620, 2 PCI slot ............................................................................................... 768
5.1.3 APC620, 5 PCI slot ............................................................................................... 771
5.2 Automation PC 620 with add-on interface module ...................................................... 774
5.2.1 APC620, 1 PCI slot ............................................................................................... 774
5.2.2 APC620, 2 PCI slot ............................................................................................... 776
5.2.3 APC620, 5 PCI slot ............................................................................................... 778
6. Mounting the side cover .................................................................................................... 781
6.1 APC620 with 1 PCI slot ............................................................................................... 781
6.2 APC620 with 2 PCI slot ............................................................................................... 782
6.3 APC620 with 3 PCI slot ............................................................................................... 783
6.4 APC620 with 5 PCI slot ............................................................................................... 784
7. Exchanging a PCI SATA RAID hard disk ......................................................................... 785
8. Replacing the front cover .................................................................................................. 787
8.1 Variation A - Front cover screwed-in ........................................................................... 787
8.2 Variation B - Front cover attached without screws ...................................................... 789

Appendix A .................................................................................... 791

1. Temperature sensor locations .......................................................................................... 791
2. Connection of an external device to the main board ........................................................ 792
3. Maintenance Controller Extended (MTCX) ....................................................................... 793
3.1 SDL timing ................................................................................................................... 794
3.2 Temperature monitoring - Fan control ......................................................................... 796
4. B&R Key Editor information .............................................................................................. 797
5. B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit ................................................. 799
6. B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) .NET SDK ......................................................... 801
7. Glossary ............................................................................................................................ 803

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 21

 Table of contents

22 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Manual history

General information
Section 1
Chapter 1 • General information

Information:
B&R does its best to keep the printed versions of its user's manuals as current as
possible. However, any newer versions of the User's Manual can always be
downloaded in electronic form (pdf) from the B&R homepage www.br-
automation.com.

1. Manual history

Version Date Change

1.0 Preliminary 2004-07-21 - First version
1.1 Preliminary 2004-11-12 - Drilling templates for the APC620 1 and 2 PCI slot variations added.
- New overview images added for the APC620 1 and 2 PCI slot variations.
- New dimension diagrams added for the APC620 1 and 2 PCI slot variations.
- Model number overview revised.
- Interface descriptions added (behind the front cover).
- "Software" chapter has been updated.
- "Accessories" chapter has been updated.
- System unit with 5 PCI slots added.
- Technical data for all individual components was expanded.
1.2 Preliminary 2004-11-23 - Pictures of the interfaces from the front have been updated.
- General descriptions of device interfaces have been revised.
- New CPU boards and system units added.
- USB media device and fitting front cover added.
1.3 Preliminary 2004-12-27 - New column "My settings" (815E and 855GME BIOS) added to the BIOS profile settings table.
- Chapter 7 "Maintenance / Servicing", on page 609 updated.
- APC620 interface cover 5AC600.ICOV-00 updated (see section "Interface cover 5AC600.ICOV-
00", on page 528).
- Information for the maximum color depth for the CPU board added.
- Error correction in the BIOS description for Legacy Devices Com D, COM E, LPT.
1.4 Preliminary 2005-03-07 - Cover for the slide-in USB disk drive updated (see figure 65 "Slide-in USB FDD - 5AC600.FDDS-
00", on page 160).
- Chapter 4 (Software) updated for new BIOS versions. (815E BIOS Version 1.15, 855GME BIOS
Version V1.14).
- Fan kit (5PC600.HS05-00) for APC620 system with 5 PCI slots (see section "Fan kit 5 PCI -
5PC600.FA05-00", on page 203) and installation (see section 2.4 "Procedure for APC620 with 5 PCI
slot", on page 623) updated.
- Mounting orientations more precisely specified, see the "Commissioning" chapter, section 1.3
"Mounting orientation", on page 214.
- Temperature specifications for the 815E CPU boards added.
-Temperature specifications for the 855GME CPU boards added.

Table 1: Manual history

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 23

 General information • Manual history

Version Date Change

- Power management for the APC620 systems updated (see the section "Power management for
APC620 systems 1 and 2 PCI slots", on page 76).
- RAID System updated (see the section "RAID System", on page 172).
1.5 Preliminary 2005-03-16 - Temperature and performance table design changed.
- Mounting orientation more precisely specified.
1.6 Preliminary 2005-07-04 - System unit weights added.
- Add-on interface cards CAN (5AC600.CANI-00) and RS232/422/485 (5AC600.485I-00) added.
- Model numbers for Microsoft Windows XP Embedded with SP2 added.
- Cables (DVI, SDL, USB, RS232) added to accessories chapter.
- AP Link cards added.
- Slide-in CF 2-slot 5AC600.CFSS-00 added.
- Configuration and selection guide for APC620 systems added (see chapter "Technical data",
section 1.2 "Structure / configuration", on page 44).
- Key Editor brief info section added (see Appendix A, "B&R Key Editor Information" section on
page 658).
- Automation Device Interface (ADI), Control Center, and Development Kit: brief info section added
(see "Software" chapter, from page 486).
- Information added: battery compartment, real-time clock (RTC).
- Temperature sensor locations for APC620 devices added (see Appendix A, "Temperature sensor
positions" section, on page 653).
- Ambient temperatures for PM 1600 (5PC600.E855-01) and PM 1800 (5PC600.E855-03) added.
- "Appendix A" chapter updated.
- Real-time clock (RTC) specifications about the system unit added.
- Index modifications.
1.70 2006-03-08 - Conductor cross section and AWG change for the supply plug.
- Meaning of standard and 24-hour hard disk operation specified more precisely.
- Procedure for creating a bootable USB flash drive (see section "Creating a bootable USB flash
drive", on page 568).
- Slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW drive 5AC600.DVRS-00 updated (see section "Slide-in DVD-
R/RW, DVD+R/RW - 5AC600.DVRS-00", on page 153).
- Maintenance Controller Extended (MTCX) information added (see the section "Maintenance
Controller Extended (MTCX)", on page 655).
- Technical data about the SDL cable (flex radius, AWG) modified due to new specifications.
- Information about general tolerances according to DIN ISO 2768 medium added to dimension
diagrams.
- BIOS distribution of resources added (see section "Resource distribution", on page 437).
- Testing conditions added for the determined ambient temperature specifications.
- Slide-in drive installation and exchange description updated (see the section "Slide-in drive
installation and exchange", on page 628).
- 5CAMSC.0001-00 cable for connecting external devices updated (see the section "APC620
internal supply cable 5CAMSC.0001-00", on page 574).
- Information about connecting an external device updated (see the section "Connection of an
external device to the main board", on page 654).
- Filter clasp information added for the fan kits for 2 and 5 PCI system units.
- Safety guidelines revised (EBG information).
- Supply voltage fuse (type change to "non self healing").
- Environmental temperature adjustments for systems with 815E and 855GME CPU boards
(temperature limits for slide-in DVD-R/RW and 24-hour hard disk).
- Firmware upgrade information updated (see the section "Firmware upgrade", on page 453).
- Intel 815E CPU boards (5PC600.E815-0x) canceled.
- BIOS function "Max CPU frequency" described.
- Description of the SDL timing for communication between display unit and MTCX added (see the
section "SDL timing", page 656).
- APC620 with 5 PCI slots with orange front cover (previously light gray) - photos modified.
- Information about changing the battery revised (see the section "Changing the battery", on
page 609).
- Pin assignments for the monitor / panel plug and the optional AP Link plug-in card added.
- Important information added for installation of the touch screen driver (located under Software

Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

24 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Manual history

Version Date Change

General information
- Touch screen driver installation).

Section 1
- 1 GB flash drive (5MMUSB.1024-00) added (128 MB - 5MMUSB.0128-00 cancelled).
- Silicon Systems CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 updated (see the section "USB flash drive
5MMUSB.0xxx-00", on page 564).
- Serial number sticker information updated (see the section "Serial number sticker", on page 119).
- Additional technical data about the PCI bus added.
- A general device interface photo (version with 5 PCI slots) added (see the section "Device
interfaces", on page 90).
- Information about the minimum ambient temperature added (component-dependent).
- Block diagrams of entire device for all system units with 855GME CPU boards added.
- SDL cable with 45° plug 5CASDL.0018-01, 5CASDL.0050-01, 5CASDL.0100-01, 5CASDL.0150-
01 added (see the section "SDL cable with 45° plug 5CASDL.0xxx-01", on page 578.
- SDL cable with extender 5CASD.0300-10 and 5CASDL.0400-10 added (see the section "SDL
cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-10", on page 581).
- System unit support for buffering (10 ms) with Automation Runtime added (see the section
"Automation PC 620 with Automation Runtime", on page 461).
- Explanation of terminology added in the form of a glossary (see the "Glossary" section, on
page 662).
- "855GME (ETX) BIOS description" section on page 325 adapted to BIOS version 1.21.
- "Firmware upgrade" section on page 453 adapted to the APC620 / Panel PC Firmware upgrade
(MTCX, SDLR, SDLT) version 1.13.
- Humidity table according to the individual components added (see the "Humidity specifications"
section, on page 89.)
- Information about starting current added.
- Section Automation PC 620 with Windows CE (9S0001.29-020) updated (see section "Automation
PC 620 with Windows CE", on page 483).
- New chapter "Standards and specifications", on page 497" updated.
- Known problems using MS-DOS added (see the "Known problems" section, on page 462).
- Automation Panel 900 connection examples expanded (see "Automation Panel 900 connection
examples" on page 194).
- Technical data table for all device versions (1, 2 and 5 PCI slots) added.
- Progress information about the BIOS boot procedure added.
- Topic "Power options and touch screen" added.
1.80 2006-04-21 - Corrections to chapter "Standards and Certifications".
- The footnote "Depending on the process or batch, there may be visual deviations in the color and
surface structure." was added for housing and color specifications.
- PCI RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIS-01 (60 GB) added.
- Information regarding the new 512 MB and 1 GB SanDisk Cruzer Micro flash drives added.
- Temperature specifications for the PCI RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIS-00 added.
- HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00 added.
1.90 2006-08-29 - Corrections to chapter "Standards and Certifications" - section "Emission requirements" -
standards were listed twice.
- The manual history has been corrected.
- Vibration values were switched for 'continuous' and 'occasional' operation.
- "Cable connections" section on page 223 (flex radius) updated.
- Name change for CompactFlash short text.
- Name change of chapter "Installation" to "Commissioning".
- Restructuring of section "Automation Panel 900 - connection examples" - it is now located in
chapter "Commissioning".
- BIOS postcode messages added.
- USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00 added.
- New technical data added for slide-in drive 5AC600.DVRS-00 revision D0 and later.
- New image for PCI routing.
- List of delivery contents removed for some components (e.g. cable).
- Vibration and shock values changed for the PCI RAID controller hard discs.

Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 25

 General information • Manual history

Version Date Change

2.00 2006-12-13 - New configuration diagrams for Automation Panel 900 connection examples (USB information
added).
- Panel locking time information modified.
- New model number for the APC620 documentation MAAPC620-ENG
- Nominal current specification for 1, 2 and 5 PCI systems added.
- Font symbol assigned to the character format symbol.
- Description of the BIOS function "Legacy USB Support" updated.
- Information about Ethernet cable length support for ETH1 added.
- Name modifications
SDLT FPGA: from "Firmware on the AP Link SDL transceiver" to "SDLT FPGA Firmware on the
AP Link SDL transmitter".
SDLR FPGA: from "Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver" to "Firmware on the AP Link SDL
receiver and transceiver"
- USB flash drive 2 GB SanDisk 5MMUSB.2048-00 added.
- PCI SATA RAID controller 5ACPCI.RAIC-01 added (adjustment made to the ambient temperature
determination with 855GME boards).
- Add-on hard disk 40 GB ET, 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDI-05 added (adjustment made to the ambient
temperature determination with 855GME boards).
- Slide-in hard disk 40 GB ET, 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDS-02 added (adjustment made to the ambient
temperature determination with 855GME boards).
2.10 2007-01-23 - New dimension diagram for the APC620 1 PCI variant with add-on UPS module (see the section 6
"APC620 1 PCI slot variant dimensions", on page 52) updated.
- New dimension diagram for the APC620 2 PCI variant with add-on UPS module (see the section 9
"APC620 2 PCI slot variant dimensions", on page 57) updated.
- New dimension diagram for the APC620 5 PCI variant with add-on UPS module (see the section
15 "APC620 5 PCI slot variant dimensions", on page 67) updated.
- SDL cable flex 5CASDL.0xxx-03 added (see section "SDL cable flex 5CASDL.0xxx-03", on
page 584).
- SDL cable flex with extender 5CASDL.0xxx-13 added (see the section "SDL cable with extender
5CASDL.0x00-13", on page 588).
8 GB CompactFlash card 5CFCRD.8192-03 added.
- 5A5003.03 front cover description added to the 5MD900.USB2-00 and 5M900.USB2-01 product
descriptions.
- Document now includes the chm tag "Filename".
- New Windows CE 5.0 model numbers added.
- APC620 UPS model numbers added (UPS module, battery, cable).
- APC620 overview images updated (with slot for UPS add-on module).
- Descriptions of interfaces updated to include slot for add-on UPS module (see "Add-on UPS
module slot", on page 106).
- SATA RAID description updated (new image + new footnote for vibration and shock data
(performance problems) + known limitations).
- Figure "Selection guide - Optional components", on page 46 updated.
2.10 2007-01-22 - Graphics in the section "Power management for APC620 systems 1 and 2 PCI slots", on page 76
and "Power management for APC620 systems 5 PCI slots", on page 83 updated (add-on UPS
module).
- Status LED description on page 109 updated (battery operation).
- Section "Firmware upgrade", on page 453 updated (new APC620 / Panel PC Firmware upgrade
V1.16).
- Section "B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center" moved from "Appendix
A" to chapter 4 "Software" (see page 486).
- Configuration of UPS with B&R Control Center added (see the "UPS configuration" section on
page 488).
2.20 2007-02-12 - Figure "ADI Control Center UPS settings", on page 488 updated.

Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

26 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Manual history

Version Date Change

General information
2.30 2007-09-10 - USB Memory Sticks 256 MB (5MMUSB.0256-00) and 1 GB (5MMUSB.1024-00) cancelled.

Section 1
- UPS module + accessories short descriptions changed (page 47).
Description of UPS configuration revised beginning on page 599.
- Section "SDL flex cable - test description", on page 629 expanded (cable drag chain and torsion
test).
- Section "USB flash drive", on page 682 updated.
- General information in section "Automation PC 620 with Automation Runtime", on page 564
updated.
- Section "Automation Panel 900 connection examples" changed to "Connection examples" and
expanded to include Automation Panel 800 connection examples
- Section "Grounding concept", on page 307 added
- Section "Configuration of a SATA RAID array", on page 351 added
- Section "B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center", on page 595 updated
(screenshots, UL compliant operation)
- Section "Uninterruptible power supply", on page 720 updated (description, technical data,
temperature lifespan diagram up to 20% battery capacity, deep discharge cycles added).
- New model numbers for Windows CE and Windows XPe expanded.
- Section "Automation PC 620 with Windows XP embedded", on page 584 updated.
. System unit 5PC600.SF03-00 expanded.
- Fan kit 5PC600.FA03-00 expanded.
- Replacement fan filters 5AC600.FA01-00, 5AC600.FA02-00, 5AC600.FA03-00, 5AC600.FA05-00
(see section "Replacement fan", on page 737) updated.
- Maintenance interval information for the UPS battery (5AC600.UPSB-00) updated.
- 855GME CPU board 5PC600.E855-05 (1 GHz Celeron) L2 cache entry changed from 1MB to 512
kB.
- Standard Full-size PCI card size expanded (see section "PCI slots", on page 147).
- The optional UPS module added to all block diagrams for the entire device (see Section "Block
diagram", on page 165).
- Drilling template for 5PC600.SF03-00 expanded (see section "Drilling templates", on page 294).
- 815E CPU boards BIOS description updated to version 1.23 (see "Software" chapter, section
"815E (ETX) BIOS description", on page 371).
- 855GME CPU boards BIOS description updated to version 1.26 (see "Software" chapter, section
"855GME (ETX) BIOS description", on page 425).
- Name change from 815E to 815E (ETX) and 855GME to 855GME (ETX).
- CPU boards 855GME (XTX) model numbers expanded (see Section "CPU boards 855GME
(XTX)", on page 39).
- Safety guidelines updated to include "Environmental conditions - dust, humidity, aggressive
gases", on page 34.
- 855GME (XTX) CPU boards (BIOS Version 1.14) BIOS description updated (see "Software"
chapter, section 1.3 "855GME (XTX) BIOS description", on page 481).
- Add-On UPS module pin assignments and UPS battery unit updated (see Section "Uninterruptible
power supply", on page 720).
- UPS battery unit deep discharge cycle diagram updated (see image 374 "Deep discharge cycles",
on page 727).
- SRAM module 5AC600.SRAM-00 added (see section "SRAM module - 5AC600.SRAM-00", on
page 738).
- Battery and real-time clock entries (RTC) revised.
- Power consumption values adjusted in the revision of the system units.
- Number added to information on interface numbering.

Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 27

 General information • Manual history

Version Date Change

2.40 2008-02-25 - CAN interface description added.
- Ethernet interface description added.
- Description of the "Advanced USB Configuration USB" for 855GME (XTX) changed.
- Replacement SATA RAID HDD 5PCPCI.RAIC-02 (see section "Replacement SATA HDD 60 GB -
5ACPCI.RAIC-02", on page 256) + instructions for exchanging added.
- 855GME (XTX) BIOS description adjusted to the BIOS version 1.16.
- Vibration and shock data for the complete devices revised.
- Possible upgrade problems and version dependencies updated (see page 528).
- DVI / SDL cable descriptions revised.
- Color specifications of the orange front doors changed from Pantone 151CV to Pantone 144CV.
- Additions to the address and data register for the CAN add-on interface (5AC600.CANI-00)
- Section "Power management for APC620 system units" revised.
- "SRAM module - 5AC600.SRAM-00", on page 738 description updated.
- Information about voltage and temperature indicators in BIOS Setup and ADI Control Center pages
added.
- Text change from "Compact Flash" to "CompactFlash".
- Automation PC 620 embedded devices 5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and 5PC600.SE00-
02 added
- Section "Heat sink", on page 185 revised.
- Block diagram with system unit 5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and 5PC600.SE00-02 added.
- Section "Compatibility / improvement from 855GME (XTX) to 855GME (ETX)", on page 368 added
- Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-06 added (see section "Add-on hard disk 80 GB 24x7 ET -
5AC600.HDDI-06", on page 213).
- Technical data for the hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-05 updated due to Revision D0.
- Technical data for the hard disk 5AC600.HDDS-02 updated due to Revision D0.
- PCI SATA RAID 2 x 160 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-03 (see the section "PCI SATA RAID 2 x 160 GB 24x7
ET - 5ACPCI.RAIC-03", on page 259) added.
- Replacement SATA HDD 160 GB 5ACPCI.RAIC-04 added (see the section "Replacement SATA
HDD 160 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-04", on page 264).
- The section 5 "Configuration of a SATA RAID array" in the 3 "Commissioning" chapter updated.
- The section 7 "Exchanging a PCI SATA RAID hard disk" in the 7 "Maintenance / Servicing" chapter
updated.
2.41 2008-08-11 - Revision of the AP900 connection examples (cable selection tables) in Chapter 3.
- APC620e and APC620f for UPS support expanded.
- Compatibility note in which the Bosch CC770 CAN controller supplements Intels 82527 for the add-
on CAN interface 5AC600.CANI-00.
- Description edited for operating the add-on RS232/422/485 interface module 5AC600.485I-00 as
an RS485 interface.
- New Windows XP Pro version with SP3 - 5SWWXP.0600-DEU (German), 5SWWXP.0600-ENG
(English) and 5SWWXP.0600-MUL (Multi-language) added.
- Manual updated to include Section "Replacing the front cover", on page 787.
- User serial ID description expanded.
- Graphic 5 "Selection guide - APC620 optional components with 1, 2, 3, and 5 PCI slots" adjusted
(cancelled products removed).
- B&R power supplies updated (see Section "Power supplies", on page 741).
- PCI Ethernet cards 5ACPCI.ETH1-01 and 5ACPCI.ETH3-01 added (see Section 733).
- Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-02, 5AC600.HDDI-03 and
5AC600.HDDI-06 expanded.
- Section "Connection of USB peripheral devices", on page 359 added
- Section "Visual Components graphic engine support", on page 565 added
- Graphic "Ambient temperatures for systems with an 855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX)", on page 93
updated to include the APC620e system units 5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and
5PC600.SE00-02.

Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

28 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Manual history

Version Date Change

General information
2.50 2009-04-23 - Footnotes in section 4.3 "An Automation Panel 900 via SDL (onboard)" - "Cable lengths and

Section 1
resolutions for SDL transfer", on page 315 added.
- ADI driver description -> Windows 2000 removed and Automation Panel 800 added.
- Information regarding SATA HDD exchange added.
- Information "Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages" added.
- Temperature humidity diagram for 5AC600.CDXS-00 corrected.
- Section 6 "Typical topologies", on page 51 in chapter 1 "General information" added.
- 5ACPCI.RAIC-00 cancelled.
- Fan control information expanded in Appendix A, section 3.2 "Temperature monitoring - Fan
control", on page 796.
- External UPS added to accessories - see section 17 "External UPS", on page 731.
- B&R Key Editor information updated.
- ADI Development Kit information updated.
- Section 2.7 "Environmentally-friendly disposal" in chapter 1 "General information" added.
- Image of Silicon Systems CF card changed.
- Contents of delivery for USB flash drives removed.
- 0TB704.91 and 0TB704.9 added in Chapter 6 "Accessories".
- Information about the BIOS setting in the connection examples with an AP900 via SDL (onboard)
changed.
- Information about firmware upgrade updated.
- WinCE features updated.
- Temperature humidity diagram for USB flash drive corrected.
- B&R CompactFlash card added.
- Technical data for Silicon Systems CFs revised.
- PCI routing for APC620e added to Chapter 4 "Software".
- Maximum ambient temperature for APC620 embedded added.
- Section "Installation on PCI SATA RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-03, 5ACPCI.RAIC-05", on
page 569 added

Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 29

 General information • Manual history

Version Date Change

2.60 2010-08-24 - Model number text for the CPU board 5PC600.E855-05 corrected.
- Processor architecture for the CPU boards 5PC600.E855-02, 5PC600.E855-03, 5PC600.X855-02
and 5PC600.X855-03 corrected.
- CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02 moved to page 659.
- Section "Installation on PCI SATA RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-03, 5ACPCI.RAIC-05", on
page 569 added
- Graphic resolutions for the CPU boards added to the technical data.
- Text change from "Compact Flash" to "CompactFlash" (in the images).
- Table 338 "RAM address assignment", on page 539 corrected. - 6. Line - "0D0000h - 0CFFFFh
VGA BIOS available." changed to "0D0000h - 0DFFFFh available.".
- Text change from "Ethernet POWERLINK" to "POWERLINK".
- WinXP Pro SP 2c (5SWWXP.0500-DEU, 5SWWXP.0500-ENG, 5SWWXP.0500-MUL) updated.
- WinCE Pro 6.0 (5SWWCE.0812-ENG, 5SWWCE.0813-ENG) updated.
- Sections 8.3 "Windows CE 6.0 features", on page 593 and 8.4 "Differences between Windows CE
6.0 and Windows CE 5.0", on page 593 updated.
- Table 29 "Overview of humidity specifications for individual components", on page 119 updated.
- BIOS default settings for "I/O Device Configuration", on page 476 and "Boot", on page 480
corrected.
- Height of the APC620 embedded heat sink corrected.
- Section 2 "Upgrade information", on page 547 added
- The section "Creating a bootable USB flash drive" removed.
- Info text for B&R CompactFlash cards updated.
- Section 9 "Known problems / issues", on page 369 added
- Information in section 1 "Temperature sensor locations", on page 791 expanded.
- Table 342 "IRQ interrupt assignments in APIC mode", on page 542 corrected.
- CompactFlash card 5CFCRD.016G-04 added.
- Section "Automation PC 620 with BIOS" in Chapter 4 "Software" changed to "BIOS Options".
- Section 7 "Automation PC 620 with Windows Embedded Standard 2009", on page 588 added
- Section 9 "B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center", on page 595 updated.
- Chapter 5 "Standards and certifications", on page 609 updated.
- B&R USB flash drive added to the chapter 6 "Accessories" on page 685.
- B&R ID codes for system units added.
- 855GME (ETX) BIOS decription V1.26 updated to V1.30, see page 425 - the actions "Save
Optimized Defaults" and "Load Optimized Defaults" were added to the menu item "Exit".
- Technical data "Remanent variables for AR (Automation Runtime) in Power Fail Mode" added for
the APC620 embedded system units and for the SRAM module 5AC600.SRAM-00.
2.61 2011-01-27 - The appellation „AR010“ was changed to „ARwin“.
- The appellation „AR106“ was changed to „ARemb“.
2.62 2011-03-03 - Technical Data of the system unit 5PC600.SE00-01 was changed - the Monitor / Panel interface is
a DVI-A female connector.
2.63 2011-06-15 - "Power calculation with 5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and 5PC600.SE00-02", on page 118
added.
- Sections
"B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center", on page 595,
"HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00", on page 687,
"B&R Key Editor information", on page 797
and "B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit", on page 799 updated.
- Section "B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) .NET SDK", on page 801 added.
- Table "Starting currents in the voltage supply to the system units", on page 136 and table "System
unit revisions for any turn-off times", on page 137 updated to include the APC620e system units
5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and 5PC600.SE00-02.

Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

30 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Manual history

Version Date Change

General information
2.64 2011-07-28 - „Information:“ to installation in section "Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional", on

Section 1
page 568 added.
- Tableentra „typ. recharge time at low battery“ in table 453 "Technical data - 5AC600.UPSB-00", on
page 726 added.
- Referring to external UPS 24 VDC in Section "Uninterruptible power supply", on page 720 added.
- Sections "B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center", on page 595, "B&R
Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit", on page 799 and "B&R Automation Device
Interface (ADI) .NET SDK", on page 801 added.
- "PCI SATA RAID 2 x 250 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-05", on page 267 and "Replacement SATA HDD 250
GB - 5MMHDD.0250-00", on page 271 added
- Section "Changing the CompactFlash", on page 746 added.
- 5ACPCI.RAIC-05 added in figure "Ambient temperatures for systems with an 855GME CPU board
(ETX / XTX)", on page 94, in figure 5 "Selection guide - APC620 optional components with 1, 2, 3,
and 5 PCI slots", on page 57 in table 29 "Overview of humidity specifications for individual
components", on page 119 and in headline "Installation on PCI SATA RAID controller -
5ACPCI.RAIC-03, 5ACPCI.RAIC-05", on page 569.
2.65 2012-12-06 - Ambient temperature for charging mode added to the technical data for the 5AC600.UPSB-00 bat-
tery unit, see "Battery unit 5AC600.UPSB-00", on page 726.
- The add-on SSD drive "Add-on Solid State Drive 128 GB 24x7 ET - 5AC600.SSDI-00", on
page 187 was added.
2.66 2013-04-25 - Replacement SSD drive "Replacement Solid State Drive 128 GB 24x7 ET - 5MMSSD.0128-00",
on page 191 was added.
- For "Add-on Solid State Drive 128 GB 24x7 ET - 5AC600.SSDI-00", on page 187, revision D was
added.
- The "CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-06", on page 645 were added.
- Section "General instructions for performing temperature tests", on page 362 was added.
2.68 2015-05-07 - The revision E0 was added at the "Add-on Solid State Drive 128 GB 24x7 ET - 5AC600.SSDI-00",
on page 187.
- The revision E0 was added at the "Replacement Solid State Drive 128 GB 24x7 ET -
5MMSSD.0128-00", on page 191.
- Section "Ground", on page 136 and "Grounding concept", on page 307 updated.
- Added information about the discontinuation of support for the OS "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 31

 General information • Safety notices

2. Safety notices

2.1 Intended use

Programmable logic controllers (PLCs), operating and monitoring devices (industrial PCs, Power
Panels, Mobile Panels, etc.), and B&R uninterruptible power supplies have been designed,
developed, and manufactured for conventional use in industry. They were not designed,
developed, and manufactured for any use involving serious risks or hazards that could lead to
death, injury, serious physical damage, or loss of any kind without the implementation of
exceptionally stringent safety precautions. In particular, such risks and hazards include the use
of these devices to monitor nuclear reactions in nuclear power plants, as well as flight control
systems, flight safety, the control of mass transit systems, medical life support systems and the
control of weapons systems.

2.2 Protection against electrostatic discharges

Electrical components that are vulnerable to electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be handled
accordingly.

2.2.1 Packaging

• Electrical components with housing

… do not require special ESD packaging, but must be handled properly
(see "Electrical components with housing").
• Electrical components without housing
… must be protected by ESD-suitable packaging.

2.2.2 Guidelines for proper ESD handling

Electrical components with housing

• Do not touch the connector contacts on connected cables.

• Do not touch the contact tips on the circuit boards.

Electrical components without housing

The following is valid in addition to "Electrical components with housing"

• Any persons handling electrical components or devices that will be installed in the
electrical components must be grounded.
• Components can only be touched on the small sides or on the front plate.
• Components should always be stored in a suitable medium (ESD packaging, conductive
foam, etc.).
Metallic surfaces are not suitable storage surfaces!

32 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Safety notices

• Electrostatic discharges should be avoided on the components (e.g. through charged

General information
plastics).

Section 1
• A minimum distance of 10 cm must be kept from monitors and TV sets.
• Measurement devices and equipment must be grounded.
• Measurement probes on potential-free measurement devices must be discharged on
sufficiently grounded surfaces before taking measurements.

Individual components

• ESD protective measures for individual components are thoroughly integrated at B&R
(conductive floors, footwear, arm bands, etc.).
The increased ESD protective measures for individual components are not necessary for our
customers for handling B&R products.

2.3 Policy and procedures

Electronic devices are generally not failsafe. In the event of a failure on the programmable
control system operating or monitoring device, or uninterruptible power supply, the user is
responsible for ensuring that other devices that may be connected, e.g. motors, are in a secure
state.

Both when using programmable logic controllers and when using operating and monitoring
devices as control systems in conjunction with a soft PLC (e.g. B&R Automation Runtime or
comparable products) or a slot PLC (e.g. B&R LS251 or comparable products), the safety
precautions applying to industrial control systems (e.g. the provision of safety devices such as
emergency stop circuits, etc.) must be observed in accordance with applicable national and
international regulations. The same applies for all other devices connected to the system, such
as drives.

All tasks such as installation, commissioning, and maintenance are only permitted to be carried
out by qualified personnel. Qualified personnel are persons familiar with transport, ounting,
installation, commissioning, and operation of the product who also have the respective
qualifications (e.g. IEC 60364). National accident prevention guidelines must be followed.
The safety guidelines, connection descriptions (type plate and documentation), and limit values
listed in the technical data are to be read carefully before installation and commissioning and
must be observed.

2.4 Transport and storage

During transport and storage, devices must be protected from excessive stress (mechanical
load, temperature, humidity, aggressive atmospheres, etc.).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 33

 General information • Safety notices

2.5 Installation

• Installation must take place according to the documentation, using suitable equipment
and tools.
• Devices must be installed without voltage applied and by qualified personnel.
• General safety regulations and nationally applicable accident prevention guidelines must
be observed.
• Electrical installation must be carried out according to the relevant guidelines (e.g. line
cross section, fuse, protective ground connection).

2.6 Operation

2.6.1 Protection against touching electrical parts

To operate programmable logic controllers, operating and monitoring devices or uninterruptible

power supplies, certain components must carry dangerous voltage levels of over 42 VDC. A life-
threatening electrical shock could occur if you come into contact with these parts. This could
result in death, severe injury or material damage.

Before turning on the programmable logic controller, the operating and monitoring devices and
the uninterruptible power supply, ensure that the housing is properly grounded (PE rail). The
ground connection must be established when testing the operating and monitoring devices or
the uninterruptible power supply, even when operating them for only a short time.

Before turning the device on, make sure that all parts with voltage applied are securely covered.
During operation, all covers must remain closed.

2.6.2 Environmental conditions - dust, humidity, aggressive gases

Use of operating and monitoring devices (e.g. industrial PCs, power panels, mobile panels, etc.)
and uninterruptible power supplies in very dusty environments should be avoided. Dust
collection on the devices influences their function and, especially in systems with active cooling
(fans), sufficient cooling cannot be guaranteed.

The presence of aggressive gases in the environment can also lead to malfunctions. When
combined with high temperature and humidity, aggressive gases - e.g. with sulfur, nitrogen and
chlorine components - start chemical processes that can damage electronic components very
quickly. Signs of the presence of aggressive gases are blackened copper surfaces and cable
ends on existing installations.

For operation in dusty or humid conditions, correctly installed (cutout installation) operating and
monitoring devices like Automation Panel or Power Panel are protected on the front side. The
rear side of all devices must be protected from dust and humidity and must be cleaned at suitable
intervals.

34 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Safety notices

2.6.3 Programs, viruses, and dangerous programs

General information
Section 1
The system is subject to potential danger each time data is exchanged or software is installed
from a data medium (e.g. diskette, CD-ROM, USB flash drive, etc.), a network connection, or the
Internet. The user is responsible for assessing these dangers, implementing preventative
measures such as virus protection programs, firewalls, etc. and obtaining software from reliable
sources.

2.7 Environmentally-friendly disposal

All B&R programmable controllers, operating and monitoring devices, and uninterruptible power
supplies are designed to inflict as little harm on the environment as possible.

2.7.1 Separation of materials

It is necessary to separate different materials so the device can undergo an environmentally-

friendly recycling process.

. Component Disposal
Programmable logic controllers Electronics recycling
Operating and monitoring devices
Uninterruptible power supply
Cables
Cardboard box / paper packaging Paper / cardboard recycling
Plastic packaging Plastic recycling

Table 2: Environmentally-friendly separation of materials

Disposal must comply with the respective legal regulations.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 35

 General information • Organization of safety notices

3. Organization of safety notices

The safety notices in this manual are organized as follows:

Safety notice Description

Danger! Disregarding the safety regulations and guidelines can be life-threatening.
Caution! Disregarding the safety regulations and guidelines can result in severe injury or major damage to material.
Warning! Disregarding the safety regulations and guidelines can result in injury or damage to material.
Information: Important information for preventing errors.

Table 3: Organization of safety notices

4. Directives

E
European dimension standards apply to all dimensions (e.g. dimension
diagrams, etc.).

36 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Model numbers

5. Model numbers

General information
Section 1
5.1 System units

Model number Short description Note

5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI
APC620 system unit 1 half size PCI slot, connection for 2 x RS232, 2 x USB 2.0,
See page 60
Short Display Link, 2 x ETH 10/100, AC97 sound, PS/2 keyboard/mouse; UPS module1) ;
24 VDC (order 0TB103.9 screw clamp or 0TB103.91 cage clamp terminals separately).
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot
APC620 system unit 2 half size PCI slots, 1 drive slot, 1 slot for Automation Panel link
transmitter; connections for 2 x RS232, 2 x USB 2.0, Short Display Link, 2 x ETH 10/100, See page 66
AC97 sound, PS/2 keyboard/mouse, UPS module2) ;
24 VDC (order 0TB103.9 screw clamp or 0TB103.91 cage clamp terminals separately).
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot
APC620 system unit 2 half size PCI slots, 1 drive slot; connections for 2 x RS232, 2 x USB
See page 66
2.0, Short Display Link, 2 x ETH 10/100, AC97 sound, PS/2 keyboard/mouse, UPS module1)
; 24 VDC (0TB103.9 screw clamp or 0TB103.91 cage clamp sold separately).
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive, 1 AP Link slot
APC620 system unit, 3 full-size PCI slots; 1 slot for Automation Panel link transmitter; 1 drive
slot; Smart Display Link / DVI / monitor, connections for 2 x RS232, 2 x USB 2.0, 2 x ETH See page 72
10/100, AC97 sound, PS/2 keyboard/mouse; 24 VDC (0TB103.9 screw clamp or 0TB103.91
cage clamp sold separately).
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot
APC620 system unit 5 half size PCI slots, 2 drive slot; 1 slot for Automation Panel Link
Transmitter; connections for 2 x RS232, 2 x USB 2.0, Short Display Link, 2 x ETH 10/100, See page 77
AC97 sound, PS/2 keyboard/mouse, UPS module3) ; 24 VDC (0TB103.9 screw clamp or
0TB103.91 cage clamp sold separately).
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots
APC620 system unit 5 half size PCI slots, 2 drive slots; connections for 2 x RS232, 2 x USB
See page 77
2.0, Short Display Link, 2 x ETH 10/100, AC97 sound, PS/2 keyboard/mouse, UPS module3)
; 24 VDC (0TB103.9 screw clamp or 0TB103.91 cage clamp sold separately).
5PC600.SE00-00 APC620e System SDL EPL X2X CAN 512kB
APC620 embedded system unit, connections for 2x RS232, 4x USB 2.0, Smart Display Link,
See page 83
1x ETH 10/100, 1x POWERLINK, 1x CAN, 1x X2X, UPS module, 512kB SRAM; (0TB103.9
screw clamp or 0TB103.91 cage clamp sold separately).
5PC600.SE00-01 APC620e System CRT EPL X2X CAN 512KB
APC620 embedded system unit, connections for 2x RS232, 4x USB 2.0, CRT, 1x ETH
See page 83
10/100, 1x POWERLINK, 1x CAN, 1x X2X, UPS module, 512kB SRAM; (0TB103.9 screw
clamp or 0TB103.91 cage clamp sold separately).
5PC600.SE00-02 APC620e System SDL EPL X2X CAN 1MB
APC620 embedded system unit, connections for 2x RS232, 4x USB 2.0, Smart Display Link,
See page 83
1x ETH 10/100, 1x POWERLINK, 1x CAN, 1x X2X, UPS module, 1MB SRAM; (0TB103.9
screw clamp or 0TB103.91 cage clamp sold separately).

Table 4: Model numbers - system units

1) Slot only available on system units with revision H0 or later.

2) Slot only available on system units with revision G0 or later.
3) Slot only available on system units with revision F0 or later.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 37

 General information • Model numbers

5.2 CPU boards 815E (ETX)

Model number Short description Note

5PC600.E815-00 CPU board 815E C3-400
CPU board Intel Celeron 3, 400 MHz, 100 MHz FSB, 256 kB L2 cache, 815E chipset; 1 socket
for SO-DIMM SDRAM module.
Cancelled since 10/2005
5PC600.E815-02 CPU board 815E C3-733 Replaced by 855GME (ETX /
CPU board Intel Celeron 3, 733 MHz, 133 MHz FSB, 256 kB L2 cache, 815E chipset; 1 socket XTX) CPU boards

for SO-DIMM SDRAM module.

See page 179
5PC600.E815-03 CPU board 815E C3-1000
CPU board Intel Celeron 3, 1000 MHz, 133 MHz FSB, 256 kB L2 cache, 815E chipset;
1 socket for SO-DIMM SDRAM module.

Table 5: Model numbers - 815E (ETX) CPU boards

5.3 CPU boards 855GME (ETX)

Model number Short description Note

5PC600.E855-00 CPU board 855GME PM-1100
CPU board Intel Pentium M, 1100 MHz, 400 MHz FSB, 1 MB L2 cache; 855GME chipset; See page 181
1 socket for SO-DIMM DDR RAM module.
5PC600.E855-01 CPU board 855GME PM-1600
CPU board Intel Pentium M, 1600 MHz, 400 MHz FSB, 1 MB L2 cache; 855GME chipset; See page 181
1 socket for SO-DIMM DDR RAM module.
5PC600.E855-02 CPU board 855GME PM-1400
CPU board Intel Pentium M, 1400 MHz, 400 MHz FSB, 2 MB L2 cache; 855GME chipset; See page 181
1 socket for SO-DIMM DDR RAM module.
5PC600.E855-03 CPU board 855GME PM-1800
CPU board Intel Pentium M, 1800 MHz, 400 MHz FSB, 2 MB L2 cache; 855GME chipset; See page 181
1 socket for SO-DIMM DDR RAM module.
5PC600.E855-04 CPU board 855GME CM-600
CPU board Intel Celerom M, 600 MHz, 400 MHz FSB, 512 kB L2 cache; 855GME chipset; See page 181
1 socket for SO-DIMM DDR RAM module.
5PC600.E855-05 CPU board 855GME CM-1000
CPU board Intel Celeron M, 1000 MHz, 400 MHz FSB, 512 kB L2 cache; 855GME chipset; See page 181
1 socket for SO-DIMM DDR module.

Table 6: Model numbers - 855GME (ETX) CPU boards

38 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Model numbers

5.4 CPU boards 855GME (XTX)

General information
Section 1
Model number Short description Note
5PC600.X855-00 CPU board 855GME PM-1100
CPU board Intel Pentium M, 1100 MHz, 400 MHz FSB, 1 MB L2 cache; 855GME chipset; See page 183
1 socket for SO-DIMM DDR RAM module.
5PC600.X855-01 CPU board 855GME PM-1600
CPU board Intel Pentium M, 1600 MHz, 400 MHz FSB, 1 MB L2 cache; 855GME chipset; See page 183
1 socket for SO-DIMM DDR RAM module.
5PC600.X855-02 CPU board 855GME PM-1400
CPU board Intel Pentium M, 1400 MHz, 400 MHz FSB, 2 MB L2 cache; 855GME chipset; See page 183
1 socket for SO-DIMM DDR RAM module.
5PC600.X855-03 CPU board 855GME PM-1800
CPU board Intel Pentium M, 1800 MHz, 400 MHz FSB, 2 MB L2 cache; 855GME chipset; See page 183
1 socket for SO-DIMM DDR RAM module.
5PC600.X855-04 CPU board 855GME CM-600
CPU board Intel Celerom M, 600 MHz, 400 MHz FSB, 512 kB L2 cache; 855GME chipset; See page 183
1 socket for SO-DIMM DDR RAM module.
5PC600.X855-05 CPU board 855GME CM-1000
CPU board Intel Pentium M, 1000 MHz, 400 MHz FSB, 512 kB L2 cache; 855GME chipset; See page 183
1 socket for SO-DIMM DDR RAM module.

Table 7: Model numbers - 855GME (XTX) CPU boards

5.5 Heat sink

Model number Short description Note

5AC600.HS01-00 APC620 heat sink 815E (ETX) 12.8mm Cancelled since 10/2005
Replaced by heat sinks for
For APC620 system units with Intel 815E CPU Boards (ETX) with Celeron 3 400 MHz, 855GME boards (ETX / XTX)
Celeron 3 733 MHz, Celeron 3 1000 MHz. See page 185
5AC600.HS01-01 APC620 heat sink 855GME (ETX / XTX) 12.8mm
For APC620 system units with Intel 855GME CPU boards (ETX / XTX) with Celeron M 600 See page 185
MHz, Celeron M 1000, Pentium M 1100 MHz, Pentium M 1400 MHz.
5AC600.HS01-02 APC620 heat sink 855GME (ETX / XTX) 28mm
for APC620 system units with Intel 855GME CPU boards (ETX / XTX) with Pentium M 1600 See page 185
MHz, Pentium M 1800 MHz.
5AC600.HS02-01 APC620f heat sink 855GME (ETX / XTX) 12.8mm
For APC620 full-size system units with Intel 855GME CPU boards (ETX / XTX) with Celeron See page 185
M 600 MHz, Celeron M 1000, Pentium M 1100 MHz, Pentium M 1400 MHz.
5AC600.HS02-02 APC620f heat sink 855GME (ETX / XTX) 28mm
for APC620 full-size system units with Intel 855GME CPU boards (ETX / XTX) with Pentium See page 185
M 1600 MHz, Pentium M 1800 MHz.
5AC600.HS03-01 APC620 embedded heat sink (855GME XTX) 12.8 mm
Heat sink for APC620 embedded system units with Celeron® M 600 MHz (5PC600.X855-04),
See page 185
Celeron® M 1000 MHz (5PC600.X855-05), Pentium® M 1100 MHz (5PC600.X855-00) and
Pentium® M 1400 MHz (5PC600.X855-02).

Table 8: Model numbers - Heat sinks

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 39

 General information • Model numbers

5.6 Main memory

Model number Short description Note

5MMSDR.0128-01 SO-DIMM SDRAM, 128 MB PC133
SO-DIMM SDRAM 128 MB PC133 for 815E CPU boards (ETX).
Cancelled since 10/2005
Replaced by main memory for
5MMSDR.0256-01 SO-DIMM SDRAM, 256 MB PC133 855GME boards (ETX / XTX)
SO-DIMM SDRAM 256 MB PC133 for 815E CPU boards (ETX).
See page 186
5MMSDR.0512-01 SO-DIMM SDRAM, 512 MB PC133
SO-DIMM SDRAM 512 MB PC133 for 815E CPU boards (ETX).
5MMDDR.0256-00 SO-DIMM DDR-SDRAM 256 MB PC2700
See page 186
SO-DIMM DDR-SDRAM 256 MB PC2700 for 855GME CPU boards (ETX / XTX).
5MMDDR.0512-00 SO-DIMM DDR-SDRAM 512 MB PC2700
See page 186
SO-DIMM DDR-SDRAM 512 MB PC2700 for 855GME CPU boards (ETX / XTX).
5MMDDR.1024-00 SO-DIMM DDR-SDRAM 1024 MB PC2700
See page 186
SO-DIMM DDR-SDRAM 1024 MB PC2700 for 855GME CPU boards (ETX / XTX).

Table 9: Model numbers - Main memory

5.7 Drives

Model number Short description Note

5AC600.SSDI-00 Add-on SSD 128 GB MLC
See page 187
128 GB Solid State Drive SATA (MLC), add-on. For installation in an APC620 or PPC700.
5MMSSD.0128-00 Replacement SSD 128 GB MLC
see page 191
128 GB Solid State Drive SATA (MLC), replacement SSD for 5AC600.SSDI-00
5AC600.HDDI-00 Add-on hard disk 30 GB 24x7 Cancelled since 04/2007.
Replaced by:
30 GB hard disk (add-on); ideal for 24 hour operation (24x7). For installation in an APC620 5AC600.HDDI-05.
or PPC700. See page 198
5AC600.HDDI-01 Add-on hard disk 20 GB ET Cancelled since 04/2007.
Replaced by:
20 GB hard disk (add-on), with expanded temperature range (ET). For installation in an 5AC600.HDDI-05.
APC620 or PPC700. See page 198
5AC600.HDDI-02 Add-on hard disk 40 GB 24x7 Cancelled since 08/2006.
Replaced by:
40 GB hard disk (add-on); ideal for 24 hour operation (24x7). For installation in an APC620 5AC600.HDDI-05.
or PPC700. See page 201
5AC600.HDDI-03 Add-on hard disk 60 GB 24x7 Cancelled since 10/2007.
Replaced by:
60 GB hard disk (add-on); ideal for 24 hour operation (24x7). For installation in an APC620 5AC600.HDDI-06.
or PPC700. See page 204
5AC600.HDDI-04 Add-on hard disk 80 GB 24x7 Cancelled since 10/2007.
Replaced by:
80 GB hard disk (add-on); ideal for 24 hour operation (24x7). For installation in an APC620 5AC600.HDDI-06.
or PPC700. See page 207
5AC600.HDDI-05 Add-on hard disk 40 GB, 24x7, ET
40 GB hard disk (add-on); Suitable for 24 hour operation (24x7) as well as for operation in the See page 210
extended temperature range (ET). For installation in an APC620 or PPC700.
5AC600.HDDI-06 Add-on hard disk 80 GB, 24x7, ET
80 GB hard disk (add-on); Suitable for 24 hour operation (24x7) as well as for operation in the See page 213
extended temperature range (ET). For installation in an APC620 or PPC700.

Table 10: Model numbers - Drives

40 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Model numbers

Model number Short description Note

General information
5AC600.CDXS-00 Slide-in CD-ROM

Section 1
CD-ROM drive (slide-in); for operation in a slide-in drive slot in an APC620 or PPC700 See page 217
system.
5AC600.CFSI-00 Add-on CompactFlash slot
See page 216
CompactFlash slot (add-on); for installation in an APC620 or PPC700.
5AC600.CFSS-00 Slide-in CF 2-slot
See page 228
Slide-in CompactFlash adapter for 2 CompactFlash cards (via IDE and USB 2.0)
5AC600.DVDS-00 Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW
DVD-ROM/CD-RW drive (slide-in); for operation in a slide-in drive slot in an APC620 or See page 220
PPC700 system.
5AC600.DVRS-00 Slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW
See page 223
DVD-RW drive (slide-in); for operation in a drive slot in an APC620 or PPC700 system.
5AC600.FDDS-00 Slide-in USB floppy disk drive
See page 230
FDD drive (slide-in); for operation in a slide-in drive slot in an APC620 or PPC700 system.
5AC600.HDDS-00 30 GB 24/7 slide-in hard disk Cancelled since 04/2007.
Replaced by:
30 GB hard disk (slide-in); ideal for 24 hour operation (24x7). For use in a slide-in drive slot 5AC600.HDDS-02.
in an APC620 or PPC700 system. See page 233
5AC600.HDDS-01 20 GB ET slide-in hard disk Cancelled since 04/2007.
Replaced by:
20 GB hard disk (slide-in); with expanded temperature range (ET). For use in a slide-in drive 5AC600.HDDS-02.
slot in an APC620 or PPC700 system. See page 236
5AC600.HDDS-02 40 GB 24x7 ET slide-in hard disk
40 GB hard disk (add-on); Suitable for 24 hour operation (24x7) as well as for operation in the
See page 239
extended temperature range (ET). For use in a slide-in drive slot in an APC620 or PPC700
system.
5ACPCI.RAIC-00 PCI RAID controller ATA/100 Cancelled since 07/2007.
Replaced by:
PCI Raid controller 5ACPCI.RAIC-03.
See page 243
5ACPCI.RAIC-01 PCI SATA RAID system 2 x 60 GB 24x7 Cancelled since 04/2008
Replacement type
PCI Raid controller + 2 x 60 GB SATA hard disk; ideal for 24 hour operation (24x7). Requires 5ACPCI.RAIC-03
a free PCI slot. See page 251
5ACPCI.RAIC-02 Replacement SATA-HDD 60 GB
See page 256
1 piece Hard disk 60 GB SATA, replacement part for 5ACPCI.RAIC-01
5ACPCI.RAIC-03 PCI SATA RAID system 2 x 160 GB 24x7, ET
PCI Raid controller + 2 x 160 GB SATA hard disk; Suitable for 24 hour operation (24x7) as See page 259
well as for operation in the extended temperature range (ET). Requires a free PCI slot.
5ACPCI.RAIC-04 Replacement SATA-HDD 160 GB
See page 264
1 piece Hard disk 160 GB SATA, replacement part for 5ACPCI.RAIC-03
5ACPCI.RAIC-05 PCI RAID system SATA 2x250GB (M5400.6)
See page 267
PCI RAID controller + 2 x 250 GB SATA hard disks; requires a free PCI slot.
5MMHDD.0250-00 Replacement SATA-HDD 250GB (M5400.6)
See page 271
Hard disk 250 GB SATA, replacement part for 5ACPCI.RAIC-03 and 5ACPCI.RAIC-05.
5ACPCI.RAIS-00 PCI RAID storage 2 x 40 GB Cancelled since 06/2006
Replacement type
PCI Raid hard disk 2 x 40 GB 5ACPCI.RAIC-03
See page 245
5ACPCI.RAIS-01 PCI RAID storage 2 x 60 GB Cancelled since 01/2007
Replacement type
PCI Raid hard disk 2 x 60 GB 5ACPCI.RAIC-03
See page 248

Table 10: Model numbers - Drives (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 41

 General information • Model numbers

5.8 Interface options

Model number Short description Note

5AC600.CANI-00 Add-on CAN interface
See page 274
CAN interface for installation in an APC620 or PPC700.
5AC600.485I-00 Add-on RS232/422/485 interface
See page 278
Add-on RS232/422/485 interface for installation in an APC620 and PPC700.

Table 11: Model numbers - Interfaces

5.9 Fan kits

Model number Short description Note

5PC600.FA01-00 Fan kit 1PCI
See page 282
APC620 fan kit, for system units with 1 PCI slot.
5PC600.FA02-00 Fan kit 2PCI
See page 283
APC620 fan kit + filter clasp for system units with 2 PCI slots.
5PC600.FA03-00 Fan kit 3PCI
See page 285
APC620 fan kit + filter clasp for system units with 3 PCI slots.
5PC600.FA05-00 Fan kit 5PCI
See page 286
APC620 fan kit + filter clasp for system units with 5 PCI slots.

Table 12: Model numbers - Fan kits

5.10 AP Link cards

Model number Short description Note

5AC600.SDL0-00 AP Link SDL transmitter
APC620 Smart Display Link Transmitter, to connect an Automation Panel via SDL to an See page 288
APC620.

Table 13: Model numbers - AP Link graphics adapter

5.11 Accessories

5.11.1 Supply voltage connectors

Model number Short description Note

0TB103.9 Plug 24V 5.08 3-pin screw clamps
24 VDC 3-pin connector, female. Screw clamp, 3.31mm²; protected against vibration by the See page 638
screw flange.
0TB103.91 Plug 24V 5.08 3-pin cage clamps
24 VDC 3-pin connector, female. cage clamps, 3.31mm²; protected against vibration by the See page 638
screw flange.

Table 14: Model numbers - Supply voltage connectors

42 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Model numbers

5.11.2 X2X and CAN plugs

General information
Section 1
Model number Short description Note
0TB704.9 Terminal block, 4-pin,
See page 640
Screw clamp, 1.5 mm²
0TB704.91 Terminal block, 4-pin,
See page 640
cage clamps, 2.5 mm²

Table 15: Model numbers - X2X and CAN plug

5.11.3 Batteries

Model number Short description Note

0AC201.91 Lithium batteries, 4 pcs.
See page 641
Lithium batteries, 4 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell
4A0006.00-000 Lithium battery, 1 pc.
See page 641
Lithium batteries, 1 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell

Table 16: Model numbers - Batteries

5.11.4 CompactFlash cards

Model number Short description Note

5CFCRD.0512-06 CompactFlash 512 MB B&R
see page 645
CompactFlash card with 512 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.1024-06 CompactFlash 1024 MB B&R
see page 645
CompactFlash card with 1024 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.2048-06 CompactFlash 2048 MB B&R
see page 645
CompactFlash card with 2048 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.4096-06 CompactFlash 4096 MB B&R
see page 645
CompactFlash card with 4096 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.8192-06 CompactFlash 8192 MB B&R
see page 645
CompactFlash card with 8192 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.016G-06 CompactFlash 16 GB B&R
see page 645
CompactFlash card with 16 GB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.032G-06 CompactFlash 32 GB B&R
see page 645
CompactFlash card with 32 GB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.0512-04 CompactFlash 512 MB B&R
See page 650
CompactFlash card with 512 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.1024-04 CompactFlash 1024 MB B&R
See page 650
CompactFlash card with 1024 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.2048-04 CompactFlash 2048 MB B&R
See page 650
CompactFlash card with 2048 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.4096-04 CompactFlash 4096 MB B&R
See page 650
CompactFlash card with 4096 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.8192-04 CompactFlash 8192 MB B&R
See page 650
CompactFlash card with 8192 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface

Table 17: Model numbers - CompactFlash cards

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 43

 General information • Model numbers

Model number Short description Note

5CFCRD.016G-04 CompactFlash 16 GB B&R
See page 650
CompactFlash card with 16 GB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.0064-03 CompactFlash 64 MB SSI
See page 655
CompactFlash card with 64 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.0128-03 CompactFlash 128 MB SSI
See page 655
CompactFlash card with 128 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.0256-03 CompactFlash 256 MB SSI
See page 655
CompactFlash card with 256 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.0512-03 CompactFlash 512 MB SSI
See page 655
CompactFlash card with 512 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.1024-03 CompactFlash 1024 MB SSI
See page 655
CompactFlash card with 1024 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.2048-03 CompactFlash 2048 MB SSI
See page 655
CompactFlash card with 2048 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.4096-03 CompactFlash 4096 MB SSI
See page 655
CompactFlash card with 4096 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.8192-03 CompactFlash 8192 MB SSI
See page 655
CompactFlash card with 8192 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.0032-02 CompactFlash 32 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005
Replaced by 5CFCRD.0064-
CompactFlash card with 32 MB NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface. 03
See page 659
5CFCRD.0064-02 CompactFlash 64 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005
Replaced by 5CFCRD.0064-
CompactFlash card with 64 MB NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface. 03
See page 659
5CFCRD.0128-02 CompactFlash 128 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005
Replaced by 5CFCRD.0128-
CompactFlash card with 128 MB NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface 03
See page 659
5CFCRD.0256-02 CompactFlash 256 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005
Replaced by 5CFCRD.0256-
CompactFlash card with 256 MB NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface 03
See page 659
5CFCRD.0512-02 CompactFlash 512 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005
Replaced by 5CFCRD.0512-
CompactFlash card with 512 MB NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface 03
See page 659
5CFCRD.1024-02 CompactFlash 1024 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005
Replaced by 5CFCRD.1024-
CompactFlash card with 1024 MB NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface 03
See page 659
5CFCRD.2048-02 CompactFlash 2048 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005
Replaced by 5CFCRD.2048-
CompactFlash card with 2048 MB NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface 03
See page 659

Table 17: Model numbers - CompactFlash cards (Forts.)

44 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Model numbers

5.11.5 USB flash drives

General information
Section 1
Model number Short description Note
5MMUSB.0128-00 USB flash drive 128 MB SanDisk Cancelled since 12/2005
Replaced by 5MMUSB.2048-
USB 2.0 flash drive 128 MB 00
See page 682
5MMUSB.0256-00 USB flash drive 256 MB SanDisk Cancelled since 03/2007
Replaced by 5MMUSB.2048-
USB 2.0 flash drive 256 MB 00
See page 682
5MMUSB.0512-00 USB flash drive 512 MB SanDisk Cancelled since 07/2007
Replaced by 5MMUSB.2048-
USB 2.0 flash drive 512 MB 00
See page 682
5MMUSB.1024-00 USB flash drive 1 GB SanDisk Cancelled since 03/2007
Replaced by 5MMUSB.2048-
USB 2.0 flash drive 1 GB 00
See page 682
5MMUSB.2048-00 USB flash drive 2 GB SanDisk
See page 682
USB 2.0 flash drive 2 GB
5MMUSB.2048-01 USB flash drive 2 GB B&R
See page 685
USB 2.0 flash drive 2 GB

Table 18: Model numbers - USB flash drives

5.11.6 Cables

Model number Description Note

5CAMSC.0001-00 APC620 internal supply cable See page 692

5CADVI.0018-00 DVI-D cable 1.8 m See page 693

Single cable, DVI-D/m:DVI-D/m; length: 1.8 m
5CADVI.0050-00 DVI-D cable 5 m See page 693
Single cable, DVI-D/m:DVI-D/m; length: 5 m
5CADVI.0100-00 DVI-D cable 10 m See page 693
Single cable, DVI-D/m:DVI-D/m; length: 10 m
5CASDL.0018-00 SDL cable 1.8 m
See page 696
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-01 SDL cable 1.8 m 45°
See page 699
SDL cable for fixed type of layout with one-sided 45° plug; length: 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-03 1.8 m flex SDL cable
See page 706
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 1.8 m
5CASDL.0050-00 SDL cable 5 m
See page 696
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 5 m
5CASDL.0050-01 SDL cable 5 m 45°
See page 699
SDL cable for fixed type of layout with one-sided 45° plug; length: 5 m
5CASDL.0050-03 5 m flex SDL cable
See page 706
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 5 m
5CASDL.0100-00 SDL cable 10 m
See page 696
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 10 m

Table 19: Model numbers - Cables

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 45

 General information • Model numbers

Model number Description Note

5CASDL.0100-01 SDL cable 10 m 45°
See page 699
SDL cable for fixed type of layout with one-sided 45° plug; length: 10 m
5CASDL.0100-03 10 m flex SDL cable
See page 706
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 10 m
5CASDL.0150-00 SDL cable 15 m
See page 696
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 15 m
5CASDL.0150-01 SDL cable 15 m 45°
See page 699
SDL cable for fixed type of layout with one-sided 45° plug; length: 15 m
5CASDL.0150-03 15 m flex SDL cable
See page 706
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 15 m
5CASDL.0200-00 SDL cable 20 m
See page 696
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 20 m
5CASDL.0200-03 20 m flex SDL cable
See page 706
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 20 m
5CASDL.0250-00 SDL cable 25 m
See page 696
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 25 m
5CASDL.0250-03 25 m flex SDL cable
See page 706
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 25 m
5CASDL.0300-00 SDL cable 30 m
See page 696
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 30 m
5CASDL.0300-03 30 m flex SDL cable
See page 706
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 30 m
5CASDL.0300-10 30 m SDL cable with extender Cancelled since 12/2006
Replaced by 5CASDL.0300-
SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout; length 30 m 13
See page 702
5CASDL.0300-13 30 m SDL flex cable with extender
See page 711
SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 30 m
5CASDL.0400-10 40 m SDL cable with extender Cancelled since 12/2006
Replaced by 5CASDL.0400-
SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout; length 40 m 13
See page 702
5CASDL.0400-13 40 m SDL flex cable with extender
See page 711
SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 40 m
5CAUSB.0018-00 USB 2.0 cable, A/m:B/m 1.8 m
See page 718
USB 2.0 connection cable; plug type A - type B; length 1.8 m
5CAUSB.0050-00 USB 2.0 cable, A/m:B/m 5 m
See page 718
USB 2.0 connection cable; plug type A - type B; length 5 m
9A0014.02 RS232 cable DB9/f:DB9/m 1.8 m
See page 716
RS232 extension cable for remote operation of a display unit with touch screen, length 1.8 m.
9A0014.05 RS232 cable DB9/f:DB9/m 5 m
See page 716
RS232 extension cable for remote operation of a display unit with touch screen, length 5 m.
9A0014.10 RS232 cable DB9/f:DB9/m 10 m
See page 716
RS232 extension cable for remote operation of a display unit with touch screen, length 10 m.

Table 19: Model numbers - Cables (Forts.)

46 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Model numbers

5.11.7 UPS module + accessories

General information
Section 1
Model number Short description Note
5AC600.UPSI-00 Add-on UPS module
UPS module for APC620, APC810, PPC800; for system units 5PC600.SX01-00 (starting with
Rev. H0), 5PC600.SX02-00 (starting with Rev. G0), 5PC600.SX02-01 (starting with Rev. H0),
5PC600.SX05-00 (starting with Rev. F0), 5PC600.SX05-01 (starting with Rev. F0), See page 724
5PC600.SF03-00 (starting with Rev. A0), 5PC810.SX*. 5PC820.1505-00, 5PC820.1906-00
Order cable (5CAUPS.0005-00 or 5CAUPS.0030-00) and battery unit (5AC600.UPSB-00)
separately.
5AC600.UPSB-00 Battery unit 5 Ah
See page 726
Battery unit 5Ah; for APC620, APC810 or PPC800 UPS.
5CAUPS.0005-00 APC620 UPS cable 0.5 m
See page 730
Connection cable between add-on UPS module and UPS battery unit, length 0.5 meters
5CAUPS.0030-00 APC620 UPS cable 3 m
See page 730
Connection cable between add-on UPS module and UPS battery unit, length 3 meters

Table 20: Model numbers - UPS module + accessories

5.11.8 PCI Ethernet cards

Model number Short description Note

5ACPCI.ETH1-01 PCI Ethernet card 10/100
See page 733
half size PCI Ethernet card, 1 Ethernet connection
5ACPCI.ETH3-01 PCI Ethernet card 10/100 3port
See page 735
half size PCI Ethernet card, 3 Ethernet connections

Table 21: Model numbers - PCI Ethernet cards

5.11.9 Miscellaneous

Model number Short description Note

5A5003.03 Front cover
See page 680
Front cover for the USB 2.0 Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00.
5AC600.ICOV-00 Interface covers
See page 643
Interface covers for APC620 and PPC700 devices; 5 pieces
5AC900.1000-00 Adapter DVI-A/m to CRT DB15HD/f
Adapter DVI (plug) to CRT (socket), for connecting a standard monitor See page 644
to a DVI-I interface.
5AC600.SRAM-00 APC620/PPC700 SRAM module 512kB
See page 738
SRAM module for APC620 and PPC700 512 KB.
5MD900.USB2-00 USB 2.0 drive DVD-ROM/CD-RW FDD CF USB Cancelled since 10/2006
Replacement type
USB 2.0 drive combination, consists of DVD-ROM/CD-RW, FDD, CompactFlash slot (type II), 5MD900.USB2-01
USB connection (type A front, type B back); 24 V DC. See page 668
5MD900.USB2-01 USB 2.0 drive DVD-RW/CD-RW FDD CF USB
USB 2.0 drive combination, consists of DVD-R/RW/DVD+R/RW/CD-RW, FDD, See page 675
CompactFlash slot (type II), USB connection (type A front, type B back); 24 V DC.
5AC600.FA01-00 APC620 replacement fan filter 1PCI 5 piece
See page 737
APC620 replacement fan filter for system unit with 1 PCI Slot (5PC600.SX01-00).

Table 22: Model numbers - Other items

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 47

 General information • Model numbers

Model number Short description Note

5AC600.FA02-00 APC620 replacement fan filter 1PCI 5 piece
APC620 replacement fan filter for system unit with 2 PCI slot (5PC600.SX02-00, See page 737
5PC600.SX02-01).
5AC600.FA03-00 APC620f replacement fan filter 1PCI 5 piece
See page 737
APC620 replacement fan filter for system unit with 3 PCI Slots (5PC600.SF03-00).
5AC600.FA05-00 APC620 replacement fan filter 1PCI 5 piece
APC620 replacement fan filter for system units with 5 PCI slot (5PC600.SX02-00, See page 737
5PC600.SX02-01).
0PS102.0 Power supply, 1-phase, 2.1 A
See page 741
24 VDC power supply, 1-phase, 2.1 A, input 100-240 VAC, wide range, DIN rail mounting
0PS104.0 Power supply, 1-phase, 4.2 A
See page 741
24 VDC power supply, 1 phase, 4.2 A, input 115/230 VAC, auto select, DIN rail mounting
0PS105.1 Power supply, 1-phase, 5 A
See page 741
24 VDC power supply, 1 phase, 5 A, input 115/230 VAC, manual select, DIN rail mounting
0PS105.2 Power supply, 1-phase, 5 A, redundant
24 VDC power supply, 1 phase, 5 A, redundant through parallel operation, input 115/230 See page 741
VAC, manual select, DIN rail mounting
0PS110.1 Power supply, 1-phase, 10 A
See page 741
24 VDC power supply, 1 phase, 10 A, input 115/230 VAC, manual select, DIN rail mounting
0PS110.2 Power supply, 1-phase, 10 A, redundant
24 VDC power supply, 1 phase, 10 A, redundant through parallel operation, input 115/230 See page 741
VAC, manual select, DIN rail mounting
0PS120.1 Power supply, 1-phase, 20 A
See page 741
24 VDC power supply, 1 phase, 20 A, input 115/230 VAC, auto select, DIN rail mounting
0PS305.1 Power supply, 3-phase, 5 A
24 VDC power supply, 3-phase, 5 A, input 400..500 VAC (3 phases), wide range, DIN rail See page 741
mounting
0PS310.1 Power supply, 3-phase, 10 A
24 VDC power supply, 3-phase, 10 A, input 400..500 VAC (3 phases), wide range, DIN rail See page 741
mounting
0PS320.1 Power supply, 3-phase, 20 A
24 VDC power supply, 3-phase, 20 A, input 400..500 VAC (3 phases), wide range, DIN rail See page 741
mounting
0PS340.1 Power supply, 1-phase, 40 A
See page 741
24 VDC power supply, 3 phase, 40 A, input 115/230 VAC, auto select, DIN rail mounting
5SWHMI.0000-00 HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD
See page 687

Table 22: Model numbers - Other items (Forts.)

5.12 Software

Model number Short description Note

9S0000.01-010 OEM MS-DOS 6.22 German (disk)
OEM MS-DOS 6.22 German disks See page 566
Only delivered with a new PC.

Table 23: Model numbers - Software

48 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Model numbers

Model number Short description Note

General information
9S0000.01-020 OEM MS-DOS 6.22 English (disk)

Section 1
OEM MS-DOS 6.22 English disks See page 566
Only delivered with a new PC.
9S0000.08-010 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Professional Cancelled since 10/2008
CD, German; Only delivered with a new PC. See page 568

9S0000.08-020 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Professional Cancelled since 10/2008

CD, English; Only delivered with a new PC. See page 568

9S0000.09-090 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Professional Multilanguage Cancelled since 10/2008

CDs; Only delivered with a new PC. See page 568

5SWWXP.0600-GER WinXP Professional with SP3, CD German

Microsoft OEM Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3, CD, German. Only available with See page 568
a new device.
5SWWXP.0600-ENG WinXP Professional with SP3, CD English
Microsoft OEM Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3, CD, English. Only available with a See page 568
new device.
5SWWXP.0600-MUL WinXP Professional with SP3, CD, Multi-language
Microsoft OEM Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3, CD, multi-language. Only available See page 568
with a new device.
5SWWXP.0500-GER WinXP Professional with SP2c, CD German
Microsoft OEM Windows XP Professional Service Pack 2c, CD, German. Only available with See page 568
a new device.
5SWWXP.0500-ENG WinXP Professional with SP2c, CD English
Microsoft OEM Windows XP Professional Service Pack 2c, CD, English. Only available with See page 568
a new device.
5SWWXP.0500-MUL WinXP Professional with SP2c, CD, Multi-language
Microsoft OEM Windows XP Professional Service Pack 2c, CD, multi-language. Only See page 568
available with a new device.
9S0001.19-020 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Embedded APC620 815E w/CF, English
Cancelled since 10/2005
512 MB CompactFlash card with Windows XP Embedded image for APC620 systems with a See page 584
815E CPU board. Only delivered with a new PC.
9S0001.20-020 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Embedded APC620 855GME w/CF, English Cancelled since 10/2007
Replacement type
512 MB CompactFlash card with Windows XP Embedded image for APC620 systems with a 5SWWXP.0412-ENG
855GME CPU board. Only delivered with a new PC. See page 584
9S0001.27-020 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Embedded (incl. SP2) APC620 815E w/CF, English
Canceled since 10/2005
512 MB CompactFlash card with Windows XP Embedded image including SP2 for APC620 See page 584
systems with a 815E CPU board. Only delivered with a new PC.
9S0001.28-020 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Embedded (incl. SP2) APC620 855GME w/CF, English Cancelled since 10/2007
Replacement type
512 MB CompactFlash card with Windows XP Embedded image including SP2 for APC620 5SWWXP.0412-ENG
systems with a 855GME CPU board. Only delivered with a new PC. See page 584
5SWWXP.0412-ENG WinXPe FP2007 APC620 E855GME
Order Microsoft Windows XP Embedded English, Feature Pack 2007, for APC620 with CPU
boards 5PC600.E855-00, 5PC600.E855-01, 5PC600.E855-02, 5PC600.E855-03, See page 584
5PC600.E855-04, 5PC600.E855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 512 MB). Only
delivered with a new PC.
5SWWXP.0413-ENG1) WinXPe FP2007 APC620 X855GME
Order Microsoft Windows XP Embedded English, Feature Pack 2007, for APC620 with CPU
boards 5PC600.X855-00, 5PC600.X855-01, 5PC600.X855-02, 5PC600.X855-03, See page 584
5PC600.X855-04, 5PC600.X855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 512 MB). Only
delivered with a new PC.

Table 23: Model numbers - Software (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 49

 General information • Model numbers

Model number Short description Note

5SWWXP.0712-ENG Windows Embedded Standard 2009 APC620 855GME ETX
Microsoft OEM Windows Embedded, Standard 2009, English; for APC620 with ETX CPU See page 588
board with 855GME chipset; order CompactFlash separately (at least 1 GB).
5SWWXP.0713-ENG Windows Embedded Standard 2009 APC620 855GME XTX
Microsoft OEM Windows Embedded, Standard 2009, English; for APC620 with XTX CPU See page 588
board with 855GME chipset; order CompactFlash separately (at least 1 GB).
9S0001.29-020 WinCE5.0 Pro license
Cancelled since 07/2007
OEM Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional, English, license, only supplied together with a See page 591
device.
9S0001.32-020 WinCE5.0 Pro APC620,PPC700 Cancelled since 07/2007
Replacement type:
OEM Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional; for APC620 and PPC700 with Intel 855GME 5SWWCE.0512-ENG
chipset, English; preinstalled on 128 MB CompactFlash card. See page 591
5SWWCE.0512-ENG WinCE5.0 Pro APC620 E855GME
Order Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional, English, including license, for APC620 with
See page 591
CPU boards 5PC600.E855-00, 5PC600.E855-01, 5PC600.E855-02, 5PC600.E855-03,
5PC600.E855-04, 5PC600.E855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
5SWWCE.0513-ENG WinCE5.0 Pro APC620 X855GME
Order Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional, English, including license, for APC620 with
See page 591
CPU boards 5PC600.X855-00, 5PC600.X855-01, 5PC600.X855-02, 5PC600.X855-03,
5PC600.X855-04, 5PC600.X855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
9S0001.34-020 WinCE5.0 ProPlus APC620,PPC700 Cancelled since 07/2007
Replacement type:
OEM Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional plus; for APC620 and PPC700 with Intel 5SWWCE.0612-ENG
855GME chipset, English; preinstalled on 128 MB CompactFlash card. See page 591
9S0001.36-020 WinCE5.0 ProPlus license
Cancelled since 07/2007
OEM Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional plus, English, license, only supplied together See page 591
with a device.
5SWWCE.0612-ENG WinCE5.0 ProPlus APC620 E855GME
Order Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional Plus, English, including license, for APC620
See page 591
with CPU boards 5PC600.E855-00, 5PC600.E855-01, 5PC600.E855-02, 5PC600.E855-03,
5PC600.E855-04, 5PC600.E855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
5SWWCE.0613-ENG WinCE5.0 ProPlus APC620 X855GME
Order Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional Plus, English, including license, for APC620
See page 591
with CPU boards 5PC600.X855-00, 5PC600.X855-01, 5PC600.X855-02, 5PC600.X855-03,
5PC600.X855-04, 5PC600.X855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
5SWWCE.0812-ENG WinCE6.0 Pro APC620 E855GME
Order Microsoft Windows CE 6.0 Professional, English, including license, for APC620 with
See page 591
CPU boards 5PC600.E855-00, 5PC600.E855-01, 5PC600.E855-02, 5PC600.E855-03,
5PC600.E855-04, 5PC600.E855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
5SWWCE.0813-ENG WinCE6.0 Pro APC620 X855GME
Order Microsoft Windows CE 6.0 Professional, English, including license, for APC620 with
See page 591
CPU boards 5PC600.X855-00, 5PC600.X855-01, 5PC600.X855-02, 5PC600.X855-03,
5PC600.X855-04, 5PC600.X855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).

Table 23: Model numbers - Software (Forts.)

1) Support for Automation PC 620 embedded system units starting with Revision D0.

50 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 General information • Typical topologies

6. Typical topologies

General information
Section 1
6.1 APC620 embedded for central control and visualization

The control program runs on the APC620 embedded. The visualization project is integrated with
Visual Components. A display unit is connected to the PC. The PC is networked via Ethernet
TCP/IP; additional Power Panel-based operator terminals can also be connected via Ethernet.
Communication to I/O systems with axes is handled via fieldbus systems (CAN bus,
POWERLINK).

Ethernet TCP/IP

APC620 Power Panel 300 Power Panel 300 Power Panel 300

SDL

Automation Panel

X2X

X67 X67 X67 X67 X67

CAN

X20 System

POWERLINK

X20 System

ACOPOS ACOPOS ACOPOS

Figure 1: APC620 embedded for central control and visualization

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 51

 General information • Typical topologies

6.2 APC620 as visualization device

The visualization runs on the APC620 as a SCADA application. Two display units are connected
to the PC either locally or remotely. The control tasks interact with one or more underlying PLC
stations where I/O systems and drives are connected locally or remotely over fieldbus systems.
Additional SCADA stations can be networked via Ethernet TCP/IP.

Visualization and operation

APC620 Automation Panel Automation Panel PC systems PC systems PC systems

Ethernet TCP/IP

Control system Control system

X20 System X20 System

Motion control Motion control

Remote I/O systems Remote I/O systems

ACOPOS ACOPOS X67 X67 X67 ACOPOS ACOPOS X67 X67 X67

Figure 2: APC620 as visualization device

52 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Introduction

Chapter 2 • Technical Data

1. Introduction

Technical Data
Section 2
With its structure, its many slots and well thought-out placement of interfaces and drives, the
APC620 provides optimal adaptability and ergonomics. The APC620 saves space in the
switching cabinet. Drive inserts (HDD, CD-ROM, DVD, burner, etc.) and up to two CompactFlash
slots are hidden behind a cover on the front of the device.
The APC620 embedded additionally unites the fieldbus interfaces POWERLINK, CAN and X2X
in a compact housing.

APC620 APC620 APC620 APC620 APC620 embedded

5 PCI slots (half-size) 3 PCI slots (full-size) 2 PCI slots (half-size) 1 PCI slot (half-size)

Figure 3: Automation PC 620 system overview

The APC620 with an Intel® Pentium® M processor and Intel® 855GME chipset is available for
high-performance applications that require a powerful processor. These processors, developed
specially for mobile computing, offer many advantages for industrial applications as well. They
combine high computing capacity with low power consumption. The chipset contains an
integrated graphic solution which provides optimal use of memory for the system and graphics.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 53

 Technical Data • Introduction

1.1 Features

• Processors up to Pentium M 1.8 GHz (APC620 embedded only possible up to 1.4 GHz)
• CompactFlash slot (type I)
• Half-size / full-size PCI slots (PCI standard 2.2, 32-bit, PCI bus speed 33 MHz)
• AC97 sound
• USB 2.0
• 24 VDC supply voltage
• 2x Ethernet 10/100 MBit interfaces
• 2x RS232 Interface, modem compatible
• PS/2 keyboard/mouse (combined)
• CAN add-on interface
• Fieldbus interfaces1) (POWERLINK, CAN and X2X)
• RS232/422/485 add-on interface
• Fan-free operation2)
• BIOS
• Real-time clock, (RTC) battery-buffered
• Up to 1 GB main memory
• Connection of various display devices to the "Monitor/Panel" video output (supports
RGB, DVI, and SDL - Smart Display Link - signals)
• Optional installation of add-on UPS APC620 module3)
• Optional SRAM module4) battery backed

1) Only on APC620 embedded system units.

2) Dependent on the device configuration and the ambient temperature.
3) Installation depends on the revision of the system unit: 5PC600.SX01-00 from Rev. H0, 5PC600.SX02-00 from Rev. G0,
5PC600.SX02-01 from Rev. H0, 5PC600.SX05-00 from Rev. F0, 5PC600.SX05-01 from Rev. F0.
4) Installation depends on the revision of the system unit: 5PC600.SX01-00 from Rev. I0, 5PC600.SX02-00 from Rev. H0,
5PC600.SX02-01 from Rev. K0, 5PC600.SX05-00 from Rev. H0, 5PC600.SX05-01 from Rev. H0.

54 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Introduction

1.2 Structure / configuration APC620 with 1, 2, 3 and 5 PCI slots

The APC620 system can be assembled to meet individual requirements and operational
conditions.

The following components are absolutely essential for operation:

• System unit
• CPU board

Technical Data
• Heat sink (CPU board dependent)

Section 2
• Main memory (CPU board dependent)
• Drive (mass memory such as CompactFlash card or hard disk) for the operating system
• Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 55

 Technical Data • Introduction

1.2.1 Selection guide - basic system

Configuration - Basic system

System unit Select 1
The system unit consists of
the housing and base board.
Variants:
PCI slots (1,2, 3 or 5)
Slide-in slots (0,1 or 2)
AP Link slots (0 or 1)
Example 2 / 1 / 1 5PC600.SX01-00 (1/0/0) 5PC600.SX02-01 (2/1/0) 5PC600.SF03-00 (3/1/1) 5PC600.SX05-01 (5/2/0)
= 2 PCI, 1 slide-in, 1 AP Link 5PC600.SX02-00 (2/1/1) 5PC600.SX05-00 (5/2/1)
CPU board - Main memory module - Heat sink (select 1 of each)
System selection
CPU board 815E CPU board (ETX) 855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX)
5PC600.E855-00 / 5PC600.X855-00 - PM 1100 MHz
5PC600.E815-00 - C3-400 MHz 5PC600.E855-01 / 5PC600.X855-01 - PM 1600 MHz
5PC600.E815-02 - C3 733 MHz 5PC600.E855-02 / 5PC600.X855-02 - PM 1400 MHz
5PC600.E815-03 - C3 1000 MHz 5PC600.E855-03 / 5PC600.X855-03 - PM 1800 MHz
5PC600.E855-04 / 5PC600.X855-04 - CM 600 MHz
5PC600.E855-05 / 5PC600.X855-05 - CM 1000 MHz
Main memory
5MMSDR.0128-01 - 128 MB 5MMDDR.0256-00 - 256 MB
5MMSDR.0256-01 - 256 MB 5MMDDR.0512-00 - 512 MB
5MMSDR.0512-01 - 512 MB 5MMDDR.1024-00 - 1 GB
Heat sink

5AC600.HS01-01
5AC600.HS01-00 1)
2) 5AC600.HS01-02
5AC600.HS02-01 2)
2) 5AC600.HS02-01
5AC600.HS02-02 1)2)
5AC600.HS02-02
1) Is required when using 855GME CPU boards 5PC600.E855-01 / 5PC600.X855-01 and 5PC600.E855-03 / 5PC600.X855-03.
2) Is required when using system unit 5PC600.SF03-00.

Figure 4: Selection guide - APC620 basic system with 1, 2, 3, and 5 PCI slots

Explanation:

1) Select a system unit.

2) System selection - Choose a CPU board variant (815E - ETX or 855GME - ETX / XTX).

3) Select one each of main memory and heat sink, based on selected CPU board.

4) Select optional components, based on selected system unit (see section 1.2.2 "Selection
guide - Optional components", on page 57).

56 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Introduction

1.2.2 Selection guide - Optional components

Configuration - optional
System unit Select 1
The system unit consists of
the housing and base board.
Variants:
PCI slots (1,2, 3 or 5)
Slide-in slots (0,1 or 2)
AP Link slots (0 or 1)
Example 2 / 1 / 1 5PC600.SX01-00 (1/0/0) 5PC600.SX02-01 (2/1/0) 5PC600.SF03-00 (3/1/1) 5PC600.SX05-01 (5/2/0)

Technical Data
= 2 PCI, 1 slide-in, 1 AP Link 5PC600.SX02-00 (2/1/1) 5PC600.SX05-00 (5/2/1)

Section 2
Fan kit (select 1)

A fan kit may be required for

some system configurations

5PC600.FA01-00 5PC600.FA02-00 5PC600.FA03-00 5PC600.FA05-00

Add-on drive Select 1

5AC600.SSDI-00 (128 GB SSD)

5AC600.HDDI-05 (40 GB HDD - 24x7 operation and extended temp. range)
5AC600.CFSI-00 (CompactFlash slot)

Slide-in drives not possible Select max. 1 Select max. 2

5AC600.CFSS-00 (2 CompactFlash slots)

5AC600.CDXS-00 (CD-ROM)
5AC600.DVDS-00 (DVD-ROM/CD-RW)
5AC600.DVRS-00 (DVD-R/RW DVD+R/RW)
5AC600.FDDS-00 (USB Floppy)
5AC600.HDDS-02 (40 GB HDD - 24x7 hours and extended temperature range)

AP Link insert cards not possible Select 1

5AC600.SDL0-00
for a second Only possible when using a 5PC600.SX02-00, 5PC600.SX05-00
graphics line or 5PC600.SF03-00 together with an 855GME CPU board.
RAID system Select 1

5ACPCI.RAIC-03 (occupies 1 PCI Slot)

5ACPCI.RAIC-05 (occupies 1 PCI Slot)

Optional interface Select 1

5AC600.CANI-00 (CAN)
5AC600.485I-00 (combined RS232/RS422/RS485)

UPS module Select 1

5AC600.UPSI-00 (Add-on UPS modul)
Can only be installed starting with the following system unit revisions: 5PC600.SX01-00 Rev. H0,
5PC600.SX02 Rev. G0, 5PC600.SX02-01 Rev. H0, 5PC600.SX05-00 Rev. F0, 5PC600.SX05-01 Rev. F0

SRAM module Select 1

5AC600.SRAM-00 (Add-On SRAM Modul 512kB)
Can only be installed starting with the following system unit revisions: 5PC600.SX01-00 Rev. I0,
5PC600.SX02 Rev. H0, 5PC600.SX02-01 Rev. K0, 5PC600.SX05-00 Rev. H0, 5PC600.SX05-01 Rev. H0
Supply voltage plugs Select 1
0TB103.9 (screw clamp)
0TB103.91 (cage clamp)

Figure 5: Selection guide - APC620 optional components with 1, 2, 3, and 5 PCI slots

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 57

 Technical Data • Introduction

Information:

• Depending on the system unit, a compatible fan kit can be installed in the APC620.
Required for certain system configurations and ambient temperatures (see also sections
2.6 "Ambient temperatures for systems with an 815E CPU board (ETX)", on page 89 and
2.7 "Ambient temperatures for systems with an 855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX)", on
page 93).
• Select optional drive(s) (add-on / slide-in), based on the system unit. One add-on drive
can be installed in each system unit. Slide-in drives (1 or 2) are only available in certain
system units.
• AP Link cards create a second graphics line (possibility of extended desktop or display
clone operation) on the APC620. Only possible with system units 5PC600.SX02-00,
5PC600.SX05-00, 5PC600.SF03-00 and with an 855GME CPU board.
• An add-on interface adds an optional connection possibility.
• Depending on the revision of the system unit (see graphic), an optional integrated UPS
add-on module can be installed.
• Depending on the revision of the system unit (see graphic), an optional integrated SRAM
module (battery backed) can be installed.
• The appropriate power supply plugs ensure simple connection to the power supply.

58 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Introduction

1.3 Structure / configuration APC620 embedded

The following components are absolutely essential for operation: System unit, CPU board, main
memory and heat sink.

Configuration - APC620 embedded base system

System unit Select 1

Technical Data
5PC600.SE00-00 - SDL - 512 kB SRAM
5PC600.SE00-01 - CRT 512 kb SRAM

Section 2
5PC600.SE00-02 - SDL 1 MB SRAM

CPU board - main memory - heat sink, choose 1 of each component

855GME CPU board (XTX)

5PC600.X855-00 - PM 1100 MHz

5PC600.X855-02 - PM 1400 MHz
5PC600.X855-04 - CM 600 MHz
5PC600.X855-05 - CM 1000 MHz
Main memory

5MMDDR.0256-00 - 256 MB
5MMDDR.0512-00 - 512 MB
5MMDDR.1024-00 - 1 GB
Heat sink

5AC600.HS03-01

Configuration - optional APC620 embedded

UPS module

5AC600.UPSI-00 (Add-on UPS module)

Supply voltage connector Select 1

0TB103.9 (screw clamp)

0TB103.91 (cage clamp)

Figure 6: Selection guide - Basic system and optional components APC620 embedded

Explanation:

1) Select a system unit.

2) Select CPU board (select 1).

3) Select main memory and heat sink (selection 1 each).

4) Select optional components.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 59

 Technical Data • Entire device

2. Entire device

2.1 APC620, 1 PCI slot variant

2.1.1 Interfaces

Add-on UPS slot Add-on interface slot

MIC, Line IN,

PCI slot 1 half-size
Line OUT

Monitor / Panel
SDL (Smart Display Link) / DVI
Supply voltage
+24 VDC
USB1, USB2

Ethernet2
LED for:
Power
HDD Ethernet1
Link1
COM2
Link2

COM1

Heat sink

Heat sink seal

Warning
VOID WARRANTY
IF SEAL BROKEN

060003861

1) Slot only present on 5PC600.SX01-00 devices with Rev. H0 or higher.

Figure 7: Interface overview - APC620, 1 PCI slot variant (top)

Warning!
Do not remove the mounting screws from the heat sink, as it is connected to the
processor and chipset by a thermal coupling. Should this connection be broken, the
APC620 must be sent for repair. Removal of the mounting screws, which can be
determined by a broken seal, voids all warranty.

During operation, surface temperatures of the heat sink may reach 70°C (warning
"hot surface").

60 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Technical Data
LED for: Power, HDD
Link1, Link2

Section 2
CompactFlash slot

Add-on drive slot

Power button Permanent

magnet
Reset button

PS/2 keyboard
or PS/2 mouse

Battery

Serial number
sticker

Hardware
security key

Figure 8: Interface overview - APC620, 1 PCI slot variant (front)

Information:
The orange front doors contain two permanent magnets. Contact between a data
carrier that saves data magnetically (hard disk, diskette, the magnetic strip of a
credit card, etc.) and a magnet can cause loss of data.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 61

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.1.2 Technical data

Features APC620, 1 PCI slot variant

B&R ID code Component-dependent, see 3.1 "System units", on page 174
Boot loader / Operating system BIOS / see the chapter 4 "Software", on page 371
Processor Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Cooling
Method Passive via heat sink and optionally supported with an active fan kit
Main memory max. 512 MB with 815E CPU board, max. 1 GB with 855GME CPU board
Graphics
Controller Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1) (see also page 793)
Buffer time 10 ms, dependent on the system unit revision (see page 564)
Real-time clock
Battery-buffered Yes
Accuracy Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Battery See also page 158
Type Renata 950 mAh
Removable Yes, accessible behind the orange cover
Lifespan 4 years2) 3)
Ethernet
Controller See also page 130 or page 132
Amount 2
CAN bus Optional using add-on interface (5AC600.CANI-00)
CompactFlash See also page 152 or page 153
Type Type I
Amount 1 (max. 4 using optional components)
Serial interface See also page 123 or page 124
Amount 2
Type RS232, modem-capable, not electrically isolated
UART 16550 compatible, 16 byte FIFO
Transfer rate Max. 115 kBaud
Connection 9-pin DSUB
USB interface See also section "USB port", on page 133
Type USB 2.0
Amount 2
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 MBit/s), full speed (12 MBit/s), to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Connection Type A
Current load Max. 500 mA per connection
Reset button Yes, accessible behind the orange cover
LEDs 4 directed outwards via fiber optic lines, also see section "Status LEDs", on page 150
PCI slots See also section "PCI slots", on page 147
half-size 1
full-size -
Add-on UPS internal slot Yes
5PC600.SX01-00 starting with revision H0
See also section "Add-on UPS module slot", on page 146

Table 24: Technical data - APC620, 1 PCI slot variant

62 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Features APC620, 1 PCI slot variant

SRAM internal slot options Yes
5PC600.SX01-00 starting with revision I0
Electrical characteristics
Power supply
Rated voltage 24 VDC ±25%
Rated current 3.8 A
Starting current Typ. 7 A, max. 40 A for < 300 μs
Power consumption Component-dependent, see section 2.8 "Power management APC620 system unit with 1 PCI slot"
Mechanical characteristics

Technical Data
Housing4)

Section 2
Item Galvanized plate, plastic
Paint Light gray (similar to Pantone 427CV), dark gray (similar to Pantone 432CV)
Front cover Colored orange plastic (similar to Pantone 144CV)
Outer dimensions See "Dimensions", on page 65
Weight Approx. 3.4 kg (component-dependent)
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation Component-dependent, see the section about ambient temperature on page 89 and page 93
Bearings -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Bearings Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Transport Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Vibration5)
Operation (continuous) 2 - 9 Hz: 1.75 mm amplitude / 9 - 200 Hz: 0.5 g
Operation (occasional) 2 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude / 9 - 200 Hz: 1 g
Bearings 2 - 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 - 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 - 500 Hz: 4 g
Transport 2 - 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 - 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 - 500 Hz: 4 g
Shock5)
Operation 15 g, 11 ms
Bearings 30 g, 15 ms
Transport 30 g, 15 ms
Protection type IP20
Altitude
Operation max. 3000 m6) (component-dependent)
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emissions
Network-related emissions EN 61000-6-4, EN 55022 A
Emissions EN 61000-6-4, EN 55011 class A, EN 55022 class A, EN 61131-2, 47 CFR Part 15

Table 24: Technical data - APC620, 1 PCI slot variant (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 63

 Technical Data • Entire device

Electromagnetic compatibility APC620, 1 PCI slot variant

Immunity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
High-frequency electromagnetic fields EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
High-speed transient disturbances
(Burst) EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Surges EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Conducted values EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Magnetic fields with electrical EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
frequencies
Voltage dips, interruptions EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Damped vibration
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024

Table 24: Technical data - APC620, 1 PCI slot variant (Forts.)

1) Maintenance controller extended.

2) At 50°C, 8.5 μA of the supplied components and a self discharge of 40%.
3) If an SRAM module (Mod. No. 5AC600.SRAM-00) is installed, the buffer duration is 2½ years.
4) Depending on the process or batch, there may be visible deviations in the color and surface structure.
5) Maximum values, as long as no other individual component specifies any other.
6) Derating the maximum ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500 meters above sea level).

64 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.1.3 Dimensions

65
15 35 .4 2
ø5 12

24
9
42.7
ø11

Technical Data
Section 2
184.6
244

260
222
270

19
18

15

5
3 59.6 “A”

Information:
Measurement “A” depends on
the APC620 heat sink used.
APC620 heat sink Dimensions
model number in mm

5AC600.HS01-00 12.8
5AC600.HS01-01 12.8
241
244
251

5AC600.HS01-02 28

Nominal General tolerance according

measurement area to DIN ISO 2768 medium
up to 6 mm ± 0.1 mm
over 6 to 30 mm ± 0.2 mm
over 30 to 120 mm ± 0.3 mm
over 120 to 400 mm ± 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 mm ± 0.8 mm
65

Figure 9: Dimensions - APC620, 1 PCI slot variant

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 65

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.2 APC620, 2 PCI slot variant

2.2.1 Interfaces

2)
Add-on UPS slot Add-on interface slot
1)
AP Link slot
PCI slot 2 half-size MIC, Line IN,
Line OUT
PCI slot 1 half-size
Monitor / Panel
SDL (Smart Display Link) / DVI
Supply voltage
+24 VDC
USB 1, USB 2

Ethernet 2
LED for:
Power
HDD Ethernet 1
Link1
Link2
COM 2

COM 1

Heat sink

Heat sink seal

Warning
VOID WARRANTY
IF SEAL BROKEN

060003861

1) Can only be used with system unit 5PC600.SX02-00

2) Slot is standard starting with 5PC600.SX02-00, Rev. G0 and 5PC600.SX02-01 Rev. H0

Figure 10: Interface overview - APC620, 2 PCI slot variant (top)

Warning!
Do not remove mounting screws from the heat sink, as it is connected to the
processor and chipset by a thermal coupling. Should this connection be broken, the
APC620 must be sent for repair. Removal of the mounting screws, which can be
determined by a broken seal, voids all warranty.

During operation, surface temperatures of the heat sink may reach 70°C (warning
"hot surface").

66 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Technical Data
Bottom slide-in slot 1

Section 2
eject drive 1)

LED for: Power, HDD

Link1, Link2

Slide-in slot 1 drive slot

Add-on drive slot

CompactFlash slot

Permanent
magnet

Power button

Reset button

PS/2 keyboard
or PS/2 mouse

Battery

Serial number
sticker

Hardware
security key
Bottom slide-in slot 1
eject drive 1)

1) The side cover of the PC 620 must be opened before ejecting a drive.

Figure 11: Interface overview - APC620, 2 PCI slot variant (front)

Information:
The orange front doors contain two permanent magnets. Contact between a data
carrier that saves data magnetically (hard disk, diskette, the magnetic strip of a
credit card, etc.) and a magnet can cause loss of data.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 67

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.2.2 Technical data

Features APC620, 2 PCI slot variant

B&R ID code Component-dependent, see 3.1 "System units", on page 174
Boot loader / Operating system BIOS / see the chapter 4 "Software", on page 371
Processor Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Cooling
Method Passive via heat sink and optionally supported with an active fan kit
Main memory Max. 512 MB with 815E CPU board, max. 1 GB with 855GME CPU board
Graphics
Controller Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1) (see also page 793)
Buffer time 10 ms, dependent on the system unit revision (see page 564)
Real-time clock
Battery-buffered Yes
Accuracy Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Battery See also page 158
Type Renata 950 mAh
Removable Yes, accessible behind the orange cover
Lifespan 4 years2) 3)
Ethernet
Controller See also page 130 or page 132
Amount 2
CAN bus Optional using add-on interface (5AC600.CANI-00)
CompactFlash See also page 152 or page 153
Type Type I
Amount 2 (max. 4 using optional components)
Serial interface See also page 123 or page 124
Amount 2
Type RS232, modem-capable, not electrically isolated
UART 16550 compatible, 16 byte FIFO
Transfer rate Max. 115 kBaud
Connection 9-pin DSUB
USB interface See also section "USB port", on page 133
Type USB 2.0
Amount 2
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 MBit/s), full speed (12 MBit/s), to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Connection Type A
Current load Max. 500 mA per connection
Reset button Yes, accessible behind the orange cover
LEDs 4 directed outwards via fiber optic lines, also see section "Status LEDs", on page 150
PCI slots See also section "PCI slots", on page 147
half-size 2
full-size -
Add-on UPS internal slot Yes
5PC600.SX02-00 starting with revision G0, 5PC600.SX02-01 starting with revision H0 present
See also section "Add-on UPS module slot", on page 146

Table 25: Technical data - APC620, 2 PCI slot variant

68 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Features APC620, 2 PCI slot variant

SRAM internal slot options Yes
5PC600.SX02-00 starting with revision H0, 5PC600.SX02-01 starting with revision K0 present
Electrical characteristics
Power supply
Rated voltage 24 VDC ±25%
Rated current 3.8 A
Starting current Typ. 7 A, max. 40 A for < 300 μs
Power consumption Component-dependent, see section 2.8 "Power management APC620 system unit with 1 PCI slot"
Mechanical characteristics

Technical Data
Housing4)

Section 2
Item Galvanized plate, plastic
Paint Light gray (similar to Pantone 427CV), dark gray (similar to Pantone 432CV)
Front cover Colored orange plastic (similar to Pantone 144CV)
Outer dimensions See "Dimensions", on page 71
Weight Approx. 4.5 kg (component-dependent)
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation Component-dependent, see the section about ambient temperature on page 89 and page 93
Bearings -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Bearings Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Transport Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Vibration5)
Operation (continuous) 2 - 9 Hz: 1.75 mm amplitude / 9 - 200 Hz: 0.5 g
Operation (occasional) 2 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude / 9 - 200 Hz: 1 g
Bearings 2 - 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 - 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 - 500 Hz: 4 g
Transport 2 - 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 - 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 - 500 Hz: 4 g
Shock5)
Operation 15 g, 11 ms
Bearings 30 g, 15 ms
Transport 30 g, 15 ms
Protection type IP20
Altitude
Operation max. 3000 m6) (component-dependent)
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emissions
Network-related emissions EN 61000-6-4, EN 55022 A
Emissions EN 61000-6-4, EN 55011 class A, EN 55022 class A, EN 61131-2, 47 CFR Part 15

Table 25: Technical data - APC620, 2 PCI slot variant (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 69

 Technical Data • Entire device

Electromagnetic compatibility APC620, 2 PCI slot variant

Immunity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
High-frequency electromagnetic fields EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
High-speed transient disturbances
(Burst) EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Surges EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Conducted values EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Magnetic fields with electrical EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
frequencies
Voltage dips, interruptions EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Damped vibration
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024

Table 25: Technical data - APC620, 2 PCI slot variant (Forts.)

1) Maintenance controller extended.

2) At 50°C, 8.5 μA of the supplied components and a self discharge of 40%.
3) If an SRAM module (Mod. No. 5AC600.SRAM-00) is installed, the buffer duration is 2½ years.
4) Depending on the process or batch, there may be visible deviations in the color and surface structure.
5) Maximum values, as long as no other individual component specifies any other.
6) Derating the maximum ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500 meters above sea level).

70 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.2.3 Dimensions

104.5
17.3 70 .4
ø5 2 14

24
42.7
9
ø11

Technical Data
Section 2
184.6
244

260
270
222

19
18

15

5
3 99.1 “A ”

Information:
Measurement “A” depends on
APC620 heat sink used.
APC620 heat sink Dimension
model number in mm

5AC600.HS01-00 12.8
5AC600.HS01-01 12.8
241
244
253

5AC600.HS01-02 28

Nominal General tolerance according

measurement area to DIN ISO 2768 medium
up to 6 mm ± 0.1 mm
over 6 to 30 mm ± 0.2 mm
over 30 to 120 mm ± 0.3 mm
over 120 to 400 mm ± 0.5 mm
104.5 over 400 to 1000 mm ± 0.8 mm

Figure 12: Dimensions - APC620, 2 PCI slot variant

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 71

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.3 APC620, 3 PCI slot variant

2.3.1 Interfaces

Add-on USV slot

Add-on interface slot
AP Link slot
MIC, Line IN,
PCI Slot 3 full-size
Line OUT
PCI Slot 2 full-size
PCI Slot 1 full-size Monitor / Panel
SDL (Smart Display Link) / DVI
Supply voltage
+24 VDC

USB 1, USB 2
LED for:
Power Ethernet 2
HDD
Link1 Ethernet 1
Link2
COM 2

COM 1

Heat sink

Heat sink seal

Warning
VOID WARRANTY
IF SEAL BROKEN

060003861

Figure 13: Interface overview - APC620, 3 PCI slot variant (top)

Warning!
Do not remove mounting screws from the heat sink, as it is connected to the
processor and chipset by a thermal coupling. Should this connection be broken, the
APC620 must be sent for repair. Removal of the mounting screws, which can be
determined by a broken seal, voids all warranty.

During operation, surface temperatures of the heat sink may reach 70°C (warning
"hot surface").

72 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Bottom slide-in slot 1

eject drive
LED for: Power, HDD
Link1, Link2

Technical Data
Slide-in slot 1 drive slot

Section 2
Add-on drive slot
CompactFlash slot

Power button Slide-In

Slot 1

Reset button
PS/2 keyboard
or PS/2 mouse
Battery Permanent
magnet
Hardware
security key
Bottom slide-in slot 11)
eject drive

Serial number
sticker

1) The side cover of the PC 620 must be opened before ejecting a drive.

Figure 14: Interface overview - APC620, 3 PCI slot variant (front)

Information:
The orange front doors contain three permanent magnets. Contact between a data
carrier that saves data magnetically (hard disk, diskette, the magnetic strip of a
credit card, etc.) and a magnet can cause loss of data.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 73

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.3.2 Technical data

Features APC620, 3 PCI slot variant

B&R ID code Component-dependent, see 3.1 "System units", on page 174
Boot loader / Operating system BIOS / see the chapter 4 "Software", on page 371
Processor Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Cooling
Method Passive via heat sink and optionally supported with an active fan kit
Main memory Max. 1 GB with 855GME CPU board
Graphics
Controller Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1) (see also page 793)
Buffer time 10 ms, dependent on the system unit revision (see page 564)
Real-time clock
Battery-buffered Yes
Accuracy Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Battery See also page 158
Type Renata 950 mAh
Removable Yes, accessible behind the orange cover
Lifespan 4 years2) 3)
Ethernet
Controller See also page 130 or page 132
Amount 2
CAN bus Optional using add-on interface (5AC600.CANI-00)
CompactFlash See also page 152 or page 153
Type Type I
Amount 2 (max. 4 using optional components)
Serial interface See also page 123 or page 124
Amount 2
Type RS232, modem-capable, not electrically isolated
UART 16550 compatible, 16 byte FIFO
Transfer rate Max. 115 kBaud
Connection 9-pin DSUB
USB interface See also section "USB port", on page 133
Type USB 2.0
Amount 2
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 MBit/s), full speed (12 MBit/s), to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Connection Type A
Current load Max. 500 mA per connection
Reset button Yes, accessible behind the orange cover
LEDs 4 directed outwards via fiber optic lines, also see section "Status LEDs", on page 150
PCI slots See also section "PCI slots", on page 147
half-size -
full-size 3
Add-on UPS internal slot Yes
See also section "Add-on UPS module slot", on page 146
SRAM internal slot options Yes

Table 26: Technical data - APC620, 3 PCI slot variant

74 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Electrical characteristics APC620, 3 PCI slot variant

Power supply
Rated voltage 24 VDC ±25%
Rated current 5A
Starting current Typ. 10 A, max. 40 A for < 300 μs
Power consumption Component-dependent, see section 2.10 "Power management APC620 system unit with 3 PCI slots"
Mechanical characteristics
Housing4)
Item Galvanized plate, plastic
Paint Light gray (similar to Pantone 427CV), dark gray (similar to Pantone 432CV)
Front cover Colored orange plastic (similar to Pantone 144CV)

Technical Data
Section 2
Outer dimensions See "Dimensions", on page 76
Weight Approx. 4.5 kg (component-dependent)
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation Component-dependent, see the section about ambient temperature on page 93
Bearings -20 to +60°C
Transport -20 to +60°C
Relative humidity
Operation Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Bearings Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Transport Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Vibration5)
Operation (continuous) 2 - 9 Hz: 1.75 mm amplitude / 9 - 200 Hz: 0.5 g
Operation (occasional) 2 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude / 9 - 200 Hz: 1 g
Bearings 2 - 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 - 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 - 500 Hz: 4 g
Transport 2 - 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 - 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 - 500 Hz: 4 g
Shock5)
Operation 15 g, 11 ms
Bearings 30 g, 15 ms
Transport 30 g, 15 ms
Protection type IP20
Altitude
Operation max. 3000 m6) (component-dependent)
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emissions
Network-related emissions EN 61000-6-4, EN 55022 A
Emissions EN 61000-6-4, EN 55011 class A, EN 55022 class A, EN 61131-2, 47 CFR Part 15
Immunity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
High-frequency electromagnetic fields EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
High-speed transient disturbances
(Burst) EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Surges EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Conducted values EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Magnetic fields with electrical EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
frequencies
Voltage dips, interruptions EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Damped vibration
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024

Table 26: Technical data - APC620, 3 PCI slot variant (Forts.)

1) Maintenance controller extended.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 75

 Technical Data • Entire device

2) At 50°C, 8.5 μA of the supplied components and a self discharge of 40%.

3) If an SRAM module (Mod. No. 5AC600.SRAM-00) is installed, the buffer duration is 2½ years.
4) Depending on the process or batch, there may be visible deviations in the color and surface structure.
5) Maximum values, as long as no other individual component specifies any other.
6) Derating the maximum ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500 meters above sea level).

2.3.3 Dimensions

125

17.2 90.5 2.5

14
ø 5.4

24
42.8

ø11
9
384

324.5

410
362

400
19
18

15
3 119.5

"A"
Information:
Measurement “A” depends on the
APC620 heat sink used.
APC620 heat sink Measurement
model number in mm

5AC600.HS02-00 12.8
5AC600.HS02-01 28
241
244
253

Nominal measurement General tolerance according to

range DIN ISO 2768 medium
Up to 6 mm ± 0.1 mm
over 6 to 30 mm ± 0.2 mm
over 30 to 120 mm ± 0.3 mm
125.2 ± 0.5 mm
over 120 to 400 mm
over 400 to 1000 mm ± 0.8 mm

Figure 15: Dimensions - APC620, 3 PCI slot variant

76 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.4 APC620, 5 PCI slot variant

2.4.1 Interfaces

1) 2)
AP Link slot Add-on USV slot
PCI slot 1 Add-on interface slot
PCI slot 2
PCI slot 3
PCI slot 4 MIC, Line IN,
Line OUT

Technical Data
PCI slot 5

Section 2
Monitor / Panel
SDL (Smart Display Link) / DVI
Supply voltage
+24 VDC
USB 1, USB 2

Ethernet 2
LED for:
Power
HDD Ethernet 1
Link1
Link2
COM 2

COM 1

Heat sink

Heat sink seal

Warning VOID WARRANTY
IF SEAL BROKEN

060003861

1) Can only be used with a 5PC600.SX05-00 system unit.

2) Slot standard on 5PC600.SX05-00 starting with Rev. F0 and on 5PC600.SX05-01 starting with Rev. F0 .

Figure 16: Interface overview - APC620, 5 PCI slot variant (top)

Warning!
Do not remove the mounting screws from the heat sink, as it is connected to the
processor and chipset by a thermal coupling. Should this connection be broken, the
APC620 must be sent for repair. Removal of the mounting screws, which can be
determined by a broken seal, voids all warranty.

During operation, surface temperatures of the heat sink may reach 70°C (warning
"hot surface").

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 77

 Technical Data • Entire device

Power, HDD
LED for:
Link1, Link2
Top slide-in slot 2
eject drive 1)
Top slide-in slot 1
eject drive 1)
CompactFlash slot
Add-on drive slot

Slide-in slot 1
drive slot
Slide-in slot 2 Permanent
drive slot magnet
Power button
Reset button

PS/2 keyboard
or PS/2 mouse
Battery
Serial number
sticker
Hardware
security key

Bottom slide-in slot 2

eject drive 1)

Bottom slide-in slot 1

eject drive 1)
1) Before ejecting a drive the cover of the Automation PC 620 must be opened

Figure 17: Interface overview - APC620, 5 PCI slot variant (front)

Information:
The orange front doors contain two permanent magnets. Contact between a data
carrier that saves data magnetically (hard disk, diskette, the magnetic strip of a
credit card, etc.) and a magnet can cause loss of data.

78 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.4.2 Technical data

Features APC620, 5 PCI slot variant

B&R ID code Component-dependent, see 3.1 "System units", on page 174
Boot loader / Operating system BIOS / see the chapter 4 "Software", on page 371
Processor Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Cooling
Method Passive via heat sink and optionally supported with an active fan kit
Main memory Max. 512 MB with 815E CPU board, max. 1 GB with 855GME CPU board

Technical Data
Graphics

Section 2
Controller Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1) (see also page 793)
Buffer time 10 ms, dependent on the system unit revision (see page 564)
Real-time clock
Battery-buffered Yes
Accuracy Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Battery See also page 158
Type Renata 950 mAh
Removable Yes, accessible behind the orange cover
Lifespan 4 years2) 3)
Ethernet
Controller See also page 130 or page 132
Amount 2
CAN bus Optional using add-on interface (5AC600.CANI-00)
CompactFlash See also page 152 or page 153
Type Type I
Amount 2 (max. 4 using optional components)
Serial interface See also page 123 or page 124
Amount 2
Type RS232, modem-capable, not electrically isolated
UART 16550 compatible, 16 byte FIFO
Transfer rate Max. 115 kBaud
Connection 9-pin DSUB
USB interface See also section "USB port", on page 133
Type USB 2.0
Amount 2
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 MBit/s), full speed (12 MBit/s), to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Connection Type A
Current load Max. 500 mA per connection
Reset button Yes, accessible behind the orange cover
LEDs 4 directed outwards via fiber optic lines, also see section "Status LEDs", on page 150
PCI slots See also section "PCI slots", on page 147
half-size 5
full-size -
Add-on UPS internal slot Yes
5PC600.SX05-00 starting with revision F0, 5PC600.SX05-01 starting with revision F0 present
See also section "Add-on UPS module slot", on page 146

Table 27: Technical data - APC620, 5 PCI slot variant

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 79

 Technical Data • Entire device

Features APC620, 5 PCI slot variant

SRAM internal slot options Yes
5PC600.SX05-00 starting with revision H0, 5PC600.SX05-01 starting with revision H0 present
Electrical characteristics
Power supply
Rated voltage 24 VDC ±25%
Rated current 5A
Starting current Typ. 10 A, max. 40 A for < 300 μs
Power consumption Component-dependent, see section 2.11 "Power management APC620 system units with 5 PCI slots"
Mechanical characteristics
Housing4)
Item Galvanized plate, plastic
Paint Light gray (similar to Pantone 427CV), dark gray (similar to Pantone 432CV)
Front cover Colored orange plastic (similar to Pantone 144CV)
Outer dimensions See "Dimensions", on page 82
Weight Approx. 5.7 kg (component-dependent)
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation Component-dependent, see the section about ambient temperature on page 89 and page 93
Bearings -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Bearings Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Transport Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Vibration5)
Operation (continuous) 2 - 9 Hz: 1.75 mm amplitude / 9 - 200 Hz: 0.5 g
Operation (occasional) 2 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude / 9 - 200 Hz: 1 g
Bearings 2 - 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 - 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 - 500 Hz: 4 g
Transport 2 - 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 - 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 - 500 Hz: 4 g
Shock5)
Operation 15 g, 11 ms
Bearings 30 g, 15 ms
Transport 30 g, 15 ms
Protection type IP20
Altitude
Operation max. 3000 m6) (component-dependent)
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emissions
Network-related emissions EN 61000-6-4, EN 55022 A
Emissions EN 61000-6-4, EN 55011 class A, EN 55022 class A, EN 61131-2, 47 CFR Part 15

Table 27: Technical data - APC620, 5 PCI slot variant (Forts.)

80 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Electromagnetic compatibility APC620, 5 PCI slot variant

Immunity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
High-frequency electromagnetic fields EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
High-speed transient disturbances
(Burst) EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Surges EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Conducted values EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Magnetic fields with electrical EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
frequencies
Voltage dips, interruptions EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Damped vibration

Technical Data
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024

Section 2
Table 27: Technical data - APC620, 5 PCI slot variant (Forts.)

1) Maintenance controller extended.

2) At 50°C, 8.5 μA of the supplied components and a self discharge of 40%.
3) If an SRAM module (Mod. No. 5AC600.SRAM-00) is installed, the buffer duration is 2½ years.
4) Depending on the process or batch, there may be visible deviations in the color and surface structure.
5) Maximum values, as long as no other individual component specifies any other.
6) Derating the maximum ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500 meters above sea level).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 81

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.4.3 Dimensions

185.4
22.7 70 70
2 14

24
9

.4
ø5
1
ø1
244

260
270
222

19
18

15

5
3 180 “A ”

Information:
Measurement “A” depends on
APC620 heat sink used.
APC620 heat sink Dimension
model number in mm

5AC600.HS01-00 12.8
241.1

5AC600.HS01-01 12.8
253

5AC600.HS01-02 28

Nominal General tolerance according

measurement area to DIN ISO 2768 medium
9.5

up to 6 mm ± 0.1 mm
over 6 to 30 mm ± 0.2 mm
over 30 to 120 mm ± 0.3 mm
over 120 to 400 mm ± 0.5 mm
185.3 over 400 to 1000 mm ± 0.8 mm

Figure 18: Dimensions - APC620, 5 PCI slot variant

82 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.5 APC620 embedded variant

2.5.1 Interfaces

Add-on UPS slot

POWERLINK
Ethernet 10/100 MBit
COM1

Technical Data
CAN
Status LEDs CAN / X2X

Section 2
+24 VDC supply voltage
Monitor/Panel
SDL (Smart Display Link) / DVI
4 x USB
LED for:
Power COM2
CF
X2X
Link

Heat sink

Heat sink seal

Warning label
VOID WARRANTY
IF SEAL BROKEN

060003861

Figure 19: APC620 embedded variant interface overview - top side

Warning!
Do not remove the mounting screws from the heat sink, as it is connected to the
processor and chipset by a thermal coupling. Should this connection be broken, the
APC620 embedded must be sent for repair. Removal of the mounting screws, which
can be determined by a broken seal, voids all warranty.

During operation, surface temperatures of the heat sink may reach 70°C (warning
"hot surface").

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 83

 Technical Data • Entire device

Status LEDs for:

Power, CF, Link

CompactFlash slot 2 - CF2

CompactFlash slot 1 - CF1

CAN terminating switch

Permanent
CAN terminating LED magnets

Serial number label

Power button

Hardware Security Key

Power button

CAN node number (x16, x1)

Battery

POWERLINK
station number (x16, x1)

Figure 20: APC620 embedded variant interface overview - front side

Information:
The orange front doors contain two permanent magnets. Contact between a data
carrier that saves data magnetically (hard disk, diskette, the magnetic strip of a
credit card, etc.) and a magnet can cause loss of data.

84 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.5.2 Technical data

Features APC620 embedded variant

B&R ID code Component-dependent, see 3.1 "System units", on page 174
Boot loader / Operating system BIOS / see the chapter 4 "Software", on page 371
Processor Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board
Cooling
Method Passive via heat sink
Main memory Max. 1 GB with 855GME CPU board

Technical Data
Graphics

Section 2
Controller Component-dependent, see technical data for the CPU board on page 183
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1) (see also page 793)
Buffer time 10 ms, dependent on the system unit revision (see page 564)
Real-time clock
Battery-buffered Yes
Accuracy Component-dependent, see technical data for the 855GME (XTX) CPU board
Battery See also page 158
Type Renata 950 mAh
Removable Yes, accessible behind the orange cover
Lifespan 2½ years2)
Ethernet Yes
Controller See also page 129
Amount 1
POWERLINK Yes, also see page 127
Amount 1
Station Number Dial 2 pcs.
X2X Link Yes, also see page 125
Amount 1
Status LED Yes, see page 127
CAN bus See also page 125
Amount 1
Transfer rate Max. 500 kBit/s
Node switch Yes
Terminating resistor Yes, can be activated using a switch
Status LED Yes, see page 127
CompactFlash See also page 155
Type Type I
Amount 2
Serial interface See also page 123 or page 124
Amount 2
Type RS232, modem-capable, not electrically isolated
UART 16550-compatible, 16-byte FIFO
Transfer rate Max. 115 kBaud
Connection 9-pin DSUB
USB interface See also page 134
Type USB 2.0
Amount 4
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 MBit/s), full speed (12 MBit/s), to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Connection Type A
Current load Max. 500 mA or 1 A per connection

Table 28: Technical data - APC620 embedded variant

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 85

 Technical Data • Entire device

Features APC620 embedded variant

Reset button Yes, accessible behind the orange cover
LEDs 3 directed outwards via fiber optic lines, also see section "Status LEDs Power, CF, Link (only APC620
embedded)", on page 151
Add-on UPS slot Yes
Electrical characteristics
Power supply
Rated voltage 24 VDC ±25%
Rated current 3.8 A
Starting current Typ. 7 A, max. 40 A for < 300 μs
Power consumption Component-dependent, see section 2.12 "Power management for the APC620 embedded system
unit"
Mechanical characteristics
Housing3)
Item Galvanized plate, plastic
Paint Light gray (similar to Pantone 427CV), dark gray (similar to Pantone 432CV)
Front cover Colored orange plastic (similar to Pantone 144CV)
Outer dimensions See "Dimensions", on page 88
Weight Approx. 1.4 kg (component-dependent)
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation Component-dependent, see the section about ambient temperature on page 93
Bearings -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Bearings Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Transport Component-dependent, see section "Humidity specifications", on page 119
Vibration4)
Operation (continuous) 2 - 9 Hz: 1.75 mm amplitude / 9 - 200 Hz: 0.5 g
Operation (occasional) 2 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude / 9 - 200 Hz: 1 g
Bearings 2 - 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 - 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 - 500 Hz: 4 g
Transport 2 - 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 - 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 - 500 Hz: 4 g
Shock5)
Operation 15 g, 11 ms
Bearings 30 g, 15 ms
Transport 30 g, 15 ms
Protection type IP20
Altitude
Operation max. 3000 m5) (component-dependent)
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emissions
Network-related emissions EN 61000-6-4, EN 55022 A
Emissions EN 61000-6-4, EN 55011 class A, EN 55022 class A, EN 61131-2, 47 CFR Part 15

Table 28: Technical data - APC620 embedded variant (Forts.)

86 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Electromagnetic compatibility APC620 embedded variant

Immunity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
High-frequency electromagnetic fields EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
High-speed transient disturbances
(Burst) EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Surges EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Conducted values EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Magnetic fields with electrical EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
frequencies
Voltage dips, interruptions EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024
Damped vibration

Technical Data
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61131-2, EN 55024

Section 2
Table 28: Technical data - APC620 embedded variant (Forts.)

1) Maintenance controller extended.

2) At 50°C, 8.5 μA of the supplied components and a self discharge of 40%.
3) Depending on the process or batch, there may be visible deviations in the color and surface structure.
4) Maximum values, as long as no other individual component specifies any other.
5) Derating the maximum ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500 meters above sea level).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 87

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.5.3 Dimensions

58

11.5 35 2.5 10.7

Ø5.4

24
9

42.5

ø11
125.1

200
183.8

210

19
18

5
68.3 15
3 52.5 12.8
225.6
220

217

Nominal General tolerance acc.

measurement area to DIN ISO 2768 medium
up to 6 mm ± 0.1 mm
over 6 to 30 mm ± 0.2 mm
over 30 to 120 mm ± 0.3 mm
over 120 to 400 ± 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 ± 0.8 mm
58

Figure 21: APC620 embedded variant - dimensions

88 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.6 Ambient temperatures for systems with an 815E CPU board (ETX)

It is possible to combine CPU boards with various other components, such as drives, main
memory, additional insert cards, etc. dependent on system unit and fan kit. The various
configurations result in varying maximum possible ambient temperatures, which can be seen in
the following graphic (see figure 23 "Ambient temperatures for systems with an 815E CPU board
(ETX)", on page 90).

Information:

Technical Data
Section 2
The maximum specified ambient temperatures were determined under worst-case
conditions.

Experience has shown that higher ambient temperatures can be reached under typical
conditions, e.g. using Microsoft Windows. The testing and evaluation is to be done on-site by the
user (temperatures can be read in BIOS or using the B&R Control Center, see the chapter 4
"Software", on page 371).

Worst-case conditions for systems with an 815E CPU board (ETX)

• HiPower V3.0 from Intel for simulating 100% processor load.

• BurnIn testing tool (BurnIn V4.0 Pro from Passmark Software) to simulate a 100% load
on the interface via loop-back adapters (serial interfaces, add-on and slide-in drives, USB
interfaces, audio outputs).
• Maximum system extension and power consumption.

CPU module
heat build-up
PCI cards
heat build-up
main heat dissipation
via heat sink

PCI card(s) CPU module

Slide-in drive(s) Add-on drive

View from above

Figure 22: Example of worst-case conditions for temperature measurement

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 89

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.6.1 Maximum ambient temperature

815E CPU board without fan kit 815E CPU board with fan kit
1 and heat sink (5AC600.HS01-00) 1 and heat sink (5AC600.HS01-00)
C3 400 C3 733 C3 1000 C3 400 C3 733 C3 1000
All temperature values in degrees

5PC600.E815-00

5PC600.E815-02

5PC600.E815-03
5PC600.E815-02
5PC600.E815-00

5PC600.E815-03
celsius (°C) at 500 meters above sea level.

Derating of the maximum ambient

temperature, generally 1°C per 1000 meters
starting at 500 meters above sea level.

Temperature monitored
2 Max. environmental temperature 50 45 30 55 55 55

in these locations
by sensor(s)
What can still be operated at max. env. temp.,
and what limits are there?
3

On-board CompactFlash 1) 80
Add-on drive

1)
5AC600.CFSI-00 80

I/O
5AC600.HDDI-01 80
5AC600.HDDI-00 (24-hour / standard) -/30 -/25 -/25 35/45 35/45 35/45 45/55

5AC600.CFSS-00 1) 80
5AC600.CDXS-00 45 50 50 50 55

Slide-in srive 1 and 2

Slide-in drive

5AC600.DVDS-00 35 35 40 40 40 45
5AC600.DVRS-00 35 35 40 40 40 45
5AC600.FDDS-00 35 35 40 40 40 50
5AC600.HDDS-01 80
5AC600.HDDS-00 (24-hour / standard) 30/35 30/35 30/35 40/50 40/50 40/50 45/55

5MMSDR.0128-01 -
Main memory

5MMSDR.0256-01 -
5MMSDR.0512-01 -
5PC600.SX01-00 95
Power supply
System units

5PC600.SX02-01 95
5PC600.SX02-00 95
5PC600.SX05-01 95
5PC600.SX05-00 95
5AC600.CANI-00 -
Additional IF

5AC600.485I-00 -
slots

5ACPCI.RAIS-00 (24-hour / standard) 30/35 30/35 30/35 40/50 40/50 40/50 -

5ACPCI.RAIS-01 (24-hour / standard) 30/35 30/35 30/35 40/50 40/50 40/50 -
1) Only possible with a CompactFlash card 5CFCRD.xxxx-06, 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 or 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 from B&R

Figure 23: Ambient temperatures for systems with an 815E CPU board (ETX)

See the following page for a description of the graphic.

90 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.6.2 Minimum ambient temperature

For systems containing one of the following components, the minimum ambient temperature is
+5°C: 5AC600.HDDI-00, 5AC600.CDXS-00, 5AC600.DVDS-00, 5AC600.DVRS-00,
5AC600.FDDS-00, 5AC600.HDDS-00, 5ACPCI.RAIS-00, 5ACPCI.RAIS-01.
If none of these components are used, then the minimum ambient temperature is 0°C.

2.6.3 How do you determine the maximum ambient temperature?

1) Selection of the CPU board (use with or without fan kit).

Technical Data
Section 2
2) The "maximum ambient temperature" line shows the maximum ambient temperature for the
entire system when using this CPU board.

Information:
Maximum temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the maximum
ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500 meters above sea
level).

3) Incorporating additional drives (add-on, slide-in), main memory, additional insert cards, etc.
can change the temperature limits of an APC620 system.

If there is a ✓ (checkmark) next to the component, it can be used at the maximum ambient
temperature of the whole system without problems.

If there is a specific temperature, for example "35", next to the component, then the ambient
temperature of the whole APC620 system cannot exceed this temperature.

Special case: 5AC600.HDDI-00, 5AC600.HDDS-00 and RAID hard disks

For these hard disks, the limits will depend on whether the system is intended for 24-hour1) or
standard1) operation.
Example 1: A temperature limit of "30/35" means
30°C for 24-hour operation and 35°C for standard operation.

Example 2: A temperature limit of "-/25" means

not intended for 24-hour operation and 25°C for standard operation.

Information:
It is generally recommended to use a fan kit when using hard disks 5AC600.HDDI-
00, 5AC600.HDDS-00 and the RAID hard disks.

1) 24-hour operation = 732 POH (Power On Hours) per month, standard operation = 250 POH or 333 POH (Power On Hours) per month.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 91

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.6.4 Temperature monitoring

The APC620 has temperature sensors in various places (I/O, power supply, slide-in drive 1,
slide-in drive 2). The locations of the temperature sensors can be found in the figure
"Temperature sensor locations", on page 791. The value listed in the table represents the
defined maximum temperature for this measurement point1) . An alarm is not triggered when this
temperature is exceeded. The temperatures1) can be read in BIOS (menu item "Advanced" -
Main board/panel features - Main board monitor) or in Microsoft Windows XP/embedded, using
the B&R Control Center.
Additionally, the hard disks for APC620 systems available from B&R are equipped with
S.M.A.R.T, or Self Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology. This makes it possible to
read various parameters, for example the temperature, using software (e.g. HDD thermometer -
freeware) in Microsoft Windows XP/embedded.

1) The measured temperature is a guideline for the immediate ambient temperature, but can be influenced by neighboring components.

92 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.7 Ambient temperatures for systems with an 855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX)

It is possible to combine CPU boards with various other components, such as drives, main
memory, additional insert cards, etc. dependent on system unit and fan kit. The various
configurations result in varying maximum possible ambient temperatures, which can be seen in
the following graphic (see figure 25 "Ambient temperatures for systems with an 855GME CPU
board (ETX / XTX)", on page 94).

Information:

Technical Data
Section 2
The maximum specified ambient temperatures were determined under worst-case
conditions.

Experience has shown that higher ambient temperatures can be reached under typical
conditions, e.g. using Microsoft Windows. The testing and evaluation is to be done on-site by the
user (temperatures can be read in BIOS or using the B&R Control Center, see the chapter 4
"Software", on page 371).

Worst-case conditions for systems with an 855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX)

• Thermal Analysis Tool V1.4 from Intel for simulating 100% processor load.
• BurnIn testing tool (BurnIn V4.0 Pro from Passmark Software) to simulate a 100% load
on the interface via loop-back adapters (serial interfaces, add-on and slide-in drives, USB
interfaces, audio outputs)
• Maximum system extension and power consumption.

CPU module
heat build-up
PCI cards
heat build-up
main heat dissipation
via heat sink

PCI card(s) CPU module

Slide-in drive(s) Add-on drive

View from above

Figure 24: Example of worst-case conditions for temperature measurement

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 93

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.7.1 Maximum ambient temperature

855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX) without fan kit 855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX) with fan kit
and heat sink and heat sink and heat sink and heat sink
1 5AC600.HS01-01 5AC600.HS01-02
1 5AC600.HS01-01 5AC600.HS01-02
CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800 CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800
All temperatures in °C

5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
at 500 m above sea level

Derating of the maximum

ambient temperatrure typically 1°C
per 1000 m after 500 m above sea level

2 Maximum ambient temperature 50 45 45 45 55 55 55 55 45 45

Temp. Monitored
by sensors
What can still be operated at max. ambient temp.?

located in
What are the limitations?
3

1)
Onboard CompactFlash 80
1) 80
5AC600.CFSI-00
5AC600.HDDI-01 80
Add-on drive

5AC600.HDDI-00 (24-hour/Standard) -/30 -/25 -/25 -/25 30/40 30/40 30/40 30/40 -/35 -/35 45/55

I/O
5AC600.HDDI-05 80
5AC600.HDDI-06 80
5AC600.SSDI-00 ≤ D0 75

5AC600.SSDI-00 ≥ E0 80
1)
5AC600.CFSS-00 55
5AC600.CDXS-00 45 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 40 40 45

Slide-in drive 1 and 2

5AC600.DVDS-00 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 30 30 45
Slide-in drive

5AC600.DVRS-00 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 30 30 50
5AC600.FDDS-00 40 35 35 35 45 45 45 45 35 35 80
5AC600.HDDS-01 45/55

5AC600.HDDS-00 (24-hour/Standard) 35/45 30/40 30/40 30/40 40/50 40/50 40/50 40/50 30/40 30/40 80
5AC600.HDDS-02 -
-
Main memory

5MMDDR.0256-00
5MMDDR.0512-00 -
5MMDDR.1024-00 95
5PC600.SX01-00 95
Power supply
System units

5PC600.SX02-00 / -01 95
5PC600.SF03-00 95
5PC600.SX05-00 / -01 -
5AC600.CANI-00 -
5AC600.485I-00 -
Additional insert cards

-
Interfaces / AP Link

5AC600.SDL0-00
5ACPCI.RAIS-00 (24-hour/Standard) 35/45 30/40 30/40 30/40 40/50 40/50 40/50 40/50 30/40 30/40 -
5ACPCI.RAIS-01 (24-hour/Standard) 35/45 30/40 30/40 30/40 40/50 40/50 40/50 40/50 30/40 30/40 -
5ACPCI.RAIC-01 (24-hour/Standard) 35/45 30/40 30/40 30/40 40/50 40/50 40/50 40/50 30/40 30/40 -
5ACPCI.RAIC-03 (24-hour/Standard) -
5ACPCI.RAIC-05 (24-hour/Standard) 45 50 50 50 50
1) Only possible with a CompactFlash card 5CFCRD.xxxx-06, 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 or 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 from B&R

Figure 25: Ambient temperatures for systems with an 855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX)

94 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX) without fan kit

1 and heat sink and heat sink
5AC600.HS03-01 5AC600.HS03-01
CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400
All temperatures in °C

5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
at 500 m above sea level

Derating of the maximum

ambient temperatrure typically 1°C
per 1000 m after 500 m above sea level

Technical Data
2 Maximum ambient temperature 50 45 45 45

Temp. Monitored

Section 2
by sensors
What can still be operated at max. ambient temp.?

located in
What are the limitations?
3

5PC600.SE00-00 < Rev C0 45 40 40 40 95

System units embedded

5PC600.SE00-01 < Rev D0 45 40 40 40 95

Power Supply
5PC600.SE00-02 < Rev D0 45 40 40 40 95
5PC600.SE00-00 ³ Rev C0 95
5PC600.SE00-01 ³ Rev D0 95
5PC600.SE00-02 ³ Rev D0 95

Figure 26: Ambient temperatures for embedded systems with an 855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX)

2.7.2 Minimum ambient temperature

For systems containing one of the following components, the minimum ambient temperature is
+5°C: 5AC600.HDDI-00, 5AC600.CDXS-00, 5AC600.DVDS-00, 5AC600.DVRS-00,
5AC600.FDDS-00, 5AC600.HDDS-00, 5ACPCI.RAIS-00, 5ACPCI.RAIS-01, 5ACPCI.RAIC-01.
If none of these components are used, then the minimum ambient temperature is 0°C.

2.7.3 How do you determine the maximum ambient temperature?

1) Selection of the CPU board (use with or without fan kit).

2) The "maximum ambient temperature" line shows the maximum ambient temperature for the
entire system when using this CPU board.

Information:
Maximum temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the maximum
ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500 meters above sea
level).

3) Incorporating additional drives (add-on, slide-in), main memory, additional insert cards, etc.
can change the temperature limits of an APC620 system.

If there is a ✓ (checkmark) next to the component, it can be used at the maximum ambient
temperature of the whole system without problems.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 95

 Technical Data • Entire device

If there is a specific temperature, for example "35", next to the component, then the ambient
temperature of the whole APC620 system cannot exceed this temperature.

Special case: 5AC600.HDDI-00, 5AC600.HDDS-00 and RAID hard disks

For these hard disks, the limits will depend on whether the system is intended for 24-hour1) or
standard1) operation.
Example 1: A temperature limit of "30/35" means
30°C for 24-hour operation and 35°C for standard operation.

Example 2: A temperature limit of "-/25" means

not intended for 24-hour operation and 25°C for standard operation.

Information:
It is generally recommended to use a fan kit when using hard disks 5AC600.HDDI-
00, 5AC600.HDDS-00 and the RAID hard disks 5ACPCI.RAIS-00, 5ACPCI.RAIS-01,
5ACPCI.RAIC-01 and 5ACPCI.RAIC-03.

2.7.4 Temperature monitoring

The APC620 has temperature sensors in various places (I/O, power supply, slide-in drive 1,
slide-in drive 2). The locations of the temperature sensors can be found in the figure
"Temperature sensor locations", on page 791. The value listed in the table represents the
defined maximum temperature for this measurement point2) . An alarm is not triggered when this
temperature is exceeded. The temperatures2) can be read in BIOS (menu item "Advanced" -
Baseboard/panel features - Baseboard monitor) or in Microsoft Windows XP/Embedded, using
the B&R Control Center.
Additionally, the hard disks for APC620 systems available from B&R are equipped with
S.M.A.R.T, or Self Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology. This makes it possible to
read various parameters, for example the temperature, using software (e.g. HDD thermometer -
freeware) in Microsoft Windows XP/Embedded.

1) 24-hour operation = 732 POH (Power On Hours) per month, standard operation = 250 POH or 333 POH (Power On Hours) per month.
2) The measured temperature is a guideline for the immediate ambient temperature, but can be influenced by neighboring components.

96 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.8 Power management APC620 system unit with 1 PCI slot

2.8.1 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX01-00 revision >= I0

The following block diagram presents the simplified structure of the APC620 supply voltage for
5PC600.SX01-00 system units starting with revision I0.

Add-on UPS UPS battery

module (optional)

Technical Data
Section 2
Supply voltage 15V
24V 15V
+24 VDC
electrically
isolated

3V3 Standby
Buffering capacitors
15V 3V3
(for min. 10 ms)
3V3

5V Standby
5V
5V

Power On
5V -12V
-12V

+12V
5V
+12V +12V
PCI bus

Figure 27: Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX01-00 revision >= I0

Explanation:
The supply voltage is converted to 15 V with a DC/DC converter. These electrically isolated 15
V feed four further DC/DC converters, which generate the remaining voltages.

After the system is turned on (e.g. using the power button), the voltages 3V3 and 5 V are placed
on the bus. Two additional DC/DC converters at the 5 V output generate
-12 V and -12 V, which is then applied to the bus.

The optional APC620 add-on UPS and battery unit is supplied with 15 V and provides an
uninterrupted power supply from the 15 V bus during power failures.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 97

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.8.2 Power calculation with 5PC600.SX01-00 revision >= I0

Information: APC620 System unit 5PC600.SX01-00 This system

C3 400 C3 733 C3 1000 CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800

5PC600.E815-00

5PC600.E815-02

5PC600.E815-03
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
All entries in watts Enter values in this
columns
The entries for the Generator are maximum values.
Entries for the Device are determined maximum
values, but not peak values.

Total power supply (max.) 70

Add-on UPS module, optional 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
max. possible at 5V 70
CPU Board, fixed device 14 18 25 17 21 23 23 37 37
per CompactFlash, optional (add-on, slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hard Disk, optional (add-on, slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
External keyboard PS/2, optional 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
USB Peripheral, optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(max. 2,5 watts per USB1 and USB2 connection)
Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)
External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Devices 5V å
Total power supply
5V

max. possible at +12V 12

Fan kit, optional 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
+12V

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 12 watts with fan kit)

Devices total +12V å

max. possible at -12V 1.2

-12V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 1.2 watts without and with fan kit)

Devices total -12V å

Devices total 5V å
max. possible at 3V3 23
System unit, fixed device 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
3V3

Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)

Devices 3V3 å
Devices total å

1) The total performance of one PCI card per PCI slot (= sum of power consumptions for each voltage area) may not exceed the limits stated for operation with or without
a fan kit.

See section "Starting current", on page 136 for starting current values.

98 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.8.3 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX01-00 revision < I0

The following block diagram presents the simplified structure of the APC620 supply voltage for
5PC600.SX01-00 system units starting with revision < I0.

Add-on UPS UPS battery

module (optional)

Supply voltage 15V

24V 15V

Technical Data
+24 VDC

Section 2
electrically
isolated

15V +12V
Buffering capacitors
(for min. 10 ms) +12V

3V3 standby
15V 3V3
3V3

5V Standby
5V
5V

Power on

5V -12V
-12V

Figure 28: Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX01-00 revision < I0

Explanation:
The supply voltage is converted to 15 V with a DC/DC converter. These electrically isolated 15
volts feed two further DC/DC converters. One generates +12 V, and the other 3V3 and 5V
standby.

After the system is turned on (e.g. using the power button), the voltages 3V3, 5 V, +12 V are
placed on the bus. At the 5 V output, yet another DC/DC converter generates -12 V, and places
these on the bus.

The optional APC620 add-on UPS and battery unit is supplied with 15 V and provides an
uninterrupted power supply from the 15 V bus during power failures.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 99

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.8.4 Power calculation with 5PC600.SX01-00 revision < I0

Information: APC620 System unit 5PC600.SX01-00 This system

C3 400 C3 733 C3 1000 CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800

5PC600.E815-00

5PC600.E815-02

5PC600.E815-03
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
All entries in watts Enter values in this
columns
The entries for the Generator are maximum values.
Entries for the Device are determined maximum
values, but not peak values.

Total power supply (max.) 70

Add-on UPS module, optional 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
max. possible at 5V 70
CPU Board, fixed device 14 18 25 17 21 23 23 37 37
per CompactFlash, optional (add-on, slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hard Disk, optional (add-on, slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
External keyboard PS/2, optional 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
USB Peripheral, optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(max. 2,5 watts per USB1 and USB2 connection)
Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)
External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Devices 5V å
Total power supply
5V

max. possible at -12V 1.2

-12V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

(max. 1.2 watts without and with fan kit)1)

Devices -12V å
Devices total 5V å
max. possible at3V3 23
System unit, fixed device 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
3V3

Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)

Devices 3V3 å
max. possible at +12V 12
Fan kit, optional 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
+12V

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 12 watts with fan kit)

Devices +12V å
Devices total å
1) The total performance of one PCI card per PCI slot (= sum of power consumptions for each voltage area) may not exceed the limits stated for operation with or without
a fan kit.

See section "Starting current", on page 136 for starting current values.

100 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.9 Power management APC620 system units with 2 PCI slots

2.9.1 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX02-00 revision >= H0 and 5PC600.SX02-01 revision
>= K0)

The following block diagram presents the simplified structure of the APC620 supply voltage for
system units 5PC600.SX02-00 (revision H0 and higher), 5PC600.SX02-01 (revision K0 and
higher).

Technical Data
Section 2
Add-on UPS UPS battery
module (optional)

Supply voltage 15V

24V 15V
+24 VDC
electrically
isolated

3V3 Standby
Buffering capacitors
15V 3V3
(for min. 10 ms)
3V3

5V Standby
5V
5V

Power On
5V -12V
-12V

+12V
5V
+12V +12V
PCI bus

Figure 29: Supply voltage for the 2 PCI slots (dependent on system unit version)

Explanation:
The supply voltage is converted to 15 V with a DC/DC converter. These electrically isolated 15
V feed four further DC/DC converters, which generate the remaining voltages.

After the system is turned on (e.g. using the power button), the voltages 3V3 and 5 V are placed
on the bus. Two additional DC/DC converters at the 5 V output generate
-12 V and -12 V, which is then applied to the bus.

The optional APC620 add-on UPS and battery unit is supplied with 15 V and provides an
uninterrupted power supply from the 15 V bus during power failures.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 101

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.9.2 Power calculation with 5PC600.SX02-00 revision >= H0

Information: APC620 System unit 5PC600.SX02-00 This system

C3 400 C3 733 C3 1000 CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800

5PC600.E815-00

5PC600.E815-02

5PC600.E815-03
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
All entries in watts Enter values in this
columns
The entries for the Generator are maximum values.
Entries for the Device are determined maximum
values, but not peak values.

Total power supply (max.) 70

Add-on UPS module, optional 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
max. possible at 5V 70
CPU Board, fixed device 14 18 25 17 21 23 23 37 37
per CompactFlash, optional (add-on, slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hard Disk, optional (add-on, slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
per drive, optional (slide-in CD,DVD CD-RW) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
External keyboard PS/2, optional 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
USB Peripheral, optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(max. 2,5 watts per USB1 and USB2 connection)
Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Graphics adapter (AP Link), optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
PCI card manufacturer limit, optional
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit) 1)

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

5V
Total power supply

Devices 5V å
max. possible at +12V 12
Fan kit, optional 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
+12V

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 12 watts with fan kit)

Devices total +12V å

max. possible at -12V 1.2
-12V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

(max. 1.2 watts without and with fan kit)1)

Devices total -12V å

Devices total 5V å

max. possible at 3V3 23

System unit, fixed device 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Graphics adapter (AP Link), optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
3V3

Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)

Devices 3V3 å
Devices total å
1) The total performance of one PCI card per PCI slot (= sum of power consumptions for each voltage area) may not exceed the limits stated for operation with or without
a fan kit.

See section "Starting current", on page 136 for starting current values.

102 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.9.3 Power calculation with 5PC600.SX02-01 revision >= K0

Information: APC620 System unit 5PC600.SX02-01 This system

C3 400 C3 733 C3 1000 CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800

5PC600.E815-00

5PC600.E815-02

5PC600.E815-03
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
All entries in watts Enter values in this
columns
The entries for the Generator are maximum values.
Entries for the Device are determined maximum
values, but not peak values.

Total power supply (max.) 70

Technical Data
Add-on UPS module, optional 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5

Section 2
max. possible at 5V 70
CPU Board, fixed device 14 18 25 17 21 23 23 37 37
per CompactFlash, optional (add-on, slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hard Disk, optional (add-on, slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
per Drive, optional (slide-in CD,DVD CD-RW) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
External keyboard PS/2, optional 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
USB Peripheral, optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(max. 2,5 watts per USB1 and USB2 connection)
Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
5V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)

(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)
External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Total power supply

Devices 5V å
max. possible at -12V 1.2
-12V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 1.2 watts without and with fan kit)

Devices -12V å
Devices total 5V å
max. possible at 3V3 23
System unit, fixed device 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
3V3

Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)

Devices 3V3 å
max. possible at +12V 12
Fan kit, optional 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
+12V

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 12 watts with fan kit)

Devices +12V å
Devices total å
1) The total performance of one PCI card per PCI slot (= sum of power consumptions for each voltage area) may not exceed the limits stated for operation with or without
a fan kit.

See section "Starting current", on page 136 for starting current values.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 103

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.9.4 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX02-00 revision < H0 and 5PC600.SX02-01 revision
< K0)

The following block diagram presents the simplified structure of the APC620 supply voltage for
system units 5PC600.SX02-00 (revision < H0 and higher), 5PC600.SX02-01 (revision < K0 and
higher).

Add-on UPS UPS battery

module (optional)

Supply voltage 15V

24V 15V
+24 VDC
electrically
isolated

15V +12V
Buffering capacitors
(for min. 10 ms) +12V

3V3 standby
15V 3V3
3V3

5V Standby
5V
5V

Power on

5V -12V
-12V

Figure 30: Supply voltage for the 2 PCI slots (dependent on system unit version)

Explanation:
The supply voltage is converted to 15 V with a DC/DC converter. These electrically isolated 15
volts feed two further DC/DC converters. One generates +12 V, and the other 3V3 and 5V
standby.

After the system is turned on (e.g. using the power button), the voltages 3V3, 5 V, +12 V are
placed on the bus. At the 5 V output, yet another DC/DC converter generates -12 V, and places
these on the bus.

The optional APC620 add-on UPS and battery unit is supplied with 15 V and provides an
uninterrupted power supply from the 15 V bus during power failures.

104 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.9.5 Power calculation with 5PC600.SX02-00 revision < H0

Information: APC620 System unit 5PC600.SX02-00 This system

C3 400 C3 733 C3 1000 CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800

5PC600.E815-00

5PC600.E815-02

5PC600.E815-03
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
All entries in watts Enter values in this
columns
The entries for the Generator are maximum values.
Entries for the Device are determined maximum
values, but not peak values.

Total power supply (max.) 70

Technical Data
Add-on UPS module, optional 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5

Section 2
max. possible at 5V 55
CPU Board, fixed device 14 18 25 17 21 23 23 37 37
per CompactFlash, optional (add-on, slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hard Disk, optional (add-on, slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
per Drive, optional (slide-in CD,DVD CD-RW) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
External keyboard PS/2, optional 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
USB Peripheral, optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(max. 2,5 watts per USB1 and USB2 connection)
Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Graphics adapter (AP Link), optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
5V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit) 1)

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

Total power supply

Devices 5V å
max. possible at -12V 1.2
-12V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 1.2 watts without and with fan kit)

Devices -12V å
Devices total 5V å
max. possible at 3V3 23
System unit, fixed device 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Graphics adapter (AP Link), optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
3V3

Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)

Devices 3V3 å
max. possible at +12V 12
Fan kit, optional 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
+12V

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 12 watts with fan kit)

Devices +12V å
Devices total å
1) The total performance of one PCI card per PCI slot (= sum of power consumptions for each voltage area) may not exceed the limits stated for operation with or without
a fan kit.

See section "Starting current", on page 136 for starting current values.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 105

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.9.6 Power calculation with 5PC600.SX02-01 revision < K0

Information: APC620 System unit 5PC600.SX02-01 This system

C3 400 C3 733 C3 1000 CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800

5PC600.E815-00

5PC600.E815-02

5PC600.E815-03
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
All entries in watts Enter values in this
columns
The entries for the Generator are maximum values.
Entries for the Device are determined maximum
values, but not peak values.

Total power supply (max.) 70

Add-on UPS module, optional 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
max. possible at 5V 55
CPU Board, fixed device 14 18 25 17 21 23 23 37 37
per CompactFlash, optional (add-on, slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hard Disk, optional (add-on, slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
per Drive, optional (slide-in CD,DVD CD-RW) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
External keyboard PS/2, optional 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
USB Peripheral, optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(max. 2,5 watts per USB1 and USB2 connection)
Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
5V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)

(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)
External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Total power supply

Devices 5V å
max. possible at -12V 1.2
-12V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 1.2 watts without and with fan kit)

Devices -12V å
Devices total 5V å
max. possible at 3V3 23
System unit, fixed device 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
3V3

Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)

Devices 3V3 å
max. possible at +12V 12
Fan kit, optional 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
+12V

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 12 watts with fan kit)

Devices +12V å
Devices total å
1) The total performance of one PCI card per PCI slot (= sum of power consumptions for each voltage area) may not exceed the limits stated for operation with or without
a fan kit.

See section "Starting current", on page 136 for starting current values.

106 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.10 Power management APC620 system unit with 3 PCI slots

2.10.1 5PC600.SF03-00 supply voltage

The following block diagram presents the simplified structure of the APC620 supply voltage for
system units 5PC600.SF03-00.

Add-on UPS UPS battery

module (optional)

Technical Data
Section 2
Supply voltage 15V
24V 15V
+24 VDC
electrically
isolated

3V3 Standby
15V 3V3 3V3
Buffering capacitors
(for at least 10 ms)
5V Standby
5V
5V

Power On
5V +12V
+12V
+12V PCI bus

3V3 PCI bus

15V 3V3

5V 5V PCI bus and slide-in

5V -12V PCI bus

-12V
PCI bus and slide-in power supply

Figure 31: Supply voltage block diagram 3 PCI slots

Explanation:
Systems with 3 PCI slots have an additional power supply for the PCI buses and the slide-in
drive. The supply voltage is converted to 15 V with a DC/DC converter. These electrically
isolated 15 volts feed two further DC/DC converters. One generates 5 V for an additional DC/DC
converter, which produces +12 V and +12V PCI bus voltage. The other DC/DC converter
produces 3V3 and 5V standby.
After the system is turned on (e.g. using the power button), the voltages 3V3, 5 V, +12 V are
placed on the bus. At the 5 V output, yet another DC/DC converter generates -12 V, and places
these on the bus.

The optional APC620 add-on UPS and battery unit is supplied with 15 V and provides an
uninterrupted power supply from the 15 V bus during power failures.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 107

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.10.2 Power calculation with system unit 5PC600.SF03-00

Information: APC620 System unit 5PC600.SF03-00 This system

CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800

5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
All entries in watts Enter values in this
column
The entries for the Generator are maximum values.
Entries for the Device are determined maximum
values, but not peak values.

Total power supply (max.) 110

Add-on UPS module, optional 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
max. possible at 5V 70
CPU Board, fixed device 17 21 23 23 37 37
per CompactFlash, optional (add-on) 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hard Disk, optional (add-on) 4 4 4 4 4 4
External keyboard PS/2, optional 1 1 1 1 1 1
USB Peripheral, optional 5 5 5 5 5 5
(max. 2,5 watts per USB1 and USB2 connection)
Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
5V

Graphics adapter (AP Link), optional 5 5 5 5 5 5

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 5 5 5 5 5 5
max. possible at +12V 24
Fan Kit, optional 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
+12V

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 10 10 10 10 10 10

PCI manufacturer limits, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 12 watts with fan kit)

Devices total 5V å
Total power supply

max. possible at 3V3 23

System unit, fixed device 4 4 4 4 4 4
3V3

Graphics adapter (AP Link), optional 5 5 5 5 5 5

Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
Devices å

PCI bus and slide-in power supply (max.) 50

max. possible at 5V PCI bus and slide-in 50
per CompactFlash, optional (slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1
PCI bus and slide-in power supply

per Hard Disk, optional (slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4

per drive, optional (slide-in - CD/DVD) 4 4 4 4 4 4
PCI manufacturer limits, optional
1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)
5V

max. possible at -12V PCI bus and slide-in 1.2

-12V

PCI manufacturer limits, optional

(max. 1.2 watts without and with fan kit)1)

Devices -12V å
Devices total 5V å
max. possible at 3V3 PCI bus and slide-in 23
3V3

PCI manufacturer limits, optional

(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit) 1)

Devices 3V3 å

Total PCI bus and slide-in å

Devices total å
1) The total performance of one PCI card per PCI slot (= sum of power consumptions for each voltage area) may not exceed the limits stated for operation with or without
a fan kit.

See section "Starting current", on page 136 for starting current values.

108 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.11 Power management APC620 system units with 5 PCI slots

2.11.1 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX05-00 (revision >= H0) and 5PC600.SX05-01
(revision >= H0)

The following block diagram presents the simplified structure of the APC620 supply voltage for
system units 5PC600.SX05-00 (Revision H0), 5PC600.SX05-01 (Revision H0).

Technical Data
Add-on UPS UPS battery
module (optional)

Section 2
Supply voltage 15V
24V 15V
+24 VDC
electrically
isolated

3V3 Standby
15V 3V3 3V3
Buffering capacitors
(for at least10 ms)
5V Standby
5V
5V

Power On
5V +12V
+12V
+12V PCI bus

3V3 PCI bus

15V 3V3

5V 5V PCI bus and slide-in

5V -12V PCI bus

-12V
PCI bus and slide-in power supply

Figure 32: Supply voltage for the 5 PCI slots (dependent on system unit version)

Explanation:
Systems with 5 PCI slots have an additional power supply for the PCI buses and the slide-in
drive. The supply voltage is converted to 15 V with a DC/DC converter. These electrically
isolated 15 volts feed two further DC/DC converters. One generates 5 V for an additional DC/DC
converter, which produces +12 V and +12V PCI bus voltage. The other DC/DC converter
produces 3V3 and 5V standby.

After the system is turned on (e.g. using the power button), the voltages 3V3, 5 V, +12 V are
placed on the bus. At the 5 V output, yet another DC/DC converter generates -12 V, and places
these on the bus.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 109

 Technical Data • Entire device

The optional APC620 add-on UPS and battery unit is supplied with 15 V and provides an
uninterrupted power supply from the 15 V bus during power failures.

110 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.11.2 Power calculation with system unit 5PC600.SX05-00 (revision >= H0)

Information: APC620 System unit 5PC600.SX05-00 This system

C3 400 C3 733 C3 1000 CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800

5PC600.E815-00

5PC600.E815-02

5PC600.E815-03
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
All entries in watts Enter values in this
columns
The entries for the Generator are maximum values.
Entries for the Device are determined maximum
values, but not peak values.

Total power supply (max.) 110

Technical Data
Add-on UPS module, optional 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5

Section 2
max. possible at 5V 70
CPU Board, fixed device 14 18 25 17 21 23 23 37 37
per CompactFlash, optional (add-on, slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hard Disk, optional (add-on, slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
External keyboard PS/2, optional 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
USB Peripheral, optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(max. 2,5 watts per USB1 and USB2 connection)
Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
5V

Graphics adapter (AP Link), optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
max. possible at +12V 24
Fan kit, optional 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
+12V

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 12 watts with fan kit)
Devices total 5V å
max. possible at 3V3 23
Total power supply

System unit, fixed device 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3V3

Graphics adapter (AP Link), optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
Devices 3V3 å
PCI bus and slide-in power supply (max.) 50
max. possible at 5V PCI bus and slide-in 50
per CompactFlash, optional (slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PCI bus and slide-in power supply

per Hard Disk, optional (slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

per Drive, optional (slide-in CD,DVD) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)
5V

Devices 5V å

max. possible at -12V PCI bus 1.2

-12V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 1.2 watts without and with fan kit)

Devices -12V å
Devices total +5V å
max. possible at 3V3 PCI bus 23
3V3

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)

Devices 3V3 å
Total PCI bus and slide-in å
Devices total å
1) The total performance of one PCI card per PCI slot (= sum of power consumptions for each voltage area) may not exceed the limits stated for operation with or without
a fan kit.

See section "Starting current", on page 136 for starting current values.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 111

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.11.3 Power calculation with system unit 5PC600.SX05-01 (revision >= H0)

Information: APC620 System unit 5PC600.SX05-01 This system

C3 400 C3 733 C3 1000 CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800

5PC600.E815-00

5PC600.E815-02

5PC600.E815-03
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
All entries in watts Enter values in this
columns
The entries for the Generator are maximum values.
Entries for the Device are determined maximum
values, but not peak values.

Total power supply (max.) 110

Add-on UPS module, optional 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
max. possible at 5V 70
CPU Board, fixed device 14 18 25 17 21 23 23 37 37
per CompactFlash, optional (add-on, slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hard Disk, optional (add-on, slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
External keyboard PS/2, optional 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
USB Peripheral, optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(max. 2,5 watts per USB1 and USB2 connection)
Interface option (add-on interface), optional
5V

0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
max. possible at +12V 24
Fan kit, optional 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
+12V

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 12 watts with fan kit)
Devices total 5V å
Total power supply

max. possible at 3V3 23

System unit, fixed device 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
3V3

Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
Devices 3V3 å
PCI bus and slide-in power supply (max.) 50
max. possible at 5V PCI bus and slide-in 50
per CompactFlash, optional (slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PCI bus and slide-in power supply

per Hard Disk, optional (slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

per Drive, optional (slide-in CD,DVD) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
PCI card manufacturer limit, optional 1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)
5V

max. possible at -12V PCI bus and slide-in 1.2

-12V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 1.2 watts without and with fan kit)

Devices -12V å
Devices total +5V å
max. possible at 3V3 PCI bus and slide-in 23
3V3

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)

Devices 3V3 å
Total PCI bus and slide-in å
Devices total å
1) The total performance of one PCI card per PCI slot (= sum of power consumptions for each voltage area) may not exceed the limits stated for operation with or without
a fan kit.

See section "Starting current", on page 136 for starting current values.

112 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.11.4 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX05-00 (revision < H0) and 5PC600.SX05-01
(revision <= H0)

The following block diagram presents the simplified structure of the APC620 supply voltage for
system units 5PC600.SX05-00 (Revision < H0), 5PC600.SX05-01 (Revision < H0).

Add-on UPS UPS battery

module (optional)

Technical Data
Supply voltage 15V
24V 15V

Section 2
+24 VDC
electrically
isolated
15V +12V
+12V

Buffering capacitors
(for min. 10 ms)
3V3 Standby
15V
3V3 3V3

5V Standby
5V
5V

Power On

15V +12V PCI bus

+12V

15V 3V3 PCI bus

3V3

5V 5V PCI bus and slide-in

5V -12V PCI bus

-12V
PCI bus and slide-in power supply

Figure 33: Supply voltage block diagram 5 PCI slots (dependent on system unit version)

Explanation:
Systems with 5 PCI slots have two additional power supplies for the PCI bus and the slide-in
drives. The supply voltage is converted to 15 V with a DC/DC converter. These electrically
isolated 15 V feed four further DC/DC converters. Two generate +12 V, and the others generate
3V3 and 5V standby. After the system is turned on (e.g. using the power button), the voltages
3V3, 5 V, +12 V are placed on the bus. At the 5 V output, yet another DC/DC converter
generates -12 V , and places these on the bus.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 113

 Technical Data • Entire device

The optional APC620 add-on UPS and battery unit is supplied with 15 V and provides an
uninterrupted power supply from the 15 V bus during power failures.

114 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.11.5 Power calculation with system unit 5PC600.SX05-05 revision < H0

Information: APC620 System unit 5PC600.SX05-00 This system

C3 400 C3 733 C3 1000 CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800

5PC600.E815-00

5PC600.E815-02

5PC600.E815-03
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
All entries in watts Enter values in this
columns
The entries for the Generator are maximum values.
Entries for the Device are determined maximum
values, but not peak values.

Total power supply (max.) 110

Add-on UPS module, optional 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5

Technical Data
Section 2
max. possible at 5V 55
CPU Board, fixed device 14 18 25 17 21 23 23 37 37
per CompactFlash, optional (add-on, slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hard Disk, optional (add-on, slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
External keyboard PS/2, optional 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5V

USB Peripheral, optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

(max. 2,5 watts per USB1 and USB2 connection)
Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Graphics adapter (AP Link), optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Devices 5V å
max. possible at 3V3 23
System unit, fixed device 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
3V3

Graphics adapter (AP Link), optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
Devices 3V3 å
max. possible at +12V 12
Total power supply
+12V

Fan kit, optional 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Devices +12V å
PCI bus and slide-in power supply (max.) 50
max. possible at 5V PCI bus and slide-in 50
per CompactFlash, optional (slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
per Hard Disk, optional (slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
PCI bus and slide-in power supply

per Drive, optional (slide-in CD,DVD) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional
5V

1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)

max. possible at -12V PCI bus and slide-in 1.2

-12V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 1.2 watts without and with fan kit)

Devices total 5V å
max. possible at 3V3 PCI bus and slide-in 23
3V3

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)

Devices 3V3 å
max. possible at +12V PCI bus and slide-in 12
+12V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 12 watts with fan kit)

Devices +12V å

Total PCI bus and slide-in å

Devices total å
1) The total performance of one PCI card per PCI slot (= sum of power consumptions for each voltage area) may not exceed the limits stated for operation with or without
a fan kit.

See section "Starting current", on page 136 for starting current values.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 115

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.11.6 Power calculation with system unit 5PC600.SX05-01 revision < H0

Information: APC620 System unit 5PC600.SX05-01 This system

C3 400 C3 733 C3 1000 CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400 PM 1600 PM 1800

5PC600.E815-00

5PC600.E815-02

5PC600.E815-03
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.X855-03
All entries in watts Enter values in this
columns
The entries for the Generator are maximum values.
Entries for the Device are determined maximum
values, but not peak values.

Total power supply (max.) 110

Add-on UPS module, optional 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
max. possible at 5V 55
CPU Board, fixed device 14 18 25 17 21 23 23 37 37
per CompactFlash, optional (add-on, slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hard Disk, optional (add-on, slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
External keyboard PS/2, optional 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5V

USB Peripheral, optional 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

(max. 2,5 watts per USB1 and USB2 connection)
Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Devices 5V å
max. possible at 3V3 23
System unit, fixed device 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
3V3

Interface option (add-on interface), optional 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
Devices 3V3 å
max. possible at +12V 12
+12V

Fan kit, optional 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Total power supply

External consumer, optional (via BaseBoard) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Devices +12V å

PCI bus and slide-in power supply (max.) 50

max. possible at 5V PCI bus and slide-in 50
per CompactFlash, optional (slide-in) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
per Hard Disk, optional (slide-in) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
PCI bus and slide-in power supply

per Drive, optional (slide-in CD,DVD) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional
5V

1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)

max. possible at -12V PCI bus and slide-in 1.2

-12V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 1.2 watts without and with fan kit)

Devices total 5V å

max. possible at 3V3 PCI bus and slide-in 23

3V3

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 17 watts with fan kit)
Devices 3V3 å

max. possible at +12V PCI bus and slide-in 12

+12V

PCI card manufacturer limit, optional

1)
(max. 3 watts without fan kit, max. 12 watts with fan kit)

Devices +12V å
Total PCI bus and slide-in å
Devices total å
1) The total performance of one PCI card per PCI slot (= sum of power consumptions for each voltage area) may not exceed the limits stated for operation with or without
a fan kit.

See section "Starting current", on page 136 for starting current values.

116 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.12 Power management for the APC620 embedded system unit

2.12.1 Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and 5PC600.SE00-02

The following block diagram presents the simplified structure of the APC620 embedded supply
voltage for system units 5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and 5PC600.SE00-02.

Add-on UPS UPS battery

module (optional)

Technical Data
Section 2
Supply voltage 15V
24V 15V
+24 VDC
electrically
isolated

3V3 Standby
Buffering capacitors
15V 3V3
(for min. 10 ms)
3V3

5V Standby
5V
5V

Power On

Figure 34: Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and 5PC600.SE00-02

Explanation:
The supply voltage is converted to 15 V with a DC/DC converter. These electrically isolated 15
V feed four further DC/DC converters, which generate the remaining voltages.

After the system is turned on (e.g. using the power button), the voltages 3V3 and 5 V are placed
on the bus.

The optional APC620 add-on UPS and battery unit is supplied with 15 V and provides an
uninterrupted power supply from the 15 V bus during power failures.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 117

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.12.2 Power calculation with 5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and 5PC600.SE00-02

APC620 embedded system unit

5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and This system
Information: 5PC600.SE00-02
CM 600 CM 1000 PM 1100 PM 1400

5PC600.X855-04

5PC600.X855-05

5PC600.X855-00

5PC600.X855-02
All entries in watts Enter values in this
column
The values for the suppliers are maximum values.
The values for the devices are average maximum
values, but not peak values.

Total power supply (maximum) 55

Add-on UPS module, optional 7,5 7,5 7,5 7,5
Maximum possible at 5V 55
CPU board, fixed device 17 21 23 23
Total power supply

Per CompactFlash, optional (add-on, slide-in) 1 1 1 1

USB peripheral, optional
5V

(max. 2.5 watts per USB1 and USB3 connection)

5 5 5 5
USB peripheral, optional
(max. 5 watts per USB2 and USB4 connection)
10 10 10 10

Devices 5V å
Maximum possible at 3V3 23
3V3

System unit, fixed device 4 4 4 4

Devices 3V3 å
Devices total å

See section "Starting current", on page 136 for starting current values.

118 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.13 Humidity specifications

The following table displays the minimum and maximum humidity for the individual components
that are relevant for the humidity limitations of the entire device. The lowest and highest common
values are always used when establishing these limits.

Component Operation Storage / Transport

CPU boards 815E (ETX) 10 to 90% 5 to 95%
CPU boards 855GME (ETX / XTX) 10 to 90% 5 to 95%

Technical Data
System units (all models) 5 to 90% 5 to 95%

Section 2
Main memory for CPU boards 10 to 90% 5 to 95%
5AC600.HDDI-00 (24 hours/default) 8 to 90% 5 to 95%
5AC600.HDDI-01 (ET) 8 to 90% 5 to 95%
5AC600.HDDI-02 (ET) 8 to 90% 5 to 95%
5AC600.HDDI-03 (ET) 8 to 90% 5 to 95%
Add-on drives 5AC600.HDDI-04 (ET) 8 to 90% 5 to 95%
5AC600.HDDI-05 (ET, 24x7) 5 to 90% 5 to 95%
5AC600.HDDI-06 (ET, 24x7) 5 to 90% 5 to 95%
5AC600.SDDI-00 ≤ D0 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC600.SDDI-00 ≥ E0 10 to 95% 10 to 95%
5AC600.CDXS-00 8 to 80% 5 to 95%
5AC600.DVDS-00 8 to 80% 5 to 95%
5AC600.DVRS-00 8 to 80% 5 to 95%
Slide-in drives 5AC600.FDDS-00 20 to 80% 5 to 90%
5AC600.HDDS-00 (ET, 24x7) 8 to 90% 5 to 95%
5AC600.HDDS-01 (ET) 8 to 90% 5 to 95%
5AC600.HDDS-02 (ET, 24x7) 5 to 90% 5 to 95%
5AC600.CANI-00 5 to 90% 5 to 95%
5AC600.485I-00 5 to 90% 5 to 95%
5AC600.SDL0-00 5 to 90% 5 to 95%
5ACPCI.RAIS-00 (24 hours/default) 8 to 90% 5 to 95%
5ACPCI.RAIS-01 (24 hours/default) 8 to 90% 5 to 95%
Additional insert cards
Interfaces 5ACPCI.RAIC-01 (24 hours/default) 5 to 90% 5 to 95%
AP Link
5ACPCI.RAIC-02 (24 hours/default) 5 to 90% 5 to 95%
5ACPCI.RAIC-03 (24 hours/default) 8 to 90% 5 to 95%
5ACPCI.RAIC-04 (24 hours/default) 8 to 90% 5 to 95%
5ACPCI.RAIC-05 (24 hours/default) 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5MMHDD.0250-00 (24 hours/default) 5 to 95% 5 to 95%

Table 29: Overview of humidity specifications for individual components

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 119

 Technical Data • Entire device

Component Operation Storage / Transport

CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-06 85% 85%
CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 85% 85%
CompactFlash cards - 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 8 to 95% 8 to 95%
Accessories Flash drive 5MMUSB.xxxx-00 10 to 90% 5 to 90%
Flash drive 5MMUSB.2048-01 10 to 90% 5 to 90%
USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00 20 to 80% 5 to 90%
USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-01 20 to 80% 5 to 90%

Table 29: Overview of humidity specifications for individual components

The listed specifications correspond to the relative humidity at an ambient temperature of 30°C.
More detailed information about the specific temperature-dependent humidity values can be
found in the technical data for the individual components.

120 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14 Device interfaces

The following two graphics show the general and optional device interfaces on an APC620
complete device with 5 PCI slots or an APC620 embedded device.

AP Link slot (optional) Add-on UPS module (optional)

Add-on interface slot

MIC, Line IN

Technical Data
and Line OUT

Section 2
PCI slots
half-size or full-size Monitor / Panel
(max. 5 ) connection

Supply voltage +24 VDC

USB

Ethernet ETH 2

Ethernet ETH 1

Serial interface COM2

Serial interface COM1

Status LEDs

Slide-in slot 2
CompactFlash slot CF1
drive slot (optional)

CompactFlash slot or
Slide-in slot 1
hard disk CF2 / HDD (optional)
drive slot (optional)
Reset and Power
buttons

PS/2 keyboard or mouse

Battery
Hardware security
key (Dongle)

Figure 35: General device interfaces example - APC620 with 5 PCI slots

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 121

 Technical Data • Entire device

Add-on UPS (optional)

POWERLINK
Ethernet 10/100 MBit

COM1
+24 VDC supply voltage
CAN
Monitor/Panel
Status LEDs CAN / X2X SDL (Smart Display Link) / DVI

4 x USB

COM2

X2X
Status LEDs
Power, CF, Link

CAN terminating switch / LED

CompactFlash slot - CF1

Hardware Security Key CompactFlash slot - CF2

Power button

Battery Reset button

CAN node number (x16, x1)
POWERLINK
station number (x16, x1)

Figure 36: General device interfaces example - APC620 embedded

Each individual device interface is explained in greater detail on the following pages.

122 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.1 Serial interface COM1

Serial interfaces COM11)

Type RS232, modem-capable, not
electrically isolated
UART 16550-compatible, 16-byte
FIFO
9-pin DSUB, male
Transfer rate Max. 115 kBaud
Cable length Max. 15 meters

Technical Data
Pin Assignment

Section 2
COM1
1 DCD
1 5
2 RXD
3 TXD 6 9
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI

Table 30: Pin assignments - COM1

1) The interfaces, etc. available on the device or module were numbered accordingly for easy identification. This numbering can differ from
the numbering used by the particular operating system.

I/O address and IRQ

Resource Default setting Additional setting options

I/O address 3F8 2F8, 3E8, 2E8
IRQ IRQ4 IRQ3

Table 31: COM1 - I/O address and IRQ

The setting for the I/O address and the IRQ can be changed in the BIOS setup (under
"Advanced" - submenu "I/O Device Configuration" setting "Serial port A"). Please note any
potential conflicts with other resources when changing this setting.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 123

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.2 Serial interface COM2

Serial interfaces COM21)

Type RS232, modem-capable, not
electrically isolated
UART 16550 compatible, 16 byte
FIFO
Transfer rate Max. 115 kBaud 9-pin DSUB, male

Cable length Max. 15 meters

Pin Assignment
COM2
1 DCD
1 5
2 RXD
3 TXD 6 9

4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI

Table 32: Pin assignments - COM2

1) The interfaces, etc. available on the device or module were numbered accordingly for easy identification. This numbering can differ from
the numbering used by the particular operating system.

I/O address and IRQ

Resource Default setting Additional setting options

I/O address 2F8 3F8, 3E8, 2E8
IRQ IRQ3 IRQ4

Table 33: COM2 - I/O address and IRQ

The setting for the I/O address and the IRQ can be changed in the BIOS setup (under
"Advanced" - submenu "I/O Device Configuration" setting "Serial port B"). Please note any
potential conflicts with other resources when changing this setting.

124 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.3 X2X (only APC620 embedded)

X2X Link interface (only APC620 embedded)

The electrically isolated X2X Link is a 4-pin multipoint connector.
Pin X2X Link
1 X2X
2 X2X⊥
1 2 3 4
3 X2X\

Technical Data
4 SHLD (shield)

Section 2
Table 34: X2X pin assignments (only APC620 embedded)

Driver support

The fieldbus interface X2X is only supported together with Automation Runtime (for more
information, see section "Automation PC 620 with Automation Runtime", on page 564).

2.14.4 CAN (only APC620 embedded)

CAN
The electrically isolated CAN bus interface is a 4-pin multipoint
connector.
Transfer rate Max. 500 kBit/s
Bus length Max. 1000 meters
Pin CAN bus 1 2 3 4
1 CAN_H (CAN High)
2 CAN⊥ (CAN ground)
3 CAN_L (CAN Low)
4 SHLD (shield)

Table 35: CAN pin assignments (only APC620 embedded)

Driver support

The fieldbus interface CAN is only supported together with Automation Runtime (for more
information, see section "Automation PC 620 with Automation Runtime", on page 564).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 125

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.5 CAN node number (only APC620 embedded)

CAN node number switch (x1, x16) - only APC620 embedded

Both of these hex switches (x16, x1) are used to configure the
node number for the CAN interface.
Switch position
x16 x1 Description
0 ... F 0 ... F Any

Table 36: CAN node number switch (x1, x16) - only APC620 embedded

2.14.6 CAN terminating switch / LED (only APC620 embedded)

CAN terminating switch / LED (only APC620 embedded)

CAN networks are cabled using a bus structure where both ends
of the bus are equipped with terminating resistors.
The APC620 embedded has an integrated terminating resistor
(delivery state: disabled with the setting "Off").
LED On Off
Yellow The terminating The terminating
resistor integrated resistor integrated
in the bus in the bus
controller is controller is
turned on. turned off.
CAN terminating Position Position CAN terminating switch
switch Off On
Can be pressed Terminating Terminating
using a pointed resistor is turned resistor is turned CAN terminating LED
object. off. on.

Table 37: CAN terminating switch / LED (only APC620 embedded)

126 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.7 Status LEDs CAN / X2X (only APC620 embedded)

Status LEDs CAN / X2X (only APC620 embedded)

Yellow LED for On Off

CAN Sends data Receives data
X2X Sends data Receives data

Technical Data
Section 2
Table 38: Status LEDs CAN / X2X (only APC620 embedded)

2.14.8 POWERLINK (only APC620 embedded)

POWERLINK (only APC620 embedded)

Controller
Cabling S/STP (Cat5e) Status/Error LED

Transfer rate
Cable length max. 100 m (min. Cat5e) Green/Red Green
LED color On Off
Green/red see Status / Error LED
Green Link Activity (blinking)
(POWERLINK (Data transfer in
network progress)
connection
available)

Table 39: POWERLINK (only APC620 embedded)

Driver support

The fieldbus interface POWERLINK is only supported together with Automation Runtime (for
more information, see section "Automation PC 620 with Automation Runtime", on page 564).

Status / Error LED

The status/error LED is a green/red dual LED. The color green (status) is superimposed on the
color red (error).

Red - error Description

On The POWERLINK interface has encountered an error (failed Ethernet frames, increased number of
collisions on the network, etc.).

Table 40: Status / Error LED as error LED - POWERLINK V2 operating mode

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 127

 Technical Data • Entire device

Green - status Description

Off Managing Node (MN)
NOT_ACTIVE The bus is monitored for POWERLINK frames. If a frame is not received within the configured time
window (timeout), the interface goes directly into PRE_OPERATIONAL_1 status (single flash).
If, however, POWERLINK communication is detected before this time passes, the interface goes
directly into the BASIC_ETHERNET status (flickering).
Controlled Node (CN)
The bus is monitored for POWERLINK frames. If a frame is not received within the configured time
window (timeout), the interface goes directly into BASIC_ETHERNET status (flickering). If, however,
POWERLINK communication is detected during this time, the interface goes directly into the
PRE_OPERATIONAL_1 status (single flash).
Green flickering (approx. 10 Hz) The interface is in BASIC_ETHERNET status, and is operated purely as an Ethernet TCP/IP interface.
BASIC_ETHERNET Managing Node (MN)
This status can only be changed by resetting the interface.
Controlled Node (CN)
If POWERLINK communication is detected while in this status, the interface goes into the
PRE_OPERATIONAL_1 state (single flash).
Single flash (approx. 1 Hz) The interface status is PRE_OPERATIONAL_1.
PRE_OPERATIONAL_1 Managing Node (MN)
The MN starts the operation of the "reduced cycle". Collisions are allowed on the bus. There is not yet
any cyclic communication.
Controlled Node (CN)
The CN waits until it receives an SoC frame and then switches to PRE_OPERATIONAL_2 status
(double flash).
Double flash (approx. 1 Hz) The interface status is PRE_OPERATIONAL_2.
PRE_OPERATIONAL_2 Managing Node (MN)
The MN begins with the cyclic communication (cyclic input data is not yet evaluated). The CNs are
configured in this status.
Controlled Node (CN)
In this status, the interface is normally configured by the manager. After this, a command changes the
status to READY_TO_OPERATE (triple flash).
Triple flash (approx. 1 Hz) The interface status is READY_TO_OPERATE.
READY_TO_OPERATE Managing Node (MN)
Normal cyclic and asynchronous communication. Received PDO data is ignored.
Controlled Node (CN)
The configuration of the interface is complete. Normal cyclic and asynchronous communication. The
PDO data sent corresponds to the PDO mapping used. However, cyclic data is not yet evaluated.
On The interface status is OPERATIONAL.
OPERATIONAL
Blinking (approx. 2.5 Hz) The interface status is STOPPED.
STOPPED Managing Node (MN)
This status is not possible for the MN.
Controlled Node (CN)
No output data is produced and no input data is received. Only the appropriate command from the
manager can enter or leave this state.

Table 41: Status/Error LED as status LED - POWERLINK V2 operating mode

128 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.9 POWERLINK station number (only APC620 embedded)

POWERLINK station number (x1, x16)

Both of these hex switches (x16, x1) are used to configure the
station number for the POWERLINK. Station numbers are
permitted between #00 and #FD.
Switch position
x16 x1 Description
0 0 Operation as managing node

Technical Data
0 ... F 1 ... D station number Operation as controlled

Section 2
node
F E Reserved
F F Reserved

Table 42: POWERLINK station number (x1, x16) - only APC620 embedded

2.14.10 Ethernet connection ETH (only APC620 embedded)

This Ethernet connection is integrated in the CPU board being used.

Ethernet connection ETH (only APC620 embedded)

Controller Intel 82562 RJ45 twisted pair (10BaseT/100BaseT), female
Cabling S/STP (Cat5e)
Transfer rate 10/100 MBit/s 1)
Cable length max. 100 m (min. Cat5e) Green Orange
LED On Off
Green 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s
Orange Link Activity (blinking)
(Ethernet network (Data transfer in
connection progress)
available)

Table 43: Ethernet connection ETH (only APC620 embedded)

1) Both operating modes possible. Change-over takes place automatically.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 129

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.11 Ethernet connection ETH1

This Ethernet connection is integrated in the CPU board being used.

Ethernet connection (ETH11) )

Controller Intel 82562
Cabling S/STP (Cat5e)
RJ45 twisted pair (10BaseT/100BaseT), female
Transfer rate 10/100 MBit/s 2)
Cable length See table45 "Ethernet cable length in
conjunction with 5PC600.E855-xx CPU green ETH1 orange
boards (ETX)", on page 131 and table 46
"Ethernet cable length in conjunction with
5PC600.E855-xx CPU boards", on
page 131.
LED On Off
Green 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s
Orange Link Activity (blinking)
(Ethernet network (Data transfer in
connection progress)
available)

Table 44: Ethernet connection (ETH1)

1) The interfaces, etc. available on the device or module were numbered accordingly for easy identification. This numbering can differ from
the numbering used by the particular operating system.
2) Both operating modes possible. Change-over takes place automatically.

Driver support

A special driver is necessary for operating the Intel Ethernet controller 82562. Drivers for
Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Embedded, Windows Embedded Standard 2009 and
DOS are available for download on the B&R Homepage in the download area (www.br-
automation.com).

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

130 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Ethernet cable length when 855GME (ETX) CPU boards are used.

The supported cable length depends on the system unit revision when using Intel 855GME CPU
boards (5PC600.E855-xx (ETX)).

Cable length with CAT5e cable

System unit Up to 50 meters Up to 80 meters1)
5PC600.SX01-00 Revision < H0 Starting with Revision H0
5PC600.SX02-00 Revision < F5 Starting with Revision F5

Technical Data
5PC600.SX02-01 Revision < G5 Starting with revision G5

Section 2
5PC600.SF03-00 - Starting with revision A0
5PC600.SX05-00 Revision < G0 Starting with revision G0
5PC600.SX05-01 Revision < G0 Starting with revision G0

Table 45: Ethernet cable length in conjunction with 5PC600.E855-xx CPU boards (ETX)

1) When higher quality cable is used (e.g.: category CAT7), greater distances are possible.

Ethernet cable length when 855GME (XTX) CPU boards are used.

The supported cable length depends on the system unit revision when using Intel 855GME CPU
boards (5PC600.E855-xx (XTX)).

Cable length with CAT5e cable

System unit Up to 50 meters Up to 100 meters
5PC600.SX01-00 Revision < H0 Starting with Revision H0
5PC600.SX02-00 Revision < F5 Starting with Revision F5
5PC600.SX02-01 Revision < G5 Starting with revision G5
5PC600.SF03-00 - Starting with Revision A0
5PC600.SX05-00 Revision < G0 Starting with revision G0
5PC600.SX05-01 Revision < G0 Starting with revision G0

Table 46: Ethernet cable length in conjunction with 5PC600.E855-xx CPU boards

Special features when 855GME (XTX) CPU boards are used.

The hardware supports Auto MDX, which means an integrated switch automatically determines
if the connected cable is crossed or not and adjusts itself accordingly. However, Auto MDX must
be supported by the Ethernet driver used by the operating system.

B&R recommends not using the Auto MDX function during cabling, and instead using it only as
a diagnostics or testing feature.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 131

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.12 Ethernet connection ETH2

This Ethernet connection is integrated in the system unit.

Ethernet connection (ETH21) )

Controller Intel 82551ER RJ45 twisted pair (10BaseT/100BaseT), female
Cabling S/STP (Cat5e)
Transfer rate 10/100 MBit/s 2)
green ETH2 orange
Cable length max. 100 m (min. Cat5e)
LED On Off
Green 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s
Orange Link Activity (blinking)
(Ethernet network (Data transfer in
connection progress)
available)

Table 47: Ethernet connection (ETH2)

1) The interfaces, etc. available on the device or module were numbered accordingly for easy identification. This numbering can differ from
the numbering used by the particular operating system.
2) Both operating modes possible. Change-over takes place automatically.

Driver support

A special driver is necessary for operating the Intel Ethernet controller 82551ER. Drivers for
Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Embedded, Windows Embedded Standard 2009 and
DOS are available for download on the B&R Homepage in the download area (www.br-
automation.com ).

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

132 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.13 USB port

The APC620 devices have a USB 2.0 (Universal Serial Bus) host controller with multiple USB
ports, two of which are on the outside for easy user access.

See the section "USB connection (only APC620 embedded)", on page 134 for a description of
the USB connections on APC620 embedded devices.

Universal Serial Bus (USB1 und USB2)1)

Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 MBit/s), Full speed 2x USB Type A, female

Technical Data
(12 MBit/s) up to High speed (480 MBit/s)

Section 2
Power supply Max. 500 mA per port2)
USB1
Maximum 5 m (without hub)
Cable length
USB2

Table 48: USB port

1) The interfaces, etc. available on the device or module were numbered accordingly for easy identification. This numbering can differ from
the numbering used by the particular operating system.
2) For safety, every USB port is equipped with a maintenance free "USB current-limiting circuit breaker" (max. 500 mA)

Warning!
Peripheral USB devices can be connected to the USB interfaces. Due to the vast
number of USB devices available on the market, B&R cannot guarantee their
performance. B&R does ensure the performance of all USB devices that they
provide.

Warning!
Because of general PC specifications, this interface should be handled with extreme
care with regard to EMC, location of cables, etc.

Driver support

For optimal functionality of USB 2.0 (transfer speed up to 480 Mbit/s) with Windows XP, at least
Service Pack 1 must be installed. Without Service Pack 1, Windows XP will only support USB
1.1.
USB 2.0 comes already integrated in B&R's XP embedded operating systems.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 133

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.14 USB connection (only APC620 embedded)

The APC620 embedded devices have a USB 2.0 (Universal Serial Bus) host controller with
multiple USB ports, two of which are on the outside for easy access.

Universal Serial Bus (USB1, USB2, USB3, USB4)1) - only APC620 embedded
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 MBit/s), Full speed (12 4 x USB type A, female
MBit/s) up to High speed (480 Mbit/s)
Power supply2)
USB1, USB3 Max. 500 mA
USB2, USB4 Max. 1 A
Maximum 5 m (without hub)
Cable length

Table 49: USB connections 4 x - only APC620 embedded

1) The interfaces, etc. available on the device or module were numbered accordingly for easy identification. This numbering can differ from
the numbering used by the particular operating system.
2) For safety, every USB port is equipped with a maintenance free "USB current-limiting circuit breaker" (max. 500 mA or 1 A). The sum
of all 4 USB ports must not exceed the limit of 2 A.

Warning!
Peripheral USB devices can be connected to the USB interfaces. Due to the vast
number of USB devices available on the market, B&R cannot guarantee their
performance. B&R does ensure the performance of all USB devices that they
provide.

Warning!
Because of general PC specifications, this interface should be handled with extreme
care with regard to EMC, location of cables, etc.

134 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.15 +24 VDC supply voltage

The Automation PC 620 has a 24 VDC ATX compatible power supply. Depending on the system
unit, the power supply provides the following maximum performances (in watts).

System unit Max. power Max. power Max. power Max. power Max.
at + 5 V at + 3V3 at + 12 V at - 12 V total power
5PC600.SX01-00 55 23 12 1.2 70
5PC600.SX02-00 55 23 12 1.2 70
5PC600.SX02-01 55 23 12 1.2 70

Technical Data
Section 2
5PC600.SF03-00 105 46 24 1.2 110
5PC600.SX05-00 105 46 24 1.2 110
5PC600.SX05-01 105 46 24 1.2 110
5PC600.SE00-00 55 23 12 1.2 55
5PC600.SE00-01 55 23 12 1.2 55
5PC600.SE00-02 55 23 12 1.2 55

Table 50: Power supply depending on the system unit

The 3-pin socket required for the supply voltage connection is not included in delivery. This can
be ordered from B&R using the model number 0TB103.9 (screw clamp) or 0TB103.91 (cage
clamp).

The pin assignments can be found either in the following table or printed on the APC620 housing.
The supply voltage is internally protected (10A, fast-acting), so that the device cannot be
damaged if there is an overload (fuse replacement necessary) or if the voltage supply is
connected incorrectly (reverse polarity protection - fuse replacement not necessary).

Supply voltage
Protected against reverse polarity 3-pin, male
Pin Description

-
1 + Power 24 VDC
+
2 Functional ground
3 - 1 2 3

Accessories
0TB103.9 Plug 24 V 5.08 3p screw clamps
0TB103.91 Plug 24 V 5.08 3p cage clamps

Figure 37: Supply voltage connection

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 135

 Technical Data • Entire device

Ground

Caution!
Functional ground (pin 2 of power supply and ground connection) must be kept as
short as possible and connected to the largest possible wire cross section at the
central grounding point (e.g. the control cabinet or system).

The grounding connection can be found on the bottom of the APC620 systems. The M4 self-
locking nut can be used, for example, to fasten a copper strip that is built into the APC620 at a
central grounding point in the switching cabinet or system. The largest possible conductor cross
section should be used (at least 2.5 mm²).

Figure 38: Ground connection

Also see the section "Grounding concept", on page 307.

Starting current

System unit Typical Maximum

5PC600.SX01-00 7A 40 A (time < 300 μs)
5PC600.SX02-00 7A 40 A (time < 300 μs)
5PC600.SX02-01 7A 40 A (time < 300 μs)
5PC600.SF03-00 10 A 40 A (time < 300 μs)
5PC600.SX05-00 10 A 40 A (time < 300 μs)
5PC600.SX05-01 10 A 40 A (time < 300 μs)
5PC600.SE00-00 7A 40 A (time < 300 μs)
5PC600.SE00-01 7A 40 A (time < 300 μs)
5PC600.SE00-02 7A 40 A (time < 300 μs)

Table 51: Starting currents in the voltage supply to the system units

136 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Quick switching on/off of the power supply

If the APC620 is in Standby mode (e.g. Windows XP shutdown), then buffering takes a little more
time due to capacitors and low power consumption. If the "Power Loss Control" option is set to
"Power On" or "Last State" in BIOS, then a system with one of the system unit revisions in table
52 "System unit revisions for at least 10 seconds turn-off time" might not restart because a
Power Off/On was not detected. To make sure that these system units will restart after a Power
Off/On, the turn-off time should be set to at least 10 seconds.

Model number Description Revision

Technical Data
Section 2
5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI Starting with revision B0
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Starting with revision B0
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot Starting with revision B0
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Starting with revision A0
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots Starting with revision A0

Table 52: System unit revisions for at least 10 seconds turn-off time

Thanks to a workaround, the turn-off time can be set as needed in systems with one of the
following system unit revisions or higher.

Model number Description Revision

5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI Starting with F0
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Starting with revision E0
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot Starting with F0
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Starting with revision A0
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Starting with revision D0
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots Starting with revision D0
5PC600.SE00-00 APC60 embedded variation, 512 KB Starting with revision A0
5PC600.SE00-01 APC60 embedded variation, 512 KB Starting with revision A0
5PC600.SE00-02 APC60 embedded variation, 1 MB Starting with revision A0

Table 53: System unit revisions for any turn-off times

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 137

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.16 Monitor / Panel connection

When using this video output, understand that the video signals that are available (RGB, DVI,
and SDL - Smart Display Link) will vary depending on the system unit and CPU board.

Monitor / Panel
The following will provide an overview of the video signals available with
different system units and CPU boards.
For details, see technical data for the CPU board being used.
System unit 815E board (ETX) 855GME board 24-pin DVI-I with special functions, female
(ETX / XTX)
5PC600.SX01-00 RGB, DVI, SDL RGB, DVI, SDL (GE1)
5PC600.SX02-00 RGB RGB, DVI, SDL (GE1)
Monitor / Panel
5PC600.SX02-01 RGB, DVI, SDL RGB, DVI, SDL (GE2)
5PC600.SF03-00 RGB, DVI, SDL RGB, DVI, SDL (GE2)
5PC600.SX05-00 RGB RGB, DVI, SDL (GE1)
5PC600.SX05-01 RGB, DVI, SDL RGB, DVI, SDL (GE1)
5PC600.SE00-00 - RGB, DVI, SDL (GE1)
5PC600.SE00-01 - RGB
5PC600.SE00-02 - RGB, DVI, SDL (GE1)

Figure 39: Monitor / Panel connection

Hotplug for a display device is not supported in any combination. The plugs are specified for 100
connection cycles.

Caution!
The RGB, DVI and SDL cables can only be plugged in and unplugged when the
APC620 and display device (Automation Panel 900, Automation Panel 800, monitor)
are turned off.

See "Definitions for RGB, DVI, SDL", on page 142 for descriptions of RGB, DVI and SDL.

138 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Pin assignments

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

1 T.M.D.S. Data 2- 16 Hot Plug detect
2 T.M.D.S. Data 2+ 17 T.M.D.S. Data 0-
3 T.M.D.S. Data 2/SDL Shield 18 T.M.D.S. Data 0+
4 SDL- 19 T.M.D.S. DATA 0/XUSB1
Shield
5 SDL+ 20 XUSB1-

Technical Data
Section 2
6 DDC clock 21 XUSB1+
DVI-I 24 pin, female
7 DDC data 22 T.M.D.S. Clock Shield
8 Analog vertical sync 23 T.M.D.S. Clock + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c1 c2
9 T.M.D.S. DATA 1- 24 T.M.D.S. Clock - 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 c3 c4
10 T.M.D.S. DATA 1+ c1 Analog red video out c5

11 T.M.D.S. DATA 1/XUBS0 c2 Analog green video out

Shield
12 XUSB0- c3 Analog blue video out
13 XUSB0+ c4 Analog horizontal sync
14 + 5 V power 1) c5 Analog ground (analog R, G
and B return)
15 Ground (return for + 5V,
HSync and VSync)

Table 54: Pin assignments - Monitor / panel connection

1) Protected internally by a multifuse

Cable lengths and resolutions for SDL transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment lengths and the maximum
resolution according to the SDL cable used:

Cables Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA SXGA UXGA
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200
5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00
1.8 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01
5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03
5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00
5 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01
5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03
5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-001)
10 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-011)
5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-031)

Table 55: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 139

 Technical Data • Entire device

Cables Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA SXGA UXGA
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200
5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-001) -
15 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-011) -
5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-031) -
5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) -
20
5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031)
5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) - -
25
5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) - -
5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-102) 5CASDL.0300-102) -
30
5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-132) 5CASDL.0300-132) -
5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) -
40
5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) -

Table 55: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables (Forts.)

1) See table 56 "Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 140
2) See table 57 "Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 141

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 1) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. B0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. B0

Table 56: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

140 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 2) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02

Technical Data
Hardware Name Revision Note

Section 2
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. D0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. D0
5AC600.SDL0-00 AP Link SDL transmitter Rev. B3
5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI Rev. E0
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. D0
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot Rev. E0
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. A0
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Rev. C0
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots Rev. C0

Table 57: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 141

 Technical Data • Entire device

Definitions for RGB, DVI, SDL

RGB means:

• It is possible to connect RGB monitors (with adapter, model nr. 5AC900.1000-00) and
office RGB TFT displays.

RGB Monitor RGB TFT

Automation PC 620

DVI - Monitor Adapter DVI - Monitor Adapter

5AC900.1000-00 5AC900.1000-00

Figure 40: Monitor / Panel connection with RGB video signal

DVI means:

• Connection of B&R Automation Panel 900 display units with Automation Panel Link DVI
Receiver (Model nr. 5DLDVI.1000-01), Office Digital/DVI Monitors and Office DVI TFT
Displays is possible.

Automation Panel 900 Digital/DVI Monitor DVI TFT

Automation PC 620

Automation Panel Link DVI Receiver

5DLDVI.1000-01

Figure 41: Monitor / Panel connection with DVI video signal

For examples and possibilities for connecting Automation Panel 900 display units via DVI, see
Appendix A, chapter 3 "Commissioning", section 4 "Connection examples", starting on page 308.

142 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

SDL (Smart Display Link) means:

• Connection of B&R Automation Panel 800 and Automation Panel 900 display units with
Automation Panel Link SDL receiver (Model nr. 5DLSDL.1000-01) or SDL transceiver
(Model nr. 5DLSDL.1000-01).

Technical Data
Section 2
Automation Panel 900 Automation Panel 800
Automation PC 620

Automation Panel Link SDL receiver or SDL transceiver

5DLSDL.1000-00 or 5DLSDL.1000-01

Figure 42: Monitor / Panel connection with SDL video signal

For examples and possibilities for connecting Automation Panel 900 and Automation Panel 800
display units via SDL, see Appendix A, chapter 3 "Commissioning", section 4 "Connection
examples", starting on page 308.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 143

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.17 MIC, Line IN and Line OUT ports

All APC620 systems include an AC97 (specification 2.2) compatible sound chip with access to
the channels MIC, Line IN and Line OUT from the outside.

Information:
APC620 embedded devices do not have these connections.

MIC, Line IN and Line OUT

Controller Realtek AC97 3.5 mm socket, female
MIC Connection of a mono microphone with a
3.5 mm stereo (headphone) jack.
Line IN Stereo Line IN signal supplied via 3.5 mm MIC Line IN Line OUT
jack.
Line OUT Connection of a stereo sound device (e.g.
amplifier) via a 3.5 mm jack.

Table 58: Technical data - MIC, Line IN and Line OUT port

Driver support

A special driver is necessary for operating the AC97 sound chip (Realtek). Drivers for Windows
XP Professional, Windows XP Embedded, Windows Embedded Standard 2009 are available for
download on the B&R Homepage in the download area (www.br-automation.com ).

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

144 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.18 Add-on interface slot

An optional add-on interface (e.g. CAN, RS485) can be installed here. See also section 3.9
"Interface options", on page 274.

Information:
APC620 embedded devices do not have this option.

Technical Data
Add-on interface slot

Section 2
Available add-on interfaces
5AC600.CANI-00 Add-on CAN interface IF Option

5AC600.485I-00 Add-on RS232/422/485 interface

Table 59: Add-on interface slot

Information:
An add-on interface module is only available factory-installed.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 145

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.19 Add-on UPS module slot

An optional APC620 add-on UPS module can be installed here.

Add-on UPS module slot

APC620 add-on UPS module + accessories

5AC600.UPSI-00 Add-on UPS module
5AC600.UPSB-00 Battery unit 5 Ah
5CAUPS.0005-00 APC620 UPS cable 0.5 m
5CAUPS.0030-00 APC620 UPS cable 3 m

Table 60: Add-on UPS module slot

Information:
An add-on UPS module can be installed with the following system unit revisions or
later:

• 5PC600.SX01-00 starting with H0

• 5PC600.SX02-00 starting with G0
• 5PC600.SX02-01 starting with H0
• 5PC600.SF03-00 starting with A0
• 5PC600.SX05-00 starting with F0
• 5PC600.SX05-01 starting with F0
• 5PC600.SE00-00 starting with A0
• 5PC600.SE00-01 starting with A0
• 5PC600.SE00-02 starting with A0

For more on the UPS module, see chapter 6 "Accessories", section 16 "Uninterruptible power
supply", on page 720.

For info on configuring the UPS module, see chapter 4 "Software", section 9.4 "UPS
configuration", on page 599.

For info on installing the UPS module, see chapter 7 "Maintenance / Servicing", section 5
"Installing the UPS module", on page 765.

146 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.20 AP Link Slot

The option of inserting and using an AP Link card is only possible with system units
5PC600.SX02-00, 5PC600.SF03-00 and 5PC600.SX05-00.

For more information see section 3.11 "AP Link cards", on page 288.

Information:
APC620 embedded devices do not have this option.

Technical Data
Section 2
2.14.21 PCI slots

Information:
APC620 embedded devices do not have a PCI slot.

Up to 5 PCI slots are available, depending on the system unit. 5-volt cards or universal cards that
comply with the PCI half-size standard 2.2, and that do not exceed the following dimensions can
be inserted.

177.7
106.7
100.5
9

17.4 25.8 55

Figure 43: Dimensions - Standard half-size PCI cards

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 147

 Technical Data • Entire device

314

106.7
100.5
9

17.4 25.8 9 189.8

Figure 44: Dimensions - Standard full-size PCI cards

Information:
The total performance of one PCI card per PCI slot should not exceed the limit with
or without a fan kit (see section "Power management APC620 system unit with 1 PCI
slot", on page 97 or section "Power management APC620 system unit with 3 PCI
slots", on page 107 and "Power management APC620 system units with 5 PCI
slots", on page 109).

Technical data

Features PCI bus properties

Default PCI 2.2
Design Half-size PCI or full-size PCI1) 5 Volt connector
PCI bus type 32-bit
PCI bus speed 33 MHz

Table 61: Technical data - PCI bus

1) Only in conjunction with system unit 5PC600.SF03-00.

148 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Voltages on the PCI slot plug (plug-in PCI cards)

The plug design for the PCI slot is the same as the design for a 5-volt PCI plug. The supply is
applied at 3.3 volts and 5 volts on the actual plug.

5 volt PCI card 3.3 volt PCI card

Technical Data
Section 2
Dual-voltage PCI card
universal card
5 V and 3.3 V compatible

5 volt plug 3.3 volt plug

Supply on plug: 5 and 3.3 volts

Figure 45: PCI connector type: 5 volt

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 149

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.22 Status LEDs

The status LEDs are integrated in the system unit behind the orange front cover.

See the section "Status LEDs Power, CF, Link (only APC620 embedded)", on page 151 for a
description of the status LEDs on APC620 embedded devices.

Status LEDs

LED Color Meaning

Green On Supply voltage OK
The system is in standby mode
(S5: soft-off mode or S4:
Red On
Hibernate mode -Suspend-to-
Power
Disk)
Supply voltage not OK; the
Orange
1) On system is operating on battery
power.
Signals IDE drive access (CF,
HDD Yellow On
HDD, CD, etc.)
On Active SDL connection.
An active SDL connection has
blink
been interrupted by a loss of
Link 1 Yellow ing
power in the display unit.
No active SDL connection
Off
available.
Active SDL connection on the
On
AP Link slot.
An active SDL connection on
blink the AP Link slot has been
Link 2 Yellow
ing interrupted by a loss of power
in the display unit.
No active SDL connection on
Off
the AP Link slot available.

Table 62: Technical data - Status LEDs

1) Only lit when add-on UPS module is installed.

The light for the status LEDs is fed to the front cover via fiber optic lines.

150 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Technical Data
Section 2
Figure 46: Front-side status LEDs

2.14.23 Status LEDs Power, CF, Link (only APC620 embedded)

The status LEDs are integrated in the system unit behind the orange front cover.

Status LEDs Power, CF, Link (only APC620 embedded)

LED Color Meaning

Green On Supply voltage OK
The system is in standby mode
(S5: soft-off mode or S4:
Red On
Hibernate mode -Suspend-to-
Power
Disk)
Supply voltage not OK; the
Orange
1) On system is operating on battery
power.
Indicates access to
CF Yellow On
CompactFlash (read or write)
Active SDL connection on the
On
monitor/panel connection
An active SDL connection has
blink
Link Yellow been interrupted by a loss of
ing
power in the display unit.
No active SDL connection
Off
available.

Table 63: Status LEDs Power, CF, Link (only APC620 embedded)

1) Only lit when add-on UPS module is installed.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 151

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.24 CompactFlash slot (CF1)

This CompactFlash slot is a fixed component of an APC620 system, and is defined in BIOS as
the primary master drive. Type I CompactFlash cards are supported. Available CompactFlash
cards - see table 17 "Model numbers - CompactFlash cards", on page 43.

See the section "CompactFlash slots (only APC620 embedded)", on page 155 for a description
of the CompactFlash slots on APC620 embedded devices.

CompactFlash slot (CF1)

Connection Primary master IDE device
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Accessories Short description
5CFCRD.0512-06 512 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.1024-06 1024 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.2048-06 2048 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.4096-06 4096 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.8192-06 8192 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.016G-06 16 GB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.032G-06 32 GB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.0064-03 CompactFlash 64 MB SSI
5CFCRD.0128-03 CompactFlash 128 MB SSI
5CFCRD.0256-03 CompactFlash 256 MB SSI
5CFCRD.0512-03 CompactFlash 512 MB SSI
5CFCRD.1024-03 CompactFlash 1024 MB SSI
5CFCRD.2048-03 CompactFlash 2048 MB SSI
5CFCRD.4096-03 CompactFlash 4096 MB SSI
5CFCRD.8192-03 CompactFlash 8192 MB SSI

Table 64: Technical data - CompactFlash slot (CF1)

Warning!
Inserting and removing the CompactFlash card can only take place without power
applied!

152 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.25 Hard disk / CompactFlash slot (HDD/CF2)

This slot allows for the installation of a hard disk or a second CompactFlash slot (type I
CompactFlash card) as add-on drives (see table 5.7 "Drives" for available add-on drives). The
add-on drive is referred to in BIOS as the primary slave drive.

See the section "CompactFlash slots (only APC620 embedded)", on page 155 for a description
of the CompactFlash slots on APC620 embedded devices.

Information:

Technical Data
Section 2
Add-on drives are only available factory-installed. Therefore, they need to be
requested when placing an order.

Hard disk / CompactFlash slot (HDD/CF2)

Connection Primary slave IDE device
Add-on hard disks 2.5" drive (internal)
5AC600.HDDI-05 Add-on hard disk 40 GB ET, 24/7
5AC600.HDDI-06 Add-on hard disk 80 GB ET, 24/7
5AC600.SSDI-00 Add-on SSD 128 GB MLC
Add-on CompactFlash slot
5AC600.CFSI-00 Add-on CompactFlash slot
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Accessories Short description
5CFCRD.0512-06 512 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.1024-06 1024 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.2048-06 2048 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.4096-06 4096 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.8192-06 8192 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.016G-06 16 GB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.032G-06 32 GB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.0064-03 CompactFlash 64 MB SSI
5CFCRD.0128-03 CompactFlash 128 MB SSI
5CFCRD.0256-03 CompactFlash 256 MB SSI
5CFCRD.0512-03 CompactFlash 512 MB SSI
5CFCRD.1024-03 CompactFlash 1024 MB SSI
5CFCRD.2048-03 CompactFlash 2048 MB SSI
5CFCRD.4096-03 CompactFlash 4096 MB SSI
5CFCRD.8192-03 CompactFlash 8192 MB SSI

Table 65: Technical data - Hard disk / CompactFlash slot (HDD/CF2)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 153

 Technical Data • Entire device

Warning!
Inserting and removing the CompactFlash card can only take place without power
applied!

154 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.26 CompactFlash slots (only APC620 embedded)

These CompactFlash slots are a fixed part of an APC620 embedded system and are defined in
the BIOS as Primary Master (CF1) and Primary Slave (CF2) drive. Type I CompactFlash cards
are supported.

CompactFlash slot (CF1 / CF2)

Connection
CF1 Primary master IDE device
CF2 Primary slave IDE device

Technical Data
CompactFlash

Section 2
Type Type I
Accessories Short description
5CFCRD.0512-06 512 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.1024-06 1024 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.2048-06 2048 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.4096-06 4096 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.8192-06 8192 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.016G-06 16 GB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.032G-06 32 GB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.0064-03 CompactFlash 64 MB SSI
5CFCRD.0128-03 CompactFlash 128 MB SSI
5CFCRD.0256-03 CompactFlash 256 MB SSI
5CFCRD.0512-03 CompactFlash 512 MB SSI
5CFCRD.1024-03 CompactFlash 1024 MB SSI
Ejector
5CFCRD.2048-03 CompactFlash 2048 MB SSI
5CFCRD.4096-03 CompactFlash 4096 MB SSI
5CFCRD.8192-03 CompactFlash 8192 MB SSI

Table 66: CompactFlash slots (CF1 / CF2) - APC620 embedded

Warning!
Inserting and removing the CompactFlash card can only take place without power
applied!

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 155

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.27 Power button

Due to the complete ATX power supply support, the power button serves various functions.
These functions can be configured either in the BIOS setup (see BIOS function "Power button
function" in section "Power", on page 409 for 815E CPU boards (ETX), or section "Power", on
page 465 for 855GME CPU boards (ETX) or section "Power", on page 523 for 855GME CPU
boards (XTX)) or, for example, in the operating system Windows XP.

Power button

The power button can be pressed with a pointed

object (i.e. paper clip or tip of a pen).

The power button acts like the on/off switch on a

normal desktop PC with ATX power supply:
Press and release ... Switches on APC620 or shuts
down operating system and switches off the APC620.
Press and hold ... ATX power supply switches off
without shutting down the APC620 (data could be
lost!).

Pressing the power button does not reset the MTCX

processor.

Table 67: Technical data - Power button

2.14.28 Reset button

Reset button

The reset button can be pressed with a pointed object

(i.e. paper clip or tip of a pen).

Pushing the reset button results in a hardware-reset,

PCI-reset. The APC620 is restarted (cold restart).

The MTCX processor is not reset when the reset

button is pressed.

Table 68: Technical data - Reset button

Warning!
A system reset can cause data to be lost!

156 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.29 PS/2 keyboard/mouse

Slot for a standard PS/2 mouse or a PS/2 AT-Enhanced keyboard. BIOS automatically
determines whether a mouse or a keyboard has been connected, and transfers this information
to the operating system.

Information:
APC620 embedded devices do not have a PS/2 interface.

Technical Data
Section 2
With a PS/2 Y-cable, both keyboard and mouse can be operated simultaneously. They must be
connected before the system is switched on.

This interface has a Hot-Plug function for PS/2 keyboards (only when no PS/2 mouse has ever
been connected and used!).

Connection for keyboard/mouse (PS/2)

Pin Assignment PS/2 socket, female
1 DATA 0
2 DATA 1
5 3 1
3 GND
4 +5 V1)
5 CLK 0
6 CLK 1 6 4 2

Table 69: Technical data - PS/2 keyboard/mouse (external PS/2)

1) The PS/2 keyboard/mouse interface is protected by a multifuse (1 A).

Warning!
Because of general PC specifications, this interface should be used with extreme
care concerning EMC, location of cables, etc.. It should therefore only be used for
service!

Information:
The BIOS setup defaults only allow for the operation of a PS/2 keyboard. If a PS/2
mouse is connected, it must be activated in BIOS. In order to do this, set "PS/2
mouse" in the BIOS setup menu to "enabled" and save. (Located under Advanced -
Miscellaneous - Item "PS/2 mouse").

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 157

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.30 Battery

The lithium battery (3 V, 950 mAh) buffers the internal real-time clock (RTC) as well as the
individually saved BIOS settings and is located behind the black cover. The buffer duration of the
battery is at least 4 years (2½ years with the SRAM module model number 5AC600.SRAM-00
or with an APC620 embedded system unit and at 50°C, 8.5 mA current requirements of the
supplied components and a self discharge of 40%). The battery is subject to wear and should be
replaced regularly (at least following the specified buffer duration).

Battery
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Removable Yes, accessible from the
Lifespan outside
4 years1) 2)
Accessories Short description
0AC201.91 Lithium batteries, 4 pcs.
Lithium batteries (4 pcs.),
3 V / 950 mAh, button cell
4A0006.00-000 Lithium battery, 1 pc.
Lithium battery (1 pcs.),
3 V / 950 mAh, button cell
APC620 with 1, 2, 3 and 5 PCI slots APC620 embedded

Table 70: Technical data - battery

1) At 50°C, 8.5 μA of the supplied components and a self discharge of 40%.

2) The buffer duration is 2½ years if a SRAM module (Mod.Nr. 5AC600.SRAM-00) is installed or in conjunction with an APC620 embedded
system unit.

For more on changing the lithium battery, see chapter 7 "Maintenance / Servicing", section
"Changing the battery", on page 743.

For technical information on the lithium battery, see chapter 6 "Accessories", section 4
"Replacement CMOS batteries", on page 641.

Battery status evaluation

The battery status is evaluated immediately following start-up of the device and is subsequently
checked by the system every 24 hours. The battery is subjected to a brief load (1 second) during
the measurement and then evaluated. The evaluated battery status is displayed in the BIOS
Setup pages (under Advanced - Baseboard monitor) and in the B&R Control Center (ADI driver),
but can also be read in a customer application via the ADI Library.

Battery status Meaning

N/A Hardware, i.e. firmware used is too old and does not support read.
GOOD Data buffering is guaranteed

Table 71: Meaning of battery status

158 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

Battery status Meaning

BAD Data buffering is guaranteed for approx. another 500 hours from the point in time that the battery capacity is
determined to be BAD (insufficient).

Table 71: Meaning of battery status

Hardware requirements (system unit)

• 5PC600.SX01-00 starting with Rev I0

Technical Data
• 5PC600.SX01-00 starting with Rev. H0

Section 2
• 5PC600.SX02-01 starting with Rev. K0
• 5PC600.SF03-00 starting with Rev. A0
• 5PC600.SX05-00 starting with Rev. H0
• 5PC600.SX05-01 starting with Rev. H0

Firmware / BIOS requirements

• APC620 / Panel PC 700 Firmware Upgrade V1.19 (MTCX PX32: V1.63, MTCX FPGA
V1.19)
• BIOS 855GME (ETX) V1.26, BIOS 855GME (XTX) V1.14

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 159

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.31 Hardware Security Key

B&R recommends a hardware security key (dongle) based on the DS1425 from MAXIM
(previously Dallas Semiconductors) for software copy protection.

Hardware Security Key

A hardware security key (dongle) can be inserted

behind the black cover.

Table 72: Technical data - Hardware security key

Warning!
Turn off power before removing or adding the hardware security key.

I/O address and IRQ

Resource Default setting Additional setting options

I/O address 378 278, 3BC
IRQ - -

Table 73: Hardware security key - I/O address and IRQ

The setting for the I/O address and the IRQ can be changed in the BIOS setup (under
"Advanced" - submenu "I/O device configuration" setting "Parallel port").

160 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.32 Slide-in slot 1 drive slot

The "slide-in slot 1" drive slot exists only in APC620 system units with 2, 3 or 5 PCI slots. It is
possible to insert a number of slide-in drives into it. See table for available slide-in drives 10
"Model numbers - Drives", on page 40.

For instructions about installing and replacing a slide-in, see chapter 7 "Maintenance /
Servicing", section 4 "Slide-in drive - installation and exchange", on page 762.

The slide-in CD-ROM (5AC600.CDXS-00) and the slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW (5AC600.DVDS-

Technical Data
00) and DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW (5AC600.DVRS-00) drive are referred to in BIOS as

Section 2
"secondary slave". The slide-in USB FDD drive (5AC600.FDDS-00) is referred to as USB.

Information:
• It is possible to add, remove, or modify the slide-in drive at any time.
• In system units with 5 PCI slots, the slide-in USB FDD (5AC600.FDDS-00)
drive must be inserted in slide-in slot 1 for mechanical reasons. The slide-in
drive 5AC600.CFSS-00 (slide-in CF 2-slot) should only be operated in slide-in
slot 2.

Caution!
Turn off power before adding or removing a slide-in drive.

Slide-in slot 1
Connection Secondary slave IDE device
Accessories Short description
5AC600.CDXS-00 Slide-in CD-ROM
5AC600.CFSS-00 Slide-in CF 2-slot
5AC600.DVDS-00 Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW
5AC600.DVRS-00 Slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW
5AC600.FDDS-00 Slide-in USB FDD
5AC600.HDDS-02 40 GB 24x7 ET slide-in hard disk

Table 74: Technical data - Slide-in slot 1

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 161

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.14.33 Slide-in slot 2 drive slot

The "slide-in slot 2" drive slot exists only in APC620 system units with 5 PCI slots. It is possible
to insert a number of slide-in drives into it. See table for available slide-in drives 10 "Model
numbers - Drives", on page 40.

For instructions about installing and replacing a slide-in, see chapter 7 "Maintenance /
Servicing", section 4 "Slide-in drive - installation and exchange", on page 762.

The slide-in CD-ROM (5AC600.CDXS-00) and the slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW (5AC600.DVDS-

00) and DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW (5AC600.DVRS-00) drive are referred to in BIOS as
"secondary master". The slide-in USB FDD drive (5AC600.FDDS-00) is referred to as USB.

Information:
• It is possible to add or remove a slide-in drive at any time.
• In system units with 5 PCI slots, the slide-in USB FDD (5AC600.FDDS-00)
drive must be inserted in slide-in slot 1 for mechanical reasons. The slide-in
drive 5AC600.CFSS-00 (slide-in CF 2-slot) should only be operated in slide-in
slot 2.

Caution!
Turn off power before adding or removing a slide-in drive.

Slide-in slot 2
Connection Secondary master IDE device
Accessories Short description
5AC600.CDXS-00 Slide-in CD-ROM
5AC600.CFSS-00 Slide-in CF 2-slot
5AC600.DVDS-00 Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW
5AC600.DVRS-00 Slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW
5AC600.FDDS-00 Slide-in USB FDD
5AC600.HDDS-02 Slide-in hard disk 40 GB 24x7, ET

Table 75: Technical data - Slide-in slot 2

162 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.15 Serial number sticker

Each B&R device is assigned a unique serial number label with a bar code (type 128), which
allows the device to be clearly identified.

The serial number for the entire device is located behind the front door. This serial number
represents all of the components built into the system (model number, name, revision, serial
number, delivery date and duration of warranty).

Technical Data
Section 2
Figure 47: APC620 serial number sticker on front-side

A sticker with detailed information about the individual components can also be found on the
back side of the mounting plate.

Figure 48: APC620 serial number sticker on back-side

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 163

 Technical Data • Entire device

This information can also be found on the B&R homepage. Enter the serial number of the entire
device (found behind the front door) in the serial number search field on the start page www.br-
automation.com. The search provides you with a detailed list of the individual components.

Serial number entry

e.g. 70950170564

List of installed components

after the serial number search

Figure 49: Example of serial number search: 70950170564

164 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.16 Block diagram

The following block diagrams show the simplified structure according to the system unit being
used with a 855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX).

2.16.1 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX01-00

CPU temperature

Technical Data
DC/DC processor voltage CPU board
Intel Pentium M

Section 2
Clock generator
SM bus Intel Celeron M

LVDS LVDS TMDS

63LVD824 Sil 160
DVO analog RGB Monitor / Panel
SM bus North Bridge SDL1 / DVI-I
Intel 82855GMCH SDL IF
SO-DIMM Optional
module Memory Graphics fan 1
controller controller
256MB - 1GB Temp. sensor Optional IF: Optional Power / LED
PCI bus I/O CAN or RS485 fan 2 red/green/orange
controller
Temp. sensor Optional HDD LED
power supply fan 3
yellow

1-slot bus 8-bit configuration Link1 LED

switch yellow
DC/DC -12 V bus
V battery
RAM 128 kB Link2 LED
32-bit PCI bus slot 1

FPGA MTCX controller

SRAM module

yellow
Serial Flash
PS/2 mouse
Serial EEPROM
factory settings or keyboard

PCI bus Reset button

Power button
Ethernet
Piezzo controller Ethernet
summer ETH2
Intel 82551ER
Ethernet
Optional
Optional ETH1
add-on Secondary IDE Ethernet
CompactFlash hard disk or controller controller
slot CompactFlash Mic
slot
Primary IDE
South Bridge AC97 sound
controller ICH4 controller AC97
Intel 82801DB Line In
USB3 sound
Battery Real time clock USB USB0
950 mAh RTC controller
V battery USB6 Line Out
USB1 USB USB5
USB2
Battery backup module hub USB1 USB1 / USB2
BIOS
flash SM bus
6-pin Serial EEPROM
Load
battery
controller
CMOS setup RS232 COM1
unit
Temp. sensor
Controller
RS232 COM2
+ 15.6 volts
V Batterie Keyboard controller
Line driver
10 ms buffer DC/DC + 5 volts Hardware Serial 1 RS232 Security key
3-pin switch monitor
DC/DC CPU temperature
supply
isolated I/O controller
voltage Line driver
DC/DC + 3.3 volts Winbond Serial 2
switch RS232
Floppy W83627HF
controller Dallas security
External interface LPT key controller
Optional or interior interface

Figure 50: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX01-00 and 855GME CPU board

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 165

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.16.2 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX02-00

AP Link module
CPU temperature
DC/DC processor voltage CPU board LVDS TMDS
Intel Pentium M 63LVD824 Sil 160 AP Link
Clock generator
SM Bus Intel Celeron M SDL2 / DVI-D
Altera
FPGA

LVDS USB0 TMDS

DVO Sil 164
analog RGB Monitor / Panel
SM bus North Bridge SDL1 / DVI-I
Intel 82855GMCH SDL IF
SO-DIMM Optional
module Memory Graphics fan 1
controller controller
256MB - 1GB Temp. sensor Optional IF Optional Power / LED
PCI bus CAN or RS485 fan 2 red/green/orange
I/O
controller
Temp. sensor Optional HDD LED
power supply fan 3
yellow

2-slot bus 8-bit configuration Link1 LED

switch yellow
DC/DC -12 V bus
V battery
RAM 128 kB Link2 LED
32-bit PCI bus slot 2

32-bit PCI bus slot 1

FPGA MTCX controller

SRAM module

yellow
Serial Flash
PS/2 mouse
Serial EEPROM
or keyboard
Slide-in slot 1

factory settings

PCI bus Reset button

Power button
Ethernet
Piezzo controller Ethernet
USB5 summer ETH2
Intel 82551ER
Ethernet
Optional
Optional ETH1
add-on Secondary IDE Ethernet
CompactFlash hard disk or controller controller
slot CompactFlash Mic
slot
Primary IDE
South Bridge AC97 sound
controller ICH4 controller AC97
Intel 82801DB Line In
USB3 sound
Battery Real time clock USB USB0
950 mAh RTC controller
V battery USB6 Line Out
USB1 USB USB5
USB2
Battery backup module hub USB1 USB1 / USB2
BIOS
Flash SM bus
6-pin Serial EEPROM
Load
battery controller
CMOS setup RS232 COM1
unit
Temp. sensor
Controller
RS232 COM2
+ 15.6 volts
V battery Keyboard controller
Line driver
10 ms buffer DC/DC + 5 volts Hardware Serial 1 RS232 Security key
3-pin switch CPU temperature monitor
DC/DC
supply
isolated I/O controller
voltage Line driver
DC/DC + 3.3 volts Winbond Serial 2 RS232
switch
Floppy W83627HF
controller Dallas security
Exterior interface LPT key controller
Optional or internal interface

Figure 51: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX02-00 and 855GME CPU board

166 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.16.3 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX02-01

CPU temperature
DC/DC processor voltage CPU board
Intel Pentium M
Clock generator
SM bus Intel Celeron M

LVDS LVDS TMDS

63LVD824 Sil 160
DVO analog RGB Monitor / Panel
North Bridge

Technical Data
SM bus SDL1 / DVI-I
Intel 82855GMCH SDL IF

Section 2
SO-DIMM Optional
module Memory Graphics fan 1
controller controller
256MB - 1GB Temp. sensor Optional IF: Optional Power / LED
PCI bus I/O CAN or RS485 fan 2 red/green/orange
controller
Temp. sensor Optional HDD LED
power supply fan 3
yellow

2-slot bus 8-bit configuration Link1 LED

switch yellow
DC/DC -12 V bus
V battery
RAM 128 kB Link2 LED
32-bit PCI bus slot 2

32-bit PCI bus slot 1

FPGA MTCX controller

SRAM module

yellow
Serial Flash
PS/2 mouse
Serial EEPROM
or keyboard
Slide-in slot 1

factory settings

PCI bus Reset button

Power button
Ethernet
Piezzo controller Ethernet
USB5 summer ETH2
Intel 82551ER
Ethernet
Optional
Optional ETH1
add-on Secondary IDE Ethernet
CompactFlash hard disk or controller controller
slot CompactFlash Mic
slot
Primary IDE
South Bridge AC97 sound
controller ICH4 controller AC97
Intel 82801DB Line In
USB3 sound
Battery Real time clock USB USB0
950 mAh RTC controller
V battery USB6 Line Out
USB1 USB USB5
USB2
Battery backup module hub USB1 USB1 / USB2
BIOS
Flash SM Bus
6-pin Serial EEPROM
Load
battery
controller
CMOS setup RS232 COM1
unit
Temp. sensor
Controller
RS232 COM2
+ 15.6 volts
V Batterie Keyboard controller
Line driver
10 ms buffer DC/DC + 5 volts Hardware Serial 1 RS232 Security key
3-pin switch CPU temperature monitor
DC/DC
supply
isolated
I/O controller
voltage Line driver
DC/DC + 3.3 volts Winbond Serial 2
switch RS232
Floppy W83627HF
controller Dallas security
External interface LPT key controller
Optional or interior interface

Figure 52: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX02-01 and 855GME CPU board

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 167

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.16.4 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SF03-00

AP Link module
CPU temperature
DC/DC processor voltage CPU board LVDS TMDS
Intel Pentium M 63LVD824 Sil 160 AP Link
Clock generator
SM Bus Intel Celeron M SDL2 / DVI-D
Altera
FPGA

LVDS USB0 TMDS

DVO Sil 164
analog RGB Monitor / Panel
SM bus North Bridge SDL1 / DVI-I
Intel 82855GMCH SDL IF
SO-DIMM Optional
module Memory Graphics fan 1
controller controller
256MB - 1GB Temp. sensor Optional IF Optional Power / LED
PCI bus CAN or RS485 fan 2 red/green/orange
I/O
controller
Temp. sensor Optional HDD LED
power supply fan 3
yellow

3-slot bus 8-bit configuration Link1 LED

switch yellow
DC/DC -12 V bus
V battery
DC/DC +5 V bus RAM 128 kB Link2 LED
32-bit PCI bus slot 3

32-bit PCI bus slot 2

32-bit PCI bus slot 1

FPGA MTCX controller

SRAM module

yellow
DC/DC +3V3 bus
Serial Flash
PS/2 mouse
Serial EEPROM
or keyboard
Slide-in slot 1

factory settings

PCI bus Reset button

PCI
bridge
Power button
Ethernet
Piezzo controller Ethernet
USB5 summer ETH2
Intel 82551ER
Ethernet
Optional
Optional ETH1
add-on Secondary IDE Ethernet
CompactFlash hard disk or controller controller
slot CompactFlash Mic
slot
Primary IDE
South Bridge AC97 sound
controller ICH4 controller AC97
Intel 82801DB Line In
USB3 sound
Battery Real time clock USB USB0
950 mAh RTC controller
V battery USB6 Line Out
USB1 USB USB5
USB2
Battery backup module hub USB1 USB1 / USB2
SM bus
Battery Load Serial EEPROM
unit controller CMOS setup RS232 COM1
6-pin
Temp. sensor
Controller RS232 COM2
+ 15.6 volts
V battery Keyboard controller
Line driver
10 ms buffer
DC/DC + 5 volts Hardware Serial 1 RS232 Security key
switch monitor
Supply DC/DC CPU temperature
voltage Isolated I/O controller
3-pin DC/DC + 3.3 volts Line driver
Winbond Serial 2 RS232
switch
Floppy W83627HF
controller Dallas security
Exterior interface LPT key controller
Optional or internal interface

Figure 53: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SF03-00 and 855GME CPU board

168 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.16.5 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX05-00

AP Link module
CPU temperature
DC/DC processor voltage CPU board LVDS TMDS
Intel Pentium M 63LVD824 Sil 160 AP Link
Clock generator
SM Bus Intel Celeron M SDL2 / DVI-D
Altera
FPGA

LVDS USB0 TMDS

DVO Sil 164
analog RGB Monitor / Panel
North Bridge

Technical Data
SM bus SDL1 / DVI-I
Intel 82855GMCH SDL IF

Section 2
SO-DIMM Optional
module Memory Graphics fan 1
controller controller
256MB - 1GB Temp. sensor Optional IF Optional Power / LED
PCI bus CAN or RS485 fan 2 red/green/orange
I/O
controller
Temp. sensor Optional HDD LED
power supply fan 3
yellow

5-slot bus 8-bit configuration Link1 LED

switch yellow
DC/DC -12 V bus
V battery
DC/DC +5 V bus RAM 128 kB Link2 LED
32-bit PCI bus slot 5

32-bit PCI bus slot 4

32-bit PCI bus slot 3

32-bit PCI bus slot 2

32-bit PCI bus slot 1

FPGA MTCX controller

SRAM module

yellow
DC/DC +3V3 bus
Serial Flash
PS/2 mouse
Serial EEPROM
or keyboard
Slide-in slot 1

Slide-in slot 2

factory settings

PCI bus Reset button

PCI
bridge
Power button
Ethernet
Piezzo controller Ethernet
USB5 USB6 summer ETH2
Intel 82551ER
Ethernet
Optional
Optional ETH1
add-on Secondary IDE Ethernet
CompactFlash hard disk or controller controller
slot CompactFlash Mic
slot
Primary IDE
South Bridge AC97 sound
controller ICH4 controller AC97
Intel 82801DB Line In
USB3 sound
Battery Real time clock USB USB0
950 mAh RTC controller
V battery USB6 Line Out
USB1 USB USB5
USB2
Battery backup module hub USB1 USB1 / USB2
BIOS
Flash SM bus
6-pin Serial EEPROM
Load
battery controller
CMOS setup RS232 COM1
unit
Temp. sensor
Controller
RS232 COM2
+ 15.6 volts
V battery Keyboard controller
Line driver
10 ms buffer DC/DC + 5 volts Hardware Serial 1 RS232 Security key
3-pin switch CPU temperature monitor
DC/DC
supply
isolated I/O controller
voltage Line driver
DC/DC + 3.3 volts Winbond Serial 2
switch RS232
Floppy W83627HF
controller Dallas security
Exterior interface LPT key controller
Optional or internal interface

Figure 54: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX05-00 and 855GME CPU board

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 169

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.16.6 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX05-01

CPU temperature
DC/DC processor voltage CPU board
Intel Pentium M
Clock generator
SM bus Intel Celeron M

LVDS LVDS TMDS

63LVD824 Sil 160
DVO analog RGB Monitor / Panel
SM bus North Bridge SDL1 / DVI-I
Intel 82855GMCH SDL IF
SO-DIMM Optional
module Memory Graphics fan 1
controller controller
256MB - 1GB Temp. sensor Optional IF: Optional Power / LED
PCI bus I/O CAN or RS485 fan 2 red/green/orange
controller
Temp. sensor Optional HDD LED
power supply fan 3
yellow

5-slot bus 8-bit configuration Link1 LED

switch yellow
DC/DC -12 V bus
V battery
DC/DC +5 V bus RAM 128 kB Link2 LED
32-bit PCI bus slot 5

32-bit PCI bus slot 4

32-bit PCI bus slot 3

32-bit PCI bus slot 2

32-bit PCI bus slot 1

FPGA MTCX controller

SRAM module

yellow
DC/DC +3V3 bus
Serial Flash
PS/2 mouse
Serial EEPROM
or keyboard
Slide-in slot 1

Slide-in slot 2

factory settings

PCI bus Reset button

PCI
bridge
Power button
Ethernet
Piezzo controller Ethernet
USB5 USB6 summer ETH2
Intel 82551ER
Ethernet
Optional
Optional ETH1
add-on Secondary IDE Ethernet
CompactFlash hard disk or controller controller
slot CompactFlash Mic
slot
Primary IDE
South Bridge AC97 sound
controller ICH4 controller AC97
Intel 82801DB Line In
USB3 sound
Battery Real time clock USB USB0
950 mAh RTC controller
V battery USB6 Line Out
USB1 USB USB5
USB2
Battery backup module BIOS
hub USB1 USB1 / USB2
Flash
SM Bus
6-pol Serial EEPROM
Load
battery controller
CMOS setup RS232 COM1
unit
Temp. sensor
Controller
RS232 COM2
+ 15.6 volts
V Batterie Keyboard controller
Line driver
10 ms buffer DC/DC + 5 volts Hardware Serial 1 RS232 Security key
3-pin switch monitor
DC/DC CPU temperature
supply
isolated I/O controller
voltage Line driver
DC/DC + 3.3 volts Winbond Serial 2
switch RS232
Floppy W83627HF
controller Dallas security
External interface LPT key controller
Optional or interior interface

Figure 55: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX05-01 and 855GME CPU board

170 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.16.7 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SE00-00

LVDS LVDS TMDS

CPU temperature 63LVD824 Sil 160
DC/DC processor voltage Monitor / Panel
Board temperature CPU board analog RGB
SDL / DVI-I
855GME (XTX) SDL IF
SM bus
Clock generator

Power / LED
red/green/orange

CF LED
yellow
North Bridge

Technical Data
SM bus
Intel 82855GMCH Link1 LED

Section 2
SO-DIMM yellow

module Memory Graphics

256MB - 1GB
controller controller Reset button
Temp. sensor
PCI bus I/O
controller
Temp. sensor Power button
power supply

CAN
RAM 128 kB CAN status LED
yellow
Serial Flash
FPGA MTCX controller
CAN node
Serial EEPROM
Factory Settings number

CAN terminating
PCI bus switch
CAN terminating
LED
yellow

CompactFlash
slot 2 Piezzo FPGA X2X
buzzer
fielbus interfaces
and SRAM X2X status LED
yellow
POWERLINK, X2X,
CompactFlash Ethernet CAN, SRAM
slot 1 controller
POWERLINK
Slave
Primary IDE
South Bridge AC97 sound SRAM
Master controller ICH4 controller 512 kB
V battery
POWERLINK
Intel 82801DB USB3
Real-time clock USB USB5 n.c. node number
Battery
950 mAh RTC controller
V battery

Battery backup module

Ethernet
BIOS ETH
Flash SM bus Serial EEPROM
6-pol
Load CMOS setup
battery
controller USB1 / USB3
unit
Temp. sensor
controller
USB2 / USB4
+ 15,6 Volt
V Battery Keyboard controller
Line Driver
10 ms buffer
DC/DC + 5 Volt CPU temperature Hardware Serial 1 RS232 RS232 COM1
3-pin Switching monitor
DC/DC Board temperature
supply
isolated I/O Controller
volatge Line Driver
DC/DC + 3,3 Volt Winbond Serial 2 RS232 RS232 COM2
Switching
Floppy W83627HF
controller Dallas Security
External interface LPT Key controller Security key
Optional or interior interface

Figure 56: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SE00-00 and 855GME CPU board

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 171

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.16.8 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SE00-01

CPU temperature
DC/DC processor voltage Monitor / Panel
Board temperature CPU board analog RGB
RGB
855GME (XTX)
SM bus
Clock generator

Power / LED
red/green/orange

CF LED
yellow
SM bus North Bridge
Intel 82855GMCH Link1 LED
SO-DIMM yellow

module Memory Graphics

256MB - 1GB
controller controller Reset button
Temp. sensor
PCI bus I/O
controller
Temp. sensor Power button
power supply

CAN
RAM 128 kB CAN status LED
yellow
Serial Flash
FPGA MTCX controller
CAN node
Serial EEPROM
Factory Settings number

CAN terminating
PCI bus switch
CAN terminating
LED
yellow

CompactFlash
slot 2 Piezzo FPGA X2X
buzzer
fielbus interfaces
and SRAM X2X status LED
yellow
POWERLINK, X2X,
CompactFlash Ethernet CAN, SRAM
slot 1 controller
POWERLINK
Slave
Primary IDE
South Bridge AC97 sound SRAM
Master controller ICH4 controller 512 kB
V battery
POWERLINK
Intel 82801DB USB3
Real-time clock USB USB5 n.c. node number
Battery
950 mAh RTC controller
V battery

Battery backup module

Ethernet
BIOS ETH
Flash SM bus Serial EEPROM
6-pol
Load CMOS setup
battery
controller USB1 / USB3
unit
Temp. sensor
controller
USB2 / USB4
+ 15,6 Volt
V Battery Keyboard controller
Line Driver
10 ms buffer
DC/DC + 5 Volt CPU temperature Hardware Serial 1 RS232 RS232 COM1
3-pin Switching monitor
DC/DC Board temperature
supply
isolated I/O Controller
volatge Line Driver
DC/DC + 3,3 Volt Winbond Serial 2 RS232 RS232 COM2
Switching
Floppy W83627HF
controller Dallas Security
External interface LPT Key controller Security key
Optional or interior interface

Figure 57: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SE00-01 and 855GME CPU board

172 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Entire device

2.16.9 Entire device with system unit 5PC600.SE00-02

LVDS LVDS TMDS

CPU temperature 63LVD824 Sil 160
DC/DC processor voltage Monitor / Panel
Board temperature CPU board analog RGB
SDL / DVI-I
855GME (XTX) SDL IF
SM bus
Clock generator

Power / LED
red/green/orange

CF LED
yellow
North Bridge

Technical Data
SM bus
Intel 82855GMCH Link1 LED

Section 2
SO-DIMM yellow

module Memory Graphics

256MB - 1GB
controller controller Reset button
Temp. sensor
PCI bus I/O
controller
Temp. sensor Power button
power supply

CAN
RAM 128 kB CAN status LED
yellow
Serial Flash
FPGA MTCX controller
CAN node
Serial EEPROM
Factory Settings number

CAN terminating
PCI bus switch
CAN terminating
LED
yellow

CompactFlash
slot 2 Piezzo FPGA X2X
buzzer
fielbus interfaces
and SRAM X2X status LED
yellow
POWERLINK, X2X,
CompactFlash Ethernet CAN, SRAM
slot 1 controller
POWERLINK
Slave
Primary IDE
South Bridge AC97 sound SRAM
Master controller ICH4 controller 1 MB
V battery
POWERLINK
Intel 82801DB USB3
Real-time clock USB USB5 n.c. node number
Battery
950 mAh RTC controller
V battery

Battery backup module

Ethernet
BIOS ETH
Flash SM bus Serial EEPROM
6-pol
Load CMOS setup
battery
controller USB1 / USB3
unit
Temp. sensor
controller
USB2 / USB4
+ 15,6 Volt
V Battery Keyboard controller
Line Driver
10 ms buffer
DC/DC + 5 Volt CPU temperature Hardware Serial 1 RS232 RS232 COM1
3-pin Switching monitor
DC/DC Board temperature
supply
isolated I/O Controller
volatge Line Driver
DC/DC + 3,3 Volt Winbond Serial 2 RS232 RS232 COM2
Switching
Floppy W83627HF
controller Dallas Security
External interface LPT Key controller Security key
Optional or interior interface

Figure 58: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SE00-02 and 855GME CPU board

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 173

 Technical Data • Individual components

3. Individual components

3.1 System units

All of the individual components of the Automation PC620 system come together inside the
system unit. The system unit consists of an APC620 housing with an integrated main board. The
housing units are available in variations with 1, 2, 3 and 5 PCI slots and in APC620 embedded.
Units with 2, 3 or 5 PCI slots have an additional 1 or 2 slide-in drives, respectively.

3.1.1 APC620 with 1, 2, 3 and 5 PCI slots

Features 5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01

Photo

B&R ID code $1B7D $1BB6 $1BB7 $A0B7 $1D13 $1D14

Serial interfaces
Type RS232, modem capable
Amount 2
UART 16550 compatible, 16 byte FIFO
Transfer rate Max. 115 kBaud
Connection 9-pin DSUB, male
Ethernet
Controller See "Ethernet connection ETH1", on page 130 and "Ethernet connection ETH2", on page 132
Transfer rate 10/100 Mbit/s
Connection RJ45 twisted pair (10 Base T / 100 Base T)
USB interface
Type USB 2.0
Amount 2
Transfer rate Up to 480 MBit (high speed)
Connection Type A
Monitor / Panel DVI-I, female
AC97 sound Mic., line in, line out
IF optional slot 1
PCI slots
half-size 1 2 - 5
full-size - - 3 -
PCI standard 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2
Bus speed 33 MHz 33 MHz 33 MHz 33 MHz
CompactFlash slot 1 (CF1) integrated
Internal organization Primary master

Table 76: Technical data - 1, 2, 3 and 5 PCI slot types

174 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01

Combined CompactFlash slot 2 / Yes, optional add-on CompactFlash slot or add-on hard disk
hard disk (HDD/CF2)
Internal organization Primary slave
Insert for slide-in drive 1 - Yes
Internal organization Secondary slave
Insert for slide-in drive 2 - - - - Yes
Internal organization Secondary master
APC620 UPS module optional Yes, starting Yes, starting Yes, starting Yes Yes, starting Yes, starting
with Rev. H0 with Rev. G0 with Rev. H0 with Rev. F0 with Rev. H0

Technical Data
SRAM module optional Yes, starting Yes, starting Yes, starting Yes Yes, starting Yes, starting

Section 2
with Rev. I0 with Rev. H0 with Rev. K0 with Rev. H0 with Rev. H0
Reset button Yes
Power button Yes
PS/2 keyboard / mouse Yes, combined, will be automatically detected
Battery slot Yes
Hardware security key slot Yes (DS1425 from MAXIM/Dallas)
Fan slot Yes
Automation Panel link slot - 1 - 1 1 -
Status LEDs Power, HDD, Link1, Link2
Real-time clock (RTC)
Battery-buffered Yes
Accuracy See the technical data for CPU boards
MTCX1) Yes
Electrical characteristics
Power supply
Rated voltage 24 VDC ±25% 24 VDC ±25%
Starting current Typically 7A Typically 10 A
Maximum 40 A for < 300 μs Maximum 40 A for < 300 μs
Power consumption See 2.8 "Power management APC620 system unit See section 2.10 "Power management APC620
with 1 PCI slot" system unit with 3 PCI slots" or 2.11 "Power
management APC620 system units with 5 PCI slots"
Mechanical characteristics
Housing2)
Item Galvanized steel plate
Paint Light gray (similar to Pantone 427CV), dark gray (similar to Pantone 432CV)
Front cover Colored plastic (similar to Pantone 144CV)
Outer dimensions
Width 65 mm 104.5 mm 125 mm 185.4 mm
Length 251 mm 253 mm 253 mm 253 mm
Height 270 mm 270 mm 410 mm 270 mm
Weight Approx. 1.5 kg Approx. 2.6 kg Approx. 4.5 kg Approx. 3.8 kg
Mounting plates (for M4 screws) 4 4 6
Drilling templates for mounting (see chapter 3 "Commissioning", section 1.2 "Drilling templates")

Table 76: Technical data - 1, 2, 3 and 5 PCI slot types (Forts.)

1) Maintenance Controller Extended, for more information, see the section "Maintenance Controller Extended (MTCX)", on page 793.
2) Depending on the process or batch, there may be visible deviations in the color and surface structure.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 175

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.1.2 APC620 embedded variations

Features 5PC600.SE00-00 5PC600.SE00-01 5PC600.SE00-02

Photo

B&R ID code $A3BA $A3BB $A52B

Serial interfaces
Type RS232, modem capable
Amount 2
UART 16550-compatible, 16-byte FIFO
Transfer rate Max. 115 kBaud
Connection 9-pin DSUB, male
Ethernet
Controller See "Ethernet connection ETH (only APC620 embedded)", on page 129
Transfer rate 10/100 Mbit/s
Connection RJ45 twisted pair (10 Base T / 100 Base T)
POWERLINK
Amount 1
Station Number Dial 2 pcs.
X2X Link
Amount 1
Status LED Yes, see page 127
CAN bus See also page 125
Amount 1
Transfer rate Max. 500 kBit/s
Node switch Yes
Terminating resistor Yes, can be activated using a switch
Status LED Yes, see page 127
USB interface
Type USB 2.0
Amount 4
Transfer rate Up to 480 MBit (high speed)
Connection Type A
Monitor / Panel DVI-I, female DVI-A, female DVI-I, female
AC97 sound -
IF optional slot -
PCI slots -
half-size
full-size
PCI standard
Bus speed
CompactFlash slot 1 (CF1) integrated
Internal organization Primary master

Table 77: Technical data - APC620 embedded variations

176 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5PC600.SE00-00 5PC600.SE00-01 5PC600.SE00-02

CompactFlash slot 2 (CF2) integrated

Internal organization Primary slave
Insert for slide-in drive 1 -
Internal organization
Insert for slide-in drive 2 -
Internal organization
APC620 UPS module optional Yes
SRAM Yes Yes

Technical Data
Quantity 512 kB 1 MB
Remanent variables for AR

Section 2
(Automation Runtime) in power 256 kB with CPU board 5PC600.X855-xx 256 kB with CPU board
fail mode 192 kB with CPU board 5PC600.X945-00 5PC600.X855-xx
192 kB with CPU board
5PC600.X945-00
Reset button Yes
Power button Yes
PS/2 keyboard / mouse -
Battery slot Yes
Hardware security key slot Yes (DS1425 from MAXIM/Dallas)
Fan slot -
Automation Panel link slot -
Status LEDs Power, HDD, Link1
Real-time clock (RTC)
Battery-buffered Yes
Accuracy See the technical data for the CPU board
MTCX1) Yes
Electrical characteristics
Power supply
Rated voltage 24 VDC ±25%
Starting current Typically 7 A
maximum 40 A for < 300 μs
Power consumption See 2.12 "Power management for the APC620 embedded system unit"
Mechanical characteristics
Housing2)
Item Galvanized steel plate
Paint Light gray (similar to Pantone 427CV), dark gray (similar to Pantone 432CV)
Front cover Colored plastic (similar to Pantone 144CV)
Outer dimensions
Width 68.3 mm
Length 225.6 mm
Height 210 mm
Weight Approx. 1.3 kg
Mounting plates (for M4 screws) 4
Drilling templates for mounting (see chapter 3 "Commissioning", section 1.2 "Drilling templates")

Table 77: Technical data - APC620 embedded variations (Forts.)

1) Maintenance Controller Extended, for more information, see the section "Maintenance Controller Extended (MTCX)", on page 793.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 177

 Technical Data • Individual components

2) Depending on the process or batch, there may be visible deviations in the color and surface structure.

178 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.2 CPU boards 815E (ETX)

Technical Data
Section 2
Figure 59: CPU boards 815E (ETX)

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5PC600.E815-00 5PC600.E815-02 5PC600.E815-03

Boot loader / Operating BIOS Phoenix (see section "815E (ETX) BIOS description", on page 371)
system
Processor
Architectures 0.13 μm 0.13 μm 0.13 μm
Type Intel Celeron 3 Intel Celeron 3 Intel Celeron
Clock frequency 400 MHz 733 MHz 1 GHz
Expanded command set MMX technology, streaming SIMD MMX technology, streaming SIMD MMX technology, streaming SIMD
extension extension extension
L1 cache 16 kB 16 kB 16 kB
L2 cache 256 kB 256 kB 256 kB
Floating point unit (FPU) Yes Yes Yes
Chipset Intel 82815E (GMCH)
Intel 82801DB (ICH4)
Real-time clock (RTC)
Battery-buffered Yes
Accuracy at 25°C typ. 24 ppm (2 seconds) 1) per day
Front side bus 100 Mhz 133 Mhz 133 MHz

Table 78: Technical data - 815E CPU boards (ETX)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 179

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5PC600.E815-00 5PC600.E815-02 5PC600.E815-03

Mass memory management 2 IDE ports, UDMA 100
Memory
Type SDRAM
Quantity Max. 512 MB
Socket SO-DIMM 144-pin
Graphics Support up to SXGA display units
Controller Intel 82815 (integrated in the Chipset)
Memory 32 MB shared memory (reserved in the main memory)
Color depth Max. 24 bit
Resolution
RGB up to 1280 x 1024 @ 85 Hz 24 bit, up to 1600 x 1200 @ 75 Hz 8 bit
GE12) up to 1280 x 1024 @ 85 Hz 24 bit

Table 78: Technical data - 815E CPU boards (ETX) (Forts.)

1) At max. specified ambient temperature: typically 70 ppm (6 seconds) - worst-case 220 ppm (19 seconds).
2) GE = Graphics Engine

Driver support

In order for the CPU board with the Intel 82815E chipset to work properly, it is necessary to install
the Intel chipset driver (e.g. special USB driver) and the graphics chip. The necessary software
can be downloaded from the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-
automation.com).

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

180 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.3 CPU boards 855GME (ETX)

Technical Data
Section 2
Figure 60: CPU boards 855GME (ETX)

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5PC600.E855-00 5PC600.E855-01 5PC600.E855-02 5PC600.E855-03 5PC600.E855-04 5PC600.E855-05

Boot loader / Operating BIOS Phoenix (see BIOS section "855GME (ETX) BIOS description", on page 425)
system
Processor
Architectures 0.13 μm 0.13 μm 90 nm 90 nm 0.13 μm 0.13 μm
Type Intel Pentium M Intel Pentium M Intel Pentium M Intel Pentium M Intel Celeron M Intel Celeron M
Clock frequency 1.1 GHz 1.6 GHz 1.4 GHz 1.8 GHz 600 MHz 1000 MHz
Expanded command set MMX MMX MMX MMX MMX MMX
technology, technology, technology, technology, technology, technology,
streaming streaming streaming streaming streaming streaming
SIMD extension SIMD extension SIMD extension SIMD extension SIMD extension SIMD extension
L1 cache 2 2 2 2 2 2
L2 cache 32 kB 32 kB 32 kB 32 kB 32 kB 32 kB
Floating point unit (FPU) 1 MB 1 MB 2 MB 2 MB 512 kB 512 kB
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Chipset Intel 82855GME (GMHC)
Intel 82801DB (ICH4)

Table 79: Technical data - CPU boards 855GME (ETX)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 181

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5PC600.E855-00 5PC600.E855-01 5PC600.E855-02 5PC600.E855-03 5PC600.E855-04 5PC600.E855-05

Real-time clock (RTC)

Battery-buffered Yes
Accuracy At 25°C typ. 12 ppm (1 second)1) per day
Front side bus 400 Mhz
Mass memory management 2 IDE ports, UDMA 100
Memory
Type DDRAM
Quantity Max. 1 GB
Socket SO-DIMM 200-pin
Graphics
Controller Intel Extreme Graphics 2 (integrated in the chipset)
Memory 64 MB shared memory (reserved in the main memory)
Color depth Max. 32 bit
Resolution
RGB 350 MHz RAMDAC, up to 2048 x 1536 @ 60 Hz (QXGA) including 1920 x 1080 @ 85 Hz (HDTV)
GE12) = LVDS 2x 112 MHz LVDS transmitter, from 640 x 480 up to 1600 x 1200 (Embedded Panel interface based on VESA
EDID™ 1.3)
GE22) = DVO Intel compliant DVO 2.0 port (12-bit DDR)
supports external DVI transmitters with a bandwidth up to 165 MHz, 1600 x 1200 (UXGA)

Table 79: Technical data - CPU boards 855GME (ETX) (Forts.)

1) At max. specified ambient temperature: typically 58 ppm (5 seconds) - worst-case 220 ppm (19 seconds).
2) GE = Graphics Engine

Driver support

In order for the CPU board with the Intel 82855GME chipset to work properly, it is necessary to
install the Intel chipset driver (e.g. special USB driver) and the graphics chip. The necessary
software can be downloaded from the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-
automation.com).

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

182 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.4 CPU boards 855GME (XTX)

Technical Data
Section 2
Figure 61: CPU boards 855GME (XTX)

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5PC600.X855-00 5PC600.X855-01 5PC600.X855-02 5PC600.X855-03 5PC600.X855-04 5PC600.X855-05

Boot loader / Operating BIOS AMI (see BIOS section "855GME (XTX) BIOS description", on page 481)
system
Processor
Architectures 0.13 μm 0.13 μm 90 nm 90 nm 0.13 μm 0.13 μm
Type Intel Pentium M Intel Pentium M Intel Pentium M Intel Pentium M Intel Celeron M Intel Celeron M
Clock frequency 1.1 GHz 1.6 GHz 1.4 GHz 1.8 GHz 600 MHz 1000 MHz
Expanded command set MMX MMX MMX MMX MMX MMX
technology, technology, technology, technology, technology, technology,
streaming streaming streaming streaming streaming streaming
SIMD extension SIMD extension SIMD extension SIMD extension SIMD extension SIMD extension
L1 cache 2 2 2 2 2 2
L2 cache 32 kB 32 kB 32 kB 32 kB 32 kB 32 kB
Floating point unit (FPU) 1 MB 1 MB 2 MB 2 MB 512 kB 512 kB
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Chipset Intel 82855GME (GMHC)
Intel 82801DB (ICH4)

Table 80: Technical data - CPU boards 855GME (XTX)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 183

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5PC600.X855-00 5PC600.X855-01 5PC600.X855-02 5PC600.X855-03 5PC600.X855-04 5PC600.X855-05

Real-time clock (RTC)

Battery-buffered Yes
Accuracy At 25°C typ. 12 ppm (1 second)1) per day
Front side bus 400 Mhz
Mass memory management 2 IDE ports, UDMA 100
Memory
Type DDRAM
Quantity Max. 1 GB
Socket SO-DIMM 200-pin
Graphics
Controller Intel Extreme Graphics 2 (integrated in the chipset)
Memory Up to 64 MB shared memory (reserved in the main memory)
Color depth Max. 32 bit
Resolution
RGB 350 MHz RAMDAC, up to 2048 x 1536 @ 60 Hz (QXGA) including 1920 x 1080 @ 85 Hz (HDTV)
GE12) = LVDS 2x 112 MHz LVDS transmitter, from 640 x 480 up to 1600 x 1200 (Embedded Panel interface based on VESA
EDID™ 1.3)
GE22) = DVO Intel compliant DVO 2.0 port (12-bit DDR)
supports external DVI transmitters with a bandwidth up to 165 MHz, 1600 x 1200 (UXGA)

Table 80: Technical data - CPU boards 855GME (XTX) (Forts.)

1) At max. specified ambient temperature: typically 58 ppm (5 seconds) - worst-case 220 ppm (19 seconds).
2) GE = Graphics Engine

Driver support

In order for the CPU board with the Intel 82855GME chipset to work properly, it is necessary to
install the Intel chipset driver (e.g. special USB driver) and the graphics chip. The necessary
software can be downloaded from the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-
automation.com).

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

184 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.5 Heat sink

There are a number of heat sink variants available to be used with different CPU boards.

Technical Data
Section 2
Figure 62: Heat sink

Information:
A heat sink can only be replaced at the B&R plant.

Mechanical 5AC600.HS01-00 5AC600.HS01-01 5AC600.HS01-02 5AC600.HS02-01 5AC600.HS02-02 5AC600.HS03-01

characteristics
Ideal for CPU 5PC600.E815-00 5PC600.E855-00 5PC600.E855-01 5PC600.E855-00 5PC600.E855-01 5PC600.X855-04
boards 5PC600.E815-02 5PC600.E855-02 5PC600.E855-03 5PC600.E855-02 5PC600.E855-03 5PC600.X855-05
5PC600.E815-03 5PC600.E855-04 5PC600.X855-01 5PC600.E855-04 5PC600.X855-01 5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-05 5PC600.X855-03 5PC600.E855-05 5PC600.X855-03 5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.X855-00 5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.X855-02 5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.X855-04 5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.X855-05 5PC600.X855-05
Suitable for the 5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SE00-00
following system 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SE00-01
units 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SE00-02
5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-00
5PC600.SX05-01 5PC600.SX05-01 5PC600.SX05-01
Item Black-coated aluminum
Outer dimensions
Width
Height 228.7 mm 228.7 mm 228.7 mm 228.7 mm 203.9 mm
Depth 218 mm 218 mm 358 mm 358 mm 158 mm
12.8 mm 28 mm 12.8 mm 28 mm 12.8 mm
Weight Approx. 1340 g Approx. 1640 g Approx. 2000 g Approx. 3200 g Approx. 900 g

Table 81: Technical data - Heat sink

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 185

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.6 Main memory

The CPU boards (815E, 855GME) are each equipped with a socket for memory modules. When
choosing a main memory, it is important to consider both the maximum memory capacity (for
815E (ETX) CPU Boards 512 MB, and for 855GME (ETX or XTX) CPU Boards 1 GB) and the
correct type.

Figure 63: Main memory module

Information:
A main memory module can only be replaced at the B&R plant.

Features 5MMSDR.0128-01 5MMSDR.0256-01 5MMSDR.0512-01 5MMDDR.0256-00 5MMDDR.0512-00 5MMDDR.1024-00

Ideal for CPU
815E (ETX) 855GME (ETX / XTX)
boards
Quantity 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB
Construct 144-pin 144-pin 144-pin 200-pin 200-pin 200-pin
ion SO-DIMM SO-DIMM SO-DIMM SO-DIMM SO-DIMM SO-DIMM
Type SDRAM SDRAM SDRAM DDR-SDRAM DDR-SDRAM DDR-SDRAM
Organization 16Mx64 32x64 64Mx64 32Mx64 64Mx64 128Mx64

Table 82: Technical data - Main memory

186 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7 Drives

3.7.1 Add-on Solid State Drive 128 GB 24x7 ET - 5AC600.SSDI-00

This 128 GB add-on SSD (Solid State Drive) is based on Multi Level Cell (MLC) technology and
is ATA/ATAPI compatible. The add-on drive is referred to internally as the primary slave drive.

Information:

Technical Data
Add-on drives are only available factory-installed. Therefore, they need to be

Section 2
requested when placing an order.

Figure 64: Add-on SSD 128 GB - 5AC600.SSDI-00 ≤ D0

Figure 65: Add-on SSD 128 GB - 5AC600.SSDI-00 ≥ E0

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 187

 Technical Data • Individual components

Technical data

Information:
A sudden loss of power may result in data loss! In very rare cases, mass memory
may also be damaged.

To prevent damage and loss of data, the use of a UPS device is recommended.

Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the fully assembled device. For
the assembled device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data
given specifically for that device.

Features 5AC600.SSDI-00 Revision ≤ 5AC600.SSDI-00 Revision ≥ 5AC600.SSDI-00 Revision ≥

C0 D0 E01)
Manufacturer Transcend Innodisk
Manufacturer's product ID TS128GPSD320 TS128GPSD330 DEP25-A28D06SWH88
Formatted capacity 128 GB
Data reliability < 1 unrecoverable error in 1016 bit read accesses
Interface PATA
S.M.A.R.T. Support Yes
MTBF 1,000,000 hours 3,000,000 hours
Continuous reading Max. 103.7 MB/s Max. 118.4 MB/s Max. 90 MB/s
Continuous writing Max. 93.15 MB/s Max. 92.75 MB/s Max. 90 MB/s
IOPS2)
4k read 7.733 MB/s 13.09 MB/s -
4k write 0.722 MB/s 1.225 MB/s -
Endurance
MLC flash Yes
Compatibility PATA (ATA/ATAPI 8)
SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
Ultra DMA Mode 0-6
Multi-Word DMA Mode 0-2
PIO Mode 0-4
Data volume 80 TBW3) 345,6 TBW3)
Mechanical characteristics
Add-on mounting Fixed

Table 83: Technical data - Add-on SSD - 5AC600.SSDI-00

188 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.SSDI-00 Revision ≤ 5AC600.SSDI-00 Revision ≥ 5AC600.SSDI-00 Revision ≥

C0 D0 E01)
Outer dimensions4)
Width 69.85 mm 69.85 mm
Height 7.40 mm 7.20 mm
Depth 100.3 mm 99,85 mm
Weight5) 55 g 100 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to 70°C -40 to 85°C

Technical Data
Storage -40 to 85°C -55 to 95°C

Section 2
Transport -40 to 85°C -55 to 95°C
Relative humidity
Operation 0 to 95%, non-condensing 10 to 95%, non-condensing
Storage 0 to 95%, non-condensing 10 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 0 to 95%, non-condensing 10 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 20 to 2000 Hz: 20 g 7 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Storage 20 to 2000 Hz: 20 g 7 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Transport 20 to 2000 Hz: 20 g 7 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Storage 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Transport 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 12192 meters
Storage - 300 to 12192 meters
Transport - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 83: Technical data - Add-on SSD - 5AC600.SSDI-00 (Forts.)

1) The simultaneous operation with a CompactFlash card in the CompactFlash1 slot is no longer recommended.
2) IOPS: Random read and write input/output operations per second.
3) TBW: Terabyte written
4) Dimensions without add-on
5) Weight without add-on

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 189

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55
50 Storage
Operation
45 Transport
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 66: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on SSD 128 GB - 5AC600.SSDI-00 ≤ D0

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
Transport
Storage

55
Operation
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 67: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on SSD 128 GB - 5AC600.SSDI-00 ≥ E0

190 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.2 Replacement Solid State Drive 128 GB 24x7 ET - 5MMSSD.0128-00

This 128 GB Solid State Drive can be used as a replacement part for the 5AC600.SSDI-00 SSD.

Technical Data
Section 2
Figure 68: Replacement SSD 128 GB - 5MMSSD.0128-00 ≤ D0

Figure 69: Replacement SSD 128 GB - 5MMSSD.0128-00 ≥ E0

Technical data

Information:
A sudden loss of power may result in data loss! In very rare cases, mass memory
may also be damaged.

To prevent damage and loss of data, the use of a UPS device is recommended.

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the fully assembled device. For
the assembled device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data
given specifically for that device.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 191

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5MMSSD.0128-00 Revision ≤ 5MMSSD.0128-00 Revision ≥ 5MMSSD.0128-00 Revision ≥

C0 D0 E0
Manufacturer Transcend Innodisk
Manufacturer's product ID TS128GPSD320 TS128GPSD330 DEP25-A28D06SWH88
Formatted capacity 128 GB
Data reliability < 1 unrecoverable error in 1016 bit read accesses
Interface PATA
S.M.A.R.T. Support Yes
MTBF 1,000,000 hours 3,000,000 hours
Continuous reading Max. 103.7 MB/s Max. 118.4 MB/s Max. 90 MB/s
Continuous writing Max. 93.15 MB/s Max. 92.75 MB/s Max. 90 MB/s
IOPS1)
4k read 7.733 MB/s 13.09 MB/s -
4k write 0.722 MB/s 1.225 MB/s -
Endurance
MLC flash Yes
Compatibility PATA (ATA/ATAPI 8)
SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
Ultra DMA Mode 0-6
Multi-Word DMA Mode 0-2
PIO Mode 0-4
Data volume 80 TBW2) 345,6 TBW2)
Mechanical characteristics
Outer dimensions
Width 69.85 mm 69.85 mm
Height 7.40 mm 9.20 mm
Depth 100.3 mm 99.85 mm
Weight 55 g 100 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to 70°C -40 to 85°C
Storage -40 to 85°C -55 to 95°C
Transport -40 to 85°C -55 to 95°C
Relative humidity
Operation 0 to 95%, non-condensing 10 to 95%, non-condensing
Storage 0 to 95%, non-condensing 10 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 0 to 95%, non-condensing 10 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 20 to 2000 Hz: 20 g 7 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Storage 20 to 2000 Hz: 20 g 7 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Transport 20 to 2000 Hz: 20 g 7 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation 1500 g, 0.5 ms 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Storage 1500 g, 0.5 ms 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Transport 1500 g, 0.5 ms 1500 g, 0.5 ms

Table 84: Technical data - Replacement SSD - 5MMSSD.0128-00

192 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5MMSSD.0128-00 Revision ≤ 5MMSSD.0128-00 Revision ≥ 5MMSSD.0128-00 Revision ≥

C0 D0 E0
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 12192 meters
Storage - 300 to 12192 meters
Transport - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 84: Technical data - Replacement SSD - 5MMSSD.0128-00 (Forts.)

1) IOPS: Random read and write input/output operations per second.

2) TBW: Terabyte written

Technical Data
Section 2
Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55
50 Storage
Operation
45 Transport
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 70: Temperature humidity diagram - Replacement SSD 128 GB - 5MMSSD.0128-00 ≤ D0

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 193

 Technical Data • Individual components

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
Transport
Storage

55
Operation
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 71: Temperature humidity diagram - Replacement SSD 128 GB - 5MMSSD.0128-00 ≥ E0

194 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.3 Add-on hard disk 30 GB 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDI-00

This hard disk is specified for 24-hour operation (24x7). The add-on drive is referred to internally
as the primary slave drive.

Information:
Add-on drives are only available factory-installed. Therefore, they need to be
requested when placing an order.

Technical Data
Section 2
Figure 72: Add-on hard disk 30 GB 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDI-00

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5AC600.HDDI-00
Manufacturer's product ID Fujitsu MHT2030AR
Formatted capacity 30 GB
Number of heads 2
Number of sectors (user) 58,605,120
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 4200 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 7.14 ms

Table 85: Technical data - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 195

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.HDDI-00
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1.5 ms
Average (read access) 12 ms
Maximum 22 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 5 seconds (typically)
Interface ATA-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium 26.1 to 36.2 MB/s
To/from host Max. 100 MB/s (ultra-DMA mode 5)
Cache 2 MB
Noise level (idle mode) Approx. 24 dBA at 30 cm
Electrical characteristics
Lifespan 5 years or 20,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
MTBF 300,000 hours
Mechanical characteristics
Add-on mounting Fixed
Outer dimensions (without slide-in)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight 120 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature1)
Operation - standard 2) 5 to 55°C
Operation - 24-hour 3) 5 to 44°C
Bearings -40 to 65°C
Transport -40 to 65°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 1 g (9.8 m/s2 0-peak)
Bearings No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 5 g (49 m/s 2 0-peak)
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 225 g (2207 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
Bearings No damage at max. 900 g (8820 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No damage at max. 120 g (1176 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3000 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12000 meters

Table 85: Technical data - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-00 (Forts.)

1) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).
2) Standard operation means 250 POH (power-on hours) per month.
3) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.

196 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55

Technical Data
Storage 24-hour
50
Transport operation

Section 2
45
40

Standard operation
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 73: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 197

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.4 Add-on hard disk 20 GB ET - 5AC600.HDDI-01

This hard disk has an extended temperature specification (ET), but is not permitted for 24 hour
operation. The add-on drive is referred to internally as the primary slave drive.

Information:
Add-on drives are only available factory-installed. Therefore, they need to be
requested when placing an order.

Figure 74: Add-on hard disk 20 GB - 5AC600.HDDI-01

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5AC600.HDDI-01
Manufacturer's product ID Fujitsu MHT2020AC
Formatted capacity 20 GB
Number of heads 2
Number of sectors (user) 39,070,080
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 4200 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 7.14 ms

Table 86: Technical data - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-01

198 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.HDDI-01
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1.5 ms
Average (read access) 12 ms
Maximum 22 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 5 seconds (typically)
Interface ATA-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium Up to 28.9 MB/s
To/from host Max. 100 MB/s (ultra-DMA mode 5)

Technical Data
Cache 2 MB

Section 2
Noise level (idle mode) Approx. 22 dBA at 30 cm
Electrical characteristics
Lifespan 5 years or 20,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
MTBF 300,000 hours
Mechanical characteristics
Add-on mounting Fixed
Outer dimensions (without slide-in)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight 120 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature1)
Operation2) -20 to 80°C
Bearings -40 to 85°C
Transport -40 to 85°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 1 g (9.8 m/s2 0-peak)
Bearings No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 5 g (49 m/s 2 0-peak)
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 225 g (2207 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
Bearings No damage at max. 900 g (8820 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No damage at max. 120 g (1176 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3000 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12000 meters

Table 86: Technical data - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-01 (Forts.)

1) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).
2) Standard operation means 250 POH (power-on hours) per month.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 199

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Lagerung
50 Betrieb
Transport
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 75: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-01

200 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.5 Add-on hard disk 40 GB 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDI-02

This hard disk is specified for 24-hour operation (24x7). The add-on drive is referred to internally
as the primary slave drive.

Information:
Add-on drives are only available factory-installed. Therefore, they need to be
requested when placing an order.

Technical Data
Section 2
Figure 76: Add-on hard disk 40 GB - 5AC600.HDDI-02

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5AC600.HDDI-02
Manufacturer's product ID Hitachi HTE726040M9AT00
Formatted capacity 40 GB
Number of heads 4
Number of sectors (user) 78,140,160
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 7200 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 10 ms

Table 87: Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-02

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 201

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.HDDI-02
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1 ms
Average (read access) 10 ms
Maximum (read access) 16 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 4 seconds (typically)
Interface ATA-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium 236 to 507 MBit/s
To/from host Max. 100 MB/s (ultra-DMA mode 5)
Cache 8 MB
Electrical characteristics
Lifespan 5 years or 30,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
MTBF 477,000 hours1)
Mechanical characteristics
Add-on mounting Fixed
Outer dimensions (without slide-in)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight 120 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature2)
Operation - standard 3) 5 to 55°C
Operation - 24-hour4) 5 to 40°C
Bearings -40 to 65°C
Transport -40 to 65°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 5 - 500 Hz: 1 g (9.8 m/s2 0-peak) duration 2 octaves per minute; no non-recovered errors
Bearings 5 - 500 Hz: 5 g (49 m/s2 0-peak) duration 0.5 oct./min.; no damage
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 200 g (1960 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
No non-recovered errors at max. 15 g (147 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Bearings No damage at max. 980 g (9800 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No damage at max. 120 g (1176 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3048 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 87: Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-02 (Forts.)

1) Manufacturer specification at + 40°C ambient temperature.

2) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).
3) Standard operation means 333 POH (power-on hours) per month.
4) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.

202 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

85
80
75
70
65
60
55

Technical Data
Lagerung 24 Stunden
50
Transport Betrieb

Section 2
45
40
35
30

Standard-
betrieb
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 77: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-02

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 203

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.6 Add-on hard disk 60 GB 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDI-03

This hard disk is specified for 24-hour operation (24x7). The add-on drive is referred to internally
as the primary slave drive.

Information:
Add-on drives are only available factory-installed. Therefore, they need to be
requested when placing an order.

Figure 78: Add-on hard disk 60 GB - 5AC600.HDDI-03

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5AC600.HDDI-03
Manufacturer's product ID Hitachi HTE721060G9AT00
Formatted capacity 60 GB
Number of heads 3
Number of sectors (user) 117,210,240
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 7200 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 10 ms

Table 88: Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-03

204 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.HDDI-03
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1 ms
Average (read access) 10 ms
Maximum (read access) 16 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 4 seconds (typically)
Interface ATA-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium 267 to 629 MBit/s
To/from host Max. 100 MB/s (ultra-DMA mode 5)

Technical Data
Cache 8 MB

Section 2
Electrical characteristics
Lifespan 5 years or 30,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
MTBF 550,000 hours1)
Mechanical characteristics
Add-on mounting Fixed
Outer dimensions (without slide-in)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight 120 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature2)
Operation - standard 3) 5 to 55°C
Operation - 24-hour4) 5 to 40°C
Bearings -40 to 65°C
Transport -40 to 65°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 5 - 500 Hz: 1 g (9.8 m/s2 0-peak) duration 1 octave per minute; no non-recovered errors
Bearings 10 - 500 Hz: 5 g (49 m/s2 0-peak) duration 0.5 oct./min.; no damage
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 160 g (1568 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No non-recovered errors at max. 300 g (2900 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
No non-recovered errors at max. 15 g (147 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Bearings No damage at max. 1000 g (9800 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No damage at max. 120 g (1176 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3048 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 88: Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-03 (Forts.)

1) Manufacturer specification at + 40°C ambient temperature.

2) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).
3) Standard operation means 333 POH (power-on hours) per month.
4) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 205

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Lagerung 24 Stunden
50
Transport Betrieb
45
40
35
30

Standard-
betrieb
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 79: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-03

206 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.7 Add-on hard disk 80 GB 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDI-04

This hard disk is specified for 24-hour operation (24x7). The add-on drive is referred to internally
as the primary slave drive.

Information:
Add-on drives are only available factory-installed. Therefore, they need to be
requested when placing an order.

Technical Data
Section 2
Figure 80: Add-on hard disk 80 GB - 5AC600.HDDI-04

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5AC600.HDDI-04
Manufacturer's product ID Hitachi HTE721080G9AT00
Formatted capacity 80 GB
Number of heads 4
Number of sectors (user) 156,301,488
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 7200 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 10 ms

Table 89: Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-04

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 207

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.HDDI-04
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1 ms
Average (read access) 10 ms
Maximum (read access) 16 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 4 seconds (typically)
Interface ATA-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium 267 to 629 MBit/s
To/from host Max. 100 MB/s (ultra-DMA mode 5)
Cache 8 MB
Electrical characteristics
Lifespan 5 years or 30,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
MTBF 550,000 hours1)
Mechanical characteristics
Add-on mounting Fixed
Outer dimensions (without slide-in)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight 120 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature2)
Operation - standard 3) 5 to 55°C
Operation - 24-hour4) 5 to 40°C
Bearings -40 to 65°C
Transport -40 to 65°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 5 - 500 Hz: 1 g (9.8 m/s2 0-peak) duration 1 octave per minute; no non-recovered errors
Bearings 10 - 500 Hz: 5 g (49 m/s2 0-peak) duration 0.5 oct./min.; no damage
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 160 g (1568 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No non-recovered errors at max. 300 g (2900 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
No non-recovered errors at max. 15 g (147 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Bearings No damage at max. 1000 g (9800 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No damage at max. 120 g (1176 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3048 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 89: Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-04 (Forts.)

1) Manufacturer specification at + 40°C ambient temperature.

2) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).
3) Standard operation means 333 POH (power-on hours) per month.
4) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.

208 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

85
80
75
70
65
60
55

Technical Data
Lagerung 24 Stunden
50
Transport Betrieb

Section 2
45
40
35
30

Standard-
betrieb
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 81: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-04

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 209

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.8 Add-on hard disk 40 GB 24x7 ET - 5AC600.HDDI-05

This hard disk is specified for 24-hour operation (24x7) and also provides an extended
temperature specification (ET). The add-on drive is referred to internally as the primary slave
drive.

Information:
Add-on drives are only available factory-installed. Therefore, they need to be
requested when placing an order.

Figure 82: Add-on hard disk 40 GB - 5AC600.HDDI-05

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5AC600.HDDI-05 < Revision D0 5AC600.HDDI-05 Revision D0

Manufacturer's product ID Seagate ST940813AM Seagate ST940817AM
Formatted capacity 40 GB
Number of heads 2
Number of sectors (user) 78,140,160
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 5400 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 12.5 ms

Table 90: Technical data - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-05

210 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.HDDI-05 < Revision D0 5AC600.HDDI-05 Revision D0

Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1 ms
Average (read access) 12.5 ms
Maximum (read access) 22 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 3 seconds (typically)
Interface ATA-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium Max. 321 MBit/s Max. 450 MBit/s
To/from host Max. 100 MB/s (Ultra-DMA Mode 5) Max. 100 MB/s (Ultra-DMA Mode 5)

Technical Data
Cache 8 MB

Section 2
S.M.A.R.T. Support Yes
MTBF 550,000 hours1) 750,000 hours1)
Mechanical characteristics
Add-on mounting Fixed
Outer dimensions (without slide-in)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight 100 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature2)
Operation - Standard / 24-hour -30 to 85°C
Bearings -40 to 95°C
Transport -40 to 95°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 10 - 500 Hz: 1 g; no non-recovered errors 5 - 500 Hz: 2 g; no non-recovered errors
Bearings 5 - 500 Hz: 5 g; no non-recovered errors 5 - 500 Hz: 5 g; no non-recovered errors
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation Max. 200 g, 2 ms; no non-recovered errors Max. 300 g, 2 ms; no non-recovered errors
Max. 110 g, 11 ms; no non-recovered errors Max. 150 g, 11 ms; no non-recovered errors
Bearings Max. 800 g, 2 ms; no damage Max. 800 g, 2 ms; no damage
Max. 400 g, 0.5 ms; no damage Max. 400 g, 0.5 ms; no damage
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 4419 meters - 300 to 5000 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12192 meters - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 90: Technical data - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-05 (Forts.)

1) With 8760 POH (Power On Hours) per year and 70°C surface temperature.
2) Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The
temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum of 3°C per minute.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 211

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
40
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

30
85
80
75
70
65 Lagerung / Transport
60
55
50
Betrieb
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 83: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-05

Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced
linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum
of 3°C per minute.

212 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.9 Add-on hard disk 80 GB 24x7 ET - 5AC600.HDDI-06

This hard disk is specified for 24-hour operation (24x7) and also provides an extended
temperature specification (ET). The add-on drive is referred to internally as the primary slave
drive.

Information:
Add-on drives are only available factory-installed. Therefore, they need to be
requested when placing an order.

Technical Data
Section 2
Figure 84: Add-on hard disk 80 GB - 5AC600.HDDI-06

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5AC600.HDDI-06
Manufacturer's product ID Seagate ST980817AM
Formatted capacity 80 GB
Number of heads 2
Number of sectors (user) 156,301,488
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 5400 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 10 ms

Table 91: Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-06

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 213

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.HDDI-06
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1 ms
Average (read access) 12.5 ms
Maximum (read access) 22 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 4 seconds (typically)
Interface ATA-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium Max. 450 MBit/s
To/from host Max. 100 MB/s (Ultra-DMA Mode 5)
S.M.A.R.T. Support Yes
Cache 8 MB
MTBF 750,000 hours1)
Mechanical characteristics
Add-on mounting Fixed
Outer dimensions (without slide-in)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight 120 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature2)
Operation - Standard / 24-hour -30 to 85°C
Bearings -40 to 95°C
Transport -40 to 95°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 5 - 500 Hz: 2 g; no non-recovered errors
Bearings 5 - 500 Hz: 5 g; no non-recovered errors
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation Max. 300 g, 2 ms; no non-recovered errors
Max. 150 g, 11 ms; no non-recovered errors
Bearings Max. 800 g, 2 ms; no damage
Max. 400 g, 0.5 ms; no damage
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 5000 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 91: Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-06 (Forts.)

1) With 8760 POH (Power On Hours) per year and 70°C surface temperature.
2) Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The
temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum of 3°C per minute.

214 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
40
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

30
85
80
75
70
65 Lagerung / Transport
60
55

Technical Data
50
Betrieb

Section 2
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 85: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-06

Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced
linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum
of 3°C per minute.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 215

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.10 Add-on CompactFlash slot - 5AC600.CFSI-00

A CompactFlash card inserted in the add-on drive is referred to internally as the "primary slave
drive."

Information:
Add-on drives are only available factory-installed. Therefore, they need to be
requested when placing an order.

Figure 86: Add-on CompactFlash slot - 5AC600.CFSI-00

Technical data

Features 5AC600.CFSI-00
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot
Connection Primary slave
Weight 100 g

Table 92: Technical data - Add-on CompactFlash slot 5AC600.CFSI-00

Warning!
Inserting and removing the CompactFlash card can only take place without power
applied!

216 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.11 Slide-in CD-ROM - 5AC600.CDXS-00

The slide-in drive can be used in system units with 2, 3 or 5 PCI slots. When inserted in slide-in
slot 1 it is referred to internally as "secondary slave" and when in slide-in slot 2 as "secondary
master."

Information:
It is possible to add or remove a slide-in drive at any time.

Technical Data
Section 2
Caution!
Turn off power before adding or removing a slide-in drive.

Figure 87: Slide-in CD-ROM - 5AC600.CDXS-00

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 217

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.CDXS-00
Reading rate 24x
Data transfer rate Max. 33.3 MB/s
Access time (average) 115 ms
Revolution speed Max. 5136 rpm ±1%
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 10 seconds (maximum)
Host interface IDE (ATAPI)
Readable CD media CD/CD-ROM (12 cm, 8 cm), CD-R, CD-RW
Compatible formats CD-DA, CD-ROM mode 1/mode 2
CD-ROM XA mode 2 (form 1, form 2)
Photo CD (single/multi-session)
Enhanced CD
Cache 128 kB
Noise level (complete read access) Approx. 45 dBA at 50 cm
Lifespan 60,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
Opening/closing the drawer > 10,000 times
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature1)
Operation -5 to 60°C2)
Bearings -20 to 60°C
Transport -40 to 65°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 80%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.3 g
Bearings At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 2 g
Transport At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 5 g
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation At max. 7 g for 11 ms
Bearings At max. 60 g for 11 ms
At max. 200 g for 2 ms
Transport At max. 60 g for 11 ms
At max. 200 g for 2 ms

Table 93: Technical data - Slide-in CD-ROM 5AC600.CDXS-00

1) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).
2) Drive surface temperature

218 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55

Technical Data
50

Section 2
45 Storage Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 88: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in CD-ROM 5AC600.CDXS-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 219

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.12 Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW - 5AC600.DVDS-00

The slide-in drive can be used in system units with 2, 3 or 5 PCI slots. When inserted in slide-in
slot 1 it is referred to internally as "secondary slave" and when in slide-in slot 2 as "secondary
master."

Information:
It is possible to add or remove a slide-in drive at any time.

Caution!
Turn off power before adding or removing a slide-in drive.

Figure 89: Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW - 5AC600.DVDS-00

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

220 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.DVDS-00
Write speed
CD-R 24x, 16x, 10x and 4x
CD-RW 10x and 4x
Reading rate
CD 24x
DVD 8x
Data transfer rate Max. 33.3 MB/s
Access time (average)
CD 85 ms

Technical Data
DVD 110 ms

Section 2
Revolution speed Max. 5136 rpm ±1%
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 19 seconds (maximum)
Host interface IDE (ATAPI)
Readable media
CD CD/CD-ROM (12 cm, 8 cm), CD-R, CD-RW
DVD DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD-RAM
Non-write protected media
CD CD-R, CD-RW
Compatible formats CD-DA, CD-ROM mode 1/mode 2
CD-ROM XA mode 2 (form 1, form 2)
Photo CD (single/multi-session)
Enhanced CD, CD text
DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-Video (double layer)
DVD-RAM (4.7 GB, 2.6 GB)
Write-methods Disk at once, session at once, packet write, track at once
Laser class Class 1 laser
Data buffer capacity 2 MB
Noise level (complete read access) Approx. 45 dBA at 50 cm
Lifespan 60,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
Opening/closing the drawer > 10,000 times
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature1)
Operation +5 to +50°C2)
Bearings -20 to +60°C
Transport -40 to +65°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 80%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.2 g
Bearings At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 2 g
Transport At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 2 g

Table 94: Technical data - Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW 5AC600.DVDS-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 221

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.DVDS-00
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation At max. 5 g for 11 ms
Bearings At max. 60 g for 11 ms
At max. 200 g for 2 ms
Transport At max. 60 g for 11 ms
At max. 200 g for 2 ms

Table 94: Technical data - Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW 5AC600.DVDS-00 (Forts.)

1) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).
2) Drive surface temperature

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55
50 Storage Operation
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 90: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW 5AC600.DVDS-00

222 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.13 Slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW - 5AC600.DVRS-00

The slide-in drive can be used in system units with 2, 3 or 5 PCI slots. When inserted in slide-in
slot 1 it is referred to internally as "secondary slave" and when in slide-in slot 2 as "secondary
master."

Information:
It is possible to add or remove a slide-in drive at any time.

Technical Data
Section 2
Caution!
Turn off power before adding or removing a slide-in drive.

Figure 91: Slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW - 5AC600.DVRS-00

Technical data - Revision D0 and higher

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 223

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.DVRS-00 revision D0 and higher

Write speed
CD-R 24x, 16x, 10x and 4x
CD-RW 10x and 4x
DVD-R 8x, 4x and 2x
DVD-RW 4x and 2x
DVD-RAM1) 3x and 2x
DVD+R 8x, 4x and 2x
DVD+R (double layer) 2x,4x
DVD+RW 4x and 2x
Reading rate
CD 24x
DVD 8x
Data transfer rate Max. 33.3 MB/s
Access time (average)
CD 130 ms (24x)
DVD 130 ms (8x)
Revolution speed Max. 5090 rpm ±1%
Starting time (0 rpm to read access)
CD 14 seconds (maximum)
DVD 15 seconds (maximum)
Host interface IDE (ATAPI)
Readable media
CD CD/CD-ROM (12 cm, 8 cm), CD-R, CD-RW
DVD DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW. DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+R (double layer), DVD+RW
Non-write protected media
CD CD-R, CD-RW
DVD DVD-R/RW, DVD-RAM (4.7 GB), DVD+R/RW, DVD+R (double layer)
Compatible formats CD-DA, CD-ROM mode 1/mode 2
CD-ROM XA mode 2 (form 1, form 2)
Photo CD (single/multi-session), Enhanced CD, CD text
DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD-Video
DVD-RAM (4.7 GB, 2.6 GB)
DVD+R, DVD+R (double layer), DVD+RW
Write-methods
CD Disk at once, session at once, packet write, track at once
DVD Disk at once, incremental, over-write, sequential, multi-session
Laser class Class 1 laser
Data buffer capacity 8 MB
Noise level (complete read access) Approx. 48 dBA at 50 cm
Lifespan 60,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
Opening/closing the drawer > 10,000 times
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature2)
Operation 5 to 55°C3)
Bearings -20 to 60°C
Transport -40 to 65°C

Table 95: Technical data - slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW - 5AC600.DVRS-00 revision D0 and higher

224 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.DVRS-00 revision D0 and higher

Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 80%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.2 g
Bearings At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 2 g
Transport At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 2 g
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation At max. 5 g for 11 ms

Technical Data
Bearings At max. 60 g for 11 ms

Section 2
At max. 200 g for 2 ms
Transport At max. 60 g for 11 ms
At max. 200 g for 2 ms

Table 95: Technical data - slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW - 5AC600.DVRS-00 revision D0 and higher
(Forts.)
1) RAM drivers are not provided by the manufacturer. Support of RAM function by the burning software "Nero" (model number
5SWUTI.0000-00) or other burning software packages and drivers from third party providers.
2) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).
3) Drive surface temperature

Technical data - revision D0 or lower

Features 5AC600.DVRS-00 revision D0 and lower

Write speed
CD-R 24x, 16x, 10x and 4x
CD-RW 10x and 4x
DVD-R 8x, 4x and 2x
DVD-RW 4x and 2x
DVD+R 8x, 4x and 2x
DVD+RW 4x and 2x
Reading rate
CD 24x
DVD 8x
Data transfer rate Max. 33.3 MB/s
Access time (average)
CD 130 ms (24x)
DVD 130 ms (8x)
Revolution speed Max. 5090 rpm ±1%
Starting time (0 rpm to read access)
CD 14 seconds (maximum)
DVD 15 seconds (maximum)
Host interface IDE (ATAPI)
Readable media
CD CD/CD-ROM (12 cm, 8 cm), CD-R, CD-RW
DVD DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW

Table 96: Technical data - slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW - 5AC600.DVRS-00 revision D0 and lower

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 225

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.DVRS-00 revision D0 and lower

Non-write protected media
CD CD-R, CD-RW
DVD DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW
Compatible formats CD-DA, CD-ROM mode 1/mode 2
CD-ROM XA mode 2 (form 1, form 2)
Photo CD (single/multi-session)
Enhanced CD, CD text
DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-Video (double layer), DVD-RW
DVD+R, DVD+R (double layer), DVD+RW
Write-methods
CD Disk at once, session at once, packet write, track at once
DVD Disk at once, incremental, over-write, sequential, multi-session
Laser class Class 1 laser
Data buffer capacity 8 MB
Noise level (complete read access) Approx. 48 dBA at 50 cm
Lifespan 60,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
Opening/closing the drawer > 10,000 times
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature1)
Operation 5 to 55°C2)
Bearings -20 to 60°C
Transport -40 to 65°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 80%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.2 g
Bearings At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 2 g
Transport At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 2 g
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation At max. 5 g for 11 ms
Bearings At max. 60 g for 11 ms
At max. 200 g for 2 ms
Transport At max. 60 g for 11 ms
At max. 200 g for 2 ms

Table 96: Technical data - slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW - 5AC600.DVRS-00 revision D0 and lower
(Forts.)
1) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).
2) Drive surface temperature

226 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55

Technical Data
50

Section 2
45 Transport Storage Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 92: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW 5AC600.DVRS-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 227

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.14 Slide-in CF 2 slot - 5AC600.CFSS-00

The slide-in drive can be used in system units with 2, 3 or 5 PCI slots. When inserted in slide-in
slot 1, the CompactFlash slot CF3 is referred to internally as "secondary slave" and when in
slide-in slot 2 as "secondary master." CompactFlash slot CF4 is always accessed via USB.

Information:
• It is possible to add or remove a slide-in drive at any time.
• In system units with 5 PCI slots, the slide-in USB FDD drive (5AC600.FDDS-
00) must be inserted in slide-in slot 1.
The double CompactFlash slide-in drive (5AC600.CFSS-00) should only be
used in slide-in slot 2.

Caution!
Turn off power before adding or removing a slide-in drive.

Warning!
The CompactFlash card can only be inserted in and removed from the CF3 IDE
CompactFlash slot can only take place without power applied to the APC620!

Activity LED (CF3)

Ejector

CF3 via
IDE
Activity LED (Cf4)

Ejector

CF4 via
USB

Figure 93: Slide-in CF 2-slot - 5AC600.CFSS-00

228 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Technical data

Features 5AC600.CFSS-00
CompactFlash (CF3)
Type Type I and II
Amount 1 slot
Connection IDE - Secondary slave in slide-in slot 1
IDE - Secondary master in slide-in slot 2
Activity LED Yes
CompactFlash (CF4)
Type Type I and II

Technical Data
Amount 1 slot

Section 2
Connection Via USB 2.0
Activity LED Yes

Table 97: Technical data - Slide-in CF slot 2 - 5AC600.CFSS-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 229

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.15 Slide-in USB FDD - 5AC600.FDDS-00

The slide-in drive can be used in system units with 2, 3 or 5 PCI slots. In these units it is
connected to the system via USB.

Information:
• It is possible to add, remove, or modify the slide-in drive at any time.
• In system units with 5 PCI slots, the slide-in USB FDD drive must be inserted
in slide-in slot 1 for mechanical reasons.

Caution!
Turn off power before adding or removing a slide-in drive.

Figure 94: Slide-in USB FDD - 5AC600.FDDS-00

230 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Technical Data
Section 2
Features 5AC600.FDDS-00
Data capacity 720 KB / 1.25 MB / 1.44 MB (formatted)
USB transfer rate Full speed (12 Mbps)
Data transfer rate 250 kbits (720 KB) or 500 kbits (1.25 MB and 1.44 MB)
Rotation speed Up to 360 rpm
Diskette media High density (2HD) or normal density (2DD) 3.5" diskettes
MTBF 30,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature1)
Operation 4 to 50°C
Bearings -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation 20 to 80%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.3 g
Bearings At max. 10 - 100 Hz and 2 g
Transport At max. 10 - 100 Hz and 2 g
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation At max. 5 g for 11 ms
Bearings At max. 60 g for 11 ms
Transport At max. 60 g for 11 ms
Altitude Max. 3000 meters

Table 98: Technical data - Slide-in USB diskette drive - 5AC600.FDDS-00

1) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 231

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55
Storage
50 Operation
Transport
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 95: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in USB diskette drive 5AC600.FDDS-00

232 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.16 Slide-in hard disk 30 GB 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDS-00

This hard disk is specified for 24-hour operation (24x7). The slide-in drive can be used in system
units with 2, 3 or 5 PCI slots. When inserted in slide-in slot 1 it is referred to internally as
"secondary slave" and when in slide-in slot 2 as "secondary master."

Information:
It is possible to add or remove a slide-in drive at any time.

Technical Data
Section 2
Caution!
Turn off power before adding or removing a slide-in drive.

Figure 96: Slide-in hard disk 30 GB - 5AC600.HDDS-00

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 233

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.HDDS-00
Manufacturer's product ID Fujitsu MHT2030AR
Formatted capacity 30 GB
Number of heads 2
Number of sectors (user) 58,605,120
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 4200 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 7.14 ms
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1.5 ms
Average (read access) 12 ms
Maximum 22 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 5 seconds (typically)
Interface ATA-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium 26.1 to 36.2 MB/s
To/from host Max. 100 MB/s (ultra-DMA mode 5)
Cache 2 MB
Noise level (idle mode) Approx. 24 dBA at 30 cm
Electrical characteristics
Lifespan 5 years or 20,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
MTBF 300,000 hours
Mechanical characteristics
Slide-in mounting Fixed
Outer dimensions (without slide-in)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight 120 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature1)
Operation - standard 2) 5 to 55°C
Operation - 24-hour 3) 5 to 44°C
Bearings -40 to 60°C
Transport -40 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 1 g (9.8 m/s2 0-peak)
Bearings No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 5 g (49 m/s 2 0-peak)

Table 99: Technical data - Slide-in hard disk - 5AC600.HDDS-00

234 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Environmental characteristics 5AC600.HDDS-00

Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 225 g (2207 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
Bearings No damage at max. 900 g (8820 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No damage at max. 120 g (1176 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3000 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12000 meters

Table 99: Technical data - Slide-in hard disk - 5AC600.HDDS-00 (Forts.)

Technical Data
1) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500

Section 2
meters above sea level).
2) Standard operation means 250 POH (power-on hours) per month.
3) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55
Storage 24-hour
50
45 Transport operation
40
Standard operation

35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 97: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in hard disk 5AC600.HDDS-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 235

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.17 Slide-in hard disk 20 GB ET - 5AC600.HDDS-01

This hard disk has an extended temperature specification (ET), but is not permitted for 24 hour
operation. The slide-in drive can be used in system units with 2, 3 or 5 PCI slots. When inserted
in slide-in slot 1 it is referred to internally as "secondary slave" and when in slide-in slot 2 as
"secondary master."

Information:
It is possible to add or remove a slide-in drive at any time.

Caution!
Turn off power before adding or removing a slide-in drive.

Figure 98: Slide-in hard disk 20 GB - 5AC600.HDDS-01

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

236 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.HDDS-01
Manufacturer's product ID Fujitsu MHT2020AC
Formatted capacity 20 GB
Number of heads 2
Number of sectors (user) 39,070,080
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 4200 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 7.14 ms

Technical Data
Positioning time (seek, typical values)

Section 2
Minimum (track to track) 1.5 ms
Average (read access) 12 ms
Maximum 22 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 5 seconds (typically)
Interface ATA-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium Up to 28.9 MB/s
To/from host Max. 100 MB/s (ultra-DMA mode 5)
Cache 2 MB
Noise level (idle mode) Approx. 22 dBA at 30 cm
Electrical characteristics
Lifespan 5 years or 20,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
MTBF 300,000 hours
Mechanical characteristics
Slide-in mounting Fixed
Outer dimensions (without slide-in)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight 120 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature1)
Operation2) -20 to +80°C
Bearings -40 to +85°C
Transport -40 to +85°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 1 g (9.8 m/s2 0-peak)
Bearings No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 5 g (49 m/s 2 0-peak)
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 225 g (2207 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
Bearings No damage at max. 900 g (8820 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No damage at max. 120 g (1176 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration

Table 100: Technical data - Slide-in hard disk - 5AC600.HDDS-01

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 237

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5AC600.HDDS-01
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3000 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12000 meters

Table 100: Technical data - Slide-in hard disk - 5AC600.HDDS-01 (Forts.)

1) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).
2) Standard operation means 250 POH (power-on hours) per month.

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Lagerung
50 Betrieb
Transport
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 99: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in hard disk 5AC600.HDDS-01

238 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.7.18 Slide-in hard disk 40 GB ET - 5AC600.HDDS-02

This hard disk is specified for 24-hour operation (24x7) and also provides an extended
temperature specification (ET). The slide-in drive can be used in system units with 2, 3 or 5 PCI
slots. When inserted in slide-in slot 1 it is referred to internally as "secondary slave" and when in
slide-in slot 2 as "secondary master."

Information:
It is possible to add or remove a slide-in drive at any time.

Technical Data
Section 2
Caution!
Turn off power before adding or removing a slide-in drive.

Figure 100: Slide-in hard disk 40 GB - 5AC600.HDDS-02

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 239

 Technical Data • Individual components

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5AC600.HDDS-02 < Revision D0 5AC600.HDDS-02 Revision D0

Manufacturer's product ID Seagate ST940813AM Seagate ST940817AM
Formatted capacity 40 GB
Number of heads 2
Number of sectors (user) 78,140,160
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 5400 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 12.5 ms
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1 ms
Average (read access) 12.5 ms
Maximum (read access) 22 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 3 seconds (typically)
Interface ATA-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium Max. 321 MBit/s Max. 450 MBit/s
To/from host Max. 100 MB/s (Ultra-DMA Mode 5) Max. 100 MB/s (Ultra-DMA Mode 5)
Cache 8 MB
S.M.A.R.T. Support Yes
MTBF 550,000 hours1) 750,000 hours1)
Mechanical characteristics
Slide-in mounting Fixed
Outer dimensions (without slide-in)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight 100 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature2)
Operation - Standard / 24-hour -30 to 85°C
Bearings -40 to 95°C
Transport -40 to 95°C

Table 101: Technical data - Slide-in hard disk - 5AC600.HDDS-02

240 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Environmental characteristics 5AC600.HDDS-02 < Revision D0 5AC600.HDDS-02 Revision D0

Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 10 - 500 Hz: 1 g; no non-recovered errors 5 - 500 Hz: 2 g; no non-recovered errors
Bearings 5 - 500 Hz: 5 g; no non-recovered errors 5 - 500 Hz: 5 g; no non-recovered errors
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation Max. 200 g, 2 ms; no non-recovered errors Max. 300 g, 2 ms; no non-recovered errors
Max. 110 g, 11 ms; no non-recovered errors Max. 150 g, 11 ms; no non-recovered errors

Technical Data
Bearings Max. 800 g, 2 ms; no damage Max. 800 g, 2 ms; no damage

Section 2
Max. 400 g, 0.5 ms; no damage Max. 400 g, 0.5 ms; no damage
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 4419 meters - 300 to 5000 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12192 meters - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 101: Technical data - Slide-in hard disk - 5AC600.HDDS-02 (Forts.)

1) With 8760 POH (Power On Hours) per year and 70°C surface temperature.
2) Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The
temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum of 3°C per minute.

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
40
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

30
85
80
75
70
65
Lagerung / Transport

60
55
50
Betrieb
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 101: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in hard disk 5AC600.HDDS-02

Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced
linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum
of 3°C per minute.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 241

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.8 RAID system

Sometimes it is simply not possible to avoid using hard disks due to the amount of data that
needs to be saved. In this case, a RAID provides high system availability. All data is
simultaneously and automatically stored on two hard drives. This double data storage means
that when one hard disk fails, the system will continue to run on the second hard disk.

Advantages for the user:

• No data loss when hard drive fails.

• The system continues to run with a hard disk.
• Data redundancy is automatically restored by the system when the faulty hard disk has
been replaced.
Depending on the type, the RAID 1 system is designed in the form of 1 or 2 PCI cards.

1 PCI slot: PCI SATA RAID controller 5ACPCI.RAIC-01 (2x60GB) or 5ACPCI.RAIC-03

(2x160GB)

2 PCI slot: PCI RAID controller (5ACPCI.RAIC-00) and PCI card with two hard disks
(5ACPCI.RAIS-00 or 5ACPCI.RAIS-01)

The system can be flexibly implemented in all APC620 und PPC700s with 1 free PCI slot
(depending on the RAID system design). The system also supports RAID 0 applications. As a
result, parallel access to two hard drives with a relatively high data throughput is the main focus,
in addition to the high availability.

File A
File B
File C
File D

File A
File B
File C
File D

Figure 102: RAID 1 system schematic

242 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.8.1 PCI RAID Controller ATA/100 - 5ACPCI.RAIC-00

Information:
PCI RAID controllers are only available factory-installed. Therefore, this needs to be
requested when placing the order.

Technical Data
Section 2
Primary

Secondary

Figure 103: RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-00

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5ACPCI.RAIC-00
Manufacturer's product ID Adaptec ATA RAID 1200A
Data transfer rate up to 100 MB/s per channel
RAID level Supports RAID 0, 1, 0/1 and JBOD
Internal connections Two 40-pin connections
Electrical characteristics
Power consumption 0.15 A at 5 V (PCI bus)

Table 102: Technical data - RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 243

 Technical Data • Individual components

Mechanical characteristics 5ACPCI.RAIC-00

Outer dimensions
Length 168 mm
Height 64 mm
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to 55°C
Bearings -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C

Table 102: Technical data - RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-00 (Forts.)

Driver support

Drivers for the approved operating systems can be downloaded from the download area on the
B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

Contents of delivery

Amount Component
1 Adaptec ATA RAID 1200A controller
2 ATA RAID connection cable (length 130 mm)

Table 103: Contents of delivery - 5ACPCI.RAIC-00

244 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.8.2 PCI RAID storage 2 x 40 GB 24x7 - 5ACPCI.RAIS-00

The hard disks that are used are specified for 24-hour operation (24x7).

Information:
PCI RAID storage drives are only available factory-installed. Therefore, this needs to
be requested when placing the order.

Technical Data
Section 2
Primary hard disk

Primary Secondary

Access LED (yellow) for primary Secondary hard disk

and secondary hard disks

Figure 104: PCI RAID storage - 5ACPCI.RAIS-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 245

 Technical Data • Individual components

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5ACPCI.RAIS-00
Manufacturer's product ID Hitachi Travelstar HTE726040M9AT00
Formatted capacity 40 GB
Number of heads 4
Number of sectors (user) 78,140,160
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 7200 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 4.2 ms
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1 ms
Average (read access) 10 ms
Maximum (read access) 16 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 4 seconds (typically)
Interface ATA-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium 236 to 507 MBit/s
To/from host Max. 100 MB/s (ultra-DMA mode 5)
Cache 8 MB
Electrical characteristics
Lifespan 5 years or 30,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
MTBF 477,000 hours1)
Mechanical characteristics
Mounted on PCI insert Fixed
Outer dimensions (without PCI card)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight 350 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature2)
Operation - standard 3) +5 to +55°C
Operation - 24-hour4) +5 to +40°C
Bearings -40 to +65°C
Transport -40 to +65°C

Table 104: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIS-00

246 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Environmental characteristics 5ACPCI.RAIS-00

Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation (continuous) No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.125 g (1.225 m/s2 0-peak) duration 1 oct/min
Operation (occasional) No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.25 g (2.45 m/s2 0-peak) duration 1 oct/min
Bearings No damage at max. 10 - 500 Hz and 5 g (49 m/s2 0-peak) duration 0.5 oct/min
Transport No damage at max. 10 - 500 Hz and 5 g (49 m/s2 0-peak) duration 0.5 oct/min
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)

Technical Data
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 80 g (784 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration

Section 2
No non-recovered errors at max. 150 g (1450 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
No non-recovered errors at max. 7 g (68 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Bearings No damage at max. 500 g (4900 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No damage at max. 60 g (588 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3048 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 104: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIS-00 (Forts.)

1) Manufacturer specification at + 40°C ambient temperature.

2) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).
3) Standard operation means 333 POH (power-on hours) per month.
4) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Lagerung 24 Stunden
50
Transport Betrieb
45
40
35
30
Standard-
betrieb

25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 105: Temperature humidity diagram - RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIS-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 247

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.8.3 PCI RAID storage 2 x 60 GB 24x7 - 5ACPCI.RAIS-01

The hard disks that are used are specified for 24-hour operation (24x7).

Information:
PCI RAID storage drives are only available factory-installed. Therefore, this needs to
be requested when placing the order.

Primary hard disk

Primary Secondary

Access LED (yellow) for primary Secondary hard disk

and secondary hard disks

Figure 106: PCI RAID storage - 5ACPCI.RAIS-01

248 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Technical Data
Section 2
Features 5ACPCI.RAIS-01
Manufacturer's product ID Hitachi HTE721060G9AT00
Formatted capacity 60 GB
Number of heads 3
Number of sectors (user) 117,210,240
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 7200 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 10 ms
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1 ms
Average (read access) 10 ms
Maximum (read access) 16 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 4 seconds (typically)
Interface ATA-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium 267 to 629 MBit/s
To/from host Max. 100 MB/s (ultra-DMA mode 5)
Cache 8 MB
Electrical characteristics
Lifespan 5 years or 30,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
MTBF 550,000 hours1)
Mechanical characteristics
Mounted on PCI insert Fixed
Outer dimensions (without PCI card)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight 120 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature2)
Operation - standard 3) 5 to 55°C
Operation - 24-hour4) 5 to 40°C
Bearings -40 to 65°C
Transport -40 to 65°C

Table 105: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIS-01

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 249

 Technical Data • Individual components

Environmental characteristics 5ACPCI.RAIS-01

Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation (continuous) No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.125 g (1.225 m/s2 0-peak) duration 1 oct/min
Operation (occasional) No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.25 g (2.45 m/s2 0-peak) duration 1 oct/min
Bearings No damage at max. 10 - 500 Hz and 5 g (49 m/s2 0-peak) duration 0.5 oct/min
Transport No damage at max. 10 - 500 Hz and 5 g (49 m/s2 0-peak) duration 0.5 oct/min
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 80 g (784 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No non-recovered errors at max. 150 g (1450 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
No non-recovered errors at max. 7 g (68 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Bearings No damage at max. 500 g (4900 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No damage at max. 60 g (588 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms duration
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3048 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 105: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIS-01 (Forts.)

1) Manufacturer specification at + 40°C ambient temperature.

2) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).
3) Standard operation means 333 POH (power-on hours) per month.
4) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Lagerung 24 Stunden
50
Transport Betrieb
45
40
35
30
Standard-
betrieb

25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 107: Temperature humidity diagram - RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIS-01

250 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.8.4 PCI SATA RAID 2 x 60 GB 24x7 - 5ACPCI.RAIC-01

The hard disks that are used are specified for 24-hour operation (24x7).

Features

• SATA RAID controller

• RAID Level 0 (striped) and 1 (mirrored)
• 2 SATA hard disk drives (suitable for 24 hour operation)

Technical Data
Section 2
• Only requires 1 PCI slot
• Transfer rates up to 150 MB/s

Primary hard disk (HDD 0)

Secondary hard disk (HDD 1)

Access LED (yellow) for primary
and secondary hard disks

Figure 108: PCI SATA RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-01

Information:
The PCI SATA RAID controller can not be used in place of a Universal Power Supply
(UPS). If the operating system is shut down improperly, the next time it is started it
is detected as an error by the RAID 1, and a complete rebuild is executed. This
generally takes at least 50 minutes (configurable) to complete.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 251

 Technical Data • Individual components

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5ACPCI.RAIC-01
SATA RAID controller
Type SiI 3512 SATA link
Specifications Serial ATA 1.0
Data transfer rate Max. 1.5 GB/s (150 MB/s)
RAID level Supports RAID 0, 1
BIOS Extension ROM - requirements ca. 32 KB
Hard disks Seagate Momentus 7200.1 ST96023AS
Amount 2
Formatted capacity (512 bytes/sector) 60 GB
Number of heads 3
Number of sectors (user) 117,210,240
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 7200 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 4.2 ms
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1.5 ms
Average (read access) 10.5 ms
Maximum (read access) 22 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 4 seconds (typically)
Supported transfer mode SATA 1.0, PIO mode 0-4, multiword DMA mode 0-2, UDMA 0-5
Data transfer rate
On the medium max. 539 MBit/s
To/from host Max. 150 MB/s
Cache 8 MB
S.M.A.R.T. Support Yes
Lifespan 5 years
Electrical characteristics
Power consumption 0.3 A at 3.3 V (PCI bus)
1 A at 5 V (PCI bus)
Mechanical characteristics
Mounted on PCI insert Fixed
Weight 350 g

Table 106: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-01

252 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Environmental characteristics 5ACPCI.RAIC-01

Ambient temperature1)
Operation - standard 2) 5 to 55°C
Operation - 24-hour3) 5 to 40°C
Bearings -40 to 70°C
Transport -40 to 70°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration4)

Technical Data
Operation (continuous) No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.125 g (1.225 m/s2 0-peak) duration 1 oct/min

Section 2
Operation (occasional) No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.25 g (2.45 m/s2 0-peak) duration 1 oct/min
Bearings No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 5 g (49 m/s2 0-peak) duration 0.5 oct/min
Transport No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 5 g (49 m/s2 0-peak) duration 0.5 oct/min
Shock 4) (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 125 g (1226 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
Bearings No damage at max. 400 g (3924 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
No damage at max. 450 g (4424 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No damage at max. 200 g (1962 m/s2 0-peak) and 0.5 ms duration
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3048 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 106: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-01 (Forts.)

1) Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The
temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum of 3°C per minute.
2) Standard operation means 333 POH (power-on hours) per month.
3) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.
4) Operation in areas prone to vibration and shock can affect performance negatively (reduction of transfer rate).

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55
Storage 24-hour
50
Transport operation
45
40
35
30
operation
Standard

25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 109: Temperature humidity diagram - SATA RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIC-01

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 253

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced
linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum
of 3°C per minute.

Driver support

Special drivers are necessary for operating the PCI SATA RAID controller. Drivers for Windows
XP Professional, Windows XP Embedded and Windows Embedded Standard 2009 are available
for download on the B&R Homepage in the download area (www.br-automation.com).
The .NET-based SATARaid™ serial ATA RAID management software can also be found on the
B&R homepage.

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

Known limitations in a RAID 1 configuration

If one of the two hard disks is physically damaged, when the system is booted the SATA RAID
BIOS displays the following error message for approx. 5 seconds: "RAID1 set is in critical status".
After this time the operating system is automatically started on the functioning hard disk. The
installed SATA Raid™ serial ATA RAID management software does not detect this error status.
After repairing the cause of the error (e.g. replacing the hard disk) the SATARaid™ Serial ATA
RAID management software automatically executes a rebuild (mirroring of the hard disk). This
process takes approximately 50 minutes to complete, regardless of the amount of data and with
the highest possible setting for "Rebuild rate".

A hard disk that becomes faulty during operation is detected by the SATA Raid™ Serial ATA
RAID management software and indicated with an error message.

254 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Important notes / BIOS Extension ROM

For PCI cards with BIOS Extension ROM, there is a limited area of 64 KB available in the
Phoenix BIOS. A B&R PCI SATA RAID controller requires a free area of approx. 32 KB. The
remaining area can be used as desired.

If a PCI card requiring BIOS extension ROM is plugged into PCI slot 1 on an AP620 with 5 PCI
slots (see figure 110 "PCI slot numbering on APC620 systems with 5 PCI slots") and the B&R
PCI SATA RAID controller is plugged-in at a different position (e.g. PCI slot 4), then the BIOS
menu item Advanced - PCI/PnP Configuration - PCI Device, Slot #2 must be set from "Option

Technical Data
ROM Scan" to "Disabled" so that this device can be used for booting. The BIOS default setting

Section 2
is to always attempt to load the BIOS Extension ROM from the PCI slot 1. Alternatively, the two
PCI cards can be switched.

This setting does not have to be changed if a PCI card without BIOS extension ROM is plugged-
in.

PCI slot number

5 4 3 2 1

PCI SATA
RAID controller

PCI card with BIOS

ROM extension

Figure 110: PCI slot numbering on APC620 systems with 5 PCI slots

Configuration of a PCI SATA RAID array

Instructions for configuration of a PCI SATA RAID array using RAID BIOS can be found in
chapter 3 "Commissioning", section "Configuration of a SATA RAID array", on page 351.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 255

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.8.5 Replacement SATA HDD 60 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-02

The hard disk can be used as a replacement part for 5ACPCI.RAIC-01.

Figure 111: Replacement SATA HDD 60 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-02

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5ACPCI.RAIC-02
Hard disks Seagate Momentus 7200.1 ST96023AS
Amount 1
Formatted capacity (512 bytes/sector) 60 GB
Number of heads 3
Number of sectors (user) 117,210,240
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 7200 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 4.2 ms
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1.5 ms
Average (read access) 10.5 ms
Maximum (read access) 22 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 4 seconds (typically)
Supported transfer mode SATA 1.0, PIO mode 0-4, multiword DMA mode 0-2, UDMA 0-5
Data transfer rate
On the medium max. 539 MBit/s
To/from host Max. 150 MB/s

Table 107: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-02

256 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5ACPCI.RAIC-02
Cache 8 MB
S.M.A.R.T. Support Yes
Lifespan 5 years
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature1)
Operation - standard 2) 5 to 55°C
Operation - 24-hour3) 5 to 40°C
Bearings -40 to 70°C

Technical Data
Transport -40 to 70°C

Section 2
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration4)
Operation (continuous) No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.125 g (1.225 m/s2 0-peak) duration 1 oct/min
Operation (occasional) No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.25 g (2.45 m/s2 0-peak) duration 1 oct/min
Bearings No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 5 g (49 m/s2 0-peak) duration 0.5 oct/min
Transport No damage at max. 5 - 500 Hz and 5 g (49 m/s2 0-peak) duration 0.5 oct/min
Shock 4) (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation No non-recovered errors at max. 125 g (1226 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
Bearings No damage at max. 400 g (3924 m/s2 0-peak) and 2 ms duration
No damage at max. 450 g (4424 m/s2 0-peak) and 1 ms duration
No damage at max. 200 g (1962 m/s2 0-peak) and 0.5 ms duration
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3048 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 107: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-02 (Forts.)

1) Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The
temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum of 3°C per minute.
2) Standard operation means 333 POH (power-on hours) per month.
3) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.
4) Operation in areas prone to vibration and shock can affect performance negatively (reduction of transfer rate).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 257

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55
Storage 24-hour
50
Transport operation
45
40
35
30

operation
Standard
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 112: Temperature humidity diagram - SATA RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIC-02

Exchanging a PCI SATA RAID hard disk

Instructions for exchanging a SATA hard disk can be found in chapter 7 "Maintenance /
Servicing", section "Exchanging a PCI SATA RAID hard disk", on page 785.

258 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.8.6 PCI SATA RAID 2 x 160 GB 24x7 ET - 5ACPCI.RAIC-03

The hard disks being used are specified for 24-hour operation (24x7) and also provides an
extended temperature specification (ET).

Features

• SATA RAID controller

• RAID Level 0 (striped) and 1 (mirrored)

Technical Data
• 2 SATA hard disk drives (suitable for 24 hour operation)

Section 2
• Only requires 1 PCI slot
• Transfer rates up to 150 MB/s

Primary hard disk (HDD 0)

Secondary hard disk (HDD 1)

Access LED (yellow) for primary
and secondary hard disks

Figure 113: PCI SATA RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-03

Information:
The PCI SATA RAID controller can not be used in place of a Universal Power Supply
(UPS). If the operating system is shut down improperly, the next time it is started it
is detected as an error by the RAID 1, and a complete rebuild is executed. This
generally takes at least 50 minutes (configurable) to complete.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 259

 Technical Data • Individual components

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5ACPCI.RAIC-03
SATA RAID controller
Type SiI 3512 SATA link
Specifications Serial ATA 1.0
Data transfer rate Max. 1.5 GB/s (150 MB/s)
RAID level Supports RAID 0, 1
BIOS Extension ROM - requirements Approx. 32 KB
Hard disks Fujitsu M120-ESW MHY2160BH-ESW
Amount 2
Formatted capacity (512 bytes/sector) 160 GB
Number of heads 3
Number of sectors (user) 312,581,808
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 5400 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 5.56 ms
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1.5 ms
Average (read access) 12 ms
Maximum (read access) 22 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 4 seconds (typically)
Supported transfer mode SATA 1.0, PIO mode 0-4, multiword DMA mode 0-2, UDMA 0-5
Data transfer rate
On the medium Max. 84.6 MBit/s
To/from host Max. 150 MB/s
Cache 8 MB
S.M.A.R.T. Support Yes
Lifespan 5 years
Electrical characteristics
Power consumption 0.3 A at 3.3 V (PCI bus)
1 A at 5 V (PCI bus)
Mechanical characteristics
Mounted on PCI insert Fixed
Weight 350 g

Table 108: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-03

260 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Environmental characteristics 5ACPCI.RAIC-03

Ambient temperature1)
Operation - Standard / 24-hour2) -15 to 80°C
Bearings -40 to 95°C
Transport -40 to 95°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90% non-condensing (maximum humidity at +29°C)
Bearings 5 to 95% non-condensing (maximum humidity at +40°C)
Transport 5 to 95% non-condensing (maximum humidity at +40°C)
Vibration3)
Operation (continuous) 5 - 500 Hz: max. 0.125 g; duration 1 octave per minute; no unrecoverable errors

Technical Data
Operation (occasional) 5 - 500 Hz: max. 0.25 g; duration 1 octave per minute; no unrecoverable errors

Section 2
Bearings 5 - 500 Hz: max. 5 g; duration 0.5 octaves per minute; no damage
Transport 5 - 500 Hz: max. 5 g; duration 0.5 octaves per minute; no damage
Shock 4) (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation Max. 125 g, 2 ms; no unrecoverable errors
Bearings Max. 400 g, 2 ms; no damage
Max. 450 g, 1 ms; no damage
Max. 200 g, 0.5 ms; no damage
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3048 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 108: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-03 (Forts.)

1) Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The
temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum of 3°C per minute.
2) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.
3) Operation in areas prone to vibration and shock can affect performance negatively (reduction of transfer rate).

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95 40
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

29
85
80
75
70
65
60
55 Lagerung
50 Betrieb
Transport
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 114: Temperature humidity diagram - SATA RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIC-03

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 261

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced
linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum
of 3°C per minute.

Driver support

Special drivers are necessary for operating the PCI SATA RAID controller. Drivers for Windows
XP Professional, Windows XP Embedded and Windows Embedded Standard 2009 are available
for download on the B&R Homepage in the download area (www.br-automation.com).
The .NET-based SATARaid™ serial ATA RAID management software can also be found on the
B&R homepage.

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

Known limitations in a RAID 1 configuration

If one of the two hard disks is physically damaged, when the system is booted the SATA RAID
BIOS displays the following error message for approx. 5 seconds: "RAID1 set is in critical status".
After this time the operating system is automatically started on the functioning hard disk. The
installed SATA Raid™ serial ATA RAID management software does not detect this error status.
After repairing the cause of the error (e.g. replacing the hard disk) the SATARaid™ Serial ATA
RAID management software automatically executes a rebuild (mirroring of the hard disk). This
process takes approximately 50 minutes to complete, regardless of the amount of data and with
the highest possible setting for "Rebuild rate".

A hard disk that becomes faulty during operation is detected by the SATA Raid™ Serial ATA
RAID management software and indicated with an error message.

262 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Important notes / BIOS Extension ROM

For PCI cards with BIOS Extension ROM, there is a limited area of 64 KB available in the
Phoenix BIOS. A B&R PCI SATA RAID controller requires a free area of approx. 32 KB. The
remaining area can be used as desired.

If a PCI card requiring BIOS extension ROM is plugged into PCI slot 1 on an AP620 with 5 PCI
slots (see figure 110 "PCI slot numbering on APC620 systems with 5 PCI slots") and the B&R
PCI SATA RAID controller is plugged-in at a different position (e.g. PCI slot 4), then the BIOS
menu item Advanced - PCI/PnP Configuration - PCI Device, Slot #2 must be set from "Option

Technical Data
ROM Scan" to "Disabled" so that this device can be used for booting. The BIOS default setting

Section 2
is to always attempt to load the BIOS Extension ROM from the PCI slot 1. Alternatively, the two
PCI cards can be switched.

This setting does not have to be changed if a PCI card without BIOS extension ROM is plugged-
in.

PCI slot number

5 4 3 2 1

PCI SATA
RAID controller

PCI card with BIOS

ROM extension

Figure 115: PCI slot numbering on APC620 systems with 5 PCI slots

Configuration of a PCI SATA RAID array

Instructions for configuration of a PCI SATA RAID array using RAID BIOS can be found in
chapter 3 "Commissioning", section "Configuration of a SATA RAID array", on page 351.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 263

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.8.7 Replacement SATA HDD 160 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-04

The hard disk can be used as a replacement part for 5ACPCI.RAIC-03.

Figure 116: Replacement SATA HDD 160 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-04

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5ACPCI.RAIC-04
Hard disks Fujitsu M120-ESW MHY2160BH-ESW
Amount 1
Formatted capacity (512 bytes/sector) 160 GB
Number of heads 3
Number of sectors (user) 312,581,808
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 5400 rpm ±1%
Access time (average) 5.56 ms
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1.5 ms
Average (read access) 12 ms
Maximum (read access) 22 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 4 seconds (typically)
Supported transfer mode SATA 1.0, PIO mode 0-4, multiword DMA mode 0-2, UDMA 0-5
Data transfer rate
On the medium Max. 84.6 MBit/s
To/from host Max. 150 MB/s

Table 109: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-04

264 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5ACPCI.RAIC-04
Cache 8 MB
S.M.A.R.T. Support Yes
Lifespan 5 years
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature1)
Operation - Standard / 24-hour2) -15 to 80°C
Bearings -40 to 95°C
Transport -40 to 95°C

Technical Data
Relative humidity

Section 2
Operation 8 to 90% non-condensing (maximum humidity at 29°C)
Bearings 5 to 95% non-condensing (maximum humidity at 40°C)
Transport 5 to 95% non-condensing (maximum humidity at 40°C)
Vibration3)
Operation (continuous) 5 - 500 Hz: max. 0.125 g; duration 1 octave per minute; no unrecoverable errors
Operation (occasional) 5 - 500 Hz: max. 0.25 g; duration 1 octave per minute; no unrecoverable errors
Bearings 5 - 500 Hz: max. 5 g; duration 0.5 octaves per minute; no damage
Transport 5 - 500 Hz: max. 5 g; duration 0.5 octaves per minute; no damage
Shock 4) (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation Max. 125 g, 2 ms; no unrecoverable errors
Bearings Max. 400 g, 2 ms; no damage
Max. 450 g, 1 ms; no damage
Max. 200 g, 0.5 ms; no damage
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3048 meters
Bearings - 300 to 12192 meters

Table 109: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-04 (Forts.)

1) Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The
temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum of 3°C per minute.
2) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.
3) Operation in areas prone to vibration and shock can affect performance negatively (reduction of transfer rate).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 265

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95 40
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

29
85
80
75
70
65
60
55 Lagerung
50 Betrieb
Transport
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 117: Temperature humidity diagram - SATA RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIC-04

Exchanging a PCI SATA RAID hard disk

Instructions for exchanging a SATA hard disk can be found in chapter 7 "Maintenance /
Servicing", section "Exchanging a PCI SATA RAID hard disk", on page 785.

266 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.8.8 PCI SATA RAID 2 x 250 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-05

The hard disks that are used are specified for 24-hour operation (24x7).

Features

• SATA RAID controller

• RAID Level 0 (striped) and 1 (mirrored)
• 2 SATA hard disk drives (suitable for 24 hour operation)

Technical Data
Section 2
• Only requires 1 PCI slot
• Transfer rates up to 150 MB/s

Primary hard disk (HDD 0)

Secondary hard disk (HDD 1)

Access LED (yellow) for primary
and secondary hard disks

Figure 118: PCI SATA RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-05

Information:
The PCI SATA RAID controller can not be used in place of a Universal Power Supply
(UPS). If the operating system is shut down improperly, the next time it is started it
is detected as an error by the RAID 1, and a complete rebuild is executed. This
generally takes at least 120 minutes (configurable) to complete.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 267

 Technical Data • Individual components

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5ACPCI.RAIC-05
SATA RAID controller
Type SiI 3512 SATA link
Specifications Serial ATA 1.0
Data transfer rate Max. 1.5 GB/s (150 MB/s)
RAID level Supports RAID 0, 1
BIOS Extension ROM - requirements Approx. 32 KB
Hard disks Seagate ST9250315AS
Amount 2
Formatted capacity (512 bytes/sector) 250 GB
Number of heads 1
Number of sectors (user) 488,397,168
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 5400 rpm ±0.2%
Access time (average) 5.56 ms
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1 ms
Average (read access) 14 ms
Maximum (read access) 30 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 3.6 seconds (typically)
Supported transfer modes SATA 1.0, Serial ATA Revision 2.6
PIO mode 0-4, multiword DMA mode 0-2, UDMA mode 0-6
Data transfer rate
On the medium Max. 1175 Mbits/s
To/from host Max. 150 MB/s
Cache 8 MB
S.M.A.R.T. Support Yes
Electrical characteristics
Power consumption 0.3 A at 3.3 V (PCI bus)
1 A at 5 V (PCI bus)
Mechanical characteristics
Mounted on PCI insert Fixed
Weight 350 g

Table 110: Technical data - RAID Hard Disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-05

268 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Environmental characteristics 5ACPCI.RAIC-05

Ambient temperature1)
Operation - Standard / 24-hour2) 0 to 60°C
Storage -40 to 70°C
Transport -40 to 70°C
Relative humidity3)
Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration4)
Operation (continuous) 5 - 500 Hz: max. 0.125 g; duration 1 octave per minute; no unrecoverable errors

Technical Data
Operation (occasional) 5 - 500 Hz: max. 0.25 g; duration 1 octave per minute; no unrecoverable errors

Section 2
Storage 5 - 500 Hz: max. 5 g; duration 0.5 octaves per minute; no damage
Transport 5 - 500 Hz: max. 5 g; duration 0.5 octaves per minute; no damage
Shock4) (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation Max. 125 g, 2 ms; no unrecoverable errors
Storage Max. 400 g, 2 ms; no damage
Max. 500 g, 1 ms; no damage
Max. 300 g, 0.5 ms; no damage
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3048 m
Storage - 300 to 12,192 m

Table 110: Technical data - RAID Hard Disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-05 (Forts.)

1) Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The
temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum of 20°C per hour.
2) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.
3) Humidity gradient: Maximum 30% per hour.
4) Operation in areas prone to vibration and shock can affect performance negatively (reduction of transfer rate).

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55
50 Storage
Operation
45 Transport
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 119: Temperature humidity diagram - SATA RAID Hard Disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-05

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 269

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced
linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum
of 20°C per hour.

Driver support

Special drivers are necessary for operating the PCI SATA RAID controller. Drivers for Windows
XP Professional and Windows XP Embedded are available for download on the B&R Homepage
in the download area (www.br-automation.com).
The .NET-based SATARaid™ serial ATA RAID management software can also be found on the
B&R homepage.

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

Configuration

For configuration of a SATA RAID network, see Chapter 3 "Commissioning", section

"Configuration of a SATA RAID array", on page 351.

Exchanging a HDD

A hard drive can be easily exchanged in the event of an error when using the RAID1 (mirroring)
configuration without having to re-install the system. The replacement SATA HDD 250GB
5MMHDD.0250-00 is available as a replacement part for a HDD.

For instructions on exchanging the drive, see Chapter 7 "Maintenance / Servicing", section
"Mounting the side cover", on page 781.

270 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.8.9 Replacement SATA HDD 250 GB - 5MMHDD.0250-00

The hard disk can be used as a replacement part for 5ACPCI.RAIC-05.

Technical Data
Section 2
Figure 120: Replacement SATA HDD 250 GB - 5MMHDD.0250-00

Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.

Features 5MMHDD.0250-00
Hard disks Seagate ST9250315AS
Amount 1
Formatted capacity (512 bytes/sector) 250 GB
Number of heads 1
Number of sectors (user) 488,397,168
Bytes per sector 512
Revolution speed 5400 rpm ±0.2%
Access time (average) 5.56 ms
Positioning time (seek, typical values)
Minimum (track to track) 1 ms
Average (read access) 14 ms
Maximum (read access) 30 ms
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 3.6 seconds (typically)
Supported transfer modes SATA 1.0, Serial ATA Revision 2.6
PIO mode 0-4, multiword DMA mode 0-2, UDMA mode 0-6
Interface SATA

Table 111: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5MMHDD.0250-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 271

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5MMHDD.0250-00
Data transfer rate
On the medium Max. 1175 Mbits/s
To/from host Max. 150 MB/s (SATA I), max. 300 MB/s (SATA II)
Cache 8 MB
S.M.A.R.T. Support Yes
MTBF 550,000 Power On Hours1)
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature2)
Operation - Standard / 24-hour3) 0 to 60°C
Storage -40 to 70°C
Transport -40 to 70°C
Relative humidity4)
Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 0.5 g at 5 - 500 Hz, no non-recovered errors
Storage 5 g at 5 - 500 Hz, no non-recovered errors
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation 350 g and 2 ms duration, no non-recovered errors
Storage 800 g and 2 ms duration, no non-recovered errors
1000 g and 1 ms duration, no non-recovered errors
600 g and 0.5 ms duration, no non-recovered errors
Altitude
Operation - 300 to 3048 m
Storage - 300 to 12,192 m

Table 111: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5MMHDD.0250-00 (Forts.)

1) With 8760 POH (Power On Hours) per year and 25°C surface temperature.
2) Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The
temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum of 20°C per hour.
3) 24-hour operation means 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.
4) Humidity gradient: Maximum 30% per hour.

272 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55

Technical Data
50 Storage
Operation

Section 2
45 Transport
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 121: Temperature humidity diagram - SATA RAID hard disk - 5MMHDD.0250-00

Temperature values for 305 meter altitude. The temperature specification must be reduced
linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The temperature increase and decrease can be a maximum
of 20°C per hour.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 273

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.9 Interface options

An add-on interface (CAN or combined RS232/422/485) can be inserted.

Information:
It is possible to add or remove an add-on interface at any time.

Caution!
Turn off power before adding or removing an add-on interface.

3.9.1 Add-on CAN interface - 5AC600.CANI-00

The add-on CAN interface is equipped with a Bosch CC770 CAN controller (compatible with an
Intel 82527 CAN controller), which conforms to CAN specifications 2.0 part A/B. The CAN
controller can trigger an NMI (non-maskable interrupt).

Figure 122: Add-on CAN interface - 5AC600.CANI-00

Technical data

Features 5AC600.CANI-00
CAN interface
Controller Bosch CC770 (compatible with Intel 82527 CAN controller)
Amount 1
Connection 9-pin DSUB, male
Terminating resistor Can be activated and deactivated using a sliding switch
Default setting Disabled

Table 112: Technical data - Add-on CAN interface - 5AC600.CANI-00

274 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Pin assignments

Add-on CAN
Type Electrically isolated
Transfer rate Max. 500 kBit/s
Bus length Max. 1000 Meter
Pin Assignment
1 n.c. 9-pin DSUB connector

Technical Data
2 CAN low 1 5

Section 2
3 GND
4 n.c.
6 9
5 n.c.
6 Reserved
7 CAN high
8 n.c.
9 n.c.

Table 113: Pin assignments - CAN

I/O address and IRQ

Resource Default setting Additional setting options

I/O address 384 / 385 -
IRQ IRQ10 NMI 1)

Table 114: Add-on CAN - I/O Adresse und IRQ

1) NMI = Non Maskable Interrupt.

The setting for the IRQ can be changed in the BIOS setup (under "Advanced" - submenu
"Baseboard/Panel Features" - submenu "Legacy Devices", setting "CAN"). Please note any
potential conflicts with other resources when changing this setting.

I/O address Register Function

384h Address register Defines the register number to access.
385h Data register Access to the register defined in the address register.

Table 115: CAN address register

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 275

 Technical Data • Individual components

Bus length and cable type

The type of cable used depends largely on the required bus length and the number of nodes.
The bus length is mainly determined by the bit rate. In accordance with CiA (CAN in Automation)
the maximum bus length is 1000 meters.

The following bus lengths are permitted with a maximum oscillator tolerance of 0.121%:

Distance [m] Transfer rate [kBit/s]

≤ 1000 Typ. 50
≤ 200 Typ. 250
≤ 60 Typ. 500

Table 116: Bus length and transfer rate - CAN

The material used for the cable should preferably have all or most of the following properties in
order to reach an optimal transfer rate.

CAN cable Property

Signal lines
Cable cross section 2 x 0.25 mm² (24AWG/19), tinned Cu wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤ 82 Ω / km
Stranding Wires stranded in pairs
Shield Paired shield with aluminum foil
Grounding line
Cable cross section 1 x 0.34 mm² (22AWG/19), tinned Cu wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤ 59 Ω / km
Outer sheathing
Item PUR mixture
Characteristics Halogen free
Entire shielding From tinned cu wires

Table 117: CAN cable requirements

276 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Terminating resistor

CAN networks are cabled using a bus structure where both ends of the bus are equipped with
terminating resistors. The add-on CAN interface has an integrated terminating resistor (delivery
state: disabled with the setting "Off").

Technical Data
Section 2
On

Off

Figure 123: Terminating resistor - Add-on CAN interface 5AC600.CANI-00

Contents of delivery

The screws included in the mounting kit are to be used for installation.

1x 2x

Figure 124: Contents of the delivery / mounting material - 5AC600.CANI-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 277

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.9.2 Add-on RS232/422/485 interface - 5AC600.485I-00

The serial interface is a combined RS232/RS422/RS485 interface. The operating mode

(RS232/RS422/RS485) is selected automatically, depending on the electrical connection.

Figure 125: Add-on RS232/422/485 interface - 5AC600.485I-00

Pin assignments

Add-on RS232/422/485
Features RS232 RS422/485
Type RS232 not modem compatible;
Electrically isolated
UART 16550 compatible, 16 byte FIFO
Transfer rate Max. 115 kBit/s
Bus length Max. 15 meters Max. 1200 meters
Pin Assignments Assignments 9-pin DSUB connector
(RS232) (RS422)
1 5
1 n.c. TXD/
2 RXD n.c.
3 TXD n.c. 6 9

4 n.c. TXD
5 GND GND
6 n.c. RXD/
7 RTS n.c.
8 CTS n.c.
9 n.c. RXD

Table 118: Pin assignments - RS232/RS422

I/O address and IRQ

Resource Default setting Additional setting options

I/O address 2E8 238, 2F8, 338, 3E8, 3F8
IRQ IRQ10 IRQ 3, 4, 5, 7, 11, 12

Table 119: Add-on RS232/422/485 - I/O address and IRQ

278 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

The setting for the I/O address and the IRQ can be changed in the BIOS setup (under
"Advanced" - submenu "Main board/Panel Features" - submenu "Legacy Devices", setting
"COM E"). Please note any potential conflicts with other resources when changing this setting.

Bus length and cable type RS232

The maximum transfer rate of 115 kBit/s depends on the cable type being used.

Distance [m] Transfer rate [kBit/s]

≤ 15 Typ. 64

Technical Data
Section 2
≤ 10 Typ. 115
≤5 Typ. 115

Table 120: RS232 - Bus length and transfer rate

The material used for the cable should preferably have all or most of the following properties in
order to reach an optimal transfer rate.

RS232 cable Property

Signal lines
Cable cross section 4 x 0.16 mm² (26AWG), tinned Cu wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤ 82 Ω / km
Stranding Wires stranded in pairs
Shield Paired shield with aluminum foil
Grounding line
Cable cross section 1 x 0.34 mm² (22AWG/19), tinned Cu wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤ 59 Ω / km
Outer sheathing
Item PUR mixture
Characteristics Halogen free
Entire shielding From tinned cu wires

Table 121: RS232 - Cable requirements

RS422 - Bus length and cable type

The RTS line must be switched on to activate the sender.

The maximum transfer rate of 115 kBit/s depends on the cable type being used.

Distance [m] Transfer rate [kBit/s]

1200 Typ. 115

Table 122: RS422 - Bus length and transfer rate

The material used for the cable should preferably have all or most of the following properties in
order to reach an optimal transfer rate.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 279

 Technical Data • Individual components

RS422 cable Property

Signal lines
Cable cross section 4 x 0.25 mm² (24AWG/19), tinned Cu wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤ 82 Ω / km
Stranding Wires stranded in pairs
Shield Paired shield with aluminum foil
Grounding line
Cable cross section 1 x 0.34 mm² (22AWG/19), tinned Cu wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤ 59 Ω / km
Outer sheathing
Item PUR mixture
Characteristics Halogen free
Entire shielding From tinned cu wires

Table 123: RS422 - Cable requirements

RS485 interface operation

The pins of the RS422 default interface (1,4,6 and 9) should be used for operation. The pins
should be connected as shown.

9
RXD
DATA
4
TXD

6
RXD
DATA
1
TXD

Figure 126: Add-on RS232/422/485 interface - operated in RS485 mode

The RTS line must be switched each time the driver is sent and received; there is no automatic
switch back. This cannot be configured in Windows.

The voltage drop caused by long line lengths can lead to greater potential differences between
the bus stations, which can hinder communication. This can be improved by running ground wire
with the others.

The line ends of the RS485 interface should (at least for longer line lengths or larger transfer
rates) be closed. Normally a passive terminator can be used on the bus ends by connecting each
of the signal lines with 120 Ω resistance.

RS485 - Bus length and cable type

The maximum transfer rate of 115 kBit/s depends on the cable type being used.

280 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Distance [m] Transfer rate [kBit/s]

1200 Typ. 115

Table 124: RS485 - Bus length and transfer rate

The material used for the cable should preferably have all or most of the following properties in
order to reach an optimal transfer rate.

RS485 cable Property

Signal lines

Technical Data
Cable cross section 4 x 0.25 mm² (24AWG/19), tinned Cu wire

Section 2
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤ 82 Ω / km
Stranding Wires stranded in pairs
Shield Paired shield with aluminum foil
Grounding line
Cable cross section 1 x 0.34 mm² (22AWG/19), tinned Cu wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤ 59 Ω / km
Outer sheathing
Item PUR mixture
Characteristics Halogen free
Entire shielding From tinned cu wires

Table 125: RS485 - Cable requirements

Contents of delivery

The screws included in the mounting kit are to be used for installation.

1x 2x

Figure 127: Contents of the delivery / mounting material - 5AC600.485I-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 281

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.10 Fan kits

Information:
Fans are necessary when using components which must work within certain
temperature limits, e.g. hard disks, DVD combos, PCI cards, etc.

The fan and dust filter are subject to wear and must be checked with appropriate
frequency and cleaned or replaced when not functioning properly (e.g. due to dirt
and grime).

3.10.1 Fan kit 1 PCI - 5PC600.FA01-00

This fan kit is an optional addition for system units with 1 PCI slots. For available replacement
dust filters for this fan kit, see section "Replacement fan", on page 737.

Fans ø 40 mm

Fastening screws

Dust filter

Figure 128: Fan kit - 5PC600.FA01-00

Technical data

Features 5PC600.FA01-00
Fan type Double ball bearings
Width 40 mm
Length 40 mm
Height 20 mm
Revolution speed 5600 rpm ±10%
Noise level 24 dB
Lifespan 80,000 hours at 30°C

Table 126: Technical data - 5PC600.FA01-00

282 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Features 5PC600.FA01-00
Maintenance interval The fans are subject to wear. Depending on the work environment, the dust filter should be checked
with appropriate frequency to determine whether the air flow provides sufficient cooling. An exchange
or cleaning of the filter kit is appropriate at that time.

Table 126: Technical data - 5PC600.FA01-00 (Forts.)

Contents of delivery

Amount Component

Technical Data
3 Fans with 40 mm diameter

Section 2
1 Dust filter
6 Mounting screws

Table 127: Contents of delivery - 5PC600.FA01-00

Installation

For a description of how to install the fan kit, see chapter 7 "Maintenance / Servicing", section 3
"Fan kit installation and replacement", starting on page 747.

3.10.2 Fan kit 2 PCI - 5PC600.FA02-00

This fan kit is an optional addition for system units with 2 PCI slots. For available replacement
dust filters for this fan kit, see section "Replacement fan", on page 737.

Fans ø 60 mm

Fastening screws

Filter clasp

Dust filter

Figure 129: Fan kit - 5PC600.FA02-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 283

 Technical Data • Individual components

Technical data

Features 5PC600.FA02-00
Fan type Double ball bearings
Width 60 mm
Length 60 mm
Height 20 mm
Revolution speed 3600 rpm ±10%
Noise level 30.5 dB
Lifespan 80,000 hours at 30°C
Maintenance interval The fans are subject to wear. Depending on the work environment, the dust filter should be checked
with appropriate frequency to determine whether the air flow provides sufficient cooling. An exchange
or cleaning of the filter kit is appropriate at that time.

Table 128: Technical data - 5PC600.FA02-00

Contents of delivery

Amount Component
2 Fans with 60 mm diameter
1 Dust filter
1 Filter clasp
4 Mounting screws

Table 129: Contents of delivery - 5PC600.FA02-00

Installation

For a description of how to install the fan kit, see chapter 7 "Maintenance / Servicing", section 3
"Fan kit installation and replacement", starting on page 750.

284 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.10.3 Fan kit 3PCI - 5PC600.FA03-00

This fan kit is an optional addition for system units with 3 PCI slots. For available replacement
dust filters for this fan kit, see section "Replacement fan", on page 737.

Fans ø 80mm

Technical Data
Filter clasp

Section 2
Fastening screws
Dust filter

Figure 130: Fan kit - 5PC600.FA03-00

Technical data

Features 5PC600.FA03-00
Fan type Double ball bearings
Amount 2
Width 80 mm
Length 80 mm
Height 20 mm
Revolution speed 2600 rpm ±10%
Noise level 27 dB
Lifespan 80,000 hours at 30°C
Maintenance interval The fans are subject to wear. Depending on the work environment, the dust filter should be checked
with appropriate frequency to determine whether the air flow provides sufficient cooling. An exchange
or cleaning of the filter kit is appropriate at that time.

Table 130: Technical data - 5PC600.FA03-00

Contents of delivery

Amount Component
2 Fans with 80 mm diameter
1 Dust filter
1 Filter clasp
4 Mounting screws

Table 131: Contents of delivery - 5PC600.FA03-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 285

 Technical Data • Individual components

Amount Component
2 Cable fastener

Table 131: Contents of delivery - 5PC600.FA03-00

Installation

For a description of how to install the fan kit, see chapter 7 "Maintenance / Servicing", section 3
"Fan kit installation and replacement", starting on page 753.

3.10.4 Fan kit 5 PCI - 5PC600.FA05-00

This fan kit is an optional addition for system units with 5 PCI slots. For available replacement
dust filters for this fan kit, see section "Replacement fan", on page 737.

Fan ø 60 mm Fans ø 80 mm

Filter clasp

Cable clamp

Fastening screws
Dust filter

Figure 131: Fan kit - 5PC600.FA05-00

Technical data

Features 5PC600.FA05-00
Fan type Double ball bearings Double ball bearings
Amount 1 2
Width 60 mm 80 mm
Length 60 mm 80 mm
Height 20 mm 20 mm
Revolution speed 3600 rpm ±10% 2600 rpm ±10%
Noise level 30.5 dB 27 dB
Lifespan 80,000 hours at 30°C
Maintenance interval The fans are subject to wear. Depending on the work environment, the dust filter should be checked
with appropriate frequency to determine whether the air flow provides sufficient cooling. An exchange
or cleaning of the filter kit is appropriate at that time.

Table 132: Technical data - 5PC600.FA05-00

286 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Contents of delivery

Amount Component
1 Fans with 60 mm diameter
2 Fans with 80 mm diameter
1 Dust filter
1 Filter clasp
4 Mounting screws

Technical Data
2 Cable fastener

Section 2
Table 133: Contents of delivery - 5PC600.FA05-00

Installation

For a description of how to install the fan kit, see chapter 7 "Maintenance / Servicing", section 3
"Fan kit installation and replacement", starting on page 757.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 287

 Technical Data • Individual components

3.11 AP Link cards

For the APC620 system units 5PC600.SX02-00, 5PC600.SF03-00 and 5PC600.SX05-00 and
an 855GME CPU board, a second graphics line can be created using the AP Link graphics
adapter cards.

3.11.1 AP Link SDL transmitter - 5AC600.SDL0-00

24-pin DVI-I with

special functions, female

Figure 132: AP Link card

Model number Short description Note

5AC600.SDL0-00 AP Link SDL transmitter

Table 134: Model numbers - AP Link graphics adapter

The following video signals are available via AP Link and monitor/panel output. The plugs are
specified for 100 connection cycles.

AP Link slot (AP Link card inserted)

For details, see technical data for the CPU board being used.
AP Link card Signal with 855GME (ETX / XTX) board on AP Link output
AP Link Monitor/Panel
5AC600.SDL0-00 DVI, SDL (GE1) RGB, DVI, SDL (GE2)

Monitor / Panel output

Table 135: AP Link slot (AP Link card inserted)

Hotplug for a display device is not supported in any combination.

288 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

Caution!
The RGB, DVI and SDL cables can only be plugged in and unplugged when the
APC620 and display device (Automation Panel 900, Automation Panel 800, monitor)
are turned off.

Pin assignments

Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

Technical Data
Section 2
1 T.M.D.S. Data 2- 16 Hot Plug detect
2 T.M.D.S. Data 2+ 17 T.M.D.S. Data 0-
3 T.M.D.S. Data 2/SDL Shield 18 T.M.D.S. Data 0+
4 SDL- 19 T.M.D.S. DATA 0/XUSB1
Shield
5 SDL+ 20 XUSB1-
6 DDC clock 21 XUSB1+
DVI-I 24 pin, female
7 DDC data 22 T.M.D.S. Clock Shield
8 n.c. 23 T.M.D.S. Clock + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c1 c2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
9 T.M.D.S. DATA 1- 24 T.M.D.S. Clock - 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 c3 c4
c5
10 T.M.D.S. DATA 1+ c1 n.c.
11 T.M.D.S. DATA 1/XUBS0 c2 n.c.
Shield
12 XUSB0- c3 n.c.
13 XUSB0+ c4 n.c.
14 + 5 V power 1) c5 n.c.
15 Ground (return for + 5V,
HSync and VSync)

Table 136: Pin assignment for AP Link connection

1) Protected internally by a multifuse

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 289

 Technical Data • Individual components

Cable lengths and resolutions for SDL transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment lengths and the maximum
resolution according to the SDL cable used:

Cables Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA SXGA UXGA
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200
5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00
1.8 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01
5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03
5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00
5 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01
5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03
5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-001)
10 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-011)
5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-031)
5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-001) -
15 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-011) -
5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-031) -
5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) -
20
5CASDL.0200-301) 5CASDL.0200-301) 5CASDL.0200-301) 5CASDL.0200-301) -
5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) - -
25
5CASDL.0250-301) 5CASDL.0250-301) 5CASDL.0250-301) - -
5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-102) 5CASDL.0300-102) -
30
5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-132) 5CASDL.0300-132)
5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) -
40
5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) -

Table 137: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables

1) See table 138 "Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 290
2) See table 139 "Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 291

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 1) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. B0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. B0

Table 138: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

290 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Technical Data • Individual components

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 2) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02

Technical Data
Hardware Name Revision Note

Section 2
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. D0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. D0
5AC600.SDL0-00 AP Link SDL transmitter Rev. B3
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. D0
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. A0
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Rev. C0

Table 139: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

DVI, SDL description

DVI means:

• Connection of B&R Automation Panel 900 display units with Automation Panel Link DVI
Receiver (Model nr. 5DLDVI.1000-01), Office Digital/DVI Monitors and Office DVI TFT
Displays is possible.

Automation Panel 900 Digital/DVI Monitor DVI TFT

Automation PC 620

Automation Panel Link DVI Receiver

5DLDVI.1000-01

Figure 133: AP Link device connection with DVI video signal

For examples and possibilities for connecting Automation Panel 900 display units via DVI, see
Appendix A, chapter 3 "Commissioning", section 4 "Connection examples", starting on page 308.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 291

 Technical Data • Individual components

SDL (Smart Display Link) means:

• Connection of B&R Automation Panel 900 display units with Automation Panel Link SDL
receiver (Model nr. 5DLSDL.1000-01) or SDL transceiver (Model nr. 5DLSDL.1000-01).

Automation Panel 900

Automation PC 620

Automation Panel Link SDL receiver or SDL transceiver

5DLSDL.1000-00 or 5DLSDL.1000-01

Figure 134: AP Link device connection with SDL video signal

For examples and possibilities for connecting Automation Panel 900 and Automation Panel 800
display units via SDL, see Appendix A, chapter 3 "Commissioning", section 4 "Connection
examples", starting on page 308.

292 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Installation

Chapter 3 • Commissioning

1. Installation

The APC620 systems are mounted with the mounting plates found on the housing. The plates
are designed for M5 screws.

ø 5.4 for M5 screws

Commissioning
Section 3
9

ø 11

Figure 135: Mounting plates for the APC620

The exact positioning of the mounting holes can be seen in the following drilling templates.

1.1 Important mounting information

• The environmental conditions must be taken into consideration (see chapter 2 "Technical
Data", section 2.6 "Ambient temperatures for systems with an 815E CPU board (ETX)",
on page 89, and section 2.7 "Ambient temperatures for systems with an 855GME CPU
board (ETX / XTX)", on page 93).
• The APC620 is only for operation in closed rooms.
• The APC620 cannot be situated in direct sunlight.
• The ventilation holes cannot be covered.
• When mounting the device, be sure to adhere to the allowable mounting orientations (see
section 1.3 "Mounting orientation", on page 297).
• Be sure the wall or switching cabinet can withstand four times the total weight of the the
PC620.
• When connecting certain cable types (DVI, SDL, USB, etc.), keep the flex radius in mind.
(see section 2 "Cable connections", on page 306).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 293

 Commissioning • Installation

1.2 Drilling templates

APC620 with 1 PCI slot APC620 with 2 PCI slots

Mounting plate template (APC620) Mounting plate template (APC620)

270 270
262 262

General tolerance according to ISO 2768 medium

General tolerance according to ISO 2768 medium

18 18

0 0

0 15 50 65 0 17.3 87.3 104.5

Table 140: Drilling templates - 1 and 2 PCI slots

294 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Installation

APC620 with 3 PCI slots APC620 with 5 PCI slots

Mounting plate template (APC620) Mounting plate template (APC620)

410 270
402 262

General tolerance according to ISO 2768 medium

General tolerance according to ISO 2768 medium

Commissioning
Section 3
18

0 22.7 92.7 162.7 185.4

18

0 17.2 107.7 125

Table 141: Drilling templates - 3 and 5 PCI slots

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 295

 Commissioning • Installation

APC620 embedded

Mounting plate template (APC620)

210
201.8

General tolerance according to ISO 2768 medium

18

0 11.5 46.5 58

Table 142: Drilling templates - APC620 embedded

296 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Installation

1.3 Mounting orientation

The Automation PC620 system must be mounted as described in the following sections.

1.3.1 Standard mounting

Standard mounting refers to vertical mounting orientation.

APC620 systems with and without fan kit can be mounted this way.

0° 0°

Commissioning
0°

Section 3
0°

Figure 136: Mounting orientation - Standard

In order to guarantee natural air circulation, mount the system so that the spacing on the top,
bottom, and sides is as follows.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 297

 Commissioning • Installation

at least
air out
100 mm

at least at least
50 mm 50 mm

at least
100 mm air in

Figure 137: Air circulation spacing - Standard

298 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Installation

1.3.2 Optional mounting orientations

Caution!
A fan kit must be used if the system is mounted in the following orientations. In
addition, it is important to be sure that the components used are installed in a way
that complies with the specifications of the drives being used (CD-ROM, DVD/CD-
RW, hard disk, etc.). See the following pages for information regarding the
specifications for mounting orientation.

90° 90°

Commissioning
Section 3
90°

90°

Figure 138: Mounting orientation - Optional

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 299

 Commissioning • Installation

In order to guarantee natural air circulation, mount the system so that the spacing on the top,
bottom, and sides is as follows.

at least
50 mm

at least at least
100 mm 100 mm

at least
50 mm

Figure 139: Optional circulation spacing

CompactFlash slot, add-on or slide-in

No limitation on mounting orientation. Permissible mounting orientations are shown in figure 138
"Mounting orientation - Optional", on page 299.

300 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Installation

Add-on or slide-in hard disks 20, 30 and 40 GB.

The following figure shows the possible mounting orientations for an APC620 device with an
add-on (5AC600.HDDI-00 or 5AC600.HDDI-01) or slide-in hard disk (5AC600.HDDS-00 or
5AC600.HDDS-02).

Standard mounting
vertical 1

0° 0°

Commissioning
Section 3
1) 1)
horizontal 1 0° horizontal 2 0° 0°
0°

1) Only allowed when a fan kit is used.

Figure 140: Mounting orientations for an APC620 with hard disk drive

The mounting orientations "horizontal 1" and "horizontal 2" require the use of a fan kit.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 301

 Commissioning • Installation

Slide-in CD-ROM drive

The following figure shows the possible mounting orientations for an APC620 device with a slide-
in CD-ROM drive (5AC600.CDXS-00).

1)
vertical 1

30° 5°

1)
horizontal 1 30° 30°

1) Only allowed when fan kit is used.

Figure 141: Mounting orientations for an APC 620 with a slide-in CD-ROM drive

The mounting orientation "horizontal 1" requires the use of a fan kit.

Mounting orientation "vertical 1" can also be used at 0° without a fan kit.

302 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Installation

Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW drive

The following figure shows the possible mounting orientations for an APC620 device with a slide-
in DVD-ROM/CD-RW drive 5AC600.DVDS-00).

1)
vertcal 1

30° 0°

Commissioning
Section 3
horizontal 11) 30° 30°

1) Only allowed when fan kit is used.

Figure 142: Mounting orientations for an APC620 with a slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW drive

The mounting orientation "horizontal 1" requires the use of a fan kit.

Mounting orientation "vertical 1" can also be used at 0° without a fan kit.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 303

 Commissioning • Installation

Slide-in DVD-R/RW/DVD+R/RW

The following figure shows the possible mounting orientations for an APC620 device with a slide-
in DVD-R/RW / DVD+R/RW drive (5AC600.DVRS-00).

1)
vertcal 1

30° 0°

horizontal 11) 30° 30°

1) Only allowed when fan kit is used.

Figure 143: Mounting orientations for an APC620 with a slide-in DVD-R/RW / DVD+R/RW drive

The mounting orientation "horizontal 1" requires the use of a fan kit.

Mounting orientation "vertical 1" can also be used at 0° without a fan kit.

304 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Installation

Slide-in USB FDD

The following figure shows the possible mounting orientations for an APC620 device with a slide-
in USB FDD drive (5AC600.FDDS-00).

1)
vertical 1
90° 0°

Commissioning
Section 3
1) Only allowed when a fan kit is used.

Figure 144: Mounting orientations for an APC620 with a slide-in USB FDD drive

Mounting orientation "vertical 1" can also be used at 0° without a fan kit.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 305

 Commissioning • Cable connections

2. Cable connections

When making cable connections and installing cables, it is not permitted to have a flex radius
smaller than the minimum value specified.

Fle
xr
ad
ius

Figure 145: Flex radius - Cable connection

Information:
The value specified for the minimum flex radius can be found in the technical data
for the cable that is being used.

2.1 Ethernet cable lengths for ETH1

For error free data transfer, take note of the cable length information in section "Ethernet
connection ETH1", on page 130.

306 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Grounding concept

3. Grounding concept

Functional ground is a current path of low impedance between electrical circuits and ground. It
is used, for example, to improve immunity to disturbances and not necessarily as a protective
measure. It therefore serves only to deflect disturbances, not to provide any kind of protection
against electric shock.

This device comes equipped with two functional ground connections:

• Supply voltage
• Ground connection
To guarantee safe conductance of electric disturbances, the following points must be observed:

• The device must be connected to the central grounding point in the control cabinet using
the shortest route possible.
• A cable with a minimum cross section of 2.5 mm² per connection should be used. If a
cable with wire end sleeves is connected to the 0TB103.9 or 0TB103.91 terminal block,

Commissioning
then a cable with maximum 1.5 mm² per connection is possible.

Section 3
• Note the line shielding concept. All data cables connected to the device must be shielded.
Symbol indicating functional ground on the B&R device:

Ground connection
min. 2.5mm²

Switching cabinet

Supply voltage

Grounding strip

min. 1.5mm²

Figure 146: Grounding concept

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 307

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4. Connection examples

The following examples provide an overview of the configuration options for connecting
Automation Panel 800 and Automation Panel 900 and/or Automation Panel 800 devices with the
APC620. The following questions will be answered:

• How are Automation Panel 900 devices connected to the monitor / panel output of the
APC620, and what needs to be considered?
• How are Automation Panel 800 devices connected to the monitor / panel output of the
APC620, and what needs to be considered?
• How are Automation Panel 900 devices connected simultaneously to the Monitor / Panel
output on the optional SDL AP Link of the APC620 and what needs to be considered?
• What are "Display Clone" and "Extended Desktop" modes?
• How many Automation Panel 900 devices can be connected per line?
• How many Automation Panel 900 devices can be connected to an Automation Panel 800
device per line?
• How are the connected devices internally numbered?
• Are there limitations to the segment length and if so, what are they?
• What cables and link modules are needed?
• Do BIOS settings have to be changed for a specific configuration?

Information:
An RGB monitor / flat-screen can always be connected to the monitor / panel output
of the APC620 (necessary DVI to CRT adapter can be ordered under the model
number 5AC900.1000-00).

308 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.1 Selecting the display units

If an Automation Panel 800 and an Automation Panel 900 should be connected on the same line,
the devices must have the same display type.
The following table lists the AP900 devices that can be connected on the same line with an
AP800 device.

Automation Panel 800 Automation Panel 900

5AP820.1505-00 5AP920.1505-01
5AP951.1505-01
5AP980.1505-01
5AP981.1505-01
5AP880.1505-00 5AP920.1505-01
5AP951.1505-01
5AP980.1505-01
5AP981.1505-01

Table 143: Selecting the display units

Commissioning
Section 3

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 309

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.2 One Automation Panel 900 via DVI (onboard)

An Automation Panel 900 with max. SXGA resolution is connected to the integrated DVI
interface (onboard). As an alternative, an office TFT with DVI interface or an analog monitor
(using adapter with model no. 5AC900.1000-00) can also be operated. A separate cable is used
for touch screen and USB. If USB devices are to be operated on the Automation Panel 900, the
maximum distance is 5 meters. USB devices can only be connected directly to the Automation
Panel (without a hub).

Segment length 5 meters (with USB)

max. 10 meters (without USB)

Monitor / Panel
connection DVI cable

USB cable

RS232 cable
USB up to
✓ 5m OK
Link: 5DLDVI.1000-01

Automation PC 620

Figure 147: Configuration - One Automation Panel 900 via DVI (onboard)

4.2.1 Basic system requirements

The following table shows the possible combinations for the APC620 system unit with CPU
board to implement the configuration shown in the figure above. If the maximum resolution is
limited when making the combination then it is also shown in this table (e.g. for connecting a non-
B&R Automation Panel 900 device).

CPU board with system unit Restriction

Resolution
5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01

5PC600.E855-00
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. SXGA
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-01
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. SXGA
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-02
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. SXGA
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-03
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. SXGA
5PC600.X855-03
5PC600.E855-04
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. SXGA
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. SXGA
5PC600.X855-05

Table 144: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board

310 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.2.2 Link modules

Model number Description Note

5DLDVI.1000-01 Automation Panel Link DVI receiver For Automation
connections for DVI-D, RS232 and USB 2.0 (Type B); 24VDC (screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp Panel 900
0TB103.91 sold separately).

Table 145: Link module for the configuration - One Automation Panel 900 via DVI

4.2.3 Cables

Select one cable each from the 3 required types.

Model number Type Length

5CADVI.0018-00 DVI cable 1.8 m
5CADVI.0050-00 DVI cable 5m
5CADVI.0100-00 DVI cable 10 m1)
9A0014.02 Touch screen cable - serial 1.8 m

Commissioning
9A0014.05 Touch screen cable - serial 5m

Section 3
9A0014.10 Touch screen cable - serial 10 m1)
5CAUSB.0018-00 USB cable 1.8 m
5CAUSB.0050-00 USB cable 5m

Table 146: Cables for DVI configurations

1) USB support is not possible on the Automation Panel 900 because USB is limited to 5 m.

4.2.4 Possible Automation Panel units, resolutions und segment lengths

The following Automation Panel 900 units can be used. In rare cases, the segment length is
limited according to the resolution.

Model number Diagonal Resolution Touch screen Keys Max. segment length
5AP920.1043-01 10.4“ VGA ✓ - 5 m / 10 m1)
5AP920.1214-01 12.1“ SVGA ✓ - 5 m / 10 m1)
5AP920.1505-01 15.0“ XGA ✓ - 5 m / 10 m1)
5AP920.1706-01 17.0“ SXGA ✓ - 5 m / 10 m1)
5AP920.1906-01 19.0“ SXGA ✓ - 5 m / 10 m1)

Table 147: Possible Automation Panel units, resolutions und segment lengths

1) USB support is not possible on the Automation Panel 900 because USB is limited to 5 m.

Information:
The DVI transfer mode does not allow reading statistical values on Automation
Panel 900 units.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 311

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.2.5 BIOS settings

No special BIOS settings are necessary for operation.

4.2.6 Windows graphics driver settings

See chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional", on

page 568.

4.2.7 Windows touch screen driver settings

See chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional", on

page 568.

312 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.3 An Automation Panel 900 via SDL (onboard)

An Automation Panel 900 is connected to the integrated SDL interface (onboard) via an SDL
cable. USB devices can only be connected directly to the Automation Panel (without a hub).

Monitor / Panel
connection
0
SDL segment length
max. 40 meters

✓ USB OK
Link: 5DLSDL.1000-00

Automation PC 620

Graphics Engine 2
x Internal APC620 panel number independent of segment length

Commissioning
Figure 148: Configuration - An Automation Panel 900 via SDL (onboard)

Section 3
4.3.1 Basic system requirements

The following table shows the possible combinations for the APC620 system unit with CPU
board to implement the configuration shown in the figure above. If the maximum resolution is
limited when making the combination then it is also shown in this table (e.g. for connecting a non-
B&R Automation Panel 900 device).

CPU board with system unit Restriction

Resolution
5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01

5PC600.E855-00
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-01
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-02
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-03
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-03
5PC600.E855-04
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-05

Table 148: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 313

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.3.2 Link modules

Model number Description Note

5DLSDL.1000-00 Automation Panel Link SDL receiver For Automation
Connection for SDL in, transfer of display data, touch screen, USB 1.1, matrix keys, and service data, Panel 900
24 VDC (screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 sold separately).

Table 149: Link module for the configuration - One Automation Panel 900 via SDL

4.3.3 Cables

Select a cable from the following table.

Model number Type Length

5CASDL.0018-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0050-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0050-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0050-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0100-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0100-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0100-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0150-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0150-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0150-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0200-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 20 m
5CASDL.0200-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 20 m
5CASDL.0250-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 25 m
5CASDL.0250-30 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 25 m
5CASDL.0300-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-10 SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-13 SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0400-10 SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout 40 m
5CASDL.0400-13 SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout 40 m

Table 150: Cables for SDL configurations

314 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

Cable lengths and resolutions for SDL transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment lengths and the maximum
resolution according to the SDL cable used:

Cables Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA SXGA UXGA
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200
5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00
1.8 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01
5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03
5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00
5 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01
5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03
5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-001)
10 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-011)
5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-031)
5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-001) -
15 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-011) -

Commissioning
5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-031) -

Section 3
5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) -
20
5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) -
5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) - -
25
5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) - -
5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-102) 5CASDL.0300-102) -
30
5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-132) 5CASDL.0300-132) -
5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) -
40
5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) -

Table 151: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables

1) See table 152 "Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 315
2) See table 153 "Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 316

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 1) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. B0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. B0

Table 152: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 315

 Commissioning • Connection examples

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 2) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. D0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. D0
5AC600.SDL0-00 AP Link SDL transmitter Rev. B3
5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI Rev. E0
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. D0
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot Rev. E0
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. A0
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Rev. C0
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots Rev. C0

Table 153: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

4.3.4 BIOS settings

No special BIOS settings are necessary for operation without touch.

To operate Automation Panel 900 panels with a touch screen (Extended Desktop or Dual
Display Clone), the serial interfaces COM C and COM D must be activated in BIOS (BIOS default
setting = disabled).

4.3.5 Windows graphics driver settings

"Digital display" must be defined as output device in the graphics driver.

For more information on this, see chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

4.3.6 Windows touch screen driver settings

For more information on this, see chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

316 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.4 An Automation Panel 800 via SDL (onboard)

An Automation Panel 800 is connected to the integrated SDL interface (onboard) via an SDL
cable. USB devices can only be connected directly to the extension keyboard (without a hub).

Monitor / panel
connection 1 3
0
SDL segment 1
max. 40 meters

2 ✓ USB OK

Automation Panel 800

Automation PC 620

Graphics Engine 2
x Internal APC620 panel number ✓ Independent of segment length

Commissioning
Figure 149: Configuration - An Automation Panel 800 via SDL (onboard)

Section 3
4.4.1 Basic system requirements

The following table shows the possible combinations for the APC620 system unit with CPU
board to implement the configuration shown in the figure above. If the maximum resolution is
limited when making the combination then it is also shown in this table.

CPU board with system unit Restriction

Resolution
5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01

5PC600.E855-00
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ max. XGA
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-01
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ max. XGA
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-02
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ max. XGA
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-03
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ max. XGA
5PC600.X855-03
5PC600.E855-04
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ max. XGA
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ max. XGA
5PC600.X855-05

Table 154: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 317

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.4.2 Cables

Select an SDL cable from the following table.

Model number Type Length

5CASDL.0018-20 SDL w/o extender 1.8 m
5CASDL.0050-20 SDL w/o extender 5m
5CASDL.0100-20 SDL w/o extender 10 m
5CASDL.0150-20 SDL w/o extender 15 m
5CASDL.0200-20 SDL w/o extender 20 m
5CASDL.0250-20 SDL w/o extender 25 m
5CASDL.0300-30 SDL w/ extender 30 m
5CASDL.0400-30 SDL w/ extender 40 m

Table 155: Cables for SDL configurations

Cable lengths and resolutions for SDL transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment lengths and the maximum
resolution according to the SDL cable used:

Cables Resolution
XGA
Segment length [m] 1024 x 768
1.8 5CASDL.0018-20
5 5CASDL.0050-20
10 5CASDL.0100-20
15 5CASDL.0150-20
20 5CASDL.0200-201)
25 5CASDL.0250-201)
30 5CASDL.0300-302)
40 5CASDL.0400-302)

Table 156: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables

1) See table 157 "Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)"
2) See table 158 "Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)"

318 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 1) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the BIOS
description.
Supported starting with the APC620 / PPC 700
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Firmware upgrade (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT) V01.10,
available in the download area of the B&R
homepage.

Table 157: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 2) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the BIOS
description.
Supported starting with the APC620 / PPC 700
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Firmware upgrade (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT) V01.10,

Commissioning
available in the download area of the B&R

Section 3
homepage.
Hardware Name Revision Note
5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI Rev. E0 -
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. D0 -
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot Rev. E0 -
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. A0
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Rev. C0 -
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots Rev. C0 -

Table 158: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

4.4.3 BIOS settings

No special BIOS settings are necessary for operation.

4.4.4 Windows graphics driver settings

"Digital display" must be defined as output device in the graphics driver.

For more information on this, see chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

4.4.5 Windows touch screen driver settings

For more information on this, see chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 319

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.5 An AP900 and an AP800 via SDL (onboard)

An Automation Panel 900 and an Automation Panel 800 are connected to the integrated SDL
interface (onboard) via SDL.

USB is supported up to a maximum distance (segment 1 + segment 2) of 30 m on the two

displays. Starting at a distance of 30 m, USB is only available on the first display (front and back)
up to a maximum of 40 m. USB devices can only be connected directly to the Automation Panel
900 or extension keyboard (without a hub).

Monitor / panel
connection
SDL segment 1 0 SDL segment 2 2 1 4
max. 40 m max. 40 m

✓ USB OK
3 USB
Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01 ✓
possible

Automation PC 620 Automation Panel 800

5AC600.SDL0-00

Graphics Engine 2
x Internal APC620 panel number ✓ Independent of segment length ✓ Depends on segment length

Figure 150: Configuration - One AP900 and an AP800 via SDL (onboard)

4.5.1 Basic system requirements

The following table shows the possible combinations for the APC620 system unit with CPU
board to implement the configuration shown in the figure above. If the maximum resolution is
limited when making the combination then it is also shown in this table.

CPU board with system unit Restriction

5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01 Resolution

5PC600.E855-00
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-01
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-02
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-03
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-03
5PC600.E855-04
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-05

Table 159: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board

320 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.5.2 Cables

How to select an SDL cable for connecting the AP900 display to the AP900 display 4.3 "An
Automation Panel 900 via SDL (onboard)".

How to select an SDL cable for connecting the AP800 display to the AP900 display4.4 "An
Automation Panel 800 via SDL (onboard)".

Cable lengths and resolutions for SDL transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment lengths and the maximum
resolution according to the SDL cable used:

Cables Resolution
XGA
Segment length [m] 1024 x 768
1.8 5CASDL.0018-20
5 5CASDL.0050-20

Commissioning
10 5CASDL.0100-20

Section 3
15 5CASDL.0150-20
20 5CASDL.0200-201)
25 5CASDL.0250-201)
30 5CASDL.0300-302)
40 5CASDL.0400-302)

Table 160: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables

1) See table 161 "Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)"
2) See table 162 "Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)"

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 1) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the BIOS
description.
Supported starting with the APC620 / PPC 700
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Firmware upgrade (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT) V01.10,
available in the download area of the B&R
homepage.

Table 161: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 321

 Commissioning • Connection examples

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 2) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the BIOS
description.
Supported starting with the APC620 / PPC 700
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Firmware upgrade (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT) V01.10,
available in the download area of the B&R
homepage.
Hardware Name Revision Note
5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI Rev. E0 -
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. D0 -
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot Rev. E0 -
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. A0
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Rev. C0 -
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots Rev. C0 -

Table 162: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

4.5.3 BIOS settings

No special BIOS settings are necessary for operation.

4.5.4 Windows graphics driver settings

"Digital display" must be defined as output device in the graphics driver.

For more information on this, see chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

4.5.5 Windows touch screen driver settings

For more information on this, see chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

322 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.6 Four Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (onboard)

An Automation Panel 900 is connected to the integrated SDL interface (onboard) via an SDL
cable. Up to three other Automation Panels of the same type are connected to this Automation
Panel and operated via SDL. All four panels show the same content (Display Clone).

USB is supported up to a maximum distance (SDL segment 1 + SDL segment 2) of 30 m on the

first two panels (front and back side). From a distance of 30 m and longer, USB is only available
for the first panel (front and back side). USB devices can only be connected directly to the
Automation Panel (without a hub).

Monitor / Panel
connection
SDL segment 1 0 SDL segment 2 1
max. 40 m max. 40 m

SDL segment 3
max. 40 m
USB
✓ USB OK ✓

Commissioning
possible
Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01 Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01

Section 3
Automation PC 620
with AP Link 3 SDL segment 2
5AC600.SDL0-00 max. 40 m

USB USB
not possible not possible
Link: 5DLSDL.1000-00 Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01
Graphics Engine 2
x Internal APC620 panel number ✓ independent of segment length ✓ depends on segment length

Figure 151: Configuration - Four Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (onboard)

4.6.1 Basic system requirements

The following table shows the possible combinations for the APC620 system unit with CPU
board to implement the configuration shown in the figure above. If the maximum resolution is
limited when making the combination then it is also shown in this table (e.g. for connecting a non-
B&R Automation Panel 900 device).

CPU board with system unit Restriction

Resolution
5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01

5PC600.E855-00
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-01
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-02
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-03
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-03

Table 163: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 323

 Commissioning • Connection examples

CPU board with system unit Restriction

Resolution
5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01

5PC600.E855-04
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-05

Table 163: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board (Forts.)

4.6.2 Link modules

Model number Description Note

5DLSDL.1000-00 Automation Panel Link SDL receiver For Automation
Connection for SDL in, transfer of display data, touch screen, USB 1.1, matrix keys, and service data, Panel 900
24 VDC (screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 sold separately).
5DLSDL.1000-01 Automation Panel Link SDL transceiver For Automation
Connections for SDL in, transfer of display data, touch screen, USB 1.1, matrix keys, and service Panel 900
data, 24 VDC (screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 sold separately). 3 pieces required

Table 164: Link modules for the configuration: 4 Automation Panel 900 via SDL on 1 line

4.6.3 Cables

Select an Automation Panel 900 cable from the following table.

Model number Type Length

5CASDL.0018-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0050-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0050-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0050-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0100-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0100-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0100-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0150-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0150-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0150-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0200-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 20 m
5CASDL.0200-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 20 m
5CASDL.0250-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 25 m
5CASDL.0250-30 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 25 m
5CASDL.0300-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 30 m

Table 165: Cables for SDL configurations

324 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

Model number Type Length

5CASDL.0300-10 SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-13 SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0400-10 SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout 40 m
5CASDL.0400-13 SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout 40 m

Table 165: Cables for SDL configurations

Cable lengths and resolutions for SDL transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment lengths and the maximum
resolution according to the SDL cable used:

Cables Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA SXGA UXGA
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200
5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00
1.8 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01

Commissioning
5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03

Section 3
5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00
5 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01
5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03
5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-001)
10 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-011)
5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-031)
5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-001) -
15 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-011) -
5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-031) -
5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) --
20
5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031)
5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) - -
25
5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) - -
5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-102) 5CASDL.0300-102) -
30
5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-132) 5CASDL.0300-132)
5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) -
40
5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132)

Table 166: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables

1) See table 167 "Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 326
2) See table 168 "Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 326

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 325

 Commissioning • Connection examples

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 1) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. B0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. B0

Table 167: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 2) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. D0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. D0
5AC600.SDL0-00 AP Link SDL transmitter Rev. B3
5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI Rev. E0
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. D0
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot Rev. E0
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. A0
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Rev. C0
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots Rev. C0

Table 168: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

326 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.6.4 BIOS settings

No special BIOS settings are necessary for operation.

4.6.5 Windows graphics driver settings

"Display Clone" must be defined as output device in the graphics driver, with "Digital Display" as
primary device.

For more information on this, see chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

4.6.6 Windows touch screen driver settings

For more information on this, see chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

Commissioning
Section 3

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 327

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.7 One Automation Panel 900 unit via SDL (AP Link)

An Automation Panel 900 unit is connected to the optional SDL transmitter (AP Link) via an SDL
cable. USB devices can only be connected directly to the Automation Panel (without a hub).

SDL segment length

max.40 meters
AP Link
connection
8

✓ USB OK
Link: 5DLSDL.1000-00

Automation PC 620
Link: 5AC600.SDL0-00
Graphics Engine 1
x Internal APC620 panel number ✓ independent of segment le

Figure 152: Configuration - One Automation Panel 900 via SDL (AP Link)

4.7.1 Basic system requirements

The following table shows the possible combinations for the APC620 system unit with CPU
board to implement the configuration shown in the figure above. If the maximum resolution is
limited when making the combination then it is also shown in this table (e.g. for connecting a non-
B&R Automation Panel 900 device).

CPU board with system unit Restriction

Resolution
5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01

5PC600.E855-00
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-01
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-02
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-03
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-03
5PC600.E855-04
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-05

Table 169: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board

328 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.7.2 Link modules

Model number Description Note

5DLSDL.1000-00 Automation Panel Link SDL receiver For Automation
Connection for SDL in, transfer of display data, touch screen, USB 1.1, matrix keys, and service data, Panel 900
24 VDC (screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 sold separately).
5AC600.SDL0-00 APC620 Smart Display Link transmitter For Automation PC
For connecting Automation Panels to an APC620 via SDL. 620

Table 170: Link modules for the configuration: 1 Automation Panel 900 via SDL (optional)

4.7.3 Cables

Select a cable from the following table.

Model number Type Length

5CASDL.0018-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 1.8 m

Commissioning
5CASDL.0018-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 1.8 m

Section 3
5CASDL.0050-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0050-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0050-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0100-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0100-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0100-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0150-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0150-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0150-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0200-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 20 m
5CASDL.0200-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 20 m
5CASDL.0250-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 25 m
5CASDL.0250-30 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 25 m
5CASDL.0300-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-10 SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-13 SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0400-10 SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout 40 m
5CASDL.0400-13 SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout 40 m

Table 171: Cables for SDL configurations

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 329

 Commissioning • Connection examples

Cable lengths and resolutions for SDL transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment lengths and the maximum
resolution according to the SDL cable used:

Cables Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA SXGA UXGA
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200
5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00
1.8 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01
5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03
5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00
5 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01
5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03
5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-001)
10 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-011)
5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-031)
5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-01) -
15 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-011) -
5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-031) -
5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) -
20
5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) -
5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) - -
25
5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) - -
5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-102) 5CASDL.0300-102) -
30
5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-132) 5CASDL.0300-132) -
5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) -
40
5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) -

Table 172: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables

1) See table 173 "Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 330
2) See table 174 "Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 331

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 1) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. B0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. B0

Table 173: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

330 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 2) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. D0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. D0
5AC600.SDL0-00 AP Link SDL transmitter Rev. B3
5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI Rev. E0
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. D0
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot Rev. E0

Commissioning
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. A0

Section 3
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Rev. C0
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots Rev. C0

Table 174: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

4.7.4 BIOS settings

No special BIOS settings are necessary for operation without touch.

To operate Automation Panel 900 panels with a touch screen (Extended Desktop or Dual
Display Clone), the serial interfaces COM C and COM D must be activated in BIOS (BIOS default
setting = disabled).

4.7.5 Windows graphics driver settings

"Notebook" must be defined as output device in the graphics driver.

For more information on this, see chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

4.7.6 Windows touch screen driver settings

For more information on this, see chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 331

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.8 Four Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (AP Link)

An Automation Panel 900 unit is connected to the optional SDL transmitter (AP Link) via an SDL
cable. Three other Automation Panels of the same type are connected to this Automation Panel
and operated via SDL. All four panels show the same content (Display Clone).

USB is supported up to a maximum distance (SDL segment 1 + SDL segment 2) of 30 m on the

first two panels (front and back side). From a distance of 30 m and longer, USB is only available
for the first panel (front and back side). USB devices can only be connected directly to the
Automation Panel (without a hub).

SDL segment 1 8 SDL segment 2 9

max. 40 m max. 40 m
AP Link
connection

SDL segment 3
max. 40 m
USB OK ✓ USB
Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01 Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01 possible

11 SDL segment 4 10
max. 40 m

Automation PC 620
with AP Link
5AC600.SDL0-00
USB USB
not possible not possible
Link: 5DLSDL.1000-00 Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01

Graphics Engine 1
x Internal APC620 panel number independent of segment length ✓ depends on segment length

Figure 153: Configuration - 4 Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (AP Link)

4.8.1 Basic system requirements

The following table shows the possible combinations for the APC620 system unit with CPU
board to implement the configuration shown in the figure above. If the maximum resolution is
limited when making the combination then it is also shown in this table (e.g. for connecting a non-
B&R Automation Panel 900 device).

CPU board with system unit Restriction

5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01 Resolution

5PC600.E855-00
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-01
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-02
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-02

Table 175: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board

332 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

CPU board with system unit Restriction

Resolution
5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01

5PC600.E855-03
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-03
5PC600.E855-04
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-05

Table 175: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board (Forts.)

4.8.2 Link modules

Model number Description Note

5DLSDL.1000-00 Automation Panel Link SDL receiver For Automation
Connection for SDL in, transfer of display data, touch screen, USB 1.1, matrix keys, and service data, Panel 900
24 VDC (screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 sold separately).
5DLSDL.1000-01 Automation Panel Link SDL transceiver For Automation
Connections for SDL in, transfer of display data, touch screen, USB 1.1, matrix keys, and service Panel 900

Commissioning
data, 24 VDC (screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 sold separately). 3 pieces required

Section 3
5AC600.SDL0-00 APC620 Smart Display Link transmitter For Automation PC
For connecting Automation Panels to an APC620 via SDL. 620

Table 176: Link modules for configuration: 4 Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (optional) on 1 line

4.8.3 Cables

Selection of 4 cables from the following tables.

Model number Type Length

5CASDL.0018-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0050-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0050-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0050-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0100-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0100-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0100-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0150-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0150-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0150-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0200-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 20 m
5CASDL.0200-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 20 m
5CASDL.0250-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 25 m

Table 177: Cables for SDL configurations

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 333

 Commissioning • Connection examples

Model number Type Length

5CASDL.0250-30 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 25 m
5CASDL.0300-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-10 SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-13 SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0400-10 SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout 40 m
5CASDL.0400-13 SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout 40 m

Table 177: Cables for SDL configurations

Cable lengths and resolutions for SDL transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment lengths and the maximum
resolution according to the SDL cable used:

Cables Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA SXGA UXGA
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200
5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00
1.8 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01
5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03
5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00
5 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01
5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03
5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-001)
10 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-011)
5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-031)
5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-001) -
15 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-011) -
5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-031) -
5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) -
20
5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) -
5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) - -
25
5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) - -
5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-102) 5CASDL.0300-102) -
30
5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-132) 5CASDL.0300-132)
5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) -
40
5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132)

Table 178: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables

1) See table 179 "Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 335
2) See table 180 "Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 335

334 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 1) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. B0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. B0

Table 179: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 2) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Commissioning
Firmware Name Version Note

Section 3
MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. D0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. D0
5AC600.SDL0-00 AP Link SDL transmitter Rev. B3
5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI Rev. E0
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. D0
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot Rev. E0
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. A0
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Rev. C0
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots Rev. C0

Table 180: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 335

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.8.4 BIOS settings

No special BIOS settings are necessary for operation.

4.8.5 Windows graphics driver settings

"Notebook" must be defined as output device in the graphics driver.

For more information on this, see chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

4.8.6 Windows touch screen driver settings

For more information on this, see chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with
Windows XP Professional", on page 568.

336 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.9 Two Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (onboard) and SDL (AP Link)

An Automation Panel 900 (max. UXGA) is connected to the integrated SDL interface (onboard)
via an SDL cable. A second Automation Panel 900 (max. UXGA) is connected to the optional
SDL transmitter (AP Link) via an SDL cable. The Automation Panels show different content
(Extended Desktop) and can be different types.

SDL segment length

max.40 meters
AP Link Monitor / Panel
connection connection
SDL segment length 0 8
max.40 meters

✓ USB OK ✓ USB OK
Link: 5DLSDL.1000-00 Link: 5DLSDL.1000-00

Automation PC 620

Commissioning
with AP Link
5AC600.SDL0-00

Section 3
Graphics Engine 1
Graphics Engine 2
x Internal APC620 panel number independent of segment length

Figure 154: Configuration - Two Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (onboard) and SDL (AP Link)

4.9.1 Basic system requirements

The following table shows the possible combinations for the APC620 system unit with CPU
board to implement the configuration shown in the figure above. If the maximum resolution is
limited when making the combination then it is also shown in this table (e.g. for connecting a non-
B&R Automation Panel 900 device).

CPU board with system unit Restriction

Resolution
5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01

5PC600.E855-00
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-01
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-02
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-03
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-03
5PC600.E855-04
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-05

Table 181: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 337

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.9.2 Link modules

Model number Description Note

5DLSDL.1000-00 Automation Panel Link SDL receiver For Automation
Connection for SDL in, transfer of display data, touch screen, USB 1.1, matrix keys, and service data, Panel 900
24 VDC (screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 sold separately). 2 pieces required
5AC600.SDL0-00 APC620 Smart Display Link transmitter For Automation PC
For connecting Automation Panels to an APC620 via SDL. 620

Table 182: Link modules for the configuration: 2 Automation Panel 900 units via SDL and SDL (optional)

4.9.3 Cables

Selection of 2 cables from the following tables.

Model number Type Length

5CASDL.0018-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0050-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0050-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0050-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0100-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0100-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0100-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0150-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0150-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0150-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0200-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 20 m
5CASDL.0200-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 20 m
5CASDL.0250-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 25 m
5CASDL.0250-30 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 25 m
5CASDL.0300-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-10 SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-13 SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0400-10 SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout 40 m
5CASDL.0400-13 SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout 40 m

Table 183: Cables for SDL configurations

338 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

Cable lengths and resolutions for SDL transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment lengths and the maximum
resolution according to the SDL cable used:

Cables Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA SXGA UXGA
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200
5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00
1.8 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01
5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03
5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00
5 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01
5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03
5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-001)
10 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-011)
5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-031)
5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-001) -
15 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-011) -

Commissioning
5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-031) -

Section 3
5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) -
20
5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) -
5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) - -
25
5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) - -
5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-102) 5CASDL.0300-102) -
30
5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-132) 5CASDL.0300-132) -
5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) -
40
5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) -

Table 184: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables

1) See table 185 "Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 339
2) See table 186 "Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 340

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 1) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. B0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. B0

Table 185: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 339

 Commissioning • Connection examples

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 2) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. D0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. D0
5AC600.SDL0-00 AP Link SDL transmitter Rev. B3
5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI Rev. E0
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. D0
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot Rev. E0
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. A0
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Rev. C0
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots Rev. C0

Table 186: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

4.9.4 BIOS settings

No special BIOS settings are necessary for operation without touch.

To operate Automation Panel 900 panels with a touch screen (Extended Desktop or Dual
Display Clone), the serial interfaces COM C and COM D must be activated in BIOS (BIOS default
setting = disabled).

4.9.5 Windows graphics driver settings

See chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional", on

page 568.

If all connected Automation Panel 900 panels (line 1 + line 2) should display the same content,
then "Dual Display Clone" mode must be set in the graphics driver (see chapter 4 "Software",
section 5.2.4 "Graphics settings for Dual Display Clone", on page 575).

If all connected Automation Panel 900 panels (line 1 + line 2) should display the same content,
then "Dual Display Clone" mode must be set in the graphics driver (see chapter 4 "Software",
section 5.2.3 "Graphics settings for Extended Desktop", on page 573).

4.9.6 Windows touch screen driver settings

See chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional", on

page 568.

340 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.10 Eight Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (onboard) and SDL (AP Link)

Four Automation Panel 900 units (max. UXGA) are connected to the integrated SDL interface
(onboard) via SDL. Four additional Automation Panel 900 units (max. UXGA) are connected to
the optional SDL transmitter (AP Link). The Automation Panels in each line must be the same
type. The two lines display different content (Extended Desktop), but panels in the same line
show the same content (Display Clone).

USB is supported up to a maximum distance (SDL segment 1 + SDL segment 2) of 30 m on the

first two panels (front and back side). From a distance of 30 m and longer, USB is only available
for the first panel on each line. USB devices can only be connected directly to the Automation
Panel (without hub).

SDL segment 1
max.40 meters
AP Link Monitor / Panel
connection connection
SDL segment length 0 8
max.40 meters

Commissioning
Section 3
SDL segment 2

SDL segment 2
max.40 meters

max.40 meters

USB OK USB OK
Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01 Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01

Automation PC 620 1 9
with AP Link
5AC600.SDL0-00

Graphics Engine 1
Graphics Engine 2
SDL segment 3

SDL segment 3

USB
max.40 meters

max.40 meters

Internal APC620 ✓ USB ✓

x possible Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01 possible
panel number Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01

Independent of segment length

2 10
✓ Depends on segment length

Not supported

USB USB
SDL segment 4

SDL segment 4
max.40 meters

max.40 meters

not possible Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01 not possible

Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01

3 11

USB USB
not possible Link: 5DLSDL.1000-00 not possible
Link: 5DLSDL.1000-00

Figure 155: Configuration - Eight Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (onboard) and SDL (AP Link)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 341

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.10.1 Basic system requirements

The following table shows the possible combinations for the APC620 system unit with CPU
board to implement the configuration shown in the figure above. If the maximum resolution is
limited when making the combination then it is also shown in this table (e.g. for connecting a non-
B&R Automation Panel 900 device).

CPU board with system unit Restriction

Resolution
5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01

5PC600.E855-00
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-01
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-02
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-03
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-03
5PC600.E855-04
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - Max. UXGA
5PC600.X855-05

Table 187: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board

4.10.2 Link modules

Model number Description Note

5DLSDL.1000-00 Automation Panel Link SDL receiver For Automation
Connection for SDL in, transfer of display data, touch screen, USB 1.1, matrix keys, and service data, Panel 900
24 VDC (screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 sold separately). 2 pieces required
5DLSDL.1000-01 Automation Panel Link SDL transceiver For Automation
Connections for SDL in, transfer of display data, touch screen, USB 1.1, matrix keys, and service Panel 900
data, 24 VDC (screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 sold separately). 6 pieces required
5AC600.SDL0-00 APC620 Smart Display Link transmitter For Automation PC
For connecting Automation Panels to an APC620 via SDL. 620
1 pieces required

Table 188: Link modules for configuration: 8 Automation Panel 900 units via SDL and SDL (optional)

342 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.10.3 Cables

Selection of 8 cables from the following tables.

Model number Type Length

5CASDL.0018-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 1.8 m
5CASDL.0050-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0050-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0050-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 5m
5CASDL.0100-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0100-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0100-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 10 m
5CASDL.0150-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0150-01 SDL cable with 45° plug for fixed type of layout 15 m

Commissioning
Section 3
5CASDL.0150-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 15 m
5CASDL.0200-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 20 m
5CASDL.0200-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 20 m
5CASDL.0250-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 25 m
5CASDL.0250-30 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 25 m
5CASDL.0300-00 SDL cable for a fixed type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-03 SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-10 SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0300-13 SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout 30 m
5CASDL.0400-10 SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout 40 m
5CASDL.0400-13 SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout 40 m

Table 189: Cables for SDL configurations

Cable lengths and resolutions for SDL transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment lengths and the maximum
resolution according to the SDL cable used:

Cables Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA SXGA UXGA
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200
5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00
1.8 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01
5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03

Table 190: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 343

 Commissioning • Connection examples

Cables Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA SXGA UXGA
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200
5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00
5 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01
5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03
5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-001)
10 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-011)
5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-031)
5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-001) -
15 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-011) -
5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-031) -
5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) 5CASDL.0200-001) -
20
5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) 5CASDL.0200-031) -
5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) 5CASDL.0250-001) - -
25
5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) 5CASDL.0250-031) - -
5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-001) 5CASDL.0300-102) 5CASDL.0300-102) -
30
5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-031) 5CASDL.0300-132) 5CASDL.0300-132) -
5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) 5CASDL.0400-102) -
40
5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) 5CASDL.0400-132) -

Table 190: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables (Forts.)

1) See table 191 "Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 344
2) See table 192 "Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 345

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 1) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. B0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. B0

Table 191: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

344 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 2) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the
BIOS description.
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Supported starting with the APC620 /
SDLR FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL receiver and v 01.04 PPC 700 Firmware upgrade (MTCX,
transceiver SDLR, SDLT) V01.10, available in the
download area of the B&R homepage.
SDLT FPGA Firmware on the AP Link SDL transmitter v 00.02
Hardware Name Revision Note
5DLSDL.1000-00 AP Link SDL receiver Rev. D0
5DLSDL.1000-01 AP Link SDL transceiver Rev. D0
5AC600.SDL0-00 AP Link SDL transmitter Rev. B3
5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI Rev. E0
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. D0
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot Rev. E0

Commissioning
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. A0

Section 3
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Rev. C0
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots Rev. C0

Table 192: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

4.10.4 BIOS settings

No special BIOS settings are necessary for operation without touch.

To operate Automation Panel 900 panels with a touch screen (Extended Desktop or Dual
Display Clone), the serial interfaces COM C and COM D must be activated in BIOS (BIOS default
setting = disabled).

4.10.5 Windows graphics driver settings

See chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional", on

page 568.

If all connected Automation Panel 900 panels (line 1 + line 2) should display the same content,
then "Dual Display Clone" mode must be set in the graphics driver (see chapter 4 "Software",
section 5.2.4 "Graphics settings for Dual Display Clone", on page 575).

4.10.6 Windows touch screen driver settings

See chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional", on

page 568.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 345

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.11 Six AP900 and two AP800 devices via SDL (onboard) and SDL (AP Link)

Three Automation Panel 900 (max. UXGA) units and one Automation Panel 800 are connected
to the integrated SDL interface (onboard) via SDL. Additionally, three Automation Panel 900
(max. UXGA) units and one Automation Panel 800 are operated on the optional SDL
transmitters. The Automation Panels in each line must be the same type. The two lines display
different content (Extended Desktop), but displays in the same line show the same content
(Display Clone).

USB is supported up to a maximum distance (segment 1 + segment 2) of 30 m on the first two

displays. Starting at a distance of 30 m, USB is only available on the first display (front and back)
up to a maximum of 40 m. USB devices can only be connected directly to Automation Panel 900
devices (without a hub).

SDL Segment 1
max.40 Meter
AP Link Monitor / panel
connection connection
SDL Segemt1 0 8
max.40 meters
SDL Segment 2

SDL Segment 2
max.40 meters

max.40 meters

✓ USB OK ✓ USB OK
Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01 Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01

Automation PC 620 1 9
with AP Link
5AC600.SDL0-00

Graphics Engine 1
Graphics Engine 2
SDL Segment 3

SDL Segment 3
max.40 meters

max.40 meters

Internal APC620 ✓ USB ✓ USB

x possible possible
panel number Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01 Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01

Independent of segment length

2 10
Depends on segment length

Not supported
SDL Segment 4

USB not USB not

max.40 meters
SDL Segment 4
max.40 meters

possible possible
Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01 Link: 5DLSDL.1000-01

4 3 6 11 13

5 USB not 12 USB not

possible possible
Automation Panel 800 Automation Panel 800

Figure 156: Configuration - Six AP900 and two AP800 devices via SDL (onboard) and SDL (AP Link)

346 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.11.1 Basic system requirements

The following table shows the possible combinations for the APC620 system unit with CPU
board to implement the configuration shown in the figure above. If the maximum resolution is
limited when making the combination then it is also shown in this table.

If an Automation Panel 800 and an Automation Panel 900 should be connected on the same line,
the devices must have the same display type.

CPU board with system unit Restriction

Resolution
5PC600.SX01-00 5PC600.SX02-00 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SF03-00 5PC600.SX05-00 5PC600.SX05-01

5PC600.E855-00
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - max. XGA
5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.E855-01
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - max. XGA
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.E855-02
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - max. XGA
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.E855-03
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - max. XGA

Commissioning
5PC600.X855-03

Section 3
5PC600.E855-04
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - max. XGA
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.E855-05
- ✓ - ✓ ✓ - max. XGA
5PC600.X855-05

Table 193: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board

4.11.2 Link modules

Model number Description Note

5DLSDL.1000-01 Automation Panel Link SDL transceiver For Automation
Connections for SDL in, transfer of display data, touch screen, USB 1.1, matrix keys, and service Panel 900
data, 24 VDC (screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 sold separately). 6 pieces required
5AC600.SDL0-00 APC620 Smart Display Link transmitter For Automation PC
For connecting Automation Panels to an APC620 via SDL. 620
1 pieces required

Table 194: Link modules for configuration: 6 Automation Panel 900 units via SDL and SDL (optional)

4.11.3 Cables

How to select an SDL cable for connecting the AP900 display to the AP900 display 4.3 "An
Automation Panel 900 via SDL (onboard)".

How to select an SDL cable for connecting the AP800 display to the AP900 display4.4 "An
Automation Panel 800 via SDL (onboard)".

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 347

 Commissioning • Connection examples

Cable lengths and resolutions for SDL transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment lengths and the maximum
resolution according to the SDL cable used:

Cables Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA SXGA UXGA
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200
- - 5CASDL.0018-00 - -
- - 5CASDL.0018-01 - -
1.8
- - 5CASDL.0018-20 - -
- - 5CASDL.0018-03 - -
- - 5CASDL.0050-00 - -
- - 5CASDL.0050-01 - -
5
- - 5CASDL.0050-02 - -
- - 5CASDL.0050-03 - -
- - 5CASDL.0100-00 - -
- - 5CASDL.0100-01 - -
10
- - 5CASDL.0100-02 - -
- - 5CASDL.0100-03 - -
- - 5CASDL.0150-00 - -
- - 5CASDL.0150-01 - -
15
- - 5CASDL.0150-02 - -
- - 5CASDL.0150-03 - -
- - 5CASDL.0200-001) - -
20 - - 5CASDL.0200-021) - -
- - 5CASDL.0200-031) - -
- - 5CASDL.0250-001) - -
25 - - 5CASDL.0250-021) - -
- - 5CASDL.0250-031) - -
- - 5CASDL.0300-101) - -
30 - - 5CASDL.0300-132) - -
- - 5CASDL.0300-302) - -
- - 5CASDL.0400-102) - -
40 - - 5CASDL.0400-132) - -
5CASDL.0400-302)

Table 195: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables

1) See table 196 "Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 348
2) See table 197 "Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)", on page 349

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 1) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the BIOS
description.
Supported starting with the APC620 / PPC 700
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Firmware upgrade (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT) V01.10,
available in the download area of the B&R
homepage.

Table 196: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

348 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection examples

The cable types and resolutions shown with a footnote 2) in the previous table can only be
implemented starting with the following firmware and hardware versions:

Firmware Name Version Note

MTCX FPGA Firmware on the APC620 v 01.15 The version is read from BIOS - see the BIOS
description.
Supported starting with the APC620 / PPC 700
MTCX PX32 Firmware on the APC620 v 01.55 Firmware upgrade (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT) V01.10,
available in the download area of the B&R
homepage.
Hardware Name Revision Note
5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI Rev. E0 -
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. D0 -
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot Rev. E0 -
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot Rev. A0 -
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot Rev. C0 -
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots Rev. C0 -

Commissioning
Table 197: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment (equalizer)

Section 3
4.11.4 BIOS settings

No special BIOS settings are necessary for operation without touch.

To operate Automation Panel 900 panels with a touch screen (Extended Desktop or Dual
Display Clone), the serial interfaces COM C and COM D must be activated in BIOS (BIOS default
setting = disabled).

4.11.5 Windows graphics driver settings

See chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional", on

page 568.

If all connected Automation Panel 900 panels and Automation Panel 800 panels (line 1 + line
2) should display the same content, then "Dual Display Clone" mode must be set in the graphics
driver (see chapter 4 "Software", section 5.2.4 "Graphics settings for Dual Display Clone", on
page 575).

4.11.6 Windows touch screen driver settings

See chapter 4 "Software", section 5 "Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional", on

page 568.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 349

 Commissioning • Connection examples

4.12 Internal numbering of extension units in AP800 devices

An extension unit for an AP800 device is numbered like another device. The numbering of the
extension units starts from the display unit and goes in the counter-clockwise direction; all
extension unit slots that are not used are left out.
The following graphic shows numbering examples.

1 0 3 0 2 1 0 2

2 1 Automation Panel 800

Automation Panel 800 Automation Panel 800

Figure 157: Examples - internal numbering of the extension units

350 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Configuration of a SATA RAID array

5. Configuration of a SATA RAID array

You must enter the BIOS "RAID Configuration Utility" in order to make the necessary settings.
After the POST, enter <Ctrl+S> or <F4> to open RAID BIOS.

SiI 3512A SATARaid BIOS Verison 4.3.79

Copyright (C) 1997-2006 Silicon Image, Inc.

Press <Ctrl+S> or F4 to enter RAID utility

0 ST96023AS 55 GB
1 ST96023AS 55 GB

Figure 158: Open the RAID Configuration Utility

Commissioning
Section 3
RAID Configuration Utility - Silicon Image Inc. Copyright (C) 2006

Create RAID set

Delete RAID set Press " Enter" to create RAID
Rebuild Mirrored set set
Resolve Conflicts
Low Level Format

* 0 PM ST96023AS 55GB
1 SM ST96023AS 55GB

Select Menu
ESC Previous Menu
Enter Select
Ctrl-E Exit

* First HDD

Figure 159: RAID Configuration Utility - Menu

The following keys can be used after entering the BIOS setup:

Key Function
Cursor ↑ Go to previous item.
Cursor ↓ Go to the next item.
Enter Select an item or open a submenu.

Table 198: BIOS-relevant keys in the RAID Configuration Utility

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 351

 Commissioning • Configuration of a SATA RAID array

Key Function
ESC Go back to previous menu.
Ctrl+E Exit setup and save the changed settings.

Table 198: BIOS-relevant keys in the RAID Configuration Utility

5.1 Create RAID set

RAID Configuration Utility - Silicon Image Inc. Copyright (C) 2006

Create RAID set

Delete RAID set Striped = RAID 0
Rebuild Mirrored set Striped
Resolve Conflicts Mirrored
Low Level Format

* 0 PM ST96023AS 55GB
1 SM ST96023AS 55GB

Select Menu
ESC Previous Menu
Enter Select
Ctrl-E Exit

* First HDD

Figure 160: RAID Configuration Utility - Menu

The RAID system can be recreated as "Striped" = RAID0 or "Mirrored" = RAID1 using the menu
"Create RAID set".

352 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Configuration of a SATA RAID array

5.1.1 Create RAID set - Striped

RAID Configuration Utility - Silicon Image Inc. Copyright (C) 2006

Auto Configuration Press "Enter" to automatica-

Manual Configuration lly create a striped
(RAID 0) set

Striped size is 16K

First drive is drive 0
Second drive is drive 1

* 0 PM ST96023AS 55GB
1 SM ST96023AS 55GB

Select Menu
ESC Previous Menu
Enter Select

Commissioning
Ctrl-E Exit

Section 3
* First HDD

Figure 161: RAID Configuration Utility - Create RAID set - Striped

Auto Configuration

Auto Configuration optimizes all settings.

Manual Configuration

It is possible to specify the first and second HDD as well as the "Chunk Size" (= block size,
application-dependent).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 353

 Commissioning • Configuration of a SATA RAID array

5.1.2 Create RAID set - Mirrored

RAID Configuration Utility - Silicon Image Inc. Copyright (C) 2006

Auto Configuration Press "Enter" to automatica-

Manual Configuration lly create a mirrored
(RAID 1) set

For migrating single HDD

into RAID 1 set, use Manual
configuration instead

* 0 PM ST96023AS 55GB
1 SM ST96023AS 55GB

Select Menu
ESC Previous Menu
Enter Select
Ctrl-E Exit

* First HDD

Figure 162: RAID Configuration Utility - Create RAID set - Mirrored

Auto Configuration

Auto Configuration optimizes all settings.

Manual Configuration

It is possible to specify the "Source" and "Target" HDD, and also to specify whether a rebuild
(mirror) should be performed immediately (approx. 50 minutes).

354 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Configuration of a SATA RAID array

5.2 Delete RAID set

RAID Configuration Utility - Silicon Image Inc. Copyright (C) 2006

Create RAID set

Delete RAID set
Rebuild Mirrored set
Resolve Conflicts Set0
Low Level Format

0 PM ST96023AS 55GB
1 SM ST96023AS 55GB

*Set0 SiI Striped Set <PM> 111GB

0 ST96023AS Chunk Size 16k Select Menu
1 ST96023AS Chunk Size 16k ESC Previous Menu
Enter Select

Commissioning
Ctrl-E Exit

Section 3
* First HDD

Figure 163: RAID Configuration Utility - Delete RAID set

An existing RAID set can be deleted using the menu "Delete RAID set".

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 355

 Commissioning • Configuration of a SATA RAID array

5.3 Rebuild mirrored set

RAID Configuration Utility - Silicon Image Inc. Copyright (C) 2006

Create RAID set

Delete RAID set Rebuild help
Rebuild Mirrored set
Resolve Conflicts
Low Level Format

0 PM ST96023AS 55GB
1 SM ST96023AS 55GB

* Set0 SiI Mirrored Set <PM> 55GB

0 ST96023AS Current Select Menu
1 ST96023AS Current ESC Previous Menu
Enter Select
Ctrl-E Exit

* First HDD

Figure 164: RAID Configuration Utility - Rebuild mirrored set

The "Rebuild mirrored set" menu can be used to restart a rebuild procedure in a RAID 1 network
if an error occurs, after first interrupting the rebuild procedure or when exchanging a hard disk.

If "onlinerebuild" is selected, then the rebuild is executed during operation after the system is
booted. E.g. an event pop-up is displayed by the installed SATA RAID configuration program:
SATARaid detected a new event and the rebuild is started. The entire rebuild lasts
approximately 50 minutes.

If "offlinerebuild" is selected, then a rebuild is performed immediately before starting the

operating system (lasts approximately 30 minutes).

356 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Configuration of a SATA RAID array

5.4 Resolve conflicts

RAID Configuration Utility - Silicon Image Inc. Copyright (C) 2006

Create RAID set

Delete RAID set Help for resolving
Rebuild Mirrored set conflicts
Resolve Conflicts
Low Level Format

0 PM ST96023AS 55GB
1 SM ST96023AS 55GB

* Set0 SiI Mirrored Set <PM> 55GB

0 ST96023AS Current Select Menu
1 ST96023AS Current ESC Previous Menu
Enter Select

Commissioning
Ctrl-E Exit

Section 3
* First HDD

Figure 165: RAID Configuration Utility - Resolve conflicts

Conflicts in a RAID set can be resolved using the "Resolve conflicts" menu. This function is only
available if the status of the hard disk is "conflict".

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 357

 Commissioning • Configuration of a SATA RAID array

5.5 Low level format

RAID Configuration Utility - Silicon Image Inc. Copyright (C) 2006

Create RAID set

Delete RAID set Select HDD to be formatted
Rebuild Mirrored set
Resolve Conflicts
Low Level Format
0 PM
1 SM

0 PM ST96023AS 55GB
1 SM ST96023AS 55GB

Select Menu
ESC Previous Menu
Enter Select
Ctrl-E Exit

* First HDD

Figure 166: RAID Configuration Utility - Low level format

Individual hard disks can be configured using the "Low Level Format" menu. This can only be
done if a RAID set is not configured. A low level format of a hard disk takes approx. 40 minutes.

358 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection of USB peripheral devices

6. Connection of USB peripheral devices

Warning!
Peripheral USB devices can be connected to the USB interfaces. Due to the vast
number of USB devices available on the market, B&R cannot guarantee their
performance. B&R does ensure the performance of all USB devices that they
provide.

6.1 Local on the APC620

Many different peripheral USB devices can be connected to the 2 or 4 (APC embedded) USB
interfaces. The maximum current load values and transfer speeds can be found in Sections
"USB port", on page 133 and "USB connection (only APC620 embedded)", on page 134.

Commissioning
Section 3
2.0
USB
USB port expansion
e.g. Hub

USB 2.0

USB memory media

e.g. flash drive
USB 2.0

.1
B1
US

US
B1
.1

USB drives
e.g. CD ROM drive

USB input devices USB display devices

e.g. keyboard e.g. mouse

Figure 167: Local connection of USB peripheral devices on the APC620

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 359

 Commissioning • Connection of USB peripheral devices

6.2 Remote connection to Automation Panel 900 via DVI

Many different peripheral USB devices can be connected to the 2 or 3 USB interfaces on the
Automation Panel 900. These can each handle a load of 500 mA. The maximum transfer rate is
USB 2.0.

Information:
Only end devices (no hubs) can be connected to the Automation Panel 900.

DVI

USB 2.0

USB 2.0
RS232
USB memory media
e.g. flash drive
USB 2.0
B 1.1
US

US
B1
.1

USB drives
USB input devices USB display devices e.g. CD ROM drive
e.g. keyboard e.g. mouse

Figure 168: Remote connection of USB peripheral devices to the APC900 via DVI

360 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Connection of USB peripheral devices

6.3 Remote connection to Automation Panel 800/900 via SDL

Many different peripheral USB devices can be connected to the 2 or 3 USB interfaces on
Automation Panel 900 and/or USB connections on the Automation Panel 800 devices. These
can each handle a load of 500 mA. The maximum transfer rate is USB 1.1.

Information:
Only end devices (no hubs) can be connected to the Automation Panel 800/900.

SDL (USB 1.1)

Commissioning
USB 1.1

Section 3
USB memory media
e.g. flash drive
USB 1.1
B 1.1
US

US
B1
.1

USB drives
USB input devices USB display devices e.g. CD ROM drive
e.g. keyboard e.g. mouse

Figure 169: Remote connection of USB peripheral devices to the APC800/900 via SDL

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 361

 Commissioning • General instructions for performing temperature tests

7. General instructions for performing temperature tests

The purpose of these instructions is to explain general procedures for performing application-
specific temperature tests with B&R industrial PCs or Power Panels. However, these instructions
are meant to serve only as a guideline.

7.1 Procedure

In order to obtain accurate results, the testing conditions should match the conditions in the field.
This means that for the duration of the temperature tests, the target application should be
running, the PC should be installed in the control cabinet that will be used, etc.

Additionally, a temperature sensor should be installed for the device being tested to provide live
monitoring of the ambient temperature. In order to obtain accurate measurements, this sensor
should be mounted at a distance of 5 to 10 cm from the B&R industrial PC, near the air intake
(not near the exhaust).

All B&R industrial PCs and Power Panels are equipped with internal temperature sensors. These
are installed in different locations for each series. The number of sensors and the temperature
limits also vary from series to series.
Information about the locations of temperature sensors and the maximum specified values can
be found in section "Temperature sensor locations", on page 791.

To ensure a reliable evaluation of the temperature situation, a minimum of 8 hours are

recommended for testing.

7.2 Evaluating the temperatures in Windows operating systems

7.2.1 Evaluation using B&R Control Center

The B&R Control Center can be used to evaluate the temperatures. The temperatures can be
viewed on the "Temperatures" tab. The B&R Control Center can be downloaded at no cost from
the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com). The B&R Control Center
uses the B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI).

362 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • General instructions for performing temperature tests

Commissioning
Section 3
Figure 170: B&R Control Center

A new application can be created if a historic recording of the data is required.

Information:
There are SDK's (e.g. the ADI .NET SDK) available on the B&R website (www.br-
automation.com) that can be helpful in creating a new application.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 363

 Commissioning • General instructions for performing temperature tests

7.2.2 Evaluation using the BurnIn tool from Passmark

If a new application is not created for evaluating the temperatures, B&R recommends using the
BurnIn Test software tool from the company Passmark.

Standard and Professional versions of the BurnIn tool are available. In addition to the software
package, there are also various loopback adapters (serial, parallel, USB, etc.) and test
CDs/DVDs available. The exact software and loopback adapters used will determine the
corresponding load that can be generated on the system and peripheral devices.

Information:
Loopback adapters are also available from Passmark. More information can be
found at www.passmark.com.

The following screenshots are based on Passmark BurnIn Pro Version V4 and an APC810 2-slot
with DVD.

Figure 171: Settings for Passmark BurnIn Pro V4 with an APC810 2-slot with DVD

364 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • General instructions for performing temperature tests

Commissioning
Section 3
Figure 172: Test overview of an APC810 2-slot with DVD

The respective test properties may need to be fine tuned depending on the availability of a
loopback adapter and DVDs.

Information:
If there is no USB loopback adapter available, USB flash drives can also be used.
The USB flash drives must be available in Windows as formatted drives. The test
USB must then be deselected and the USB flash drives must be configured in the
disk properties.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 365

 Commissioning • General instructions for performing temperature tests

Information:
Serial loopback adapters are relatively easy to create yourself. Simple connect
several pins on the serial interface with wires.

7.3 Evaluating the temperatures in an operating system other than Windows

For applications that don't use Windows, the temperatures can be evaluated using the B&R
implementation guide. In addition to the implementation guide, there are also programs available
in MS-DOS.

The implementation guide only describes the device-specific functions and not the main
functions of the sample programs.

If code from the sample programs is used, please observe the notes in the implementation guide
regarding the TODO statements, I/O access functions, etc.

Information:
Sample programs and implementation guides for any B&R industrial PC or Power
Panel can be downloaded free of charge from the B&R website (www.br-
automation.com).

7.4 Evaluating the measurement results

The maximum temperature value recorded by each sensor must not exceed the temperature
limits specified in the user's manuals.
If the temperature tests cannot be performed in a climate controlled chamber, they can also be
performed in an office environment. In this case, however, it is necessary to measure the
ambient temperature. Experience at B&R has shown that values measured on passive systems
(systems without a fan kit) can be projected linearly based on the ambient temperature. In order
to be able to project the temperature values for systems with a fan kit, the fans must be running.
It is also important to consider the speed, etc.

If the temperature tests are performed in a climate controlled chamber with fans, the devices will
be cooled by these fans, and the results will be skewed. The measurement results for passive
devices would therefore be unusable. In order to obtain accurate results in climate controlled
chambers with fans, the chamber fans must be turned off and the device must be allowed to run
for a sufficient amount of time (several hours) before beginning the test.

366 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • General instructions for performing temperature tests

7.4.1 Example using an APC810 2-slot

The following example is only valid as long as the instructions for installation and mounting
orientation provided in the user's manual are followed.

Temperature sensor Measured temperature Projected temperature

Ambient temperature 20°C 35°C 45°C
CPU 48°C 63°C 73°C
CPU board 51°C 66°C 76°C
Board I/O 51°C 66°C 76°C
Board ETH2 52°C 67°C 77°C
Board power supply 51°C 66°C 76°C
ETH2 65°C 80°C 90°C
Power supply 51°C 66°C 76°C

Table 199: Evaluation example using an APC810 2-slot

Commissioning
Section 3

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 367

 Commissioning • Compatibility / improvement from 855GME (XTX) to 855GME (ETX)

8. Compatibility / improvement from 855GME (XTX) to 855GME

(ETX)

The following table shows the compatibilities and improvements from 855GME (XTX)
5PC600.X855-0x to 855GME (ETX) 5PC600.E855-0x CPU boards.

Property Compatibility / improvement

Hardware compatibility Yes
Power Equal to
Software compatibility
Hardware driver Yes
BIOS No - AMI BIOS
Windows XP Professional No - Reinstall required
Windows XP Embedded No - New image required (see model number overview)
Windows Embedded Standard 2009 No - New image required (see model number overview)
Automation Runtime No - New version of Automation Runtime required
Improvements No limitation of ETH1 cable length
Better and more even distribution of IRQ load and distribution on the PCI bus
USB 2.0 is already supported when booting
Easier configuration of an "Exclusive PCI IRQ"
Support for creating custom boot logos
Better detection of connected display devices (e.g. Automation Panel 800, Automation Panel 900,
standard TFT monitor, etc.)

Table 200: Compatibility / improvements from 855GME (XTX) to 855GME (ETX)

368 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Commissioning • Known problems / issues

9. Known problems / issues

The following issue for the APC620 devices is known:

• Using two different types of CompactFlash cards can cause problems in Automation PCs
and Panel PCs. This can result in one of the two cards not being detected during system
startup. This is caused by varying startup speeds. CompactFlash cards with older
technology require significantly more time during system startup than CompactFlash
cards with newer technology. This behavior occurs near the limits of the time frame
provided for startup. The problem described above can occur because the startup time
for the CompactFlash cards fluctuates due to the variance of the components being used.
Depending on the CompactFlash cards being used, this error might never, sometimes or
always occur.
• During daisy chain operation of multiple AP800/AP900 devices via SDL, it's possible that
the touch controller status shows a red "X" in the Control Center applet for the touch
screen driver when the touch controller is detected. The functionality of the touch system
is not affected by this. This can be avoided by setting a panel locking time of 50 ms. The

Commissioning
panel locking time can be configured with the B&R Key Editor.

Section 3
• Beginning with Revision E0 of the 5AC600.SSDI-00 drive, the simultaneous operation
with a CompactFlash card in the CompactFlash1 slot is no longer recommended since
the CompactFlash card is only operated in UDMA2 mode. Revision E0 of the
5AC600.SSDI-00 drive can only be used in standalone operation.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 369

 Commissioning • Known problems / issues

370 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Chapter 4 • Software

1. BIOS options

The available BIOS settings in various CPU boards 815E (ETX), 855GME (ETX) and 855GME
(XTX) are described in the following sections.

1.1 815E (ETX) BIOS description

Information:
• The following diagrams and BIOS menu items including descriptions refer to
BIOS version 1.23. It is therefore possible that these diagrams and BIOS
descriptions do not correspond with the installed BIOS version.
• The setup defaults are the settings recommended by B&R. The setup defaults
are dependant on the DIP switch configuration on the baseboard (see section
1.1.10 "Profile overview - BIOS default settings - 815E (ETX)", on page 416).

Section 4
1.1.1 General information

Software
BIOS stands for "Basic Input Output System". It is the most basic standardized communication
between the user and the system (hardware). The BIOS system used in the Automation PC 620
systems is produced by Phoenix.
The BIOS Setup Utility lets you modify basic system configuration settings. These settings are
stored in CMOS and in EEPROM (as a backup).

The CMOS data is buffered by a battery, and remains in the APC620 even when the power is
turned off (no 24 VDC supply) .

1.1.2 BIOS setup and boot procedure

BIOS is immediately activated when switching on the power supply of the Automation PC 620
system or pressing the power button. The system checks if the setup data from the EEPROM is
"OK". If the data is "OK", then it is transferred to the CMOS. If the data is "not OK", then the
CMOS data is checked for validity. An error message is output if the CMOS data contains errors
and the boot procedure can be continued by pressing the <F1> key. To prevent the error
message from appearing at each restart, open the BIOS setup by pressing the <F2> key and re-
save the settings.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 371

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS reads the system configuration information in CMOS RAM, checks the system, and
configures it using the Power On Self Test (POST).

When these "preliminaries" are finished, BIOS seeks an operating system in the data storage
devices available (hard drive, floppy drive, etc.). BIOS launches the operating system and hands
over control of system operations to it.

To enter BIOS setup, the F2 key must be pressed as soon as the following message appears on
the lower margin of the display (during POST):

"Press <F2> to enter SETUP"

PhoenixBIOS 4.0 Release 6.1

Copyright 1985-2003 Phoenix Technologies Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
<1BR1R123> Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-Elektronik C1.23

CPU = Mobile Intel(R) Celeeron(TM) CPU 733MHz

126M System RAM Passed
256K Cache SRAM Passed
System BIOS shadowed
Video BIOS shadowed
UMB upper limit segment address: E871

Press <F2> to enter SETUP

Figure 173: 815E (ETX) BIOS diagnostic screen

372 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Summary screen

After the POST, the summary screen displays the most important system characteristics.

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utilitiy

CPU Type : Mobile Intel(R) Celeron(TM) CPU 733MHz

CPU Speed : 733 MHz
System ROM : E871 - FFFF
System Memory : 640 KB BIOS Date : 08/08/06
Extended Memory : 259584 KB
Shadow Ram : 384 KB COM Ports : 0378 02F8
Cache Ram : 256 KB LPT Ports : 0378
Display Type : EGA \ VGA
PS/2 Mouse : Not Installed
Hard Disk 0 : None
Hard Disk 1 : None
Hard Disk 2 : None
Hard Disk 3 : None

Figure 174: 815E (ETX) BIOS Summary screen

1.1.3 BIOS setup keys

The following keys are active during the POST:

Key Function

Section 4
Software
F2 Enters the BIOS setup menu.
ESC Cues the boot menu. Lists all bootable devices that are connected to the system. With cursor ↑ and
cursor ↓ and by pressing <ENTER>, select the device from which will be booted.
<Spacebar> Pressing the spacebar skips the system RAM check.
<Pause> Pressing the <pause> key stops the POST. Press any other key to resume the POST.

Table 201: Keys relevant to 815E (ETX) BIOS during POST

The following keys can be used after entering the BIOS setup:

Key Function
Cursor ↑ Moves to the previous item.
Cursor ↓ Go to the next item.
Cursor ← Move to the item on the left.
Cursor → Move to the item on the right.
<ESC> Exits the submenu.
PageUp ↑ Moves the cursor to the top of the current BIOS setup page.
PageDown ↓ Moves the cursor to the bottom of the current BIOS setup page.

Table 202: Keys relevant to 815E (ETX) BIOS

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 373

 Software • BIOS options

Key Function
<F1> or <Alt+H> Opens a help window showing the key assignments.
<F5> or <-> Scrolls to the previous option for the selected BIOS setting.
<F6> or <+> or <spacebar> Scrolls to the next option for the selected BIOS setting.
<F9> Loads setup defaults for the current BIOS setup screen.
<F10> Saves settings and closes BIOS setup.
<Enter> Opens submenu for a BIOS setup menu item, or displays the configurable values of a BIOS setup item.

Table 202: Keys relevant to 815E (ETX) BIOS (Forts.)

The following sections explain the individual BIOS setup menu items in detail.

BIOS setup menu item Function From

page
Main The basic system configurations (e.g. time, date, hard disk parameters) can be set in this 375
menu.
Advanced Advanced BIOS options such as cache areas, PnP, keyboard repeat rate, as well as 384
settings specific to B&R integrated hardware, can be configured here.
Security For setting up the system's security functions. 407
Power Setup of various APM (Advanced Power Management) options. 409
Boot The boot order can be set here. 414
Exit To end the BIOS setup. 415

Table 203: Overview of 815E (ETX) BIOS menu items

374 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.1.4 Main

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

Item Specific Help

System Time: [08:26:59]
System Date: [08/08/2006]
<Tab>, <Shift-Tab>, or
IDE Channel 0 Master [None] <Enter> selects field.
IDE Channel 0 Slave [None]
IDE Channel 1 Master [None]
IDE Channel 1 Slave [None]

SMART Device Monitoring: [Enabled]

System Memory: 640 KB

Extended Memory: 253 MB

BIOS Date: 08/08/06

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 175: 815E (ETX) Main Menu

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
System Time This is the current system time setting. Changes the Set the system time in the format (hh:mm:ss).
The time is buffered by a battery (CMOS System time
battery) after the system has been
switched off.
System Date This is the current system date setting. Changes the Set the system date in the format (mm:dd:yyyy).
The time is buffered by a battery (CMOS system date
battery) after the system has been
switched off.
IDE channel 0 The drive in the system that is connected Enter Opens the submenu
master to the IDE primary master port is See "IDE channel 0 master", on page 376.
configured here.
IDE channel 0 slave The drive in the system that is connected Enter Opens the submenu
to the IDE primary slave port is configured See "IDE channel 0 slave", on page 378.
here.
IDE channel 1 The drive in the system that is connected Enter Opens the submenu
master to the IDE secondary master port is See "IDE channel 1 master", on page 380.
configured here.
IDE channel 1 slave The drive in the system that is connected Enter Opens the submenu
to the IDE secondary slave port is See "IDE channel 1 slave", on page 382.
configured here.

Table 204: 815E (ETX) Main setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 375

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Smart device S.M.A.R.T. (Self Monitoring Analysis and Enabled Activates this function. In the future, a message
monitoring Reporting Technology) is implemented in regarding impending errors is produced.
the today's hard drives. This technology
allows you to detect reading or rotational Disabled Deactivates this function.
problems with the hard drive, and much
more.
System Memory Displays the amount of main memory None -
installed. Between 0 and 640 KB.
Extended memory Displays the available main memory from None -
the first MB to the maximum memory
capacity.
BIOS Date BIOS creation date None -

Table 204: 815E (ETX) Main setting options (Forts.)

IDE channel 0 master

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Main

IDE Channel 0 Master [None] Item Specific Help

Type: [Auto] User = you enter

parameters of hard-disk
Multi-Sector Transfers: [Disabled] drive installed at this
LBA Mode Control: [Enabled] connection.
32 Bit I/O: [Disabled] Auto = autotypes
Transfer Mode: [Standard] hard-disk drive
Ultra DMA Mode: [Disabled] installed here.
SMART Monitoring: [Disabled] CD-ROM = a CD-ROM drive
is installed here.
ATAPI Removeable =
removeable disk drive
is installed here.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 176: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Master

376 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Type The type of drive connected to the primary Auto Automatic recognition of the drive and setup of
master is configured here. appropriate values.
User Manual setup of the drive (number of cylinders,
heads, and sectors).
Other ATAPI Use this option for IDE disk drives that are not
mentioned here.
CD-ROM CD-ROM = CD-ROM drive
ATAPI removable The removable media drive is treated as a hard
drive or floppy drive.
IDE removable The IDE removable drive is treated as a hard
drive.
Multi-sector transfer This option determines the number of Disabled Disables this function.
sectors per block. Only possible when
manually setting up the drive. 2, 4, 8 or 16 sectors Number of sectors per block.

LBA mode control This option activates the logical block Disabled Disables this function.
addressing for IDE. This function enables
support of drives larger than 540 MB. Enabled Enables this function.
Only possible when manually setting up
the drive.
32-bit I/O This function enables 32-bit data transfer. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
Transfer mode The communication path between the Default Default setting.
primary master drive and the system
memory is defined here. Only possible Fast PIO 1 - Fast PIO 4 / Manual configuration of PIO mode.
when manually setting up the drive. DMA2

Ultra DMA mode The data transfer rate to and from the Disabled Disables this function. Do not use UDMA mode.
primary master drive is defined here. The
Mode 0 - Mode 5 Manual setting option for UDMA mode.

Section 4
DMA mode must be activated in the

Software
Windows device manager in order to
guarantee maximum performance. Only
possible when manually setting up the
drive.
SMART monitoring Indicates whether the primary master Disabled No drive support, and function is deactivated.
drive supports SMART technology.
Enabled Drive support present, and function is activated.

Table 205: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Master setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 377

 Software • BIOS options

IDE channel 0 slave

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Main

IDE Channel 0 Slave [None] Item Specific Help

Type: [Auto] User = you enter

parameters of hard-disk
Multi-Sector Transfers: [Disabled] drive installed at this
LBA Mode Control: [Enabled] connection.
32 Bit I/O: [Disabled] Auto = autotypes
Transfer Mode: [Standard] hard-disk drive
Ultra DMA Mode: [Disabled] installed here.
SMART Monitoring: [Disabled] CD-ROM = a CD-ROM drive
is installed here.
ATAPI Removeable =
removeable disk drive
is installed here.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 177: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 0

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Type The type of drive connected to the primary Auto Automatic recognition of the drive and setup of
slave is configured here. appropriate values.
User Manual setup of the drive (number of cylinders,
heads, and sectors).
Other ATAPI Use this option for IDE disk drives that are not
mentioned here.
CD-ROM CD-ROM = CD-ROM drive
ATAPI removable The removable media drive is treated as a hard
drive or floppy drive.
IDE removable The IDE removable drive is treated as a hard
drive.
Multi-sector transfer This option determines the number of Disabled Disables this function.
sectors per block. Only possible when
manually setting up the drive. 2, 4, 8 or 16 sectors Number of sectors per block.

LBA mode control This option activates the logical block Disabled Disables this function.
addressing for IDE. This function enables
support of drives larger than 540 MB. Enabled Enables this function.
Only possible when manually setting up
the drive.

Table 206: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Slave setting options

378 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

32-bit I/O This function enables 32-bit data transfer. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
Transfer mode The communication path between the Default Default setting.
primary slave drive and the system
memory is defined here. Only possible Fast PIO 1 - Fast PIO 4 / Manual configuration of PIO mode.
when manually setting up the drive. DMA2

Ultra DMA mode The data transfer rate to and from the Disabled Disables this function. Do not use UDMA mode.
primary slave drive is defined here. The
DMA mode must be activated in the Mode 0 - Mode 5 Manual setting option for UDMA mode.
Windows device manager in order to
guarantee maximum performance. Only
possible when manually setting up the
drive.
SMART monitoring Indicates whether the primary slave drive Disabled No drive support, and function is deactivated.
supports SMART technology.
Enabled Drive support present, and function is activated.

Table 206: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Slave setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 379

 Software • BIOS options

IDE channel 1 master

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Main

IDE Channel 1 Master [None] Item Specific Help

Type: [Auto] User = you enter

parameters of hard-disk
Multi-Sector Transfers: [Disabled] drive installed at this
LBA Mode Control: [Enabled] connection.
32 Bit I/O: [Disabled] Auto = autotypes
Transfer Mode: [Standard] hard-disk drive
Ultra DMA Mode: [Disabled] installed here.
SMART Monitoring: [Disabled] CD-ROM = a CD-ROM drive
is installed here.
ATAPI Removeable =
removeable disk drive
is installed here.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 178: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Master

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Type The type of drive connected to the Auto Automatic recognition of the drive and setup of
secondary master is configured here. appropriate values.
User Manual setup of the drive (number of cylinders,
heads, and sectors).
Other ATAPI Use this option for IDE disk drives that are not
mentioned here.
CD-ROM CD-ROM = CD-ROM drive
ATAPI removable The removable media drive is treated as a hard
drive or floppy drive.
IDE removable The IDE removable drive is treated as a hard
drive.
Multi-sector transfer This option determines the number of Disabled Disables this function.
sectors per block. Only possible when
manually setting up the drive. 2, 4, 8 or 16 sectors Number of sectors per block.

LBA mode control This option activates the logical block Disabled Disables this function.
addressing for IDE. This function enables
support of drives larger than 540 MB. Enabled Enables this function.
Only possible when manually setting up
the drive.

Table 207: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Master setting options

380 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

32-bit I/O This function enables 32-bit data transfer. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
Transfer mode The communication path between the Default Default setting.
secondary master drive and the system
memory is defined here. Only possible Fast PIO 1 - Fast PIO 4 / Manual configuration of PIO mode.
when manually setting up the drive. DMA2

Ultra DMA mode The data transfer rate to and from the Disabled Disables this function. Do not use UDMA mode.
secondary master drive is defined here.
The DMA mode must be activated in the Mode 0 - Mode 5 Manual setting option for UDMA mode.
Windows device manager in order to
guarantee maximum performance. Only
possible when manually setting up the
drive.
SMART monitoring Indicates whether the secondary master Disabled No drive support, and function is deactivated.
drive supports SMART technology.
Enabled Drive support present, and function is activated.

Table 207: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Master setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 381

 Software • BIOS options

IDE channel 1 slave

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Main

IDE Channel 1 Slave [None] Item Specific Help

Type: [Auto] User = you enter

parameters of hard-disk
Multi-Sector Transfers: [Disabled] drive installed at this
LBA Mode Control: [Enabled] connection.
32 Bit I/O: [Disabled] Auto = autotypes
Transfer Mode: [Standard] hard-disk drive
Ultra DMA Mode: [Disabled] installed here.
SMART Monitoring: [Disabled] CD-ROM = a CD-ROM drive
is installed here.
ATAPI Removeable =
removeable disk drive
is installed here.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 179: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Slave

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Type The type of drive connected to the Auto Automatic recognition of the drive and setup of
secondary slave is configured here. appropriate values.
User Manual setup of the drive (number of cylinders,
heads, and sectors).
Other ATAPI Use this option for IDE disk drives that are not
mentioned here.
CD-ROM CD-ROM = CD-ROM drive
ATAPI removable The removable media drive is treated as a hard
drive or floppy drive.
IDE removable The IDE removable drive is treated as a hard
drive.
Multi-sector transfer This option determines the number of Disabled Disables this function.
sectors per block. Only possible when
manually setting up the drive. 2, 4, 8 or 16 sectors Number of sectors per block.

LBA mode control This option activates the logical block Disabled Disables this function.
addressing for IDE. This function enables
support of drives larger than 540 MB. Enabled Enables this function.
Only possible when manually setting up
the drive.

Table 208: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Slave setting options

382 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

32-bit I/O This function enables 32-bit data transfer. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
Transfer mode The communication path between the Default Default setting.
secondary slave drive and the system
memory is defined here. Only possible Fast PIO 1 - Fast PIO 4 / Manual configuration of PIO mode.
when manually setting up the drive. DMA2

Ultra DMA mode The data transfer rate to and from the Disabled Disables this function. Do not use UDMA mode.
secondary slave is defined here. The
DMA mode must be activated in the Mode 0 - Mode 5 Manual setting option for UDMA mode.
Windows device manager in order to
guarantee maximum performance. Only
possible when manually setting up the
drive.
SMART monitoring Indicates whether the secondary slave Disabled No drive support, and function is deactivated.
drive supports SMART technology.
Enabled Drive support present, and function is activated.

Table 208: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Slave setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 383

 Software • BIOS options

1.1.5 Advanced

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

Item Specific Help

Setup Warning
Setting items on this menu to incorrect
values may cause your system to malfunction. Select options for
Advanced Chipset
Advanced Chipset/Graphics Control and Graphics
PCI/PNP Configuration features.
Memory Cache
I/O Device Configuration
Keyboard Features
CPU Board Monitor
Miscellaneous
Baseboard/Panel Features

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 180: 815E (ETX) Advanced Menu

BIOS setup menu Meaning Setting options Effect

Advanced Setup of advanced chipset and graphics Enter Opens the submenu
chipset/graphics functions. See "Advanced chipset/graphics control", on
control page 385.
PCI/PNP Configures PCI devices. Enter Opens the submenu
Configuration See "PCI/PNP Configuration", on page 387.
Memory cache Configuration of the memory cache Enter Opens the submenu
resources. See "Memory cache", on page 393.
I/O Device Configures the I/O devices. Enter Opens the submenu
Configuration See "I/O Device Configuration", on page 395.
Keyboard features Configuration of the keyboard options. Enter Opens the submenu
See "Keyboard features", on page 398.
CPU board monitor Displays the current voltages and Enter Opens the submenu
temperature of the processor in use. See "CPU board monitor", on page 399.
Miscellaneous Configuration of various BIOS settings Enter Opens the submenu
(summary screen, halt on errors, etc.). See "Miscellaneous", on page 400.
Main Board/Panel Displays device specific information and Enter Opens the submenu
Features setup of device specific values. See "Main Board/Panel Features", on page 401.

Table 209: 815E (ETX) Advanced Menu setting options

384 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Advanced chipset/graphics control

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

Advanced Chipset/Graphics Control Item Specific Help

Graphics Engine: [Auto] Select ‘Auto’ or

Graphics Memory Size: [ 1MB] one of the
Assign IRQ to VGA: [Enabled] predefined LCDs:

Internal Graphics API Rev: 1.0 VGA = 640 x 480 1x18

SVGA= 800 x 600 1x18
XGA = 1024x 768 1x18
XGA2= 1024x 768 2x18
SXGA= 1280x1024 2x18

or [Disabled] to
disable the onboard
video controller.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Section 4
Software
Figure 181: 815E (ETX) Advanced Chipset/Graphics Control

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 385

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Graphics engine Settings can be made for the onboard Auto Automatic setting of the resolution (using a read-
video controller. out of the connected panel's EDID data).
VGA, SVGA, XGA, VGA = 640 x 480 resolution
XGA2, SXGA SVGA = 800 x 600 resolution
XGA = 1024 x 768 resolution
XGA2 = 1024 x 768 resolution
SXGA = 1280 x 1024 resolution
Disabled Information:
The onboard video must be activated to make
video output possible. Deactivate only for use
of an external PCI graphics card.
Graphics memory Reserves a memory location in the RAM 1 MB 1 MB main memory is reserved for the onboard
size for the onboard graphics controller, into video controller.
which the memory access will be directed.
512kB 512 k main memory is reserved for the onboard
video controller.
Assign IRQ to VGA This is where an IRQ is reserved and Enabled Enables this function.
automatically assigned for the CPU
board's onboard graphics. Disabled Disables this function.

Internal graphics API Displays the internal graphics API None -

Rev (Application Programmer Interface)
version number.

Table 210: 815E (ETX) Advanced Chipset/Graphics Control setting options

386 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

PCI/PNP Configuration

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

PCI/PNP Configuration Item Specific Help

PNP OS installed: [Yes] Select the operating

Reset Configuration Data: [No] system installed
Secured Setup Configurations [Yes] on your system which
you will use most
PCI Device, Slot #1 commonly.
PCI Device, Slot #2
PCI Device, Slot #3 Note: An incorrect
PCI Device, Slot #4 setting can cause
some operating
PCI IRQ line 1: [Auto Select] systems to display
PCI IRQ line 2: [Auto Select] unexpected behavior
PCI IRQ line 3: [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 4: [Auto Select]
Onboard LAN IRQ line: [Auto Select]
Onboard USB EHCI IRQ line: [Auto Select]

Default Primary Video Adapter: [PCI]

Assign IRQ to SMB: [Enabled]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Section 4
Software
Figure 182: 815E (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

PNP OS installed If the operating system Yes The ISA PnP resources are not assigned. The
is plug & play capable, then this option resource assignment sequence is as follows:
informs BIOS that the operating system 1.) Motherboard devices
will handle the distribution of resources in 2. PCI devices
the future.
No The resource assignment sequence is as
follows:
1. Motherboard devices
2. ISA PnP devices
3. PCI devices
Reset configuration During booting, the assigned resources Yes When the system is reset after leaving the BIOS
data are stored in Flash setup, all ECSD entries (extended system
(ESCD). configuration data) are deleted.
No Disables this function. Resources are not reset.
Secured setup This option protects the setup Yes Prevents a PnP operating system from changing
configuration configuration from interference from a system settings.
PnP operating system.
No Disables this function. Changes are allowed.

Table 211: 815E (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 387

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

PCI device, slot #1 Advanced configuration of the PCI slot Enter Opens the submenu
number 1. See "PCI device, slot #1", on page 389
PCI device, slot #2 Advanced configuration of the PCI slot Enter Opens the submenu
number 2. See "PCI device, slot #2", on page 390
PCI device, slot #3 Advanced configuration of the PCI slot Enter Opens the submenu
number 3. See "PCI device, slot #3", on page 391
PCI device, slot #4 Advanced configuration of the PCI slot Enter Opens the submenu
number 4. See "PCI device, slot #4", on page 392
PCI IRQ line 1 Under this option, the external PCI Auto-select The interrupt is automatically assigned according
interrupt 1 is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to the Plug & Play guidelines.
Disabled Disables this function. No assignment.
3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14, 15
PCI IRQ line 2 Under this option, the external PCI Auto-select The interrupt is automatically assigned according
interrupt 2 is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to the Plug & Play guidelines.
Disabled Disables this function. No assignment.
3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14, 15
PCI IRQ line 3 Under this option, the external PCI Auto-select The interrupt is automatically assigned according
interrupt 3 is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to the Plug & Play guidelines.
Disabled Disables this function. No assignment.
3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14, 15
PCI IRQ line 4 Under this option, the external PCI Auto-select The interrupt is automatically assigned according
interrupt 4 is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to the Plug & Play guidelines.
Disabled Disables this function. No assignment.
3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14, 15
Onboard LAN IRQ Under this option, the onboard LAN Auto-select The interrupt is automatically assigned according
line interrupt is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to the Plug & Play guidelines.
Disabled Disables this function. No assignment.
3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14, 15
Onboard USB EHCI Under this option, the USB EHCI interrupt Auto-select The interrupt is automatically assigned according
IRQ line is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to the Plug & Play guidelines.
Disabled Disables this function. No assignment.
3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14, 15
Default primary This option sets the default graphics card PCI A PCI graphics card is set as the default display
video adapter (either an existing AGP or the PCI device.
graphics card).
AGP An AGP graphics card is set as the default display
device.
Assign IRQ to SMB Use this function to set whether or not the Enabled Automatic assignment of a PCI interrupt.
SM (System Management) bus controller
is assigned a PCI interrupt. Disabled No assignment of an interrupt.

Table 211: 815E (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration setting options (Forts.)

388 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

PCI device, slot #1

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

PCI Device, Slot #1 Item Specific Help

Option ROM Scan: [Enabled] Initialize device

Enable Master: [Enabled] expansion ROM
Latency Timer: [Default]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 183: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #1

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
ROM scan option Setting for the initialization of a device's Enabled Enables this function.
ROM.
Disabled Disables this function.
Enable master Sets the PCI device to be treated as the Enabled Enables this function.
PCI bus master. Not all PCI devices can
function as PCI bus master! Check device
description. Disabled Disables this function.
Latency timer This option controls how long one card Default Default setting. Default
can continue to use the PCI bus master
after another PCI card has requested 0020h, 0040h, 0060h, Value set manually.
access. 0080h, 00A0h, 00C0h,
00E0h

Table 212: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #1 setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 389

 Software • BIOS options

PCI device, slot #2

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

PCI Device, Slot #2 Item Specific Help

Option ROM Scan: [Enabled] Initialize device

Enable Master: [Enabled] expansion ROM
Latency Timer: [Default]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 184: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #2

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

ROM scan option Setting for the initialization of a device's Enabled Enables this function.
ROM.
Disabled Disables this function.
Enable master Sets the PCI device to be treated as the Enabled Enables this function.
PCI bus master. Not all PCI devices can
function as PCI bus master! Check device
description. Disabled Disables this function.
Latency timer This option controls how long one card Default Default setting. Default
can continue to use the PCI bus master
after another PCI card has requested 0020h, 0040h, 0060h, Value set manually.
access. 0080h, 00A0h, 00C0h,
00E0h

Table 213: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #2 setting options

390 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

PCI device, slot #3

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

PCI Device, Slot #3 Item Specific Help

Option ROM Scan: [Enabled] Initialize device

Enable Master: [Enabled] expansion ROM
Latency Timer: [Default]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 185: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #3

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
ROM scan option Setting for the initialization of a device's Enabled Enables this function.
ROM.
Disabled Disables this function.
Enable master Sets the PCI device to be treated as the Enabled Enables this function.
PCI bus master. Not all PCI devices can
function as PCI bus master! Check device
description. Disabled Disables this function.
Latency timer This option controls how long one card Default Default setting. Default
can continue to use the PCI bus master
after another PCI card has requested 0020h, 0040h, 0060h, Value set manually.
access. 0080h, 00A0h, 00C0h,
00E0h

Table 214: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #3 setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 391

 Software • BIOS options

PCI device, slot #4

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

PCI Device, Slot #4 Item Specific Help

Option ROM Scan: [Enabled] Initialize device

Enable Master: [Enabled] expansion ROM
Latency Timer: [Default]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 186: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #4

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

ROM scan option Setting for the initialization of a device's Enabled Enables this function.
ROM.
Disabled Disables this function.
Enable master Sets the PCI device to be treated as the Enabled Enables this function.
PCI bus master. Not all PCI devices can
function as PCI bus master! Check device
description. Disabled Disables this function.
Latency timer This option controls how long one card Default Default setting. Default
can continue to use the PCI bus master
after another PCI card has requested 0020h, 0040h, 0060h, Value set manually.
access. 0080h, 00A0h, 00C0h,
00E0h

Table 215: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #4 setting options

392 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Memory cache

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

Memory Cache Item Specific Help

Memory Cache: [Enabled] Sets the state of the

Cache System BIOS area: [Write Protect] memory cache.
Cache Video BIOS area [Write Protect]
Cache Extended Memory Area: [Write Back]
Cache D000 - D3FF: [Disabled]
Cache D40D - D7FF: [Disabled]
Cache DB00 - DBFF: [Disabled]
Cache DC00 - DFFF: [Disabled]
Cache E000 - E3FF: [Disabled]
Cache E400 - E7FF: [Disabled]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Section 4
Software
Figure 187: 815E (ETX) Memory Cache

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Memory cache Enable/ disable utilization of the L2 cache. Enabled Enables this function.
Disabled Disables this function.
Cache system BIOS Set whether or not the system BIOS Write protect System BIOS is mapped in the cache.
area should be buffered.
Uncached System BIOS is not mapped in the cache.
Cache video BIOS Set whether or not the video BIOS should Write protect Video BIOS is mapped in the cache.
area be buffered.
Uncached Video BIOS is not mapped in the cache.
Cache extended Configure how the memory content of the Uncached No mapping.
memory area system memory above 1MB should be
mapped. Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.

Table 216: 815E (ETX) Memory Cache setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 393

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Cache D000 - D3FF Configure how the memory content of Disabled No mapping.
D000-D3FF should be mapped.
Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.
Cache D400 - D7FF Configure how the memory content of Disabled No mapping.
D400-D7FF should be mapped.
Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.
Cache D800 - DBFF Configure how the memory content of Disabled No mapping.
D800-DBFF should be mapped.
Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.
Cache DC00 - DFFF Configure how the memory content of Disabled No mapping.
DC00-DFFF should be mapped.
Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.
Cache E000 - E3FF Configure how the memory content of Disabled No mapping.
E000-E3FF should be mapped.
Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.
Cache E400 - E7FF Configure how the memory content of Disabled No mapping.
E400-E7FF should be mapped.
Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.

Table 216: 815E (ETX) Memory Cache setting options (Forts.)

394 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

I/O Device Configuration

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

I/O Device Configuration Item Specific Help

Local Bus IDE adapter: [Both] Enable the integrated

Primary IDE UDMA66/100: [Enabled] local bus IDE adapter
Secondary IDE UDMA66/100: [Enabled]
USB UHCI Host Controller 1: [Enabled]
USB UHCI Host Controller 2: [Enabled]
USB EHCI Host Controller: [Enabled]
Legacy USB Support: [Enabled]
AC97 Audio controller: [Enabled]
Onboard LAN controller: [Enabled]
Onboard LAN PXE ROM: [Disabled]

Serial port A: [Enabled]

Base I/O address: [3F8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 4]
Serial port B: [Enabled]
Mode: [Normal]
Base I/O address: [2F8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 3]
Parallet port: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: [378]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Section 4
Software
Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 188: 815E (ETX) I/O Device Configuration

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Local bus IDE Enable or disable one or both of the Disabled Deactivates both PCI IDE controllers (primary
adapter PCI IDE controllers (primary and and secondary).
secondary).
Primary Activates the primary IDE controller only.
Secondary Activates the secondary IDE controller only.
Both Activates both PCI IDE controllers (primary and
secondary).
Primary IDE Setup the data transfer rate for a device Disabled The maximum data transfer rate is UDMA33.
UDMA66/100 connected to the primary IDE channel.
This option is only available when a Enabled The maximum data transfer rate is UDMA66 or
primary IDE drive is connected. higher.

Secondary IDE Setup the data transfer rate for a device Disabled The maximum data transfer rate is UDMA33.
UDMA66/100 connected to the secondary IDE channel.
This option is only available when a Enabled The maximum data transfer rate is UDMA66.
secondary IDE drive is connected.

Table 217: 815E (ETX) I/O Device Configuration setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 395

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

USB UHCI host Configuration of USB UHCI controller 1 Disabled Deactivates the USB support.
controller 1 for USB port 0 und 1.
Enabled Activates the USB support.
USB UHCI host Configuration of the USB UHCI controller Disabled Deactivates the USB support.
controller 2 1 for USB port 2 and 3.
Can only be configured if the USB UHCI Enabled Activates the USB support.
controller 1 is activated.
USB UHCI host Configuration of the USB EHCI controller. Disabled Deactivates the USB support.
controller Can only be configured if the USB UHCI
controller 1 is activated.
Enabled When enabled, the USB 2.0 support is activated
as soon as a USB 2.0 device is connected to the
interface.
Legacy USB Support Here IRQs are assigned to the USB Disabled No IRQ assigned.
connections.
It is not possible to boot from a USB device (USB
stick, USB floppy, USB CD ROM, etc.)!
However, a connected USB keyboard can be
used to access and configure the BIOS setup,
boot menu or optional RAID boot menu. USB
devices will not function after completing the
BIOS POST routine. USB devices only work after
starting the operating system with USB support
(e.g. Windows XP). MS-DOS does not support
the use of USB devices.
Enabled IRQ assigned.
Booting from USB devices is now possible.
Supported USB devices work with MS-DOS (e.g.
USB keyboard, etc).
AC97 audio For turning the AC97 audio controller on Disabled AC97 sound is deactivated.
controller and off.
Enabled AC97 sound is activated.
Onboard LAN For turning the ICH4 on-board LAN Disabled Deactivates the LAN controller or the ETH1
controller controller (for ETH1) on and off. interface.
Enabled Activates the LAN controller or the ETH1
interface.
Onboard LAN PXE For turning the remote boot BIOS Disabled Disables this function.
ROM extension for the onboard LAN controller
(ETH1) on and off. Enabled Enables this function.

Serial port A For the configuration of serial port A Disabled Port A deactivated.
(COM1).
Enabled Port A activated. The base I/O addresses and the
interrupt must then be configured manually.
Auto Either BIOS or the operating system configures
the port automatically.
Base I/O address Selection of the base I/O address for port 3F8, 2F8, 3E8, 2E8 Base I/O address is manually assigned.
A.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for port A. IRQ 3, IRQ 4 Manual assignment of the interrupt.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.

Table 217: 815E (ETX) I/O Device Configuration setting options (Forts.)

396 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Serial port B For the configuration of serial port B Disabled Port B deactivated.
(COM2).
Enabled Port A activated. The base I/O addresses and the
interrupt must then be configured manually.
Auto Either BIOS or the operating system configures
the port automatically.
Mode This option is for setting the serial port B Normal Serial port B is used as a standard interface.
as either a standard interface or as an
infrared interface. IR The serial interface is used as an infrared
interface, and allows data transfers up to 115
kBit/s.
Base I/O address Selection of the base I/O address for port 3F8, 2F8, 3E8, 2E8 Selected base I/O address is manually assigned.
B.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for port B. IRQ 3, IRQ 4 Selected interrupt is manually assigned.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Parallel port For configuring the hardware security key Disabled Deactivates the port.
(dongle), which accessed internally
through the parallel interface. Enabled Activates the port. The base I/O address must
then be set.
Auto First BIOS and then the operating system
configure the port automatically.
Base I/O address Selection of the base I/O address for the 378, 278, 3BC Base I/O address is manually assigned.
parallel port.

Table 217: 815E (ETX) I/O Device Configuration setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 397

 Software • BIOS options

Keyboard features

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

Keyboard Features Item Specific Help

NumLock: [On] Selects Power-on state

Key Clck: [Disabled] for NumLock
Keyboard auto-repeat rate: [30/sec]
Keyboard auto-repeat delay: [1/2sec]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 189: 815E (ETX) Keyboard Features

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

NumLock This option sets the status On Numeric keypad is enabled.
of the numeric keypad when the the
system is booted. Off Only the cursor functions of the numerical keypad
are activated.
Auto Numeric keypad is activated, if present.
Key click Using this option, the clicking of the keys Disabled Disables this function.
can be turned on or off.
Enabled Enables this function.
Keyboard auto- For setting the speed of repetition when a 30/sec, 26.7/sec, Settings from 2 to 30 characters per second.
repeat rate key is held down. 21.8/sec, 18.5/sec,
13.3/sec, 10/sec, 6/sec,
2/sec
Keyboard auto- For setting the amount of delay after the 1/4 sec, 1/2 sec, 3/4 sec, Setting of the desired delay.
repeat delay key is pressed before the auto-repeat 1 sec
begins.

Table 218: 815E (ETX) Keyboard Features setting options

398 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

CPU board monitor

Information:
The displayed voltage values (e.g. core voltage, battery voltage) on this BIOS Setup
page represent uncalibrated information values. These cannot be used to draw any
conclusions about any hardware alarms or error conditions. The hardware
components used have automatic diagnostics functions that can be applied in the
event of error.

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

CPU Board Monitor Item Specific Help

VCC 3.3V Voltage = 3.34V All items on this menu

CPU Core Voltage = 1.10V cannot be modified in
5Vsb Voltage = 4.87V user mode, If any
Battery Voltage = 3.42V items require changes,
please consult your
CPU Temperature = +53°C/+127°F system Supervisor.

Section 4
F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Software
Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 190: 815E (ETX) CPU Board Monitor

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

VCC 3.3V voltage Displays the current voltage of the 3.3 volt None
supply (in volts).
CPU core voltage Displays the processor's core voltage (in None
volts).
5Vsb voltage Displays the 5 V standby voltage (in volts). None
Battery voltage Displays the battery voltage (in volts). None
CPU temperature Displays the processor's temperature (in None
degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit).

Table 219: 815E (ETX) CPU Board Monitor setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 399

 Software • BIOS options

Miscellaneous

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

Miscellaneous Item Specific Help

Summary screen: [Enabled] Display system

QuickBoot Mode: [Enabled] configuration on boot
Extended Memory Testing: [Just zero it]
Dark Boot: [Disabled]
Halt On Erros: [Yes]
PS/2 Mouse: [Disabled]
Large Disk Access Mode: [DOS]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 191: 815E (ETX) Miscellaneous

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Summary screen Set whether or not the system summary Enabled Enables this function.
screen should open when the system is
started (see figure 174 "815E (ETX) BIOS Disabled Disables this function.
Summary screen", on page 373).
QuickBoot mode Speeds up the booting process by Enabled Enables this function.
skipping several tests.
Disabled Disables this function.
Extended memory This function determines the method by Just zero it The main memory is quickly tested.
testing which the main memory over 1 MB is
tested. None The main memory is not tested at all.
Normal This option is only available when the function
"QuickBoot Mode" has been set to "disabled."
The main memory is tested more slowly than with
"Just zero It."
Dark boot Sets whether the diagnostics screen (see Enabled Enables this function. The diagnostics screen is
figure 173 "815E (ETX) BIOS diagnostic not displayed.
screen", on page 372) should be
displayed when the system is started. Disabled Disables this function. The diagnostics screen is
displayed.

Table 220: 815E (ETX) Miscellaneous setting options

400 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Halt on errors This option sets whether the system Yes The system pauses. The system pauses every
should pause the Power On Self Test time an error is encountered.
(POST) when it encounters an error.
No The system does not pause. All errors are
ignored.
PS/2 mouse Sets whether the PS/2 mouse port should Disabled Deactivates the port.
be activated.
Enabled Activates the port. The IRQ12 is reserved, and is
not available for other components.
Large disk access This option is intended for hard discs with Other For non-compatible access (e.g. Novell, SCO
mode more than 1024 cylinders, 16 heads, and Unix.)
more than 63 sectors per track. Setting
options: DOS DOS For MS DOS compatible access.

Table 220: 815E (ETX) Miscellaneous setting options (Forts.)

Main Board/Panel Features

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

Baseboard/Panel Features Item Specific Help

Panel Control
Baseboard Monitor
Legacy Devices

Versions

Section 4
Software
BIOS: R123
MTCX PX32: V1.63
MTCX FPGA: V1.19

Optimized ID: 00000010b

Device ID: 00001BB7h
Compatibility ID: 0000h
Serial Number: 70950173619
Product Name: 5PC600.SX02-01
User Serial ID: FFFFFFFFh

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 192: 815E (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Panel control For special setup of connected panels Enter Opens the submenu
(display units). See "Panel control", on page 403
Main board monitor Display of various temperatures and fan Enter Opens the submenu
speeds. See "Main board monitor", on page 404

Table 221: 815E (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 401

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Legacy devices Enter Opens the submenu
See "Legacy devices", on page 405
BIOS Displays the BIOS version. None
MTCX PX32 Displays the MTCX PX32 firmware None
version.
MTCX FPGA Displays the MTCX FPGA firmware None
version.
Optimized ID Displays the DIP switch setting of the None
configuration switch.
Device ID Displays the hexadecimal value of the None
hardware device ID.
Compatibility ID Displays the version of the device within None
the same B&R device code. This ID is
needed for Automation Runtime.
Serial Number Displays the B&R serial number. None
Product name Displays the B&R model number. None
User serial ID Displays the user serial ID. None
This 8 digit hex value can be freely
assigned by the user (e.g. to give the
device a unique ID) and can only be
changed with using the "B&R Control
Center" via the ADI driver.

Table 221: 815E (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features setting options

402 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Panel control

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

Panel Control Item Specific Help

Select Panel Number: [ 0] Panel 0-14 = Panels

Version: V1.09 connected to Automation
Brightness: [100%] Panel Link or Monitor/
Temperature: 41°C/105°F Panel connector.
Fan Speed: 00 RPM
Keys/Leds: 128/128 Panel 15 = Panel
connected on Panel PC
Link.

Note: DVI and PPC Link

will show no valid
values.
On PPC Link only the
brightness option will
work.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 193: 815E (ETX) Panel Control

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
Select panel number Selection of the panel number for which 0 ... 15 Selection of panel 0 ... 15.
the values should be read out and/or Panel 15 is specifically intended for panel PC 700
changed. systems.
Version Displays the firmware version of the SDLR None
controller.
Brightness For setting the brightness of the selected 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, For setting the brightness (in %) of the selected
panel. 100% panel. Changes take effect after saving and
restarting the system (e.g. by pressing <F10>).
Temperature Displays the selected panel's temperature None
(in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit).
Fan speed Displays fan speed for the selected panel. None
Keys/LEDs Displays the available keys and LEDs on None
the selected panel.

Table 222: 815E (ETX) Panel Control setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 403

 Software • BIOS options

Main board monitor

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

Baseboard Monitor Item Specific Help

Temperatures
I/O: 42°C/108°F All items on this menu
Power Supply: 34°C/93°F cannot be modified in
Slide-In Drive 1: 00°C/32°F user mode. If any
Slide-In Drive 2: 00°C/32°F items require changes,
please consult your
Fan Speeds system Supervisor.
Case 1: 00 RPM
Case 2: 00 RPM
Case 3: 00 RPM
Case 4: 00 RPM
CPU: 00 RPM

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 194: 815E (ETX) Baseboard Monitor

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

I/O Displays the temperature in the I/O area in None
degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Power supply Displays the temperature in the power None
supply area in degrees Celsius and
Fahrenheit.
Slide-in drive 1 Displays the temperature of the slide-in None
drive 1 in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Slide-in drive 2 Displays the temperature of the slide-in None
drive 2 in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Case 1 Displays the fan speed of housing fan 1. None
Case 2 Displays the fan speed of housing fan 2. None
Case 3 Displays the fan speed of housing fan 3. None
Case 4 Displays the fan speed of housing fan 4. None
CPU Displays the fan speed of the processor None
fan.

Table 223: 815E (ETX) Baseboard Monitor setting options

404 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Legacy devices

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Advanced

Legacy Devices Item Specific Help

COM C: [Enabled] Enable/Disable the

Base I/O address: [3E8] internal COM port
Interrupt: [IRQ 11] for touch.
COM D: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: [238] For detailed
Interrupt: [IRQ 7] description see user
COM E: [Enabled] manual.
Base I/O address: [2E8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 10]
LPT: [Enabeld]
Base I/O address: [278]
CAN: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: 384/385h
Interrupt: [IRQ 10]

2nd LAN controller: [Enabled]

LAN1 MAC address: 00:E0:48:0E:C2:76

LAN2 MAC address: 00:60:65:02:F0:CF

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Section 4
Software
Figure 195: 815E (ETX) Legacy Devices

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

COM C Settings for the internal serial interfaces in Disabled Disables the interface.
the system. This setting activates the
touch screen in panel PC 700 systems, Enabled Enables the interface.
and, using SDL transfer technology, also
in Automation Panel 900 display units.
Base I/O address Selection of the base I/O address for the 238, 2E8, 2F8, 328, 338, Selected base I/O address is assigned.
COM C port. 3E8, 3F8
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for the COM C IRQ 3, IRQ 4, IRQ 5, IRQ Selected interrupt is assigned.
port. 10, IRQ 11, IRQ 12, IRQ
A yellow star indicates a conflict with 15
another device.
COM D Configuration of the COM D port for the Disabled Disables the interface.
serial interface of an automation panel link
slot. The interface is used to operate the
touch screen on connected Automation Enabled Enables the interface.
Panel 900 units.

Table 224: 815E (ETX) Legacy Devices setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 405

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Base I/O address Configuration of the base I/O address for 238, 2E8, 2F8, 328, 338, Selected base I/O address is assigned.
the serial COM D port. 3E8, 3F8
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for the COM D IRQ 3, IRQ 4, IRQ 5, IRQ Selected interrupt is assigned.
port. 10, IRQ 11, IRQ 12, IRQ
A yellow star indicates a conflict with 15
another device.
COM E Configuration of the optional COM E port Disabled Disables the interface.
on a B&R add-on interface (IF option).
Enabled Enables the interface.
Base I/O address Configuration of the base I/O address for 238, 2E8, 2F8, 328, 338, Selected base I/O address is assigned.
the serial COM E port. 3E8, 3F8
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for the COM E IRQ 3, IRQ 4, IRQ 5, IRQ Selected interrupt is assigned.
port. 10, IRQ 11, IRQ 12, IRQ
A yellow star indicates a conflict with 15
another device.
LPT This setting is specific to B&R and should Disabled Disables the interface.
not be changed.
Enabled Enables the interface.
Base I/O address Configuration of the base I/O address for 278, 378, 3BC Selected base I/O address is assigned.
the optional LPT.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
CAN Configuration of the CAN port of a B&R Disabled Disables the interface.
add-on CAN interface card (IF option).
Enabled Enables the interface.
Base I/O address 384/385h None -
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for the CAN port. IRQ 10 Selected interrupt is assigned.
NMI NMI interrupt is assigned.
2nd LAN controller For turning the onboard LAN controller Disabled Disables the controller.
(ETH2) on and off.
Enabled Enables the controller.
LAN1 MAC address Displays the MAC addresses for the ETH1 -
network controller.
LAN2 MAC address Displays the MAC addresses for the ETH2 -
network controller.

Table 224: 815E (ETX) Legacy Devices setting options (Forts.)

406 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.1.6 Security

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

Item Specific Help

Supervisor Password Is: Clear
User Password Is: Clear
Supervisor Password
Set Supervisor Password: [Enter] controls access to the
Set User Password: [Enter] setup utility.

Diskette access: [Supervisor]

Fixed disk boot sector: [Normal]
Virus check reminder: [Disabled]
System backup reminder: [Disabled]
Password on boot: [Disabled]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 196: 815E (ETX) Security Menu

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
Supervisor Displays whether or not a supervisor None Display set: A supervisor password has been set.
password is password has been set. Display clear: No supervisor password has been
set.
User password is Displays whether or not a user password None Display set: A user password has been set.
has been set. Display clear: No user password has been set.
Set supervisor To enter/change a supervisor password. Enter Press Enter and enter password two times. The
password A supervisor password is necessary to maximum 7 password must be 7 alphanumeric characters or
edit all BIOS settings. alphanumeric characters less.
- not case sensitive. Needed to enter BIOS setup.
To change the password, enter the old password
once and then the new password twice.
Set user password To enter/change a user password. A user Enter Press Enter and enter password two times. The
password allows the user to edit only maximum 7 password must be 7 alphanumeric characters or
certain BIOS settings. alphanumeric characters less.
- not case sensitive. Needed to enter BIOS setup.
To change the password, enter the old password
once and then the new password twice.

Table 225: 815E (ETX) Security setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 407

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Diskette access Access to the diskette drive is controlled Supervisor Supervisor password is needed to access a
here. Either or the supervisor or the user diskette drive.
has access to it. Does not work with USB
diskette drives. User User password is needed to access a diskette
drive.
Fixed disk boot The boot sector of the primary hard drive Normal Write access allowed.
sector can be write protected against viruses
with this option. Write protect Boot sector is write protected.

Virus check This function opens a reminder when the Disabled Disables this function.
reminder system is started to scan for viruses.
Daily A reminder appears every day when the system
is started.
Weekly A reminder appears the first time the system is
started after every Sunday.
Monthly A reminder appears the first time the system is
started each month.
System backup This function opens a reminder when the Disabled Disables this function.
reminder system is started to create a system
backup. Daily A reminder appears every day when the system
is started.
Weekly A reminder appears the first time the system is
started after every Sunday.
Monthly A reminder appears the first time the system is
started each month.
Password at boot This function requires a supervisor or user Disabled Disables this function.
password when the system is started.
Only possible when a supervisor or user Enabled Enables this function.
password is enabled.

Table 225: 815E (ETX) Security setting options (Forts.)

408 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.1.7 Power

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

Item Specific Help

Enable ACPI [Yes]

ACPI Control En/Disable ACPI BIOS

(Advance Configuration
Thermal Management and Power Interface)

Power Savings: [Customized]

Standby Timeout: [Off]
Auto Suspend Timeout: [Off]
Hard Disk Timeout: [Disabled]
Video Timeout: [Disabled]

Resume On Modem Ring: [Off]

Resume On Time: [Off]
Resume Time: [00:00:00]

Power supply: [ATX]

Power Button Function: [Power Off]
Power Loss Control [Power On]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Section 4
Software
Figure 197: 815E (ETX) Power Menu

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Enable ACPI This option turns the ACPI function Yes Enables this function.
(Advanced Configuration and Power
Interface) on or off. This is an advanced
plug & play and power management No Disables this function.
functionality.
ACPI control Configuration of specific limits. Enter Opens the submenu
See "ACPI control", on page 411
Thermal Configuration of specific CPU limits. Enter Opens the submenu
management See "Thermal management", on page 412
Power savings This function determines if and how the Disabled Deactivates the power savings function.
power save function is used.
Customized Power management is configured by adjusting
the individual settings.
Maximum power Maximum power savings function.
Savings
Maximum performance Power savings function to maximize
performance.

Table 226: 815E (ETX) Power setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 409

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Standby timeout Set here when the system should enter Off No standby.
standby mode. During standby, various
devices and the display will be
deactivated. 1, 2, 4, 8 minutes Time in minutes until standby.
This option only available when "power
savings" is set to customized.
Auto suspend Set here when the system should enter Off No standby.
timeout suspend mode to save electricity.
This option only available when "power
savings" is set to customized. 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 60 Time in minutes until standby.
Minutes
Hard disk timeout Set here how long after the last access the Disabled Disables this function.
hard disk should enter standby mode.
This option only available when "power 10, 15, 30, 45 seconds Time in seconds until standby.
savings" is set to customized. 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15 Time in minutes until standby.
Minutes
Video timeout Disabled

Resume on modem If an external modem is connected to a Off Disables this function.

ring serial port and the telephone rings, the
system starts up. On Enables this function.

Resume on time This function enables the system to start Off Disables this function.
at the time set under "resume time."
On Enables this function.
Resume time Time setting for the option "resume on [00:00:00] Personal setting of the time in the format
time" (when the system should start up). (hh:mm:ss).
Power supply The type of power supply being used can ATX An ATX compatible power supply is being used.
be entered here.
Information:
Since the APC620 contains an ATX power
supply, ATX should be selected.
AT An AT compatible power supply is being used.
Power button This option determines the function of the Power off Shuts down the system.
Function power button.
Sleep The system enters sleep mode.
Power Loss Control This option determines how the system Stay off The system does not turn back on. The system
reacts to a power outage. remains off until the power button is pressed.
Power-on The system turns back on.
Last State The system resumes the last state it was in
before the power outage.

Table 226: 815E (ETX) Power setting options (Forts.)

410 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

ACPI control

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Power

ACPI Control Item Specific Help

Active Trip Point: [Disabled] This value controls

Passive Cooling Trip Point: [Disabled] the temperature of
Critical Trip Point [110°C] the ACPI Active Trip
Point - the point
APIC - IO APIC Mode: [Disabled] in which the OS will
turn the CPU Fan on.
Native IDE Support: [Disabled]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 198: 815E (ETX) ACPI Control

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
Active trip point With this function, an optional CPU fan Disabled Disables this function.
above the operating system can be set to
turn on when the CPU reaches the set 40 to 100°C Temperature setting for the active trip point. Can
temperature. be set in increments of 5°C.

Passive Cooling Trip With this function, a temperature can be Disabled Disables this function.
Point set at which the CPU automatically
reduces its speed. 40 to 100°C Temperature setting for the passive cooling trip
point. Can be set in increments of 5°C.
Critical Trip Point With this function, a temperature can be Disabled Disables this function.
set at which the operating system
automatically shuts itself down.

Warning!
40 to 110°C Temperature setting for the critical trip point. Can
This function should never be be set in increments of 5°C.
deactivated, as this would allow the
CPU to rise above the temperature
specifications.

Table 227: 815E (ETX) ACPI Control setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 411

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

APIC - I/O APIC This option controls the functionality of the Disabled Disables the function
mode advanced interrupt controller in the
processor. Enabled Enables this function.
The activation of this option is only effective if it
takes place before the operating system
(Windows XP) is activated.
There are then 23 IRQs available.
Native IDE support The native IDE support offers the Disabled Disables this function.
possibility to make 4 hard disk controllers
(2 x primary ATA for a total of 4 devices,
and 2 x secondary ATA for another 2 Enabled Enables this function.
devices) accessible through Windows XP.

Table 227: 815E (ETX) ACPI Control setting options (Forts.)

Thermal management

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Power

Thermal Management Item Specific Help

Auto Thermal Throttling: [Disabled] Reduces CPU speed to

Temperature: [100°C] avoid overheating.
Hysteresis: [5°C]
CPU Performance: [50%]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 199: 815E (ETX) Thermal Management

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Auto thermal Reduces the CPU speed when it exceeds Enabled Enables this function.
throttling the limit set in the "temperature" option by
the amount set in the "CPU performance" Disabled Disables this function.
option.

Table 228: 815E (ETX) Thermal Management

412 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Temperature Temperature limit for the setting "auto 75 to 110°C Can be set in increments of 5?.
thermal throttling."
Hysteresis When auto thermal throttling has been 3 to 6°C Can be set in increments of 1°C.
activated and the temperature sinks by
the number of degrees in this setting, the
processor resumes 100% performance.
CPU performance When the CPU reaches the temperature 13%, 25%, 50%, 75% CPU performance throttled by amount selected,
set in the "temperature" option, the CPU is in percent.
throttled by the amount (in percent) set in
this option.

Table 228: 815E (ETX) Thermal Management (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 413

 Software • BIOS options

1.1.8 Boot

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

Item Specific Help

Boot priority order

1: IDE 0:
2: IDE 1: Keys used to view or
3: IDE CD: configure devices:
4: USB FDC: Up and Down arrows
5: USB KEY: select a device.
6: USB CDROM: <+> and <-> moves
7: the device up or down.
8: <f> and <r> specifies
Excluded from boot order: the device fixed or
: IDE 2: removeable.
: IDE 3: <x> exclude or include
: USB HDD: the device to boot.
: USB ZIP: <Shift + 1> enables or
: USB LS120: disables a device.
: PCI BEV: <1 - 4> Loads default
: PCI SCSI: boot sequence.
: Bootable Add-in Cards

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 200: 815E (ETX) Boot Menu

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

1: IDE 0, IDE 1, Use the up arrow ↑ and down arrow ↓, to select
IDE 2, IDE 3, a device. Then, use the <+> und <-> keys to
2: IDE CD change the boot priority of the drive.
3: USB FDC, USB KEY
To add a device to the "boot priority order" list
USB CDROM
4: from the "excluded from boot order" list, use the
USB HDD, USB ZIP
<x> key. In the same way, the <x> key can move
USB LS120,
5: boot devices down out of the boot priority order.
PCI BEV, PCI SCSI,
The keys 1 - 4 can load preset boot sequences.
6: bootable add-in cards

7:
8:

Table 229: 815E (ETX) Boot setting options

414 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.1.9 Exit

1BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R123

Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

Item Specific Help

Exit Saving Changes
Exit Discarding Changes
Load Setup Defaults Exit System Setup and
Discard Changes save your changes to
Save Changes CMOS.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Execute Command F10 Save and Exit

Figure 201: 815E (ETX) Exit Menu

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
Exit saving changes BIOS setup is closed with this item. Yes / No
Changes made are saved in CMOS after
confirmation, and the system is rebooted.
Exit discarding With this item you can close BIOS setup Yes / No
changes without saving the changes made. The
system is then rebooted.
Load setup defaults This item loads the BIOS setup defaults, Yes / No
which are defined by the DIP switch
settings. These settings are loaded for all
BIOS configurations.
Discard Changes Should unknown changes have been Yes / No
made and not yet saved, they can be
discarded.
Save changes Settings are saved, and the system is not Yes / No
restarted.

Table 230: 815E (ETX) Exit setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 415

 Software • BIOS options

1.1.10 Profile overview - BIOS default settings - 815E (ETX)

If the function "load setup defaults" is chosen in the main BIOS setup menu, or if exit is selected
(or <F9> is pressed) in the individual setup screens, the following BIOS default settings are the
optimized values that will be used.

DIP switch position see Section 1.6 "Location of the DIP switch in APC620 system units", on
page 546).

ON DIP
39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 202: DIP switch on system unit

The first six DIP switches (1-6) are used to set the profiles. The rest (7,8) are reserved.

DIP switch setting

Number Optimized for 1 2 3 4 5 6 71) 81)
Profile 0 Automation PC 620 system units 5PC600.SX01-00. Off Off Off Off Off Off - -
Profile 1 Reserved On Off Off Off Off Off - -
Profile 2 Automation PC 620 system units 5PC600.SX02-00, 5PC600.SX02- Off On Off Off Off Off - -
01, 5PC600.SX05-00 and 5PC600.SX05-01.
Profile 3 Panel PC 700 system unit 5PC720.1043-00, 5PC720.1214-00, On On Off Off Off Off - -
5PC720.1505-00, 5PC720.1706-00, 5PC720.1906-00,
5PC781.1043-00, 5PC781.1505-00 and 5PC782.1043-00.
Profile 4 Panel PC 700 system unit 5PC720.1043-01, 5PC720.1214-01, Off Off On Off Off Off - -
5PC720.1505-01 and 5PC720.1505-02.

Table 231: 815E (ETX) Profile overview

1) Reserved.

The following pages provide an overview of the BIOS default settings for the different DIP switch
configurations.

Personal settings

If changes have been made to the BIOS defaults, they can be entered in the following tables for
backup.

416 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Main

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

System Time - - - - -

System Date - - - - -

SMART device monitoring Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

BIOS Date - - - - -

IDE channel 0 master

Type Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Multi-sector transfer - - - - -

LBA mode control - - - - -

32-bit I/O Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Transfer mode - - - - -

Ultra DMA mode - - - - -

SMART monitoring Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

IDE channel 0 slave

Type Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Multi-sector transfer - - - - -

LBA mode control - - - - -

32-bit I/O Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Transfer mode - - - - -

Ultra DMA mode - - - - -

SMART monitoring Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Section 4
Software
IDE channel 1 master
Type Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Multi-sector transfer - - - - -

LBA mode control - - - - -

32-bit I/O Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Transfer mode - - - - -

Ultra DMA mode - - - - -

SMART monitoring Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

IDE channel 1 slave

Type Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Multi-sector transfer - - - - -

LBA mode control - - - - -

32-bit I/O Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Transfer mode - - - - -

Ultra DMA mode - - - - -

SMART monitoring Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 232: 815E (ETX) Main Profile settings overview

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 417

 Software • BIOS options

Advanced

Advanced chipset/graphics control

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Graphics engine 1 Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Graphics memory size 1MB 1MB 1MB 1MB 1MB

Enable memory gap Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 233: 815E (ETX) Advanced Chipset/Graphics Control Profile settings overview

PCI/PNP Configuration

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

PNP OS installed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Reset configuration data No No No No No

Secured setup configuration Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

PCI IRQ line 1 Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select

PCI IRQ line 2 Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select

PCI IRQ line 3 Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select

PCI IRQ line 4 Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select

Onboard LAN IRQ line Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select

Onboard USB EHCI IRQ Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select

line
Default primary video PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI
adapter
Assign IRQ to SMB Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

PCI device, slot #1

ROM scan option Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Enable master Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Latency timer Default Default Default Default Default

PCI device, slot #2

ROM scan option Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Enable master Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Latency timer Default Default Default Default Default

PCI device, slot #3

ROM scan option Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Enable master Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Latency timer Default Default Default Default Default

Table 234: 815E (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration Profile settings overview

418 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

PCI device, slot #4 Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

ROM scan option Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Enable master Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Latency timer Default Default Default Default Default

Table 234: 815E (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration Profile settings overview (Forts.)

Memory cache

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Memory cache Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Cache system BIOS area Write protect Write protect Write protect Write protect Write protect

Cache video BIOS area Write protect Write protect Write protect Write protect Write protect

Cache extended memory Write back Write back Write back Write back Write back
area
Cache D000 - D3FF Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Cache D400 - D7FF Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Cache D800 - DBFF Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Cache DC00 - DFFF Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Cache E000 - E3FF Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Cache E400 - E7FF Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 235: 815E (ETX) Memory Cache Profile settings overview

I/O Device Configuration

Section 4
Software
Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Local bus IDE adapter Primary Both Both Primary Both

Primary IDE UDMA66/100 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

USB UHCI host controller 1 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

USB UHCI host controller 2 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

USB UHCI host controller Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Legacy USB Support Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

AC97 audio controller Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Onboard LAN controller Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Onboard LAN PXE ROM Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Serial port A Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Base I/O address 3F8 3F8 3F8 3F8 2F8

Interrupt IRQ 4 IRQ 4 IRQ 4 IRQ 4 IRQ 4

Serial port B Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Mode Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal

Table 236: 815E (ETX) I/O Device Configuration Profile settings overview

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 419

 Software • BIOS options

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Base I/O address 3F8 3F8 3F8 3F8 2F8

Interrupt IRQ 3 IRQ 3 IRQ 3 IRQ 3 IRQ 3

Parallel port Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Base I/O address 378 378 378 378 378

Table 236: 815E (ETX) I/O Device Configuration Profile settings overview (Forts.)

Keyboard features

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

NumLock On On On On On

Key click Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Keyboard auto-repeat rate 30/sec 30/sec 30/sec 30/sec 30/sec

Keyboard auto-repeat delay 1/2 sec 1/2 sec 1/2 sec 1/2 sec 1/2 sec

Table 237: 815E (ETX) Keyboard Features Profile settings overview

CPU board monitor

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

VCC 3.3V voltage - - - - -

CPU core voltage - - - - -

5Vsb voltage - - - - -

Battery voltage - - - - -

CPU temperature - - - - -

Table 238: 815E (ETX) CPU Board Monitor Profile settings overview

Miscellaneous

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Summary screen Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

QuickBoot mode Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Extended memory testing Just zero it Just zero it Just zero it Just zero it Just zero it

Dark boot Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Halt on errors Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

PS/2 mouse Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Large disk access mode DOS DOS DOS DOS DOS

Table 239: 815E (ETX) Miscellaneous Profile settings overview

420 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Main Board/Panel Features

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Versions - - - - -

BIOS - - - - -

MTCX - - - - -

FPGA - - - - -

Optimized ID - - - - -

Device ID - - - - -

Compatibility ID - - - - -

Serial Number - - - - -

Product name - - - - -

User serial ID - - - - -

Panel control
Select panel number 0 0 0 15 15

Version - - - - -

Brightness 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%

Temperature - - - - -

Fan speed - - - - -

Keys/LEDs - - - - -

Main board monitor

Temperatures - - - - -

I/O - - - - -

Section 4
Software
Power supply - - - - -

Slide-in drive 1 - - - - -

Slide-in drive 2 - - - - -

Fan speeds - - - - -

Case 1 - - - - -

Case 2 - - - - -

Case 3 - - - - -

Case 4 - - - - -

CPU - - - - -

Legacy devices
COM C Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled

Base I/O address - - - 3E8h 3E8h

Interrupt - - - 11 11

COM D Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Base I/O address - - - - -

Interrupt - - - - -

Table 240: 815E (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features Profile settings overview

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 421

 Software • BIOS options

Legacy devices Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

COM E Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Base I/O address - - - - -

Interrupt - - - - -

LPT Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Base I/O address - - - - -

CAN Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Base I/O address - - - - -

Interrupt - - - - -

2nd LAN controller Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

LAN1 MAC address - - - - -

LAN2 MAC address - - - - -

Table 240: 815E (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features Profile settings overview (Forts.)

Security

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Supervisor password is Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear

User password is Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear

Set supervisor password - - - - -

Set user password - - - - -

Diskette access Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor

Fixed disk boot sector Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal

Virus check reminder Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

System backup reminder Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Password at boot Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 241: 815E (ETX) Security Profile settings overview

422 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Power

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Enable ACPI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Power savings Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Standby timeout - - - - -

Auto suspend timeout - - - - -

Hard disk timeout Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Video timeout Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Resume on modem ring Off Off Off Off Off

Resume on time Off Off Off Off Off

Resume time 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00

Power supply ATX ATX ATX ATX ATX

Power button function Power off Power off Power off Power off Power off

Power Loss Control Power-on Power-on Power-on Power-on Power-on

ACPI control
Active trip point Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Passive Cooling Trip Point Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Critical Trip Point 110°C 110°C 110°C 110°C 110°C

APIC - I/O APIC mode Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Native IDE support Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Thermal management
Auto thermal throttling Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Section 4
Software
Temperature 100°C 100°C 100°C 100°C 100°C

Hysteresis 5°C 5°C 5°C 5°C 5°C

CPU performance 50% 50% 50% 50% 50%

Table 242: 815E (ETX) Power Profile settings overview

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 423

 Software • BIOS options

Boot

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Boot priority order

1: IDE 0 PCI BEV IDE 0 IDE 0 IDE 0

2: IDE 1 IDE 0 IDE 1 IDE 1 IDE 1

3: IDE CD IDE 1 IDE CD IDE CD IDE CD

4: USB FDC IDE CD USB FDC USB FDC USB FDD

5: USB KEY USB FDC USB KEY USB KEY USB KEY

6: USB CDROM USB KEY USB CDROM USB CDROM USB CDROM

7: - USB CDROM IDE 2 - IDE 2

8: - - IDE 3 - IDE 3

Excluded from boot order

: IDE 2 IDE 2 USB HDD IDE 2 USB HDD

: IDE 3 IDE 3 USB ZIP IDE 3 USB ZIP

: USB HDD USB HDD USB LS120 USB HDD USB LS120

: USB ZIP USB ZIP PCI BEV USB ZIP PCI BEV

: USB LS120 USB LS120 PCI SCSI USB LS120 PCI SCSI

: PCI BEV PCI SCSI Bootable add-in PCI BEV Bootable add-in
cards cards

: PCI SCSI Bootable add-in PCI SCSI

cards

: Bootable add-in Bootable add-in

cards cards

Table 243: 815E (ETX) Boot Profile settings overview

424 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.2 855GME (ETX) BIOS description

Information:
• The following diagrams and BIOS menu items including descriptions refer to
BIOS version 1.30. It is therefore possible that these diagrams and BIOS
descriptions do not correspond with the installed BIOS version.
• The setup defaults are the settings recommended by B&R. The setup defaults
are dependant on the DIP switch configuration on the baseboard (see section
1.2.10 "Profile overview - BIOS default settings - 855GME (ETX)", on
page 472).

1.2.1 General information

BIOS stands for "Basic Input Output System". It is the most basic standardized communication
between the user and the system (hardware). The BIOS system used in the Automation PC 620
systems is produced by Phoenix.

The BIOS Setup Utility lets you modify basic system configuration settings. These settings are
stored in CMOS and in EEPROM (as a backup).

The CMOS data is buffered by a battery, and remains in the APC620 even when the power is
turned off (no 24 VDC supply) .

1.2.2 BIOS setup and boot procedure

Section 4
Software
BIOS is immediately activated when switching on the power supply of the Automation PC 620
system or pressing the power button. The system checks if the setup data from the EEPROM is
"OK". If the data is "OK", then it is transferred to the CMOS. If the data is "not OK", then the
CMOS data is checked for validity. An error message is output if the CMOS data contains errors
and the boot procedure can be continued by pressing the <F1> key. To prevent the error
message from appearing at each restart, open the BIOS setup by pressing the <F2> key and re-
save the settings.

BIOS reads the system configuration information in CMOS RAM, checks the system, and
configures it using the Power On Self Test (POST).

When these "preliminaries" are finished, BIOS seeks an operating system in the data storage
devices available (hard drive, floppy drive, etc.). BIOS launches the operating system and hands
over control of system operations to it.

To enter BIOS setup, the F2 key must be pressed as soon as the following message appears on
the lower margin of the display (during POST):

"Press <F2> to enter SETUP"

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 425

 Software • BIOS options

PhoenixBIOS 4.0 Release 6.1

Copyright 1985-2003 Phoenix Technologies Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
<0BR1R130> Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-Elektronik B1.30

CPU = Intel(R) Pentium(R) M processor 1.80GHz

247M System RAM Passed
2048K Cache SRAM Passed
System BIOS shadowed
Video BIOS shadowed
UMB upper limit segment address: E887

Press <F2> to enter SETUP

Figure 203: 855GME (ETX) BIOS Diagnostics Screen

Summary screen

After the POST, the summary screen displays the most important system characteristics.

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utilitiy

CPU Type : Intel(R) Pentium(R) M processor 1.80GHz

CPU Speed : 1800 MHz
System ROM : E887 - FFFF
System Memory : 640 KB BIOS Date : 07/10/07
Extended Memory : 251904 KB
Shadow Ram : 384 KB COM Ports : 0378 02F8
Cache Ram : 2048 KB LPT Ports : 0378
Display Type : EGA \ VGA
PS/2 Mouse : Not Installed
Hard Disk 0 : None
Hard Disk 1 : FUJITSU MHT2030AR-(PS)
Hard Disk 2 : None
Hard Disk 3 : CD-224E-(SS)

Figure 204: 855GME (ETX) BIOS Summary Screen

426 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.2.3 BIOS setup keys

The following keys are active during the POST:

Key Function
F2 Enters the BIOS setup menu.
ESC Cues the boot menu. Lists all bootable devices that are connected to the system. With cursor ↑ and
cursor ↓ and by pressing <ENTER>, select the device from which will be booted.
<Spacebar> Pressing the spacebar skips the system RAM check.
<Pause> Pressing the <pause> key stops the POST. Press any other key to resume the POST.

Table 244: Keys relevant to 855GME (ETX) BIOS during POST

The following keys can be used after entering the BIOS setup:

Key Function
Cursor ↑ Moves to the previous item.
Cursor ↓ Go to the next item.
Cursor ← Move to the item on the left.
Cursor → Move to the item on the right.
<ESC> Exits the submenu.
PageUp ↑ Moves the cursor to the top of the current BIOS setup page.
PageDown ↓ Moves the cursor to the bottom of the current BIOS setup page.
<F1> or <Alt+H> Opens a help window showing the key assignments.
<F5> or <-> Scrolls to the previous option for the selected BIOS setting.

Section 4
Software
<F6> or <+> or <spacebar> Scrolls to the next option for the selected BIOS setting.
<F8> Load optimized default values for all pages.
<F9> Load setup default values for all pages.
<F10> Saves settings and closes BIOS setup.
<Enter> Opens submenu for a BIOS setup menu item, or displays the configurable values of a BIOS setup item.

Table 245: 855GME (ETX) - BIOS relevant keys

The following sections explain the individual BIOS setup menu items in detail.

BIOS setup menu item Function From

page
Main The basic system configurations (e.g. time, date, hard disk parameters) can be set in this 428
menu.
Advanced Advanced BIOS options such as cache areas, PnP, keyboard repeat rate, as well as 438
settings specific to B&R integrated hardware, can be configured here.
Security For setting up the system's security functions. 463
Power Setup of various APM (Advanced Power Management) options. 465
Boot The boot order can be set here. 469

Table 246: Overview of 855GME (ETX) BIOS menu items

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 427

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setup menu item Function From

page
Exit To end the BIOS setup. 470

Table 246: Overview of 855GME (ETX) BIOS menu items (Forts.)

1.2.4 Main

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

Item Specific Help

System Time: [08:48:25]
System Date: [08/08/2007]
<Tab>, <Shift-Tab>,
IDE Channel 0 Master [None] or <Enter> selects
IDE Channel 0 Slave [FUJITSU MHT2030AR-(PS] field.
IDE Channel 1 Master [None]
IDE Channel 1 Slave [CD-224E-(SS)]

SMART Device Monitoring: [Enabled]

System Memory: 640 KB

Extended Memory: 246 MB

BIOS Date: 07/10/07

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 205: 855GME (ETX) Main

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

System Time This is the current system time setting. Changes the Set the system time in the format (hh:mm:ss).
The time is buffered by a battery (CMOS System time
battery) after the system has been
switched off.
System Date This is the current system date setting. Changes the Set the system date in the format (mm:dd:yyyy).
The time is buffered by a battery (CMOS system date
battery) after the system has been
switched off.
IDE Channel 0 The drive in the system that is connected Enter Opens the submenu
Master to the IDE channel 0 master (previously See "IDE channel 0 master", on page 430.
"primary master") port is configured here.
IDE Channel 0 The drive in the system that is connected Enter Opens the submenu
Slave to the IDE channel 0 slave (previously See "IDE channel 0 slave", on page 432.
"primary slave") port is configured here.

Table 247: 855GME (ETX) Main setting options

428 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

IDE Channel 1 The drive in the system that is connected Enter Opens the submenu
Master to the IDE channel 1 master (previously See "IDE channel 1 master", on page 434.
"secondary master") port is configured
here.
IDE Channel 1 The drive in the system that is connected Enter Opens the submenu
Slave to the IDE channel 1 slave (previously See "IDE channel 1 slave", on page 436.
"secondary slave") port is configured
here.
Smart device S.M.A.R.T. (Self Monitoring Analysis and Enabled Activates this function. In the future, a message
monitoring Reporting Technology) is implemented in regarding impending errors is produced.
the today's hard drives. This technology
allows you to detect reading or rotational Disabled Deactivates this function.
problems with the hard drive, and much
more.
System Memory Displays the amount of main memory None -
installed. Between 0 and 640 KB.
Extended memory Displays the available main memory from None -
the first MB to the maximum memory
capacity.
BIOS Date BIOS creation date None -

Table 247: 855GME (ETX) Main setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 429

 Software • BIOS options

IDE channel 0 master

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Main

IDE Channel 0 Master [None] Item Specific Help

Type: [Auto] User = you enter

parameters of hard-disk
Multi-Sector Transfers: [Disabled] drive installed at this
LBA Mode Control: [Enabled] connection.
32 Bit I/O: [Disabled] Auto = autotypes
Transfer Mode: [Standard] hard-disk drive
Ultra DMA Mode: [Disabled] installed here.
SMART Monitoring: [Disabled] CD-ROM = a CD-ROM drive
is installed here.
ATAPI Removeable =
removeable disk drive
is installed here.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 206: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Master Setup

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Type The type of drive connected to the IDE Auto Automatic recognition of the drive and setup of
channel 0 master (previously "primary appropriate values.
master") is configured here.
User Manual setup of the drive (number of cylinders,
heads, and sectors).
Other ATAPI Use this option for IDE disk drives that are not
mentioned here.
CD-ROM CD-ROM = CD-ROM drive
ATAPI removable The removable media drive is treated as a hard
drive or floppy drive.
IDE removable The IDE removable drive is treated as a hard
drive.
Multi-sector transfer This option determines the number of Disabled Disables this function.
sectors per block. Only possible when
manually setting up the drive. 2, 4, 8 or 16 sectors Number of sectors per block.

LBA mode control This option activates the logical block Disabled Disables this function.
addressing for IDE. This function enables
support of drives larger than 540 MB. Enabled Enables this function.
Only possible when manually setting up
the drive.

Table 248: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Master setting options

430 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

32-bit I/O This function enables 32-bit data transfer. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
Transfer mode The communication path between the IDE Default Default setting.
channel 0 master drive and the system
memory is defined here. Only possible Fast PIO 1 - Fast PIO 4 / Manual configuration of PIO mode.
when manually setting up the drive. DMA2

Ultra DMA mode The data transfer rate to and from the IDE Disabled Disables this function. Do not use UDMA mode.
channel 0 master drive is defined here.
The DMA mode must be activated in the Mode 0 - Mode 5 Manual setting option for UDMA mode.
Windows device manager in order to
guarantee maximum performance. Only
possible when manually setting up the
drive.
SMART monitoring Indicates whether the IDE channel 0 Disabled No drive support, and function is deactivated.
master drive supports SMART
technology. Enabled Drive support present, and function is activated.

Table 248: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Master setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 431

 Software • BIOS options

IDE channel 0 slave

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Main

IDE Channel 0 Slave [FUJITSU MHT2030AR-(PS)] Item Specific Help

Type: [Auto] User = you enter

LBA Format parameters of hard-disk
Total Sectors: 58605120 drive installed at this
Maximum Capacity: 30006MB connection.
Auto = autotypes
Multi-Sector Transfers: [16 Sectors] hard-disk drive
LBA Mode Control: [Enabled] installed here.
32 Bit I/O: [Disabled] CD-ROM = a CD-ROM drive
Transfer Mode: [FPIO 4 / DMA 2] is installed here.
Ultra DMA Mode: [Mode 5] ATAPI Removeable =
SMART Monitoring: [Enabled] removeable disk drive
is installed here.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 207: 855GME (ETX) IDE channel 0 slave setup

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Type The type of drive connected to the IDE Auto Automatic recognition of the drive and setup of
channel 0 slave (previously "primary appropriate values.
slave") is configured here.
User Manual setup of the drive (number of cylinders,
heads, and sectors).
Other ATAPI Use this option for IDE disk drives that are not
mentioned here.
CD-ROM CD-ROM = CD-ROM drive
ATAPI removable The removable media drive is treated as a hard
drive or floppy drive.
IDE removable The IDE removable drive is treated as a hard
drive.
Multi-sector transfer This option determines the number of Disabled Disables this function.
sectors per block. Only possible when
manually setting up the drive. 2, 4, 8 or 16 sectors Number of sectors per block.

LBA mode control This option activates the logical block Disabled Disables this function.
addressing for IDE. This function enables
support of drives larger than 540 MB. Enabled Enables this function.
Only possible when manually setting up
the drive.

Table 249: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Slave setting options

432 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

32-bit I/O This function enables 32-bit data transfer. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
Transfer mode The communication path between the IDE Default Default setting.
channel 0 slave and the system memory
is defined here. Only possible when Fast PIO 1 - Fast PIO 4 / Manual configuration of PIO mode.
manually setting up the drive. DMA2

Ultra DMA mode The data transfer rate to and from the IDE Disabled Disables this function. Do not use UDMA mode.
channel 0 slave drive is defined here. The
DMA mode must be activated in the Mode 0 - Mode 5 Manual setting option for UDMA mode.
Windows device manager in order to
guarantee maximum performance. Only
possible when manually setting up the
drive.
SMART monitoring Indicates whether the IDE channel 0 slave Disabled No drive support, and function is deactivated.
drive supports SMART technology.
Enabled Drive support present, and function is activated.

Table 249: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Slave setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 433

 Software • BIOS options

IDE channel 1 master

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Main

IDE Channel 1 Master [None] Item Specific Help

Type: [Auto] User = you enter

parameters of hard-disk
Multi-Sector Transfers: [Disabled] drive installed at this
LBA Mode Control: [Enabled] connection.
32 Bit I/O: [Disabled] Auto = autotypes
Transfer Mode: [Standard] hard-disk drive
Ultra DMA Mode: [Disabled] installed here.
SMART Monitoring: [Disabled] CD-ROM = a CD-ROM drive
is installed here.
ATAPI Removeable =
removeable disk drive
is installed here.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 208: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Master Setup

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Type The type of drive connected to the IDE Auto Automatic recognition of the drive and setup of
channel 1 master (previously "secondary appropriate values.
master") is configured here.
User Manual setup of the drive (number of cylinders,
heads, and sectors).
Other ATAPI Use this option for IDE disk drives that are not
mentioned here.
CD-ROM CD-ROM = CD-ROM drive
ATAPI removable The removable media drive is treated as a hard
drive or floppy drive.
IDE removable The IDE removable drive is treated as a hard
drive.
Multi-sector transfer This option determines the number of Disabled Disables this function.
sectors per block. Only possible when
manually setting up the drive. 2, 4, 8 or 16 sectors Number of sectors per block.

LBA mode control This option activates the logical block Disabled Disables this function.
addressing for IDE. This function enables
support of drives larger than 540 MB. Enabled Enables this function.
Only possible when manually setting up
the drive.

Table 250: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Master setting options

434 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

32-bit I/O This function enables 32-bit data transfer. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
Transfer mode The communication path between the IDE Default Default setting.
channel 1 master and the system memory
is defined here. Only possible when Fast PIO 1 - Fast PIO 4 / Manual configuration of PIO mode.
manually setting up the drive. DMA2

Ultra DMA mode The data transfer rate to and from the IDE Disabled Disables this function. Do not use UDMA mode.
channel 1 master drive is defined here.
The DMA mode must be activated in the Mode 0 - Mode 5 Manual setting option for UDMA mode.
Windows device manager in order to
guarantee maximum performance. Only
possible when manually setting up the
drive.
SMART monitoring Indicates whether the IDE channel 1 Disabled No drive support, and function is deactivated.
master drive supports SMART
technology. Enabled Drive support present, and function is activated.

Table 250: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Master setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 435

 Software • BIOS options

IDE channel 1 slave

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Main

IDE Channel 1 Slave [CD-224E-(SS)] Item Specific Help

Type: [Auto] User = you enter

parameters of hard-disk
Multi-Sector Transfers: [16 Sectors] drive installed at this
LBA Mode Control: [Enabled] connection.
32 Bit I/O: [Disabled] Auto = autotypes
Transfer Mode: [FPIO 4 / DMA 2] hard-disk drive
Ultra DMA Mode: [Mode 2] installed here.
SMART Monitoring: [Disabled] CD-ROM = a CD-ROM drive
is installed here.
ATAPI Removeable =
removeable disk drive
is installed here.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 209: 855GME (ETX) IDE channel 1 slave setup

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Type The type of drive connected to the IDE Auto Automatic recognition of the drive and setup of
channel 1 slave (previously "secondary appropriate values.
slave") is configured here.
User Manual setup of the drive (number of cylinders,
heads, and sectors).
Other ATAPI Use this option for IDE disk drives that are not
mentioned here.
CD-ROM CD-ROM = CD-ROM drive
ATAPI removable The removable media drive is treated as a hard
drive or floppy drive.
IDE removable The IDE removable drive is treated as a hard
drive.
Multi-sector transfer This option determines the number of Disabled Disables this function.
sectors per block. Only possible when
manually setting up the drive. 2, 4, 8 or 16 sectors Number of sectors per block.

LBA mode control This option activates the logical block Disabled Disables this function.
addressing for IDE. This function enables
support of drives larger than 540 MB. Enabled Enables this function.
Only possible when manually setting up
the drive.

Table 251: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Slave setting options

436 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

32-bit I/O This function enables 32-bit data transfer. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
Transfer mode The communication path between the IDE Default Default setting.
channel 1 slave drive and the system
memory is defined here. Only possible Fast PIO 1 - Fast PIO 4 / Manual configuration of PIO mode.
when manually setting up the drive. DMA2

Ultra DMA mode The data transfer rate to and from the IDE Disabled Disables this function. Do not use UDMA mode.
channel 1 slave drive is defined here. The
DMA mode must be activated in the Mode 0 - Mode 5 Manual setting option for UDMA mode.
Windows device manager in order to
guarantee maximum performance. Only
possible when manually setting up the
drive.
SMART monitoring Indicates whether the IDE channel 1 slave Disabled No drive support, and function is deactivated.
drive supports SMART technology.
Enabled Drive support present, and function is activated.

Table 251: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Slave setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 437

 Software • BIOS options

1.2.5 Advanced

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

Item Specific Help

Setup Warning
Setting items on this menu to incorrect
values may cause your system to malfunction. Select options for
Advanced Chipset and
Advanced Chipset/Graphics Control Graphics features.
PCI/PNP Configuration
Memory Cache
I/O Device Configuration
Keyboard Features
CPU Board Monitor
Miscellaneous
Baseboard/Panel Features

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 210: 855GME - advanced setup menu - overview

BIOS setup menu Meaning Setting options Effect

Advanced Setup of advanced chipset and graphics Enter Opens the submenu
chipset/graphics functions. See "Advanced chipset/graphics control", on
control page 439.
PCI/PNP Configures PCI devices. Enter Opens the submenu
Configuration See "PCI/PNP Configuration", on page 441.
Memory cache Configuration of the memory cache Enter Opens the submenu
resources. See "Memory cache", on page 448.
I/O Device Configures the I/O devices. Enter Opens the submenu
Configuration See "I/O Device Configuration", on page 450.
Keyboard features Configuration of the keyboard options. Enter Opens the submenu
See "Keyboard features", on page 453.
CPU board monitor Displays the current voltages and Enter Opens the submenu
temperature of the processor in use. See "CPU board monitor", on page 454.
Miscellaneous Configuration of various BIOS settings Enter Opens the submenu
(summary screen, halt on errors, etc.). See "Miscellaneous", on page 455.
Main Board/Panel Displays device specific information and Enter Opens the submenu
Features setup of device specific values. See "Main Board/Panel Features", on page 456.

Table 252: 855GME (ETX) Advanced Menu setting options

438 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Advanced chipset/graphics control

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

Advanced Chipset/Graphics Control Item Specific Help

Graphics Engine 1: [Auto] Enable or Disable

Default Flat Panel: [None] the Internal Graphics
Flat Panel Scaling: [Streched] Device by setting item
to the desired value.
Graphics Engine 2: [Auto]

Primary Graphics Engine: [Graphics Engine 1]

Graphics Memory Size: [UMA = 8MB]
Assign IRQ to VGA: [Enabled]

Internal Graphics API Rev: 1.2

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Section 4
Software
Figure 211: 855GME (ETX) - advanced chipset control

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Graphics engine 1 Settings can be made for the onboard Auto Automatic setting of Graphic Engine 1. The
video controller (internal graphics device). resolution is set using a read-out of the connected
panel's EDID data.

Information:
If EDID data older than V1.1 is read, it is not
passed on to the VGA BIOS
Disabled Disable graphics controller.

Information.
The onboard video controller must be
activated to make video output possible.
Deactivate only for use of an external PCI
graphics card.

Table 253: 855GME (ETX) Advanced Chipset Control setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 439

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Default flat panel Should the connected panel fail to be None A predefined resolution has not been set.
automatically recognized, a predefined
resolution can be set manually here. VGA, SVGA, XGA, VGA = 640 x 480 resolution
XGA2, SXGA, UXGA SVGA = 800 x 600 resolution
XGA = 1024 x 768 resolution
XGA2 = 1024 x 768 resolution
SXGA = 1280 x 1024 resolution
UXGA = 1600 x 1200 resolution
Flat panel scaling For setting whether the video signal Centered Display is centered.
should be centered on the panel (stamp
format), or fill the entire display Stretched Display is stretched to fit screen.
(stretched).
Graphics engine 2 Settings can be made for the second Auto Automatic setting of Graphic Engine 2. The
onboard video controller (only with an AP resolution is set using a read-out of the connected
Link card). panel's EDID data.
Disabled Deactivates the graphics interface.
Graphics engine Selection of the primary video output line - Graphics engine 1 The primary video outputs are the display devices
depending on the system unit being used. on the monitor/panel plug with system units
with 5PC600.SX01-00, 5PC600.SX02-01 5PC600.SX01-00, 5PC600.SX02-01 and
and 5PC600.SX05-01 5PC600.SX05-01, or
- Graphics engine 1: Monitor / Panel the AP Link output with system units
- Graphics engine 2 : not supported 5PC600.SX02-00 and 5CP600.SX05-00.

with 5PC600.SX02-00 and Graphics engine 2 The primary video outputs are the display devices
5CP600.SX05-00 on the monitor/panel plug with system units
- Graphics engine 1: AP Link output 5PC600.SX02-00 and 5CP600.SX05-00.
- Graphics engine 2: Monitor / Panel

Information:
The "Primary graphics engine" setting
is only relevant from the booting of the
system until a graphics driver is
started (e.g. in Windows).
Graphics memory For setting how much of the main memory 1 MB 1 MB main memory to be used by the graphics
size (in MB) the graphics controller can use. controller.
UMA = 8 MB 8 MB main memory to be used by the graphics
controller.
UMA = 16 MB 16 MB main memory to be used by the graphics
controller.
UMA = 32 MB 32 MB main memory to be used by the graphics
controller.
Assign IRQ to VGA This is where an IRQ is reserved and Enabled Enables this function.
automatically assigned for the CPU
board's onboard graphics. Disabled Disables this function.

Internal graphics API Displays the internal graphics API version -

Rev number.

Table 253: 855GME (ETX) Advanced Chipset Control setting options (Forts.)

440 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

PCI/PNP Configuration

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

PCI/PNP Configuration Item Specific Help

PNP OS installed: [Yes] Select the operating

Reset Configuration Data: [No] system installed
Secured Setup Configurations [Yes] on your system which
you will use most
PCI Device, Slot #1 commonly.
PCI Device, Slot #2
PCI Device, Slot #3 Note: An incorrect
PCI Device, Slot #4 setting can cause
some operating
PCI IRQ line 1: [Auto Select] systems to display
PCI IRQ line 2: [Auto Select] unexpected behavior.
PCI IRQ line 3: [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 4: [Auto Select]
Onboard LAN IRQ line: [Auto Select]
Onboard USB EHCI IRQ line: [Auto Select]

Default Primary Video Adapter: [PCI]

Assign IRQ for SMB: [Enabled]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Section 4
Software
Figure 212: 815GME (ETX) - PCI/PNP configuration

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 441

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

PNP OS installed If the operating system Yes The ISA PnP resources are not assigned. The
is plug & play capable, then this option resource assignment sequence is as follows:
informs BIOS that the operating system 1. Motherboard devices
will handle the distribution of resources in 2. PCI devices
the future.
No The resource assignment sequence is as
follows:
1. Motherboard devices
2. ISA PnP devices
3. PCI devices
Reset configuration During booting, the assigned resources Yes When the system is reset after leaving the BIOS
data are stored in Flash setup, all ECSD entries (extended system
(ESCD). configuration data) are deleted.
No Disables this function. Resources are not reset.
Secured setup This option protects the setup Yes Prevents a PnP operating system from changing
configuration configuration from interference from a system settings.
PnP operating system.
No Disables this function. Changes are allowed.
PCI device, slot #1 Advanced configuration of the PCI slot Enter Opens the submenu
number 1. See "PCI device, slot #1", on page 444
PCI device, slot #2 Advanced configuration of the PCI slot Enter Opens the submenu
number 2. See "PCI device, slot #2", on page 445
PCI device, slot #3 Advanced configuration of the PCI slot Enter Opens the submenu
number 3. See "PCI device, slot #3", on page 446
PCI device, slot #4 Advanced configuration of the PCI slot Enter Opens the submenu
number 4. See "PCI device, slot #4", on page 447
PCI IRQ line 1 Under this option, the external PCI Auto-select The interrupt is automatically assigned according
interrupt 1 is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to the plug & play guidelines.
Disabled Disables this function. No assignment.
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14, 15
PCI IRQ line 2 Under this option, the external PCI Auto-select The interrupt is automatically assigned according
interrupt 2 is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to the plug & play guidelines.
Disabled Disables this function. No assignment.
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14, 15
PCI IRQ line 3 Under this option, the external PCI Auto-select The interrupt is automatically assigned according
interrupt 3 is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to the plug & play guidelines.
Disabled Disables this function. No assignment.
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14, 15
PCI IRQ line 4 Under this option, the external PCI Auto-select The interrupt is automatically assigned according
interrupt 4 is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to the plug & play guidelines.
Disabled Disables this function. No assignment.
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14, 15

Table 254: 855GME (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration setting options

442 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Onboard LAN IRQ Under this option, the onboard LAN Auto-select The interrupt is automatically assigned according
line interrupt is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to the plug & play guidelines.
Disabled Disables this function. No assignment.
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14, 15
Onboard USB EHCI Under this option, the USB EHCI interrupt Auto-select The interrupt is automatically assigned according
IRQ line is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to the plug & play guidelines.
Disabled Disables this function. No assignment.
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14, 15
Default primary This option sets the first activated PCI A PCI graphics card is set as the default display
video adapter graphics card (either an existing AGP or device.
the PCI graphics card).
AGP An AGP graphics card is set as the default display
device.
Assign IRQ to SMB Use this function to set whether or not the Enabled Automatic assignment of a PCI interrupt.
SM (System Management) bus controller
is assigned a PCI interrupt. Disabled No assignment of an interrupt.

Table 254: 855GME (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 443

 Software • BIOS options

PCI device, slot #1

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

PCI Device, Slot #1 Item Specific Help

Option ROM Scan: [Enabled] Initialize device

Enable Master: [Enabled] expansion ROM
Latency Timer: [Default]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 213: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #1

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

ROM scan option Setting for the initialization of a device's Enabled Enables this function.
ROM.
Disabled Disables this function.
Enable master Sets the PCI device to be treated as the Enabled Enables this function.
PCI bus master. Not all PCI devices can
function as PCI bus master! Check device
description. Disabled Disables this function.
Latency timer This option controls how long one card Default Default setting. Default
can continue to use the PCI bus master
after another PCI card has requested 0020h, 0040h, 0060h, Value set manually.
access. 0080h, 00A0h, 00C0h,
00E0h

Table 255: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #1 - setting options

444 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

PCI device, slot #2

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

PCI Device, Slot #2 Item Specific Help

Option ROM Scan: [Enabled] Initialize device

Enable Master: [Enabled] expansion ROM
Latency Timer: [Default]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 214: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #2

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
ROM scan option Setting for the initialization of a device's Enabled Enables this function.
ROM.
Disabled Disables this function.
Enable master Sets the PCI device to be treated as the Enabled Enables this function.
PCI bus master. Not all PCI devices can
function as PCI bus master! Check device
description. Disabled Disables this function.
Latency timer This option controls how long one card Default Default setting. Default
can continue to use the PCI bus master
after another PCI card has requested 0020h, 0040h, 0060h, Value set manually.
access. 0080h, 00A0h, 00C0h,
00E0h

Table 256: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #2 - setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 445

 Software • BIOS options

PCI device, slot #3

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

PCI Device, Slot #3 Item Specific Help

Option ROM Scan: [Enabled] Initialize device

Enable Master: [Enabled] expansion ROM
Latency Timer: [Default]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 215: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #3

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

ROM scan option Setting for the initialization of a device's Enabled Enables this function.
ROM.
Disabled Disables this function.
Enable master Sets the PCI device to be treated as the Enabled Enables this function.
PCI bus master. Not all PCI devices can
function as PCI bus master! Check device
description. Disabled Disables this function.
Latency timer This option controls how long one card Default Default setting. Default
can continue to use the PCI bus master
after another PCI card has requested 0020h, 0040h, 0060h, Value set manually.
access. 0080h, 00A0h, 00C0h,
00E0h

Table 257: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #3 - setting options

446 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

PCI device, slot #4

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

PCI Device, Slot #4 Item Specific Help

Option ROM Scan: [Enabled] Initialize device

Enable Master: [Enabled] expansion ROM
Latency Timer: [Default]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 216: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #4

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
ROM scan option Setting for the initialization of a device's Enabled Enables this function.
ROM.
Disabled Disables this function.
Enable master Sets the PCI device to be treated as the Enabled Enables this function.
PCI bus master. Not all PCI devices can
function as PCI bus master! Check device
description. Disabled Disables this function.
Latency timer This option controls how long one card Default Default setting. Default
can continue to use the PCI bus master
after another PCI card has requested 0020h, 0040h, 0060h, Value set manually.
access. 0080h, 00A0h, 00C0h,
00E0h

Table 258: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #4 - setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 447

 Software • BIOS options

Memory cache

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

Memory Cache Item Specific Help

Memory Cache: [Enabled] Sets the state of the

Cache System BIOS area: [Write Protect] memory cache.
Cache Video BIOS area [Write Protect]
Cache Base 0-512k: [Write Back]
Cache Base 512k-640k: [Write Back]
Cache Extended Memory Area: [Write Back]
Cache D000 - D3FF: [Disabled]
Cache D40D - D7FF: [Disabled]
Cache DB00 - DBFF: [Disabled]
Cache DC00 - DFFF: [Disabled]
Cache E000 - E3FF: [Disabled]
Cache E400 - E7FF: [Disabled]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 217: 855GME (ETX) - memory cache

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Memory cache Enable/ disable utilization of the L2 cache. Enabled Enables this function.
Disabled Disables this function.
Cache system BIOS Set whether or not the system BIOS Write protect System BIOS is mapped in the cache.
area should be buffered.
Uncached System BIOS is not mapped in the cache.
Cache video BIOS Set whether or not the video BIOS should Write protect Video BIOS is mapped in the cache.
area be buffered.
Uncached Video BIOS is not mapped in the cache.
Cache base 0-512k Set whether the memory content should Disabled No mapping.
be mapped in the cache (0-512k), and
when necessary, written in the main Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
memory. cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.

Table 259: 855GME (ETX) Memory Cache setting options

448 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Cache base 512- Set whether the memory content should Disabled No mapping.
640k be mapped in the cache (512-640k), and
when necessary, written in the main Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
memory. cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.
Cache extended Configure how the memory content of the Disabled No mapping.
memory area system memory above 1MB should be
mapped. Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.
Cache D000 - D3FF Configure how the memory content of Disabled No mapping.
D000-D3FF should be mapped.
Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.
Cache D400 - D7FF Configure how the memory content of Disabled No mapping.
D400-D7FF should be mapped.
Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.
Cache D800 - DBFF Configure how the memory content of Disabled No mapping.
D800-DBFF should be mapped.
Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.

Section 4
Software
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.
Cache DC00 - DFFF Configure how the memory content of Disabled No mapping.
DC00-DFFF should be mapped.
Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.
Cache E000 - E3FF Configure how the memory content of Disabled No mapping.
E00-E3FF should be mapped.
Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.
Cache E400 - E7FF Configure how the memory content of Disabled No mapping.
E400-E7FF should be mapped.
Write through Memory content is simultaneously mapped in the
cache and written to the main memory.
Write protect Memory content is mapped in the cache.
Write back Memory content is mapped only when necessary.

Table 259: 855GME (ETX) Memory Cache setting options (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 449

 Software • BIOS options

I/O Device Configuration

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

I/O Device Configuration Item Specific Help

Local Bus IDE adapter: [Both] Enable the integrated

Primary IDE UDMA66/100 [Enabled] local bus IDE adapter
Secondary IDE UDMA66/100 [Enabled]
USB UHCI Host Controller 1: [Enabled]
USB UHCI Host Controller 2: [Enabled]
USB EHCI Host Controller: [Enabled]
Legacy USB Support: [Enabled]
AC97 Audio controller: [Enabled]
Onboard LAN controller: [Enabled]
Onboard LAN PXE ROM: [Disabled]

Serial port A: [Enabled]

Base I/O address: [3F8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 4]
Serial port B: [Enabled]
Mode: [Normal]
Base I/O address: [2F8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 3]
Parallet port: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: [378]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 218: 855GME (ETX) - I/O device configuration

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Local bus IDE Enable or disable one or both of the Disabled Deactivates both PCI IDE controllers (primary
adapter PCI IDE controllers (primary and and secondary).
secondary).
Primary Activates the primary IDE controller only.
Secondary Activates the secondary IDE controller only.
Both Activates both PCI IDE controllers (primary and
secondary).
Primary IDE Setup the data transfer rate for a device Disabled The maximum data transfer rate is UDMA33.
UDMA66/100 connected to the primary IDE channel.
This option is only available when a Enabled The maximum data transfer rate is UDMA66 or
primary IDE drive is connected. higher.

Secondary IDE Setup the data transfer rate for a device Disabled The maximum data transfer rate is UDMA33.
UDMA66/100 connected to the secondary IDE channel.
This option is only available when a Enabled The maximum data transfer rate is UDMA66.
secondary IDE drive is connected.

Table 260: 855GME (ETX) I/O Device Configuration setting options

450 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

USB UHCI host Configuration of USB UHCI controller 1 Disabled Deactivates the USB support.
controller 1 for USB port 0 und 1.
Enabled Activates the USB support.
USB UHCI host Configuration of the USB UHCI controller Disabled Deactivates the USB support.
controller 2 1 for USB port 2 and 3.
Can only be configured if the USB UHCI Enabled Activates the USB support.
controller 1 is activated.
USB UHCI host Configuration of the USB EHCI controller. Disabled Deactivates the USB support.
controller Can only be configured if the USB UHCI
controller 1 is activated.
Enabled When enabled, the USB 2.0 support is activated
as soon as a USB 2.0 device is connected to the
interface.
Legacy USB Support Here IRQs are assigned to the USB Disabled No IRQ assigned.
connections.
It is not possible to boot from a USB device (USB
stick, USB floppy, USB CD ROM, etc.)!
However, a connected USB keyboard can be
used to access and configure the BIOS setup,
boot menu or optional RAID boot menu. USB
devices will not function after completing the
BIOS POST routine. USB devices only work after
starting the operating system with USB support
(e.g. Windows XP). MS-DOS does not support
the use of USB devices.
Enabled IRQ assigned.
Booting from USB devices is now possible.
Supported USB devices work with MS-DOS (e.g.
USB keyboard, etc).
AC97 audio For turning the AC97 audio controller on Disabled AC97 sound is deactivated.
controller and off.
Enabled AC97 sound is activated.

Section 4
Software
Onboard LAN For turning the ICH4 on-board LAN Disabled Deactivates the LAN controller or the ETH1
controller controller (for ETH1) on and off. interface.
Enabled Activates the LAN controller or the ETH1
interface.
Onboard LAN PXE For turning the remote boot BIOS Disabled Disables this function.
ROM extension for the onboard LAN controller
(ETH1) on and off. Enabled Enables this function.

Serial port A For the configuration of serial port A Disabled Port A deactivated.
(COM1).
Enabled Port A activated. The base I/O addresses and the
interrupt must then be configured manually.
Auto Either BIOS or the operating system configures
the port automatically.
Base I/O address Selection of the base I/O address for port 3F8, 2F8, 3E8, 2E8 Base I/O address is manually assigned.
A.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for port A. IRQ 3, IRQ 4 Manual assignment of the interrupt.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.

Table 260: 855GME (ETX) I/O Device Configuration setting options (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 451

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Serial port B For the configuration of serial port B Disabled Port B deactivated.
(COM2).
Enabled Port A activated. The base I/O addresses and the
interrupt must then be configured manually.
Auto Either BIOS or the operating system configures
the port automatically.
Mode This option is for setting the serial port B Normal Serial port B is used as a standard interface.
as either a standard interface or as an
infrared interface. IR The serial interface is used as an infrared
interface, and allows data transfers up to 115
kBit/s.
Base I/O address Selection of the base I/O address for port 3F8, 2F8, 3E8, 2E8 Selected base I/O address is manually assigned.
B.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for port B. IRQ 3, IRQ 4 Selected interrupt is assigned.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Parallel port For configuring the hardware security key Disabled Deactivates the port.
(dongle), which accessed internally
through the parallel interface. Enabled Activates the port. The base I/O address must
then be set.
Auto First BIOS and then the operating system
configure the port automatically.
Base I/O address Selection of the base I/O address for the 378, 278, 3BC Base I/O address is manually assigned.
parallel port.

Table 260: 855GME (ETX) I/O Device Configuration setting options (Forts.)

452 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Keyboard features

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

Keyboard Features Item Specific Help

NumLock: [On] Selects Power-on state

Key Clck: [Disabled] for NumLock
Keyboard auto-repeat rate: [30/sec]
Keyboard auto-repeat delay: [1/2 sec]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 219: 855GME (ETX) Keyboard Features

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
NumLock This option sets the status On Numeric keypad is enabled.
of the numeric keypad when the the
system is booted. Off Only the cursor functions of the numerical keypad
are activated.
Auto Numeric keypad is activated, if present.
Key click Using this option, the clicking of the keys Disabled Disables this function.
can be turned on or off.
Enabled Enables this function.
Keyboard auto- For setting the speed of repetition when a 30/sec, 26.7/sec, Settings from 2 to 30 characters per second.
repeat rate key is held down. 21.8/sec, 18.5/sec,
13.3/sec, 10/sec, 6/sec,
2/sec
Keyboard auto- For setting the amount of delay after the 1/4 sec, 1/2 sec, 3/4 sec, Setting of the desired delay.
repeat delay key is pressed before the auto-repeat 1 sec
begins.

Table 261: 855GME (ETX) Keyboard Features setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 453

 Software • BIOS options

CPU board monitor

Information:
The displayed voltage values (e.g. core voltage, battery voltage) on this BIOS Setup
page represent uncalibrated information values. These cannot be used to draw any
conclusions about any hardware alarms or error conditions. The hardware
components used have automatic diagnostics functions that can be applied in the
event of error.

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

CPU Board Monitor Item Specific Help

VCC 3.3V Voltage = 3.37V All items on this menu

CPU Core Voltage = 1.05V cannot be modified in
5Vsb Voltage = 4.84V user mode, If any
Battery Voltage = 3.39V items require changes,
please consult your
CPU Temperature = +43°C/+109°F system Supervisor.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 220: 855GME (ETX) - CPU board monitor

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

VCC 3.3V voltage Displays the current voltage of the 3.3 volt None
supply (in volts).
CPU core voltage Displays the processor's core voltage (in None
volts).
5Vsb voltage Displays the 5 V standby voltage (in volts). None
Battery voltage Displays the battery voltage (in volts). None
CPU temperature Displays the processor's temperature (in None
degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit).

Table 262: 855GME (ETX) - CPU board monitor - setting options

454 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Miscellaneous

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

Miscellaneous Item Specific Help

Summary screen: [Enabled] Display system

QuickBoot Mode: [Enabled] configuration on boot
Extended Memory Testing: [Just zero it]
Dark Boot: [Disabled]
Halt On Errors: [Yes]
PS/2 Mouse: [Disabled]
Large Disk Access Mode: [DOS]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 221: 855GME (ETX) miscellaneous

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
Summary screen Set whether or not the system summary Enabled Enables this function.
screen should open when the system is
started (see figure 204 "855GME (ETX) Disabled Disables this function.
BIOS Summary Screen", on page 426).
QuickBoot mode Speeds up the booting process by Enabled Enables this function.
skipping several tests.
Disabled Disables this function.
Extended memory This function determines the method by Just zero it The main memory is quickly tested.
testing which the main memory over 1 MB is
tested. None The main memory is not tested at all.
Normal This option is only available when the function
"QuickBoot Mode" has been set to "disabled."
The main memory is tested more slowly than with
"Just zero It."
Dark boot Sets whether the diagnostics screen (see Enabled Enables this function. The diagnostics screen is
figure 203 "855GME (ETX) BIOS not displayed.
Diagnostics Screen", on page 426) should
be displayed when the system is started. Disabled Disables this function. The diagnostics screen is
displayed.

Table 263: 855GME (ETX) miscellaneous - setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 455

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Halt on errors This option sets whether the system Yes The system pauses. The system pauses every
should pause the Power On Self Test time an error is encountered.
(POST) when it encounters an error.
No The system does not pause. All errors are
ignored.
PS/2 mouse Sets whether the PS/2 mouse port should Disabled Deactivates the port.
be activated.
Enabled Activates the port. The IRQ12 is reserved, and is
not available for other components.
Large disk access This option is intended for hard discs with Other For non-compatible access (e.g. Novell, SCO
mode more than 1024 cylinders, 16 heads, and Unix.)
more than 63 sectors per track. Setting
options: DOS DOS For MS DOS compatible access.

Table 263: 855GME (ETX) miscellaneous - setting options

Main Board/Panel Features

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

Baseboard/Panel Features Item Specific Help

Panel Control
Baseboard Monitor
Legacy Devices

Versions
BIOS: R130
MTCX PX32: V1.63
MTCX FPGA: V1.19

Optimized ID: 00000010b

Device ID: 00001BB7h
Compatibility ID: 0000h
Serial Number: 70950173619
Product Name: 5PC600.SX02-01
User Serial ID: FFFFFFFFh

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 222: 855GME (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Panel control For special setup of connected panels. Enter Opens the submenu
See "Panel control", on page 458.
Main board monitor Display of various temperatures and fan Enter Opens the submenu
speeds. See "Main board monitor", on page 459.

Table 264: 855GME (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features setting options

456 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Legacy devices Enter Opens the submenu
See "Legacy devices", on page 461.
BIOS Displays the BIOS version. None -
MTCX PX32 Displays the MTCX PX32 firmware None -
version.
MTCX FPGA Displays the MTCX FPGA firmware None -
version.
Optimized ID Displays the DIP switch setting of the None -
configuration switch.
Device ID Displays the hexadecimal value of the None -
hardware device ID.
Compatibility ID Displays the version of the device within None -
the same B&R device code. This ID is
needed for Automation Runtime.
Serial Number Displays the B&R serial number. None -
Product name Displays the B&R model number. None -
User serial ID Displays the user serial ID. None -
This 8 digit hex value can be freely
assigned by the user (e.g. to give the
device a unique ID) and can only be
changed with using the "B&R Control
Center" via the ADI driver.

Table 264: 855GME (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 457

 Software • BIOS options

Panel control

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

Panel Control Item Specific Help

Select Panel Number: [ 0] Panel 0-14 = Panels

Version: V1.09 connected to Automation
Brightness: [100%] Panel Link or Monitor/
Temperature: 41°C/105°F Panel connector.
Fan Speed: 00 RPM
Keys/Leds: 128/128 Panel 15 = Panel
connected on Panel PC
Link.

Note: DVI and PPC Link

will show no valid
values.
On PPC Link only the
brightness option will
work.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 223: 855GME (ETX) Panel Control

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Select panel number Selection of the panel number for which 0 ... 15 Selection of panel 0 ... 15.
the values should be read out and/or Panel 15 is specifically intended for panel PC 700
changed. systems.
Version Displays the firmware version of the SDLR None -
controller.
Brightness For setting the brightness of the selected 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, For setting the brightness (in %) of the selected
panel. 100% panel. Changes take effect after saving and
restarting the system (e.g. by pressing <F10>).
Temperature Displays the selected panel's temperature None -
(in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit).
Fan speed Displays fan speed for the selected panel. None -
Keys/LEDs Displays the available keys and LEDs on None -
the selected panel.

Table 265: 855GME (ETX) Panel Control setting options

458 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Main board monitor

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

Baseboard Monitor Item Specific Help

CMOS Battery: N/A

Temperatures
I/O: 46°C/117°F
Power Supply: 38°C/100°F
Slide-In Drive 1: 32°C/90°F
Slide-In Drive 2: 00°C/32°F

Fan Speeds
Case 1: 00 RPM
Case 2: 00 RPM
Case 3: 00 RPM
Case 4: 00 RPM
CPU: 00 RPM

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 224: 855GME (ETX) - baseboard monitor

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
CMOS battery The status of the built-in CMOS battery is None -
displayed here.
Possible displays:
N/A - Not Available, GOOD - Battery OK,
BAD - Battery must be replaced.
For additional information on when status
displays are shown, see "Battery", on
page 158
I/O Displays the temperature in the I/O area in None -
degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Power supply Displays the temperature in the power None -
supply area in degrees Celsius and
Fahrenheit.
Slide-in drive 1 Displays the temperature of the slide-in None -
drive 1 in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Slide-in drive 2 Displays the temperature of the slide-in None -
drive 2 in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Case 1 Displays the fan speed of housing fan 1. None -
Case 2 Displays the fan speed of housing fan 2. None -

Table 266: 855GME (ETX) - baseboard monitor - setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 459

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Case 3 Displays the fan speed of housing fan 3. None -
Case 4 Displays the fan speed of housing fan 4. None -
CPU Displays the fan speed of the processor None -
fan.

Table 266: 855GME (ETX) - baseboard monitor - setting options (Forts.)

460 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Legacy devices

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Advanced

Legacy Devices Item Specific Help

COM C: [Enabled] Enable/Disable the

Base I/O address: [2E8] internal COM port
Interrupt: [IRQ 11] for touch.
COM D: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: [238] For detailed
Interrupt: [IRQ 7] description see user
COM E: [Enabled] manual.
Base I/O address: [2E8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 10]
CAN: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: 384/385h
Interrupt: [IRQ 10]

2nd LAN controller: [Enabled]

LAN1 MAC address: 00:E0:4B:12:91:EB

LAN2 MAC address: 00:60:65:02:F0:CF

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 225: 855GME (ETX) Legacy Devices

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
COM C Settings for the internal serial interfaces in Disabled Disables the interface.
the system. This setting activates the
touch screen in panel PC 700 systems, Enabled Enables the interface.
and, using SDL transfer technology, also
in Automation Panel 900 display units.
Base I/O address Selection of the base I/O address for the 238, 2E8, 2F8, 328, 338, Selected base I/O address is assigned.
COM C port. 3E8, 3F8
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for the COM C IRQ 3, IRQ 4, IRQ 5, IRQ Selected interrupt is assigned.
port. 7, IRQ 10, IRQ 11, IRQ
A yellow star indicates a conflict with 12
another device.
COM D Configuration of the COM D port for the Disabled Disables the interface.
serial interface of an automation panel link
slot. The interface is used to operate the
touch screen on connected Automation Enabled Enables the interface.
Panel 900 units.

Table 267: 855GME (ETX) Legacy Devices setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 461

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Base I/O address Configuration of the base I/O address for 238, 2E8, 2F8, 328, 338, Selected base I/O address is assigned.
the serial COM D port. 3E8, 3F8
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for the COM D IRQ 3, IRQ 4, IRQ 5, IRQ Selected interrupt is assigned.
port. 7, IRQ 10, IRQ 11, IRQ
A yellow star indicates a conflict with 12
another device.
COM E Configuration of the optional COM E port Disabled Disables the interface.
on a B&R add-on interface (IF option).
Enabled Enables the interface.
Base I/O address Configuration of the base I/O address for 238, 2E8, 2F8, 328, 338, Selected base I/O address is assigned.
the serial COM E port. 3E8, 3F8
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for the COM E IRQ 3, IRQ 4, IRQ 5, IRQ Selected interrupt is assigned.
port. 7, IRQ 10, IRQ 11, IRQ
A yellow star indicates a conflict with 12
another device.
LPT This setting is specific to B&R and should Disabled Disables the interface.
not be changed.
Enabled Enables the interface.
Base I/O address Configuration of the base I/O address for 278, 378, 3BC Selected base I/O address is assigned.
the optional LPT.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
CAN Configuration of the CAN port of a B&R Disabled Disables the interface.
add-on interface card.
Enabled Enables the interface.
Base I/O address 384/385h None -
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for the CAN port. IRQ 10 Selected interrupt is assigned.
NMI NMI interrupt is assigned.
2nd LAN controller For turning the onboard LAN controller Disabled Disables the controller.
(ETH2) on and off.
Enabled Enables the controller.
LAN1 MAC address Displays the MAC addresses for the ETH1 None -
network controller.
LAN2 MAC address Displays the MAC addresses for the ETH2 None -
network controller.

Table 267: 855GME (ETX) Legacy Devices setting options (Forts.)

462 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.2.6 Security

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

Item Specific Help

Supervisor Password Is: Clear
User Password Is: Clear
Supervisor Password
Set Supervisor Password: [Enter] controls access to the
Set User Password: [Enter] setup utility.

Diskette access: [Supervisor]

Fixed disk boot sector: [Normal]
Virus check reminder: [Disabled]
System backup reminder: [Disabled]
Password on boot: [Disabled]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 226: 855GME (ETX) Security Menu

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
Supervisor Displays whether or not a supervisor None Display set: A supervisor password has been set.
password is password has been set. Display clear: No supervisor password has been
set.
User password is Displays whether or not a user password None Display set: A user password has been set.
has been set. Display clear: No user password has been set.
Set supervisor To enter/change a supervisor password. Enter Press Enter and enter password two times. The
password A supervisor password is necessary to maximum 7 password must be 7 alphanumeric characters or
edit all BIOS settings. alphanumeric characters less.
- not case sensitive. Needed to enter BIOS setup.
To change the password, enter the old password
once and then the new password twice.
Set user password To enter/change a user password. A user Enter Press Enter and enter password two times. The
password allows the user to edit only maximum 7 password must be 7 alphanumeric characters or
certain BIOS settings. alphanumeric characters less.
- not case sensitive. Needed to enter BIOS setup.
To change the password, enter the old password
once and then the new password twice.

Table 268: 855GME (ETX) Security setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 463

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Diskette access Access to the diskette drive is controlled Supervisor Supervisor password is needed to access a
here. Either or the supervisor or the user diskette drive.
has access to it. Does not work with USB
diskette drives. User User password is needed to access a diskette
drive.
Fixed disk boot The boot sector of the primary hard drive Normal Write access allowed.
sector can be write protected against viruses
with this option. Write protect Boot sector is write protected.

Virus check This function opens a reminder when the Disabled Disables this function.
reminder system is started to scan for viruses.
Daily A reminder appears every day when the system
is started.
Weekly A reminder appears the first time the system is
started after every Sunday.
Monthly A reminder appears the first time the system is
started each month.
System backup This function opens a reminder when the Disabled Disables this function.
reminder system is started to create a system
backup. Daily A reminder appears every day when the system
is started.
Weekly A reminder appears the first time the system is
started after every Sunday.
Monthly A reminder appears the first time the system is
started each month.
Password at boot This function requires a supervisor or user Disabled Disables this function.
password when the system is started.
Only possible when a supervisor or user Enabled Enables this function.
password is enabled.

Table 268: 855GME (ETX) Security setting options (Forts.)

464 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.2.7 Power

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

Item Specific Help

Enable ACPI [Yes]

ACPI Control En/Disable ACPI BIOS

(Advance Configuration
Max CPU frequency: [1800MHz] and Power Interface)
Automatic Thermal Control Circuit: [TM2]

Power Savings: [Disabled]

Hard Disk Timeout: [Disabled]
Video Timeout: [Disabled]

Resume On Modem Ring: [Off]

Resume On Time: [Off]
Resume Time: [00:00:00]

Power supply: [ATX]

Power Button Function: [Power Off]
Power Loss Control [Power On]

Enable PME for WOL: [OS control]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Section 4
Software
Figure 227: 855GME (ETX) Power menu

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Enable ACPI This option turns the ACPI function Yes Enables this function.
(Advanced Configuration and Power
Interface) on or off. This is an advanced
plug & play and power management No Disables this function.
functionality.
ACPI control Configuration of specific limits. Enter Opens the submenu
See "ACPI control", on page 467
Max CPU frequency This option makes it possible to determine MHz processor Determining the frequency. Low heat build-up,
the maximum CPU frequency for Pentium frequency steps - therefore low processing power.
M processors. This option is not shown for depending on the
Celeron M processors. processor being used
Automatic thermal This function monitors the CPUs Disabled Disables this function.
control circuit temperature. If the maximum operating
temperature of the CPU is exceeded, the TM1 Operation with 50% load.
performance of the processor is throttled. TM2 Operation in accordance with Intel's Geyserville
specifications.

Table 269: 855GME (ETX) Main setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 465

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Power savings This function determines if and how the Disabled Deactivates the power savings function.
power save function is used.
Customized Power management is configured by adjusting
the individual settings.
Maximum power Maximum power savings function.
Savings
Maximum performance Power savings function to maximize
performance.
Standby timeout Set here when the system should enter Off No standby.
standby mode. During standby, various
devices and the display will be
deactivated. 1, 2, 4, 8 minutes Time in minutes until standby.
This option only available when "power
savings" is set to customized.
Auto suspend Set here when the system should enter Off No standby.
timeout suspend mode to save electricity.
This option only available when "power
savings" is set to customized. 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 60 Time in minutes until standby.
Minutes
Hard disk timeout Set here how long after the last access the Disabled Disables this function.
hard disk should enter standby mode.
This option only available when "power 10, 15, 30, 45 seconds Time in seconds until standby.
savings" is set to customized. 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15 Time in minutes until standby.
Minutes
Video timeout Disabled

Resume on modem If an external modem is connected to a Off Disables this function.

ring serial port and the telephone rings, the
system starts up. On Enables this function.

Resume on time This function enables the system to start Off Disables this function.
at the time set under "resume time."
On Enables this function.
Resume time Time setting for the option "resume on [00:00:00] Personal setting of the time in the format
time" (when the system should start up). (hh:mm:ss).
Power supply The type of power supply being used can ATX An ATX compatible power supply is being used.
be entered here.
AT An AT compatible power supply is being used.
Power button This option determines the function of the Power off Shuts down the system.
Function power button.
Sleep The system enters sleep mode.
Power Loss Control This option determines how the system Stay off The system does not turn back on. The system
reacts to a power outage. remains off until the power button is pressed.
Power-on The system turns back on.
Last State The system resumes the last state it was in
before the power outage.

Table 269: 855GME (ETX) Main setting options (Forts.)

466 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Enable PME for This option enables the PME (Power OS control Evaluation of the PME signal is only active if it has
WOL Management Event) signal for controlling been accordingly activated in the operating
the WOL (Wake On LAN) function for the system driver. The system can only be woken up
operating system. from the S4: hibernate mode - Suspend-to-Disk
This setting affects both Ethernet status.
interfaces (ETH1 and ETH2).
Enabled The function, WOL and the evaluation of the PME
signal is always enabled.
Disabled Disables the function - no WOL possible.

Table 269: 855GME (ETX) Main setting options (Forts.)

ACPI control

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Power

ACPI Control Item Specific Help

Active Trip Point: [Disabled] This value controls

Passive Cooling Trip Point: [90°C] the temperature of
Passive TC1 Value: [1] the ACPI Active Trip
Passive TC2 Value: [5] Point - the point
Passive TSP Value: [10] in which the OS will
Critical Trip Point [110°C] turn the CPU Fan on.

APIC - IO APIC Mode: [Disabled]

Section 4
Software
Native IDE Support: [Disabled]

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 228: 855GME (ETX) ACPI Control

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Active trip point With this function, an optional CPU fan Disabled Disables this function.
above the operating system can be set to
turn on when the CPU reaches the set 40 to 100°C Temperature setting for the active trip point. Can
temperature. be set in increments of 5°C.

Information:
This function is not supported by MS-
DOS.

Table 270: 855GME (ETX) ACPI Control setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 467

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Passive Cooling Trip With this function, a temperature can be Disabled Disables this function.
Point set at which the CPU automatically
reduces its speed. 40 to 100°C Temperature setting for the passive cooling trip
point. Can be set in increments of 5°C.
Information:
This function is not supported by MS-
DOS.
Passive TC1 Value Can only be set if a value was defined 1 .. 16 Can be defined in single steps
manually under the item "Passive cooling
trip point".
Passive TC2 Value Can only be set if a value was defined 1 .. 16 Can be defined in single steps
manually under the item "Passive cooling
trip point".
Passive TSP Value Can only be set if a value was defined 2 .. 30 Can be defined in double steps
manually under the item "Passive cooling
trip point".
Critical Trip Point With this function, a temperature can be 40 to 110°C Temperature setting for the critical trip point. Can
set at which the operating system be set in increments of 5°C.
automatically shuts itself down.

Information:
This function is not supported by MS-
DOS.
APIC - I/O APIC This option controls the functionality of the Disabled Disables the function
mode advanced interrupt controller in the
processor. Enabled Enables this function.
The activation of this option is only effective if it
takes place before the operating system
(Windows XP) is activated.
There are then 23 IRQs available.
Native IDE support The native IDE support offers the Disabled Disables this function.
possibility to make 4 hard disk controllers
(2 x primary ATA for a total of 4 devices,
and 2 x secondary ATA for another 2 Enabled Enables this function.
devices) accessible through Windows XP.

Information:
This function is not supported by MS-
DOS.

Table 270: 855GME (ETX) ACPI Control setting options (Forts.)

468 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.2.8 Boot

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

Item Specific Help

Boot priority order

1: IDE 0:
2: IDE 1: FUJITSU MHT2030AR-(PS) Keys used to view or
3: IDE CDROM:CD-224E-(SS) configure devices:
4: USB FDD: Up and Down arrows
5: USB KEY: select a device.
6: USB CDROM: <+> and <-> moves
7: IDE 2: the device up or down.
8: IDE 3: <f> and <r> specifies
Excluded from boot order: the device fixed or
: USB HDD: removeable.
: USB ZIP: <x> exclude or include
: USB LS120: the device to boot.
: PCI BEV: <Shift + 1> enables or
: PCI SCSI: disables a device.
: Bootable Add-In Cards: <1 - 4> Loads default
boot sequence.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 229: 855GME (ETX) Boot menu

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
1: IDE 0, IDE 1, Use the up arrow ↑ and down arrow ↓, to select
IDE 2, IDE 3, a device. Then, use the <+> und <-> keys to
2: IDE CD change the boot priority of the drive.
3: USB FDC, USB KEY
To add a device to the "boot priority order" list
USB CDROM
4: from the "excluded from boot order" list, use the
USB HDD, USB ZIP
<x> key. In the same way, the <x> key can move
USB LS120,
5: boot devices down out of the boot priority order.
PCI BEV, PCI SCSI,
The keys 1 - 4 can load preset boot sequences.
6: bootable add-in cards

7:
8:

Table 271: 855GME (ETX) Boot setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 469

 Software • BIOS options

1.2.9 Exit

0BR1 PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility R130

Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit

Item Specific Help

Exit Saving Changes
Exit Discarding Changes Exit System Setup and
Save Optimized Defaults save your changes to
Load Optimized Defaults CMOS.
Load Setup Defaults
Discard Changes
Save Changes

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Change Values F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 230: 855GME (ETX) - exit menu

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Exit saving changes BIOS setup is closed with this item. Yes / No
Changes made are saved in CMOS after
confirmation, and the system is rebooted.
Exit discarding With this item you can close BIOS setup Yes / No
changes without saving the changes made. The
system is then rebooted.
Save optimized Saves the BIOS values entered by the Yes / No
defaults customer.
Load optimized Loads into CMOS the BIOS values saved Yes / No
defaults by the customer.

Information:
Only shown if "Save Optimized
Defaults" has been executed.
Load setup defaults This item loads the BIOS setup defaults, Yes / No
which are defined by the DIP switch
settings. These settings are loaded for all
BIOS configurations.

Table 272: 855GME (ETX) - exit menu - setting options

470 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Discard Changes Should unknown changes have been Yes / No
made and not yet saved, they can be
discarded.
Save changes Settings are saved, and the system is not Yes / No
restarted.

Table 272: 855GME (ETX) - exit menu - setting options

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 471

 Software • BIOS options

1.2.10 Profile overview - BIOS default settings - 855GME (ETX)

If the function "load setup defaults" is chosen in the main BIOS setup menu, or if exit is selected
(or <F9> is pressed) in the individual setup screens, the following BIOS default settings are the
optimized values that will be used.

DIP switch position see Section 1.6 "Location of the DIP switch in APC620 system units", on
page 546).

ON DIP
39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 231: DIP switch on system unit

The first six DIP switches (1-6) are used to set the profiles. The rest (7,8) are reserved.

DIP switch setting

Number Optimized for 1 2 3 4 5 6 71) 81)
Profile 0 Automation PC 620 system units 5PC600.SX01-00. Off Off Off Off Off Off - -
Profile 1 Reserved On Off Off Off Off Off - -
Profile 2 Automation PC 620 system units 5PC600.SX02-00, 5PC600.SX02- Off On Off Off Off Off - -
01, 5PC600.SF03-00, 5PC600.SX05-00 and 5PC600.SX05-01.
Profile 3 Panel PC 700 system unit 5PC720.1043-00, 5PC720.1214-00, On On Off Off Off Off - -
5PC720.1505-00, 5PC720.1706-00, 5PC720.1906-00,
5PC781.1043-00, 5PC781.1505-00 and 5PC782.1043-00.
Profile 4 Panel PC 700 system unit 5PC720.1043-01, 5PC720.1214-01, Off Off On Off Off Off - -
5PC720.1505-01 and 5PC720.1505-02.

Table 273: 855GME (XTX) profile overview

1) Reserved.

The following pages provide an overview of the BIOS default settings for the different DIP switch
configurations.

Personal settings

If changes have been made to the BIOS defaults, they can be entered in the following tables for
backup.

472 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Main

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

System Time - - - - -

System Date - - - - -

SMART device monitoring Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

IDE channel 0 master

Type Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Multi-sector transfer - - - - -

LBA mode control - - - - -

32-bit I/O Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Transfer mode - - - - -

Ultra DMA mode - - - - -

SMART monitoring Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

IDE channel 0 slave

Type Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Multi-sector transfer - - - - -

LBA mode control - - - - -

32-bit I/O Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Transfer mode - - - - -

Ultra DMA mode - - - - -

SMART monitoring Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

IDE channel 1 master

Section 4
Software
Type Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Multi-sector transfer - - - - -

LBA mode control - - - - -

32-bit I/O Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Transfer mode - - - - -

Ultra DMA mode - - - - -

SMART monitoring Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

IDE channel 1 slave

Type Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Multi-sector transfer - - - - -

LBA mode control - - - - -

IDE channel 1 slave

32-bit I/O Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Transfer mode - - - - -

Ultra DMA mode - - - - -

SMART monitoring Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 274: 855GME (ETX) - main - profile setting overview

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 473

 Software • BIOS options

Advanced

Advanced chipset/graphics control

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Graphics engine 1 Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Default flat panel None None None None None

Flat panel scaling Stretched Stretched Stretched Stretched Stretched

Graphics engine 2 Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Graphics engine Graphics engine 1 Graphics engine 1 Graphics engine 1 Graphics engine 1 Graphics engine 1

Graphics memory size UMA = 8 MB UMA = 8 MB UMA = 8 MB UMA = 8 MB UMA = 8 MB

Assign IRQ to VGA Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Internal graphics API Rev - - - - -

Table 275: 855GME (ETX) - advanced chipset/graphics control - profile settings overview

PCI/PNP Configuration

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

PNP OS installed Yes No Yes Yes Yes

Reset configuration data No No No No No

Secured setup configuration Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

PCI IRQ line 1 Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select

PCI IRQ line 2 Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select

PCI IRQ line 3 Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select

PCI IRQ line 4 Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select

Onboard LAN IRQ line Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select

Onboard USB EHCI IRQ Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select

line
Default primary video PCI PCI PCI PCI PCI
adapter
Assign IRQ to SMB Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

PCI device, slot #1 Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

ROM scan option Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Enable master Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Latency timer Default Default Default Default Default

PCI device, slot #2

ROM scan option Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Enable master Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Table 276: 855GME (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration Profile settings overview

474 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Latency timer Default Default Default Default Default

PCI device, slot #3

ROM scan option Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Enable master Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Latency timer Default Default Default Default Default

PCI device, slot #4

ROM scan option Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Enable master Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Latency timer Default Default Default Default Default

Table 276: 855GME (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration Profile settings overview (Forts.)

Memory cache

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Memory cache Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Cache system BIOS area Write protect Write protect Write protect Write protect Write protect

Cache video BIOS area Write protect Write protect Write protect Write protect Write protect

Cache base 0-512k Write back Write back Write back Write back Write back

Cache base 512-640k Write back Write back Write back Write back Write back

Cache extended memory Write back Write back Write back Write back Write back
area
Cache D000 - D3FF Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Cache D400 - D7FF Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Section 4
Software
Cache D800 - DBFF Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Cache DC00 - DFFF Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Cache E000 - E3FF Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Cache E400 - E7FF Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 277: 855GME (ETX) - memory cache - profile settings overview

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 475

 Software • BIOS options

I/O Device Configuration

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Local bus IDE adapter Primary Both Both Primary Both

Primary IDE UDMA66/100 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Secondary IDE Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

UDMA66/100
USB UHCI host controller 1 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

USB UHCI host controller 2 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

USB UHCI host controller Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Legacy USB Support Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

AC97 audio controller Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Onboard LAN controller Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Onboard LAN PXE ROM Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Serial port A Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Base I/O address 3F8 3F8 3F8 3F8 3F8

Interrupt IRQ 4 IRQ 4 IRQ 4 IRQ 4 IRQ 4

Serial port B Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Mode Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal

Base I/O address 2F8 2F8 2F8 2F8 2F8

Interrupt IRQ 3 IRQ 3 IRQ 3 IRQ 3 IRQ 3

Parallel port Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Base I/O address 378 378 378 378 378

Table 278: 855GME (ETX) I/O Device Configuration Profile settings overview

Keyboard features

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

NumLock On On On On On

Key click Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Keyboard auto-repeat rate 30/sec 30/sec 30/sec 30/sec 30/sec

Keyboard auto-repeat delay 1/2 sec 1/2 sec 1/2 sec 1/2 sec 1/2 sec

Table 279: 855GME (ETX) - keyboard features - profile setting overview

476 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

CPU board monitor

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

VCC 3.3V voltage - - - - -

CPU core voltage - - - - -

5Vsb voltage - - - - -

Battery voltage - - - - -

CPU temperature - - - - -

Table 280: 855GME (ETX) - CPU board monitor - profile setting overview

Miscellaneous

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Summary screen Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

QuickBoot mode Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Extended memory testing Just zero it Just zero it Just zero it Just zero it Just zero it

Dark boot Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Halt on errors Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

PS/2 mouse Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Large disk access mode DOS DOS DOS DOS DOS

Table 281: 855GME (ETX) - miscellaneous - profile setting overview

Section 4
Main Board/Panel Features

Software
Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Versions - - - - -

BIOS - - - - -

MTCX - - - - -

FPGA - - - - -

Optimized ID - - - - -

Device ID - - - - -

Compatibility ID - - - - -

Serial Number - - - - -

Product name - - - - -

User serial ID - - - - -

Panel control
Select panel number 0 0 0 0 0

Version - - - - -

Brightness 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%

Table 282: 855GME (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features profile settings overview

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 477

 Software • BIOS options

Panel control Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Temperature - - - - -

Fan speed - - - - -

Keys/LEDs - - - - -

Main board monitor

CMOS battery - - - - -

Temperatures - - - - -

I/O - - - - -

Power supply - - - - -

Slide-in drive 1 - - - - -

Slide-in drive 2 - - - - -

Fan speeds - - - - -

Case 1 - - - - -

Case 2 - - - - -

Case 3 - - - - -

Case 4 - - - - -

CPU - - - - -

Legacy devices
COM C Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled

Base I/O address - 3E8h - 3E8h 3E8h

Interrupt - 11 - 11 11

COM D Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Base I/O address - - - - -

Interrupt - - - - -

COM E Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Base I/O address - - - - -

Interrupt - - - - -

LPT Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Base I/O address - - - - -

CAN Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Base I/O address - - - - -

Interrupt - - - - -

2nd LAN controller Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

LAN1 MAC address - - - - -

LAN2 MAC address - - - - -

Table 282: 855GME (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features profile settings overview (Forts.)

478 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Security

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Supervisor password is Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear

User password is Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear

Set supervisor password - - - - -

Set user password - - - - -

Diskette access Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor

Fixed disk boot sector Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal

Virus check reminder Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

System backup reminder Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Password at boot Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 283: 855GME (ETX) Security profile settings overview

Power

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Enable ACPI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Max CPU frequency Dependant on Dependant on Dependant on Dependant on Dependant on

processor processor processor processor processor

Automatic thermal control TM2 TM2 TM2 TM2 TM2

circuit
Power savings Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Standby timeout - - - - -

Section 4
Software
Auto suspend timeout - - - - -

Hard disk timeout Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Video timeout Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Resume on modem ring Off Off Off Off Off

Resume on time Off Off Off Off Off

Resume time 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00

Power supply ATX ATX ATX ATX ATX

Power button function Power off Power off Power off Power off Power off

Power Loss Control Power-on Power-on Power-on Power-on Power-on

Enable PME for WOL OS control OS control OS control OS control OS control

ACPI control
Active trip point Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Passive Cooling Trip Point Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Critical Trip Point 110°C 110°C 110°C 110°C 110°C

APIC - I/O APIC mode Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Native IDE support Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 284: 855GME (ETX) - power - profile setting overview

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 479

 Software • BIOS options

Boot

Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Personal settings

Boot priority order

1: IDE 0 PCI BEV IDE 0 IDE 0 IDE 0

2: IDE 1 IDE 0 IDE 1 IDE 1 IDE 1

3: IDE CD IDE 1 IDE CD IDE CD IDE CD

4: USB FDD IDE CD USB FDD USB FDD USB FDD

5: USB KEY USB FDD USB KEY USB KEY USB KEY

6: USB CDROM USB KEY USB CDROM USB CDROM USB CDROM

7: - USB CDROM IDE 2 - IDE 2

8: - - IDE 3 - IDE 3

Excluded from boot order

: IDE 2 IDE 2 USB HDD IDE 2 USB HDD

: IDE 3 IDE 3 USB ZIP IDE 3 USB ZIP

: USB HDD USB HDD USB LS120 USB HDD USB LS120

: USB ZIP USB ZIP PCI BEV USB ZIP PCI BEV

: USB LS120 USB LS120 PCI SCSI USB LS120 PCI SCSI

: PCI BEV PCI SCSI Bootable add-in PCI BEV Bootable add-in
cards cards

: PCI SCSI Bootable add-in - PCI SCSI

cards

: Bootable add-in - Bootable add-in

cards cards

Table 285: 855GME (ETX) - boot - profile setting overview

480 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.3 855GME (XTX) BIOS description

Information:
• The following diagrams and BIOS menu items including descriptions refer to
BIOS version 1.16. It is therefore possible that these diagrams and BIOS
descriptions do not correspond with the installed BIOS version.
• The setup defaults are the settings recommended by B&R. The setup defaults
are dependant on the DIP switch configuration on the baseboard (see section
1.3.10 "Profile overview - BIOS default settings - 855GME (XTX)", on
page 527).

1.3.1 General information

BIOS stands for "Basic Input Output System". It is the most basic standardized communication
between the user and the system (hardware). The BIOS system used in the Automation PC 620
systems is produced by American Megatrends Inc.

The BIOS Setup Utility lets you modify basic system configuration settings. These settings are
stored in CMOS and in EEPROM (as a backup).

The CMOS data is buffered by a battery, and remains in the APC620 even when the power is
turned off (no 24VDC supply).

1.3.2 BIOS setup and boot procedure

Section 4
Software
BIOS is immediately activated when switching on the power supply of the Automation PC 620
system or pressing the power button. The system checks if the setup data from the EEPROM is
"OK". If the data is "OK", then it is transferred to the CMOS. If the data is "not OK", then the
CMOS data is checked for validity. An error message is output if the CMOS data contains errors
and the boot procedure can be continued by pressing the <F1> key. To prevent the error
message from appearing at each restart, open the BIOS setup by pressing the <Del> key and
re-save the settings.

BIOS reads the system configuration information in CMOS RAM, checks the system, and
configures it using the Power On Self Test (POST).

When these "preliminaries" are finished, BIOS seeks an operating system in the data storage
devices available (hard drive, floppy drive, etc.). BIOS launches the operating system and hands
over control of system operations to it.

To enter BIOS Setup, the DEL key must be pressed as soon as the following message appears
on the monitor (during POST):

"Press DEL to run SETUP"

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 481

 Software • BIOS options

AMIBIOS(C)2003 American Megatrends, Inc.

[APC1R114] Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-Elektronik E1.16
Serial Number : 63485
CPU : Mobile Genuine Intel(R) processor 1100MHz
Speed : 1.10 Ghz

Press DEL to run Setup

Press F12 if you want to boot from the network
Press F11 for BBS POPUP
DDR Frequency 333 Mhz
Initializing USB Controllers ..

(C) American Megatrends, Inc.

64-0100-000001-00101111-082506-MONTARA-APC1R005-Y2KC
503C

Figure 232: 855GME (XTX) - BIOS diagnostics screen

1.3.3 BIOS setup keys

The following keys are enabled during the POST:

Key Function
ESC The system RAM check can be skipped by pressing ESC.
Del Enters the BIOS setup menu.
F12 Using the F12 key, you can boot from the network.
F11 Cues the boot menu. Lists all bootable devices that are connected to the system. With cursor ↑ and
cursor ↓ and by pressing <ENTER>, select the device from which will be booted.
<Pause> Pressing the <pause> key stops the POST. Press any other key to resume the POST.

Table 286: 855GME (XTX) - keys relevant to BIOS during POST

The following keys can be used after entering the BIOS setup:

Key Function
F1 General help
Cursor ↑ Moves to the previous item.
Cursor ↓ Go to the next item.
Cursor ← Moves to the previous item.
Cursor → Go to the next item.
+- Changes the setting of the selected function.

Table 287: 855GME (XTX) keys relevant to BIOS in the BIOS menu

482 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Key Function
Enter Changes to the selected menu.
PageUp ↑ Change to the previous page.
PageDown ↓ Change to the previous page.
Pos 1 Jumps to the first BIOS menu item or object.
End Jumps to the last BIOS menu item or object.
F2 / F3 The colors of the BIOS Setup are switched.
F7 Changes are reset.
F9 These settings are loaded for all BIOS configurations.
F10 Save and close.
Esc Exits the submenu.

Table 287: 855GME (XTX) keys relevant to BIOS in the BIOS menu (Forts.)

The following sections explain the individual BIOS main menu items in detail.

BIOS setup menu item Function From

page
Main You can configure the ground configuration time and date in this menu. 484
Advanced Advanced BIOS options such as cache areas, PnP, keyboard repeat rate, as well as 485
settings specific to B&R integrated hardware, can be configured here.
Boot The boot order can be set here. 518
Security For setting up the system's security functions. 520
Power Setup of various APM (Advanced Power Management) options. 523
Exit To end the BIOS setup. 525

Section 4
Software
Table 288: Overview of 855GME (XTX) BIOS menu items

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 483

 Software • BIOS options

1.3.4 Main

Immediately after the DEL button is pressed during startup, the main BIOS setup menu appears.

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Main Advanced Boot Security Power Exit

System Time [08:56:09] Use [ENTER], [TAB]

System Date [Tue 11/20/2007] or [SHIFT-TAB] to
select a field.
BIOS ID : APC1R116
Use [+] or [-] to
Processor : Mobile Genuine Intel(R) processor configure system Time.
CPU Frequency : 1100MHZ

System Memory : 504MB

Board Information Select Screen

Product Revision : A.0 Select Item
Serial Number : 63499 +- Change Field
BC Firmware Rev. : 904 Tab Select Field
MAC Address (ETH1): 00:13:95:00:1A:79 F1 General Help
Boot Counter : 7584 F10 Save and Exit
Running Time : 335h ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 233: 855GME (XTX) BIOS Main menu

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

System Time This is the current system time setting. Changes the Set the system time in the format (hh:mm:ss).
The time is buffered by a battery (CMOS System time
battery) after the system has been
switched off.
System Date This is the current system date setting. Changes the Set the system date in the format (mm:dd:yyyy).
The time is buffered by a battery (CMOS system date
battery) after the system has been
switched off.
BIOS ID Displays the BIOS recognition. None -
Processor Processor display. None -
CPU Frequency CPU frequency display. None -
System Memory System memory display. None -
Product Revision Displays the CPU board HW revision. None -
Serial Number Displays the CPU board serial number. None -
BC Firmware Rev. Displays the CPU board controller None -
firmware revision.
MAC Address Displays the assigned MAC address. None -
(ETH1)

Table 289: 855GME (XTX) Main menu setting options

484 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Boot Counter Boot counter display. None -
Running Time Runtime display. None -

Table 289: 855GME (XTX) Main menu setting options (Forts.)

1.3.5 Advanced

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Main Advanced Boot Security Power Exit

Advanced Settings

ACPI Configuration
PCI Configuration
Graphics Configuration
CPU Configuration
Chipset Configuration
I/O Interface Configuration
Clock Configuration
IDE Configuration
USB Configuration
Keyboard/Mouse Configuration Select Screen
Remote Access Configuration Select Item
CPU Board Monitor Enter Go to Sub Screen
Baseboard/Panel Features F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

Section 4
Software
v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 234: 855GME (XTX) Advanced menu

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

ACPI configuration Configures the APCI devices. Enter Opens the submenu
See "ACPI configuration", on page 486
PCI Configuration Configures PCI devices. Enter Opens the submenu
See "PCI Configuration", on page 488
Graphics Configures the graphics settings. Enter Opens the submenu
configuration See "Graphics configuration", on page 490
CPU configuration Configures the CPU settings. Enter Opens the submenu
See "CPU configuration", on page 492
Chipset Configures the chipset functions. Enter Opens the submenu
configuration See "Chipset configuration", on page 493
I/O interface Configures the I/O devices. Enter Opens the submenu
configuration See "I/O interface configuration", on page 494

Table 290: 855GME (XTX) Advanced menu setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 485

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Clock Configures the clock settings. Enter Opens the submenu
Configuration See "Clock Configuration", on page 496
IDE Configuration Configures the IDE functions. Enter Opens the submenu
See "IDE Configuration", on page 497
USB configuration Configures USB settings Enter Opens the submenu
See "USB configuration", on page 504
Keyboard/mouse Configures the keyboard/mouse options. Enter Opens the submenu
configuration See "Keyboard/mouse configuration", on
page 508
Remote access Configures the remote access settings Enter Opens the submenu
configuration See "Remote access configuration", on page 509
CPU board monitor Displays the current voltages and Enter Opens the submenu
temperature of the processor in use. See "CPU board monitor", on page 511
Main Board/Panel Displays device specific information and Enter Opens the submenu
Features setup of device specific values. See "Main Board/Panel Features", on page 512

Table 290: 855GME (XTX) Advanced menu setting options (Forts.)

ACPI configuration

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

ACPI Settings Enable / Disable

ACPI support for
ACPI Aware O/S [Yes] Operating System.

ACPI 2.0 Features [No] ENABLE: If OS

ACPI APIC support [Enabled] supports ACPI.

Active Cooling Trip Point [Disabled] DISABLE: If OS

Passive Cooling Trip Point [Disabled] does not support
Critical Trip Point [105°C] ACPI.

Watchdog ACPI Event [Shutdown]

Select Screen
GPE1 Function [No Function] Select Item
GPE2 Function [No Function] +- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 235: 855GME (XTX) Advanced ACPI Configuration

486 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

ACPI Aware O/S This function determines if the operating Yes The operating system supports ACPI.
system supports the ACPI function
(Advanced Configuration and Power No The operating system does not support ACPI.
Interface).
ACPI 2.0 features This function determines if the operating Yes The operating system supports ACPI 2.0.
system supports the ACPI 2.0
specifications. No The operating system does not support ACPI 2.0.

ACPI APIC support This option controls the support of the Enabled Enables this function.
advanced programmable interrupt
controller in the processor. Disabled Disables the function

Active Cooling Trip With this function, an optional CPU fan Disabled Disables this function.
Point above the operating system can be set to
turn on when the CPU reaches the set 50°C, 60°C, 70°C, 80°C, Temperature setting for the active trip point.
temperature. 90°C Can be set in increments of 10°C.

Passive Cooling Trip With this function, a temperature can be Disabled Disables this function.
Point set at which the CPU automatically
reduces its speed. 50°C, 60°C, 70°C, 80°C, Temperature setting for the active trip point.
90°C Can be set in increments of 10°C.
Critical Trip Point With this function, a temperature can be 80°C, 85°C, 90°C, 95°C, Temperature setting for the critical trip point.
set at which the system automatically 100°C, 105°C, 110°C Can be set in increments of 5°C.
shuts itself down.
Watchdog ACPI System monitoring of the ACPI function. Shutdown The system is shut down.
event
Restart Restarts the system.
GPE1 function Setting the GPE1 function. No function Not used.
Lid switch -
GPE2 function Setting the GPE2 function. No function Not used.
Sleep button -

Section 4
Software
Table 291: 855GME (XTX) Advanced ACPI Configuration setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 487

 Software • BIOS options

PCI Configuration

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Advanced PCI/PnP Settings NO: lets the BIOS

configure all the
Plug & Play O/S [Yes] device in the system.
PCI Latency Timer [64] YES: lets the
Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] operating system
Allocate IRQ to SMBUS HC [Yes] configure Plug and
Play (PnP) devices not
PCI Interrupt Routing required for boot if
your system has a Plug
PIRQ A (UHCI1+VGA) [5] and Play operating
PIRQ B (INTD+AC97+SMBus) [6] system.
PIRQ C (INTC+UHCI3+NATA) [7]
PIRQ D (UHCI2) [Auto] Select Screen
PIRQ E (Onboard ETH1 LAN) [Auto] Select Item
PIRQ F (INTA+ETH2 LAN) [Auto] +- Change Option
PIRQ G (INTB) [Auto] F1 General Help
PIRQ H (EHCI) [Auto] F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit
1st Exclusive PCI IRQ [None]
2nd Exclusive PCI IRQ [None]
3rd Exclusive PCI IRQ [None]

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 236: 855GME (XTX) Advanced PCI Configuration

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Plug & Play O/S BIOS is informed if Plug & Play is capable Yes The operating system handles the distribution of
on the operating system. resources.
No BIOS handles the distribution of resources.
PCI Latency Timer This option controls how long one card 32, 64, 96, 128, 160, Value set manually.
can continue to use the PCI bus master 192, 224, 248
after another PCI card has requested
access.
Allocate IRQ to PCI This function is used to determine if an Yes Automatic assignment of an interrupt.
VGA interrupt is assigned to the PCI VGA.
No No assignment of an interrupt.
Allocate IRQ to Use this function to set whether or not the Yes Automatic assignment of a PCI interrupt.
SMBUS HC SM (System Management) bus controller
is assigned a PCI interrupt. No No assignment of an interrupt.

PIRQ A Under this option, the external PCI Auto The interrupt is automatically assigned according
(UHCI1+VGA) interrupt A is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to Plug & Play guidelines.
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Manual configuration of the IRQ.
PIRQ B Under this option, the external PCI Auto The interrupt is automatically assigned according
(INTD+AC97+SMBu interrupt B is assigned to and ISA to Plug & Play guidelines.
s) interrupt.
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Manual configuration of the IRQ.

Table 292: 855GME (XTX) Advanced PCI Configuration setting options

488 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

PIRQ C Under this option, the external PCI Auto The interrupt is automatically assigned according
(INTC+UHCI3+NAT interrupt C is assigned to and ISA to Plug & Play guidelines.
A) interrupt.
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Manual configuration of the IRQ.
PIRQ D (UHCI2) Under this option, the external PCI Auto The interrupt is automatically assigned according
interrupt D is assigned to and ISA to Plug & Play guidelines.
interrupt.
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Manual configuration of the IRQ.
PIRQ E (Onboard Under this option, the external PCI Auto The interrupt is automatically assigned according
ETH1 LAN) interrupt E is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to Plug & Play guidelines.
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Manual configuration of the IRQ.
PIRQ F (INTA+ETH2 Under this option, the external PCI Auto The interrupt is automatically assigned according
LAN) interrupt F is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to Plug & Play guidelines.
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Manual configuration of the IRQ.
PIRQ G (INTB) Under this option, the external PCI Auto The interrupt is automatically assigned according
interrupt G is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to Plug & Play guidelines.
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Manual configuration of the IRQ.
PIRQ H (EHCI) Under this option, the external PCI Auto The interrupt is automatically assigned according
interrupt H is assigned to an ISA interrupt. to Plug & Play guidelines.
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Manual configuration of the IRQ.
1st exclusive PCI With this option you can determine if the None No interrupt is assigned.
IRQ IRQ assigned to the PIRQ x is handled
exclusively (no IRQ sharing). x Assigns the PIRQ as 1st exclusive PCI IRQ.

Information:
Is only displayed if a PIRQ is manually
set (e.g. 5).

Section 4
Software
2nd exclusive PCI With this option you can determine if the None No interrupt is assigned.
IRQ IRQ assigned to the PIRQ x is handled
exclusively (no IRQ sharing). x Assigns the PIRQ as 2nd exclusive PCI IRQ.

Information:
Only displayed when two PIRQs are set
manually.
3rd exclusive PCI With this option you can determine if the None No interrupt is assigned.
IRQ IRQ assigned to the PIRQ x is handled
exclusively (no IRQ sharing). x Assigns the PIRQ as 3rd exclusive PCI IRQ.

Information:
Only displayed in connection with
"Profile 5" and if three PIRQs are set
manually.

Table 292: 855GME (XTX) Advanced PCI Configuration setting options (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 489

 Software • BIOS options

Graphics configuration

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Graphics Configuration Enable or disable

the internal
Graphics Engine 1 [Enabled] graphics device
Default Flat Panel [Auto-EDID]
Graphics Driver EDID Support [Disabled]
Flat Panel Scaling [Stretched]

Graphics Engine 2 [Enabled]

Primary Graphics Engine [Graphics Engine 1]

Boot Graphics Device [Auto]
Graphics Memory Size [Enabled, 8MB]
Init. Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI/Int-VGA] Select Screen
Graphics Aperture Size [ 64MB] Select Item
DVI HotPlug Persistence [Enabled] +- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 237: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Graphics Configuration

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Graphics engine 1 The onboard graphics controller 1 is Enabled Enables this function.
activated/deactivated here.
Disabled Disables this function.
Default flat panel Settings can be made for the resolution. Auto-EDID Automatic setting of the resolution (using
a read-out of the connected panel's EDID data).
VGA 1x18 (002h) VGA = 640 x 480 resolution
VGA 1x18 (013h) SVGA = 800 x 600 resolution
SVGA 1x18 (004h) XGA = 1024 x 768 resolution
XGA 1x18 (006h) SXGA = 1280 x 1024 resolution
XGA 2x18 (007h) UXGA = 1600 x 1200 resolution
XGA 1x24 (008h)
XGA 2x24 (012h)
SXGA 2x24 (00Ah)
UXGA 2x24 (00Ch)
Customized EDID 1 Graphics card reads the EDID 1 data.
Customized EDID 2 Graphics card reads the EDID 2 data.
Customized EDID 3 Graphics card reads the EDID 3 data.
Graphics driver If this function is enabled, the following Enabled Enables this function.
EDID support operating system graphics driver can read
EDID data on its own. When disabled, the Disabled Disables this function.
VGA data is taken over by BIOS.

Table 293: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Graphics Configuration setting options

490 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Flat panel scaling The screen optimization of the flat screen Centered Screen output centered.
is determined here.
Stretched Screen output adjusted.
Graphics engine 2 Settings can be made for the onboard Enabled Enables this function.
graphics controller 2.
Disabled Disables this function.
Graphics engine The primary onboard graphics controller Graphics engine 1 Activation of graphics engine 1
can be selected here.
Graphics engine 2 Activation of graphics engine 2
Boot graphics device You can select which display mode should Auto Display mode selected automatically.
be booted here.
CRT only Only CRT is booted.
Engine 2 only Only engine 2 is booted.
CRT + Engine 2 CRT and engine 2 are booted.
Engine 1 only Only engine 1 is booted.
CRT + Engine 1 CRT and engine 1 are booted.
Graphics memory Reserves a memory location in the RAM Enabled, 1MB 1 MB main memory is reserved for the onboard
size for the onboard graphics controller, into video controller.
which the memory access will be directed. Controller reserved.
Enabled, 4MB 4 MB main memory is reserved for the onboard
video controller.
Controller reserved.
Enabled, 8MB 8 MB main memory is reserved for the onboard
video controller.
Controller reserved.
Enabled, 16MB 16 MB main memory is reserved for the onboard
video controller.
Enabled, 32MB 32 MB main memory is reserved for the onboard

Section 4
Software
video controller.
Init. Graphic adapter This option allows you to set which PCI/Int-VGA PCI/Int-VGA adapter is first installed.
priority graphics card should be initialized first.
Internal VGA Internal VGA adapter is first installed.
Graphics aperture Reserves a memory location in the RAM 64MB, 128MB, 256MB Value set manually.
size for the graphics card.

Information:
The size with the best performance is
the same size as the working memory.
DVI HotPlug Affects both graphics engines. When Enabled Enables this function.
persistence enabled, the operating system graphics
driver attempts to restore the most recent Disabled Disables this function.
configuration.

Table 293: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Graphics Configuration setting options (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 491

 Software • BIOS options

CPU configuration

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Configure advanced CPU settings Maximum: CPU speed

is set to maximum.
Manufacturer:Intel Minimum: CPU speed
Brand String:Mobile Genuine Intel(R) processor is set to minimum.
Frequency :1.10GHz Automatic: CPU speed
FSB Speed :400MHz controlled by
Operating system.
Cache L1 :32 KB Disabled: Default CPU
Cache L2 :1024 KB speed.

Intel(R) SpeedStep(tm) tech. [Automatic] Select Screen

Max. CPU Frequency [1100 Mhz] Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 238: 855GME (XTX) Advanced CPU Configuration

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Manufacturer Manufacturer's display. None -
Brand string Display of CPU values None -
Frequency Processor speed display None -
FSB speed Cycle display of all addressed None -
components. (Front side bus)
L1 cache Displays first level cache memory area. None -
L2 cache Displays first level cache memory area. None -
Intel (R) SpeedStep The computing capacity can be set with Maximum speed Maximum computing capacity
(tm) tech. this option.
Minimum speed Minimum computing capacity.
Automatic Computing capacity selected automatically.
Disabled Disables this function.
Max. CPU frequency The maximum CPU speed can be set 1100 MHz, 1000 MHz, Value set manually.
here. 900 MHz, 800 MHz,
600 MHz;
Information:
Is only visible if the "Intel (R)
SpeedStep (tm) tech." option is set to
automatic or maximum speed.

Table 294: 855GME (XTX) Advanced CPU Configuration setting options

492 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Chipset configuration

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Advanced Chipset Settings Enable / Disable the

ICH4 IOAPIC function.
IOAPIC [Enabled]
APIC ACPI SCI IRQ [Disabled]

Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 239: 855GME (XTX) - advanced chipset configuration

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
IOAPIC This option is used to activate or Disabled Deactivates this function.
deactivate the APIC (Advanced
Programmable Interrupt Controller). Enabled Activates this function.

Information:
The IRQ resources available to the
system are expanded when the APIC
mode is enabled.
APIC ACPI SCI IRQ This option is used to activate or Disabled Deactivates this function.
deactivate the APIC (Advanced
Programmable Interrupt Controller). Enabled Activates this function.

Information:
The IRQ resources available to the
system are expanded when the APIC
mode is enabled.

Table 295: 855GME (XTX) - advanced chipset - setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 493

 Software • BIOS options

I/O interface configuration

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

I/O Interface Configuration Enable/Disable

OnBoard Ac’97 Audio.
OnBoard AC’97 Audio [Enabled]
OnBoard LAN (ETH1) [Enabled]

Serial Port1 Configuration [3F8/IRQ4]

Serial Port2 Configuration [2F8/IRQ3]
Serial Port2 Mode [IrDA]
IR Duplex Mode [Half Duplex]
IR I/O Pin Select [IRRX/IRTX]
Parallel Port Address [378]

Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 240: 855GME (XTX) I/O Interface Configuration

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

OnBoard AC'97 For turning the Onboard AC'97 audio Enabled Enables AC'97 sound.
Audio controller on and off.
Disabled Disables AC'97 sound.
Onboard LAN For turning the on-board LAN controller Disabled Deactivates the LAN controller or the ETH1
(ETH1) (for ETH1) on and off. interface.
ETH1 interface.
Enabled Deactivates the LAN controller or the ETH1
interface.
ETH1 interface.
Serial port 1 For the configuration of serial port 1 Disabled Port 1 deactivated.
configuration (COM1).
3F8/IRQ4 Assignment of the base I/O address and the
interrupt.
3E8 / IRQ4 Assignment of the base I/O address and the
interrupt.
Serial port 2 For the configuration of serial port 2 Disabled Port 1 deactivated.
configuration (COM1).
2F8/IRQ3 Assignment of the base I/O address and the
interrupt.
2E8 / IRQ3 Assignment of the base I/O address and the
interrupt.

Table 296: 855GME (XTX) Advanced I/O Interface Configuration setting options

494 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Serial port 2 mode This option is for setting the serial port B Normal Standard interface.
as either a standard interface or as an
infrared interface (not currently IrDA IrDA interface (compliant serial infrared port).
supported). ASK IR Interface for IR devices (amplitude shift keyed
infrared port).
IR duplex mode The interface duplex drive can be Half-duplex Half-duplex drive.
configured with this option.
Full-duplex Full-duplex drive.
Information:
Only visible if the "Serial Port2 Mode"
function is set to IrDA or ASK IR.
IR I/O pin select With this option, the infrared (IR) function IRRX/IRTX An internal infrared device is used.
on the on-board I/O chip can be
determined. SINB/SOUTB An external infrared device is used.

Information:
Only visible if the "Serial Port2 Mode"
function is set to IrDA or ASK IR.
Parallel port address The address of the parallel interface can Disabled Deactivates the port.
be defined with this option.
378, 278, 3BC Manual assignment of the port address.
Information:
Address is automatically set, even if
the function is disabled.

Table 296: 855GME (XTX) Advanced I/O Interface Configuration setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 495

 Software • BIOS options

Clock Configuration

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Clock Configuration Enable clock

modulation to reduce
Spread Spectrum [Disabled] EMI.
Unused PCI Slot Clocks [Enabled]

Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 241: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Clock Configuration

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Spread spectrum With this option, the cycle frequency can Disabled Disables this function.
be modulated by reducing
electromagnetic disturbances. Enabled Enables this function.

Unused PCI slot This option activates or deactivates the Disabled Disables this function.
clocks unused PCl slot cycle.
Enabled Enables this function.

Table 297: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Clock Configuration setting options

496 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

IDE Configuration

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

IDE Configuration DISABLED: disables the

integrated IDE
OnBoard PCI IDE Controller [Both] Controller.
OnBoard PCI IDE Operate Mode [Legacy Mode] PRIMARY:enables only
the Primary IDE
Primary IDE Master : [Not Detected] Controller.
Primary IDE Slave : [Not Detected] SECONDARY: enables
Secondary IDE Master : [Not Detected] only the Secondary IDE
Secondary IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Contoller.
BOTH: enables both IDE
Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] Controllers.
IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35]
ATA(PI) 80Pin Cable Detection [Host & Device] Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 242: 855GME (XTX) Advanced IDE Configuration

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
OnBoard PCI IDE Both the IDE controllers found on the Disabled Disables this function.
controller board can be configured here.
Primary Activates the primary IDE channel.
Secondary Activates the secondary IDE channel.
Both Activates both IDE channels (primary and
secondary).
OnBoard PCI IDE The PCI IDE operate mode found on the Legacy mode Activates legacy mode
operate mode board is configured here.
Native mode Activates the native mode (suited for Windows
XP and Windows 2000).
Primary IDE Master The drive in the system that is connected Enter Opens the submenu
to the IDE primary master port is See "Primary IDE Master", on page 498
configured here.
Primary IDE slave The drive in the system that is connected Enter Opens the submenu
to the IDE primary slave port is configured See "Primary IDE slave", on page 500
here.
Secondary IDE The drive in the system that is connected Enter Opens the submenu
Master to the IDE secondary master port is See "Secondary IDE Master", on page 501
configured here.

Table 298: 855GME (XTX) Advanced IDE Configuration setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 497

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Secondary IDE The drive in the system that is connected Enter Opens the submenu
slave to the IDE secondary slave port is See "Secondary IDE slave", on page 503
configured here.
Hard disk write Write protection for the hard drive can be Disabled Disables this function.
protect enabled/disabled here.
Enabled Enables this function.
IDE Detect Time Out Configuring the time overrun limit value for 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, Value set manually.
(Sec) the ATA/ATAPI device identification. 35
ATA (PI) 80 pin cable Detects whether an 80 pin cable is Host & device Using both IDE controllers (motherboard, disk
detection connected to the drive, the controller or to drive).
both.
Host Using the IDE controller motherboard.
Information: Device Using the IDE disk drive controller.
This cable should be used whenever
possible, otherwise error messages
will appear.

Table 298: 855GME (XTX) Advanced IDE Configuration setting options (Forts.)

Primary IDE Master

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Primary IDE Master Select the type

of device connected
Device :Not Detected to the system.

Type [Auto]
LBA/Large Mode [Auto]
Block (Multi-Sector Transfer) [Auto]
PIO Mode [Auto]
DMA Mode [Auto]
S.M.A.R.T. [Auto]
32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled]

Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 243: 855GME (XTX) Primary IDE Master

498 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Type The type of drive connected to the primary Not installed No drive installed.
master is configured here.
Auto Automatic recognition of the drive and setup of
appropriate values.
CD/DVD CD -/ DVD drive.
ARMD ARMD - drive (zip drive)
LBA/Large Mode This option activates the logical block Disabled Disables this function.
addressing / large mode for IDE.
Auto Automatic enabling of this function when
supported by the system.
Block (Multi-Sector This option enables the block mode for Disabled Disables this function.
Transfer) IDE hard drives. When this option is
enabled, the number of blocks per request Auto Automatic enabling of this function when
from the configuration sector of the hard supported by the system.
drive is read.
PIO Mode The PIO mode determines the data rate of Auto Automatic configuration of PIO mode.
the hard drive.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Manual configuration of PIO mode.
Information:
The higher the PIO mode, the shorter
the data cable must be.
DMA Mode The data transfer rate to and from the Auto Automatic definition of the transfer rate.
primary master drive is defined here.
The DMA mode must be activated in the SWDMA0, SWDMA1, Manual definition of the transfer rate.
Windows device manager in order to SWDAM2, MWDMA0,
guarantee maximum performance. Only MWDMA1, MWDMA2;
possible when manually setting up the
drive.
S.M.A.R.T. Monitoring function of modern hard drives Auto Automatic detection and enabling.
(self-monitoring, analysis and reporting

Section 4
Software
technology). Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
32 Bit Data Transfer This function enables 32-bit data transfer. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.

Table 299: 855GME (XTX) Primary IDE Master setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 499

 Software • BIOS options

Primary IDE slave

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Primary IDE Slave Select the type

of device connected
Device :Not Detected to the system.

Type [Auto]
LBA/Large Mode [Auto]
Block (Multi-Sector Transfer) [Auto]
PIO Mode [Auto]
DMA Mode [Auto]
S.M.A.R.T. [Auto]
32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled]

Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 244: 855GME (XTX) - primary IDE slave

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Type The type of drive connected to the primary Not installed No drive installed.
slave is configured here.
Auto Automatic recognition of the drive and setup of
appropriate values.
CD/DVD CD -/ DVD drive
ARMD ARMD - drive (zip drive)
LBA/Large Mode This option activates the logical block Disabled Disables this function.
addressing / large mode for IDE.
Auto Automatic enabling of this function when
supported by the system.
Block (Multi-Sector This option enables the block mode for Disabled Disables this function.
Transfer) IDE hard drives. When this option is
enabled, the number of blocks per request Auto Automatic enabling of this function when
from the configuration sector of the hard supported by the system.
drive is read.
PIO Mode The PIO mode determines the data rate of Auto Automatic configuration of PIO mode.
the hard drive.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Manual configuration of PIO mode.
Information:
The higher the PIO mode, the shorter
the data cable must be.

Table 300: 855GME (XTX) - primary IDE slave - setting options

500 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

DMA Mode The data transfer rate to and from the Auto Automatic definition of the transfer rate.
primary slave drive is defined here.
The DMA mode must be activated in the SWDMA0, SWDMA1, Manual definition of the transfer rate.
Windows device manager in order to SWDAM2, MWDMA0,
guarantee maximum performance. Only MWDMA1, MWDMA2;
possible when manually setting up the
drive.
S.M.A.R.T. Monitoring function of modern hard drives Auto Automatic detection and enabling.
(self-monitoring, analysis and reporting
technology). Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
32 Bit Data Transfer This function enables 32-bit data transfer. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.

Table 300: 855GME (XTX) - primary IDE slave - setting options

Secondary IDE Master

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Secondary IDE Master Select the type

of device connected
Device :Not Detected to the system.

Type [Auto]
LBA/Large Mode [Auto]

Section 4
Software
Block (Multi-Sector Transfer) [Auto]
PIO Mode [Auto]
DMA Mode [Auto]
S.M.A.R.T. [Auto]
32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled]

Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 245: 855GME (XTX) Secondary IDE Master

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 501

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Type The type of drive connected to the Not installed No drive installed.
secondary master is configured here.
Auto Automatic recognition of the drive and setup of
appropriate values.
CD/DVD CD -/ DVD drive
ARMD ARMD - drive (zip drive)
LBA/Large Mode This option activates the logical block Disabled Disables this function.
addressing / large mode for IDE.
Auto Automatic enabling of this function when
supported by the system.
Block (Multi-Sector This option enables the block mode for Disabled Disables this function.
Transfer) IDE hard drives. When this option is
enabled, the number of blocks per request Auto Automatic enabling of this function when
from the configuration sector of the hard supported by the system.
drive is read.
PIO Mode The PIO mode determines the data rate of Auto Automatic configuration of PIO mode.
the hard drive.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Manual configuration of PIO mode.
Information:
The higher the PIO mode, the shorter
the data cable must be.
DMA Mode The data transfer rate to and from the Auto Automatic definition of the transfer rate.
secondary master drive is defined here.
The DMA mode must be activated in the SWDMA0, SWDMA1, Manual definition of the transfer rate.
Windows device manager in order to SWDAM2, MWDMA0,
guarantee maximum performance. Only MWDMA1, MWDMA2;
possible when manually setting up the
drive.
S.M.A.R.T. Monitoring function of modern hard drives Auto Automatic detection and enabling.
(self-monitoring, analysis and reporting
technology). Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
32 Bit Data Transfer This function enables 32-bit data transfer. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.

Table 301: 855GME (XTX) Secondary IDE Master setting options

502 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Secondary IDE slave

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Secondary IDE Slave Select the type

of device connected
Device :Not Detected to the system.

Type [Auto]
LBA/Large Mode [Auto]
Block (Multi-Sector Transfer) [Auto]
PIO Mode [Auto]
DMA Mode [Auto]
S.M.A.R.T. [Auto]
32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled]

Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 246: 855GME (XTX) Secondary IDE Slave

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
Type The type of drive connected to the Not installed No drive installed.
secondary slave is configured here.
Auto Automatic recognition of the drive and setup of
appropriate values.
CD/DVD CD -/ DVD drive
ARMD ARMD - drive (zip drive)
LBA/Large Mode This option activates the logical block Disabled Disables this function.
addressing / large mode for IDE.
Auto Automatic enabling of this function when
supported by the system.
Block (Multi-Sector This option enables the block mode for Disabled Disables this function.
Transfer) IDE hard drives. When this option is
enabled, the number of blocks per request Auto Automatic enabling of this function when
from the configuration sector of the hard supported by the system.
drive is read.
PIO Mode The PIO mode determines the data rate of Auto Automatic configuration of PIO mode.
the hard drive.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Manual configuration of PIO mode.
Information:
The higher the PIO mode, the shorter
the data cable must be.

Table 302: 855GME (XTX) Secondary IDE Slave setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 503

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

DMA Mode The data transfer rate to and from the Auto Automatic definition of the transfer rate.
secondary slave is defined here.
The DMA mode must be activated in the SWDMA0, SWDMA1, Manual definition of the transfer rate.
Windows device manager in order to SWDAM2, MWDMA0,
guarantee maximum performance. Only MWDMA1, MWDMA2;
possible when manually setting up the
drive.
S.M.A.R.T. Monitoring function of modern hard drives Auto Automatic detection and enabling.
(self-monitoring, analysis and reporting
technology). Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
32 Bit Data Transfer This function enables 32-bit data transfer. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.

Table 302: 855GME (XTX) Secondary IDE Slave setting options (Forts.)

USB configuration

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

USB Configuration Enables USB host

controllers.
USB Devices Enabled :
1 Mouse, 2 Hubs

USB Function [4 USB Ports]

Legacy USB Support [Enabled]
USB Keyboard Legacy Support [Enabled]
USB Mouse Legacy Support [Enabled]
USB Storage Device Support [Enabled]
Port 64/60 Emulation [Disabled] Select Screen
USB 2.0 Contoller [Enabled] Select Item
USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] +- Change Option
BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Enabled] F1 General Help
USB Beep Message [Enabled] F10 Save and Exit
USB Stick Default Emulation [Auto] ESC Exit
USB Mass Storage Reset Delay [20 Sec]

USB Mass Storage Device Configuration

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 247: 855GME (XTX) Advanced USB Configuration

504 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

USB Function USB ports can be enabled/disabled here. Disabled Disables the USB port.
2 USB ports, 4 USB Manual selection of the USB port.
ports, 6 USB ports (not
supported by APC620 /
PPC700).
Legacy USB Support Legacy USB support can be Disabled Disables this function.
enabled/disabled here.
USB interfaces do not function during Enabled Enables this function.
startup. USB is supported again after the
Auto Automatic enabling.
operating system has started. A USB
keyboard is still recognized during the
POST.
USB Keyboard USB keyboard support can be Disabled Disables this function.
Legacy Support enabled/disabled here.
Enabled Enables this function.
Information:
If this function is disabled, a USB
keyboard is also not supported during
the POST.
USB Mouse Legacy USB mouse support can be Disabled Disables this function.
Support enabled/disabled here.
Enabled Enables this function.
USB Storage Device USB storage device support can be Disabled Disables this function.
Support enabled/disabled here.
Enabled Enables this function.
Port 64/60 Emulation Port 64/60 emulation can be Disabled USB keyboard functions in all systems excluding
enabled/disabled here. Windows NT.
Enabled USB keyboard functions in Windows NT.
USB 2.0 Controller USB 2.0 mode can be Enabled Enables this function.

Section 4
Software
activated/deactivated here.
Disabled Disables this function.
USB 2.0 Controller Settings can be made for the USB Full Speed 12 MBps
Mode controller.
Hi Speed 480 MBps
BIOS EHCI Hand- The support for the operating system can Disabled Disables the function
Off be set up without the fully automatic EHCI
function. Enabled Enables this function.

USB Beep Message The warning tone can be Disabled Disables this function.
activated/deactivated here.
Enabled Enables this function.
USB Stick Default You can set how the USB device is to be Auto USB devices with fewer than 530MB of memory
Emulation used. are simulated as floppy disk drives and devices
with larger capacities are simulated as hard
drives.
Hard Disk An HDD-formatted drive can be used as an FDD
(e.g. zip drive) for starting the system.

Table 303: 855GME (XTX) Advanced USB Configuration setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 505

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

USB Mass Storage The waiting time that the USB device 10 Sec, 20 Sec, 30 Sec, Value set manually.
Reset Delay POST requires after the device start 40 Sec
command can be set.

Information:
The message "No USB mass storage
device detected" is displayed if no USB
memory device has been installed.
USB mass storage This is where the USB mass memory Enter Opens the submenu
device device is configured. See "USB mass storage device configuration", on
configuration page 507
Information:
Is only visible when the "USB stick
default emulation" function is set to
AUTO.

Table 303: 855GME (XTX) Advanced USB Configuration setting options (Forts.)

506 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

USB mass storage device configuration

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

USB Mass Storage Device Configuration If Auto, USB devices

less than 530MB will
be emulated as Floppy
Device #1 SanDisk OEM and remaining as
Emulation Type [Auto] hard drive. Forced FDD
option can be used to
force a HDD formatted
drive to boot as FDD
(Ex. ZIP drive).

Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 248: 855GME (XTX) USB mass storage device configuration

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
Emulation type With this option, the device to be plugged Auto Automatic selection of the function.
into the USB interface can be selected.
Floppy Using a floppy disk drive.
Forced FDD A hard disk image is connected as a floppy
image. Functions only in the FAT12, FAT16 or
FAT32 formats.
Hard Disk Using a hard disk
CDROM Using a CD-ROM drive, it is assumed as
'bootable'.

Table 304: 855GME (XTX) USB mass storage device configuration

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 507

 Software • BIOS options

Keyboard/mouse configuration

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Keyboard/Mouse Configuration Select Power-on state

for Numlock.
Bootup Num-Lock [On]
Typematic Rate [Fast]
PS/2 Mouse Support [Disabled]

Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 249: 855GME (XTX) - advanced keyboard/mouse configuration

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Boot-up Num-lock With this field you can define the state of Off Only the cursor functions of the numerical keypad
the NumLock key when booting. are enabled.
On Numeric keypad is enabled.
Typematic rate The key repeat function is set here. Slow Slow key repeat.
Fast Fast key repeat.
PS/2 mouse support Sets whether the PS/2 mouse port should Disabled Disables this function.
be activated.
Enabled Enables this function.
Auto Automatic activation of the function if PS/2 mouse
port is supported.

Table 305: 855GME (XTX) - advanced keyboard/mouse configuration - setting options

508 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Remote access configuration

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Configure Remote Access type and parameters Select Remote Access

type.
Remote Access [Enabled]

Serial Port number [COM1]

Base Address, IRQ [3F8h, 4]
Serial Port Mode [115200 8,n,1]
Flow Control [None]
Redirection After BIOS POST [Always]
Terminal Type [ANSI]
VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support [Enabled]
Sredir Memory Display Delay [No Delay]
Select Screen
Serial Port BIOS Update [Disabled] Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 250: 855GME (XTX) - advanced remote access configuration

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
Remote access The remote access function can be Disabled Disables this function.
enabled/disabled here.
Enabled Enables this function.
Serial port number The serial interface can be set using this COM1 Activates the COM1 interface.
option, as long as disabled is not entered
in the remote access field. COM2 Activates the COM2 interface.

Base address, IRQ Serial connection display for the logical None -
address and interrupt, as long as disabled
is not entered in the remote access field.
Serial port mode The serial interface transfer rate is defined 115200 8,n,1 Value set manually.
here, as long as disabled is not entered in 57600 8,n,1
the remote access field. 38400 8,n,1
19200 8,n,1
09600 8,n,1

Table 306: 855GME (XTX) - advanced remote access configuration - setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 509

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Flow control The interface configuration is carried out None The interface is operated without transfer control.
here, as long as disabled is not entered in
the remote access field. This setting Hardware The interface transfer control is carried out
determines how the transfer is controlled through hardware. This mode must be supported
via the interface. by a cable.
Software The interface transfer control is carried out
Information: through software.
The setting must be the same on the
terminal and the server.
Redirection after The redirection after start up can be set Disabled The redirection is switched off after start up.
BIOS POST here, as long as disabled is not entered in
the remote access field. Boot loader Redirection is enabled during system start up and
charging.
Always Redirection is always enabled.
Terminal type The type of connection can be chosen ANSI, VT100, VT-UTF8 Manual configuration of the connection type.
here, as long as disabled is not entered in
the remote access field.
VT-UTF8 Combo With this option, the VT-UTF8 Combo Key Disabled Disables this function.
Key Support Support for the ANSI and VT100
connections can be enabled, as long as Enabled Enables this function.
disabled is not entered in the remote
access field.
Sredir Memory The memory output delay can be set No delay No delay.
Display Delay using this option, as long as disabled is
not entered in the remote access field Delay 1 sec, Delay 2 sec, Value set manually.
(Sredir -> serial redirection). Delay 4 sec

Serial port BIOS During system start up, the update is Disabled Disables this function.
update loaded via the serial interface in the
processor. Enabled Enables this function.

Information:
If this option is disabled, the boot time
is reduced.

Table 306: 855GME (XTX) - advanced remote access configuration - setting options (Forts.)

510 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

CPU board monitor

Information:
The displayed temperature and voltage values (e.g. CPU temperature, core voltage,
battery voltage) on this BIOS Setup page represent uncalibrated information values.
These cannot be used to draw any conclusions about any hardware alarms or error
conditions. The hardware components used have automatic diagnostics functions
that can be applied in the event of error.

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

CPU Board Monitor

Board Temperature :63°C/145°F

CPU Temperature :47°C/116°F

VcoreA :1.193 V
VcoreB :2.596 V
+3.3Vin :3.403 V
+5Vin :5.080 V
+5VSB :4.898 V
VBAT :3.322 V
Select Screen
Select Item

Section 4
F1 General Help

Software
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 251: 855GME (XTX) - advanced CPU board monitor

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Board temperature Displays the selected panel's temperature None -
(in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit).
CPU temperature Displays the processor's temperature (in None -
degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit).
VcoreA Displays the processor's core voltage A in None -
volts.
VcoreB Displays the DDR's core voltage B in None -
volts.
+3.3Vin Displays the current voltage of the 3.3 volt None -
supply.

Table 307: 855GME (XTX) - advanced remote access configuration - setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 511

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

+5Vin Displays the current voltage of the 5 volt None -
supply.
+5VSB Displays the current level of the jumper. None -
VBAT Displays the battery voltage (in volts). None -

Table 307: 855GME (XTX) - advanced remote access configuration - setting options

Main Board/Panel Features

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Baseboard/Panel Features

Panel Control
Baseboard Monitor
Legacy Devices

Versions
BIOS: R114
MTCX PX32: V1.63
MTCX FPGA: V1.19

Optimized ID: 00000010b

Device ID: 00001BB7h Select Screen
Compatibility ID: 0000h Select Item
Serial number: 70950173619 Enter Go to Sub Screen
Product Name: 5PC600.SX02-01 F1 General Help
User Serial ID: FFFFFFFFh F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 252: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Baseboard/Panel Features

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Panel control For special setup of connected panels Enter Opens the submenu
(display units). See "Panel control", on page 514
Main board monitor Display of various temperatures and fan Enter Opens the submenu
speeds. See "Main board monitor", on page 515
Legacy devices Special settings for the interface can be Enter Opens the submenu
changed here. See "Legacy devices", on page 516
BIOS Displays the BIOS version. None -
MTCX PX32 Displays the MTCX PX32 firmware None -
version.
MTCX FPGA Displays the MTCX FPGA firmware None -
version.

Table 308: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Baseboard/Panel Features setting options

512 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Optimized ID Displays the DIP switch setting of the None -
configuration switch.
Device ID Displays the hexadecimal value of the None -
hardware device ID.
Compatibility ID Displays the version of the device within None -
the same B&R device code. This ID is
needed for Automation Runtime.
Serial number Displays the B&R serial number. None -
Product name Displays the B&R model number. None -
User serial ID Displays the user serial ID. None -
This 8 digit hex value can be freely
assigned by the user (e.g. to give the
device a unique ID) and can only be
changed with using the "B&R Control
Center" via the ADI driver.

Table 308: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Baseboard/Panel Features setting options (Forts.)

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 513

 Software • BIOS options

Panel control

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Panel Control Panel 0-14: connected

to Automation Panel
Select Panel Number [0] Link or Monitor/Panel
Version: V1.09 connector.
Brightness: [100%] Panel 15: connected on
Temperature: 41°C/105°F Panel PC Link.
Fan Speed: 00RPM Note: DVI and PPC Link
Keys/Leds: 128/128 will show no valid
values. On OOC Link
only the brightness
option will work.

Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 253: 855GME (XTX) Panel Control

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Select panel number Selection of the panel number for which 0...15 Selection of panel 0 ... 15.
the values should be read out and/or Panel 15 is specifically intended for panel PC 700
changed. systems.
Version Displays the firmware version of the SDLR None -
controller.
Brightness For setting the brightness of the selected 00%, 10%, 20%, 30%, For setting the brightness (in %) of the selected
panel. 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, panel. Changes take effect after saving and
80%, 90%, 100% restarting
the system (e.g. by pressing
<F10>).
Temperature Displays the selected panel's temperature None -
(in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit).
Fan speed Displays fan speed for the selected panel. None -
Keys/LEDs Displays the available keys and LEDs on None -
the selected panel.

Table 309: 855GME (XTX) Panel Control setting options

514 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Main board monitor

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Baseboard Monitor

CMOS Battery: n.a.

Temperatures
I/O: 45°C/113°F
Power Supply: 39°C/102°F
Slide-In Drive 1: 00°C/32°F
Slide-In Drive 2: 00°C/32°F

Fan Speeds
Case 1: 00 RPM
Case 2: 00 RPM
Case 3: 00 RPM
Case 4: 00 RPM Select Screen
CPU: 00 RPM Select Item
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 254: 855GME (XTX) - baseboard monitor

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
CMOS battery Displays the battery status. None -
n.a. - not available, either MTCX does not
support the firmware (starting with these
versions "Main Board/Panel Features", on
page 512) or the hardware is too old.
Good - Battery is OK
Bad - Battery is damaged.
I/O Displays the temperature in the I/O area None -
in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Power supply Displays the temperature in the power None -
supply area in degrees Celsius and
Fahrenheit.
Slide-in drive 1 Displays the temperature of the slide-in None -
drive 1 in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Slide-in drive 2 Displays the temperature of the slide-in None -
drive 2 in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Case 1 Displays the fan speed of housing fan 1. None -
Case 2 Displays the fan speed of housing fan 2. None -
Case 3 Displays the fan speed of housing fan 3. None -
Case 4 Displays the fan speed of housing fan 4. None -

Table 310: 855GME (XTX) - baseboard monitor setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 515

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

CPU Displays the fan speed of the processor None -
fan.

Table 310: 855GME (XTX) - baseboard monitor setting options

Legacy devices

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Advanced

Legacy Devices Enable/Disable the

internal COM port
COM C: [Enabled] for touch.
Base I/O address: [3E8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 11] For detailed
COM D: [Disabled] description see user
Base I/O address: [238] manual.
Interrupt: [IRQ 7]
COM E: [Disabled]
Base I/O address: [2E8]
CAN: [Disabled]
Base I/O address: 384/385h
Interrupt: [NMI] Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
ETH2 LAN controller: [Enabled] F1 General Help
ETH2 MAC Address: 00:60:65:02:F0:CD F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 255: 855GME (XTX) - Legacy devices

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

COM C Settings for the internal serial interfaces in Disabled Disables the interface.
the system. This setting activates
the touch screen in panel PC 700 Enabled Enables the interface.
systems, and, using SDL transfer
technology, also in Automation Panel 900
display units.
Base I/O address Selection of the base I/O address for the 328, 338, 3E8 Selected base I/O address is assigned.
COM C port.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for the COM C IRQ 5, IRQ 6, IRQ 11, Selected interrupt is assigned.
port. IRQ 12
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.

Table 311: 855GME (XTX) Legacy Devices setting options

516 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

COM D Setting for the COM D port for the serial Disabled Disables the interface.
interface of an Automation Panel Link slot.
The interface is used to operate the touch Enabled Enables the interface.
screen on connected Automation Panel
900 units.
Base I/O address Selection of the base I/O address for the 238, 328, 338 Selected base I/O address is assigned.
COM D port.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for the COM D IRQ 5, IRQ 6, IRQ 7, IRQ Selected interrupt is assigned.
port. 12
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
COM E Configuration of the optional COM E port Disabled Disables the interface.
on a B&R add-on interface (IF option).
Enabled Enables the interface.
Base I/O address Selection of the base I/O address for the 2E8, 328, 338 Selected base I/O address is assigned.
COM E port.
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for the COM E IRQ 5, IRQ 6, IRQ 10, Selected interrupt is assigned.
port. IRQ 12
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
CAN Configuration of the CAN port of a B&R Disabled Disables the interface.
add-on CAN interface card (IF option).
Enabled Enables the interface.
Base I/O address Selection of the base I/O address for the None -
CAN port.
Interrupt Selection of the interrupt for the CAN port. IRQ 10 and NMI Selected interrupt is assigned.

Section 4
Software
A yellow star indicates a conflict with
another device.
ETH2 LAN controller For turning the onboard LAN controller Disabled Disables the controller.
(ETH2) on and off. Enabled Enables the controller.
ETH2 MAC Address Displays the Ethernet 2 controller MAC None -
address.

Table 311: 855GME (XTX) Legacy Devices setting options (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 517

 Software • BIOS options

1.3.6 Boot

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Main Advanced Boot Security Power Exit

Boot Priority Selection [Type Based] The device based boot

priority list allows
Boot Device Priority to select from a list
of currently detected
1st Boot Device [Primary Master] devices.
2nd Boot Device [Primary Slave] The type based boot
3rd Boot Device [USB Floppy] priority list allows
4th Boot Device [USB Removable Devi] to select device types
5th Boot Device [USB Harddisk] even if a respective
6th Boot Device [USB CDROM] device is not (yet)
7th Boot Device [Secondary Master] present.
8th Boot Device [Secondary Slave]
Select Screen
Boot Settings Configuration Select Item
+- Change Option
Quick Boot [Enabled] F1 General Help
Quiet Boot [Disabled] F10 Save and Exit
Automatic Boot List Retry [Disabled] ESC Exit
AddOn ROM Display Mode [Keep Current]
Halt On Error [Disabled]
Hit ´DEL´ Message Display [Enabled]
Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled]
PXE Boot to LAN (ETH1) [Disabled]
Power Loss Control [Turn On]

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 256: 855GME (XTX) Boot menu

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Boot Priority The priority for when the drives should be Device Based Selection from a list of determined equipment.
Selection booted can be set here.
Type Based Allows the selection of unavailable equipment.
1st Boot Device The boot drives can be set using this Disabled, primary Selecting the desired function.
option. master, primary slave,
2nd Boot Device secondary master,
3rd Boot Device secondary slave, Legacy
floppy, USB floppy, USB
4th Boot Device harddisk, USB CDROM,
USB removable device,
5th Boot Device
onboard LAN (ETH1),
6th Boot Device external LAN, PCI mass
storage PCI SCSI Card,
7th Boot Device Any PCI BEV Device,
8th Boot Device Onboard PCI SATA,
Third Master Third Slave
Quick Boot This function reduces the boot time by Disabled Disables this function.
skipping lines.
Enabled Enables this function.

Table 312: 855GME (XTX) Boot menu setting options

518 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Quiet Boot Determines if POST message or OEM Disabled POST message display.
logo is displayed.
Enabled OEM logo display instead of POST message.
Automatic Boot List With this option, the operating system Disabled Disables this function.
Retry automatically restarts following startup
failure. Enabled Enables this function.

Add-On ROM Sets the display mode for the ROM Force BIOS An additional BIOS part can be displayed.
Display Mode (during the booting procedure).
Keep Current BIOS information is displayed.
Halt On Error This option sets whether the system Disabled The system does not pause. All errors are
should pause the Power On Self Test ignored.
(POST) when it encounters an error.
Enabled The system pauses. The system pauses every
time an error is encountered.
Hit 'DEL' Message Settings can be made here for the "Hit Disabled The message is not displayed.
Display 'DEL' Message" display.
Enabled The message is displayed.
Information:
When quiet boot is activated the
message is not displayed.
Interrupt 19 Capture This function can be used to incorporate Disabled Disables this function.
the BIOS interrupt.
Enabled Enables this function.
PXE boot to LAN Activating/Deactivating the function to Disabled Disables this function.
(ETH1) boot from LAN.
Enabled Enables this function.
Power Loss Control Determines if the system is on/off Remain Off Remains off.
following power loss.
Turn On Powers on.
Last State Enables the previous state.

Section 4
Software
Table 312: 855GME (XTX) Boot menu setting options (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 519

 Software • BIOS options

1.3.7 Security

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Main Advanced Boot Security Power Exit

Security Settings Install or Change the

password.
Supervisor Password :Not Installed
User Password :Not Installed

Change Supervisor Password

Change User Password

Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled]

Hard Disk Security

Hard Disk Security User Passwords Select Screen

Hard Disk Security Master Passwords Select Item
Enter Change
END-Key Loads CMOS Defaults [Yes] F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 257: 855GME (XTX) Security menu

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Supervisor Displays whether or not a supervisor None -
Password password has been set.
User Password Displays whether or not a user password None -
has been set.
Change Supervisor To enter/change a supervisor password. Enter Enter password.
Password A supervisor password is necessary to
edit all BIOS settings.
Change User To enter/change a user password. A user Enter Enter password.
Password password allows the user to edit only
certain BIOS settings.
Boot Sector Virus With this option, a warning is issued when Disabled Disables this function.
Protection the boot sector is accessed through a
program or virus. Enabled Enables this function.

Information:
With this option, only the boot sector is
protected, not the entire hard drive.
Hard disk security The hard disk security user password can Enter Opens the submenu
user password be created here. See "Hard disk security user password", on
page 521

Table 313: 855GME (XTX) Security menu setting options

520 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Hard disk security The hard disk security master password Enter Opens the submenu
master password can be created here. See "Hard disk security master password", on
page 522
END-key loads Using this function, CMOS can be loaded Yes Enables this function.
CMOS defaults by pressing the END key during POST.
No Disables this function.

Table 313: 855GME (XTX) Security menu setting options (Forts.)

Hard disk security user password

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Security

Hard Disk Security User Passwords

Primary Slave HDD User Password

Select Screen
Select Item
F1 General Help

Section 4
Software
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 258: 855GME (XTX) Hard disk security user password

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Primary slave HDD This function makes it possible to use the Enter Enter password.
user password user password to change or configure
each hard drive without having to reboot
the device. A user password allows the
user to edit only certain BIOS settings.

Table 314: 855GME (XTX) Hard disk security user password

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 521

 Software • BIOS options

Hard disk security master password

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Security

Hard Disk Security Master Passwords

Primary Slave HDD Master Password

Select Screen
Select Item
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 259: 855GME (XTX) Hard disk security master password

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Primary Slave HDD This function makes it possible to use the Enter Enter password.
Master Password user password to change or configure
each hard drive without having to reboot
the device.

Table 315: 855GME (XTX) Hard disk security master password

522 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.3.8 Power

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Main Advanced Boot Security Power Exit

Congigure power management and control Enable or disable

APM.
Power Management/APM [Enabled]
Video Power Down Mode [Suspend]
Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend]
Standby Time Out [Disabled]
Suspend Time Out [Disabled]
Keyboard & PS/2 Mouse [MONITOR]
FDC/LPT/COM Ports [MONITOR]
Primary master IDE [MONITOR]
Primary slave IDE [MONITOR]
Secondary master IDE [MONITOR]
Secondary slave IDE [MONITOR] Select Screen
Power Button Mode [On/Off] Select Item
+- Change Option
Resume On Ring [Disabled] F1 General Help
Resume On PME# [Disabled] F10 Save and Exit
Resume On RTC Alarm [Enabled] ESC Exit
RTC Alarm Date (Days) [15]
System Time [12:30:30]

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 260: 855GME (XTX) Power menu

Section 4
Software
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect
Power This option switches the APM function on Disabled Disables this function.
Management/APM or off. This is an advanced plug & play and
power management functionality. Enabled Enables this function.

Video Power Down This option allows you to set the energy Disabled Do not switch off the monitor.
Mode saving mode for the monitor.
Standby Monitor goes to standby mode.
Suspend Monitor goes to suspend mode.
Hard Disk Power This option allows you to set the energy Disabled Do not switch off the hard drive.
Down Mode saving mode for the hard drive.
Standby Monitor goes to standby mode.
Suspend Hard drive goes to suspend mode.
Standby time out Using this option, you can configure how Disabled Disables this function.
long the system stays inactive until
standby mode is executed. 1 min, 2 min, 4 min, 8 Value set manually.
min, 10 min, 20 min 30
min, 40 min;

Table 316: 855GME (XTX) Power menu setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 523

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Suspend Time Out Using this option, you can configure how Disabled Disables this function.
long the system stays inactive (all
components but the CPU are shut off, if 1 min, 2 min, 4 min, 8 Value set manually.
possible) before entering suspend mode. min, 10 min, 20 min 30
min, 40 min, 50 min, 60
min;
Keyboard & PS/2 The monitoring of activities during power MONITOR Keyboard or PS/2 mouse activities return the
Mouse saving mode is determined here. system to its normal state from a particular
energy saving mode.
IGNORE Activities are ignored.
FDC/LPT/COM ports The monitoring of activities during power MONITOR Activities in the IRQ of specific connections or
saving mode is determined here. devices return the system to its normal state from
power saving mode.
IGNORE Activities are ignored.
Primary master IDE This option is used to determine whether MONITOR Activities in the IRQ of specific connections or
or not BIOS monitors the activities of devices return the system to its normal state from
these components. power saving mode.
IGNORE Activities are ignored.
Primary slave IDE This option is used to determine whether MONITOR Activities in the IRQ of specific connections or
or not BIOS monitors the activities of devices return the system to its normal state from
these components. power saving mode.
IGNORE Activities are ignored.
Secondary master This option is used to determine whether MONITOR Activities in the IRQ of specific connections or
IDE or not BIOS monitors the activities of devices return the system to its normal state from
these components. power saving mode.
IGNORE Activities are ignored.
Secondary slave IDE This option is used to determine whether MONITOR Activities in the IRQ of specific connections or
or not BIOS monitors the activities of devices return the system to its normal state from
these components. power saving mode.
IGNORE Activities are ignored.
Power Button Mode This function determines the function of On/Off Power button switches on/off.
the power button.
Suspend Power button switches power saving mode on.
Resume On Ring When the modem receives an incoming Disabled Disables this function.
call, the PC is brought out of power saving
mode. Enabled Enables this function.

Resume on PME# With this option, you can switch the PME Disabled Disables this function.
wakeup function on or off.
Enabled Enables this function.
Resume On RTC With this option, you can activate the Disabled Disables this function.
Alarm alarm and enter the date and time for the
system start. Enabled Enables this function.

RTC alarm date Setting the date for the system start. Every day System starts daily.
(days)
Information: 01-31 System start takes place on the manually set
date.
Setting with "+"/"-".

Table 316: 855GME (XTX) Power menu setting options (Forts.)

524 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

System Time Setting the time for the system start. Changing the time Individually setting the system time in (hh:mm:ss)
format.
(hh:mm:ss).

Table 316: 855GME (XTX) Power menu setting options (Forts.)

1.3.9 Exit

BIOS SETUP UTILITY

Main Advanced Boot Security Power Exit

Exit Options Exit system setup

after saving the
Save Changes and Exit changes.
Discard Changes and Exit
Discard Changes F10 key can be used
for this operation.
Load CMOS Defaults

Select Screen
Select Item
Enter Go to Sub Screen
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

Section 4
Software
v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

Figure 261: 855GME (XTX) - Exit menu

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Save Changes and BIOS setup is closed with this item. OK / Cancel
Exit Changes made are saved in CMOS after
confirmation, and the system is rebooted.

Discard Changes With this item you can close BIOS setup OK / Cancel
and Exit without saving the changes made. The
system is then rebooted.

Discard Changes In the event that settings were made OK / Cancel

which the user can no longer remember,
changes can be reset as long as they
haven't been saved.

Table 317: 855GME - (XTX) Exit menu - Setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 525

 Software • BIOS options

BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

Load CMOS This item loads the CMOS default values, OK / Cancel
Defaults which are defined by the DIP switch
settings. These settings are loaded for all
BIOS configurations.

Table 317: 855GME - (XTX) Exit menu - Setting options (Forts.)

526 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.3.10 Profile overview - BIOS default settings - 855GME (XTX)

If the function "load setup defaults" is chosen in the main BIOS setup menu, or if exit is selected
(or <F9> is pressed) in the individual setup screens, the following BIOS default settings are the
optimized values that will be used.

DIP switch position see Section 1.6 "Location of the DIP switch in APC620 system units", on
page 546).

ON DIP
39

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 262: DIP switch on system unit

The first six DIP switches (1-6) are used to set the profiles. The rest (7,8) are reserved.

DIP switch setting

Number Optimized for 1 2 3 4 5 6 71) 81)
Profile 0 Automation PC 620 system units 5PC600.SX01-00. Off Off Off Off Off Off - -
Profile 1 Reserved On Off Off Off Off Off - -

Section 4
Profile 2 Automation PC 620 system units 5PC600.SX02-00, 5PC600.SX02- Off On Off Off Off Off - -

Software
01, 5PC600.SF03-00, 5PC600.SX05-00 and 5PC600.SX05-01.
Profile 3 Panel PC 700 system unit 5PC720.1043-00, 5PC720.1214-00, On On Off Off Off Off - -
5PC720.1505-00, 5PC720.1706-00, 5PC720.1906-00,
5PC781.1043-00, 5PC781.1505-00 and 5PC782.1043-00.
Profile 4 Panel PC 700 system unit 5PC720.1043-01, 5PC720.1214-01, Off Off On Off Off Off - -
5PC720.1505-01 and 5PC720.1505-02.
Profile 5 Automation PC 620 embedded system units 5PC600.SE00-00 und On Off On Off Off Off - -
5PC600.SE00-01

Table 318: 855GME (XTX) Profile overview

1) Reserved.

The following pages provide an overview of the BIOS default settings for the different DIP switch
configurations. Settings highlighted in yellow are variations from the BIOS default profile (=profile
0).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 527

 Software • BIOS options

Personal settings

If changes have been made to the BIOS defaults, they can be entered in the following tables for
backup.

Main

Main Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

System Time - - - - - -

System Date - - - - - -

BIOS ID - - - - - -

Processor - - - - - -

CPU Frequency - - - - - -

System Memory - - - - - -

Product Revision - - - - - -

Serial Number - - - - - -

BC Firmware Rev. - - - - - -

Mac address (ETH1) - - - - - -

Boot Counter - - - - - -

Running times - - - - - -

Table 319: 855GME (XTX) Main profile settings overview

Advanced

ACPI settings

ACPI settings Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

ACPI Aware O/S Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

ACPI 2.0 features No No No No No No

ACPI APIC support Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Active Cooling Trip Point Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Passive Cooling Trip Point Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Critical Trip Point 105 105 105 105 105 105

Watching ACPI Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown Shutdown

GPE1 function No function No function No function No function No function No function

GPE2 function No function No function No function No function No function No function

Table 320: 855GME (XTX) - advanced profile setting options

528 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

PCI Configuration

PCI Configuration Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

Plug & Play O/S Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes

PCI latency timer 64 64 64 64 64 64

Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Allocate IRQ to SM-BUS HC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

PIRQ A (UHCI1+VGA) Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

PIRQ B Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto 7

(INTD+AC97+SMBus)
PIRQ C Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto
(INTC+UHCI3+NATA)
PIRQ D (UHCI2) Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

PIRQ E (Onboard ETH1 Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

LAN)
PIRQ F (INTA+ETH2 LAN) Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto 5

PIRQ G (INTB) Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto 6

PIRQ H (EHCI) Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

1st Exclusive PCI IRQ - - - - - 5

2nd Exclusive PCI IRQ - - - - - 6

3rd exclusive PCI IRQ - - - - - 7

Table 321: 855GME - (XTX) PCI configuration - profile setting overview

Graphics configuration

Section 4
Software
Graphics configuration Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

Graphics engine 1 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Default flat panel Auto-EDID Auto-EDID Auto-EDID Auto-EDID Auto-EDID Auto-EDID

Graphics driver EDID Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

support
Flat panel scaling Stretched Stretched Stretched Stretched Stretched Stretched

Graphics engine 2 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled

Graphics engine Graphics Graphics Graphics Graphics Graphics Graphics

engine 1 engine 1 engine 1 engine 1 engine 1 engine 1

Boot graphics device Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Graphics memory size Enabled, 8MB Enabled, 8MB Enabled, 8MB Enabled, 8MB Enabled, 8MB Enabled, 8MB

Init. Graphic adapter priority PCI/Int-VGA PCI/Int-VGA PCI/Int-VGA PCI/Int-VGA PCI/Int-VGA PCI/Int-VGA

Graphics aperture size 64MB 64MB 64MB 64MB 64MB 64MB

DVI HotPlug persistence Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Table 322: 855GME - (XTX) Graphics configuration - profile setting overview

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 529

 Software • BIOS options

CPU configuration

CPU configuration Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

Manufacture: - - - - - -

Brand string - - - - - -

Frequency - - - - - -

FSB speed - - - - - -

L1 cache - - - - - -

L2 cache - - - - - -

Intel (R) SpeedStep (tm) Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic
tech
Max. CPU frequency - - - - - -

Table 323: 855GME - (XTX) CPU configuration - profile setting overview

Chipset configuration

Chipset configuration Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

IOAPIC Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

APIC ACPI SCI IRQ Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 324: 855GME - (XTX) Chipset configuration - profile setting overview

I/O interface configuration

I/O interface configuration Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

OnBoard AC97 audio Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled

Onboard LAN (ETH1) Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Serial port 1 configuration 3F8/IRQ4 3F8/IRQ4 3F8/IRQ4 3F8/IRQ4 3F8/IRQ4 3F8/IRQ4

Serial port 2 configuration 2F8/IRQ3 2F8/IRQ3 2F8/IRQ3 2F8/IRQ3 2F8/IRQ3 2F8/IRQ3

Serial port 2 mode Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal

Parallel port address 378 378 378 378 378 378

Table 325: 855GME (XTX) - I/O interface configuration - profile settings overview

Clock Configuration

Clock Configuration Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

Spread spectrum Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Unused PCI slot clocks Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Table 326: 855GME - (XTX) Clock configuration - profile setting overview

530 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

IDE Configuration

IDE Configuration Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

OnBoard PCI IDE controller Primary Both Both Primary Both Primary

Onboard PCI IDE operate Legacy mode Legacy mode Legacy mode Legacy mode Legacy mode Legacy mode
mode
Hard disk write protect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) 35 35 35 35 35 35

ATA(PI) 80 pin cable Host & device Host & device Host & device Host & device Host & device Host & device
detection
Primary IDE Master
Type Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

LBA/Large Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Block (Multi-Sector Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Transfer)
PIO Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

DMA Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

S.M.A.R.T. Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

32Bit data transfer Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Primary IDE slave

Type Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

LBA/Large Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Block (Multi-Sector Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Transfer)

Section 4
Software
PIO Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

DMA Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

S.M.A.R.T. Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

32Bit data transfer Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Secondary IDE Master

Type Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

LBA/Large Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Block (Multi-Sector Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Transfer)
PIO Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

DMA Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

S.M.A.R.T. Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

32Bit data transfer Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Secondary IDE slave

Type Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

LBA/Large Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Table 327: 855GME - (XTX) IDE configuration - profile setting overview

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 531

 Software • BIOS options

Secondary IDE slave Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

Block (Multi-Sector Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Transfer)
PIO Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

DMA Mode Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

S.M.A.R.T. Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

32Bit data transfer Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Table 327: 855GME - (XTX) IDE configuration - profile setting overview

USB configuration

USB configuration Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

USB Function 4 USB Ports 4 USB Ports 4 USB Ports 4 USB Ports 4 USB Ports 6 USB Ports

Legacy USB Support Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

USB Keyboard Legacy Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Support
USB Mouse Legacy Support Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

USB Storage Device Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Support
Port 64/60 Emulation Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

USB 2.0 Controller Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

USB 2.0 Controller Mode HiSpeed HiSpeed HiSpeed HiSpeed HiSpeed HiSpeed

BIOS EHCI Hand-Off Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

USB Beep Message Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

USB Stick Default Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk
Emulation
USB Mass Storage Reset 20 Sec 20 Sec 20 Sec 20 Sec 20 Sec 20 Sec
Delay

Table 328: 855GME - (XTX) USB configuration - profile setting overview

Keyboard/mouse configuration

Keyboard/mouse Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

configuration
Boot-up Num-lock On On On On On On

Typematic rate Fast Fast Fast Fast Fast Fast

PS/2 mouse support Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 329: 855GME (XTX) - keyboard/mouse configuration - profile setting overview

532 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Remote access configuration

Remote access Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings
configuration
Remote access Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Serial port BIOS update Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 330: 855GME - (XTX) remote access configuration - profile setting overview

CPU board monitor

CPU board monitor Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

Board temperature - - - - - -

CPU temperature - - - - - -

VcoreA - - - - - -

VcoreB - - - - - -

+3.3Vin - - - - - -

+5Vin - - - - - -

+5VSB - - - - - -

VBAT - - - - - -

Table 331: 855GME (XTX) - CPU board monitor - profile setting overview

Main Board/Panel Features

Section 4
Software
Main Board/Panel Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings
Features
Panel control
Select panel number - - - - - -

Version - - - - - -

Brightness 100 100 100 100 100 100

Temperature - - - - -

Fan speed - - - - - -

Keys/LEDs - - - - - -

Main board monitor

CMOS battery - - - - - -

I/O - - - - - -

Power supply - - - - - -

Slide-in drive 1 - - - - - -

Slide-in drive 2 - - - - - -

Case 1 - - - - - -

Case 2 - - - - - -

Table 332: 855GME (XTX) - baseboard/panel features -profile setting overview

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 533

 Software • BIOS options

Main board monitor Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

Case 3 - - - - - -

Case 4 - - - - - -

CPU - - - - - -

Legacy devices
COM C Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled

Base I/O address - 3E8h - 3E8h 3E8h -

Interrupt - 11 - 11 11 -

COM D Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Base I/O address

Interrupt
COM E Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Base I/O address

Interrupt
CAN Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Base I/O address

Interrupt
ETH2 LAN controller Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled

ETH2 MAC Address - - - - - -

Versions
BIOS - - - - - -

MTCX PX32 - - - - - -

MTCX FPGA - - - - - -

Optimized ID - - - - - -

Device ID - - - - - -

Compatibility ID - - - - - -

Serial number - - - - - -

Product name - - - - - -

User serial OD - - - - - -

Table 332: 855GME (XTX) - baseboard/panel features -profile setting overview

534 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

Boot

Boot Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

Boot Priority Selection Type Based Type Based Type Based Type Based Type Based Type Based

1st Boot Device Primary master Onboard LAN Primary master Primary master Primary master Primary master

2nd Boot Device Primary slave Primary Primary slave Primary slave Primary slave Primary slave
master

3rd Boot Device USB floppy Primary slave USB floppy USB floppy USB floppy USB floppy

4th Boot Device USB USB floppy USB USB USB USB
removable removable removable removable removable
device device device device device

5th Boot Device USB hard disk USB USB hard disk USB hard disk USB hard disk USB hard disk
removable
device

6th Boot Device USB CDROM USB CDROM USB CDROM USB CDROM USB CDROM USB CDROM

7th Boot Device Disabled Secondary Secondary Disabled Secondary Disabled

master master master

8th Boot Device Disabled Disabled Secondary Disabled Secondary Disabled

slave slave

Quick Boot Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Quiet Boot Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Automatic Boot List Retry Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Add-On ROM Display Mode Keep Current Keep Current Keep Current Keep Current Keep Current Keep Current

Halt On Error Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Hit 'DEL' Message Display Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Interrupt 19 Capture Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Section 4
Software
PXE boot to LAN (ETH1) Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Power Loss Control Turn On Turn On Turn On Turn On Turn On Turn On

Table 333: 855GME (XTX) - boot - profile setting overview

Security

Security Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

Supervisor Password - - - - - -

User Password - - - - - -

Change Supervisor - - - - - -
Password
Change User Password - - - - - -

Boot Sector Virus Protection Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Hard disk security user - - - - - -

password
Hard disk security master - - - - - -
password

Table 334: 855GME (XTX) - security - profile setting options

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 535

 Software • BIOS options

END-key loads CMOS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

default

Table 334: 855GME (XTX) - security - profile setting options

Power

Power Profile 0 Profile 1 Profile 2 Profile 3 Profile 4 Profile 5 Personal settings

Power Management/APM Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Video Power Down Mode Suspend Suspend Suspend Suspend Suspend Suspend

Hard Disk Power Down Suspend Suspend Suspend Suspend Suspend Suspend
Mode
Standby time out Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Suspend Time Out Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Keyboard & PS/2 Mouse MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

FDC/LPT/COM ports MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

Primary master IDE MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

Primary slave IDE MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

Secondary master IDE MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

Secondary slave IDE MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

Power Button Mode On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off

Resume On Ring Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Resume on PME# Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Resume On RTC Alarm Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 335: 855GME (XTX) - power - profile setting overview

536 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.4 BIOS Error signals (beep codes)

While the Automation PC 620 is booting, the following messages and errors can occur with
BIOS. These errors are signaled by different beeping codes.

1.4.1 BIOS 815E (ETX) and 855GME (ETX)

Beeping code Meaning Necessary user action

1 Everything OK -
1-2 1x long 2x short - checksum error in the ROM BIOS updates
1-2-2-3 BIOS checksum error BIOS updates.
1-3-1-1 Test DRAM refresh, DRAM module is not set properly. Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
1-3-1-3 Test 8742 keyboard controller, self test of the keyboard Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
controller failed.
1-3-4-1 RAM error at address xxxx Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
1-3-4-3 RAM error at data bit xxxx, at the lowest bit of the memory Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
bus
1-4-1-1 RAM error at data bit xxxx, at the highest bit of the memory Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
bus
2-1-2-3 ROM copyright has an error Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
2-2-3-1 Unexpected interrupt Check interrupt settings in BIOS.

Table 336: BIOS post code messages BIOS 815E (ETX) and 855GME (ETX)

1.4.2 BIOS 855GME (XTX)

Section 4
Software
Beeping code Meaning Necessary user action
1 x short Memory refresh failed. Load BIOS defaults. In the event that the error persists,
send industrial PC to B&R for testing.
2 x short Parity error: POST error (error in one of the hardware Check the placement of the inserted card. In the event that
testing procedures) the error persists, send industrial PC to B&R for testing.
3 x short Base 64 KB memory failure: Basic memory defect, RAM Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
error within the initial 64 KB.
4 x short Timer not operational: System timer. Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
5 x short Processor error: Processor defect. Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
6 x short 8042 gate A20 failure: Keyboard controller defect (block Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
8042/ A20 gate). Processor cannot switch to protected
mode.
7 x short Processor exception interrupt error: Virtual mode Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
exception error (CPU generated an interrupt error.
8 x short Display memory read/write error: Video memory not Check inserted graphic card position and eventually
accessible; graphic card defect or not built in (no fatal exchange. In the event that the error persists, send
error). industrial PC to B&R for testing.
9 x short ROM-checksum error: ROM-BIOS-checksum incorrect, Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
EPROM, EEPROM or Flash-ROM component defect,
BIOS defect or incorrectly updated.

Table 337: BIOS post code messages BIOS 855GME (XTX)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 537

 Software • BIOS options

Beeping code Meaning Necessary user action

10 x short CMOS shutdown register read/write error: CMOS cannot Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
be read/written.
11 x short Cache Error / external Cache bad: L2 - Cache on the Send industrial PC to B&R for checking.
mainboard is defected.

Table 337: BIOS post code messages BIOS 855GME (XTX) (Forts.)

538 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.5 Distribution of resources

1.5.1 RAM address assignment

RAM address Resource

000000h - 0003FFh Interrupt vectors
000400h - 09FFFFh MS-DOS program area
0A0000h - 0AFFFFh VGA graphics
0B8000h - 0BBFFFh VGA Text Mode
0C0000h - 0CFFFFh VGA BIOS
0D0000h - 0DFFFFh Available.
0E0000h - 0EBFFFh USB
0E4000h - 0FFFFFh System BIOS (Phoenix)
100000h - SDRAM

Table 338: RAM address assignment

1.5.2 DMA channel assignment

DMA channel Resource

0 Available
1 Available
2 Floppy disk drive (FDC)
3 LPT (ECP) 1)

Section 4
Software
4 Reserved
5 Available
6 Available
7 Available

Table 339: DMA channel assignment

1) Available if LPT is not being operated in ECP mode.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 539

 Software • BIOS options

1.5.3 I/O address assignment

I/O address Resource

000h -01Fh DMA controller 1
020h - 03Fh Interrupt controller 1
040h - 05Fh Timer
060h - 06Fh Keyboard controller
070h - 071h Real-time clock, NMI mask, CMOS
080h Debug port (POST code)
081h - 09Fh Page register - DMA controller
0A0h - 0BFh Interrupt controller 2
0C0h - 0DFh DMA controller 2
0F0h - 0FFh FPU
170h - 177h Secondary Hard Disk IDE channel
1F0h - 1F7h Primary Hard Disk IDE channel
238h - 023F COM5
278h - 27Fh Hardware Security Key (LPT2)
2E8h - 2EFh COM4
2F8h - 2FFh COM2
376h - 376h Secondary Hard Disk IDE channel
378h - 37Fh LPT1 (printer connection)
384h - 385h CAN controller
3B0h - 3BBh VGA controller
3BCh - 3BFh LPT3
3C0h - 3DFh VGA controller
3E8h - 3EFh COM3
3F6h - 3F6h Primary Hard Disk IDE channel
3F0h - 3F7h FDD controller
3F8h - 3FFh COM1
LPT1 + 400h ECP Port, LPT+400h
CF8h - CFBh PCI config address register
CFCh - CFFh PCI config data register
4100h - 417Fh MTCX
FF00h - FF07h IDE bus master register

Table 340: I/O address assignment

540 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

1.5.4 Interrupt assignments in PCI mode

NONE
NMI
10

11

12

13

14

15
IRQ
0

9
System timer ●
Keyboard ●
IRQ cascade ●
COM1 (Serial port A) ❍ ●
COM2 (Serial port B) ● ❍
LPT1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
LPT2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
LPT3 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
PS/2 mouse ●
ACPI1) ●
FDD ● ❍
Real-time clock ●
Coprocessor (FPU) ●
Primary IDE channel ●
Secondary IDE
●
channel
COM3
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
(COM C)
COM4
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
B&R (COM D)

Section 4
Software
COM5
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
(COM E)
CAN ❍ ❍ ●

Table 341: IRQ interrupt assignments in PCI mode

1) Advanced Configuration and Power Interface.

● ... Default setting

❍ ... Optional setting

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 541

 Software • BIOS options

1.5.5 Interrupt assignments in APIC mode

A total of 23 IRQs are available in the APIC mode (Advanced Programmable Interrupt
Controller). The activation of this option is only effective if it takes place before the operating
system (Windows XP) is activated. There are then 23 IRQs available.

NONE
NMI
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
IRQ
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
System timer ●
Keyboard ●
IRQ cascade ●
COM1
❍ ●
(Serial port A)
COM2
● ❍
(Serial port B)
LPT1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
LPT2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
LPT3 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
PS/2 mouse ●
ACPI1) ●
FDD ● ❍
Real-time clock ●
Coprocessor
●
(FPU)
Primary IDE
●
channel
Secondary IDE
●
channel
COM3
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
(COM C)
COM4
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
B&R (COM D)
COM5
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ●
(COM E)
CAN ❍ ❍ ●
PIRQ A 2) ●
PIRQ B 3) ●
4)
PIRQ C ●
PIRQ D 5) ●
PIRQ E 6) ●
PIRQ F ●
PIRQ G ●

Table 342: IRQ interrupt assignments in APIC mode

542 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

NONE
NMI
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
IRQ 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PIRQ H 7) ●

Table 342: IRQ interrupt assignments in APIC mode (Forts.)

1) Advanced Configuration and Power Interface.

2) PIRQ A: for PCI; PCI IRQ line 1 + USB UHCI controller #1 + graphics controller.
3) PIRQ B: for PCI; PCI IRQ line 2 + AC97 Audio controller + SM Bus.
4) PIRQ C: for PCI; PCI RIQ line 3 + USB UHCI controller #3 + native IDE.
5) PIRQ D: for PCI; PCI IRQ line 4 + USB UHCI controller #2.
6) PIRQ E: LAN controller.
7) PIRQ H: USB EHCI controller.

● ... Default setting

❍ ... Optional setting

The PCI resources are assigned to fixed IRQ lines when the APIC function is enabled. The
following image shows the connections to the individual PCI slots.

CPU module Baseboard Bus

A A A A A
PIRQ A USB UHCI-1 VGA Ethernet 551ER
APIC IRQ 16 B0:D29:F0 B0:D2:F0, B0:D2:F1 B2:D3

B B B B B
PIRQ B SM-Bus Audio

Section 4
Software
APIC IRQ 17 B0:D31:F3 B0:D31:F5

C C C C C
PIRQ C Native IDE
APIC IRQ 18 B0:D31:F1

D D D D D
PIRQ D USB UHCI-2
APIC IRQ 19 B0:D29:F1

PIRQ E Ethernet ICH4

APIC IRQ 20 B2:D8 Slot assignments APC620

PIRQ F 1 1 Slot
APIC IRQ 21

PIRQ G
1 2 2 Slot
APIC IRQ 22
1) 1) 1) 1)
1 2 3 4 5 5 Slot
PIRQ H USB EHCI
APIC IRQ 23 B0:D29:F7
1) 1)
1 2 3 3 Slot
1) These slots are behind the PCI to PCI bridge (B2:D6), which is connected to PIRQ D (PCI slot 4).

Figure 263: PCI routing with activated APIC CPU boards 815E (ETX), 855GME (ETX)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 543

 Software • BIOS options

CPU module Baseboard Bus

A A A A A
PIRQ A USB UHCI-1 VGA Ethernet 551ER
APIC IRQ 16 B0:D29:F0 B0:D2:F0, B0:D2:F1 B1:D3

B B B B B
PIRQ B SM-bus Audio
APIC IRQ 17 B0:D31:F3 B0:D31:F5

C C C C C
PIRQ C Native IDE
APIC IRQ 18 B0:D31:F1

D D D D D
PIRQ D USB UHCI-2
APIC IRQ 19 B0:D29:F1

PIRQ E Ethernet ICH4

APIC IRQ 20 B1:D8 Slot assignments APC620

PIRQ F 1 1 Slot
APIC IRQ 21

PIRQ G
1 2 2 Slot
APIC IRQ 22
1) 1) 1) 1)
1 2 3 4 5 5 Slot
PIRQ H USB EHCI
APIC IRQ 23 B0:D29:F7
1) 1)
1 2 3 3 Slot
1) These slots are behind the PCI to PCI bridge (D1:D6), which is connected to PIRQ D (PCI slot 4).

Figure 264: PCI routing with activated APIC CPU boards 855GME (XTX)

544 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • BIOS options

CPU module Bus Baseboard

A
PIRQ A USB UHCI-1 VGA POWERLINK
APIC IRQ 16 B0:D29:F0 B0:D2:F0, B0:D2:F1 B1:D3:F0

B
PIRQ B SM-Bus CAN
APIC IRQ 17 B0:D31:F3 B1:D3:F1

C
PIRQ C Native IDE USB UHCI-3
APIC IRQ 18 B0:D31:F1 B0:D29:F2

D
PIRQ D USB UHCI-2 X2X
APIC IRQ 19 B0:D29:F1 B1:D3:F2

PIRQ E Ethernet ICH4

APIC IRQ 20 B1:D8

PIRQ F
APIC IRQ 21

PIRQ G
APIC IRQ 22

PIRQ H USB EHCI

APIC IRQ 23 B0:D29:F7

Figure 265: PCI routing with activated APIC CPU boards 855GME (XTX) on the APC620e

1.5.6 Inter-IC (I²C) bus

Section 4
Software
I²C address Resource Note
A0h EEPROM EEPROM for CMOS data - cannot be used
B0h Reserved Cannot be used
58h Reserved Cannot be used

Table 343: Inter-IC (I²C) bus resources

1.5.7 System Management (SM) bus

SM Bus address SM device Note

12h SMART_CHARGER
14h SMART_SELECTOR
16h SMART_BATTERY
D2h Clock Generator

Table 344: Inter-IC (I²C) bus resources

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 545

 Software • BIOS options

1.6 Location of the DIP switch in APC620 system units

Warning!
The following procedure is only permitted with the power switched off and the
supply voltage disconnected!

To get to the DIP switches, it is necessary to open the front cover. To do this, loosen the five Torx
screws (T10) marked and pull the cover off towards the front. Then the DIP switches can be
accessed at the location marked in yellow. The setting can now be made using a pointed object.
If the system has a slide-in drive, it must be removed first to get to the DIP switches.

Figure 266: Location of DIP switch

546 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Upgrade information

2. Upgrade information

2.1 BIOS upgrade

Warning!
The upgrade procedures described in the following pages must be carried out for all
APC620 systems with software versions lower than those listed in the following
table.

CPU board software 815E (ETX) 855GME (ETX)

BIOS < R017 < R007
MTCX PX32 firmware < V1.19 < V1.19
MTCX FPGA firmware < V1.06 < V1.06

Table 345: CPU board software versions

Automation Panel Link Transceiver (5DLSDL.1000-01) Receiver (5DLSDL.1000-00)

SDLR version < V0.03 < V0.03

Table 346: Automation panel link software versions

An upgrade might be necessary for the following reason:

• To update implemented functions or to add newly implemented functions or components

to the BIOS setup (information about changes can be found in the Readme files of the

Section 4
Software
BIOS upgrade).

2.1.1 What information do I need?

Information:
Individually saved BIOS settings are deleted when upgrading the BIOS.

Before starting the upgrade, you should know the CPU board type (815E or 855GME) and the
various software versions.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 547

 Software • Upgrade information

Which CPU board do I have?

After switching on the APC620, the installed CPU board can be identified by the letters "B", "C"
or „E“.

PhoenixBIOS 4.0 Release 6.1

Copyright 1985-2003 Phoenix Technologies Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
<1BR1R006> Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-Elektronik C1.00

FOR EVALUATION ONLY. NOT FOR RESALE.

Build Time: 09/09/04 03:15:22
CPU = Mobile Intel(R) Celeeron(TM) CPU 733MHz
58M System RAM Passed

Press <F2> to enter SETUP

Figure 267: Differentiating between 815E and 855GME CPU boards

Letter CPU board Model number

B 855GME (ETX) 5PC600.E855-00
5PC600.E855-01
5PC600.E855-02
5PC600.E855-03
5PC600.E855-04
5PC600.E855-05
C 815E (ETX) 5PC600.E815-00
5PC600.E815-02
5PC600.E815-03
E 855GME (XTX) 5PC600.X855-00
5PC600.X855-01
5PC600.X855-02
5PC600.X855-03
5PC600.X855-04
5PC600.X855-05

Table 347: Differentiating between 815E (ETX) and 855GME (ETX / XTX) CPU boards

548 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Upgrade information

Which BIOS version and firmware are already installed on the APC620?

This information can be found on the same BIOS setup page for both the 815E (ETX) and the
855GME (ETX / XTX)CPU boards:

• After switching on the APC620, you can get to the BIOS Setup by pressing "F2" or "DEL".
• From the BIOS main menu "advanced" (top), select "baseboard/panel features" (bottom):

CPU boards 815E (ETX) and 855GME (ETX) CPU boards 855GME (XTX)
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility BIOS SETUP UTILITY
Advanced Advanced

Baseboard/Panel Features Item Specific Help Baseboard/Panel Features

Panel Control
Panel Control Baseboard Monitor
Baseboard Monitor Legacy Devices
Legacy Devices
Versions
BIOS: R116 System BIOS
Versions
BIOS: R123 System BIOS MTCX PX32: V1.63 MTCX PX32 firmware
MTCX FPGA: V1.19
MTCX PX32: V1.19 MTCX PX32 firmware MTCX FPGA firmware
MTCX FPGA: V1.06
MTCX FPGA firmware Optimized ID:
Device ID:
00000010b
00001BB7h Select Screen
Optimized ID: 11111111b Compatibility ID: 0000h Select Item
Device ID: 00001BB7h Serial number: 70950173619 Enter Go to Sub Screen
Compatibility ID: 0000h Product Name: 5PC600.SX02-01 F1 General Help
Serial Number: 70950168449 User Serial ID: FFFFFFFFh F10 Save and Exit
Product Name: System 2PCI 1DD ESC Exit
User Serial ID: 00000000h

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Chanage Features F9 Setup Defaults
Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 268: Software versions

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 549

 Software • Upgrade information

Which firmware is installed on the Automation Panel Link transceiver/receiver?

This information can be found on the same BIOS setup page for both the 815E (ETX) and the
855GME (ETX / XTX)CPU boards:

• After switching on the APC620, you can get to the BIOS Setup by pressing "F2" or "DEL".
• From the BIOS main menu "advanced" (top), select "baseboard/panel features" (bottom)
and then "panel control":

Information:
The version can only be shown if an Automation Panel with Automation Panel Link
SDL transceiver (5DLSDL.1000-01) and Automation Panel Link SDL receiver
(5DLSDL.1000-00) is connected.

CPU boards 815E (ETX) and 855GME (ETX) CPU boards 855GME (XTX)
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility BIOS SETUP UTILITY
Advanced Advanced

Panel Control Item Specific Help Panel Control Panel 0-14: connected
to Automation Panel
Select Panel Number [0] Link or Monitor/Panel
Select Panel Number: [ 0] Version: V1.09 FPGA firmware of
connector.
Brightness: [100%] Panel 15: connected on
Version: V0.03 FPGA firmware of Temperature: 41°C/105°F the SDLR controller
Panel PC Link.
Fan Speed: 00RPM Note: DVI and PPC Link
Brightness:
Temperature:
[ 50%]
00°C/32°F the SDLR controller Keys/Leds: 128/128 will show no valid
Fan Speed: 00 RPM values. On OOC Link
Keys/Leds: 00/00 only the brightness
option will work.

Select Screen
Select Item
+- Change Option
F1 General Help
F10 Save and Exit
ESC Exit

v02.57 (C)Copyright 1985-2004, American Megatrends, Inc.

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Chanage Features F9 Setup Defaults
Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 269: Firmware version of Automation Panel Link SDL transceiver/receiver

550 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Upgrade information

2.1.2 Upgrade BIOS for 815E (ETX)

• Download and unzip the zip file from the B&R homepage.
• Create bootable media.

Information:
In MS-DOS, Win95 and Win98, a blank HD disk can be made bootable using the
command line command "sys a:" or "format a: /s".
Information concerning creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP cab be found on
page 558.

• Copy the contents of the *.zip file to the bootable media. If the B&R upgrade was already
added when the bootable media was created using the B&R Embedded OS Installer, then
this step is not necessary.
• Connect the bootable media to the APC620 and reboot the device.
• The following boot menu will be shown after startup:
1. Upgrade PHOENIX BIOS for i815E (5PC600.E815-xx)

2. Exit to MS-DOS

Concerning point 1:
BIOS is automatically upgraded (default after 5 seconds).

Concerning point 2:
Returns to the shell (MS-DOS).

Section 4
Software
• The system must be rebooted after a successful upgrade.

Information:
When the system has rebooted, setup default values must be reloaded after the
message, "System CMOS checksum bad" (press F1 or select "load setup defaults"
in the BIOS setup "exit" menu). Afterwards, the time and date must be set again.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 551

 Software • Upgrade information

2.1.3 Upgrade BIOS for 855GME (ETX)

• Download and unzip the zip file from the B&R homepage.
• Create bootable media.

Information:
In MS-DOS, Win95 and Win98, a blank HD disk can be made bootable using the
command line command "sys a:" or "format a: /s".
Information concerning creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP cab be found on
page 558.

Information concerning creating a USB flash drive for a B&R upgrade can be found
on page 560.

Information concerning creating a CompactFlash card for a B&R upgrade can be

found on page 562.

• Copy the contents of the *.zip file to the bootable media. If the B&R upgrade was already
added when the bootable media was created using the B&R Embedded OS Installer, then
this step is not necessary.
• Connect the bootable media to the APC620 and reboot the device.
• The following boot menu will be shown after startup:
1. Upgrade PHOENIX BIOS for i855GME (5PC600.E855-xx)

2. Exit to MS-DOS

Concerning point 1:
BIOS is automatically upgraded (default after 5 seconds).

Concerning point 2:
Returns to the shell (MS-DOS).

• The system must be rebooted after a successful upgrade.

Information:
When the system has rebooted, setup default values must be reloaded after the
message, "System CMOS checksum bad" (press F1 or select "load setup defaults"
in the BIOS setup "exit" menu).

Starting with BIOS version V1.15, the time and date no longer has to be set again
after a BIOS upgrade (stays the same).

552 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Upgrade information

2.1.4 Upgrade BIOS for 855GME (XTX)

• Download and unzip the zip file from the B&R homepage.
• Create bootable media.

Information:
In MS-DOS, Win95 and Win98, a blank HD disk can be made bootable using the
command line command "sys a:" or "format a: /s".
Information concerning creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP cab be found on
page 558.

Information concerning creating a USB flash drive for a B&R upgrade can be found
on page 560.

Information concerning creating a CompactFlash card for a B&R upgrade can be

found on page 562.

• Copy the contents of the *.zip file to the bootable media. If the B&R upgrade was already
added when the bootable media was created using the B&R Embedded OS Installer, then
this step is not necessary.
• Connect the bootable media to the APC620 and reboot the device.
• The following boot menu will be shown after startup:
1. Upgrade PHOENIX BIOS for i855GME (5PC600.X855-xx)

2. Exit to MS-DOS

Section 4
Software
Concerning point 1:
BIOS is automatically upgraded (default after 5 seconds).

Concerning point 2:
Returns to the shell (MS-DOS).

• The system must be rebooted after a successful upgrade.

Information:
After the system restart, the warning "CMOS checksum BAD" is displayed, but BIOS
boots through it. The setup can be opened using the "Del" key and the setup
defaults must be loaded again and saved using either the "F9" key or the menu item
"Exit" - "Load CMOS defaults".

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 553

 Software • Upgrade information

2.1.5 Windows XP Embedded and BIOS upgrade

If the following error message appears after upgrading BIOS:

"Copy Error"

"Setup cannot copy the file Audio3d.dll"

then the audio driver must be reinstalled.

To do this, use the audio driver from the B&R Homepage (www.br-automation.com).
During the installation of the audio driver, the following 2 files must be manually selected from
the following directories.

ksuser.dll in the directory ...\Windows\system32

ks.sys in the directory ...\Windows\system32\drivers

This applies to 815E and 855ME CPU boards.

In order to be able to set up all possible resolutions when using an 815E CPU board, the graphics
driver must be reinstalled (see 5.2.1 "Installing the graphics driver for 815E (ETX) CPU boards").

554 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Upgrade information

2.2 Upgrade the firmware

With the APC620 / Panel PC firmware upgrade (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT), the firmware of a number
of controllers (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT, UPS) can be updated, depending on the construction of the
APC620 system.

2.2.1 Procedure

• Download and unzip the zip file from the B&R homepage.
• Create bootable media.

Information:
In MS-DOS, Win95 and Win98, a blank HD disk can be made bootable using the
command line command "sys a:" or "format a: /s".
Information concerning creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP cab be found on
page 558.

Information concerning creating a USB flash drive for a B&R upgrade can be found
on page 560.

Information concerning creating a CompactFlash card for a B&R upgrade can be

found on page 562.

• Copy the contents of the *.zip file to the bootable media. If the B&R upgrade was already
added when the bootable media was created using the B&R Embedded OS Installer, then

Section 4
this step is not necessary.

Software
• Connect the bootable media to the APC620 and reboot the device.
• The following boot menu will be shown after startup:

Information:
The following boot menu options including descriptions are based on version 1.27
of the APC620 / Panel PC Firmware upgrade (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT) disk. In some
cases, these descriptions might not match the version you are currently using.

Boot menu options:

1. Upgrade MTCX (APC620/PPC700) PX32 and FPGA

2. Upgrade SDLT (APC620) only

3. Upgrade SDLR (AP800/AP900) on monitor/panel

3.1 Upgrade SDLR on AP 0 (AP800/AP900)

3.2 Upgrade SDLR on AP 1 (AP800/AP900)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 555

 Software • Upgrade information

3.3 Upgrade SDLR on AP 2 (AP800/AP900)

3.4 Upgrade SDLR on AP 3 (AP800/AP900)

3.5 Upgrade all SDLR (AP800/AP900)

3.6 Return to main menu

4. Upgrade SDLR (AP800/AP900) on AP link slot

4.1 Upgrade SDLR on AP 8 (AP800/AP900)

4.2 Upgrade SDLR on AP 9 (AP800/AP900)

4.3 Upgrade SDLR on AP 10 (AP800/AP900)

4.4 Upgrade SDLR on AP 11 (AP800/AP900)

4.5 Upgrade all SDLR (AP800/AP900)

4.6 Return to main menu

5. Upgrade add-on UPS (firmware and battery settings)

5.1 Upgrade Add-on UPS Firmware (5AC600.UPSI-00)

5.2 Upgrade Battery Settings (5AC600.UPSB-00)

5.3 Return to main menu

6. Exit

Concerning point 1:
Automatically upgrade PX32 and FPGA for MTCX (default after 5 seconds).

Concerning point 2:
The FPGA of the SDLT controller on the AP Link slot is automatically updated.

Concerning point 3:
A submenu is opened for upgrading the SDLR controller on the Monitor/Panel plug.

3.1. Upgrade SDLR on AP 0 (AP800/AP900)

The SDLR controller is automatically updated on Automation Panel 0.

3.2 Upgrade SDLR on AP 1 (AP800/AP900)

The SDLR controller is automatically updated on Automation Panel 1.

3.3 Upgrade SDLR on AP 2 (AP800/AP900)

The SDLR controller is automatically updated on Automation Panel 2.

3.4 Upgrade SDLR on AP 3 (AP800/AP900)

The SDLR controller is automatically updated on Automation Panel 3.

556 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Upgrade information

3.5. Upgrade all SDLR (AP800/AP900)

All SDLR controllers are automatically updated on all Automation Panels on the
Monitor/Panel
(default after 5 sec).

3.6. Return to main menu

Returns to the main menu.

Concerning point 4:
A submenu is opened for upgrading the SDLR controller on the AP Link slot.

4.1. Upgrade SDLR on AP 8 (AP800/AP900)

The SDLR controller is automatically updated on Automation Panel 8.

4.2. Upgrade SDLR on AP 9 (AP800/AP900)

The SDLR controller is automatically updated on Automation Panel 9.

4.3 Upgrade SDLR on AP 10 (AP800/AP900)

The SDLR controller is automatically updated on Automation Panel 10.

4.4 Upgrade SDLR on AP 11 (AP800/AP900)

The SDLR controller is automatically updated on Automation Panel 11.

4.5 Upgrade all SDLR (AP800/AP900)

All SDLR controllers are automatically updated on all Automation Panels on the AP Link slot
Monitor/Panel (default after 5 sec).

4.6 Return to main menu

Returns to the main menu.

Section 4
Software
Concerning point 5:
The submenu for the add-on UPS firmware and upgrade and the battery settings upgrade is
opened - this is irrelevant for PPC700 systems.

Concerning point 6:
Returns to the shell (MS-DOS).

Information:
The system must be powered off and on again after a successful controller upgrade.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 557

 Software • Upgrade information

2.3 Creating an MS-DOS boot diskette in Windows XP

• Place an empty 1.44 MB HD diskette in the disk drive

• Open Windows Explorer
• Right-click on the 3½" floppy icon and select "Format...".

Figure 270: Creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP - step 1

• Then select the checkbox "Create an MS-DOS startup disk", press "Start" and
acknowledge the warning message with "OK".

Figure 271: Creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP - step 2

Figure 272: Creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP - step 3

558 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Upgrade information

After creating the startup disk, some of the files must be deleted because of the size of the
update.

When doing this, all files (hidden, system files, etc.) must be shown on the diskette.

In Explorer, go to the Tools menu, select Folder Options... and open the View tab. Now
deactivate the option Hide protected operating system files (Recommended) (activated by
default) and activate the option Show hidden files and folders.

before after

Figure 273: Creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP - step 4

Section 4
Software
Figure 274: Creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP - step 5

Now all files (marked) except Command.com, IO.sys and MSDOS.sys can be deleted.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 559

 Software • Upgrade information

2.4 Creating a bootable USB flash drive for B&R upgrade files

When used in connection with a B&R industrial PC, it is possible to upgrade BIOS from one of
the USB flash drives available from B&R. To do this, the USB flash drive must be prepared
accordingly. This is done with the B&R Embedded OS Installer, which can be downloaded for
free from the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

2.4.1 Requirements

The following peripherals are required for creating a bootable USB flash drive:

• B&R USB flash drive

• B&R Industrial PC
• USB Media Drive
• B&R Embedded OS Installer (V3.00 or higher)

2.4.2 Procedure

• Connect the USB flash drive to the PC.

• If the drive list is not refreshed automatically, the list must be updated using the command
Drives > Refresh.
• Mark the desired USB flash drive in the drive list.
• Change to the Action tab and select Install a B&R Update to a USB flash drive as type
of action.
• Enter the path to the MS-DOS operating system files. If the files are part of a ZIP archive,
then click on the button By ZIP file.... If the files are stored in a directory on the hard drive,
then click on the button By folder....
• In the B&R Upgrade text box, it's also possible to enter the path to the ZIP file for the
B&R Upgrade Disk and select the file.
• Click on the Start action button in the toolbar.

560 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Upgrade information

Figure 275: Creating a USB flash drive for B&R upgrade files

2.4.3 Where do I get MS-DOS?

Information concerning creating an MS-DOS boot diskette can be found in section 2.3 "Creating
an MS-DOS boot diskette in Windows XP", on page 558. Then the files from the diskette are to
be copied to your hard drive.

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 561

 Software • Upgrade information

2.5 Creating a bootable CompactFlash card for B&R upgrade files

When used in connection with a B&R industrial PC, it is possible to upgrade BIOS from one of
the CompactFlash cards available from B&R. To do this, the CompactFlash card must be
prepared accordingly. This is done with the B&R Embedded OS Installer, which can be
downloaded for free from the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

2.5.1 Requirements

The following peripherals are required for creating a bootable CompactFlash card:

• CompactFlash card
• B&R Industrial PC
• B&R Embedded OS Installer (V3.10 or higher)

2.5.2 Procedure

• Insert the CompactFlash card in the CF slot on the industrial PC.

• If the drive list is not refreshed automatically, the list must be updated using the command
Drives > Refresh.
• Select the desired CompactFlash card from the drive list.
• Change to the Action tab and select Install a B&R Update to a CompactFlash card as
type of action.
• Enter the path to the MS-DOS operating system files. If the files are part of a ZIP archive,
then click on the button By ZIP file.... If the files are stored in a directory on the hard drive,
then click on the button By folder....
• In the B&R Upgrade text box, it's also possible to enter the path to the ZIP file for the
B&R Upgrade Disk and select the file.
• Click on the Start action button in the toolbar.

562 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Upgrade information

Figure 276: Creating a CompactFlash card for B&R upgrade files

2.5.3 Where do I get MS-DOS?

Information concerning creating an MS-DOS boot diskette can be found in section 2.3 "Creating
an MS-DOS boot diskette in Windows XP", on page 558. Then the files from the diskette are to
be copied to your hard drive.

2.6 Upgrade problems

Potential upgrade problems are listed in the Liesmich.txt or Readme.txt files on the upgrade

Section 4
Software
disks.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 563

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Automation Runtime

3. Automation PC 620 with Automation Runtime

3.1 General information

An integral component of Automation Studio™ is Automation Runtime, the software kernel which
allows applications to run on a target system. This runtime environment offers numerous
important advantages:

• Guaranteed highest possible performance for the hardware being used

• Runs on all B&R target systems
• Makes the application hardware-independent
• Applications can be easily ported between B&R target systems
• Cyclic system guarantees deterministic behavior
• Configurable jitter tolerance in all task classes
• Supports all relevant programming language such as IEC 61131-3 and C
• Extensive function library conforming to IEC 61131-3 as well as the expanded B&R
Automation library
• Integrated into Automation NET. Access to all networks and bus systems via function
calls or the Automation Studio™ configuration

3.2 Support for Automation PC 620 embedded

3.2.1 ARwin

The fieldbus interfaces CAN, X2X, and POWERLINK are supported by ARwin with an AS 2.6
upgrade.

3.2.2 ARemb

The fieldbus interfaces CAN, X2X, and POWERLINK are supported by AR 2.94 together with an
AS 2.7.

3.3 Selection of devices

Power supply buffering of 10 ms is guaranteed starting with the following system unit revisions:

Model number Description Revision

5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI B0
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot B0
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot B0
5PC600.SF03-00 System 3 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot A0

Table 348: System unit support for buffering with Automation Runtime

564 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Automation Runtime

Model number Description Revision

5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot A0
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots A0
5PC600.SE00-00 APC620e System SDL EPL X2X CAN 512kB A0
5PC600.SE00-01 APC620e System CRT EPL X2X CAN 512KB A0
5PC600.SE00-02 APC620e System SDL EPL X2X CAN 1MB A0

Table 348: System unit support for buffering with Automation Runtime (Forts.)

3.4 Visual Components graphic engine support

The output of graphics with Visual Components is only supported by graphic engine 1. Graphic
engine 2 is not supported. The following table should clarify the mapping and stretching function
of the graphic engine in connection with the different system unit variations.

Graphic Graphic engine number on Stretch support

engine
System unit Monitor / Panel AP Link slot (5AC600.SDL0-00) on graphic connection
(GE) Number
5PC600.SX01-00 1 GE1 - Monitor / Panel
5PC600.SX02-00 2 GE2 GE1 AP Link slot (5AC600.SDL0-00)
5PC600.SX02-01 1 GE1 - Monitor / Panel
5PC600.SF03-00 2 GE2 GE1 AP Link slot (5AC600.SDL0-00)
5PC600.SX05-00 2 GE2 GE1 AP Link slot (5AC600.SDL0-00)
5PC600.SX05-01 1 GE1 - Monitor / Panel
5PC600.SE00-00 1 GE1 - Monitor / Panel

Section 4
Software
5PC600.SE00-01 1 GE1 - Monitor / Panel
5PC600.SE00-02 1 GE1 - Monitor / Panel

Table 349: Visual Components video output with different system units

A graphic engine 1 (GE1) is only available in connection with AP Link SDL transmitter
5AC600.SDL0-00 for system units 5PC600.SX02-00, 5PC600.SX05-00 and 5PC600.SF03-00.
If no AP Link SDL transmitter is present in the system units listed, then video output is not
possible with Visual Components.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 565

 Software • Automation PC 620 with MS-DOS

4. Automation PC 620 with MS-DOS

DOS622 Deutsch
Diskette 1- Setup
Perfection in Automation

Recovery Diskette

Darf nur für Backup oder Archivierungszwecke für B&R

Automatisierungsgeräte verwendet werden!

www.br-automation.com

060000129
©1983-2000 Microsoft Corporation. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.

Figure 277: Automation PC 620 with MS-DOS

Model number Short description Note

9S0000.01-010 OEM MS-DOS 6.22 German (disk)
OEM MS-DOS 6.22 German disks
Only delivered with a new PC.
9S0000.01-020 OEM MS-DOS 6.22 English (disk)
OEM MS-DOS 6.22 English disks
Only delivered with a new PC.

Table 350: Model numbers - MS-DOS

4.1 Known problems

Either no drivers are available for the following hardware components or only with limitations:

• AC97 Sound - no support

• USB 2.0 - only USB 1.1 rates can be reached.
• Limited drive support for the slide-in drives 5AC600.DVDS-00 and 5AC600.DVRS-00 -
no write functions.
• "Graphics Engine 2" and therefore Extended Desktop mode also cannot be used.
• A few "ACPI control" BIOS functions cannot be used.

566 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with MS-DOS

The following table shows the tested resolutions and color depths on the Monitor / Panel
connector with 855GME CPU boards.

Color depth
Resolutions for DVI 8-bit 16-bit 24-bit
640 x 480 ✓ ✓ ✓
800 x 600 ✓ ✓ ✓
1024 x 768 ✓ ✓ ✓
1280 x 1024 ✓ ✓ ✓

Color depth
Resolutions for RGB 8-bit 16-bit 24-bit
640 x 480 ✓ ✓ ✓
800 x 600 ✓ ✓ ✓
1024 x 768 ✓ ✓ ✓
1280 x 1024 ✓ ✓ ✓
1600 x 1200 ✓ ✓ ✓
1920 x 1440 ✓ ✓

Table 351: Tested resolutions and color depths for DVI and RGB signals

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 567

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

5. Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

Information:
Discontinuation of support for Windows XP by Microsoft:

After April 8th, 2014, Microsoft will no longer be providing any security updates,
hotfixes, support (free or paid) or technical resources for Windows XP.

Figure 278: Windows XP Professional Logo

Model number Short description Note

9S0000.08-010 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Professional Cancelled since 10/2008
CD, German; Only delivered with a new PC.
9S0000.08-020 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Professional Cancelled since 10/2008
CD, English; Only delivered with a new PC.
9S0000.09-090 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Professional Multilanguage Cancelled since 07/2009
CDs; Only delivered with a new PC.
5SWWXP.0600-GER WinXP Professional with SP3, CD German
Microsoft OEM Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3, CD, German. Only available with
a new device.
5SWWXP.0600-ENG WinXP Professional with SP3, CD English
Microsoft OEM Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3, CD, English. Only available with a
new device.
5SWWXP.0600-MUL WinXP Professional with SP3, CD, Multi-language
Microsoft OEM Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3, CD, multi-language. Only available
with a new device.
5SWWXP.0500-GER WinXP Professional with SP2c, CD German
Microsoft OEM Windows XP Professional Service Pack 2c, CD, German. Only available with
a new device.
5SWWXP.0500-ENG WinXP Professional with SP2c, CD English
Microsoft OEM Windows XP Professional Service Pack 2c, CD, English. Only available with
a new device.

Table 352: Model numbers - Windows XP Professional

568 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

Model number Short description Note

5SWWXP.0500-MUL WinXP Professional with SP2c, CD, Multi-language
Microsoft OEM Windows XP Professional Service Pack 2c, CD, multi-language. Only
available with a new device.

Table 352: Model numbers - Windows XP Professional (Forts.)

5.1 Installation

Upon request, B&R will pre-install Windows XP Professional on the desired mass memory (add-
on hard disk, slide-in hard disk). All of the drivers required for operation (graphics, network, etc.)
are also installed when doing so.

5.1.1 FAQ

How do I install Windows XP on systems with 815E CPU boards?

Windows XP can be installed on APC620 systems with 815E CPU boards only together with a
connected external monitor (RGB). An Automation Panel 900 is switched off in the Windows
hardware recognition if connected via SDL or DVI during the installation. Video output via SDL
and DVI is only supported after installing the 815E graphics driver.

Installation on PCI SATA RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-03, 5ACPCI.RAIC-05

The following steps are necessary for installing Windows XP Professional on the PCI SATA
RAID controller:

Section 4
1) Download the RAID driver from the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com) and copy

Software
the files to a diskette.

2) Connect the Media Drive (5MD900.USB2-01 or 5MD900.USB2-00) to the USB port.

3) Insert the diskette and Windows XP Professional CD in the the Media Drive and boot from
the CD.
4) Press the F6 key during setup to install a third-party SCSI or a driver.

5) Press the "s" key when asked about installing an additional drive. Insert the disk in the floppy
drive. Press "Enter" and select the driver.

6) Follow the setup instructions.

7) The setup copies the files to the Windows XP Professional folder and restarts the APC620.

For 5PCI slot model

The following steps are necessary when installing to a slide-in HDD being operated in the slide-
in slot 2 (located behind the PCI to SATA Bridge) on the APC620:

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 569

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

1) Download the Si3531 SATA driver from the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com)
and copy the files to a diskette.

2) Connect the Media Drive (5MD900.USB2-01 or 5MD900.USB2-00) to the USB port.

3) Insert the diskette and Windows XP Professional CD in the the Media Drive and boot from
the CD.

4) Press the F6 key during setup to install a third-party SCSI or a driver.

5) Press the "s" key when asked about installing an additional drive. Insert the disk in the floppy
drive. Press "Enter" and select the driver.

6) Follow the setup instructions.

7) The setup copies the files to the Windows XP Professional folder and restarts the Automation
PC 620.

Information:
• Windows XP setup supports not all USB-FDD drives (see Microsoft KB 916196).
• Depending on the system it could be neccesary to change the boot order in BIOS.

5.2 Graphics drivers

For operation modes "extended desktop" and "dual display clone", the Intel Extreme graphics
chip driver must be installed. Graphics drivers for 815E and 855GME CPU boards are available
for approved operating systems in the download area (Service - Material Related Downloads -
BIOS / Drivers / Updates) on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

5.2.1 Installing the graphics driver for 815E (ETX) CPU boards

The following must be observed when installing the graphics chip driver for the graphics chip
integrated in the 815E chip set:

• The driver available from Intel is NOT permitted to be used, only the driver available from
B&R (www.br-automation.com).
• After unpacking the *.zip file, the driver must be updated using the Windows Device
Manager "Start - Control Panel - System - Hardware - Device Manager - Update Driver".
When doing this, use the file i81xnt5.inf.
• The initial installation of the driver can only be carried out with an external monitor
(RGB) connected. After successfully installing the B&R driver, an Automation Panel 900
be operated via SDL or DVI without problems.

Caution!
Presently, this driver is only approved for the Windows XP Professional and
Windows XP embedded operating systems.

570 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

Information:
The following screenshots and descriptions refer to the graphics driver version
6.13.01.3175 for 815E CPU boards. Therefore, it is possible that the screenshots and
descriptions might not correspond with the installed driver version.

After the driver is installed, it can be configured in the Control Panel (called up through the icon
in the taskbar or Start - Control Panel - Display - Settings - Advanced).

Section 4
Figure 279: Graphics driver for 815E Control Panel access

Software

Figure 280: Graphics driver for 815E settings

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 571

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

5.2.2 Graphics driver installation - 855GME (ETX / XTX) CPU boards

Information:
The following screenshots and descriptions refer to the graphics driver version
14.11 for 855GME CPU boards. Therefore, it is possible that the screenshots and
descriptions might not correspond with the installed driver version.

After the driver is installed, it can be configured in the Control Panel (called up through the icon
in the taskbar or Start - Control Panel - Display - Settings - Advanced).

Figure 281: Accessing the graphics driver via Control Panel

Information:
The connected Automation Panel 900 is still not activated after installing the
graphics driver.
See the FAQ for information on this topic: "My Automation Panel 900 is still not
activated after installing the graphics driver.", on page 576.

572 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

5.2.3 Graphics settings for Extended Desktop

Under the "Extended desktop" settings, "Notebook" can be set as the primary device (Graphics
Engine 1) and "Digital display" as secondary device (Graphics Engine 2). The two lines display
different content (Extended Desktop).

Driver settings Effect on APC620

Primary device Notebook AP Link output Graphics engine 1
Secondary device Digital display Monitor / Panel Graphics engine 2

Primary device Digital display Monitor / Panel Graphics engine 2

Secondary device Notebook AP Link output Graphics engine 1

Table 353: Relationship between driver settings and graphics engine

Resolution and color depth can be configured separately for each line via the device settings for
notebook and digital display.

Section 4
Software

Figure 282: Extended desktop settings - primary and secondary device

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 573

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

Due to the operation of two different lines, for each line one of the internal serial interfaces COM
C and COM D on the APC620 must be activated in BIOS (under Advanced - Baseboard/Panel
Features - Legacy Devices) for the Automation 900 devices' touch screens. See the section
5.3.1 "Installation for Extended Desktop", on page 578 for information about installing the touch
screen driver.

574 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

5.2.4 Graphics settings for Dual Display Clone

In "Dual display clone" mode, the same content is displayed on every connected Automation
Panel 900 unit on both lines (Graphics Engine 1 and Graphics Engine 2). This enables operation
of the application from every display.

Driver settings Effect on APC620

Primary device Notebook AP Link output Graphics engine 1
Secondary device Digital display Monitor / Panel Graphics engine 2

Primary device Digital display Monitor / Panel Graphics engine 2

Secondary device Notebook AP Link output Graphics engine 1

Table 354: Relationship between driver settings and graphics engine

Resolution and color depth can only be set on the line designated as the primary device.

Section 4
Software

Figure 283: Dual display clone settings - primary and secondary device

The internal serial interface COM C on the APC620 must be activated in BIOS (under Advanced
- Baseboard/Panel Features - Legacy Devices) for the Automation 900 devices' touch screens.
See the section 5.3.2 "Installation for Dual Display Clone", on page 580 for information about
installing the touch screen driver.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 575

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

A panel locking time can be set in the B&R Control Center to prevent simultaneous operation of
the Automation Panel 900 (see the .chm help file for the B&R Control Center).

Information:
• The panel locking time is reset to the value configured in the key
configuration (KCF - Key Configuration File) when the system is restarted.

5.2.5 FAQ

My Automation Panel 900 is still not activated after installing the graphics driver.

After installation, the graphics driver is automatically set to the analog output - RGB (monitor).
As a result, any Automation Panel 900 connected via SDL (Smart Display Link) or DVI remains
switched-off after loading the Intel graphics driver in Windows XP.

Is set to "Monitor"
after installation

Figure 284: Settings after installing the graphics driver

576 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

To correct this problem, an analog monitor (RGB) must be connected to the monitor/panel, to re-
activate the settings for digital output (digital display for the monitor/panel output or notebook for
the AP Link output).

Digital display for Monitor / Panel output Notebook for AP Link output

Figure 285: Settings for adjustment

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 577

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

5.3 Touch screen driver

For operation modes "extended desktop" and "dual display clone", the Elo touch screen driver
must be installed. This can be found in the download area (Service - Material Related Downloads
- BIOS / Drivers / Updates) on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

Information:
The touch screen drivers are based on the Windows mouse system. That means that
either a mouse (USB or PS/2) must have been connected during the Windows
installation or the mouse drivers must be installed additionally (e.g. automatically
installed when later connecting a USB mouse). The BIOS function "PS/2 Mouse"
must be set to "Enabled" when using a PS/2 mouse. This is located on the BIOS
setup page "Advanced" - "Miscellaneous" (the default setting is "Disabled").

5.3.1 Installation for Extended Desktop

Information:
• Activate COM C and COM D in BIOS.
• During installation the panel locking time must be set to 0 ms ("Auto detect" of the driver
could only recognize 1 touch screen).

• Executing setup
• The Automation Panel 900 unit's touch screen is connected with the APC620 serially, so
the serial touch screen drivers must be installed.

Figure 286: Touch screen driver - serial touch screen

• The driver's auto-detect function sends data packets to every existing serial interface. It
then returns a list of all the ports on which an Elo touch screen is connected. The panel
locking time must be set to 0 ms (auto-detect only found 1 touch screen)

578 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

Figure 287: Touch screen driver - auto-detect

• After selecting the COM ports on which Elo touch screens are connected, the system
must be rebooted.
• After restarting, each line of touch screens must be calibrated separately. This is done in
the menus "Properties 1" and "Properties 2" with the "Align" button. When one touch
screen is being calibrated, the others are automatically locked.

Section 4
Software

Figure 288: Touch screen calibration

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 579

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

5.3.2 Installation for Dual Display Clone

Information:
• Activate COM C in BIOS.
• During installation the panel locking time must be set to 0 ms ("Auto detect" of the driver
could only recognize 1 touch screen).

• Executing setup
• The Automation Panel 900 unit's touch screen is connected with the APC620 serially, so
the serial touch screen drivers must be installed.

Figure 289: Touch screen driver - serial touch screen

• The driver's auto-detect function sends data packets to every existing serial interface. It
then returns a list of all the ports on which an Elo touch screen is connected. The panel
locking time must be set to 0 ms (auto-detect only found 1 touch screen)

Figure 290: Touch screen driver - auto-detect

580 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

• After selecting the COM ports on which Elo touch screens are connected, the system
must be rebooted.
• After restarting, only one touch screen must be calibrated. These settings are then
applied to other touch screens.

Figure 291: Touch screen calibration

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 581

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

5.3.3 FAQ

Power options and touch screen

The power options allow a few different settings (e.g. Turn off monitor, Turn off hard disks and
System standby for a Windows XP system).

Caution!
If the "Turn off monitor" function is enabled and a time has been set, then touching
the dark touch display after the time has expired presents the risk of "blindly"
activating one of the commands in the application and unintentionally triggering
functions.

This can be avoided by activating a screen saver. As a result, the next time the touch
screen is touched, the screen saver is deactivated.

5.4 Audio driver

An audio driver can be found in the download area (Service - Material Related Downloads - BIOS
/ Drivers / Updates) on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

See the section "MIC, Line IN and Line OUT ports", on page 144 for information about the audio
driver type.

5.4.1 Installation

Execute the downloaded setup.

Information:
The option "AC97 Audio controller" must be set to "Enabled" (default setting) in
BIOS under Advanced - I/O Device Configuration.

582 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP Professional

5.5 Network driver

The APC620 has 2 different networks controllers. Drivers for both network connections (ETH1
and ETH2) are available for approved operating systems in the download area (Service -
Material Related Downloads - BIOS / Drivers / Updates) on the B&R homepage (www.br-
automation.com).

See the sections "Ethernet connection ETH1", on page 130 and "Ethernet connection ETH2", on
page 132 for information about network controller types.

5.5.1 Installation ETH1

Execute the downloaded setup.

5.5.2 Installation ETH2

Installation is performed via the Windows device manager using the Net559ER.inf file.

5.6 Automation PC 620 embedded

The fieldbus interfaces CAN, X2X and POWERLINK are not supported by Microsoft Windows
XP (no drivers present).

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 583

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP embedded

6. Automation PC 620 with Windows XP embedded

Figure 292: Windows XP Embedded Logo

Model number Short description Note

9S0001.19-020 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Embedded APC620 815E w/CF, English Cancelled since 10/2005
Replacement type:
512 MB CompactFlash card with Windows XP Embedded image for APC620 systems with a 5SWWXP.0412-ENG
815E CPU board. Only delivered with a new PC.
9S0001.20-020 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Embedded APC620 855GME w/CF, English Cancelled since 10/2007
Replacement type:
512 MB CompactFlash card with Windows XP Embedded image for APC620 systems with a 5SWWXP.0412-ENG
855GME CPU board. Only delivered with a new PC.
9S0001.27-020 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Embedded (incl. SP2) APC620 815E w/CF, English Cancelled since 10/2005
Replacement type:
512 MB CompactFlash card with Windows XP Embedded image including SP2 for APC620 5SWWXP.0412-ENG
systems with a 815E CPU board. Only delivered with a new PC.
9S0001.28-020 OEM Microsoft Windows XP Embedded (incl. SP2) APC620 855GME w/CF, English Cancelled since 10/2007
Replacement type:
512 MB CompactFlash card with Windows XP Embedded image including SP2 for APC620 5SWWXP.0412-ENG
systems with a 855GME CPU board. Only delivered with a new PC.
5SWWXP.0412-ENG WinXPe FP2007 APC620 E855GME
Order Microsoft Windows XP Embedded English, Feature Pack 2007, for APC620 with CPU
boards 5PC600.E855-00, 5PC600.E855-01, 5PC600.E855-02, 5PC600.E855-03,
5PC600.E855-04, 5PC600.E855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 512 MB). Only
delivered with a new PC.
5SWWXP.0413-ENG WinXPe FP2007 APC620 X855GME
Order Microsoft Windows XP Embedded English, Feature Pack 2007, for APC620 with CPU
boards 5PC600.X855-00, 5PC600.X855-01, 5PC600.X855-02, 5PC600.X855-03,
5PC600.X855-04, 5PC600.X855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 512 MB). Only
delivered with a new PC.

Table 355: Model numbers - Windows XP Embedded

6.1 General information

Windows XP Embedded is the modular version of the desktop operating system Windows XP
Professional. Windows XP Embedded is based on the same binary files as Windows XP
Professional and is optimally tailored to the hardware being used. In other words, only the
functions and modules required by the respective device are included. Windows XP Embedded
is also based on the same reliable code as Windows XP Professional. It provides industry with
leading reliability, improvements in security and performance, and the latest technology for Web
browsing and extensive device support.

The Windows XP Embedded available from B&R was developed for APC620 systems with 815E
and 855GME CPU board units.

584 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP embedded

6.2 Features with FP2007 (Feature Pack 2007)

The feature list shows the most important device functions in Windows XP Embedded with
Feature Pack 2007 (FP2007).

Function Present
Enhanced write filter (EWF) ✓
File Based Write Filter ✓
Page file Configurable
Administrator account ✓
User account Configurable
Explorer shell ✓
Registry filter ✓
Internet Explorer 6.0 + SP2 ✓
Internet information service (IIS) -
Terminal service ✓
Windows Firewall ✓
MSN-Explorer -
Outlook Express -
Administrative Tools ✓
Remote Desktop ✓
Remote Assistance -
.NET Framework -

Section 4
Software
ASP.NET -
Codepages/User Locale/Keyboard ✓
Disk Management Service ✓
Windows Installer Service ✓
Class Installer ✓
CoDevice Installer ✓
Media Player -
DirectX -
Accessories ✓
Number of fonts 89

Table 356: Device functions in Windows XP Embedded with FP2007

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 585

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP embedded

6.3 Installation

Upon request, Windows XP Embedded can be preinstalled at B&R Austria on a suitable

CompactFlash card (min. 512 MB). The APC620 system is then automatically configured after it
has been switched on for the first time. This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes, and the
device will be rebooted a number of times.

Brief instructions for creating your own Windows XP Embedded images or a suitable Target
Designer export file for 815E or 855GME CPU boards can be downloaded from the download
area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

6.4 Graphics drivers

Already included in the B&R Windows XP Embedded image for 815E and 855GME CPU boards.

6.5 Touch screen driver

The touch screen driver must be manually installed in order to operate Automation Panel 900
touch screen devices. The driver installation is identical to the driver installation for Windows XP
Professional Systems. For more information, see 5.3 "Touch screen driver", on page 578

The driver can be downloaded from the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-
automation.com).

6.6 Audio driver

Already integrated in the B&R Windows XP Embedded image for 815E and 855GME CPU
boards.

6.6.1 After a BIOS upgrade

If the following error message appears after upgrading BIOS:

"Copy Error"

"Setup cannot copy the file Audio3d.dll"

then the audio driver must be reinstalled.

To do this, use the audio driver from the B&R Homepage (www.br-automation.com).
During the installation of the audio driver, the following 2 files must be manually selected from
the following directories.

ksuser.dll in the directory ...\Windows\system32

ks.sys in the directory ...\Windows\system32\drivers

This applies to 815E and 855ME CPU boards.

586 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows XP embedded

The graphics driver must be re-installed to enable all possible resolutions when using an 815E
CPU board (see 5.2.1 "Installing the graphics driver for 815E (ETX) CPU boards").

6.7 Network driver

Already integrated in the B&R Windows XP Embedded image for 815E and 855GME CPU
boards.

6.8 FAQ

6.8.1 Why does the B&R device restart when shutdown?

If the APC620 is connected with a B&R device, then the option "USB root hubs" must be disabled
in the Windows XP Embedded device manager under "Universal Serial Bus controllers" using
the following dialog box: Properities > Power Management > Allow the computer to turn off
this device to save power.

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 587

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows Embedded Standard 2009

7. Automation PC 620 with Windows Embedded Standard 2009

Figure 293: Windows Embedded Standard 2009 Logo

Model number Short description Note

5SWWXP.0712-ENG Windows Embedded Standard 2009 APC620 855GME ETX
Microsoft OEM Windows Embedded, Standard 2009, English; for APC620 with ETX CPU
board with 855GME chipset; order CompactFlash separately (at least 1 GB).
5SWWXP.0713-ENG Windows Embedded Standard 2009 APC620 855GME XTX
Microsoft OEM Windows Embedded, Standard 2009, English; for APC620 with XTX CPU
board with 855GME chipset; order CompactFlash separately (at least 1 GB).

Table 357: Model numbers - Windows Embedded Standard 2009

7.1 General information

Windows XP Embedded Standard 2009 is the modular version of the desktop operating system
Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 3. Windows XP Embedded Standard 2009 is based
on the same binary files as Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 3 and is optimally
tailored to the hardware being used. In other words, only the functions and modules required by
the respective device are included. Windows XP Embedded Standard 2009 is also based on the
same reliable code as Windows XP Professional with SP3. It provides industry with leading
reliability, improvements in security and performance, and the latest technology for Web
browsing and extensive device support.

588 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows Embedded Standard 2009

7.2 Features with WES2009 (Windows Embedded Standard 2009)

The feature list shows the most important device functions in Windows Embedded Standard
2009.

Function Present
Enhanced write filter (EWF) ✓
File Based Write Filter ✓
Page file Configurable
Administrator account ✓
User account Configurable
Explorer shell ✓
Registry filter ✓
Internet Explorer 7.0 ✓
Internet information service (IIS) -
Terminal service ✓
Windows Firewall ✓
MSN-Explorer -
Outlook Express -
Administrative Tools ✓
Remote Desktop ✓
Remote Assistance -
.NET Framework -

Section 4
Software
ASP.NET -
Local Network Bridge ✓
Codepages/User Locale/Keyboard ✓
Disk Management Service ✓
Windows Installer Service ✓
Class Installer ✓
CoDevice Installer ✓
Media Player 6.4 ✓
DirectX 9.0c ✓
Accessories ✓
Number of fonts 89

Table 358: Device functions in Windows Embedded Standard 2009

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 589

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows Embedded Standard 2009

7.3 Installation

Upon request, Windows Embedded Standard 2009 can be preinstalled at B&R Austria on a
suitable CompactFlash card (min. 1GB). The APC620 system is then automatically configured
after it has been switched on for the first time. This procedure takes approximately 30 minutes,
and the device will be rebooted a number of times.

7.4 Drivers

All drivers required for operation are preinstalled on the operating system. If an older driver
version is installed, the latest version can be downloaded from the B&R homepage (www.br-
automation.com) and installed. A potentially activated "Enhanced Write Filter (EWF)" must be
taken into consideration.

7.4.1 Touch screen driver

The touch screen driver must be manually installed in order to operate Automation Panel 800 or
Automation Panel 900 touch screen devices. The driver can be downloaded from the download
area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com). A potentially activated "Enhanced
Write Filter (EWF)" must be taken into consideration.

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

590 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows CE

8. Automation PC 620 with Windows CE

Model number Short description Note

5SWWCE.0512-ENG WinCE5.0 Pro APC620 E855GME
Order Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional, English, including license, for APC620 with
CPU boards 5PC600.E855-00, 5PC600.E855-01, 5PC600.E855-02, 5PC600.E855-03,
5PC600.E855-04, 5PC600.E855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
5SWWCE.0513-ENG WinCE5.0 Pro APC620 X855GME
Order Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional, English, including license, for APC620 with
CPU boards 5PC600.X855-00, 5PC600.X855-01, 5PC600.X855-02, 5PC600.X855-03,
5PC600.X855-04, 5PC600.X855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
5SWWCE.0612-ENG WinCE5.0 ProPlus APC620 E855GME
Order Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional Plus, English, including license, for APC620
with CPU boards 5PC600.E855-00, 5PC600.E855-01, 5PC600.E855-02, 5PC600.E855-03,
5PC600.E855-04, 5PC600.E855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
5SWWCE.0613-ENG WinCE5.0 ProPlus APC620 X855GME
Order Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional Plus, English, including license, for APC620

Section 4
Software
with CPU boards 5PC600.X855-00, 5PC600.X855-01, 5PC600.X855-02, 5PC600.X855-03,
5PC600.X855-04, 5PC600.X855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
5SWWCE.0812-ENG WinCE6.0 Pro APC620 E855GME
Order Microsoft Windows CE 6.0 Professional, English, including license, for APC620 with
CPU boards 5PC600.E855-00, 5PC600.E855-01, 5PC600.E855-02, 5PC600.E855-03,
5PC600.E855-04, 5PC600.E855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
5SWWCE.0813-ENG WinCE6.0 Pro APC620 X855GME
Order Microsoft Windows CE 6.0 Professional, English, including license, for APC620 with
CPU boards 5PC600.X855-00, 5PC600.X855-01, 5PC600.X855-02, 5PC600.X855-03,
5PC600.X855-04, 5PC600.X855-05; CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).

Table 359: Model numbers - Windows CE

8.1 General information

B&R Windows CE is an operating system which is optimally tailored to B&R's devices. It includes
only the functions and modules which are required by each device. This makes this operating
system extremely robust and stable. A further advantage of B&R Windows CE compared to other
operating systems are the low licensing costs.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 591

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows CE

8.2 Windows CE 5.0 features

Detailed information about Windows CE for B&R devices can be downloaded in the download
area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

Features Windows CE 5.0

Supported screen resolutions VGA (TFT), SVGA (TFT), XGA (TFT)
Chipset Intel 855GME
Color depth 16 bit or 65536 colors1)
Graphics card driver Intel(R) embedded graphics driver
Main memory Automatic detection and use of up to 512 MB RAM
Boot time / Startup time Approx. 39 seconds
Screen rotation not supported
Web browser Internet Explorer
.NET Compact Framework
Image size Approx. 31 MB2) , uncompressed
Custom keys Supported
PVI Supported
Automation Device Interface Supported
Remote Desktop Protocol for thin clients Supported
B&R VNC Viewer Supported
B&R Task Manager Supported
B&R Picture Viewer Supported
Compatible with zenOn Yes
Compatible with Wonderware No
Serial interfaces for any use 3
DirectX No
Audio ports "Line OUT" and "MIC" are supported. "Line IN" is not supported.

Table 360: Windows CE 5.0 features

1) The color depth depends on the display used.

2) Use the function "Compress Windows CE Image" in the B&R Embedded OS Installer to reduce the image size.

592 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows CE

8.3 Windows CE 6.0 features

Detailed information about Windows CE for B&R devices can be downloaded in the download
area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

Features Windows CE 6.0

Supported screen resolutions VGA (TFT), SVGA (TFT), XGA (TFT)
Chipset Intel 855GME
Color depth 16 bit or 65536 colors1)
Graphics card driver Intel® embedded graphics driver
Main memory Automatic detection and use of up to 512 MB RAM
Boot time / Startup time Approx. 20 seconds
Screen rotation not supported
Web browser Internet Explorer
.NET Compact Framework
Image size Approx. 33 MB2) , uncompressed
Custom keys Supported
PVI Supported
Automation Device Interface Supported
Remote Desktop Protocol for thin clients Supported
B&R VNC Viewer Supported
B&R Task Manager Supported
B&R Picture Viewer Supported

Section 4
Software
Compatible with zenOn Yes
Compatible with Wonderware No
Serial interfaces for any use 3
DirectX No
Audio ports "Line OUT" and "MIC" are supported. "Line IN" is not supported.

Table 361: Windows CE 6.0 features

1) The color depth depends on the display used.

2) Use the function "Compress Windows CE Image" in the B&R Embedded OS Installer to reduce the image size.

8.4 Differences between Windows CE 6.0 and Windows CE 5.0

• 2 GB of virtual RAM per process (Windows CE 5.0: 32 MB).

• Simultaneous operation of up to 32,000 processes (Windows CE 5.0: 32 processes).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 593

 Software • Automation PC 620 with Windows CE

8.5 Requirements

The device must fulfill the following criteria to be able run the Windows CE operating system.

• At least 128 MB main memory.

• At least one 128 MB CompactFlash card (size should be specified when ordered).

8.6 Installation

Windows CE is usually preinstalled at the B&R plant.

8.6.1 B&R Embedded OS Installer

The B&R Embedded OS Installer allows you to install existing B&R Windows CE images. The
four files (NK.BIN, BLDR, LOGOXRES.BMP, and LOGOQVGA.BMP) must be provided from an
already functioning B&R Windows CE installation.

The B&R Embedded OS Installer can be downloaded from the download area on the B&R
homepage (www.br-automation.com). Further information is available in the online help for the
B&R Embedded OS Installer.

594 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

9. B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

The ADI (Automation Device Interface) driver enables access to specific functions of B&R
devices. Settings for this device can be read and edited using the B&R Control Center applet in
the control panel.

Section 4
Figure 294: ADI Control Center screenshots - Example (symbol photo) Software

Information:
The displayed temperature and voltage values (e.g. CPU temperature, core voltage,
battery voltage) on the corresponding ADI page represent uncalibrated information
values. These cannot be used to draw any conclusions about any hardware alarms
or error conditions. The hardware components used have automatic diagnostics
functions that can be applied in the event of error.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 595

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

9.1 Features

Information:
The functions provided by the Automation Device Interface (ADI) - Control Center
vary according to device series.

• Adjusting the display-specific parameters of connected Panels

• Reading of device-specific keys
• Activation of device specific LEDs on a foil keypad
• Reading temperatures, fan speeds, statistical data, and switch settings
• Reading user settings and factory settings
• Reading software versions
• Updating and securing firmware
• Creating reports about the current system (support assistance)
• Setting the SDL equalizer value for the SDL cable adjustment
• Configuring an optional mounted UPS
• Change the user serial ID.
Supports following systems:

• Automation PC 620
• Automation PC 810
• Automation PC 820
• Panel PC 300
• Panel PC 700
• Panel PC 725
• Panel PC 800
• Power Panel 100/200
• Power Panel 300/400
• Power Panel 500
• Mobile Panel 40/50
• Mobile Panel 100/200
• Automation Panel 800 (in connection with Automation PCs and Panel PCs)
• Automation Panel 900 (in connection with Automation PCs and Panel PCs)

596 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

9.2 Installation

A detailed description of the Control Center can be found in the integrated online help. The B&R
Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver (also contains Control Center) can be downloaded for
free from the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

1. Download and unzip the ZIP archive

2. Close all applications

3. Run BrSetup.exe (e.g. double-click on it in Explorer).

- or -

1. Right click on BrSetup.inf in explorer and select "Install".

Information:
The ADI driver is already included in the B&R images of embedded operating
systems.

If a more current ADI driver version exists (see the B&R homepage download area),
it can be installed later. A potentially activated "Enhanced Write Filter (EWF)" must
be taken into consideration when installing.

Section 4
Software

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 597

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

9.3 SDL equalizer setting

1) Start the Control Center in the Control Panel.

2) Then select the Display tab.

3) Click on Settings. This opens the following dialog box:

Figure 295: ADI Control Center - SDL equalizer settings

You can change the display's SDL equalizer settings in this dialog box. The equalizer is
integrated in the Automation Panel and adapts the DVI signal to various cable lengths. The
equalizer value is automatically calculated based on the cable length: You may set a different
equalizer value in order to obtain the best possible display quality (e.g. with low-quality cables or
poor DVI signal quality).

The value is optimally defined for the cable length when using the "Automatic setting".

Information:
The equalizer value can only be changed if the function is supported by the panel
(panel firmware version 1.04 or higher) and if MTCX PX32 version 1.54 or higher is
installed. Otherwise, the dialog fields are disabled.

598 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

9.4 UPS configuration

Here you can view the status values for an optionally installed B&R APC add-on UPS as well as
change, update or save the battery settings for the UPS. You can also configure the system
settings for the UPS.

Figure 296: ADI Control Center - UPS settings

Caution!

Section 4
Software
The installed UPS must be selected and configured in the Control Panel using the
energy options in order for battery operation to be supported.

Information for Windows XP Embedded:

The UPS service is supported starting with B&R Windows Embedded Version 2.10
or higher.

9.4.1 Installing the UPS service for the B&R APC add-on UPS

1) Open the Control Center in the Control Panel.

2) Select UPS tab.

3) Click on System under UPS settings. This opens the Power Options in the Control Panel.
(The Power Options can also be opened directly from the Control Panel.)

4) Select the UPS tab and click Select....

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 599

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

5) Choose 'Bernecker + Rainer' as manufacturer and 'APC Add-On UPS' as model and then
click Finish. The value for the COM connection is only required for a serially connected UPS
and is ignored by the APC add-on UPS driver.

6) Click on Apply to begin UPS operation. After a few seconds the UPS status and details are
displayed.

7) Click OK.

8) The text field beside System (on the UPS tab in the Control Center) also indicates whether
the B&R UPS driver is active.

Information:
• Administrator rights are required in order to change the energy options or
display the UPS status.

9.4.2 Displaying UPS status values

1) Open the Control Center in the Control Panel.

2) Select UPS tab.

The displayed values are updated automatically.

Information:
The "reversed battery polarity" status is only displayed in UPS firmware version 1.08
or higher.

In UPS firmware Version 1.07 or smaller, a change between battery operation and
normal operation can lead to communication errors.

3) Select UPS monitor to display UPS status changes since the last time the system or UPS
driver was started.

600 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

Figure 297: ADI Control Center - UPS monitor

The dialog box is updated automatically when the status changes.

To remove a status from the list, click on delete.

Information:
The current status of the UPS is also displayed when the UPS service is started in
the Windows Control Panel on the UPS page in the energy options.

Information:
In a German version of Windows XP Professional the battery status is displayed as

Section 4
Software
"low" in the energy options, even if the battery is OK (Windows error). In an English
version, three battery status levels are displayed: unknown, OK, replace A low
battery status is never displayed.

9.4.3 Changing UPS battery settings

1) Open the Control Center in the Control Panel.

2) Select UPS tab.

3) Under "Battery settings," click on Edit. Clicking on "Open" opens a dialog box.

4) Select and open the file containing the battery settings.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 601

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

Figure 298: ADI Control Center - UPS battery settings

In this dialog box you can change the settings for the UPS battery.

The changed settings are written to the file by clicking on the OK button. The battery settings for
the UPS can then be updated with this file.

Information:
To make settings for batteries not from B&R, it is best to make a copy of a file with
battery settings from B&R under a new name and make adjust the settings in this
file for the battery being used.

Current files with settings for batteries from B&R can be found on the B&R APC620 / PPC700
firmware upgrade disk (starting with V1.16) and can also be updated using these.

Information:
• The current UPS firmware version 1.10 does not use charge end voltage, deep
discharge voltage, lifespan and deep discharge cycles.
• Lifespan is only included in version 2 (and higher) of the UPS battery settings
and only valid for B&R UPS batteries at 25°C ambient temperature.
• Deep discharge cycles are only included in version 3 (and higher) of the UPS
battery settings and only valid for B&R UPS batteries.

602 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

Information:
If you would like to change the current battery settings on the UPS, they must first
be saved in a file.

9.4.4 Updating UPS battery settings

1) Open the Control Center in the Control Panel.

2) Select UPS tab.

3) Under Battery settings, click on Update. Clicking on "Open" opens a dialog box.

4) Select and open the file containing the battery settings. The "Download" dialog box is
opened.

The transfer can be aborted by clicking on Cancel in the Download dialog box. Cancel is
disabled when the flash memory is being written to.

Caution!
• The UPS cannot be operated while updating the battery settings.
• If the transfer is interrupted, then the procedure must be repeated until the
battery settings have been updated successfully. Otherwise battery
operation will no longer be possible.

Section 4
Software
Deleting the data in flash memory can take several seconds depending on the memory block
being used. The progress indicator is not updated during this time.

Information:
The UPS is automatically restarted after a successful download. This can cause a
brief failure in the UPS communication.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 603

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

9.4.5 Saving UPS battery settings

1) Open the Control Center in the Control Panel.

2) Select UPS tab.

3) Under "Battery settings", click on Save. Clicking on "Save under" opens a dialog box.

4) Enter a file name or select an existing file and click on Save.

Information:
UPS settings can only be saved using UPS firmware version 1.10 and higher.

The transfer can be aborted by clicking on Cancel in the Download dialog box.

9.4.6 Configuring UPS system settings

1) Open the Control Center in the Control Panel.

2) Select UPS tab.

3) Click on System under UPS settings. The energy options dialog box in the Control Panel is
opened.

Figure 299: ADI Control Center - UPS settings

Further information regarding the UPD system settings can be found in the Windows help.

604 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

Information:
• UPS settings can only be changed using UPS firmware version 1.10 and
higher. If there are no changed settings on the UPS, then the factory or default
settings are used.
• The UPS is automatically restarted after UPS settings have been changed.
This can cause a brief disruption in communication with the UPS.
• Administrator rights are required in order to change the energy options or
display the UPS status.

Disabling 8 A current limitation

Information:
It is not UL compliant to switch off the 8 A current limitation on devices during
battery operation!

"Low Battery" shutdown caused by an over-current of > 8 A on devices during

battery operation is not UL compliant!

Select the checkbox Disable current limitation (8 A).

If current limitation is enabled (checkbox deselected), then the UPS uses battery operation to
check whether the UPS battery is discharged with 8 A for longer than 16 seconds. If so, then an
overcurrent alarm is sent to the PC.

Section 4
Software
Information:
Current limitation is only supported with UPS firmware version 1.10 and higher.

Enabling one of the two following options determines how the UPS should perform when an
overcurrent alarm occurs:

If Turn-off within 1 minute is selected, then the UPS will turn-off within one when an overcurrent
alarm occurs.

Warning!
The operating system will not be properly shut down if an overcurrent alarm occurs!

If Perform "low battery" shutdown is selected, then the UPS will also signal a "Low battery
alarm" in addition to the overcurrent alarm and will turn off after the defined Low battery
shutdown time. This will allow the operating system to shut down properly when UPS service
is enabled.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 605

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

Changing the UPS shutdown time when battery is low

Enter the "Low Battery" shutdown time in seconds. This is the amount of time that the UPS
will wait before shutting off the power supply when the battery level is low.

This prevents the UPS battery from becoming too discharged if the Windows UPS service is not
enabled and the UPS is therefore not turned off by the operating system.

If the UPS service is enabled, then the UPS will be turned off by the operating system when the
battery level is low, based on the Windows UPS service Turn-off delay (see 9.4.7 "Changing
additional UPS settings"). The low battery shutdown time will then be ignored.

Information:
• The low battery shutdown time must be set to at least 60 seconds, so that the
operating system has enough time to send the shutdown command to the
UPS when the battery level is low (normally occurs after approximately 30
seconds).
• The low battery shutdown time can only be set in UPS firmware version 1.10
and later. UPS firmware version 1.08 always uses a turn off delay time of 180
seconds. UPS firmware versions earlier than 1.08 do not shut down
automatically when the battery level is low.

9.4.7 Changing additional UPS settings

1) Open the Control Center in the Control Panel.

2) Select UPS tab.

3) Click on Advanced under UPS settings. This opens the following dialog box:

Figure 300: ADI Control Center - Advanced UPS settings

606 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

Information:
Administer rights are required in order to display this dialog box.

Change turn-off time for UPS

The Shutdown time can be specified in seconds under Windows UPS service. This is the
length of time that the UPS waits before switching off the power supply. When a critical alarm
occurs (e.g. at low battery level), the Windows UPS service will send a shutdown command with
the turn off delay time to the UPS and will shut down the system.

Information:
This time is evaluated by the Windows UPS Service, but can not be set in the UPS
system settings of the energy options. This value should only be changed if the
system requires longer than the default setting of 180 seconds to shut down.

Caution!
The time entered must be longer than the time required to shut down the operating
system.

Activate UPS messages

Section 4
Software
Under "B&R UPS driver", activate the checkbox "UPS status messages". Any changes to the
UPS status will then trigger a message from the B&R UPS driver.

Information:
Shutting down the system is only reported by the Windows UPS Service. The UPS
Service also sends other messages if they are activated in the UPS system settings
energy options. These messages are only displayed when the Windows Alerter and
Windows Messenger1) are active and the PC is logged on to a network. Additionally,
some conditions of the B&R APC620 UPS are not detected by the Windows UPS
Service, and are therefore do not trigger messages (e.g. when there are no battery
settings on the UPS). The Windows Services can be found in the Control Panel
under Administrative Tools - Services.
1) The Windows Alerter is supported starting with B&R Windows Embedded Version 2.10 or higher.

If the checkbox Display UPS status with UPS monitor is also activated, a new message is not
displayed for every change, but only a general message and request for you to start the B&R
UPS monitor. As long as the UPS monitor is active, no new messages are displayed.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 607

 Software • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver - Control Center

Information:
Regardless of these options, all changes to the UPS status are logged in Windows
event protocol (under "Application").

9.4.8 Procedure following power failure

Over-current shutdown

If an over-current >8 A is present during battery operation for a duration of 16 seconds, the over-
current shutdown is executed. A turn-off time of one minute is available to the system.

If the supply is regenerated during this time, then the shut down process is aborted.

Information:
The over-current shutdown has the highest priority.

Low battery shutdown

If the LowBatteryFlag is set during power failure, then the "low battery" shutdown is executed,
preventing the battery from fully discharging. Once the turn-off time expires (3 minutes by
default), the UPS shuts down.

If an "over-current" shutdown or "standard" shutdown is detected during the shutdown process,

the "low battery" shutdown is replaced by the respective process.

Standard shutdown

The standard shutdown is effective when the UPS service is active, the turn-off time is 3 minutes
by default.

If the supply voltage returns during the turn-off time, then the shutdown procedure will be
stopped.

If the supply voltage returns during the shutdown process, then the shutdown timer will run until
the APC620 enters standby mode and will then reboot the system.

608 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Standards and certifications • Applicable European directives

Chapter 5 • Standards and certifications

1. Applicable European directives

• EMC directive 2004/108/EG

• Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EG
• Machine directives 98/37/EG beginning 12/29/2009: 2006/42/EG

2. Overview of standards

Standard Description
EN 55011 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), radio disturbance product standard, industrial, scientific, and
Class A medical high-frequency devices (ISM devices), limit values and measurement procedure; group 1
(devices that do not create HF during material processing) and group 2 (devices that create HF during
material processing)
EN 55022 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), radio disturbance characteristics, information technology
Class A equipment (ITE devices), limits and methods of measurement
EN 60060-1 High-voltage test techniques - part 1: General specifications and testing conditions
EN 60068-2-1 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test A: Dry cold
EN 60068-2-2 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test B: Dry heat
EN 60068-2-3 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test and guidance: Damp heat, constant
EN 60068-2-6 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test: Vibration (sinusoidal)
EN 60068-2-14 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test N: Change of temperature
EN 60068-2-27 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test and guidance: Shock
EN 60068-2-30 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test and guidance: Damp heat, cyclic
Standards and
certifications
Section 5

EN 60068-2-31 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test: Drop and topple, primarily for equipment-type specimens
EN 60068-2-32 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test: Free fall
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery, electrical equipment on machines - part 1: General requirements
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
EN 60664-1 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - part 1: Principles, requirements and
tests
EN 60721-3-2 Classification of environmental conditions - part 3: Classification of groups of environmental
parameters and their severities, section 2: Transport
EN 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - part 3: Classification of groups of environmental
parameters and their severities, section 3: Stationary use at weather-protected locations

Table 362: Overview of standards

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 609

 Standards and certifications • Overview of standards

Standard Description
EN 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-2: Testing and measuring techniques; electrostatic
discharge immunity test
EN 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-3: Testing and measuring techniques; radiated radio-
frequency electromagnetic field immunity test
EN 61000-4-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-4: Testing and measuring techniques; electrical fast
transient/burst immunity test
EN 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-5: Testing and measuring techniques; surge immunity
test
EN 61000-4-6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-6: Testing and measuring techniques; immunity to
conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
EN 61000-4-8 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-8: Testing and measuring techniques; power frequency
magnetic field immunity test
EN 61000-4-11 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-11: Testing and measuring techniques; voltage dips,
short interruptions and voltage variations immunity tests
EN 61000-4-12 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-12: Testing and measuring techniques; oscillatory waves
immunity test
EN 61000-4-17 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-12: Testing and measuring techniques; ripple on DC input
power port immunity test
EN 61000-4-29 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-29: Testing and measuring techniques; voltage dips,
short interruptions and voltage variations on DC input power port immunity tests
EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), generic immunity standard - part 2: industrial environment

EN 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), generic emission standard - part 2: industrial environment

EN 61131-2 Product standard, programmable logic controllers - part 2: Equipment requirements and tests

UL 508 Industrial control equipment (UL = Underwriters Laboratories)

47 CFR Federal Communications Commission (FCC), 47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B Class A

Table 362: Overview of standards (Forts.)

610 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Standards and certifications • Emission requirements (emission)

3. Emission requirements (emission)

Emissions Test carried out according to Limits according to

Network-related emissions EN 55011 / EN 55022 EN 61000-6-4: Generic standard (industrial areas)
EN 55011: Industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) radio-frequency
equipment, class A (industrial areas)
EN 55022: Information technology equipment (ITE devices), class A
(industrial areas)
EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B Class A (FCC)
Emissions, EN 55011 / EN 55022 EN 61000-6-4: Generic standard (industrial areas)
Electromagnetic emissions
EN 55011: Industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) radio-frequency
equipment, class A (industrial areas)
EN 55022: Information technology equipment (ITE devices), class A
(industrial areas)
EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B Class A (FCC)

Table 363: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for emissions

Standards and
certifications
Section 5

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 611

 Standards and certifications • Emission requirements (emission)

3.1 Network-related emissions

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to Limits according to
EN 55011 / EN 55022 EN 61000-6-4 EN 55011 Class A EN 55022 Class A
Power mains connections - 79 dB (μV) 79 dB (μV)
150 kHz - 500 kHz Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value
66 dB (μV) 66 dB (μV)
Average Average
Power mains connections - 73 dB (μV) 73 dB (μV)
500 kHz - 30 MHz Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value
60 dB (μV) 60 dB (μV)
Average Average
AC mains connections 79 dB (μV) - -
150 kHz - 500 kHz Quasi-peak value
66 dB (μV)
Average
AC mains connections 73 dB (μV) - -
500 kHz - 30 MHz Quasi-peak value
60 dB (μV)
Average
Other connections - - 97 - 87 dB (μV) und
150 kHz - 500 kHz 53 - 43 dB (μA)
Quasi-peak value
84 - 74 dB (μV) und
40 - 30 dB (μA)
Average
Other connections - - 87 dB (μV) and 43 dB (μA)
500 kHz - 30 MHz Quasi-peak value
74 dB (μV) and 30 dB (μA)
Average
Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to
EN 55011 / EN 55022 EN 61131-2 47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B class
A
Power mains connections 1) 79 dB (μV) -
150 kHz - 500 kHz Quasi-peak value
66 dB (μV)
Average
Power mains connections 73 dB (μV) -
500 kHz - 30 MHz Quasi-peak value
60 dB (μV)
Average
AC mains connections - 79 dB (μV)
150 kHz - 500 kHz Quasi-peak value
66 dB (μV)
Average
AC mains connections - 73 dB (μV)
500 kHz - 30 MHz Quasi-peak value
60 dB (μV)
Average

Table 364: Test requirements - Network-related emissions for industrial areas

612 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Standards and certifications • Emission requirements (emission)

Other connections Only informative - -

150 kHz - 500 kHz for cable lengths > 10 m
40 - 30 dB (μA)
Quasi-peak value
30 - 20 dB (μA)
Average
Other connections Only informative - -
500 kHz - 30 MHz for cable lengths > 10 m
30 dB (μA)
Quasi-peak value
20 dB (μA)
Average

Table 364: Test requirements - Network-related emissions for industrial areas (Forts.)

1) AC network connections only with EN 61131-2

3.2 Emissions, electromagnetic emissions

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to Limits according to
EN 55011 / EN 55022 EN 61000-6-4 EN 55011 Class A EN 55022 Class A
30 MHz - 230 MHz < 40 dB (μV/m) < 40 dB (μV/m) < 40 dB (μV/m)
measured at a distance of 10 m Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value
230 MHz - 1 GHz < 47 dB (μV/m) < 47 dB (μV/m) < 47 dB (μV/m)
measured at a distance of 10 m Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value
Test carried out according to Limits according to
EN 55011 / EN 55022 EN 61131-2
30 MHz - 230 MHz < 40 dB (μV/m)
measured at a distance of 10 m Quasi-peak value
230 MHz - 1 GHz < 47 dB (μV/m)
measured at a distance of 10 m Quasi-peak value
Test carried out Limits according to 47 CFR Part
15 Subpart B class A
30 MHz - 88 MHz < 90 dB (μV/m)
measured at a distance of 10 m Quasi-peak value
88 MHz - 216 MHz < 150 dB (μV/m)
measured at a distance of 10 m Quasi-peak value
Standards and
216 MHz - 960 MHz < 210 dB (μV/m)
certifications
Section 5

measured at a distance of 10 m Quasi-peak value

> 960 MHz < 300 dB (μV/m)
measured at a distance of 10 m Quasi-peak value

Table 365: : Test requirements - Electromagnetic emissions for industrial areas

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 613

 Standards and certifications • Requirements for immunity to disturbances (immunity)

4. Requirements for immunity to disturbances (immunity)

Immunity Test carried out according to Limits according to

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)
EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Immunity against high-frequency EN 61000-4-3 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)
electromagnetic
fields (HF field) EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers

Immunity to high-speed transient EN 61000-4-4 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)

electrical disturbances (burst)
EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Immunity to surge voltages EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)
EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Immunity to conducted EN 61000-4-6 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)
disturbances
EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Immunity against magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)
with electrical frequencies
EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Immunity to voltage dips, short- EN 61000-4-11 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)
term interruptions and voltage
fluctuations EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers

Immunity to damped vibration EN 61000-4-12 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)

EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers

Table 366: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for immunity

Evaluation criteria according to EN 61000-6-2

Criteria A:
The operating equipment must continue to work as intended during the test. There should be
no interference in the operating behavior and no system failures below a minimum operating
quality as defined by the manufacturer.

Criteria B:
The operating equipment must continue to work as directed after the test. There should be no
interference in the operating behavior and no system failures below a minimum operating quality
as defined by the manufacturer.

Criteria C:
A temporary function failure is permitted if the function restores itself, or the function can be
restored by activating configuration and control elements.

Criteria D:
Impairment or failure of the function, which can no longer be established (operating equipment
destroyed).

614 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Standards and certifications • Requirements for immunity to disturbances (immunity)

4.1 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
Contact discharge to powder- ±4 kV, 10 discharges, ±4 kV, 10 discharges,
coated and bare metal housing criteria B criteria B
parts
Discharge through the air to plastic ±8 kV, 10 discharges, ±8 kV, 10 discharges,
housing parts criteria B criteria B

Table 367: Test requirements - Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

4.2 High-frequency electromagnetic fields (HF field)

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 61000-4-3 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
Housing, completely wired 80 MHz - 1 GHz, 10 V/m, 80% 2 GHz - 2.7 GHz, 1 V/m,
amplitude modulation with 1 kHz, 1.4 GHz - 2 GHz, 3 V/m,
length 3 seconds, criteria A 80 MHz - 1 GHz, 10 V/m,
80% amplitude modulation at 1
kHz, duration 3 seconds,
criteria A

Table 368: Test requirements - High-frequency electromagnetic fields (HF field)

Standards and
certifications
Section 5

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 615

 Standards and certifications • Requirements for immunity to disturbances (immunity)

4.3 High-speed transient electrical disturbances (burst)

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 61000-4-4 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
AC power I/O ±2 kV, criteria B -
AC power inputs - ±2 kV, criteria B
AC power outputs - ±1 kV, criteria B
1)
DC power I/O >10 m ±2 kV, criteria B -
DC power inputs >10 m - ±2 kV, criteria B
DC power outputs >10 m - ±1 kV, criteria B
Functional ground connections, ±1 kV, criteria B ±1 kV, criteria B
signal lines and I/Os >3 m
Unshielded AC I/O >3 m - ±2 kV, criteria B
Analog I/O ±1 kV, criteria B ±1 kV, criteria B

Table 369: Test requirements - High-speed transient electrical disturbances (burst)

1) For EN 55024 without length limitation.

4.4 Surges (surge)

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
AC power I/O, L to L ±1 kV, criteria B ±1 kV, criteria B
AC power I/O, L to PE ±2 kV, criteria B ±2 kV, criteria B
DC power I/O, L+ to L-, >10 m ±0.5 kV, criteria B -
DC power I/O, L to PE, >10 m ±0.5 kV, criteria B -
DC power inputs, L+ to L- - ±0.5 kV, criteria B
DC power inputs, L to PE - ±1 kV, criteria B
DC power outputs, L+ to L- - ±0.5 kV, criteria B
DC power outputs, L to PE - ±0.5 kV, criteria B
Signal connections >30 m ±1 kV, criteria B ±1 kV, criteria B
All shielded cables - ±1 kV, criteria B

Table 370: Test requirements - Surge voltages

4.5 Conducted disturbances

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 61000-4-6 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
AC power I/O 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 10 V, 80% 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 3 V, 80%
amplitude modulation with 1 kHz, amplitude modulation with 1 kHz,
length 3 seconds, criteria A length 3 seconds, criteria A

Table 371: Test requirements - Conducted disturbances

616 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Standards and certifications • Requirements for immunity to disturbances (immunity)

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 61000-4-6 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
DC power I/O 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 10 V, 80% 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 3 V, 80%
amplitude modulation with 1 kHz, amplitude modulation with 1 kHz,
length 3 seconds, criteria A length 3 seconds, criteria A
Functional ground connections 0.15 - 80 MHz, 10 V, 80% 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 3 V, 80%
amplitude modulation with 1 kHz, amplitude modulation with 1 kHz,
Length 3 seconds, criteria A length 3 seconds, criteria A
Signal connections >3 m 0.15 - 80 MHz, 10 V, 80% 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 3 V, 80%
amplitude modulation with 1 kHz, amplitude modulation with 1 kHz,
Length 3 seconds, criteria A length 3 seconds, criteria A

Table 371: Test requirements - Conducted disturbances (Forts.)

4.6 Magnetic fields with electrical frequencies

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
Test direction x, test in the field of 30 A/m, criteria A 30 A/m, criteria A
an induction coil 1 m x 1 m
Test direction y, test in the field of 30 A/m, criteria A 30 A/m, criteria A
an induction coil 1 m x 1 m
Test direction z, test in the field of 30 A/m, criteria A 30 A/m, criteria A
an induction coil 1 m x 1 m

Table 372: Test requirements - Magnetic fields with electrical frequencies

Standards and
certifications
Section 5

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 617

 Standards and certifications • Requirements for immunity to disturbances (immunity)

4.7 Voltage dips, fluctuations and short-term interruptions

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 61000-4-11 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
AC power inputs Voltage dip -
70% (30% reduction), 0.5 periods,
criteria B
AC power inputs Voltage dip -
40% (60% reduction), 5 periods,
criteria C
AC power inputs Voltage dip -
40% (60% reduction), 50 periods,
criteria C
AC power inputs Voltage interruptions -
< 5% (> 95% reduction), 250
periods, criteria C
AC power inputs - 20 interruptions, 0.5 periods,
criteria A
DC power inputs - 20 interruptions for 10 ms < UN -
15%, criteria A

Table 373: Test requirements - Voltage dips, fluctuations, and short-term interruptions

4.8 Damped vibration

Test carried out according to Limits according to

EN 61000-4-12 EN 61131-2
Power I/O, L to L ±1 kV, 1 MHz, repeat rate
400/seconds, length 2 seconds,
connection lengths 2 m, criteria B
Power I/O, L to PE ±2.5 kV, 1 MHz, repeat rate
400/seconds, length 2 seconds,
connection lengths 2 m, criteria B

Table 374: Test requirements - Damped vibration

618 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Standards and certifications • Mechanical conditions

5. Mechanical conditions

Vibration Test carried out according to Limits according to

Vibration operation EN 60068-2-6 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
EN 60721-3-3 class 3M4
Vibration during transport EN 60068-2-6 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M1
(packaged)
EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2
EN 60721-3-2 class 2M3
Shock during operation EN 60068-2-27 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
EN 60721-3-3 class 3M4
Shock during transport (packaged) EN 60068-2-27 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M1
EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2
EN 60721-3-2 class 2M3
Toppling (packaged) EN 60068-2-31 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M1
EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2
EN 60721-3-2 class 2M3
Free fall (packaged) EN 60068-2-32 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers

Table 375: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for vibration

5.1 Vibration operation

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 60068-2-6 EN 61131-2 EN 60721-3-3 class 3M4
Vibration during operation: 10 sweeps for each axis 10 sweeps for each axis
Uninterrupted duty with moveable
frequency in all 3 axes (x, y, z), 1 Frequency Limit value Frequency Limit value
octave per minute 5 - 9 Hz Amplitude 2 - 9 Hz Amplitude
3.5 mm 3 mm
9 - 150 Hz Acceleration 9 - 200 Hz Acceleration
1g 1g Standards and
Table 376: Test requirements - Vibration during operation
certifications
Section 5

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 619

 Standards and certifications • Mechanical conditions

5.2 Vibration during transport (packaged)

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to Limits according to
EN 60068-2-6 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M1 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M3
Vibration during transport: 10 sweeps for each axis, 10 sweeps for each axis, 10 sweeps for each axis,
Uninterrupted duty with moveable packaged packaged packaged
frequency in all 3 axes (x, y, z)
Frequency Limit value Frequency Limit value Frequency Limit value
2 - 9 Hz Amplitude 2 - 9 Hz Amplitude 2 - 8 Hz Amplitude
3.5 mm 3.5 mm 7.5 mm
9 - 200 Hz Acceleration 9 - 200 Hz Acceleration 8 - 200 Hz Acceleration
1g 1g 2g
200 - 500 Hz Acceleration 200 - 500 Hz Acceleration 200 - 500 Hz Acceleration
1.5 g 1.5 g 4g

Table 377: Test requirements - Vibration during transport (packaged)

5.3 Shock during operation

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 60068-2-27 EN 61131-2 EN 60721-3-3 class 3M4
Shock during operation: Pulse Acceleration 15 g, Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms
(half-sine) stress in all 3 axes (x, y, duration 11 ms, 18 shocks
z)

Table 378: Test requirements - Shock during operation

5.4 Shock during transport (packaged)

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to Limits according to
EN 60068-2-27 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M1 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M3
Pulse (half-sine) stress in all 3 axes Acceleration 10 g, Acceleration 30 g, Acceleration 100 g,
(x, y, z) Length 11 ms, each 3 shocks, Length 6 ms, each 3 shocks, Length 6 ms, each 3 shocks,
packaged packaged packaged

Table 379: Test requirements - Shock during transport

5.5 Toppling

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to Limits according to
EN 60068-2-31 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M1 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M3
Drop and topple Devices: Drop/topple Devices: Drop/topple Devices: Drop/topple
on each edge on each edge on each edge
Weight Required Weight Required Weight Required
<20 kg Yes <20 kg Yes <20 kg Yes
20 - 100 kg - 20 - 100 kg Yes 20 - 100 kg Yes
>100 kg - >100 kg - >100 kg Yes

Table 380: Test requirements - Toppling

620 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Standards and certifications • Mechanical conditions

5.6 Free fall (packaged)

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to Limits according to Limits according to
EN 60068-2-32 EN 61131-2 EN 60721-3-2 class EN 60721-3-2 class EN 60721-3-2 class
2M1 2M2 2M3
Free fall Devices with delivery Devices packaged Devices packaged Devices packaged
packaging each with 5
fall tests
Weight Height Weight Height Weight Height Weight Height
<10 kg 1.0 m <20 kg 0.25 m <20 kg 1.2 m <20 kg 1.5 m
10 - 40 kg 0.5 m 20 - 100 0.25 m 20 - 100 1.0 m 20 - 100 1.2 m
kg kg kg
> 40 kg 0.25 m >100 kg 0.1 m >100 kg 0.25 m >100 kg 0.5 m
Devices with product
packaging each with 5
fall tests
Weight Height
<10 kg 0.3 m
10 - 40 kg 0.3 m
> 40 kg 0.25 m

Table 381: Test requirements - Toppling

Standards and
certifications
Section 5

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 621

 Standards and certifications • Climate conditions

6. Climate conditions

Temperature / humidity Test carried out according to Limits according to

Worst case operation UL 508 UL 508: Industrial control equipment
EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Dry heat EN 60068-2-2 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Dry cold EN 60068-2-1 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Large temperature fluctuations EN 60068-2-14 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Temperature fluctuations in EN 60068-2-14 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
operation
Humid heat, cyclic EN 60068-2-30 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Humid heat, constant (storage) EN 60068-2-3 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers

Table 382: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for temperature and humidity

6.1 Worst case operation

Test carried out Limits according to Limits according to

according to UL 508 UL 508 EN 61131-2
Worst case during operation. 3 hours at max. ambient 3 hours at max. ambient
Operation of the device with the temperature (min. +40°C) temperature (min. +40°C)
max. ambient temperature duration approx. 5 hours duration approx. 5 hours
specified in the data sheet at the
max. specified load

Table 383: Test requirements - Worst case during operation

6.2 Dry heat

Test carried out according to Limits according to

EN 60068-2-2 EN 61131-2
Dry heat 16 hours at +70°C for 1 cycle,
then 1 hour acclimatization and
function testing, duration
approximately 17 hours

Table 384: Test requirements - Dry heat

6.3 Dry cold

Test carried out according to Limits according to

EN 60068-2-1 EN 61131-2
Dry cold 16 hours at -40°C for 1 cycle, then
1 hour acclimatization and
function testing, duration
approximately 17 hours

Table 385: Test requirements - Dry cold

622 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Standards and certifications • Climate conditions

6.4 Large temperature fluctuations

Test carried out according to Limits according to

EN 60068-2-14 EN 61131-2
Large temperature fluctuations 3 hours at -40°C and 3 hours at
+70°C, 2 cycles, then 2 hours
acclimatization and function
testing, duration approximately
14 hours

Table 386: Test requirements - Large temperature fluctuations

6.5 Temperature fluctuations in operation

Test carried out according to Limits according to

EN 60068-2-14 EN 61131-2
Open devices: These can also 3 hours at +5°C and 3 hours at
have a housing and are installed in 55°C, 5 cycles, temperature
switching cabinets gradient 3°C / min, the unit is
occasionally supplied with voltage
during testing, duration
approximately 30 hours
Closed devices: These are devices 3 hours at +5°C and
whose data sheet specifies a 3 hours at +55°C, 5 cycles,
surrounding housing (enclosure) temperature gradient 3°C / min,
with the corresponding safety the unit is occasionally supplied
precautions with voltage during testing,
duration approximately 30 hours

Table 387: Test requirements - Temperature fluctuations during operation

6.6 Humid heat, cyclic

Test carried out according to Limits according to

EN 60068-2-30 EN 61131-2
Alternating climate 24 hours at +25°C / +55°C and
97% / 83% RH, 2 cycles, then
2 hours acclimatization, function
testing and insulation, duration
Standards and
certifications
approximately 50 hours
Section 5

Table 388: Test requirements - Humid heat, cyclic

6.7 Humid heat, constant (storage)

Test carried out according to Limits according to

EN 60068-2-3 EN 61131-2
Humid heat, constant (storage) 48 hours at +40°C and 92.5% RH,
then insulation test within 3 hours,
duration approximately 49 hours

Table 389: Test requirements - Humid heat, constant (storage)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 623

 Standards and certifications • Safety

7. Safety

Safety Test carried out according to Limits according to

Ground resistance EN 61131-2 EN 60204-1: Electrical equipment of machines
EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Insulation resistance EN 60204-1: Electrical equipment of machines
High voltage EN 60060-1 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
UL 508: Industrial control equipment
Residual voltage EN 61131-2 EN 60204-1: Electrical equipment of machines
EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Leakage current VDE 0701-1: Service, changes and testing of electrical devices
Overload UL 508 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
UL 508: Industrial control equipment
Simulation component defect UL 508 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
UL 508: Industrial control equipment
Voltage range EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers

Table 390: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for safety

624 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Standards and certifications • Safety

7.1 Ground resistance

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 61131-2 EN 60204-11) EN 61131-2
Ground resistance: housing (from Smallest effective cross section of Maximum measured voltage drop Test current 30 A for 2 min,
any metal part to the ground the protective ground conductor at a test current of 10 A < 0.1 Ω
terminal) for the branch being tested
1.0 mm² 3.3 V
1.5 mm² 2.6 V
2.5 mm² 1.9 V
4.0 mm² 1.4 V
> 6.0 mm² 1.0 V

Table 391: Test requirements - Ground resistance

1) See EN 60204-1:1997 page 62, table 9.

7.2 Insulation resistance

Test carried out Limits according to

EN 60204-11)
Insulation resistance: main circuits > 1 MΩ at 500 V DC voltage
to protective ground conductor

Table 392: Test requirements - Insulation resistance

1) See EN 60204-1:1997 page 62, table 9.

Standards and
certifications
Section 5

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 625

 Standards and certifications • Safety

7.3 High voltage

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 60060-1 EN 61131-21) UL 508
High voltage: Primary circuit to Input voltage Test voltage Input Test voltage
secondary circuit and to protective voltage
ground circuit (transformers, coils, 1.2/50 μs
varistors, capacitors and voltage AC, 1 min DC, 1 min AC, 1 min DC, 1 min
components used to protect surge peak
against over-voltage can be 0 - 50 VAC 850 V 510 V 720 V ≤ 50 V 500 V 707 V
removed before the test) 0 - 60 VDC
50 - 100 VAC 1360 V 740 V 1050 V > 50 V 1000 V + (1000 V +
60 - 100 VDC 2 x UN 2 x UN)
x 1.414
100 - 150 VAC 2550 V 1400 V 1950 V
100 - 150 VDC
150 - 300 VAC 4250 V 2300 V 3250 V
150 - 300 VDC
300 - 600 VAC 6800 V 3700 V 5250 V
300 - 600 VDC
600 - 1000 VAC 10200 V 5550 V 7850 V
600 - 1000 VDC

Table 393: Test requirements - High voltage

1) See EN 61131-2:2003 page 104, table 59.

7.4 Residual voltage

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 61131-2 EN 60204-1 EN 61131-2
Residual voltage after switching off < 60 V after 5 sec (active parts) < 60 V after 5 sec (active parts)
< 60 V after 1 sec (plug pins) < 60 V after 1 sec (plug pins)

Table 394: Test requirements - Residual voltage

7.5 Leakage current

Test carried out Limits according to

VDE 0701-1
Leakage current: Phase to ground < 3.5 mA

Table 395: Test requirements - Leakage current

626 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Standards and certifications • Safety

7.6 Overload

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

UL 508 EN 61131-2 UL 508
Overload of transistor outputs 50 switches, 1.5 IN, 1 sec 50 switches, 1.5 IN, 1 sec
on / 9 sec off on / 9 sec off

Table 396: Test requirements - Overload

7.7 Defective component

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

UL 508 EN 61131-2 UL 508
Simulation of how components in Non-flammable surrounding cloth Non-flammable surrounding cloth
power supply became defective No contact with conductive parts No contact with
conductive parts

Table 397: Test requirements - Defective component

7.8 Voltage range

Test carried out according to Limits according to

EN 61131-2
Supply voltage Measurement Tolerance
value min/max
24 VDC
-15%
48 VDC
+20%
125 VDC
24 VAC
48 VAC
100 VAC
110 VAC
-15%
120 VAC
+10%
200 VAC
230 VAC
Standards and
240 VAC
certifications
400 VAC
Section 5

Table 398: Test requirements - Voltage range

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 627

 Standards and certifications • Other tests

8. Other tests

Other tests Test carried out according to Limits according to

Protection type - EN 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
Degree of pollution - EN 60664-1: Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage
systems - part 1: Principles, requirements and tests

Table 399: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for other tests

8.1 Protection type

Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 60529 EN 60529
Protection of the operating IP2. IP.6
equipment Protection against large solid Protection against large solid
foreign bodies =12.5 mm diameter foreign bodies:
Dust-proof
Protection of personnel IP2. IP.6
Protection against touching Protection against touching
dangerous parts with finger dangerous parts with conductor
Protection against water IP.0 IP.5
permeation with damaging Not protected Protected against sprayed water
consequences

Table 400: Test requirements - Protection

8.2 Degree of pollution

Test carried out according to Limits according to

EN 60664-1
Definition Degree of pollution II

Table 401: Test requirements - Degree of pollution

628 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Standards and certifications • SDL flex cable - test description

9. SDL flex cable - test description

9.1 Torsion

9.1.1 Test structure

2 3
1 ... Angle of rotatio
2 ... Fixed
a 3 ... Movable

Figure 301: Test structure - torsion

9.1.2 Test conditions

• Distance a: 450 mm
• Rotation angle: ±85°
• Velocity: 50 cycles / minute
• Special feature: The cable was clamped down twice in the machine.

9.1.3 Individual tests

• Visible pixel errors: At the beginning of the test, the minimum equalizer setting was
determined. This is the value between 0-15 at which no more pixel errors are visible. If
the equalizer setting is changed due to the mechanical load, this is noted.
• Touch screen for function (with a 21.3" Automation Panel - 5AP920.2138-01)
• USB mouse function
• Hot plug function tested by unplugging the USB plug
Standards and
certifications
Section 5

• After a test duration of 15000 cycles, the test was ended with a result of "OK".

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 629

 Standards and certifications • SDL flex cable - test description

9.2 Cable drag chain

9.2.1 Test structure

1
1 ... Flex radius
2 ... Movable carriage
2 3 ... Monitoring unit
4 ... Hub

Figure 302: Test structure - Cable drag chain

9.2.2 Test conditions

• Flex radius: 180 mm (= 15 x cable diameter)

• Hub: 460 mm
• Velocity: 4800 cycles / hour
• Special feature: The cable was clamped down twice in the machine.

9.2.3 Individual tests:

• Visible pixel errors: At the beginning of the test, the minimum equalizer setting is
determined. This is the value between 0-15 at which no more pixel errors are visible. If
the equalizer setting is changed due to the mechanical load, this is noted.
• Touch screen for function (with a 21.3" Automation Panel - 5AP920.2138-01)
• USB mouse function
• Hot plug function tested by unplugging the USB plug
• After a test duration of 30,000 cycles, the test was ended with a result of "OK".

630 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Standards and certifications • International certifications

10. International certifications

B&R products and services comply with applicable standards. They are international standards
from organizations such as ISO, IEC and CENELEC, as well as national standards from
organizations such as UL, CSA, FCC, VDE, ÖVE, etc. We give special consideration to the
reliability of our products in an industrial environment.

Certifications
USA and Canada All important B&R products are tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories and
checked quarterly by a UL inspector.
This mark is valid for the USA and Canada and simplifies certification of your machines
and systems in these areas.

Europe All harmonized EN standards for the applicable directives are met.

Table 402: International Certifications

Standards and
certifications
Section 5

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 631

 Standards and certifications • International certifications

632 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Overview

Chapter 6 • Accessories

1. Overview

Model number Short description Note

0AC201.91 Lithium batteries, 4 pcs.
Lithium batteries, 4 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell
4A0006.00-000 Lithium battery, 1 pc.
Lithium battery, 1 pc., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell
0TB103.9 Plug 24V 5.08 3-pin screw clamps
24 VDC 3-pin connector, female. Screw clamps, 3.31 mm², protected against vibration by the
screw flange
0TB103.91 Plug 24V 5.08 3-pin cage clamps
24 VDC 3-pin connector, female. Cage clamps, 3.31 mm², protected against vibration by the
screw flange
0TB704.9 Terminal block, 4-pin,
Screw clamp, 1.5 mm²
0TB704.91 Terminal block, 4-pin,
cage clamps, 2.5 mm²
5A5003.03 Front cover
Front cover for the USB 2.0 Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00.
5AC600.ICOV-00 Interface covers
Interface covers for APC620 and PPC700 devices; 5 pieces
5AC600.UPSI-00 Add-on UPS module
UPS module for APC620, APC810, PPC800; for system units 5PC600.SX01-00 (starting with
Rev. H0), 5PC600.SX02-00 (starting with Rev. G0), 5PC600.SX02-01 (starting with Rev. H0),
5PC600.SX05-00 (starting with Rev. F0), 5PC600.SX05-01 (starting with Rev. F0),
5PC600.SF03-00 (starting with Rev. A0), 5PC810.SX*. 5PC820.1505-00, 5PC820.1906-00
Order cable (5CAUPS.0005-00 or 5CAUPS.0030-00) and battery unit (5AC600.UPSB-00)
separately.
5AC600.UPSB-00 Battery unit 5 Ah
Battery unit 5Ah; for APC620, APC810 or PPC800 UPS.
5ACPCI.ETH1-01 PCI Ethernet card 10/100
half size PCI Ethernet card, 1 Ethernet connection
5ACPCI.ETH3-01 PCI Ethernet card 10/100 3port
half size PCI Ethernet card, 3 Ethernet connections
5AC900.1000-00 Adapter DVI-A/m to CRT
Adapter DVI (plug) to CRT (socket), for connecting a standard monitor to a DVI-I interface.
Accessories

5AC600.SRAM-00 APC620/PPC700 SRAM module 512kB

Section 6

SRAM module for APC620 and PPC700 512 KB.

5CAMSC.0001-00 APC620 internal supply cable

Table 403: Model numbers - Accessories

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 633

 Accessories • Overview

Model number Short description Note

5CADVI.0018-00 DVI-D cable 1.8 m
Single cable, DVI-D/m:DVI-D/m; length: 1.8 m
5CADVI.0050-00 DVI-D cable 5 m
Single cable, DVI-D/m:DVI-D/m; length: 5 m
5CADVI.0100-00 DVI-D cable 10 m
Single cable, DVI-D/m:DVI-D/m; length: 10 m
5CASDL.0018-00 SDL cable 1.8 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-01 SDL cable 1.8 m 45°
SDL cable for fixed type of layout with one-sided 45° plug; length: 1.8 m
5CASDL.0018-03 SDL flex cable 1.8 m
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 1.8 m
5CASDL.0050-00 SDL cable 5 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 5 m
5CASDL.0050-01 SDL cable 5 m 45°
SDL cable for fixed type of layout with one-sided 45° plug; length: 5 m
5CASDL.0050-03 SDL flex cable 5 m
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 5 m
5CASDL.0100-00 SDL cable 10 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 10 m
5CASDL.0100-01 SDL cable 10 m 45°
SDL cable for fixed type of layout with one-sided 45° plug; length: 10 m
5CASDL.0100-03 SDL flex cable 10 m
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 10 m
5CASDL.0150-00 SDL cable 15 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 15 m
5CASDL.0150-01 SDL cable 15 m 45°
SDL cable for fixed type of layout with one-sided 45° plug; length: 15 m
5CASDL.0150-03 SDL flex cable 15 m
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 15 m
5CASDL.0200-00 SDL cable 20 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 20 m
5CASDL.0200-03 SDL flex cable 20 m
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 20 m
5CASDL.0250-00 SDL cable 25 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 25 m
5CASDL.0250-03 SDL flex cable 25 m
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 25 m
5CASDL.0300-00 SDL cable 30 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 30 m
5CASDL.0300-03 SDL flex cable 30 m
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 30 m
5CASDL.0300-10 SDL cable with extender 30 m Cancelled since 12/2006
Replaced by 5CASDL.0300-
SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout; length 30 m 13

5CASDL.0300-13 SDL flex cable with extender 30 m

SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 30 m

Table 403: Model numbers - Accessories (Forts.)

634 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Overview

Model number Short description Note

5CASDL.0400-10 SDL cable with extender 40 m Cancelled since 12/2006
Replaced by 5CASDL.0400-
SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout; length 40 m 13

5CASDL.0400-13 SDL flex cable with extender 40 m

SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 40 m
5CAUPS.0005-00 APC620 UPS cable 0.5 m
Connection cable between add-on UPS module and UPS battery unit, length 0.5 meters
5CAUPS.0030-00 APC620 UPS cable 3 m
Connection cable between add-on UPS module and UPS battery unit, length 3 meters
5CAUSB.0018-00 USB 2.0 cable, A/m:B/m 1.8 m
USB 2.0 connection cable; plug type A - type B; length 1.8 m
5CAUSB.0050-00 USB 2.0 cable, A/m:B/m 5 m
USB 2.0 connection cable; plug type A - type B; length 5 m
9A0014.02 RS232 cable DB9/f:DB9/m 1.8 m
RS232 extension cable for remote operation of a display unit with touch screen, length 1.8 m.
9A0014.05 RS232 cable DB9/f:DB9/m 5 m
RS232 extension cable for remote operation of a display unit with touch screen, length 5 m.
9A0014.10 RS232 cable DB9/f:DB9/m 10 m
RS232 extension cable for remote operation of a display unit with touch screen, length 10 m.
5CFCRD.0512-06 CompactFlash 512 MB B&R
CompactFlash card with 512 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.1024-06 CompactFlash 1024 MB B&R
CompactFlash card with 1024 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.2048-06 CompactFlash 2048 MB B&R
CompactFlash card with 2048 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.4096-06 CompactFlash 4096 MB B&R
CompactFlash card with 4096 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.8192-06 CompactFlash 8192 MB B&R
CompactFlash card with 8192 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.016G-06 CompactFlash 16 GB B&R
CompactFlash card with 16 GB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.032G-06 CompactFlash 32 GB B&R
CompactFlash card with 32 GB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.0512-04 CompactFlash 512 MB B&R
CompactFlash card with 512 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.1024-04 CompactFlash 1024 MB B&R
CompactFlash card with 1024 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.2048-04 CompactFlash 2048 MB B&R
CompactFlash card with 2048 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.4096-04 CompactFlash 4096 MB B&R
CompactFlash card with 4096 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.8192-04 CompactFlash 8192 MB B&R
CompactFlash card with 8192 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
Accessories

5CFCRD.016G-04 CompactFlash 16 GB B&R

Section 6

CompactFlash card with 16 GB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface

5CFCRD.0064-03 CompactFlash 64 MB SSI
CompactFlash card with 64 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface

Table 403: Model numbers - Accessories (Forts.)

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 635

 Accessories • Overview

Model number Short description Note

5CFCRD.0128-03 CompactFlash 128 MB SSI
CompactFlash card with 128 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.0256-03 CompactFlash 256 MB SSI
CompactFlash card with 256 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.0512-03 CompactFlash 512 MB SSI
CompactFlash card with 512 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.1024-03 CompactFlash 1024 MB SSI
CompactFlash card with 1024 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.2048-03 CompactFlash 2048 MB SSI
CompactFlash card with 2048 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.4096-03 CompactFlash 4096 MB SSI
CompactFlash card with 4096 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.8192-03 CompactFlash 8192 MB SSI
CompactFlash card with 8192 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.0032-02 CompactFlash 32 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005
Replaced by 5CFCRD.0064-
CompactFlash card with 32 MB flash PROM and IDE/ATA interface. 03

5CFCRD.0064-02 CompactFlash 64 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005

Replaced by 5CFCRD.0064-
CompactFlash card with 64 MB flash PROM and IDE/ATA interface. 03

5CFCRD.0128-02 CompactFlash 128 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005

Replaced by 5CFCRD.0128-
CompactFlash card with 128 MB flash PROM and IDE/ATA interface 03

5CFCRD.0256-02 CompactFlash 256 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005

Replaced by 5CFCRD.0256-
CompactFlash card with 256 MB flash PROM and IDE/ATA interface 03

5CFCRD.0512-02 CompactFlash 512 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005

Replaced by 5CFCRD.0512-
CompactFlash card with 512 MB flash PROM and IDE/ATA interface 03

5CFCRD.1024-02 CompactFlash 1024 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005

Replaced by 5CFCRD.1024-
CompactFlash card with 1024 MB flash PROM and IDE/ATA interface 03

5CFCRD.2048-02 CompactFlash 2048 MB SanDisk/A Cancelled since 12/2005

Replaced by 5CFCRD.2048-
CompactFlash card with 2048 MB flash PROM and IDE/ATA interface 03

5MD900.USB2-00 USB 2.0 drive DVD-ROM/CD-RW FDD CF USB Cancelled since 10/2006
Replacement type
USB 2.0 drive combination, consists of DVD-ROM/CD-RW, FDD, CompactFlash slot (type II), 5MD900.USB-01
USB connection (type A front, type B back); 24 V DC.
5MD900.USB2-01 USB 2.0 drive DVD-RW/CD-RW FDD CF USB
USB 2.0 drive combination, consists of DVD-R/RW/DVD+R/RW/CD-RW, FDD,
CompactFlash slot (type II), USB connection (type A front, type B back); 24 V DC.
5MMUSB.0128-00 USB flash drive 128 MB SanDisk Cancelled since 12/2005
Replaced by 5MMUSB.2048-
USB 2.0 flash drive 128 MB 00

5MMUSB.0256-00 USB flash drive 256 MB SanDisk Cancelled since 03/2007

Replaced by 5MMUSB.2048-
USB 2.0 flash drive 256 MB 00

5MMUSB.0512-00 USB flash drive 512 MB SanDisk Cancelled since 07/2007

Replaced by 5MMUSB.2048-
USB 2.0 flash drive 512 MB 00

5MMUSB.1024-00 USB flash drive 1 GB SanDisk Cancelled since 03/2007

Replaced by 5MMUSB.2048-
USB 2.0 flash drive 1 GB 00

5MMUSB.2048-00 USB flash drive 2 GB SanDisk

USB 2.0 flash drive 2 GB

Table 403: Model numbers - Accessories (Forts.)

636 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Overview

Model number Short description Note

5MMUSB.2048-01 USB flash drive 2 GB B&R
USB 2.0 flash drive 2 GB
5SWHMI.0000-00 HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD

5AC600.FA01-00 APC620 replacement fan filter 1PCI 5 piece

APC620 replacement fan filter for system unit with 1 PCI Slot (5PC600.SX01-00).
5AC600.FA02-00 APC620 replacement fan filter 1PCI 5 piece
APC620 replacement fan filter for system unit with 2 PCI slot (5PC600.SX02-00,
5PC600.SX02-01).
5AC600.FA03-00 APC620f replacement fan filter 1PCI 5 piece
APC620 replacement fan filter for system unit with 3 PCI Slots (5PC600.SF03-00).
5AC600.FA05-00 APC620 replacement fan filter 1PCI 5 piece
APC620 replacement fan filter for system units with 5 PCI slot (5PC600.SX02-00,
5PC600.SX02-01).
0PS102.0 Power supply, 1-phase, 2.1 A
24 VDC power supply, 1-phase, 2.1 A, input 100-240 VAC, wide range, DIN rail mounting
0PS104.0 Power supply, 1-phase, 4.2 A
24 VDC power supply, 1 phase, 4.2 A, input 115/230 VAC, auto select, DIN rail mounting
0PS105.1 Power supply, 1-phase, 5 A
24 VDC power supply, 1 phase, 5 A, input 115/230 VAC, manual select, DIN rail mounting
0PS105.2 Power supply, 1-phase, 5 A, redundant
24 VDC power supply, 1 phase, 5 A, redundant through parallel operation, input 115/230
VAC, manual select, DIN rail mounting
0PS110.1 Power supply, 1-phase, 10 A
24 VDC power supply, 1 phase, 10 A, input 115/230 VAC, manual select, DIN rail mounting
0PS110.2 Power supply, 1-phase, 10 A, redundant
24 VDC power supply, 1 phase, 10 A, redundant through parallel operation, input 115/230
VAC, manual select, DIN rail mounting
0PS120.1 Power supply, 1-phase, 20 A
24 VDC power supply, 1 phase, 20 A, input 115/230 VAC, auto select, DIN rail mounting
0PS305.1 Power supply, 3-phase, 5 A
24 VDC power supply, 3-phase, 5 A, input 400..500 VAC (3 phases), wide range, DIN rail
mounting
0PS310.1 Power supply, 3-phase, 10 A
24 VDC power supply, 3-phase, 10 A, input 400..500 VAC (3 phases), wide range, DIN rail
mounting
0PS320.1 Power supply, 3-phase, 20 A
24 VDC power supply, 3-phase, 20 A, input 400..500 VAC (3 phases), wide range, DIN rail
mounting
0PS340.1 Power supply, 1-phase, 40 A
24 VDC power supply, 3 phase, 40 A, input 115/230 VAC, auto select, DIN rail mounting

Table 403: Model numbers - Accessories (Forts.)

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 637

 Accessories • Supply voltage connector (TB103 3-pin)

2. Supply voltage connector (TB103 3-pin)

2.1 General information

This single row 3-pin terminal block is mainly used to connect the supply voltage.

2.2 Order data

Model number Description Figure

0TB103.9 Plug for the 24 V supply voltage (screw clamps)
0TB103.91 Plug for the 24 V supply voltage (cage clamps)

0TB103.9

0TB103.91

Table 404: Order data - TB103

2.3 Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this accessory
and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire device
where this accessory is installed, refer to the data provided specifically for the entire
device.

Name 0TB103.9 0TB103.91

Number of pins 3
Type of terminal Screw clamps Cage clamps

Table 405: Technical data - TB103 supply plug

638 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Supply voltage connector (TB103 3-pin)

Name 0TB103.9 0TB103.91

Distance between contacts 5.08 mm
Resistance between contacts ≤ 5 mΩ
Nominal voltage according to VDE / 250 V / 300 V
UL,CSA
Current load according to VDE / UL,CSA 14.5 A / 10 A per contact
Terminal size 0.08 mm² - 3.31 mm²
Cable type Copper wires only (no aluminum wires!)

Table 405: Technical data - TB103 supply plug (Forts.)

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 639

 Accessories • X2X and CAN plugs (4-pin)

3. X2X and CAN plugs (4-pin)

3.1 General information

This 4-pin plug is needed for connecting to the X2X and CAN interface.

3.2 Order data

Model number Description Figure

0TB704.9 4-pin screw clamp
0TB704.91 4-pin cage clamps

0TB704.9

0TB704.91

Table 406: Order data - 0TB704.9 and 0TB704.91

3.3 Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this accessory
and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire device
where this accessory is installed, refer to the data provided specifically for the entire
device.

Name 0TB704.9 0TB704.91

Number of pins 4
Type of terminal Screw clamps Cage clamps

Table 407: Technical data - TB103 supply plug

640 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Replacement CMOS batteries

4. Replacement CMOS batteries

The lithium battery is needed for buffering the BIOS CMOS data, the real-time clock, and SRAM
data. The battery is subject to wear and should be replaced regularly (at least following the
specified buffer duration).

4.1 Order data

Model number Description Figure

0AC201.91 Lithium batteries, 5 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh button cell
4A0006.00-000 Lithium battery, 1 piece, 3 V / 950 mAh button cell

Table 408: Order data - Lithium batteries

4.2 Technical data

Warning!
Replace battery with Renata, type CR2477N only. Use of another battery may
present a risk of fire or explosion.

Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in

fire.

Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this accessory
and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire device
where this accessory is installed, refer to the data provided specifically for the entire
device.

Features 0AC201.91 4A0006.00-000

Capacity 950 mAh
Voltage 3V
Self discharge at 23°C < 1% per year
Accessories
Section 6

Storage time Max. 3 years at 30° C

Table 409: Technical data - Lithium batteries

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 641

 Accessories • Replacement CMOS batteries

Features 0AC201.91 4A0006.00-000

Environmental characteristics
Storage temperature -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity 0 to 95% (non-condensing)

Table 409: Technical data - Lithium batteries (Forts.)

642 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Interface covers 5AC600.ICOV-00

5. Interface covers 5AC600.ICOV-00

The interface covers protect interfaces from dirt and dust when not in use.

5.1 Order data

Model number Description Figure

5AC600.ICOV-00 Interface covers
Interface covers for APC620 and PPC700 devices; 5
pieces

Table 410: Order data - APC620 interface cover

5.2 Contents of delivery

2x 4x 2x 3x 3x 2x
for DVI sockets for DUSB for Ethernet for MIC, Line IN, Line OUT for USB for CF2 / HDD or CF1

Figure 303: Contents of delivery - interface cover

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 643

 Accessories • DVI - monitor adapter 5AC900.1000-00

6. DVI - monitor adapter 5AC900.1000-00

This adapter enables a standard monitor to be connected to the DVI-I interface.

6.1 Order data

Model number Description Figure

5AC900.1000-00 Adapter DVI-A/m to CRT DB15HD/f
Adapter DVI (plug) to CRT (socket), for connecting a
standard monitor to a DVI-I interface.

Table 411: Order data - DVI - CRT adapter

644 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-06

7. CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-06

7.1 General information

Information:
B&R CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-06 and CompactFlash cards from a
different manufacturer cannot be used in the same system at the same time. Due to
differences in technology (older vs. newer technologies), problems can occur
during system startup that are caused by the different boot times.

See chapter 3 "Commissioning" section 9 "Known problems / issues", on page 369.

Information:
The 5CFCRD.xxxx-06 CompactFlash cards are supported on B&R devices with
WinCE Version ≥ 6.0.

7.2 Order data

Model number Description Figure

5CFCRD.0512-06 CompactFlash 512 MB B&R (SLC)
5CFCRD.1024-06 CompactFlash 1 GB B&R (SLC)
5CFCRD.2048-06 CompactFlash 2 GB B&R (SLC)
5CFCRD.4096-06 CompactFlash 4 GB B&R (SLC)
5CFCRD.8192-06 CompactFlash 8 GB B&R (SLC)
5CFCRD.016G-06 CompactFlash 16 GB B&R (SLC)
5CFCRD.032G-06 CompactFlash 32 GB B&R (SLC)

CompactFlash card

Table 412: Order data - CompactFlash cards

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 645

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-06

7.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden loss of power may result in data loss! In very rare cases, mass memory
may also be damaged.

To prevent damage and loss of data, it is recommended to use a UPS device.

Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this accessory
and can deviate from those specified for the fully assembled device. The data
specifications for the fully assembled device take precedence over those of
individual components.

Features 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD.

0512-06 1024-06 2048-06 4096-06 8192-06 016G-06 032G-06
Capacity 512 MB 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB
MTBF (at 25°C) >3,000,000 hours (at 25°C)
Maintenance None
Data reliability < 1 unrecoverable error in 1014 bit read accesses
Data retention 10 years
Lifetime monitoring Yes
Supported operating modes PIO Mode 0-6, Multiword DMA Mode 0-4, Ultra DMA Mode 0-4
Continuous reading
Typical 33 MB/s 33 MB/s 33 MB/s 33 MB/s 33 MB/s 36 MB/s 36 MB/s
Maximum 35 MB/s 35 MB/s 35 MB/s 34 MB/s 34 MB/s 37 MB/s 37 MB/s
Continuous writing
Typical 15 MB/s 15 MB/s 15 MB/s 14 MB/s 14 MB/s 28 MB/s 28 MB/s
Maximum 18 MB/s 18 MB/s 18 MB/s 17 MB/s 17 MB/s 30 MB/s 30 MB/s
Endurance
Guaranteed data volume
Guaranteed1) 50 TB 100 TB 200 TB 400 TB 800 TB 1600 TB 3200 TB
Results for 5 years1) 27.40 54.79 109.59 219.18 438.36 876.72 1753.44
GB/day GB/day GB/day GB/day GB/day GB/day GB/day
Clear/write cycles
Guaranteed 100,000
SLC flash Yes
Wear leveling Static
Error Correction Coding (ECC) Yes
Endurance 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD.
0512-06 1024-06 2048-06 4096-06 8192-06 016G-06 032G-06

Table 413: Technical data - 5CFCRD.xxxx-06 CompactFlash cards

646 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-06

S.M.A.R.T. Support Yes

Support
Hardware PP300/400, PP500, PPC300, PPC700, PPC725, PPC800, APC620, APC810, APC820
Windows XP Professional No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Windows XP Embedded Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Windows Embedded Standard
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2009
Windows CE 6.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes2) Yes2)
Windows CE 5.0 No No No No No No No
PVI Transfer ≥ V3.2.3.8 ≥ V3.2.3.8 ≥ V3.2.3.8 ≥ V3.2.3.8 ≥ V3.2.3.8 ≥ V3.6.8.40 ≥ V4.0.0.8
(part of PVI (part of PVI (part of PVI (part of PVI (part of PVI (part of PVI (part of PVI
Developmen Developmen Developmen Developmen Developmen Developmen Developmen
t Setup ≥ t Setup ≥ t Setup ≥ t Setup ≥ t Setup ≥ t Setup ≥ t Setup ≥
V2.06.00.30 V2.06.00.30 V2.06.00.30 V2.06.00.30 V2.06.00.30 V3.0.0.3020) V3.0.2.3014)
11) 11) 11) 11) 11)
B&R Embedded OS Installer ≥ V3.10 ≥ V3.10 ≥ V3.10 ≥ V3.10 ≥ V3.10 ≥ V3.20 ≥ V3.21
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions
Length 36.4 ±0.15 mm
Width 42.8 ±0.10 mm
Thickness 3.3 ±0.10 mm
Weight 10 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to 70°C
Storage -65 to 150°C
Transport -65 to 150°C
Relative humidity
Operation/Storage/Transport Max. 85% at 85°C
Vibration
Operation/Storage/Transport 20 G peak, 20- 2000 Hz, 4 in each direction (JEDEC JESD22, method B103)
5.35 G RMS, 15 min per level (IEC 68-2-6)
Shock
Operation/Storage/Transport 1.5k G peak, 0.5 ms 5 times (JEDEC JESD22, method B110)
30 G, 11 ms 1 time (IEC 68-2-27)
Altitude Max. 4572 m

Table 413: Technical data - 5CFCRD.xxxx-06 CompactFlash cards (Forts.)

1) Endurance of B&R CFs (with linear written block size 128 kB)
2) Not supported by B&R Embedded OS installer.
Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 647

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-06

7.3.1 Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55
Storage
50 Operation
Transport
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 304: Temperature humidity diagram - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-06

7.4 Dimensions
1,60 ±0.05
±0,05

0.99 ±0.05
1.60

26 50

1 25
1.01 ±0.07 1.01 ±0.07
3.30 ±0.1
2x 12 ±0.10

2x 3 ±0.07

CompactFlash type I
2x 25.78 ±0.07

2.44 ±0.07
36.4 ±0.15

Top
0.76 ±0.07

1.65 0.63 ±0.07

41.66 ±0.13
4 x R0.5 ±0.1
42.8 ±0.1

Figure 305: Dimensions - CompactFlash card Type I

648 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-06

7.5 Benchmark

40

35

30

25
Transfer rate [MB/s]

20

15

10

0,5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192

Transfer size [kb]
5CFCRD.0512-06 5CFCRD.4096-06 5CFCRD.016G-06
5CFCRD.0512-04 5CFCRD.4096-04 5CFCRD.016G-04

Figure 306: ATTO Benchmark v2.34 comparison when reading - 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 with 5CFCRD.xxxx-06

40

35

30

25
Transfer rate [MB/s]

20

15

10

5
Accessories

0,5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192

Section 6

Transfer size [kb]

5CFCRD.0512-06 5CFCRD.4096-06 5CFCRD.016G-06
5CFCRD.0512-04 5CFCRD.4096-04 5CFCRD.016G-04

Figure 307: ATTO Benchmark v2.34 comparison when writing - 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 with 5CFCRD.xxxx-06

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 649

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04

8. CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04

8.1 General information

Information:
B&R CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 and CompactFlash cards from a
different manufacturer cannot be used in the same system at the same time. Due to
differences in technology (older vs. newer technologies), problems can occur
during system startup that are caused by the different boot times.

See chapter 3 "Commissioning", section 9 "Known problems / issues", on page 369.

Information:
The 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 CompactFlash cards are supported on B&R devices with
WinCE Version 6.0 or higher.

8.2 Order data

Model number Description Figure

5CFCRD.0512-04 512 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.1024-04 1024 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.2048-04 2048 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.4096-04 4096 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.8192-04 8192 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.016G-04 16 GB B&R CompactFlash card

CompactFlash card

Table 414: Order data - CompactFlash cards

650 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04

8.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden loss of power can cause data to be lost! In very rare cases, the mass
memory may also become damaged.

To prevent damage and loss of data, it is recommended to use a UPS device.

Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this accessory
and can deviate those specified for the entire device. For the entire device where
this accessory is installed, refer to the data provided specifically for the entire
device.

Features 5CFCRD.0512- 5CFCRD.1024- 5CFCRD.2048- 5CFCRD.4096- 5CFCRD.8192- 5CFCRD.016G

04 04 04 04 04 -04
MTBF (at 25°C) > 3,000,000 hours
Maintenance None
Data reliability < 1 unrecoverable error in 1014 bit read accesses
Data retention 10 years
Lifetime monitoring Yes
Supported operating modes PIO Mode 0-6, Multiword DMA Mode 0-4, Ultra DMA Mode 0-4
Continuous reading Typically 35 Typically 35 Typically 35 Typically 33 Typically 27 Typically 36
MB/s (240X)1) 2) MB/s (240X)1) MB/s (240X)1) MB/s (220X)1) MB/s (180X)1) MB/s (240X)1)
Max. 37 MB/s 2) 2) 2) 2) 2)
(260X)1) 2) Max. 37 MB/s Max. 37 MB/s Max. 34 MB/s Max. 28 MB/s Max. 37 MB/s
(260X)1) 2) (260X)1) 2) (226X)1) 2) (186X)1) 2) (247X)1) 2)
Continuous writing Typically 17 Typically 17 Typically 17 Typically 16 Typically 15 Typically 18
MB/s (110X) MB/s (110X) MB/s (110X) MB/s (106X) MB/s (100X) MB/s (120X)
Max. 20 MB/s Max. 20 MB/s Max. 20 MB/s Max. 18 MB/s Max. 17 MB/s Max. 19 MB/s
(133X) (133X) (133X) (120X) (110X) (126X)
Endurance
Guaranteed amount of data 3) 50 TB 100 TB 200 TB 400 TB 800 TB 1600 TB
Results in 5 years 3) 27.40 GB/day 54.79 GB/day 109.59 GB/day 219.18 GB/day 438.36 GB/day 876.72 GB/day
Clear/write cycles
Guaranteed 100,000
Typical4) 2,000,000
SLC flash Yes
Wear leveling Static
Accessories
Section 6

Error Correction Coding (ECC) Yes

Table 415: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 651

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04

Support 5CFCRD.0512- 5CFCRD.1024- 5CFCRD.2048- 5CFCRD.4096- 5CFCRD.8192- 5CFCRD.016G

04 04 04 04 04 -04
Hardware PP300/400, PPC300, PPC700, PPC725, PPC800, APC620, APC810, APC820
Windows XP Professional - - - Yes Yes Yes
Windows XP Embedded Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Windows Embedded Standard
- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2009
Windows CE 6.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 5)
Windows CE 5.0 - - - - - -
PVI Transfer Tool V3.2.3.8 (part of PVI Development Setup V2.06.00.3011) -
B&R Embedded OS Installer V3.10 -
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions
Length 36.4 ±0.15 mm
Width 42.8 ±0.10 mm
Thickness 3.3 ±0.10 mm
Weight 10 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to 70°C
Bearings -65 to 150°C
Transport -65 to 150°C
Relative humidity
Operation/Storage/Transport Max. 85% at 85°C
Vibration
Operation/Storage/Transport 20 G peak, 20- 2000 Hz, 4 in each direction (JEDEC JESD22, method B103)
5.35 G RMS, 15 min per level (IEC 68-2-6)
Shock
Operation/Storage/Transport 1.5k G peak, 0.5 ms 5 times (JEDEC JESD22, method B110)
30 G, 11 ms 1 time (IEC 68-2-27)
Altitude Max. 15,000 feet (4,572 m)

Table 415: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 (Forts.)

1) Speed specification with 1X = 150 KB/s. All specifications refer to the Samsung Flash chips, CompactFlash cards in UDMA mode 4, 30
ns cycle time in True-IDE mode with sequential write/read test.
2) The file is written/read sequentially in True IDE mode with the DOS program Thruput.exe.
3) Endurance of B&R CF cards (linear written block size with 128 KB)
4) Depending on the average file size.
5) Not supported by B&R Embedded OS installer.

652 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04

8.3.1 Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55
Storage
50 Operation
Transport
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 308: Temperature humidity diagram - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04

8.4 Dimensions
1,60 ±0.05
±0,05

0.99 ±0.05
1.60

26 50

1 25
1.01 ±0.07 1.01 ±0.07
3.30 ±0.1
2x 12 ±0.10

2x 3 ±0.07

CompactFlash type I
2x 25.78 ±0.07

2.44 ±0.07
36.4 ±0.15

Top
0.76 ±0.07

1.65 0.63 ±0.07

41.66 ±0.13
Accessories
Section 6

4 x R0.5 ±0.1
42.8 ±0.1

Figure 309: Dimensions - CompactFlash card Type I

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 653

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04

8.5 Benchmark

40

35

30

25
Transfer rate [MB/s]

20

15

10

0.5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192

Transfer size [kb]

5CFCRD.0512-04 5CFCRD.4096-04 5CFCRD.016G-04

5CFCRD.0512-03 5CFCRD.4096-03

Figure 310: ATTO disk benchmark v2.34 comparison (reading)

40

35

30

25
Transfer rate [MB/s]

20

15

10

0.5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192

Transfer size [kb]
5CFCRD.0512-04 5CFCRD.4096-04 5CFCRD.016G-04
5CFCRD.0512-03 5CFCRD.4096-03

Figure 311: ATTO disk benchmark v2.34 comparison (writing)

654 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards - 5CFCRD.xxxx-03

9. CompactFlash cards - 5CFCRD.xxxx-03

9.1 General information

Information:
Silicon Systems CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 and CompactFlash cards
from a different manufacturer cannot be used in the same system at the same time.
Due to differences in technology (older vs. newer technologies), problems can
occur during system startup that are caused by the different boot times.

See chapter 3 "Commissioning", section 9 "Known problems / issues", on page 369.

Information:
On Windows CE 5.0 devices, 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 CompactFlash cards up to 1GB are
supported.

9.2 Order data

Model number Description Figure

5CFCRD.0064-03 CompactFlash 64 MB SSI
5CFCRD.0128-03 CompactFlash 128 MB SSI
5CFCRD.0256-03 CompactFlash 256 MB SSI
5CFCRD.0512-03 CompactFlash 512 MB SSI
5CFCRD.1024-03 CompactFlash 1024 MB SSI
5CFCRD.2048-03 CompactFlash 2048 MB SSI
5CFCRD.4096-03 CompactFlash 4096 MB SSI
5CFCRD.8192-03 CompactFlash 8192 MB SSI
CompactFlash card

Table 416: Order data - CompactFlash cards

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 655

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards - 5CFCRD.xxxx-03

9.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden loss of power can cause data to be lost! In very rare cases, the mass
memory may also become damaged.

To prevent damage and loss of data, B&R recommends that you use a UPS device.

Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this accessory
and can deviate those specified for the entire device. For the entire device where
this accessory is installed, refer to the data provided specifically for the entire
device.

Features 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD.

0064-03 0128-03 0256-03 0512-03 1024-03 2048-03 4096-03 8192-03
MTBF (at 25°C) > 4,000,000 hours
Maintenance None
Data reliability < 1 unrecoverable error in 1014 bit read accesses
Data retention 10 years
Lifetime monitoring Yes
Supported operating modes PIO Mode 0-4, Multiword DMA Mode 0-2
Continuous reading Typically 8 MB/s
Continuous writing Typically 6 MB/s
Endurance
Clear/write cycles
Typical > 2,000,000
SLC flash Yes
Wear leveling Static
Error Correction Coding (ECC) Yes
Support
Hardware MP100/200, PP100/200, PP300/400, PPC300, PPC700, PPC725, PPC800,
Provit 2000, Provit 5000, APC620, APC680, APC810, APC820
Windows XP Professional - - - - - - Yes Yes
Windows XP Embedded - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Windows Embedded Standard 2009 - - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes
Windows CE 6.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes1)

Table 417: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-03

656 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards - 5CFCRD.xxxx-03

Support 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD.

0064-03 0128-03 0256-03 0512-03 1024-03 2048-03 4096-03 8192-03
Windows CE 5.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - -
PVI Transfer Tool V2.57 (part of PVI Development Setup V2.5.3.3005)
B&R Embedded OS Installer V2.21
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions
Length 36.4 ±0.15 mm
Width 42.8 ±0.10 mm
Thickness 3.3 ±0.10 mm
Weight 11.4 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to 70°C
Bearings -50 to 100°C
Transport -50 to 100°C
Relative humidity
Operation/Storage/Transport 8 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation max. 16.3 g (159 m/s2 0-peak)
Storage/Transport max. 30 g (294 m/s2 0-peak)
Shock
Operation Max. 1000 g (9810 m/s2 0-peak)
Storage/Transport Max. 3000 g (29430 m/s2 0-peak)
Altitude Maximum 80,000 feet (24,383 meters)

Table 417: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 (Forts.)

1) Not supported by B&R Embedded OS installer.

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 657

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards - 5CFCRD.xxxx-03

9.3.1 Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55 Storage
50 Operation
Transport
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 312: Temperature humidity diagram - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-03

9.4 Dimensions
1,60 ±0.05
±0,05

0.99 ±0.05
1.60

26 50

1 25
1.01 ±0.07 1.01 ±0.07
3.30 ±0.1
2x 12 ±0.10

2x 3 ±0.07

CompactFlash type I
2x 25.78 ±0.07

2.44 ±0.07
36.4 ±0.15

Top
0.76 ±0.07

1.65 0.63 ±0.07

41.66 ±0.13
4 x R0.5 ±0.1
42.8 ±0.1

Figure 313: Dimensions - CompactFlash card Type I

658 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02

10. CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02

10.1 General information

Information:
SanDisk CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02 and CompactFlash cards from a
different manufacturer cannot be used in the same system at the same time. Due to
differences in technology (older vs. newer technologies), problems can occur
during system startup that are caused by the different boot times.

See chapter 3 "Commissioning", section 9 "Known problems / issues", on page 369.

CompactFlash cards are easy-to-exchange storage media. Due to their robustness against
environmental influences (e.g. temperature, shock, vibration, etc.), CompactFlash cards are
ideal for use as storage media in industrial environments.

10.2 Order data

Model number Description Figure

5CFCRD.0032-02 CompactFlash 32 MB SanDisk/A
5CFCRD.0064-02 CompactFlash 64 MB SanDisk/A
5CFCRD.0128-02 CompactFlash 128 MB SanDisk/A
5CFCRD.0256-02 CompactFlash 256 MB SanDisk/A
5CFCRD.0512-02 CompactFlash 512 MB SanDisk/A
5CFCRD.1024-02 CompactFlash 1024 MB SanDisk/A
5CFCRD.2048-02 CompactFlash 2048 MB SanDisk/A

Table 418: Order data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02

10.3 Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this accessory
Accessories

and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire device
Section 6

where this accessory is installed, refer to the data provided specifically for the entire
device.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 659

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02

Features 5CFCRD.xxxx-02
MTBF (at 25°C) > 3,000,000 hours
Maintenance None
Data reliability < 1 unrecoverable error in 1014bit read accesses
< 1 faulty correction in 1020bit read accesses
Write/erase procedures > 2,000,000 times
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions
Length 36.4 ±0.15 mm
Width 42.8 ±0.10 mm
Thickness 3.3 mm ±0.10 mm
Weight 11.4 g
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to 70°C
Bearings -25 to 85°C
Transport -25 to 85°C
Relative humidity
Operation / Storage 8 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation / Storage Maximum 30 g (point to point)
Shock
Operation / Storage Maximum 3,000 g
Altitude 24,000 meters

Table 419: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02

660 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02

10.4 Dimensions

1,60 ±0.05
±0,05

0.99 ±0.05
1.60 26 50

1 25
1.01 ±0.07 1.01 ±0.07
3.30 ±0.1
2x 12 ±0.10

2x 3 ±0.07
CompactFlash type I
2x 25.78 ±0.07

2.44 ±0.07

36.4 ±0.15
Top

0.76 ±0.07
1.65 0.63 ±0.07
41.66 ±0.13
4 x R0.5 ±0.1
42.8 ±0.1

Figure 314: Dimensions - CompactFlash card Type I

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 661

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02

10.5 Calculating the lifespan

SanDisk provides a 6-page "white paper" for the lifespan calculation of CompactFlash cards (see
following pages). This document can also be found on the SanDisk homepage.

Figure 315: SanDisk white paper - page 1 of 6

662 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02

Figure 316: SanDisk white paper - page 2 of 6

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 663

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02

Figure 317: SanDisk white paper - page 3 of 6

664 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02

Figure 318: SanDisk white paper - page 4 of 6

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 665

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02

Figure 319: SanDisk white paper - page 5 of 6

666 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02

Figure 320: SanDisk white paper - page 6 of 6

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 667

 Accessories • USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

11. USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

2x mounting brackets

Data carriers not included in delivery

Figure 321: USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

11.1 Features

• Desk-top or rack-mount operation (mounting rail brackets)

• Integrated USB diskette drive
• Integrated DVD-ROM/CD-RW drive
• Integrated CompactFlash slot IDE/ATAPI (Hot Plug capable)
• Integrated USB 2.0 connection (up to 480 MBit high speed)
• +24 VDC supply (back side)
• USB/B 2.0 connection (back side)
• Optional front cover (model number 5A5003.03 see also section 11.8 "Front cover
5A5003.03 for the USB Media Drive", on page 673)

668 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

11.2 Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this accessory
and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire device
where this accessory is installed, refer to the data provided specifically for the entire
device.

Features - entire device 5MD900.USB2-00

Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 MBit/s), full speed (12 MBit/s), to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Maximum cable length 5 m (not including hub)
Power supply
Rated voltage 24 VDC ±25%
Features - diskette drive
Data capacity 720 KB / 1.25 MB / 1.44 MB (formatted)
Data transfer rate 250 kbit/s (720 KB) or 500 kbit/s (1.25 MB and 1.44 MB)
Rotation speed Up to 360 rpm
Diskette media High density (2HD) or normal density (2DD) 3.5" diskettes
MTBF 30,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
Features - DVD-ROM/CD-RW drive
Write speed
CD-R 24x, 16x, 10x and 4x
CD-RW 10x and 4x
Reading rate
CD 24x
DVD 8x
Data transfer rate Max. 33.3 MB/s
Access time (average)
CD 85 ms
DVD 110 ms
Revolution speed Max. 5136 rpm ±1%
Starting time (0 rpm to read access) 19 seconds (maximum)
Host interface IDE (ATAPI)
Readable media
CD CD/CD-ROM (12 cm, 8 cm), CD-R, CD-RW
DVD DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD-RAM
Non-write protected media
CD CD-R, CD-RW
Write-methods Disk at once, session at once, packet write, track at once
Accessories
Section 6

Laser class Class 1 laser

Data buffer capacity 2 MB

Table 420: Technical data - USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 669

 Accessories • USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

Features - DVD-ROM/CD-RW drive 5MD900.USB2-00

Compatible formats CD-DA, CD-ROM mode 1/mode 2
CD-ROM XA mode 2 (form 1, form 2)
Photo CD (single/multi-session)
Enhanced CD, CD text
DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-Video (double layer)
DVD-RAM (4.7 GB, 2.6 GB)
Noise level (complete read access) Approx. 45 dBA at 50 cm
Lifespan 60,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
Opening/closing the drawer > 10,000 times
CompactFlash slot layout
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot
Connection IDE/ATAPI
CompactFlash LED Signals read or write access to an inserted CompactFlash card
Hot Plug capable Yes
Features - USB connections
USB A on the front side Connection of further peripheral devices
Power supply Max. 500 mA
USB B back side Connection to the system
Mechanical characteristics
Outer dimensions (without slide-in)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight Approx. 1.1 kg (without front cover)
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation 5 to 45°C
Bearings -20 to 60°C
Transport -40 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation 20 to 80%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.3 g
Bearings At max. 10 - 100 Hz and 2 g
Transport At max. 10 - 100 Hz and 2 g
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation At max. 5 g for 11 ms
Storage (packaged) At max. 60 g for 11 ms
Transport (packaged) At max. 60 g for 11 ms
Altitude Max. 3000 meters

Table 420: Technical data - USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00 (Forts.)

670 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

11.3 Dimensions

52
140

Nominal General tolerance according

measurement area to DIN ISO 2768 medium
up to 6 mm ± 0.1 mm
over 6 to 30 mm ± 0.2 mm
over 30 to 120 mm ± 0.3 mm
over 120 to 400 mm ± 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 mm ± 0.8 mm

156

Figure 322: Dimensions for USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 671

 Accessories • USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

11.4 Dimensions with front cover

196

82,5
52
80

14
20 156

140

Nominal General tolerance according

measurement area to DIN ISO 2768 medium
up to 6 mm ± 0.1 mm
over 6 to 30 mm ± 0.2 mm
over 30 to 120 mm ± 0.3 mm
over 120 to 400 mm ± 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 mm ± 0.8 mm
8
2,3

Figure 323: Dimensions - USB Media Drive with front cover

11.5 Contents of delivery

Amount Component
1 USB Media Drive complete unit
2 Mounting rail brackets

Table 421: Contents of delivery - USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

11.6 Interfaces

DVD/CD-RW drive USB Floppy Cable clamp Grounding tongue

Compact Compact USB A connection + 24VDC USB B connection

Flash slot Flash LED

Figure 324: Interfaces for USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

672 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

11.7 Installation

The USB Media Drive can be operated as a desk-top device (rubber feet) or as a rack-mount
device (2 mounting rail brackets included).

11.7.1 Mounting orientation

Because of limits to the mounting orientation with the components used (floppy, DVD-CDRW
drive), the USB media drive is only permitted to be mounted and operated as shown in the
following figure.

less than 20° less than 20° less than 20° less than 20°

Figure 325: Mounting orientation of USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

11.8 Front cover 5A5003.03 for the USB Media Drive

This front cover can also be mounted on the front of the USB media drive (model number
5MD900.USB2-00 or 5MD900.USB2-01) to protect the interface.

4x

4x

Figure 326: Front cover 5A5003.03

11.8.1 Technical data

Features 5A5003.03
Front cover design / colors
Accessories
Section 6

Dark gray border around the cover Similar to Pantone432CV

Light gray background Similar to Pantone 427CV

Table 422: Technical data - 5A5003.03

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 673

 Accessories • USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00

11.8.2 Dimensions
80

196 8

Nominal General tolerance according

measurement area to DIN ISO 2768 medium
up to 6 mm ± 0.1 mm
over 6 to 30 mm ± 0.2 mm
over 30 to 120 mm ± 0.3 mm
over 120 to 400 mm ± 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 mm ± 0.8 mm

Figure 327: Dimensions - 5A5003.03

11.8.3 Installation

The front cover is attached with 2 mounting rail brackets (included with USB Media Drive) and 4
locknuts. The USB media drive and front cover can be mounted as a whole in (for example) a
switching cabinet door.

max. 10 mm

Mounting Installation depth

Figure 328: Front cover mounting and installation depth

674 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01

12. USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01

2x mounting brackets

Data carriers not included in delivery

Figure 329: USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01

12.1 Features

• Desk-top or rack-mount operation (mounting rail brackets)

• Integrated USB diskette drive
• Integrated DVD-RW/CD-RW drive
• Integrated CompactFlash slot IDE/ATAPI (Hot Plug capable)
• Integrated USB 2.0 connection (up to 480 MBit high speed)
• +24 VDC supply (back side)
• USB/B 2.0 connection (back side)
• Optional front cover (model number 5A5003.03 see also section 12.8 "Front cover
5A5003.03 for the USB Media Drive", on page 680)
Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 675

 Accessories • USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01

12.2 Technical data

Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this accessory
and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire device
where this accessory is installed, refer to the data provided specifically for the entire
device.

Features - entire device 5MD900.USB2-01

Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 MBit/s), full speed (12 MBit/s), to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Maximum cable length 5 m (not including hub)
Power supply
Rated voltage 24 VDC ±25%
Features - diskette drive
Data capacity 720 KB / 1.25 MB / 1.44 MB (formatted)
Data transfer rate 250 kbit/s (720 KB) or 500 kbit/s (1.25 MB and 1.44 MB)
Rotation speed Up to 360 rpm
Diskette media High density (2HD) or normal density (2DD) 3.5" diskettes
MTBF 30,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
Features - DVD-RW/CD-RW drive
Write speed
CD-R 24x, 16x, 10x and 4x
CD-RW 10x and 4x
DVD-R 8x, 4x and 2x
DVD-RW 4x and 2x
DVD-RAM1) 3x and 2x
DVD+R 8x, 4x and 2x
DVD+R (double layer) 2x,4x
DVD+RW 4x and 2x
Reading rate
CD 24x
DVD 8x
Data transfer rate Max. 33.3 MB/s
Access time (average)
CD 130 ms (24x)
DVD 130 ms (8x)
Revolution speed Max. 5090 rpm ±1%
Starting time (0 rpm to read access)
CD 14 seconds (maximum)
DVD 15 seconds (maximum)
Host interface IDE (ATAPI)
Laser class Class 1 laser

Table 423: Technical data - USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-01

676 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01

Features - DVD-ROM/CD-RW drive 5MD900.USB2-01

Readable media
CD CD/CD-ROM (12 cm, 8 cm), CD-R, CD-RW
DVD DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW. DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+R (double layer), DVD+RW
Non-write protected media
CD CD-R, CD-RW
DVD DVD-R/RW, DVD-RAM (4.7 GB), DVD+R/RW, DVD+R (double layer)
Compatible formats CD-DA, CD-ROM mode 1/mode 2
CD-ROM XA mode 2 (form 1, form 2)
Photo CD (single/multi-session), Enhanced CD, CD text
DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD-Video
DVD-RAM (4.7 GB, 2.6 GB)
DVD+R, DVD+R (double layer), DVD+RW
Write-methods
CD Disk at once, session at once, packet write, track at once
DVD Disk at once, incremental, over-write, sequential, multi-session
Data buffer capacity 8 MB
Noise level (complete read access) Approx. 48 dBA at 50 cm
Lifespan 60,000 POH (Power-On Hours)
Opening/closing the drawer > 10,000 times
CompactFlash slot layout
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot
Connection IDE/ATAPI
CompactFlash LED Signals read or write access to an inserted CompactFlash card
Hot Plug capable Yes
Features - USB connections
USB A on the front side Connection of further peripheral devices
Power supply Max. 500 mA
Type 2.0
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 MBit/s), full speed (12 MBit/s), to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
USB B back side Connection to the system
Mechanical characteristics
Outer dimensions (without slide-in)
Width 70 mm
Length 100 mm
Height 9.5 mm
Weight Approx. 1.1 kg (without front cover)
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation 5 to 45°C
Bearings -20 to 60°C
Transport -40 to 60°C
Accessories

Table 423: Technical data - USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-01 (Forts.)

Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 677

 Accessories • USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01

Environmental characteristics 5MD900.USB2-01

Relative humidity
Operation 20 to 80%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation At max. 5 - 500 Hz and 0.3 g
Bearings At max. 10 - 100 Hz and 2 g
Transport At max. 10 - 100 Hz and 2 g
Shock (pulse with a sine half-wave)
Operation At max. 5 g for 11 ms
Storage (packaged) At max. 60 g for 11 ms
Transport (packaged) At max. 60 g for 11 ms
Altitude Max. 3000 meters

Table 423: Technical data - USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-01 (Forts.)

1) RAM drivers are not provided by the manufacturer. Support of RAM function by the burning software "Nero" (model number
5SWUTI.0000-00) or other burning software packages and drivers from third party providers.

12.3 Dimensions
52

140

Nominal General tolerance according

measurement area to DIN ISO 2768 medium
up to 6 mm ± 0.1 mm
over 6 to 30 mm ± 0.2 mm
over 30 to 120 mm ± 0.3 mm
over 120 to 400 mm ± 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 mm ± 0.8 mm

156

Figure 330: Dimensions - 5MD900.USB2-01

678 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01

12.4 Dimensions with front cover

196

82,5
52
80

14
20 156

140

Nominal General tolerance according

measurement area to DIN ISO 2768 medium
up to 6 mm ± 0.1 mm
over 6 to 30 mm ± 0.2 mm
over 30 to 120 mm ± 0.3 mm
over 120 to 400 mm ± 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 mm ± 0.8 mm
8
2,3

Figure 331: Dimensions - USB Media Drive with front cover

12.5 Contents of delivery

Amount Component
1 USB Media Drive complete unit
2 Mounting rail brackets

Table 424: Contents of delivery - USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01

12.6 Interfaces

DVD/CD-RW drive USB Floppy Cable clamp Grounding tongue

Accessories
Section 6

Compact Compact USB A connection + 24VDC USB B connection

Flash slot Flash LED

Figure 332: Interfaces - 5MD900.USB2-01

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 679

 Accessories • USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01

12.7 Installation

The USB Media Drive can be operated as a desk-top device (rubber feet) or as a rack-mount
device (2 mounting rail brackets included).

12.7.1 Mounting orientation

Because of limits to the mounting orientation with the components used (floppy, DVD-CDRW
drive), the USB media drive is only permitted to be mounted and operated as shown in the
following figure.

less than 20° less than 20° less than 20° less than 20°

Figure 333: Mounting orientation - 5MD900.USB2-01

12.8 Front cover 5A5003.03 for the USB Media Drive

This front cover can also be mounted on the front of the USB media drive (model number
5MD900.USB2-00 or 5MD900.USB2-01) to protect the interface.

4x

4x

Figure 334: Front cover 5A5003.03

12.8.1 Technical data

Features 5A5003.03
Front cover design / colors
Dark gray border around the cover Similar to Pantone432CV
Light gray background Similar to Pantone 427CV

Table 425: Technical data - 5A5003.03

680 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01

12.8.2 Dimensions
80

196 8

Nominal General tolerance according

measurement area to DIN ISO 2768 medium
up to 6 mm ± 0.1 mm
over 6 to 30 mm ± 0.2 mm
over 30 to 120 mm ± 0.3 mm
over 120 to 400 mm ± 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 mm ± 0.8 mm

Figure 335: Dimensions - 5A5003.03

12.8.3 Installation

The front cover is attached with 2 mounting rail brackets (included with USB Media Drive) and 4
locknuts. The USB media drive and front cover can be mounted as a whole in (for example) a
switching cabinet door.

max. 10 mm

Mounting Installation depth

Figure 336: Front cover mounting and installation depth

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 681

 Accessories • USB flash drive

13. USB flash drive

Information:
We reserve the right to supply alternative products due to the vast quantity of flash
drives available on the market and their corresponding short product lifecycle.
Therefore, the following measures might be necessary in order to boot from these
flash drives (e.g. the SanDisk Cruzer Micro flash drive with 512 MB):

• The flash drive must be reformatted or in some cases even re-partitioned (set
active partition).
• The flash drive must be at the top of the BIOS boot order, or alternatively the
IDE controllers can also be deactivated in the BIOS. This can be avoided in
most cases if a "fdisk /mbr" command is also executed on the USB flash
drive.

13.1 General information

USB flash drives are easy-to-exchange storage media. Because of the fast data transfer
provided by USB 2.0, USB flash drives are ideal for use as a portable memory medium. Without
requiring additional drivers ("Hot Plug & Play" - except with Windows 98SE), the USB flash drive
can be converted immediately into an additional drive where data can be read or written.

13.2 Order data

Model number Description Figure

5MMUSB.0128-00 USB flash drive 128 MB SanDisk
Cruzer Mini ®
SanDisk Cruzer Mini
5MMUSB.0256-00 USB flash drive 256 MB SanDisk
Cruzer Mini
5MMUSB.0512-00 USB flash drive 512 MB SanDisk
Cruzer Mini up to Rev. E0 or Cruzer Micro starting with Rev.
E0
5MMUSB.1024-00 USB flash drive 1 GB SanDisk
Cruzer Mini up to Rev. E0 or Cruzer Micro starting with Rev.
E0 ®
SanDisk Cruzer Micro
5MMUSB.2048-00 USB flash drive 2 GB SanDisk
Cruzer Micro
5MMUSB.2048-01 USB flash drive 2 GB B&R
B&R USB Memory Stick

Table 426: Order data - USB flash drives

682 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • USB flash drive

13.3 Technical data - 5MMUSB.xxxx-00

Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this accessory
and can deviate those specified for the entire device. For the entire device where
this accessory is installed, refer to the data provided specifically for the entire
device.

Features 5MMUSB.0128-00 5MMUSB.0256-00 5MMUSB.0512-00 5MMUSB.1024-00 5MMUSB.2048-00

LED
Cruzer Mini / Cruzer Micro 1 LED (green), signals data transfer (send and receive)
Power supply Via the USB port
Current requirements Cruzer Mini / 650 μA in sleep mode, 150 mA read/write
Cruzer Micro
Interface Cruzer Mini / Cruzer Micro USB specification 2.0 high speed device, mass storage class, USB-IF and WHQL certified
Type USB 1.1 and 2.0 compatible
Transfer rate Up to 480 MBit (high speed)
Sequential reading Max. 8.7 MB/second
Sequential writing Max. 1.7 MB/second
Connection To each USB type A interface
MTBF (at 25°C)
Cruzer Mini / Cruzer Micro 100,000 hours
Data retention
Cruzer Mini / Cruzer Micro 10 years
Maintenance
Cruzer Mini / Cruzer Micro None
Operating system support
Cruzer Mini Windows CE 4.1, CE 4.2, 98SE1) , ME, 2000, XP, Mac OS 9.1.x and Mac OS X 10.1.2
Cruzer Micro Windows CE 4.2, CE 5.0, ME, 2000, XP and Mac OS 9.1.x+, OS X v10.1.2+
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions
Height - Cruzer Mini / Cruzer Micro 62 mm / 52.2 mm
Width - Cruzer Mini / Cruzer Micro 19 mm / 19 mm
Depth - Cruzer Mini / Cruzer Micro 11 mm / 7.9 mm
Environmental characteristics
Environmental temperature Cruzer Mini /
Cruzer Micro2)
Operation 0 to +45°C
Bearings -20 to +60°C
Transport -20 to +60°C
Humidity Cruzer Mini / Cruzer Micro
Operation 10 to 90%, non-condensing
Bearings 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Accessories
Section 6

Table 427: Technical data - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.xxxx-00

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 683

 Accessories • USB flash drive

Features 5MMUSB.0128-00 5MMUSB.0256-00 5MMUSB.0512-00 5MMUSB.1024-00 5MMUSB.2048-00

Vibration Cruzer Mini / Cruzer Micro

Operation At 10 - 500 Hz: 2 g (19.6 m/s2 0-peak), oscillation rate 1/minute
Bearings At 10 - 500 Hz: 4 g (39.2 m/s2 0-peak), oscillation rate 1/minute
Transport At 10 - 500 Hz: 4 g (39.2 m/s2 0-peak), oscillation rate 1/minute
Shock Cruzer Mini / Cruzer Micro
Operation Max. 40 g (392 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms length
Bearings Max. 80 g (784 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms length
Transport Max. 80 g (784 m/s2 0-peak) and 11 ms length
Altitude Cruzer Mini / Cruzer Micro
Operation 3,048 meters
Bearings 12,192 meters
Transport 12,192 meters

Table 427: Technical data - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.xxxx-00 (Forts.)

1) For Win 98SE, a driver can be downloaded from the SanDisk homepage.
2) Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature - typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500
meters above sea level).

13.3.1 Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)

85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
Lagerung

50 Betrieb
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperatur [°C] +

Figure 337: Temperature humidity diagram for flash drives 5MMUSB.xxxx-00

684 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • USB flash drive

13.4 Technical data - 5MMUSB.2048-01

Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this accessory
and can deviate those specified for the entire device. For the entire device where
this accessory is installed, refer to the data provided specifically for the entire
device.

Features 5MMUSB.2048-01
LED 1 LED (green), signals data transfer (send and receive)
Power supply Via the USB port
Current requirements max. 500 μA sleep mode, max. 120 mA read/write
Interface USB specification 2.0 high speed device, mass storage class, USB-IF and WHQL certified
Type USB 1.1 and 2.0 compatible
Transfer rate Up to 480 MBit (high speed)
Sequential reading Max. 31 MB/second
Sequential writing Max. 30 MB/second
Connection To each USB type A interface
MTBF > 3,000,000 hours
Data retention > 10 years
Maintenance None
Operating system support Windows CE, ME, 2000, XP, Vista und Mac OS 9 or newer, Linux 2.4 or newer
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions
Length 67.85 mm
Width 17.97 mm
Thickness 8.35 mm
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to 70°C
Bearings -50 to 100°C
Transport -50 to 100°C
Relative humidity
Operation 85%, non-condensing
Bearings 85%, non-condensing
Transport 85%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation At 20 - 2000 Hz: 20 g (peak)
Bearings At 20 - 2000 Hz: 20 g (peak)
Transport At 20 - 2000 Hz: 20 g (peak)
Shock
Operation max. 1500 g (peak)
Bearings max. 1500 g (peak)
Accessories
Section 6

Transport max. 1500 g (peak)

Table 428: Technical data - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.2048-01

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 685

 Accessories • USB flash drive

Environmental characteristics 5MMUSB.2048-01

Altitude
Operation 3,048 meters
Bearings 12,192 meters
Transport 12,192 meters

Table 428: Technical data - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.2048-01 (Forts.)

13.4.1 Temperature humidity diagram

100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)

80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport

50
Storage

45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 338: Temperature humidity diagram - USB flash drive - 5MMUSB.2048-01

Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature -
typically 1°C per 1000 meters (from 500 meters above sea level).

686 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00

14. HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00

Figure 339: HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00

Model number Short description Note

5SWHMI.0000-00 HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD

Table 429: Model number - HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD

This DVD contains drivers, utilities, software upgrades and user's manuals for B&R Panel
system products (see B&R homepage www.br-automation.com – Industrial PCs, Visualization
and Operation).

At the time of its creation, the content on the DVD is identical to the files found in the download
area of the B&R homepage (under Service – “Material Related Downloads”).

BIOS upgrades for the products

• Automation PC 620 / Panel PC 700 CPU Board 815E und 855GME BIOS
• Automation PC 620 / Panel PC 700 CPU Board X855GME BIOS
• Automation PC 620 / Panel PC 700 CPU Board 945GME N270 BIOS
• Automation PC 680
• Automation PC 810 / Automation PC 820 / Panel PC 800 B945GME BIOS
Accessories
Section 6

• Automation PC 810 / Panel PC 800 945GME N270 CPU Board BIOS

• Automation PC 810 / Panel PC 800 GM45 CPU Board BIOS
• Provit 2000 products - IPC2000/2001/2002

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 687

 Accessories • HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00

• Provit 5000 products - IPC5000/5600/5000C/5600C

• Power Panel 100 BIOS devices
• Mobile Panel 100 BIOS devices
• Power Panel 100 / Mobile Panel 100 User Boot Logo
• Power Panel 100 / Mobile Panel 100 REMHOST Utility
• Power Panel 300/400 BIOS devices
• Power Panel 300/400 BIOS User Boot Logo
• Panel PC 310

Drivers for the devices

• Automation Device Interface (ADI)

• Audio
• Chipset
• CD-ROM
• LS120
• Graphics
• Network
• PCI / SATA RAID controller
• Touch screen
• Touchpad
• Interfacecard

Firmware Upgrades

• Automation PC 620 / Panel PC 700 (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT)

• Automation PC 810 (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT)
• Automation PC 820 (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT)
• Mobile Panel 100 (SMCX)
• Panel PC 300 (MTCX)
• Power Panel 100 (aPCI)
• Power Panel 300/400 (aPCI)
• Power Panel 300/400 (MTCX)
• Panel PC 800 (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT)
• UPS firmware

688 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00

Utilities / Tools

• B&R Embedded OS Installer

• Windows CE Tools
• User Boot Logo Conversion Utility
• SATA RAID Installations Utility
• Automation Device Interface (ADI)
• CompactFlash endurance calculator (Silicon Systems)
• Miscellaneous
• MTC Utilities
• Key Editor
• MTC & Mkey Utilities
• Mkey Utilities
• UPS configuration software
• ICU ISA configuration
• Intel PCI NIC Boot ROM
• Diagnostic Utilities

Windows

• Windows CE 6.0
• Windows CE 5.0
• Windows CE 4.2
• Windows CE 4.1
• Windows CE Tools
• Windows Embedded Standard 2009
• Thin Client
• Windows NT Embedded
• Windows XP Embedded
• VNC Viewer

MCAD templates for

• Industrial PCs
Accessories
Section 6

• Operator Interface devices

• Legend Strips templates
• Customized designs

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 689

 Accessories • HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00

ECAD templates for

• Industrial PCs
• Automation PCs
• Automation Panel 900
• Panel (Power Panel)

Documentation for

• Automation PC 620
• Automation PC 680
• Automation PC 810
• Automation PC 820
• Automation Panel 800
• Automation Panel 900
• Panel PC 310
• Panel PC 700
• Panel PC 725
• Panel PC 800
• Power Panel 15/21/35/41
• Power Panel 100/200
• Power Panel 300/400
• Mobile Panel 40/50
• Mobile Panel 100/200
• Mobile Panel connection box
• Provit 2000
• Provit 3030
• Provit 4000
• Provit 5000
• Provit Benchmark
• Provit Mkey
• Windows CE 5.0 help
• Windows CE 6.0 help
• Windows NT Embedded application guide
• Windows XP Embedded application guide
• UPS - uninterruptible power supply

690 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00

• Implementation instructions
• B&R Hilscher feldbus cards (CANopen, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, PROFINET)

Service tools

• Acrobat Reader 5.0.5 (freeware in German, English and French)

• Power Archiver 6.0 (freeware in German, English and French)
• Internet Explorer 5.0 (German and English)
• Internet Explorer 6.0 (German and English)

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 691

 Accessories • Cables

15. Cables

15.1 APC620 internal supply cable 5CAMSC.0001-00

This supply cable is used internally e.g. to supply special PCI cards. It is connected to the
APC620 main board. For requirements and procedures, see appendix A, section "Connection of
an external device to the main board", on page 792.

Figure 340: APC620 internal supply cable 5CAMSC.0001-00

15.1.1 Order data

Model number Description Note

5CAMSC.0001-00 APC620 internal supply cable

Table 430: Model number - APC620 internal supply cable

15.1.2 Technical data

Features 5CAMSC.0001-00
Length 100 mm ±5 mm
Connector type 1x 4-pin male disk drive power plug, 1x 4-pin female plug housing
Wire cross section AWG 22
Flexibility Flexible

Table 431: Technical data - 5CAMSC.0001-00

692 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.2 DVI cable 5CADVI.0xxx-00

The DVI cables 5CADVI.0xxx-00 are designed for fixed layout.

Plug Ferrite Ferrite Plug

Figure 341: DVI extension cable (similar)

Caution!
DVI cables can only be plugged in and unplugged when the APC620 and display
device (Automation Panel 900, monitor) are turned off.

15.2.1 Order data

Model number Description Note

5CADVI.0018-00 DVI-D cable 1.8 m
Single cable, DVI-D/m:DVI-D/m; length: 1.8 m
5CADVI.0050-00 DVI-D cable 5 m
Single cable, DVI-D/m:DVI-D/m; length: 5 m
5CADVI.0100-00 DVI-D cable 10 m
Single cable, DVI-D/m:DVI-D/m; length: 10 m

Table 432: Model numbers - DVI cables

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 693

 Accessories • Cables

15.2.2 Technical data

Features 5CADVI.0018-00 5CADVI.0050-00 5CADVI.0100-00

Length 1.8 m 5m 10 m
Tolerance ±30 mm ±50 mm ±100 mm
Cable diameter
Maximum 8.5 mm
Shielding Individual cable pairs and entire cable
Connector type 2x DVI-D (18+1), male
Connection cycles 100
Wire cross section AWG 28
Line resistance Max. 237 Ω/km
Insulation resistance Min. 100 MΩ/km
Flexibility Limited flexibility; valid for ferrite magnet - ferrite magnet (tested 100 cycles with 5x cable diameter, 20 cycles /
minute)
Flex radius See figure "Flex radius specification", on page 694
Fixed layout 5x cable diameter (plug - ferrite magnet and ferrite magnet - ferrite magnet)
Weight Approx. 300 g Approx. 590 g Approx. 2100 g

Table 433: Technical data - DVI cable 5CADVI.0xxx-00

15.2.3 Flex radius specification

Plug Ferrite

Flex radius Flex radius

Plug - Ferrite Ferrite - Ferrite

Ferrite Ferrite

Figure 342: Flex radius specification

694 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.2.4 Cable specifications

The following figure shows the pin assignments for the DVI cable available at B&R. If you want
to build a suitable cable yourself, it should be wired according to these specifications.

Warning!
If a self-built cable is used, B&R cannot guarantee that it will function properly.

DVI-D (24+1), male DVI-D (24+1), male

16 9 17
1
24 8

8 24
17 1 16
9

Pin assignments
DVI-D (24+1), male DVI-D (24+1), male

24 24
23 23
22 22
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
11 11
10 10
9 9
7 7
6 6
3 3
2 2
1 1
Cable shielding Cable shielding
Figure 343: Pin assignments - DVI cable
Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 695

 Accessories • Cables

15.3 SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-00

The SDL cables 5CASDL.0xxx-00 are designed for fixed layout. Use of the SDL flex cable
5CASDL.0xxx-03 is required for a flexible installation (e.g. in swing arm systems).

Plug Plug
Ferrite Ferrite

Figure 344: SDL extension cable (similar)

Caution!
The SDl cable can only be plugged in and unplugged when the device is turned off.

15.3.1 Order data

Model number Description Note

5CASDL.0018-00 SDL cable 1.8 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 1.8 m
5CASDL.0050-00 SDL cable 5 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 5 m
5CASDL.0100-00 SDL cable 10 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 10 m
5CASDL.0150-00 SDL cable 15 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 15 m
5CASDL.0200-00 SDL cable 20 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 20 m
5CASDL.0250-00 SDL cable 25 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 25 m
5CASDL.0300-00 SDL cable 30 m
SDL cable for a fixed type of layout; length: 30 m

Table 434: Model numbers - SDL cables

696 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.3.2 Technical data

Features 5CASDL.0018- 5CASDL.0050- 5CASDL.0100- 5CASDL.0150- 5CASDL.0200- 5CASDL.0250- 5CASDL.0300-

00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Length 1.8 m 5m 10 m 15 m 20 m 25 m 30 m
Tolerance ±50 mm ±80 mm ±100 mm ±120 mm ±150 mm ±200 mm ±200 mm
Cable diameter
Typical 8.6 ±0.2 mm 11 ±0.2 mm
Maximum 9 mm 11.5 mm
Shielding Individual cable pairs and entire cable
Connector type 2x DVI-D (24+1), male
Connection cycles 100
Wire cross section AWG 28 AWG 24
Line resistance Max. 237 Ω/km Max. 93 Ω/km
Insulation resistance Min. 10 MΩ/km
Flexibility Limited flexibility; valid for ferrite magnet - ferrite magnet (tested 100 cycles with 5x cable diameter, 20 cycles /
minute)
Halogen-free No
Flex radius See figure "Flex radius specification", on page 697
Fixed layout 5x cable diameter (plug - ferrite magnet and ferrite magnet - ferrite magnet)
Weight Approx. 300 Approx. 590 Approx. 2100 Approx. 3000 Approx. 4100 Approx. 5100 Approx. 6100
g g g g g g g

Table 435: Technical data - SDL cables 5CASDL.0xxx-00

15.3.3 Flex radius specification

Plug Ferrite

Flex radius Flex radius

Plug - Ferrite Ferrite - Ferrite

Ferrite Ferrite

Figure 345: Flex radius specification

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 697

 Accessories • Cables

15.3.4 Cable specifications

The following figure shows the pin assignments for the SDL cable available at B&R. If you want
to build a suitable cable yourself, it should be wired according to these specifications.

Warning!
If a self-built cable is used, B&R cannot guarantee that it will function properly.

DVI (24+1), male DVI (24+1), male

16 9 17
1
24 8

8 24
17 16
9 1 Pin assignments
DVI (24+1), male DVI (24+1), male

24 24
23 23
22 22
21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Cable shielding Cable shielding
Figure 346: Pin assignments - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-00

698 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.4 SDL cable with 45° plug 5CASDL.0xxx-01

The SDL cables 5CASDL.0xxx-01 are designed for fixed layout.

Plug

Plug
Ferrite Ferrite

Figure 347: SDL cable with 45° plug (similar)

Caution!
The SDl cable can only be plugged in and unplugged when the device is turned off.

15.4.1 Order data

Model number Description Note

5CASDL.0018-01 SDL cable 1.8 m 45°
SDL cable for fixed type of layout with one-sided 45° plug; length: 1.8 m
5CASDL.0050-01 SDL cable 5 m 45°
SDL cable for fixed type of layout with one-sided 45° plug; length: 5 m
5CASDL.0100-01 SDL cable 10 m 45°
SDL cable for fixed type of layout with one-sided 45° plug; length: 10 m
5CASDL.0150-01 SDL cable 15 m 45°
SDL cable for fixed type of layout with one-sided 45° plug; length: 15 m

Table 436: Model numbers - SDL cables with 45° plug

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 699

 Accessories • Cables

15.4.2 Technical data

Features 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0150-01

Length 1.8 m 5m 10 m 15 m
Tolerance ±50 mm ±80 mm ±100 mm ±120 mm
Cable diameter
Maximum 9 mm 11.5 mm
Shielding Individual cable pairs and entire cable
Connector type 2x DVI-D (24+1), male
Connection cycles 100
Wire cross section AWG 28 AWG 24
Line resistance Max. 237 Ω/km Max. 93 Ω/km
Insulation resistance Min. 10 MΩ/km
Flexibility Limited flexibility; valid for ferrite magnet - ferrite magnet (tested 100 cycles with 5x cable diameter, 20 cycles /
minute)
Halogen-free No
Flex radius See figure "Flex radius specification", on page 700
Fixed layout 5x cable diameter (plug - ferrite magnet and ferrite magnet - ferrite magnet)
Weight Approx. 300 g Approx. 590 g Approx. 2100 g Approx. 3000 g

Table 437: Technical data - SDL cable with 45° plug 5CASDL.0xxx-01

15.4.3 Flex radius specification

Plug Ferrite

Flex radius Flex radius

Plug - Ferrite Ferrite - Ferrite

Ferrite Ferrite

Figure 348: Flex radius specification

700 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.4.4 Cable specifications

The following figure shows the pin assignments for the SDL cable available at B&R. If you want
to build a suitable cable yourself, it should be wired according to these specifications.

Warning!
If a self-built cable is used, B&R cannot guarantee that it will function properly.

DVI (24+1), male

9 17
1

DVI (24+1), male

8

8 24
16
Pin assignments
24 16

DVI (24+1), male DVI (24+1), male

1

24 24
9

23 23
17

22 22
21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Cable shielding Cable shielding
Accessories
Section 6

Figure 349: Pin assignments - SDL cable with 45° plug 5CASDL.0xxx-01

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 701

 Accessories • Cables

15.5 SDL cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-10

The SDL cables (with extender) 5CASDL.0xxx-10 are designed for fixed layout. Use of the SDL
flex cable (with extender) 5CASDL.0x00-13 is required for a flexible installation (e.g. in swing
arm systems).

Display PC

Plug Ferrite Extender Ferrite Plug

Figure 350: SDL cable with extender (similar)

Caution!
SDL cables with extender can only be plugged in and unplugged when the device is
turned off. The correct direction of connection (Display, PC) for the wiring is
illustrated on the middle of the extender.

15.5.1 Order data

Model number Description Note

5CASDL.0300-10 30 m SDL cable with extender Cancelled since 12/2006
Replaced by 5CASDL.0300-
SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout; length 30 m 13

5CASDL.0400-10 40 m SDL cable with extender Cancelled since 12/2006

Replaced by 5CASDL.0400-
SDL cable with extender for a fixed type of layout; length 40 m 13

Table 438: Model numbers - SDL cable with extender

702 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.5.2 Technical data

Features 5CASDL.0300-10 5CASDL.0400-10

Length 30 m 40 m
Tolerance ±200 mm ±200 mm
Dimensions - Extender box Height 18.5 mm, width 35 mm, length 125 mm
Cable diameter
Maximum 11.5 mm
Shielding Individual cable pairs and entire cable
Connector type 2x DVI-D (24+1), male
Connection cycles 100
Wire cross section AWG 24
Line resistance Max. 93 Ω/km
Insulation resistance Min. 10 MΩ/km
Flexibility Limited flexibility; valid for ferrite magnet - ferrite magnet (tested 100 cycles with 5x cable diameter, 20 cycles /
minute)
Flex radius See figure "Flex radius specification", on page 703
Fixed layout 5 x cable diameter (of plug - ferrite magnet and ferrite magnet - extender)
Weight Approx. 6100 g Approx. 8100 g

Table 439: Technical data - SDL cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-10

15.5.3 Flex radius specification

Plug Ferrite

Flex radius Flex radius

Plug - Ferrite Ferrite - Extender

Ferrite Extender

Figure 351: Flex radius specification

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 703

 Accessories • Cables

15.5.4 Cable connection

The SDL cable with extender must be connected between the Automation PC 620 and
Automation Panel 900 display unit in the correct direction. The correct signal direction is
indicated on the extender unit for this purpose:

• Connect the end labeled "PC" with the video output of the Automation PC 620.
• The "Display" end should be connected to the display unit Automation Panel 900.

Extender unit

DISPLAY

PC
Signal direction

DISPLAY PC
Automation Panel 900

Automation PC 620

Figure 352: Example of the signal direction for the SDL cable with extender

704 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.5.5 Cable specifications

The following figure shows the pin assignments for the SDL cable with extender available at
B&R.

Information:
Only B&R SDL cables with extender can be used.

DVI (24+1), male DVI (24+1), male

16 1 9 17
24 8

Extender Unit
Black Box

8 24
17 1 Pin assignments 16
9
DVI (24+1), male DVI (24+1), male
24 24
23 23
22 22
21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Cable shielding Cable shielding
Figure 353: Pin assignments - SDL cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-10
Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 705

 Accessories • Cables

15.6 SDL flex cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03

The SDL flex cables 5CASDL.0xxx-03 are designed for both fixed and flexible installations (e.g.
in swing arm systems).

Plug Ferrite Ferrite Plug

Figure 354: SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03 (similar)

Caution!
The SDl cable can only be plugged in and unplugged when the device is turned off.

15.6.1 Order data

Model number Description Note

5CASDL.0018-03 1.8 m flex SDL cable
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 1.8 m
5CASDL.0050-03 5 m flex SDL cable
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 5 m
5CASDL.0100-03 10 m flex SDL cable
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 10 m
5CASDL.0150-03 15 m flex SDL cable
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 15 m
5CASDL.0200-03 20 m flex SDL cable
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 20 m
5CASDL.0250-03 25 m flex SDL cable
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 25 m
5CASDL.0300-03 30 m flex SDL cable
SDL cable for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 30 m

Table 440: Model numbers - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03

706 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.6.2 Technical data

Mechanical 5CASDL.0018- 5CASDL.0050- 5CASDL.0100- 5CASDL.0150- 5CASDL.0200- 5CASDL.0250- 5CASDL.0300-

characteristics 03 03 03 03 03 03 03

Length 1.8 m 5m 10 m 15 m 20 m 25 m 30 m
Tolerance ±20 mm ±45 mm ±90 mm ±135 mm ±180 mm ±225 mm ±270 mm
Cable diameter
Maximum 12 mm
Shielding Individual cable pairs and entire cable
Connector type 2x DVI-D (24+1), male
Connection cycles Min. 200
Contacts Gold plated
Mechanical protection Metal cover with crimped stress relief
Max. tension
During installation ≤ 400 N
During operation ≤ 50 N
Materials RoHS compliant
Cable shield Aluminum foil clad + tinned copper mesh
Color Black (similar to RAL 9005)
Flexibility Flexible; valid for ferrite magnet - ferrite magnet (tested 300,000 cycles with 15x cable diameter, 4800 cycles / hour)
Halogen-free Yes
Flex radius See figure "Flex radius specification", on page 708
Fixed layout 6x cable diameter (of plug - ferrite magnet)
10x cable diameter (of ferrite magnet - ferrite magnet)
flexible installation 15x cable diameter (of ferrite magnet - ferrite magnet)
Weight Approx. 450 Approx. 1000 Approx. 2000 Approx. 3000 Approx. 4000 Approx. 5000 Approx. 6000
g g g g g g g
Electrical properties (at
20°C)
Wire cross section 24 AWG (control wires)
26 AWG (DVI, USB, data)
Line resistance
24 AWG ≤ 95 Ω/km
26 AWG ≤ 145 Ω/km
Insulation resistance > 200 MΩ/km
Wave impedance 100 ±10 Ω
Test voltage
Wire / wire 1 kVeff
Wire / shield 0.5 kVeff
Operating voltage ≤ 30 V
Environmental
characteristics
Temperature resistance
Fixed installation -20 to 80°C
Moving -5 to 60°C
Accessories
Section 6

Bearings -20 to 80°C

Fire resistance Fire resistant according to UL758 (cable vertical flame test)

Table 441: Technical data - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 707

 Accessories • Cables

Standards and 5CASDL.0018- 5CASDL.0050- 5CASDL.0100- 5CASDL.0150- 5CASDL.0200- 5CASDL.0250- 5CASDL.0300-

certifications 03 03 03 03 03 03 03

Torsion load 100,000 cycles (tested angle of rotation: ±85° speed: 50 cycles / minute)
Cable drag chain 300,000 cycles
Tested flex radius: 180 mm;15x cable diameter; hub: 460 mm; speed: 4800 cycles / hour
Approbation UL AWM 20236 80°C 30 V
Oil and hydrolysis According to VDE 0282-10
resistance

Table 441: Technical data - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03 (Forts.)

15.6.3 Flex radius specification

Plug Ferrite

Flex radius Flex radius

Plug - Ferrite Ferrite - Ferrite

Ferrite Ferrite

Figure 355: Flex radius specification

15.6.4 Dimensions

19
max. Ø 12

Ø 22
38

15 36.5
55 110 ±10 37.5 ±2.5
Length

All values in mm

Figure 356: Dimensions - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03

708 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.6.5 Structure

Element Assignment Cross section

TMDS data 0 26 AWG
TMDS data 1 26 AWG
DVI
TMDS data 2 26 AWG TMDS Data 1
TMDS Data 2
TMDS cycle 26 AWG
TMDS Data 0
TMDS Clock
XUSB0 26 AWG
USB Control wires
XUSB1 26 AWG - DDC Clock
- DDC Data
Data SDL 26 AWG - +5V
XUSB1 - Ground
DDC cycle 24 AWG - Hot Plug Detect
DDC data 24 AWG SDL
XUSB0
Control wires +5V 24 AWG Schematic display
mass 24 AWG
Hot Plug detect 24 AWG

Table 442: Structure - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 709

 Accessories • Cables

15.6.6 Cable specifications

The following figure shows the pin assignments for the SDL cable available at B&R. If you want
to build a suitable cable yourself, it should be wired according to these specifications.

Warning!
If a self-built cable is used, B&R cannot guarantee that it will function properly.

DVI (24+1), male DVI (24+1), male

16 1 9 17
24 8

8 24
17 1 16
9
Pin assignments
DVI (24+1), male DVI (24+1), male
TMDS Clock - 24 24 TMDS Clock -
TMDS Clock + 23 23 TMDS Clock +
TMDS Clock Shield 22 22 TMDS Clock Shield
XUSB1+ 21 21 XUSB1+
XUSB1- 20 20 XUSB1-
TMDS DATA 0/XUSB1 Shield 19 19 TMDS DATA 0/XUSB1 Shield
TMDS Data 0+ 18 18 TMDS Data 0+
TMDS Data 0- 17 17 TMDS Data 0-
Hot Plug Detect 16 16 Hot Plug Detect
Ground 15 15 Ground
+5V 14 14 +5V
XUSB0+ 13 13 XUSB0+
XUSB0- 12 12 XUSB0-
TMDS DATA 1/XUSB0 Shield 11 11 TMDS DATA 1/XUSB0 Shield
TMDS Data 1+ 10 10 TMDS Data 1+
TMDS Data 1- 9 9 TMDS Data 1-
DDC Clock 7 7 DDC Clock
DDC Data 6 6 DDC Data
SDL+ 5 5 SDL+
SDL- 4 4 SDL-
TMDS DATA 2/SDL Shield 3 3 TMDS DATA 2/SDL Shield
TMDS Data 2+ 2 2 TMDS Data 2+
TMDS Data 2- 1 1 TMDS Data 2-
Cable shielding Cable shielding
Figure 357: Pin assignments - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03

710 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.7 SDL flex cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-13

The SDL flex cables (with extender) 5CASDL.0x00-13 are designed for both fixed and flexible
installations (e.g. in swing arm systems).

SDL IN SDL OUT

Plug Label Ferrite Extender Ferrite Label Plug

SDL OUT
SDL IN
SDL IN SDL OUT

Figure 358: SDL flex cable with extender - 5CASDL.0x00-13 (similar)

Caution!
SDL cables with extender can only be plugged in and unplugged when the device is
turned off. The correct direction of connection (SDL IN, SDL OUT) for the wiring is
illustrated on the middle of the extender and between the ferrite magnet and plug
(with a sticker).

15.7.1 Order data

Model number Description Note

5CASDL.0300-13 30 m SDL flex cable with extender
SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 30 m
5CASDL.0400-13 40 m SDL flex cable with extender
SDL cable with extender for fixed and flexible type of layout; length: 40 m

Table 443: Model numbers - SDL flex cable with extender

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 711

 Accessories • Cables

15.7.2 Technical data

Features 5CASDL.0300-13 5CASDL.0400-13

Length 30 m 40 m
Tolerance ±200 mm ±200 mm
Dimensions - Extender box Height 18.5 mm, width 35 mm, length 125 mm
Cable diameter
Maximum 12 mm
Shielding Individual cable pairs and entire cable
Connector type 2x DVI-D (24+1), male
Connection cycles Min. 200
Contacts Gold plated
Mechanical protection Metal cover with crimped stress relief
Max. tension
During installation ≤ 400 N
During operation ≤ 50 N
Materials RoHS compliant
Cable shield Aluminum foil clad + tinned copper mesh
Color Black (similar to RAL 9005)
Flexibility Flexible; valid for ferrite magnet - ferrite magnet (tested 300,000 cycles with 15x cable diameter, 4800 cycles /
hour)
Halogen-free Yes
Flex radius See figure "Flex radius specification", on page 713
Fixed layout 6x cable diameter (of plug - ferrite magnet)
10x cable diameter (of ferrite magnet - extender)
flexible installation 15x cable diameter (of ferrite magnet - ferrite magnet)
Weight Approx. 6200 g Approx. 8000 g
Electrical properties (at 20°C)
Wire cross section 24 AWG (control wires)
26 AWG (DVI, USB, data)
Line resistance
24 AWG ≤ 95 Ω/km
26 AWG ≤ 145 Ω/km
Insulation resistance > 200 MΩ/km
Wave impedance 100 ±10 Ω
Test voltage
Wire / wire 1 kVeff
Wire / shield 0.5 kVeff
Operating voltage ≤ 30 V
Environmental
characteristics
Temperature resistance
Fixed installation -20 to 60°C
Moving -5 to 60°C
Bearings -20 to 60°C
Fire resistance Fire resistant according to UL758 (cable vertical flame test)

Table 444: Technical data - SDL flex cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-13

712 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

Standards and certifications 5CASDL.0300-13 5CASDL.0400-13

Torsion load 100,000 cycles (tested angle of rotation: ±85° speed: 50 cycles / minute)
Cable drag chain 300,000 cycles
Tested flex radius: 180 mm;15x cable diameter; hub: 460 mm; speed: 4800 cycles / hour
Approbation UL AWM 20236 80°C 30 V
Oil and hydrolysis resistance According to VDE 0282-10

Table 444: Technical data - SDL flex cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-13 (Forts.)

15.7.3 Flex radius specification

Plug Ferrite

Flex radius Flex radius

Plug - Ferrite Ferrite - Extender

Ferrite Extender

Figure 359: Flex radius specification

15.7.4 Dimensions
max. Ø 12

19
Ø 22

SDL OUT
SDL IN
38

15
34

36.5
55 110 ±10 37.5 ±2.5 130
Length
All values in mm

Figure 360: Dimensions - SDL flex cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-13

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 713

 Accessories • Cables

15.7.5 Cable connection

The SDL flex cable with extender must be connected between the Industrial PC and Automation
Panel 900 display unit in the correct direction. The signal direction is indicated on the extender
unit for this purpose:

• Connect the end labeled "SDL IN" with the video output of the Automation PC 620 or
Panel PC 700 (monitor/panel output) or Panel OUT of an AP900 AP Link card.
• The "SDL OUT" end should be connected to the display unit (e.g. Automation Panel 900)
via the Automation Panel Link insert card (Panel IN).

Extender unit

Signal direction

DISPLAY PC
Automation Panel 900

Automation PC 620

Figure 361: Example of the signal direction for the SDL flex cable with extender - APC620

SDL OUT SDL IN SDL OUT SDL IN

SDL OUT

SDL OUT
SDL IN

SDL IN

to to
Panel OUT Panel IN

Automation Panel 900 Automation Panel 900

+
Automation Panel Link 5DLSDL.1000-01
Automation PC 620

Figure 362: Example of signal direction display - SDL flex cable with extender

714 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.7.6 Cable specifications

The following figure shows the pin assignments for the SDL flex cable with extender available at
B&R.

Information:
Only B&R SDL flex cables with extender can be used.

DVI (24+1), male DVI (24+1), male

16 1 9 17
24 8

Extender Unit
Black Box

8 24
17 1 Pin assignments 16
9
DVI (24+1), male DVI (24+1), male
24 24
23 23
22 22
21 21
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Cable shielding Cable shielding
Figure 363: Pin assignments - SDL flex cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-13
Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 715

 Accessories • Cables

15.8 RS232 cable 9A0014-xx

Figure 364: RS232 extension cable (similar)

15.8.1 Order data

Model number Description Note

9A0014.02 RS232 cable DB9/f:DB9/m 1.8 m
RS232 extension cable for remote operation of a display unit with touch screen, length 1.8 m.
9A0014.05 RS232 cable DB9/f:DB9/m 5 m
RS232 extension cable for remote operation of a display unit with touch screen, length 5 m.
9A0014.10 RS232 cable DB9/f:DB9/m 10 m
RS232 extension cable for remote operation of a display unit with touch screen, length 10 m.

Table 445: Model numbers - RS232 cables

15.8.2 Technical data

Features 9A0014.02 9A0014.05 9A0014.10

Length 1.8 m 5m 10 m
Tolerance ±50 mm ±80 mm ±100 mm
Outer diameter Max. 5 mm
Shielding Entire cable
Connector type DSUB (9-pin), male / female
Wire cross section AWG 26
Flexibility Flexible
Flex radius Min. 70 mm

Table 446: Technical data - RS232 cables

716 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.8.3 Cable specifications

The following figure shows the pin assignments for the RS232 cable available at B&R. If you
want to build a suitable cable yourself, it should be wired according to these specifications.

Warning!
If a self-built cable is used, B&R cannot guarantee that it will function properly.

DSUB (9-polig), male DSUB (9-polig), female

6 1 9 5

9 6
5 1

Pin assignments
DSUB (9-polig), male DSUB (9-polig), female

9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Cable shielding Cable shielding
Figure 365: Pin assignments - RS232 cable
Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 717

 Accessories • Cables

15.9 USB cable 5CAUSB.00xx-00

USB A, male USB B, male

Figure 366: USB extension cable (similar)

15.9.1 Order data

Model number Description Note

5CAUSB.0018-00 USB 2.0 cable, A/m:B/m 1.8 m
USB 2.0 connection cable; plug type A - type B; length 1.8 m
5CAUSB.0050-00 USB 2.0 cable, A/m:B/m 5 m
USB 2.0 connection cable; plug type A - type B; length 5 m

Table 447: Model numbers - USB cables

15.9.2 Technical data

Features 5CAUSB.0018-00 5CAUSB.0050-00

Length 1.8 m 5m
Tolerance ±30 mm ±50 mm
Outer diameter Max. 5 mm
Shielding Entire cable
Connector type USB type A male and USB type B male
Wire cross section AWG 24, 28
Flexibility Flexible
Flex radius Min. 100 mm

Table 448: Technical data - USB cables

718 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Cables

15.9.3 Cable specifications

The following figure shows the pin assignments for the USB cable available at B&R. If you want
to build a suitable cable yourself, it should be wired according to these specifications.

Warning!
If a self-built cable is used, B&R cannot guarantee that it will function properly.

4 2 3

1 1 4

Pin assignments
USB Type A, male USB Type B, male

4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Cable shielding Cable shielding
Figure 367: Pin assignments - USB cable

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 719

 Accessories • Uninterruptible power supply

16. Uninterruptible power supply

With the optionally integrated UPS, the Automation PC 620 makes sure that the PC system
completes write operations even after a power failure occurs. When the UPS detects a power
failure, it switches to battery operation immediately without interruption. This means that all
running programs will be ended properly by the UPS software. This prevents the possibility of
inconsistent data (only functions if the UPC is already configured and the driver is activated).

Information:
More detailed information about uninterruptible power supplies can be found in the
UPS users manual (of the external UPS 24 VDC). This can be downloaded from the
B&R homepage.

Information:
The monitor is not buffered by the UPS and will shut off when the power fails.

By integrating the charging circuit in the Automation PC 620 housing, the installation has been
reduced to merely attaching the connection cable to the battery unit mounted next to the PC.

Special emphasis was placed on ease of maintenance when the battery unit was designed. The
batteries are easily accessible from the front and can be switched in just a few moments when
servicing.

Battery / Load mode

Temperature

Supply voltage
+ 24 VDC

APC620 UPS battery unit APC620 with integrated UPS

Figure 368: UPS principle

720 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Uninterruptible power supply

16.1 Order data

Model number Description Note

5AC600.UPSI-00 Add-on UPS module
Order UPS module for Automation PC, cable (5CAUPS.0005-00 or 5CAUPS.0030-00) and
battery unit (5AC600.UPSB-00) separately.
5AC600.UPSB-00 5Ah battery unit
UPS battery unit for the add-on UPS module
5CAUPS.0005-00 0.5 meter UPS cable
Connection cable between add-on UPS module and UPS battery unit, length 0.5 meters
5CAUPS.0030-00 3 meter UPS cable
Connection cable between add-on UPS module and UPS battery unit, length 3 meters

Table 449: Order data - Uninterruptible power supply

16.2 Features

• Long-lasting, maintenance-free rechargeable batteries

• Communication via integrated interfaces
• Temperature sensor
• Driver software
• Deep discharge protection

16.3 Requirements

1) An appropriate system unit.

The add-on UPS module (5AC600.UPSI-00) can only be installed with the following APC620
system unit revisions:

System unit Revision

5PC600.SX01-00 Starting with revision H0
5PC600.SX02-00 Starting with revision G0
5PC600.SX02-01 Starting with revision H0
5PC600.SX05-00 Starting with F0
5PC600.SX05-01 Starting with F0
5PC600.SF03-00 Starting with revision A0
5PC600.SE00-00 Starting with revision A0
5PC600.SE00-01 Starting with revision A0
5PC600.SE00-02 Starting with revision A0
Accessories

5PC810.SX*. Starting with revision A0

Section 6

Table 450: System unit revisions - Add-on UPS module

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 721

 Accessories • Uninterruptible power supply

2) Add-on UPS module 5AC600.UPSI-00

For more on installing the add-on modules, see chapter 7 "Maintenance / Servicing", section
5 "Installing the UPS module", on page 765.

3) Battery unit 5AC600.UPSB-00

4) UPS connection cable 0.5 m (5CAUPS.0005-00) or 3 m (5CAUPS.0030-00)

5) APC620 firmware versions:

To read the status or make changes to the settings of the APC620 add-on UPS
(5AC600.UPSI-00) and the APC620 battery unit (5AC600.UPSB-00), the following software
components are necessary:

Software name Type Version

1)
MTCX PX32 Firmware 1.61 or higher
MTCX FPGA1) Firmware 1.18 or higher
ADI Control Center1) Driver / Control Center 1.60 or higher

Table 451: Firmware and software required for the UPS

1) The software can be downloaded from the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

For info regarding upgrading the firmware, see chapter 4 "Software", section 2.2 "Upgrade the
firmware", on page 555.

The APC620 firmware version can be read in BIOS under the main menu item "Advanced",
submenu item "Baseboard/Panel Features", or in the B&R Control Center.

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility

Advanced

Baseboard/Panel Features Item Specific Help

ADI driver version

Panel Control
Baseboard Monitor
Legacy Devices

Versions
BIOS: R121
MTCX PX32: V1.61 MTCX PX32 Firmware
MTCX FPGA: V1.18 MTCX FPGA Firmware
Optimized ID: 11111111b
Device ID: 00001BB7h
Compatibility ID: 0000h
Serial Number: 70950168449
Product Name: System 2PCI 1DD
User Serial ID: 00000000h

F1 Help Select Item -/+ Chanage Features F9 Setup Defaults

Esc Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit

Figure 369: Firmware and software required for the UPS

The required firmware versions can be found in the APC620 / Panel PC firmware upgrade
(MTCX, SDLR, SDLT) V1.161) .

1) The software can be downloaded from the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

722 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Uninterruptible power supply

6) To configure: Automation Device Interface driver version 1.60 or higher (for the ADI Control
Center)

For info regarding configuration of the B&R UPS using the ADI Control Center, see chapter
4 "Software", section 9.4 "UPS configuration", on page 599.

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 723

 Accessories • Uninterruptible power supply

16.4 Individual components

16.4.1 Add-on UPS module 5AC600.UPSI-00

The add-on UPS module can easily be installed in an appropriate APC620 system unit (List of
required revisions: see section "Requirements", on page 721).

Add-on UPS module

Add-on UPS module

installed

Figure 370: Add-on UPS module 5AC600.UPSI-00

Technical data

Features 5AC600.UPSI-00
Switching threshold mains / battery 15 / 13 V
operation
Mains failure bridging Max. 20 min at 150 W load
Charging current Max. 0.5 A
Deep discharge protection Yes, at 10 V on the battery unit
Short circuit protection No
Power requirements Max. 7.5 W
Status indicators Via the ADI Control Center (see section "UPS configuration", on page 599)
Configuration Via the ADI Control Center (see section "UPS configuration", on page 599)

Table 452: Technical data - 5AC600.UPSI-00

724 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Uninterruptible power supply

Installation

The module is installed using the materials included in the delivery. For installation instructions,
see chapter 7 "Maintenance / Servicing", section 5 "Installing the UPS module", on page 765.

Connection cable Mounting bracket

Spacing bolt (14 mm)

Spacing bolt (16 mm)

Spacing ring (2 mm) Torx screws (T10)

Figure 371: Add-on UPS module 5AC600.UPSI-00 - Installation materials

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 725

 Accessories • Uninterruptible power supply

16.4.2 Battery unit 5AC600.UPSB-00

The battery unit is subject to wear and should be replaced regularly (at least following the
specified lifespan).

Figure 372: Battery unit 5AC600.UPSB-00

Technical data

Features 5AC600.UPSB-00 ≤ D0 5AC600.UPSB-00 ≥ E0

Battery
Type Enersys Cyclon 12 V 5 Ah; (6 connected in series)
Method Single cell (X cell)
Operating current Max. 8 A
Deep discharge voltage 10 V
Fuse1) No Yes
Dimensions (W x H x D) Figure 375 "Dimensions - 5AC600.UPSB-00", on page 728
Temperature sensor NTC resistance
Weight Approx. 3.2 kg
Ambient temperature
Charging mode -30 to 60°C
Operation -40 to 80°C
Bearings -65 to 80°C
Transport -65 to 80°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Bearings 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Transport 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Altitude Max. 3000 meters
Mounting instructions See "Mounting instructions", on page 729
Lifespan 10 years at 25°C (up to 80% battery capacity)
Maintenance interval during storage 6 month interval between charges
typ. recharge time at low battery 15 hours

Table 453: Technical data - 5AC600.UPSB-00

1) The fuse can be installed later in revisions up to and including D0. More information can be found in the "Maintenance and service"
chapter of the APC810 and PPC800 user's manuals.

726 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Uninterruptible power supply

Temperature life span diagram up to 20% battery capacity.

16000
Temperature Lifespan (days)
25 14600 14000
30 9467
35 6139 10000

Lifespan [days]
40 3980
45 2581 8000
50 1674
55 1085 6000
60 704
65 456 4000
70 296
75 192 2000
80 124
0
25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
- Temperature [°C] +

Figure 373: Temperature life span diagram

Deep discharge cycles

1000000

100000
Discharge cycles

10000

1000

100
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Amount of discharge [%]

Figure 374: Deep discharge cycles

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 727

 Accessories • Uninterruptible power supply

Dimensions

52

8.4
ø5.4

ø11

166
170.5
143

103
30.9
14

104 87.5

118

135 All values in mm.

Figure 375: Dimensions - 5AC600.UPSB-00

728 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Uninterruptible power supply

Drilling template

Contour

178.9
170.5

141.9

38.9 General tolerance according to ISO 2768 medium

0 8.5 126.5 135

All values in mm.

Figure 376: Drilling template for the battery unit

Mounting instructions

Due to the unique construction of these batteries, they can be stored and operated in any
position.

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 729

 Accessories • Uninterruptible power supply

16.4.3 UPS connection cable

Pin connector Socket connector

6-pin tension clamp connection 6-pin tension clamp connection

Figure 377: UPS connection cable

Technical data

Features 5CAUPS.0005-00 5CAUPS.0030-00

Length 0.5 m 3m
Outer diameter 8.5 mm ±0.2 mm
Connector type 6-pin plug connectors, tension clamp connection / 6-pin socket connectors, tension clamp connection
Wire cross section
Temperature sensor wire 2 x 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20)
Voltage wire 4 x 2.5 mm2 (AWG 13)
Line resistance
0.5 mm2 Max. 39 Ω/km
2.5 mm2 Max. 7.98 Ω/km
Flex radius
Fixed installation 5 x wire cross-section
Free-moving 10 x wire cross-section
Temperature range
Moving -5 to 80°C
Non-moving -30 to 80°C
Weight Approx. 143 kg/km
Materials
Cable shield Thermoplastic PVC-based material
Color Window gray (similar to RAL 7040)
Peak operating voltage 12 V DC
Testing AC voltage
Wire / wire 1500 V
Operating voltage Max. 300 V
Current load 10 A at 20°C

Table 454: Technical data - UPS connection cable

730 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • External UPS

17. External UPS

UPS charging unit

24 VDC Load system B&R APC620

24 VDC mains

Handshake signals
(Via null modem cable)
Temperature sensor
24 VDC

Battery unit
e.g. 9A0100.14

Figure 378: Block diagram of the UPS

17.1 General information

For supply with an external UPS, a UPS charging unit, a battery unit and a null modem cable are
required.

In normal operation, the 24 VDC supply voltage is put straight through to the load system. If the
supply voltage fails, the rechargeable UPS batteries power the PC to allow controlled shutdown
without loss of data.

Data and commands are exchanged between the UPS and the load system via the handshake
signals for an RS232 interface.

More information concerning an external UPS is available in the "UPS manual", which can be
downloaded from the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).
Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 731

 Accessories • External UPS

17.2 Order data

Model number Description Note

9A0100.11 UPS 24 VDC
24 VDC input, 24 VDC output, serial interface
9A0100.14 UPS battery unit type B
24 V; 2.2 Ah; including battery cage
9A0100.15 UPS battery unit type B (replacement part)
2 x 12 V; 2.2 Ah; for battery unit 9A0100.14
9A0017.01 RS232 Null Modem Cable, 0.6 m
To connect UPS and load system (9-pin DSUB socket - 9-pin DSUB socket)
9A0017.02 RS232 Null Modem Cable, 1.8 m
To connect UPS and load system (9-pin DSUB socket - 9-pin DSUB socket)

Table 455: UPS - Order data

732 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • PCI Ethernet cards

18. PCI Ethernet cards

18.1 PCI Ethernet card 10/100 - 5ACPCI.ETH1-01

The universal (3.3 V and 5 V) half-size PCI Ethernet card has a 10/100 MBit/s network
connection and can be inserted in a 16-bit PCI slot and operated as an additional network
interface.

LEDs ETH1

k connection

Figure 379: PCI Ethernet card 10/100 - 5ACPCI.ETH1-01

18.1.1 Technical data

Ethernet connection
Controller Intel 82551ER RJ45 twisted pair (10BaseT/100BaseT), female
Power supply Universal card (2 notches)
for 3.3 V or 5 V
Cabling S/STP (Cat5e) Speed Act/Link

1)
Transfer rate 10/100 MBit/s
Cable length max. 100 m (min. Cat5e)
LED On Off
Green 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s
Orange Link Activity (blinking)
(Ethernet network (Data transfer in
connection progress) ETH
available)
Accessories
Section 6

Table 456: Ethernet connection ETH

1) Both operating modes possible. Change-over takes place automatically.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 733

 Accessories • PCI Ethernet cards

18.1.2 Driver support

A special driver is necessary for operating the Intel Ethernet controller 82551ER. Drivers for
Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Embedded, and DOS are available for download on the
B&R Homepage in the download area (www.br-automation.com ).

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

18.1.3 Dimensions
0.8
100.3

64.4
8

42.6
58
106.3
121.7 All values in mm

Figure 380: Dimensions - 5ACPCI.ETH1-01

734 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • PCI Ethernet cards

18.2 PCI Ethernet card 10/100 - 5ACPCI.ETH3-01

The universal (3.3 V and 5 V) half-size PCI Ethernet card has three 10/100 MBit/s network
connections and can be inserted in a 16-bit PCI slot and operated as an additional network
interface.

LEDs ETH1

rk connection

LEDs ETH2

rk connection

LEDs ETH3

rk connection

Figure 381: PCI Ethernet card 10/100 - 5ACPCI.ETH3-01

18.2.1 Technical data

Ethernet connections
Controller each with Intel 82551ER
3 x RJ45 twisted pair (10BaseT/100BaseT), female
Power supply Universal card (2 notches)
for 3.3 V or 5 V
Cabling each S/STP (Cat5e) Speed Act/Link Speed Act/Link
Speed Act/Link

1)
Transfer rate each 10/100 MBit/s
Cable length each max. 100 m (min. Cat5e)
LED On Off
Green 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s
Orange Link Activity (blinking)
(Ethernet network (Data transfer in ETH1 ETH2 ETH3
connection progress)
available)

Table 457: Ethernet connections ETH1, ETH2, ETH3

1) Both operating modes possible. Change-over takes place automatically.

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 735

 Accessories • PCI Ethernet cards

18.2.2 Driver support

A special driver is necessary for operating the Intel Ethernet controller 82551ER. Drivers for
Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Embedded, and DOS are available for download on the
B&R Homepage in the download area (www.br-automation.com ).

Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.

18.2.3 Dimensions
0.8
100,3

95
8

42.6
58
106.3
121.7 All values in mm

Figure 382: Dimensions - 5ACPCI.ETH3-01

736 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Replacement fan

19. Replacement fan

Information:
The fan filters are subject to wear , and should be checked with appropriate
frequency to determine whether the air flow provides sufficient cooling. An
exchange or cleaning of the filter kit is appropriate at that time.

Figure 383: Replacement fan

Model number Short description Note

5AC600.FA01-00 APC620 replacement fan filter 1PCI 5 piece
This fan filter is an optional addition for system units with 1 PCL slot (5PC600.SX01-00).
5AC600.FA02-00 APC620 replacement fan filter 1PCI 5 piece
This fan filter is an optional addition for system units with 2 PCL slots (5PC600.SX02-00,
5PC600.SX02-01).
5AC600.FA03-00 APC620 replacement fan filter 3PCI 5 piece
This fan filter is an optional addition for system units with 3 PCL slots (5PC600.SF03-00).
5AC600.FA05-00 APC620 replacement fan filter 1PCI 5 piece
This fan filter is an optional addition for system units with 5 PCL slots (5PC600.SX05-00,
5PC600.SX05-01).

Table 458: Model numbers - Replacement fan filters

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 737

 Accessories • SRAM module - 5AC600.SRAM-00

20. SRAM module - 5AC600.SRAM-00

The 512 KB SRAM module increases APC620 application possibilities. It is inserted internally on
the baseboard (depending on revision) and doesn't require a PCl slot. Nonvolatile data can be
stored on it. The module is backed up by the APC620 battery.

Station switch

Figure 384: 5AC600.SRAM-00

The following system unit hardware revisions are required before mounting the SRAM module:

• 5PC600.SX01-00 starting with Rev I0

• 5PC600.SX01-00 starting with Rev. H0
• 5PC600.SX02-01 starting with Rev. K0
• 5PC600.SF03-00 all revisions
• 5PC600.SX05-00 starting with Rev. H0
• 5PC600.SX05-01 starting with Rev. H0

20.1 Technical data

Features 5AC600.SRAM-00
Connection to system via the PCl bus (PCI PnP)
Memory SRAM
Quantity 512 kB
Battery-buffered Yes
Remanent variables for AR 256 kB with CPU board 5PC600.E855-xx and 5PC600.X855-xx
(Automation Runtime) in power fail 192 kB with CPU board 5PC600.X945-00
mode
Station switch 16 digits (0-F)
Data rate Up to 31 MB/s for write access
Up to 25 MB/s for read access

Table 459: Technical data - 5AC600.SRAM-00

738 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • SRAM module - 5AC600.SRAM-00

Features 5AC600.SRAM-00
PCI configuration space Value Meaning
Vendor ID 1677h B&R
Device ID A085h 5AC600.SRAM-00
Status 0200h DEVSEL timing medium
HeaderType 00h Single function device
The card is registered in the PCI
Configuration Space as Single Value Meaning
Function Device
Device 0
Base class 05h Memory controller
Sub class 00h RAM
Command 0000h Bus master (not used)
IRQ - Not used
BAR0 512 kByte memory area
BAR1 4 Byte I/O area

Table 459: Technical data - 5AC600.SRAM-00

20.2 Driver support

The module is presently only supported in an Automation Runtime environment. Driver for other
operating systems (e.g. Windows XP) are available upon request.

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 739

 Accessories • SRAM module - 5AC600.SRAM-00

20.3 Installation

Installation is described in the example with system unit 5PC600.SF03-00 with inserted AP Link
cards and APC620 UPS module.

• Remove side cover from APC620 (see chapter 7 "Maintenance / Servicing", section 6
"Mounting the side cover", on page 781).
• Screw on the M3x5 Torx included in the delivery to the baseboard of the module.

Fastening bolt
Baseboard plug

SRAM module installed

Figure 385: SRAM module installation

740 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Accessories • Power supplies

21. Power supplies

In order to meet demands for complete, comprehensive system solutions, power supplies are
available in the B&R product line for mounting rail installation. This extensive spectrum ranges
from single-phase power supplies that supply 2.1 A up to three-phase power supplies that supply
40 A. All switching power supplies can manage a wide range of AC and DC input voltages. This
input ranges from 100 to 240 VAC or 400 to 500 VAC and from 85 to 375 VDC. Devices are
protected against short circuit, overload, and open circuit, which allows them to be operated
without functional limitations or derating even when overloads between 15% and 25% occur.

Figure 386: B&R power supplies (examples)

Two mini power supplies (PS102 and PS104) in robust plastic housing are available in the lower
performance range. A well-designed cooling concept allows several different mounting
orientations. The functional DIN rail allows fast mounting and removal. Wiring is essentially
performed in seconds thanks to the spring clamps being used. The compact design, easy
mounting and several different mounting orientations make the two smallest power supplies in
this product line components that can be used practically anywhere.

Accessories
Section 6

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 741

 Accessories • Power supplies

21.1 Model numbers and brief technical overview

The technical data listed in the following tables should act as a brief selection guide. For more
detailed technical data, data sheets are available for download from production description
section of the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

21.1.1 Single-phase power supplies

Features 0PS102.0 0PS104.0 0PS105.1 0PS105.2 0PS110.1 0PS110.2 0PS120.1

Output power 50 W 100 W 120 W 120 W 240 W 240 W 480 W
AC input voltage 85-264 V 85-132 V 85-132 V 85-132 V 85-132 V 85-132 V 85-132 V
184-264 V 176-264 V 176-264 V 176-264 V 176-264 V 176-264 V
DC input voltage 85-375 V 220-375 V 210-375 V 210-375 V 210-375 V 210-375 V -
Output voltage 24-28 V 24-28 V 24 V 24 V 24-28 V 24-28 V 24-28 V
Output current at 24 V 2.1 A 4.2 A 5A 5A 10 A 10 A 20 A
Parallel operation No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Current balancing No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes

Table 460: Single-phase power supplies

21.1.2 Three-phase power supplies

Features 0PS305.1 0PS310.1 0PS320.1 0PS340.1

Output power 120 W 240 W 490 W 960 W
AC input voltage 340-576 V 340-576 V 340-576 V 340-576 V
DC input voltage 450-820 V 450-820 V 450-820 V 450-820 V
Output voltage 24-28 V 24-28 V 24 V 24 V
Output current at 24 V 5A 10 A 20 A 40 A
Parallel operation Yes Yes Yes Yes
Current balancing No Yes Yes Yes

Table 461: Three-phase power supplies

742 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Changing the battery

Maintenance / Servicing
Section 7
Chapter 7 • Maintenance / Servicing

The following chapter describes service/maintenance work which can be carried out by a trained,
qualified user.

1. Changing the battery

The lithium battery buffers the internal real-time clock (RTC) and the CMOS data. The buffer
duration of the battery is at least 4 years (2½ years with the SRAM module model number
5AC600.SRAM-00 and at 50°C, 8.5 mA current requirements of the supplied components and a
self discharge of 40%).

Information:
• The product design allows the battery to be changed with the APC620
switched either on or off. In some countries, safety regulations do not allow
batteries to be changed while the module is switched on.
• Any BIOS settings that have been made will remain when the battery is
changed with the power turned off (stored in non-volatile EEPROM). The date
and time must be reset later because this data is lost when the battery is
changed.
• The battery should only be changed by qualified personnel.

Warning!
Replace battery with Renata, type CR2477N only. Use of another battery may
present a risk of fire or explosion.

Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in

fire.

The following replacement lithium batteries are available: 4A0006.00-000 (single) and
0AC201.91 (4 pcs.).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 743

 Maintenance / Servicing • Changing the battery

1.1 Battery status evaluation

The battery status is evaluated immediately following start-up of the device and is subsequently
checked by the system every 24 hours. The battery is subjected to a brief load (1 second) during
the measurement and then evaluated. The evaluated battery status is displayed in the BIOS
Setup pages (under Advanced - Baseboard monitor) and in the B&R Control Center (ADI driver),
but can also be read in a customer application via the ADI Library.

Battery status Meaning

N/A Hardware, i.e. firmware used is too old and does not support read.
GOOD Data buffering is guaranteed
BAD Data buffering is guaranteed for approx. another 500 hours from the point in time that the battery capacity is
determined to be BAD (insufficient).

Table 462: Meaning of battery status

From the point when battery capacity is recognized as insufficient, data buffering is guaranteed
for approximately another 500 hours. When changing the battery, data is buffered for
approximately another 10 minutes by a gold leaf capacitor.

1.2 Procedure

• Disconnect the power supply to the Automation PC 620 (also see information on page
743).
• Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
• Remove the black plastic cover from the battery compartment and carefully pull out the
battery using the removal strips.

Cover Removal strip

Figure 387: Battery removal

744 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Changing the battery

Maintenance / Servicing
• Insert the new battery with correct polarity. The battery should not be held by its edges.
Insulated tweezers may also be used for inserting the battery.

Section 7
Correct Incorrect

Figure 388: Battery handling

Figure 389: Battery polarity

• To make the next battery change easier, be sure the removal strip is in place when
inserting battery.
• Reconnect the power supply to the PC 620 by plugging the power cable back in and
pressing the power button (also see information on page 743).
• Reset the data and time in BIOS (see information on page 743).

Warning!
Lithium batteries are considered hazardous waste. Used batteries should be
disposed of according to local requirements.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 745

 Maintenance / Servicing • Changing the CompactFlash

2. Changing the CompactFlash

By pressing the ejection lever (see figure) with a pointed object (i.e. pen) the exchange of the
CompactFlash card is quickly and safely.

Ejection lever

CompactFlash

Figure 390: CompactFlash + ejection lever (representation picture)

Caution!
The power must be turned off before inserting or removing the CompactFlash card!

746 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

Maintenance / Servicing
3. Fan kit installation and replacement

Section 7
3.1 Procedure for APC620 with 1 PCI slot

• Disconnect the power supply to the Automation PC 620.

• Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
• Open the orange front cover. Behind the cover there are 4 Torx screws (T10) that must
be removed.

Figure 391: APC620 1PCI slot - Remove screws to install/ remove filter kit

• After the screws have been removed, the side cover and the fan kit cover can be removed
toward the front.

Side cover

Fan kit cover

Figure 392: APC620 1PCI slot - Remove side cover and fan kit cover

• If a PCI card is in place, it must be removed before moving on to the next step.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 747

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

• There are two arrows on the fans that indicate the direction of air flow and the direction
of fan rotation.

Air flow

Direction of rotation

Figure 393: Markings for direction of airflow / fan rotation

Warning!
The fans must be inserted so that the air flows toward the inside of the housing.

• Align fans over the fastening bolts (see arrows). Feed cables through the openings in the
housing (see circles) into the main board of the APC620.

Figure 394: APC620 1PCI slot - Fan installation

• Secure fans with the 6 included Torx (T10) screws.

748 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

Maintenance / Servicing
• The fan connection cable must be connected to the main circuit board at the right position
(fan 1 at position 1, fan 2 at position 2, fan 3 at position 3).

Section 7
1 2 3

3
2 1

Figure 395: APC620 1PCI slot - Fan cable connection to the main board

• If a PCI card was previously in place, it can now be re-inserted.

• Place dust filter in the fan kit cover and replace removed components (filter kit cover, side
cover) in reverse order.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 749

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

3.2 Procedure for APC620 with 2 PCI slot

• Disconnect the power supply to the Automation PC 620.

• Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
• Open the orange front cover. Behind the cover there are 4 Torx screws (T10) that must
be removed.

Figure 396: APC620 2PCI slots - Remove screws to install/ remove filter kit

• After the screws have been removed, the side cover and the fan kit cover can be removed
toward the front.

Side cover

Fan kit cover

Figure 397: APC620 2PCI slots - Remove side cover and fan kit cover

750 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

Maintenance / Servicing
• If one or more PCI cards are in place, they must be removed before moving on to the next
step.

Section 7
• If a slide-in drive is in place, it also must be removed before moving on to the next step.
• There are two arrows on the fans that indicate the direction of air flow and the direction
of fan rotation.

Air flow

Direction of rotation

Figure 398: Markings for direction of airflow / fan rotation

Warning!
The fans must be inserted so that the air flows toward the inside of the housing.

• Align fans over the fastening bolts (see arrows). Feed cables through the openings in the
housing (see circles) into the main board of the APC620.

Figure 399: APC620 2PCI slots - Fan installation

• Secure fans with the 4 included Torx (T10) screws.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 751

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

• The fan connection cable must be connected to the main circuit board at the right position
(fan 1 at position 1, fan 2 at position 2).

1 2

1
2

Figure 400: APC620 2PCI slots - Fan cable connection to the main board

• If one or more PCI cards were previously in place, they can now be re-inserted.
• If a slide-in drive was previously in place, it too can now be re-inserted.
• Place the dust filter in the fan kit cover and secure with the filter clasp.

Filter clasp Dust filter Fan kit cover

Figure 401: Dust filter in the fan kit cover and filter clasp

• Replace any removed components (filter kit cover, side cover) in the reverse order.

752 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

Maintenance / Servicing
3.3 Procedure for APC620 with 3 PCI slot

Section 7
• Disconnect the power supply to the Automation PC 620.
• Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
• Open the orange front cover. Behind the cover there are 4 Torx screws (T10) that must
be removed.

Figure 402: APC620 3PCI slot - Remove screws to install/ remove filter kit

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 753

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

• After the screws have been removed, the side cover and the fan kit cover can be removed
toward the front.

Side
cove
r

Fan kit cover

Figure 403: APC620 3PCI slots - Remove side cover and fan kit cover

• There are two arrows on the fans that indicate the direction of air flow and the direction
of fan rotation.

Air flow

Direction of rotation

Figure 404: Markings for direction of airflow / fan rotation

Warning!
The fans must be inserted so that the air flows toward the inside of the housing.

754 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

Maintenance / Servicing
• Align fans over the fastening bolts (see arrows). Feed cables through the openings in the
housing (see circles) into the main board of the APC620.

Section 7
Figure 405: APC620 3PCI slot - Fan installation

• Secure fans with the 4 included Torx (T10) screws.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 755

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

• The fan connection cable must be connected to the main circuit board at the right position
(fan 1 at position 1, fan 2 at position 2).

1 2

Figure 406: APC620 3PCI slot - Fan cable connection to the main board

• Place the dust filter in the fan kit cover and secure with the filter clasp.

Filter clasp Dust filter Fan kit cover

Figure 407: Dust filter in the fan kit cover and filter clasp

• Replace any removed components (filter kit cover, side cover) in the reverse order.

756 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

Maintenance / Servicing
3.4 Procedure for APC620 with 5 PCI slot

Section 7
• Disconnect the power supply to the Automation PC 620.
• Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
• Open the orange front cover. Behind the cover there are 4 Torx screws (T10) that must
be removed.

Figure 408: APC620 5PCI slot - Remove screws to install/ remove filter kit

• After the screws have been removed, the side cover and the fan kit cover can be removed
toward the front.

Side cover

Fan kit cover

Figure 409: APC620 5PCI slot - Remove side cover and fan kit cover

• If one or more PCI cards are in place, they must be removed before moving on to the next

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 757

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

step.
• If a slide-in drive is in place, it also must be removed before moving on to the next step.
• Attach the two included cable fasteners in the appropriate holes.

Figure 410: APC620 5PCI attach cable fasteners

• There are two arrows on the fans that indicate the direction of air flow and the direction
of fan rotation.

Air flow

Direction of rotation

Figure 411: Markings for direction of airflow / fan rotation

Warning!
The fans must be inserted so that the air flows toward the inside of the housing.

758 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

Maintenance / Servicing
• Align fans over the fastening bolts (see arrows). Feed cables through the openings in the
housing (see circles) into the main board of the APC620.

Section 7
The fan connector cable for the 40 mm fan should be placed in the cable fastener.

Figure 412: APC620 5PCI slot - Fan installation

• Secure fans with the 6 included Torx (T10) screws.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 759

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

• The fan connection cable must be connected to the main circuit board at the right position
(fan 1 at position 1, fan 2 at position 2, fan 3 at position 3).

2 3

1 2 3

Figure 413: APC620 5PCI slot - Fan cable connection to the main board

• If one or more PCI cards were previously in place, they can now be re-inserted.
• If a slide-in drive was previously in place, it too can now be re-inserted.

760 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Fan kit installation and replacement

Maintenance / Servicing
• Place the dust filter in the fan kit cover and secure with the filter clasp.

Section 7
Filter clasp Dust filter Fan kit cover

Figure 414: Dust filter in the fan kit cover and filter clasp

• Replace any removed components (filter kit cover, side cover) in the reverse order.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 761

 Maintenance / Servicing • Slide-in drive - installation and exchange

4. Slide-in drive - installation and exchange

Slide-in drives can be installed and exchanged in system units with 2 or 5 PCI slots.

4.1 Installation procedure

• Disconnect the power supply to the Automation PC 620.

• Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
• Remove the side cover, see section 6 "Mounting the side cover", on page 781.
• Remove the slide-in dummy module.

Figure 415: Removing the slide-in dummy module

• Insert the slide-in drive.

Figure 416: Installing the slide-in drive

• Attach the side cover.

762 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Slide-in drive - installation and exchange

Maintenance / Servicing
4.2 Exchange procedure

Section 7
• Disconnect the power supply to the Automation PC 620.
• Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
• Remove the side cover, see section 6 "Mounting the side cover", on page 781.
• Simultaneously remove both slide-in slot releasing mechanisms outwards The slide-in
drive is pushed a few mm upwards for easy removal.

Figure 417: Release the slide-in slot releasing mechanisms

• Removing the slide-in drive.

Figure 418: Removing the slide-in drive

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 763

 Maintenance / Servicing • Slide-in drive - installation and exchange

• Move the slide-in slot releasing mechanisms to the start position.

Figure 419: Slide-in slot releasing mechanism start position

• Insert the new slide-in drive or re-attach the side cover.

764 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

Maintenance / Servicing
5. Installing the UPS module

Section 7
The module is installed using the materials included in the delivery. Different parts are used
depending on the system unit and whether the add-on interface module is installed (description
starting on page 774) or not installed (description follows).

Connection cable Mounting bracket

Spacing bolt (14 mm)

Spacing bolt (16 mm)

Spacing ring (2 mm) Torx screws (T10)

Figure 420: Add-on UPS module 5AC600.UPSI-00 - Installation materials

5.1 Automation PC 620 without add-on interface module

5.1.1 APC620, 1 PCI slot

• Remove side cover (see section 6 "Mounting the side cover", on page 781).
• Remove UPS module cover by removing the 2 marked Torx screws (T10).

Figure 421: Remove UPS module cover

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 765

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

• Screw in spacing bolt and spacing ring (using M5 hex socket screwdriver).

14 mm spacing bolt
+ spacing ring

Figure 422: Screw in spacing bolt and spacing ring

• Install UPS module with 2 Torx screws (T10) and 1 Torx screw (T10). Use the previously
removed Torx screws and one Torx screw from the mounting materials.

Figure 423: Install UPS module

• Plug in connection cable (see marked socket).

Figure 424: Plug in connection cable

766 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

Maintenance / Servicing
Information:

Section 7
When connecting the cable, make sure that the connector locking mechanism is
engaged.

Figure 425: Connector locking mechanism

• Attach the side cover.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 767

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

5.1.2 APC620, 2 PCI slot

• Remove side cover (see section 6 "Mounting the side cover", on page 781).
• Remove UPS module cover by removing the 2 marked Torx screws (T10).

Figure 426: Remove UPS module cover

• Remove cover plate by removing the marked Torx screw (T10).

Figure 427: Remove cover plate

• Screw in spacing bolt and spacing ring (using M5 hex socket screwdriver).

14 mm spacing bolt
+ spacing ring

Figure 428: Screw in spacing bolt and spacing ring

768 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

Maintenance / Servicing
• Install mounting bracket on UPS module using 2 Torx screws (T10).

Section 7
Mounting bracket
+ 2 Torx screws

Figure 429: Install mounting bracket

• Install UPS module with 2 Torx screws (T10) and 1 Torx screw (T10). Use the previously
removed Torx screws and one Torx screw from the mounting materials.

Figure 430: Install UPS module

• Plug in connection cable (see marked socket).

Figure 431: Plug in connection cable

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 769

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

Information:
When connecting the cable, make sure that the connector locking mechanism is
engaged.

Figure 432: Connector locking mechanism

• Attach cover plate and side cover.

770 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

Maintenance / Servicing
5.1.3 APC620, 5 PCI slot

Section 7
• Remove side cover (see section 6 "Mounting the side cover", on page 781).
• Remove UPS module cover by removing the 2 marked Torx screws (T10).

Figure 433: Remove UPS module cover

• Remove cover plate by removing the marked Torx screw (T10).

Figure 434: Remove cover plate

• Screw in spacing bolt and spacing ring (using M5 hex socket screwdriver).

16 mm spacing bolt
+ spacing ring

Figure 435: Screw in spacing bolt and spacing ring

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 771

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

• Install mounting bracket on UPS module using 2 Torx screws (T10).

Mounting bracket
+ 2 Torx screws

Figure 436: Install mounting bracket

• Install UPS module with 2 Torx screws (T10) and 1 Torx screw (T10). Use the previously
removed Torx screws and one Torx screw from the mounting materials.

Figure 437: Install UPS module

• Attach connection cable (see marked socket).

Figure 438: Plug in connection cable

772 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

Maintenance / Servicing
Information:

Section 7
When connecting the cable, make sure that the connector locking mechanism is
engaged.

Figure 439: Connector locking mechanism

• Attach cover plate and side cover.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 773

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

5.2 Automation PC 620 with add-on interface module

5.2.1 APC620, 1 PCI slot

• Remove side cover (see section 6 "Mounting the side cover", on page 781).
• Remove UPS module cover by removing the 2 marked Torx screws (T10).

Figure 440: Remove UPS module cover

• Screw in spacing bolt (using M5 hex socket screwdriver).

14 mm spacing bolt

Figure 441: Screw in spacing bolt

• Install UPS module with 2 Torx screws (T10) and 1 Torx screw (T10). Use the previously
removed Torx screws and one Torx screw from the mounting materials.

Figure 442: Install UPS module

774 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

Maintenance / Servicing
• Plug in connection cable (see marked socket).

Section 7
Figure 443: Plug in connection cable

Information:
When connecting the cable, make sure that the connector locking mechanism is
engaged.

Figure 444: Connector locking mechanism

• Attach the side cover.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 775

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

5.2.2 APC620, 2 PCI slot

• Remove side cover (see section 6 "Mounting the side cover", on page 781).
• Remove UPS module cover by removing the 2 marked Torx screws (T10).

Figure 445: Remove UPS module cover

• Remove cover plate by removing the marked Torx screw (T10).

Figure 446: Remove cover plate

• Screw in spacing bolt (using M5 hex socket screwdriver).

14 mm spacing bolt

Figure 447: Screw in spacing bolt

776 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

Maintenance / Servicing
• Install mounting bracket on UPS module using 2 Torx screws (T10).

Section 7
Mounting bracket
+ 2 Torx screws

Figure 448: Install mounting bracket

• Install UPS module with 2 Torx screws (T10) and 1 Torx screw (T10). Use the previously
removed Torx screws and one Torx screw from the mounting materials.

Figure 449: Install UPS module

• Plug in connection cable (see marked socket).

Figure 450: Plug in connection cable

Information:
When connecting the cable, make sure that the connector locking mechanism is
engaged.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 777

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

Figure 451: Connector locking mechanism

• Attach cover plate and side cover.

5.2.3 APC620, 5 PCI slot

• Remove side cover (see section 6 "Mounting the side cover", on page 781).
• Remove UPS module cover by removing the 2 marked Torx screws (using T10
screwdriver).

Figure 452: Remove UPS module cover

• Remove cover plate by removing the marked Torx screw (T10).

Figure 453: Remove cover plate

778 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

Maintenance / Servicing
• Screw in spacing bolt (using M5 hex socket screwdriver).

Section 7
16 mm spacing bolt

Figure 454: Screw in spacing bolt

• Install mounting bracket on UPS module using 2 Torx screws (T10).

Mounting bracket
+ 2 Torx screws

Figure 455: Install mounting bracket

• Install UPS module with 2 Torx screws (T10) and 1 Torx screw (T10). Use the previously
removed Torx screws and one Torx screw from the mounting materials.

Figure 456: Install UPS module

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 779

 Maintenance / Servicing • Installing the UPS module

• Plug in connection cable (see marked socket).

Figure 457: Plug in connection cable

Information:
When connecting the cable, make sure that the connector locking mechanism is
engaged.

Figure 458: Connector locking mechanism

• Attach cover plate and side cover.

780 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Mounting the side cover

Maintenance / Servicing
6. Mounting the side cover

Section 7
The number of Torx (T10) screws varies depending on the system (1, 2, 3 or 5 PCl slots).

6.1 APC620 with 1 PCI slot

• Disconnect the power supply to the Automation PC 620.

• Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
• Open the orange front cover. Behind the cover there are 3 Torx screws (T10) that must
be removed.

Figure 459: Mounting the side cover - APC620, 1 PCI slot

• After the screws have been removed, the side cover can be removed by sliding it toward
the front.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 781

 Maintenance / Servicing • Mounting the side cover

6.2 APC620 with 2 PCI slot

• Disconnect the power supply to the Automation PC 620.

• Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
• Open the orange front cover. Behind the cover there are 5 Torx screws (T10) that must
be removed.

Figure 460: Mounting the side cover - APC620, 2 PCI slot

• After the screws have been removed, the side cover can be removed by sliding it toward
the front.

782 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Mounting the side cover

Maintenance / Servicing
6.3 APC620 with 3 PCI slot

Section 7
• Disconnect the power supply to the Automation PC 620.
• Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
• Open the orange front cover. Behind the cover there are 7 Torx screws (T10) that must
be removed.

Figure 461: Mounting the side cover - APC620, 3 PCI slot

• After the screws have been removed, the side cover can be removed by sliding it toward
the front.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 783

 Maintenance / Servicing • Mounting the side cover

6.4 APC620 with 5 PCI slot

• Disconnect the power supply to the Automation PC 620.

• Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
• Open the orange front cover. Behind the cover there are 7 Torx screws (T10) that must
be removed.

Figure 462: Mounting the side cover - APC620, 5 PCI slot

• After the screws have been removed, the side cover can be removed by sliding it toward
the front.

784 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Exchanging a PCI SATA RAID hard disk

Maintenance / Servicing
7. Exchanging a PCI SATA RAID hard disk

Section 7
In the example, the assumption is made that the secondary hard disk (HDD1) is defective. In
such a case, the defective hard disk can be replaced by the replacement drive SATA hard disk.

A size 10 Torx screwdriver is needed for exchanging the hard disk.

Exchange procedure

• Remove the power supply to the device (Automation PC 620 / Panel PC 700).
• Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
• Remove the side cover.
• Remove the SATA RAID insert.
• Loosen the 4 appropriate mounting screws (M3x5) - see Figure 463 "Screw assignment
on the back side of the SATA RAID controller", on page 785.

Primary Hard Disk

(HDD0) Secondary Hard Disk
(HDD1)

Figure 463: Screw assignment on the back side of the SATA RAID controller

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 785

 Maintenance / Servicing • Exchanging a PCI SATA RAID hard disk

• On the front side, slide the hard disk down and away (image 1).
• Carefully plug the new hard disk into the connector (image 2).

Information:
When doing this, make sure that the hard disk is only touched on the front side, and
not on the top side.

1 2

Figure 464: Hard disk exchange

• Re-secure the hard disk using the 4 fastening screws (M3x5) used earlier.
• Reassemble device in the reverse order.
• An error message is output by the RAID BIOS after starting the system "RAID1 set is
in Critical status - press any key to enter Configuration Utility".
A rebuild must be executed in the SATA RAID BIOS - for more information on this, see the
section "Rebuild mirrored set", on page 356.

786 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Replacing the front cover

Maintenance / Servicing
8. Replacing the front cover

Section 7
Depending on how the front cover is attached, the following points must be taken into
consideration when replacing.

8.1 Variation A - Front cover screwed-in

• On the side of the APC620 there are Torx screws (T12) that must be removed (3, 4 or 6
screws, depending on the APC620 design).
Pull the cover in the direction of the arrows, thereby pulling the hinge bar under the heat
sink.

Figure 465: Removing the APC620 front cover

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 787

 Maintenance / Servicing • Replacing the front cover

• Slide the new hinge bar under the heat sink and screw it back on using the screws
removed earlier.

Figure 466: Mounting the APC620 front cover

788 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Maintenance / Servicing • Replacing the front cover

Maintenance / Servicing
8.2 Variation B - Front cover attached without screws

Section 7
• A label on the side of the hinge bar "PULL TO REMOVE" indicates that the front cover is
attached without screws.

PULL TO REMOVE

Figure 467: APC620 front cover label

• Open the front cover approximately 1-2 cm. Now remove the cover by pulling it in the
direction of the red arrow.

Figure 468: Removing the APC620 front cover

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 789

 Maintenance / Servicing • Replacing the front cover

• Attach the new cover to the hinge bar from the side.

Figure 469: Attaching the front cover

790 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • Temperature sensor locations

Appendix A

1. Temperature sensor locations

Appendix A
The APC620 has temperature sensors in various places (CPU, power supply, slide-in drive 1,
slide-in drive 2, I/O). The temperatures1) can be read in BIOS (menu item "advanced" -
baseboard/panel features - baseboard monitor) or in Microsoft Windows XP/Embedded, using
B&R Control Center2) .

1 3

1 ... CPU
2 ... Power Supply
3 ... Slide-In device 1/2
4 ... I/O

Figure 470: Temperature sensor locations

Position Measurement point Measurement Max. specified

for
1 CPU Processor temperature (sensor integrated on the CPU board). 100°C
2 Power supply Power supply temperature. 95°C
3 Slide-in drive 1/2 Temperature of a slide-in drive (the sensor is integrated on the slide-in drive) Drive dependent
4 I/O Temperature under an add-on drive. 80°C

Table 463: Temperature sensor locations

1) The measured temperature is a guideline for the immediate ambient temperature, but can be influenced by neighboring components.
2) The B&R Control Center - ADI driver - can be downloaded for free from the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-
automation.com).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 791

 Appendix A • Connection of an external device to the main board

2. Connection of an external device to the main board

A plug on the main board enables branching of +5 VDC and +12 VDC for the internal supply of
e.g. special PCI cards.

The connector is only provided starting with the following system unit revisions:

Model number Short description Starting with revision

5PC600.SX01-00 System 1 PCI B7
5PC600.SX02-00 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot, 1 AP Link slot B0
5PC600.SX02-01 System 2 PCI, 1 disk drive slot B9
5PC600.SX05-00 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots, 1 AP Link slot A0
5PC600.SX05-01 System 5 PCI, 2 disk drive slots A0

Table 464: Revision information for connecting an external device

The voltage can be accessed using the "APC620 internal supply cable 5CAMSC.0001-00", on
page 692. Depending on the system unit revision, the connector is located close to the fan
connector. The APC620 side cover and possibly also the slide-in drive and PCI cards must be
removed to reach the connector.

Ex
ter
na
ld
ev
ic ices
es
dev
nal
ter
Ex

Fan connection

Fan connection

Figure 471: Connector location for external devices

Connector for the external devices

Pin Assignment Power
4-pin connector, male
1 +12 VDC
Max. 10 W
2 GND 1 2 3 4
3 GND
Max. 5 W
4 +5 VDC

Table 465: Pin assignments - Connector on main board

Connections are protected by a 1 A multi-fuse.

792 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • Maintenance Controller Extended (MTCX)

3. Maintenance Controller Extended (MTCX)

The MTCX controller (FPGA processor) is located on the main board (part of every system unit)
of the APC620 device.

Appendix A
MTCX

Figure 472: MTCX controller location

The MTCX is responsible for the following monitoring and control functions:

• Power on (power OK sequencing) and power fail logic

• Watchdog handling (NMI and reset handling)
• Temperature monitoring (I/O area, power supply, slide-in drive 1/2)
• Fan control (3 housing fans)
• Key handling / coordination (matrix keyboard on Automation Panel 900 devices
configurable using B&R Key Editor, PS/2 keyboard)
• LED handling (matrix keyboard with LEDs on Automation Panel 900 devices configurable
using B&R Key Editor)
• Advanced desktop operation (keys, USB forwarding)
• Daisy chain display operation (touch screen, USB forwarding)
• Panel locking mechanism (configurable using B&R Control Center - ADI driver)
• Backlight control for a connected B&R display
• Statistical data recording (power cycles - each power on, power on and fan hours are
recorded - every full hour is counted e.g. 50 minutes no increase)
• SDL data transfer (display, matrix keyboard, touch screen, service data, USB)
• Status LEDs (HDD, panel lock, Link 1, Link 2)
The functions of the MTCX can be expanded via Firmware upgrade1) . The version can be read
in BIOS (menu item "advanced" - baseboard/panel features) or in Microsoft Windows
XP/embedded, using B&R Control Center.

1) Can be downloaded from the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 793

 Appendix A • Maintenance Controller Extended (MTCX)

3.1 SDL timing

All data from connected displays transmitted at a nominal 15 ms interval

SDL SDL

Automation Panel 900 Automation Panel 900

new data every 16 ms (nominal) new data every 16 ms (nominal)

SDL SDL

Automation Panel 900 Automation Panel 900

new data every 16 ms (nominal) new data every 16 ms (nominal)
Automation PC 620
MTCX 1 ms cycle

Graphics Engine 1

Graphics Engine 2

Figure 473: Sample configuration for SDL timing

Basic procedure:

1) On every Automation Panel 900 display unit, the data (button and LED, touch screen,
service data) is nominally determined asynchronously every 16 ms, saved and made
available.

2) The MTCX in the APC620 samples one display unit after another asynchronously in 1 ms
increments. The status is requested within the 15 ms nominal cycle (maximum 15 display
units x 1 ms), regardless of the total number of display units connected in the system
(Graphics Engine 1 + Graphics Engine 2), and the information is saved in the MTCX's Dual-
Ported RAM.

3) An application can access the MTXC data using the programming interface (API) ADI
(Automation Device Interface). Reading or writing data does not affect the asynchronous
acquisition of data from the connected display units.
Further information about this can be found in the "ADI Development Kit" and the
"Automation PC 620 / Panel PC 700 Implementation Guide" (both available on the B&R
Homepage).

794 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • Maintenance Controller Extended (MTCX)

Caution!
Due to safety requirements regulated by international standards, implementing an
E-stop element via SDL (using Matrix) is NOT allowed. Instead, such an element
must be wired according to the safety requirements.

Information:
Display data will not be updated and cannot be read by the MTCX while a display unit

Appendix A
is in upgrade mode (e.g. SDL firmware upgrade).

The nominal time specifications are not guaranteed maximum lengths of time, but
may be increased due to e.g. transfer disturbances and external influences.

Schematic diagram

Automation Panel 900 display unit

e.g. with Number 0 on Graphics Engine 2

16 ms

Data is provided new every 16 ms (nominal).

data
ieve
Retr
Scanned
MTCX
display on
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2
Graphics Engine 2
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 8 9 10
Graphics Engine 1
A different 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms
display every ms

Data from all displays transmitted at a nominal 15 ms interval

Figure 474: SDL timing - Example for Automation Panel 900 with the number 0

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 795

 Appendix A • Maintenance Controller Extended (MTCX)

3.2 Temperature monitoring - Fan control

The MTCX constantly monitors the temperature using temperature sensors (see section 1
"Temperature sensor locations", on page 791), which directly determine how the fan is
controlled. The RPM depends on the temperature measured. The limit values depend on the
MTCX firmware version being used.

Sensor range Start-up temperature Max fan speed at:

CPU 39°C 55°C
Power supply 39°C 55°C
Slide-in drive 1/2 39°C 55°C
I/O 39°C 55°C

Table 466: Temperature limits for fan control

The fans stop again when the temperature drops below 37°C.

796 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • B&R Key Editor information

4. B&R Key Editor information

On display units, it is often necessary to adjust the function keys and LEDs for the application
software being used. The B&R Key Editor makes it quick and easy to adapt the application to a
unique configuration.

Appendix A

Figure 475: B&R Key Editor screenshots Version 3.10 (representation picture)

Features:

• Configuration of normal keys like on a keyboard (A, B, C, etc.)

• Keyboard shortcuts (CTRL+C, SHIFT+DEL, etc.) on one key
• Special key functions (change brightness, etc.)
• Assign functions to LEDs (HDD access, power, etc.)
• 4 assignments per key possible (using layer function)
• Configuration of panel locking time when multiple Automation Panel 900 devices are
connected to Automation PCs and Panel PCs devices.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 797

 Appendix A • B&R Key Editor information

Supports following systems (Version 3.10):

• Automation PC 620
• Automation PC 810
• Automation PC 820
• Automation Panel 800
• Automation Panel 900
• IPC2000, IPC2001, IPC2002
• IPC5000, IPC5600
• IPC5000C, IPC5600C
• Mobile Panel 40/50
• Mobile Panel 100/200
• Panel PC 300
• Panel PC 700
• Panel PC 800
• Power Panel 100/200
• Power Panel 300/400
• Power Panel 500 (the Key Editor device file must be downloaded separately from the
B&R homepage)
A detailed guide for configuring keys and LEDs can be found in the B&R Key Editor's online help.
The B&R Key Editor can be downloaded for free from the download area on the B&R homepage
(www.br-automation.com ). Additionally, it can also be found on the B&R HMI Drivers & Utilities
DVD (model number 5SWHMI.0000-00).

798 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit

5. B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit

This software can be used to activate functions of the B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI)
from Windows applications, which, for example, were created using the following development
tools:

• Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0

• Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0
• Microsoft eMbedded Visual C++ 4.0

Appendix A
• Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 (or newer)

Figure 476: ADI development kit screenshots (Version 3.10)

Features:

• One Microsoft Visual Basic module with declarations for the ADI functions.
• Header files and import libraries for Microsoft Visual C++.
• Help files for Visual Basic and Visual C++.
• Sample projects for Visual Basic and Visual C++.
• ADI DLL (for testing the applications, if no ADI driver is installed).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 799

 Appendix A • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit

Supports following systems (Version 3.10 and higher):

• Automation PC 620
• Automation PC 810
• Automation PC 820
• Mobile Panel 40/50
• Mobile Panel 100/200
• Panel PC 300
• Panel PC 700
• Panel PC 800
• Power Panel 100/200
• Power Panel 300/400
• Power Panel 500
The ADI driver suitable for the device must be installed on the stated product series. The ADI
driver is already included in the B&R images of embedded operating systems.

A detailed description of using the ADI functions can be found in the integrated online help.

The B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit can be downloaded for free from
the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

800 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) .NET SDK

6. B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) .NET SDK

This software can be used to activate functions of the B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI)
from .NET applications, which were created using Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 (or newer).

Supported programming languages:

• Visual Basic
• Visual C++

Appendix A
• Visual C#
• Visual J#

System requirements:

• Developingsystem: PC with Windows XP/7 with

- Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 or newer

- Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 and / or Microsoft .NET Compact Framework 2.0
or newer

Figure 477: ADI .NET SDK Screenshots (Version 1.50)

Features:

• ADI .NET Class Library.

• Help files in HTML Help 1.0 format (.chm file) and MS Help 2.0 format (.HxS file).
• Sample projects and code snippets for Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual C# and Visual J#.
• ADI DLL (for testing the applications, if no ADI driver is installed).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 801

 Appendix A • B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) .NET SDK

Supports following systems (Version 1.50 and higher):

• Automation PC 620
• Automation PC 810
• Automation PC 820
• Mobile Panel 40/50
• Mobile Panel 100/200
• Panel PC 300
• Panel PC 700
• Panel PC 800
• Power Panel 100/200
• Power Panel 300/400
• Power Panel 500
The ADI driver suitable for the device must be installed on the stated product series. The ADI
driver is already included in the B&R images of embedded operating systems.

A detailed description of using the ADI functions can be found in the integrated online help.

The ADI .NET SDK can be downloaded for free from the download area on the B&R homepage
(www.br-automation.com).

802 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • Glossary

7. Glossary

ACPI

Abbreviation for "Advanced Configuration and Power Interface". Configuration interface that
enables the operating system to control the power supply for each device connected to the PC.
With ACPI, the computer's BIOS is only responsible for the details of communication with the
hardware.

Appendix A
APC
An abbreviation for "Automation PC".

API

Abbreviation for "Application Program Interface" The interface, which allows applications to
communicate with other applications or with the operating system.
Automation Runtime

A uniform runtime system for all B&R automation components.

Baud rate

Measurement unit for data transfer speed. It indicates the number of states for a transferred
signal per second and is measured using the baud unit of measurement. 1 baud = 1 bit/sec or 1
bps.

BIOS

An abbreviation for "Basic Input/Output System". Core software for computer systems with
essential routines for controlling input and output processes on hardware components, for
performing tests after system start and for loading the operating system. Although BIOS is used
to configure a system's performance, the user does not usually come into contact with it.

Bit

Binary digit > binary position, binary character, smallest discrete unit of information. A bit can
have the value 0 or 1.

Bit rate

The number of bits that can be transferred within a specified time unit. 1 bit/sec = 1 baud.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 803

 Appendix A • Glossary

Bootstrap loader

A program that automatically runs when the computer is switched on or restarted. After some
basic hardware tests have been carried out, the bootstrap loader starts a larger loader and hands
over control to it, which in turn boots the operating system. The bootstrap loader is typically found
in ROM on the computer.

Byte

Data format [1 byte = 8 bits] and a unit for characterizing information amounts and memory
capacity. The following units are the commonly used units of progression: KB, MB, GB.

B&R Automation Runtime

Windows-based program for creating installation disks to install B&R Automation Runtime™ on
the target system.

Cache

Background memory, also known as non-addressable memory or fast buffer memory. It is used
to relieve the fast main memory of a computer. For example, data that should be output to slower
components by the working memory (e.g. disk storage, printers) is stored temporarily in cache
memory and output from there at an appropriate speed for the target devices.

CAN

An abbreviation for "Controller Area Network" (serial bus system). Structure according to ISO
11898; Bus medium: twisted pair. Good transfer properties in short distances less than 40 m with
a 1 MBit/sec data transfer rate. Maximum number of stations: Theoretically unlimited, but
practically limited up to 64. Real-time capable (i.e. defined maximum latency times for messages
with high priority). High reliability using error detection, error handling, troubleshooting. Hamming
distance.

CD-ROM

Abbreviation for "Compact Disc Read-Only Memory". A removable data medium with a capacity
of ~700 MB. CD-ROMs are optically scanned.

CE mark

A CE mark for a product. It consists of the letters "CE" and indicates conformity to all EU
guidelines for the labeled product. It indicates that the individual or corporate body who has
performed or attached the label assures that the product conforms to all EU guidelines for
complete harmonization. It also indicates that all mandatory conformity evaluation procedures
have taken place.

804 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • Glossary

CMOS

"CMOS" is a battery powered memory area where fundamental parameters of an IBM (or
compatible) personal computer are stored. Information such as the type of hard drive, size of the
working memory and the current date and time are required when booting the computer. As the
name suggests, the memory is based on CMOS technology standards.

COM

A device name used to access serial ports in MS-DOS. The first serial port can be accessed
under COM1, the second under COM2, etc. A modem, mouse, or serial printer is typically

Appendix A
connected to a serial port.

COM1

Device name for the first serial port in a PC system. The input/output area for COM1 is usually
found at address 03F8H. Generally, the COM1 port is assigned to IRQ 4. In many systems, an
RS232 serial mouse is connected to COM1.

COM2

Device name for the second serial port in a PC system. The input/output area for COM2 is
usually found at address 02F8H. Generally, the COM2 port is assigned to IRQ 3. In many
systems, a modem is connected to COM2.

COM3

Device name for a serial port in a PC system. The input/output area for COM3 is usually found
at address 03E8H. Generally, the COM3 port is assigned to IRQ 4. In many systems, COM3 is
used as an alternative for COM1 or COM2 if peripheral devices are already connected to COM1
and COM2.

CompactFlash®

CompactFlash memory cards [CF cards] are exchangeable nonvolatile mass memory systems
with very small dimensions [43 x 36 x 3.3 mm, approximately half the size of a credit card]. In
addition to the flash memory chips, the controller is also present on the cards. CF cards provide
complete PC card / ATA functionality and compatibility. A 50-pin CF card can be simply inserted
in a passive 68-pin type II adapter card. It conforms to all electrical and mechanical PC card
interface specifications. CF cards were launched by SanDisk back in 1994. Currently, memory
capacities reach up to 8 GB per unit. Since 1995, CompactFlash Association [CFA] has been
looking after standardization and the worldwide distribution of CF technology

CPU

An abbreviation for "Central Processing Unit". Interprets and executes commands. It is also
known as a "microprocessor" or "processor" for short. A processor is able to receive, decode and
execute commands, as well as transfer information to and from other resources via the computer
bus.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 805

 Appendix A • Glossary

CTS

An abbreviation for "Clear To Send". A signal used when transferring serial data from modem to
computer, indicating its readiness to send the data. CTS is a hardware signal which is transferred
via line number 5 in compliance with the RS-232-C standard.

DCD

An abbreviation for "Data Carrier Detected". A signal used in serial communication that is sent
by the modem to the computer it is connected to, indicating that it is ready for transfer.

Dial-up

Data is transferred over the telephone network using a modem or an ISDN adapter.

DIMM

"Double In-line Memory Module" consisting of one or more RAM chips on a small circuit board
that is connected with the motherboard of a computer.

DMA

Direct Memory Access > Accelerated direct access to a computer’s RAM by bypassing the CPU.

DRAM

An abbreviation for "Dynamic Random Access Memory". Dynamic RAM consists of an

integrated semiconductor circuit that stores information based on the capacitor principle.
Capacitors lose their charge in a relatively short time. Therefore, dynamic RAM circuit boards
must contain a logic that allows continual recharging of RAM chips. Since the processor cannot
access dynamic RAM while it is being recharged, one or more waiting states can occur when
reading or writing data. Although it is slower, dynamic RAM is used more often than static RAM
since the simple design of the circuits means that it can store four times more data than static
RAM.

DSR

An abbreviation for "Data Set Ready". A signal used in serial data transfer, which is sent by the
modem to the computer it is connected to, indicating its readiness for processing. DSR is a
hardware signal which is sent via line number 6 in compliance with the RS-232-C standard.

DTR

An abbreviation for "Data Terminal Ready". A signal used in serial data transfer that is sent by
the computer to the modem it is connected to, indicating the computer's readiness to accept
incoming signals.

806 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • Glossary

DVD

An abbreviation for "Digital Versatile Disc". The next generation of optical data carrier technology
is able to store a higher volume of data than conventional CDs. Standard DVDs, which have a
single layer, can hold 4.7 GB. Dual-layer DVDs can hold 8.5 GB. Double-sided DVDs can
therefore hold up to 17 GB. A special drive is needed for DVDs. Conventional CDs can also be
played on DVD drives.

DVI

Abbreviation for "Digital Visual Interface" An interface for the digital transfer of video data.

Appendix A
DVI-A

Analog only

DVI-D

Digital only

DVI-I

Integrated, i.e. analog and digital

EDID data

Abbreviation for "Extended Display Identification Data". EDID data contains the characteristics
of monitors / TFT displays transferred as 128 KB data blocks to the graphics card via the Display
Data Channel (DDC). This EDID data can be used to set the graphics card to the monitor
properties.

EIDE

An abbreviation for "Enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics". An expansion of the IDE standard.
Enhanced IDE is considered the standard for hardware interfaces. This interface is designed for
drives with an integrated drive controller.

EMC

"Electromagnetic Compatibility" The ability of a device or a system to function satisfactorily in its

electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to
anything in that environment [IEV 161-01-07].

EPROM

Erasable PROM > (completely with ultraviolet light).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 807

 Appendix A • Glossary

Ethernet

An IEEE 802.3 standard for networks. Ethernet uses bus or star topology and controls the traffic
on communication lines using the access procedure CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access
with Collision Detection). Network nodes are connected using coaxial cables, fiber optic cables
or twisted pair cabling. Data transfer on an Ethernet network takes place in frames of variable
lengths that consist of supply and controller information as well as 1500 bytes of data. The
Ethernet standard provides base band transfers at 10 megabit and 100 megabit per second.

ETX

Abbreviation for "Embedded Technology eXtended" This established standard offers complete
PC functionality on a very compact form factor of just 114 mm x 100 mm (´4.5" x 4"). The
flexibility offered by ETX® in the development of system specific main boards allows easy
requirement fulfillment in a number of different applications.

FDD

Abbreviation for "Floppy Disk Drive". Reading device for removable magnetic memory from the
early days of PC technology. Due to their sensitivity and moving components, FDDs have been
almost completely replaced by CompactFlash memory in modern automation solutions.

Fiber optics

Fiber optic cable

FIFO

An abbreviation for "First In First Out". A queuing organization method whereby elements are
removed in the same order as they were inserted. The first element inserted is the first one
removed. Such an organization method is typical for a list of documents that are waiting to be
printed.

Firmware

Programs stored permanently in read-only memory. Firmware is software used to operate

computer-controlled devices that generally stays in the device throughout its lifespan or over a
long period of time. Such software includes operating systems for CPUs and application
programs for industrial PCs as well as programmable logic controllers (e.g. the software in a
washing machine controller). This software is written in read-only memory (ROM, PROM,
EPROM) and cannot be easily replaced.

Floppy

Also known as a diskette. A round plastic disk with an iron oxide coating that can store a
magnetic field. When the floppy disk is inserted in a disk drive, it rotates so that the different
areas (or sectors) of the disk's surface are moved under the read/write head. This allows the
magnetic orientation of the particle to be modified and recorded. Orientation in one direction
represents binary 1, while the reverse orientation represents binary 0.

808 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • Glossary

FPC

An abbreviation for "Flat Panel Controller".

FPD

An abbreviation for "Flat Panel Display".

FTP

"File Transfer Protocol" Rules for transferring data over a network from one computer to another
computer. This protocol is based on TCP/IP, which has established itself as the standard for

Appendix A
transferring data over Ethernet networks. FTP is one of the most used protocols on the Internet.
It is defined in RFC 959 in the official regulations for Internet communication.

GB

Gigabyte (1 GB = 230 or 1,073,741,824 Bytes)

Handshake

Method of synchronization for data transfer when data is sent at irregular intervals. The sender
signals that data can be sent, and the receiver signals when new data can be received.

HDD

An abbreviation for "Hard Disk Drive". Fixed magnetic mass memory with high capacities, e.g.
120 GB.

IDE

An abbreviation for "Integrated Drive Electronics". A drive interface where the controller
electronics are integrated in the drive.

ISA

An abbreviation for "Industry Standard Architecture". A term given for the bus design which
allows expansion of the system with plug-in cards that can be inserted in PC expansion slots.

ISO

International Organization for Standardization > Worldwide federation of national

standardization institutions from over 130 countries. ISO is not an acronym for the name of the
organization; it is derived from the Greek word "isos", meaning "equal" (www.iso.ch).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 809

 Appendix A • Glossary

Jitter

Jitter is a term that describes time deviations of cyclic events. If, for example, an event should
take place every 200ìs and it actually occurs every 198 to 203ìs, then the jitter is 5ìs. Jitter has
many causes. It originates in the components and transfer media of networks because of noise,
crosstalk, electromagnetic interference and many other random occurrences. In automation
technology, jitter is a measure of the quality of synchronization and timing.

Jumper

A small plug or wire link for adapting the hardware configuration used to connect the different
points of an electronic circuit.

LCD

An abbreviation for "Liquid Crystal Display". A display type, based on liquid crystals that have a
polarized molecular structure and are enclosed between two transparent electrodes as a thin
layer. If an electrical field is applied to the electrodes, the molecules align themselves with the
field and form crystalline arrangements that polarize the light passing through. A polarization
filter, which is arranged using lamellar electrodes, blocks the polarized light. In this way, a cell
(pixel) containing liquid crystals can be switched on using electrode gates, thus coloring this pixel
black. Some LCD displays have an electroluminescent plate behind the LCD screen for lighting.
Other types of LCD displays can use color.

LED

An abbreviation for "Light Emitting Diode". A semiconductor diode which converts electrical
energy into light. LEDs work on the principle of electroluminescence. They are highly efficient
because they do not produce much heat in spite of the amount of light they emit. For example,
"operational status indicators" on floppy disk drives are LEDs.

LPT

Logical device name for line printers. In MS-DOS, names are reserved for up to three parallel
printer ports with the names LPT1, LPT2 and LPT3. The first parallel port (LPT1) is usually
identical to the primary parallel output device PRN (in MS-DOS the logical device name for the
printer). The abbreviation LPT stands for "Line Printer Terminal".

MB

Megabyte (1 MB = 220 or 1,048,576 bytes).

810 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • Glossary

Microprocessor

Highly integrated circuit with the functionality of a CPU, normally housed on a single chip. It
comprises a control unit, arithmetic and logic unit, several registers and a link system for
connecting memory and peripheral components. The main performance features are the internal
and external data bus and address bus widths, the command set and the clock frequency.
Additionally, a choice can be made between CISC and RISC processors. The first commercially
available worldwide microprocessor was the Intel 4004. It came on the market in 1971.

MIPS

Appendix A
Million instructions per second > Measurement for the computing speed of computers.

Motherboard

A circuit board that houses the main components of a computer such as the CPU switching
circuit, co-processors, RAM, ROM for firmware, interface circuits, and expansion slots for
hardware expansions.

MTBF

An abbreviation for "Mean time between failure". The average time which passes before a
hardware component fails and repair is needed. This time is usually expressed in thousands or
ten thousands of hours, sometimes known as power-on hours (POH).

MTCX

An abbreviation for »Maintenance Controller EXtended«. The MTCX is an independent

processor system that provides additional functions for a B&R industrial PC that are not available
with a normal PC. The MTC communicates with the B&R industrial PC via the ISA bus (using a
couple register).

Multitasking

Multitasking is an operating mode in an operating system that allows several computer tasks to
be executed virtually simultaneously.

OEM

"Original Equipment Manufacturer"; A company that integrates third-party and in-house

manufactured components into their own product range and then distributes these products
under its own name.

OPC

OLE for Process Control > A communication standard for components in the area of automation.
The goal of OPC development is to provide an open interface that builds on Windows-based
technologies such as OLE, COM and DCOM. It allows problem-free standardized data transfer
between controllers, operating and monitoring systems, field devices and office applications
from different manufacturers. This development is promoted by the OPC Foundation, which is

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 811

 Appendix A • Glossary

made up of over 200 companies from around the world, including Microsoft and other leading
companies. Nowadays, OPC is also interpreted as a synonym for Openness, Productivity and
Connectivity, symbolizing the new possibilities that this standard opens up.

OPC server

The missing link between connection modules for the Interbus and the visualization application.
It communicates serially with the connection modules via the ISA or PCI bus or Ethernet.

Panel

A common term for B&R display units (with or without keys).

PCI Bus

Abbreviation for "Peripheral Component Interconnect bus". Developed by Intel as an

intermediary/local bus for the latest PC generations. It is basically a synchronous bus. The main
clock of the CPU is used for synchronization. The PCI bus is microprocessor-independent, 32-
bit and 64-bit compatible, and supports both 3.3 V and 5 V cards and devices.

PCMCIA

An abbreviation for "Personal Computer Memory Card International Association". An association

of manufacturers and dealers who are dedicated to the cultivation and further development of
common standards for peripheral devices based on PC cards with a slot for such cards. PC
cards are mainly used for laptops, palmtops (and other portable computers), and intelligent
electronic devices. Version 1 of the PCMCIA standard was introduced in 1990.

PLC

Programmable Logic Controller; Computer-based control device that functions using an

application program. The application program is relatively easy to create using standardized
programming languages [IL, FBD, LAD, AS, ST]. Because of its serial functionality, reaction
times are slower compared to connection-oriented control. Today, PLCs are available in device
families with matched modular components for all levels of an automation hierarchy.

PnP

An abbreviation for "Plug and Play". Specifications developed by Intel. Using Plug and Play
allows a PC to automatically configure itself so that it can communicate with peripheral devices
(e.g. monitors, modems, and printers). Users can connect a peripheral device (plug) and it
immediately runs (play) without having to manually configure the system. A Plug and Play PC
requires a BIOS that supports Plug and Play and a respective expansion card.

POH

An abbreviation for "Power On Hours". See MTBF.

812 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • Glossary

POST

An abbreviation for "Power-On Self Test". A set of routines that are stored in ROM on the
computer and that test different system components, e.g. RAM, disk drive and the keyboard in
order to determine that the connection is operating correctly and ready for operation. POST
routines notify the user of problems that occur. This is done using several signal tones or by
displaying a message that frequently accompanies a diagnosis value on the standard output or
standard error devices (generally the monitor). If the POST runs successfully, control is
transferred over to the system's bootstrap loader.

POWERLINK

Appendix A
An enhancement of standard Ethernet. It enables data exchange under strict real-time
conditions with cycle times down to 200 μs and jitter under 1 μs. This makes Ethernet power
available on all communication levels of automation technology – from control levels to I/O.
POWERLINK was initiated by the company B&R Industrie-Elektronik and is now managed by
the open end user and vendor association, EPSG - Ethernet POWERLINK Standardization
Group (www.ethernet-powerlink.org).

QVGA

Abbreviation for "Quarter Video Graphics Array". Usually a screen resolution of 320 × 240 pixels.

QUXGA

Abbreviation for "Quad Ultra Extended Graphics Array". Generally a screen resolution of 3200
× 2400 pixels (4:3). Quad implies the 4x greater pixel resolution compared to the UXGA.

QWUXGA

Abbreviation for "Quad WUXGA"; Generally a screen resolution of 3840 × 2400 pixels (8:5,
16:10).

RAM

An abbreviation for "Random Access Memory". Semiconductor memory which can be read or
written to by the microprocessor or other hardware components. Memory locations can be
accessed in any order. The various ROM memory types do allow random access, but they
cannot be written to. The term RAM refers to a more temporary memory that can be written to
as well as read.

Real time

A system is operating in real time or has real-time capability if the input sizes (e.g. signals, data)
are received and processed in a defined time period, and the results are made available in real
time for a partner system or the system environment. See also "real-time demands" and "real-
time system".

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 813

 Appendix A • Glossary

ROM

An abbreviation for "Read-Only Memory". Semiconductor memory where programs or data were
permanently stored during the production process.

RS232

Recommended Standard Number 232. Oldest and most widespread interface standard, also
called a V.24 interface. All signals are referenced to ground making this an unbalanced interface.
High level: -3 to -30 V, low level: +3 to +30 V; cable lengths up to 15 m, transfer rates up to 20
kbit/s; for point-to-point connections between 2 stations.

RS422

Recommended Standard Number 422. Interface standard, balanced operation, increased

immunity to disturbances. High level: 2 to -6 V, low level: +2 to +6 V; 4-wire connection
[inverted/not inverted], cable lengths up to 1200 m, transfer rates up to 10 Mbit/s, 1 sender can
carry out simplex communication with up to 10 receivers.

RS485

Recommended Standard Number 485. Interface standard upgraded from RS422. High level: 1.5
to -6 V, low level: +1.5 to +6 V; two-line connection [half-duplex mode] or four-line connection
[full-duplex mode]; permissible cable length up to 1200 m, transfer rates up to 10 Mbit/s. Up to
32 stations (sender/receiver) can be connected to an RS485 bus.

RTS

An abbreviation for "Request To Send". A signal used in serial data transfer for requesting send
permission. For example, it is sent from a computer to the modem connected to it. The RTS
signal is assigned to pin 4 according to the hardware specifications of the RS-232-C standard.

RXD

An abbreviation for "Receive (RX) Data". A line for transferring serial data received from one
device to another, e.g. from a modem to a computer. For connections complying with the RS-
232-C standard, the RXD is connected to pin 3 of the plug.

SDRAM

An abbreviation for "Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory". A construction of

dynamic semiconductor components (DRAM) that can operate with higher clock rates than
conventional DRAM switching circuits. This is made possible using block access. For each
access, the DRAM determines the next memory addresses to be accessed.

SFC

Sequential function chart > Graphic input language for PLCs used to represent sequential
control.

814 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • Glossary

Slot PLC

PC insert card that has full PLC functionality. On the PC, it is coupled via a DPR with the process
using a fieldbus connection. It is programmed externally or using the host PC.

SoftPLC

Synonym for SoftPLC.

SRAM

An abbreviation for "Static Random Access Memory". A semiconductor memory (RAM) made up

Appendix A
of certain logic circuits (flip-flop) that only keeps stored information while powered. In computers,
static RAM is generally only used for cache memory.

SUXGA

Abbreviation for Super Ultra Extended Graphics Array; Generally a screen resolution of
2048×1536 pixels (4:3). An alternative name is QXGA (Quad Extended Graphics Array), which
is 4x the pixel resolution of XGA.

SVGA

Abbreviation for "Super Video Graphics Array"; Graphics standard with a resolution of at least
800×600 pixels and at least 256 colors.

Switch

Device similar to a hub that takes data packets received in a network and, unlike a hub, passes
them only to the respective addressee, not to all network nodes. Unlike a hub, a switch provides
targeted communication within a network that only takes place between sender and receiver.
Other network nodes are not involved.

SXGA

Abbreviation for Super Extended Graphics Array. Graphics standard with a screen resolution of
1280 × 1024 pixels (aspect ratio 5:4).

SXGA+

Abbreviation for SXGA Plus; Generally 1400 × 1050 pixels.

System units

Provit system units consist of a mainboard (without processor), slots for RAM modules, VGA
controller, serial and parallel interfaces, and connections for the FPD, monitor, PS/2 AT
keyboard, PS/2 mouse, USB, Ethernet (for system units with Intel Celeron and Pentium III
processors), Panelware keypad modules and external FDD.

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 815

 Appendix A • Glossary

Task

Program unit that is assigned a specific priority by the real-time operating system. It contains a
complete process and can consist of several modules.

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Suit of Protocols. Network protocol that has become the
generally accepted standard for data exchange in heterogeneous networks. TCP/IP is used both
in local networks for communication between various computer and also for LAN to WAN
access.

TFT display

LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) technology where the display consists of a large grid of LCD cells.
Each pixel is represented by a cell, whereby electrical fields produced in the cells are supported
by thin film transistors (TFT) that result in an active matrix. In its simplest form, there is exactly
one thin film transistor per cell. Displays with an active matrix are generally used in laptops and
notebooks because they are thin, offer high-quality color displays and can be viewed from all
angles.

Touch screen

Screen with touch sensors for selecting options in a displayed menu using the tip of the finger.

TXD

An abbreviation for "Transmit (TX) Data". A line for the transfer of serial data sent from one
device to another, e.g. from a computer to a modem. For connections complying with the RS-
232-C standard, the TXD is connected to pin 2 of the plug.

UART

An abbreviation for "Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter". A module generally

consisting of a single integrated circuit that combines the circuits required for asynchronous
serial communication for both sending and receiving. UART represents the most common type
of circuit in modems for connecting to a personal computer.

UDMA

An abbreviation for "Ultra Direct Memory Access". A special IDE data transfer mode that allows
high data transfer rates for drives. There have been many variations in recent times.
UDMA33 mode transfers 33 megabytes per second.
UDMA66 mode transfers 66 megabytes per second.
UDMA100 mode transfers 100 megabytes per second.
Both the mainboard and the hard drive must support the specification to implement
modifications.

816 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Appendix A • Glossary

UPS

Abbreviation for "Uninterruptible Power Supply". See "UPS".

USB

An abbreviation for "Universal Serial Bus" A serial bus with a bandwidth of up to 12 megabits per
second (Mbit/s) for connecting a peripheral device to a microcomputer. Up to 127 devices can
be connected to the system using a single multipurpose connection, the USB bus (e.g. external
CD drives, printers, modems as well as the mouse and keyboard). This is done by connecting
the devices in a row. USB allows devices to be changed when the power supply is switched on

Appendix A
(hot plugging) and multi-layered data flow.

UPS

An abbreviation for "Uninterruptible Power Supply". The UPS supplies power to systems that
cannot be connected directly to the power mains for safety reasons because a power failure
could lead to loss of data. The UPS allows the PC to be shut down securely without losing data
if a power failure occurs.

UXGA

Abbreviation for "Ultra Extended Graphics Array" Generally a screen resolution of 1600 × 1200
pixels (aspect ratio 4:3, 12:9).

VGA

An abbreviation for "Video Graphics Adapter". A video adapter which can handle all EGA
(Enhanced Graphics Adapter) video modes and adds several new modes.

Windows CE

Compact 32-bit operating system with multitasking and multithreading that Microsoft developed
especially for the OEM market. It can be ported for various processor types and has a high
degree of real-time capability. The development environment uses proven, well-established
development tools. It is an open and scalable Windows operating system platform for many
different devices. Examples of such devices are handheld PCs, digital wireless receivers,
intelligent mobile phones, multimedia consoles, etc. In embedded systems, Windows CE is also
an excellent choice for automation technology.

WSXGA

Wide SXGA, generally 1600 × 900 pixels (16:9).

WUXGA

Wide UXGA, generally 1920 × 1200 pixels (16:10).

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 817

 Appendix A • Glossary

WXGA

Wide XGA, generally 1280 × 768 pixels.

XGA

An abbreviation for "EXtended Graphics Array". An expanded standard for graphics controllers
and monitors that was introduced by IBM in 1990. This standard supports 640x480 resolution
with 65,536 colors or 1024x768 resolution with 256 colors. This standard is generally used in
workstation systems.

XTX

Abbreviation for "eXpress Technologoy for ETX" A further development consistent with the
proven ETX® standard. The newest I/O technology is implemented on a reliable form factor in
XTX. The ETX® interface X2 is equipped with new serial buses like PCI Express™ und Serial
ATA®, instead of the unpopular ISA bus. All other signals on the X1, X3 and X4 interfaces remain
completely compatible with the ETX® Standard (Rev. 2.7). However, if ISA signals are needed,
a PCI-ISA can be implemented on the base board. The use of an LPC bus already in XTX™ is
considerably cheaper than a bridge solution.

818 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Figure index

Figure index

Figure 1: APC620 embedded for central control and visualization................................ 51

Figure 2: APC620 as visualization device ..................................................................... 52
Figure 3: Automation PC 620 system overview............................................................. 53
Figure 4: Selection guide - APC620 basic system with 1, 2, 3, and 5 PCI slots............ 56
Figure 5: Selection guide - APC620 optional components with 1, 2, 3, and 5 PCI slots 57
Figure 6: Selection guide - Basic system and optional components APC620 embedded..
59
Figure 7: Interface overview - APC620, 1 PCI slot variant (top).................................... 60
Figure 8: Interface overview - APC620, 1 PCI slot variant (front).................................. 61
Figure 9: Dimensions - APC620, 1 PCI slot variant....................................................... 65
Figure 10: Interface overview - APC620, 2 PCI slot variant (top).................................... 66
Figure 11: Interface overview - APC620, 2 PCI slot variant (front).................................. 67
Figure 12: Dimensions - APC620, 2 PCI slot variant....................................................... 71
Figure 13: Interface overview - APC620, 3 PCI slot variant (top).................................... 72
Figure 14: Interface overview - APC620, 3 PCI slot variant (front).................................. 73
Figure 15: Dimensions - APC620, 3 PCI slot variant....................................................... 76
Figure 16: Interface overview - APC620, 5 PCI slot variant (top).................................... 77
Figure 17: Interface overview - APC620, 5 PCI slot variant (front).................................. 78

Figure index
Figure 18: Dimensions - APC620, 5 PCI slot variant....................................................... 82
Figure 19: APC620 embedded variant interface overview - top side .............................. 83
Figure 20: APC620 embedded variant interface overview - front side ............................ 84
Figure 21: APC620 embedded variant - dimensions....................................................... 88
Figure 22: Example of worst-case conditions for temperature measurement ................. 89
Figure 23: Ambient temperatures for systems with an 815E CPU board (ETX).............. 90
Figure 24: Example of worst-case conditions for temperature measurement ................. 93
Figure 25: Ambient temperatures for systems with an 855GME CPU board (ETX / XTX)...
94
Figure 26: Ambient temperatures for embedded systems with an 855GME CPU board
(ETX / XTX) 95
Figure 27: Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX01-00 revision >= I0 ................................. 97
Figure 28: Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SX01-00 revision < I0 ................................... 99
Figure 29: Supply voltage for the 2 PCI slots (dependent on system unit version) ....... 101
Figure 30: Supply voltage for the 2 PCI slots (dependent on system unit version) ....... 104
Figure 31: Supply voltage block diagram 3 PCI slots .................................................... 107
Figure 32: Supply voltage for the 5 PCI slots (dependent on system unit version) ....... 109
Figure 33: Supply voltage block diagram 5 PCI slots (dependent on system unit version)..
113
Figure 34: Supply voltage for the 5PC600.SE00-00, 5PC600.SE00-01 and 5PC600.SE00-
02 117
Figure 35: General device interfaces example - APC620 with 5 PCI slots.................... 121
Figure 36: General device interfaces example - APC620 embedded ........................... 122
Figure 37: Supply voltage connection ........................................................................... 135
Figure 38: Ground connection ....................................................................................... 136
Figure 39: Monitor / Panel connection........................................................................... 138
Figure 40: Monitor / Panel connection with RGB video signal....................................... 142
Figure 41: Monitor / Panel connection with DVI video signal ........................................ 142
Figure 42: Monitor / Panel connection with SDL video signal ....................................... 143

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 819

 Figure index

Figure 43: Dimensions - Standard half-size PCI cards.................................................. 147

Figure 44: Dimensions - Standard full-size PCI cards................................................... 148
Figure 45: PCI connector type: 5 volt ............................................................................ 149
Figure 46: Front-side status LEDs................................................................................. 151
Figure 47: APC620 serial number sticker on front-side................................................. 163
Figure 48: APC620 serial number sticker on back-side ................................................ 163
Figure 49: Example of serial number search: 70950170564......................................... 164
Figure 50: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX01-00 and 855GME
CPU board 165
Figure 51: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX02-00 and 855GME
CPU board 166
Figure 52: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX02-01 and 855GME
CPU board 167
Figure 53: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SF03-00 and 855GME
CPU board 168
Figure 54: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX05-00 and 855GME
CPU board 169
Figure 55: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SX05-01 and 855GME
CPU board 170
Figure 56: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SE00-00 and 855GME
CPU board 171
Figure 57: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SE00-01 and 855GME
CPU board 172
Figure 58: Block diagram of entire device with system unit 5PC600.SE00-02 and 855GME
CPU board 173
Figure 59: CPU boards 815E (ETX) .............................................................................. 179
Figure 60: CPU boards 855GME (ETX) ........................................................................ 181
Figure 61: CPU boards 855GME (XTX) ........................................................................ 183
Figure 62: Heat sink ...................................................................................................... 185
Figure 63: Main memory module................................................................................... 186
Figure 64: Add-on SSD 128 GB - 5AC600.SSDI-00 £ D0............................................. 187
Figure 65: Add-on SSD 128 GB - 5AC600.SSDI-00 ³ E0.............................................. 187
Figure 66: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on SSD 128 GB - 5AC600.SSDI-00 £ D0
190
Figure 67: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on SSD 128 GB - 5AC600.SSDI-00 ³ E0.
190
Figure 68: Replacement SSD 128 GB - 5MMSSD.0128-00 £ D0 ................................. 191
Figure 69: Replacement SSD 128 GB - 5MMSSD.0128-00 ³ E0 .................................. 191
Figure 70: Temperature humidity diagram - Replacement SSD 128 GB - 5MMSSD.0128-
00 £ D0 193
Figure 71: Temperature humidity diagram - Replacement SSD 128 GB - 5MMSSD.0128-
00 ³ E0 194
Figure 72: Add-on hard disk 30 GB 24x7 - 5AC600.HDDI-00 ....................................... 195
Figure 73: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-00 ......... 197
Figure 74: Add-on hard disk 20 GB - 5AC600.HDDI-01................................................ 198
Figure 75: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-01 ......... 200
Figure 76: Add-on hard disk 40 GB - 5AC600.HDDI-02................................................ 201

820 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Figure index

Figure 77: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-02 ......... 203
Figure 78: Add-on hard disk 60 GB - 5AC600.HDDI-03................................................ 204
Figure 79: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-03 ......... 206
Figure 80: Add-on hard disk 80 GB - 5AC600.HDDI-04................................................ 207
Figure 81: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-04 ......... 209
Figure 82: Add-on hard disk 40 GB - 5AC600.HDDI-05................................................ 210
Figure 83: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-05 ......... 212
Figure 84: Add-on hard disk 80 GB - 5AC600.HDDI-06................................................ 213
Figure 85: Temperature humidity diagram - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-06 ......... 215
Figure 86: Add-on CompactFlash slot - 5AC600.CFSI-00 ............................................ 216
Figure 87: Slide-in CD-ROM - 5AC600.CDXS-00 ......................................................... 217
Figure 88: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in CD-ROM 5AC600.CDXS-00 ....... 219
Figure 89: Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW - 5AC600.DVDS-00 ......................................... 220
Figure 90: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW 5AC600.DVDS-00
222
Figure 91: Slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW - 5AC600.DVRS-00 ................................ 223
Figure 92: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW
5AC600.DVRS-00 227

Figure index
Figure 93: Slide-in CF 2-slot - 5AC600.CFSS-00.......................................................... 228
Figure 94: Slide-in USB FDD - 5AC600.FDDS-00 ........................................................ 230
Figure 95: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in USB diskette drive 5AC600.FDDS-00
232
Figure 96: Slide-in hard disk 30 GB - 5AC600.HDDS-00 .............................................. 233
Figure 97: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in hard disk 5AC600.HDDS-00 ....... 235
Figure 98: Slide-in hard disk 20 GB - 5AC600.HDDS-01 .............................................. 236
Figure 99: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in hard disk 5AC600.HDDS-01 ....... 238
Figure 100: Slide-in hard disk 40 GB - 5AC600.HDDS-02 .............................................. 239
Figure 101: Temperature humidity diagram - Slide-in hard disk 5AC600.HDDS-02 ....... 241
Figure 102: RAID 1 system schematic ............................................................................ 242
Figure 103: RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-00 .............................................................. 243
Figure 104: PCI RAID storage - 5ACPCI.RAIS-00 .......................................................... 245
Figure 105: Temperature humidity diagram - RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIS-00 ............ 247
Figure 106: PCI RAID storage - 5ACPCI.RAIS-01 .......................................................... 248
Figure 107: Temperature humidity diagram - RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIS-01 ............ 250
Figure 108: PCI SATA RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-01............................................. 251
Figure 109: Temperature humidity diagram - SATA RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIC-01.. 253
Figure 110: PCI slot numbering on APC620 systems with 5 PCI slots ........................... 255
Figure 111: Replacement SATA HDD 60 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-02................................... 256
Figure 112: Temperature humidity diagram - SATA RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIC-02.. 258
Figure 113: PCI SATA RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-03............................................. 259
Figure 114: Temperature humidity diagram - SATA RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIC-03.. 261
Figure 115: PCI slot numbering on APC620 systems with 5 PCI slots ........................... 263
Figure 116: Replacement SATA HDD 160 GB - 5ACPCI.RAIC-04................................. 264
Figure 117: Temperature humidity diagram - SATA RAID hard disk 5ACPCI.RAIC-04.. 266
Figure 118: PCI SATA RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-05............................................. 267
Figure 119: Temperature humidity diagram - SATA RAID Hard Disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-05 .....
269

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 821

 Figure index

Figure 120: Replacement SATA HDD 250 GB - 5MMHDD.0250-00............................... 271

Figure 121: Temperature humidity diagram - SATA RAID hard disk - 5MMHDD.0250-00 ....
273
Figure 122: Add-on CAN interface - 5AC600.CANI-00 ................................................... 274
Figure 123: Terminating resistor - Add-on CAN interface 5AC600.CANI-00................... 277
Figure 124: Contents of the delivery / mounting material - 5AC600.CANI-00 ................. 277
Figure 125: Add-on RS232/422/485 interface - 5AC600.485I-00.................................... 278
Figure 126: Add-on RS232/422/485 interface - operated in RS485 mode...................... 280
Figure 127: Contents of the delivery / mounting material - 5AC600.485I-00................... 281
Figure 128: Fan kit - 5PC600.FA01-00............................................................................ 282
Figure 129: Fan kit - 5PC600.FA02-00............................................................................ 283
Figure 130: Fan kit - 5PC600.FA03-00............................................................................ 285
Figure 131: Fan kit - 5PC600.FA05-00............................................................................ 286
Figure 132: AP Link card ................................................................................................. 288
Figure 133: AP Link device connection with DVI video signal......................................... 291
Figure 134: AP Link device connection with SDL video signal........................................ 292
Figure 135: Mounting plates for the APC620 .................................................................. 293
Figure 136: Mounting orientation - Standard ................................................................... 297
Figure 137: Air circulation spacing - Standard................................................................. 298
Figure 138: Mounting orientation - Optional .................................................................... 299
Figure 139: Optional circulation spacing ......................................................................... 300
Figure 140: Mounting orientations for an APC620 with hard disk drive........................... 301
Figure 141: Mounting orientations for an APC 620 with a slide-in CD-ROM drive .......... 302
Figure 142: Mounting orientations for an APC620 with a slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW drive ..
303
Figure 143: Mounting orientations for an APC620 with a slide-in DVD-R/RW / DVD+R/RW
drive 304
Figure 144: Mounting orientations for an APC620 with a slide-in USB FDD drive .......... 305
Figure 145: Flex radius - Cable connection..................................................................... 306
Figure 146: Grounding concept ....................................................................................... 307
Figure 147: Configuration - One Automation Panel 900 via DVI (onboard) .................... 310
Figure 148: Configuration - An Automation Panel 900 via SDL (onboard)...................... 313
Figure 149: Configuration - An Automation Panel 800 via SDL (onboard)...................... 317
Figure 150: Configuration - One AP900 and an AP800 via SDL (onboard) .................... 320
Figure 151: Configuration - Four Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (onboard) .......... 323
Figure 152: Configuration - One Automation Panel 900 via SDL (AP Link) .................... 328
Figure 153: Configuration - 4 Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (AP Link) ................ 332
Figure 154: Configuration - Two Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (onboard) and SDL
(AP Link) 337
Figure 155: Configuration - Eight Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (onboard) and SDL
(AP Link) 341
Figure 156: Configuration - Six AP900 and two AP800 devices via SDL (onboard) and SDL
(AP Link) 346
Figure 157: Examples - internal numbering of the extension units.................................. 350
Figure 158: Open the RAID Configuration Utility............................................................. 351
Figure 159: RAID Configuration Utility - Menu ................................................................ 351
Figure 160: RAID Configuration Utility - Menu ................................................................ 352

822 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Figure index

Figure 161: RAID Configuration Utility - Create RAID set - Striped................................. 353
Figure 162: RAID Configuration Utility - Create RAID set - Mirrored............................... 354
Figure 163: RAID Configuration Utility - Delete RAID set................................................ 355
Figure 164: RAID Configuration Utility - Rebuild mirrored set ......................................... 356
Figure 165: RAID Configuration Utility - Resolve conflicts .............................................. 357
Figure 166: RAID Configuration Utility - Low level format ............................................... 358
Figure 167: Local connection of USB peripheral devices on the APC620 ...................... 359
Figure 168: Remote connection of USB peripheral devices to the APC900 via DVI....... 360
Figure 169: Remote connection of USB peripheral devices to the APC800/900 via SDL 361
Figure 170: B&R Control Center...................................................................................... 363
Figure 171: Settings for Passmark BurnIn Pro V4 with an APC810 2-slot with DVD ...... 364
Figure 172: Test overview of an APC810 2-slot with DVD .............................................. 365
Figure 173: 815E (ETX) BIOS diagnostic screen ............................................................ 372
Figure 174: 815E (ETX) BIOS Summary screen............................................................. 373
Figure 175: 815E (ETX) Main Menu................................................................................ 375
Figure 176: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Master .............................................................. 376
Figure 177: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 0 .......................................................................... 378
Figure 178: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Master .............................................................. 380

Figure index
Figure 179: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Slave ................................................................ 382
Figure 180: 815E (ETX) Advanced Menu........................................................................ 384
Figure 181: 815E (ETX) Advanced Chipset/Graphics Control ........................................ 385
Figure 182: 815E (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration............................................................. 387
Figure 183: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #1.................................................................... 389
Figure 184: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #2.................................................................... 390
Figure 185: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #3.................................................................... 391
Figure 186: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #4.................................................................... 392
Figure 187: 815E (ETX) Memory Cache ......................................................................... 393
Figure 188: 815E (ETX) I/O Device Configuration .......................................................... 395
Figure 189: 815E (ETX) Keyboard Features ................................................................... 398
Figure 190: 815E (ETX) CPU Board Monitor .................................................................. 399
Figure 191: 815E (ETX) Miscellaneous........................................................................... 400
Figure 192: 815E (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features....................................................... 401
Figure 193: 815E (ETX) Panel Control............................................................................ 403
Figure 194: 815E (ETX) Baseboard Monitor ................................................................... 404
Figure 195: 815E (ETX) Legacy Devices ........................................................................ 405
Figure 196: 815E (ETX) Security Menu........................................................................... 407
Figure 197: 815E (ETX) Power Menu ............................................................................. 409
Figure 198: 815E (ETX) ACPI Control............................................................................. 411
Figure 199: 815E (ETX) Thermal Management .............................................................. 412
Figure 200: 815E (ETX) Boot Menu ................................................................................ 414
Figure 201: 815E (ETX) Exit Menu.................................................................................. 415
Figure 202: DIP switch on system unit ............................................................................ 416
Figure 203: 855GME (ETX) BIOS Diagnostics Screen ................................................... 426
Figure 204: 855GME (ETX) BIOS Summary Screen ...................................................... 426
Figure 205: 855GME (ETX) Main .................................................................................... 428
Figure 206: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Master Setup .............................................. 430
Figure 207: 855GME (ETX) IDE channel 0 slave setup .................................................. 432

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 823

 Figure index

Figure 208: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Master Setup .............................................. 434
Figure 209: 855GME (ETX) IDE channel 1 slave setup .................................................. 436
Figure 210: 855GME - advanced setup menu - overview ............................................... 438
Figure 211: 855GME (ETX) - advanced chipset control.................................................. 439
Figure 212: 815GME (ETX) - PCI/PNP configuration...................................................... 441
Figure 213: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #1............................................................ 444
Figure 214: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #2............................................................ 445
Figure 215: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #3............................................................ 446
Figure 216: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #4............................................................ 447
Figure 217: 855GME (ETX) - memory cache .................................................................. 448
Figure 218: 855GME (ETX) - I/O device configuration.................................................... 450
Figure 219: 855GME (ETX) Keyboard Features ............................................................. 453
Figure 220: 855GME (ETX) - CPU board monitor........................................................... 454
Figure 221: 855GME (ETX) miscellaneous ..................................................................... 455
Figure 222: 855GME (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features ................................................. 456
Figure 223: 855GME (ETX) Panel Control ...................................................................... 458
Figure 224: 855GME (ETX) - baseboard monitor............................................................ 459
Figure 225: 855GME (ETX) Legacy Devices .................................................................. 461
Figure 226: 855GME (ETX) Security Menu..................................................................... 463
Figure 227: 855GME (ETX) Power menu........................................................................ 465
Figure 228: 855GME (ETX) ACPI Control....................................................................... 467
Figure 229: 855GME (ETX) Boot menu .......................................................................... 469
Figure 230: 855GME (ETX) - exit menu .......................................................................... 470
Figure 231: DIP switch on system unit ............................................................................ 472
Figure 232: 855GME (XTX) - BIOS diagnostics screen .................................................. 482
Figure 233: 855GME (XTX) BIOS Main menu ................................................................ 484
Figure 234: 855GME (XTX) Advanced menu.................................................................. 485
Figure 235: 855GME (XTX) Advanced ACPI Configuration ............................................ 486
Figure 236: 855GME (XTX) Advanced PCI Configuration .............................................. 488
Figure 237: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Graphics Configuration ...................................... 490
Figure 238: 855GME (XTX) Advanced CPU Configuration............................................. 492
Figure 239: 855GME (XTX) - advanced chipset configuration ........................................ 493
Figure 240: 855GME (XTX) I/O Interface Configuration.................................................. 494
Figure 241: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Clock Configuration ........................................... 496
Figure 242: 855GME (XTX) Advanced IDE Configuration .............................................. 497
Figure 243: 855GME (XTX) Primary IDE Master ............................................................ 498
Figure 244: 855GME (XTX) - primary IDE slave ............................................................. 500
Figure 245: 855GME (XTX) Secondary IDE Master........................................................ 501
Figure 246: 855GME (XTX) Secondary IDE Slave.......................................................... 503
Figure 247: 855GME (XTX) Advanced USB Configuration ............................................. 504
Figure 248: 855GME (XTX) USB mass storage device configuration............................. 507
Figure 249: 855GME (XTX) - advanced keyboard/mouse configuration......................... 508
Figure 250: 855GME (XTX) - advanced remote access configuration ............................ 509
Figure 251: 855GME (XTX) - advanced CPU board monitor .......................................... 511
Figure 252: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Baseboard/Panel Features ................................ 512
Figure 253: 855GME (XTX) Panel Control ...................................................................... 514
Figure 254: 855GME (XTX) - baseboard monitor............................................................ 515

824 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Figure index

Figure 255: 855GME (XTX) - Legacy devices................................................................. 516

Figure 256: 855GME (XTX) Boot menu .......................................................................... 518
Figure 257: 855GME (XTX) Security menu..................................................................... 520
Figure 258: 855GME (XTX) Hard disk security user password....................................... 521
Figure 259: 855GME (XTX) Hard disk security master password................................... 522
Figure 260: 855GME (XTX) Power menu........................................................................ 523
Figure 261: 855GME (XTX) - Exit menu.......................................................................... 525
Figure 262: DIP switch on system unit ............................................................................ 527
Figure 263: PCI routing with activated APIC CPU boards 815E (ETX), 855GME (ETX) 543
Figure 264: PCI routing with activated APIC CPU boards 855GME (XTX) ..................... 544
Figure 265: PCI routing with activated APIC CPU boards 855GME (XTX) on the APC620e.
545
Figure 266: Location of DIP switch.................................................................................. 546
Figure 267: Differentiating between 815E and 855GME CPU boards ............................ 548
Figure 268: Software versions......................................................................................... 549
Figure 269: Firmware version of Automation Panel Link SDL transceiver/receiver ........ 550
Figure 270: Creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP - step 1 .................................. 558
Figure 271: Creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP - step 2 .................................. 558

Figure index
Figure 272: Creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP - step 3 .................................. 558
Figure 273: Creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP - step 4 .................................. 559
Figure 274: Creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP - step 5 .................................. 559
Figure 275: Creating a USB flash drive for B&R upgrade files........................................ 561
Figure 276: Creating a CompactFlash card for B&R upgrade files ................................. 563
Figure 277: Automation PC 620 with MS-DOS ............................................................... 566
Figure 278: Windows XP Professional Logo ................................................................... 568
Figure 279: Graphics driver for 815E Control Panel access ........................................... 571
Figure 280: Graphics driver for 815E settings ................................................................. 571
Figure 281: Accessing the graphics driver via Control Panel .......................................... 572
Figure 282: Extended desktop settings - primary and secondary device ........................ 573
Figure 283: Dual display clone settings - primary and secondary device........................ 575
Figure 284: Settings after installing the graphics driver................................................... 576
Figure 285: Settings for adjustment................................................................................. 577
Figure 286: Touch screen driver - serial touch screen .................................................... 578
Figure 287: Touch screen driver - auto-detect ................................................................ 579
Figure 288: Touch screen calibration .............................................................................. 579
Figure 289: Touch screen driver - serial touch screen .................................................... 580
Figure 290: Touch screen driver - auto-detect ................................................................ 580
Figure 291: Touch screen calibration .............................................................................. 581
Figure 292: Windows XP Embedded Logo...................................................................... 584
Figure 293: Windows Embedded Standard 2009 Logo................................................... 588
Figure 294: ADI Control Center screenshots - Example (symbol photo)......................... 595
Figure 295: ADI Control Center - SDL equalizer settings................................................ 598
Figure 296: ADI Control Center - UPS settings ............................................................... 599
Figure 297: ADI Control Center - UPS monitor ............................................................... 601
Figure 298: ADI Control Center - UPS battery settings ................................................... 602
Figure 299: ADI Control Center - UPS settings ............................................................... 604
Figure 300: ADI Control Center - Advanced UPS settings .............................................. 606

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 825

 Figure index

Figure 301: Test structure - torsion ................................................................................. 629

Figure 302: Test structure - Cable drag chain ................................................................. 630
Figure 303: Contents of delivery - interface cover.......................................................... 643
Figure 304: Temperature humidity diagram - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-06 ... 648
Figure 305: Dimensions - CompactFlash card Type I ..................................................... 648
Figure 306: ATTO Benchmark v2.34 comparison when reading - 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 with
5CFCRD.xxxx-06 649
Figure 307: ATTO Benchmark v2.34 comparison when writing - 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 with
5CFCRD.xxxx-06 649
Figure 308: Temperature humidity diagram - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 ... 653
Figure 309: Dimensions - CompactFlash card Type I ..................................................... 653
Figure 310: ATTO disk benchmark v2.34 comparison (reading)..................................... 654
Figure 311: ATTO disk benchmark v2.34 comparison (writing) ...................................... 654
Figure 312: Temperature humidity diagram - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 ... 658
Figure 313: Dimensions - CompactFlash card Type I ..................................................... 658
Figure 314: Dimensions - CompactFlash card Type I ..................................................... 661
Figure 315: SanDisk white paper - page 1 of 6 ............................................................... 662
Figure 316: SanDisk white paper - page 2 of 6 ............................................................... 663
Figure 317: SanDisk white paper - page 3 of 6 ............................................................... 664
Figure 318: SanDisk white paper - page 4 of 6 ............................................................... 665
Figure 319: SanDisk white paper - page 5 of 6 ............................................................... 666
Figure 320: SanDisk white paper - page 6 of 6 ............................................................... 667
Figure 321: USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00............................................................ 668
Figure 322: Dimensions for USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00................................... 671
Figure 323: Dimensions - USB Media Drive with front cover .......................................... 672
Figure 324: Interfaces for USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00...................................... 672
Figure 325: Mounting orientation of USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00 ...................... 673
Figure 326: Front cover 5A5003.03................................................................................. 673
Figure 327: Dimensions - 5A5003.03 .............................................................................. 674
Figure 328: Front cover mounting and installation depth ................................................ 674
Figure 329: USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01 ......................................................... 675
Figure 330: Dimensions - 5MD900.USB2-01 .................................................................. 678
Figure 331: Dimensions - USB Media Drive with front cover .......................................... 679
Figure 332: Interfaces - 5MD900.USB2-01 ..................................................................... 679
Figure 333: Mounting orientation - 5MD900.USB2-01 .................................................... 680
Figure 334: Front cover 5A5003.03................................................................................. 680
Figure 335: Dimensions - 5A5003.03 .............................................................................. 681
Figure 336: Front cover mounting and installation depth ................................................ 681
Figure 337: Temperature humidity diagram for flash drives 5MMUSB.xxxx-00 .............. 684
Figure 338: Temperature humidity diagram - USB flash drive - 5MMUSB.2048-01........ 686
Figure 339: HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00 ............................................ 687
Figure 340: APC620 internal supply cable 5CAMSC.0001-00 ........................................ 692
Figure 341: DVI extension cable (similar)........................................................................ 693
Figure 342: Flex radius specification ............................................................................... 694
Figure 343: Pin assignments - DVI cable ........................................................................ 695
Figure 344: SDL extension cable (similar)....................................................................... 696
Figure 345: Flex radius specification ............................................................................... 697

826 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Figure index

Figure 346: Pin assignments - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-00........................................... 698

Figure 347: SDL cable with 45° plug (similar) ................................................................. 699
Figure 348: Flex radius specification ............................................................................... 700
Figure 349: Pin assignments - SDL cable with 45° plug 5CASDL.0xxx-01 ..................... 701
Figure 350: SDL cable with extender (similar)................................................................. 702
Figure 351: Flex radius specification ............................................................................... 703
Figure 352: Example of the signal direction for the SDL cable with extender ................. 704
Figure 353: Pin assignments - SDL cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-10.................... 705
Figure 354: SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03 (similar) .......................................................... 706
Figure 355: Flex radius specification ............................................................................... 708
Figure 356: Dimensions - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03 .................................................. 708
Figure 357: Pin assignments - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03........................................... 710
Figure 358: SDL flex cable with extender - 5CASDL.0x00-13 (similar)........................... 711
Figure 359: Flex radius specification ............................................................................... 713
Figure 360: Dimensions - SDL flex cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-13..................... 713
Figure 361: Example of the signal direction for the SDL flex cable with extender - APC620 .
714
Figure 362: Example of signal direction display - SDL flex cable with extender ............. 714

Figure index
Figure 363: Pin assignments - SDL flex cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-13 ............. 715
Figure 364: RS232 extension cable (similar)................................................................... 716
Figure 365: Pin assignments - RS232 cable ................................................................... 717
Figure 366: USB extension cable (similar) ...................................................................... 718
Figure 367: Pin assignments - USB cable....................................................................... 719
Figure 368: UPS principle................................................................................................ 720
Figure 369: Firmware and software required for the UPS ............................................... 722
Figure 370: Add-on UPS module 5AC600.UPSI-00 ........................................................ 724
Figure 371: Add-on UPS module 5AC600.UPSI-00 - Installation materials .................... 725
Figure 372: Battery unit 5AC600.UPSB-00 ..................................................................... 726
Figure 373: Temperature life span diagram .................................................................... 727
Figure 374: Deep discharge cycles ................................................................................. 727
Figure 375: Dimensions - 5AC600.UPSB-00 .................................................................. 728
Figure 376: Drilling template for the battery unit.............................................................. 729
Figure 377: UPS connection cable .................................................................................. 730
Figure 378: Block diagram of the UPS ............................................................................ 731
Figure 379: PCI Ethernet card 10/100 - 5ACPCI.ETH1-01 ............................................. 733
Figure 380: Dimensions - 5ACPCI.ETH1-01 ................................................................... 734
Figure 381: PCI Ethernet card 10/100 - 5ACPCI.ETH3-01 ............................................. 735
Figure 382: Dimensions - 5ACPCI.ETH3-01 ................................................................... 736
Figure 383: Replacement fan .......................................................................................... 737
Figure 384: 5AC600.SRAM-00........................................................................................ 738
Figure 385: SRAM module installation ............................................................................ 740
Figure 386: B&R power supplies (examples) .................................................................. 741
Figure 387: Battery removal ............................................................................................ 744
Figure 388: Battery handling ........................................................................................... 745
Figure 389: Battery polarity ............................................................................................. 745
Figure 390: CompactFlash + ejection lever (representation picture)............................... 746
Figure 391: APC620 1PCI slot - Remove screws to install/ remove filter kit ................... 747

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 827

 Figure index

Figure 392: APC620 1PCI slot - Remove side cover and fan kit cover ........................... 747
Figure 393: Markings for direction of airflow / fan rotation............................................... 748
Figure 394: APC620 1PCI slot - Fan installation ............................................................. 748
Figure 395: APC620 1PCI slot - Fan cable connection to the main board ...................... 749
Figure 396: APC620 2PCI slots - Remove screws to install/ remove filter kit ................. 750
Figure 397: APC620 2PCI slots - Remove side cover and fan kit cover ......................... 750
Figure 398: Markings for direction of airflow / fan rotation............................................... 751
Figure 399: APC620 2PCI slots - Fan installation ........................................................... 751
Figure 400: APC620 2PCI slots - Fan cable connection to the main board .................... 752
Figure 401: Dust filter in the fan kit cover and filter clasp................................................ 752
Figure 402: APC620 3PCI slot - Remove screws to install/ remove filter kit ................... 753
Figure 403: APC620 3PCI slots - Remove side cover and fan kit cover ......................... 754
Figure 404: Markings for direction of airflow / fan rotation............................................... 754
Figure 405: APC620 3PCI slot - Fan installation ............................................................. 755
Figure 406: APC620 3PCI slot - Fan cable connection to the main board ...................... 756
Figure 407: Dust filter in the fan kit cover and filter clasp................................................ 756
Figure 408: APC620 5PCI slot - Remove screws to install/ remove filter kit ................... 757
Figure 409: APC620 5PCI slot - Remove side cover and fan kit cover ........................... 757
Figure 410: APC620 5PCI attach cable fasteners........................................................... 758
Figure 411: Markings for direction of airflow / fan rotation............................................... 758
Figure 412: APC620 5PCI slot - Fan installation ............................................................. 759
Figure 413: APC620 5PCI slot - Fan cable connection to the main board ...................... 760
Figure 414: Dust filter in the fan kit cover and filter clasp................................................ 761
Figure 415: Removing the slide-in dummy module ......................................................... 762
Figure 416: Installing the slide-in drive ............................................................................ 762
Figure 417: Release the slide-in slot releasing mechanisms .......................................... 763
Figure 418: Removing the slide-in drive .......................................................................... 763
Figure 419: Slide-in slot releasing mechanism start position .......................................... 764
Figure 420: Add-on UPS module 5AC600.UPSI-00 - Installation materials .................... 765
Figure 421: Remove UPS module cover ......................................................................... 765
Figure 422: Screw in spacing bolt and spacing ring ........................................................ 766
Figure 423: Install UPS module....................................................................................... 766
Figure 424: Plug in connection cable .............................................................................. 766
Figure 425: Connector locking mechanism ..................................................................... 767
Figure 426: Remove UPS module cover ......................................................................... 768
Figure 427: Remove cover plate ..................................................................................... 768
Figure 428: Screw in spacing bolt and spacing ring ........................................................ 768
Figure 429: Install mounting bracket ............................................................................... 769
Figure 430: Install UPS module....................................................................................... 769
Figure 431: Plug in connection cable .............................................................................. 769
Figure 432: Connector locking mechanism ..................................................................... 770
Figure 433: Remove UPS module cover ......................................................................... 771
Figure 434: Remove cover plate ..................................................................................... 771
Figure 435: Screw in spacing bolt and spacing ring ........................................................ 771
Figure 436: Install mounting bracket ............................................................................... 772
Figure 437: Install UPS module....................................................................................... 772
Figure 438: Plug in connection cable .............................................................................. 772

828 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Figure index

Figure 439: Connector locking mechanism ..................................................................... 773

Figure 440: Remove UPS module cover ......................................................................... 774
Figure 441: Screw in spacing bolt ................................................................................... 774
Figure 442: Install UPS module....................................................................................... 774
Figure 443: Plug in connection cable .............................................................................. 775
Figure 444: Connector locking mechanism ..................................................................... 775
Figure 445: Remove UPS module cover ......................................................................... 776
Figure 446: Remove cover plate ..................................................................................... 776
Figure 447: Screw in spacing bolt ................................................................................... 776
Figure 448: Install mounting bracket ............................................................................... 777
Figure 449: Install UPS module....................................................................................... 777
Figure 450: Plug in connection cable .............................................................................. 777
Figure 451: Connector locking mechanism ..................................................................... 778
Figure 452: Remove UPS module cover ......................................................................... 778
Figure 453: Remove cover plate ..................................................................................... 778
Figure 454: Screw in spacing bolt ................................................................................... 779
Figure 455: Install mounting bracket ............................................................................... 779
Figure 456: Install UPS module....................................................................................... 779

Figure index
Figure 457: Plug in connection cable .............................................................................. 780
Figure 458: Connector locking mechanism ..................................................................... 780
Figure 459: Mounting the side cover - APC620, 1 PCI slot ............................................. 781
Figure 460: Mounting the side cover - APC620, 2 PCI slot ............................................. 782
Figure 461: Mounting the side cover - APC620, 3 PCI slot ............................................. 783
Figure 462: Mounting the side cover - APC620, 5 PCI slot ............................................. 784
Figure 463: Screw assignment on the back side of the SATA RAID controller ............... 785
Figure 464: Hard disk exchange...................................................................................... 786
Figure 465: Removing the APC620 front cover............................................................... 787
Figure 466: Mounting the APC620 front cover ................................................................ 788
Figure 467: APC620 front cover label ............................................................................. 789
Figure 468: Removing the APC620 front cover............................................................... 789
Figure 469: Attaching the front cover .............................................................................. 790
Figure 470: Temperature sensor locations...................................................................... 791
Figure 471: Connector location for external devices ....................................................... 792
Figure 472: MTCX controller location .............................................................................. 793
Figure 473: Sample configuration for SDL timing............................................................ 794
Figure 474: SDL timing - Example for Automation Panel 900 with the number 0 ........... 795
Figure 475: B&R Key Editor screenshots Version 3.10 (representation picture)............. 797
Figure 476: ADI development kit screenshots (Version 3.10) ......................................... 799
Figure 477: ADI .NET SDK Screenshots (Version 1.50) ................................................. 801

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 829

 Figure index

830 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table index

Table index

Table 1: Manual history ..................................................................................................... 23

Table 2: Environmentally-friendly separation of materials................................................. 35
Table 3: Organization of safety notices ............................................................................. 36
Table 4: Model numbers - system units ............................................................................ 37
Table 5: Model numbers - 815E (ETX) CPU boards ......................................................... 38
Table 6: Model numbers - 855GME (ETX) CPU boards ................................................... 38
Table 7: Model numbers - 855GME (XTX) CPU boards ................................................... 39
Table 8: Model numbers - Heat sinks ............................................................................... 39
Table 9: Model numbers - Main memory .......................................................................... 40
Table 10: Model numbers - Drives ...................................................................................... 40
Table 11: Model numbers - Interfaces ................................................................................ 42
Table 12: Model numbers - Fan kits.................................................................................... 42
Table 13: Model numbers - AP Link graphics adapter ........................................................ 42
Table 14: Model numbers - Supply voltage connectors ...................................................... 42
Table 15: Model numbers - X2X and CAN plug .................................................................. 43
Table 16: Model numbers - Batteries .................................................................................. 43
Table 17: Model numbers - CompactFlash cards ............................................................... 43
Table 18: Model numbers - USB flash drives...................................................................... 45
Table 19: Model numbers - Cables ..................................................................................... 45
Table 20: Model numbers - UPS module + accessories ..................................................... 47
Table 21: Model numbers - PCI Ethernet cards .................................................................. 47
Table 22: Model numbers - Other items.............................................................................. 47
Table 23: Model numbers - Software .................................................................................. 48
Table 24: Technical data - APC620, 1 PCI slot variant ....................................................... 62
Table 25: Technical data - APC620, 2 PCI slot variant ....................................................... 68
Table 26: Technical data - APC620, 3 PCI slot variant ....................................................... 74

Table index
Table 27: Technical data - APC620, 5 PCI slot variant ....................................................... 79
Table 28: Technical data - APC620 embedded variant ...................................................... 85
Table 29: Overview of humidity specifications for individual components......................... 119
Table 30: Pin assignments - COM1 .................................................................................. 123
Table 31: COM1 - I/O address and IRQ............................................................................ 123
Table 32: Pin assignments - COM2 .................................................................................. 124
Table 33: COM2 - I/O address and IRQ............................................................................ 124
Table 34: X2X pin assignments (only APC620 embedded) .............................................. 125
Table 35: CAN pin assignments (only APC620 embedded) ............................................. 125
Table 36: CAN node number switch (x1, x16) - only APC620 embedded ........................ 126
Table 37: CAN terminating switch / LED (only APC620 embedded)................................. 126
Table 38: Status LEDs CAN / X2X (only APC620 embedded) ......................................... 127
Table 39: POWERLINK (only APC620 embedded) .......................................................... 127
Table 40: Status / Error LED as error LED - POWERLINK V2 operating mode................ 127
Table 41: Status/Error LED as status LED - POWERLINK V2 operating mode................ 128
Table 42: POWERLINK station number (x1, x16) - only APC620 embedded................... 129
Table 43: Ethernet connection ETH (only APC620 embedded)........................................ 129
Table 44: Ethernet connection (ETH1).............................................................................. 130
Table 45: Ethernet cable length in conjunction with 5PC600.E855-xx CPU boards (ETX).....
131
Table 46: Ethernet cable length in conjunction with 5PC600.E855-xx CPU boards ......... 131

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 831

 Table index

Table 47: Ethernet connection (ETH2).............................................................................. 132

Table 48: USB port............................................................................................................ 133
Table 49: USB connections 4 x - only APC620 embedded............................................... 134
Table 50: Power supply depending on the system unit..................................................... 135
Table 51: Starting currents in the voltage supply to the system units ............................... 136
Table 52: System unit revisions for at least 10 seconds turn-off time ............................... 137
Table 53: System unit revisions for any turn-off times ...................................................... 137
Table 54: Pin assignments - Monitor / panel connection .................................................. 139
Table 55: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables ................................................. 139
Table 56: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer) ....... 140
Table 57: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment
(equalizer) ......................................................................................................... 141
Table 58: Technical data - MIC, Line IN and Line OUT port ............................................. 144
Table 59: Add-on interface slot ......................................................................................... 145
Table 60: Add-on UPS module slot ................................................................................... 146
Table 61: Technical data - PCI bus................................................................................... 148
Table 62: Technical data - Status LEDs............................................................................ 150
Table 63: Status LEDs Power, CF, Link (only APC620 embedded) ................................. 151
Table 64: Technical data - CompactFlash slot (CF1)........................................................ 152
Table 65: Technical data - Hard disk / CompactFlash slot (HDD/CF2)............................. 153
Table 66: CompactFlash slots (CF1 / CF2) - APC620 embedded .................................... 155
Table 67: Technical data - Power button .......................................................................... 156
Table 68: Technical data - Reset button ........................................................................... 156
Table 69: Technical data - PS/2 keyboard/mouse (external PS/2) ................................... 157
Table 70: Technical data - battery..................................................................................... 158
Table 71: Meaning of battery status .................................................................................. 158
Table 72: Technical data - Hardware security key ............................................................ 160
Table 73: Hardware security key - I/O address and IRQ .................................................. 160
Table 74: Technical data - Slide-in slot 1 .......................................................................... 161
Table 75: Technical data - Slide-in slot 2 .......................................................................... 162
Table 76: Technical data - 1, 2, 3 and 5 PCI slot types .................................................... 174
Table 77: Technical data - APC620 embedded variations................................................ 176
Table 78: Technical data - 815E CPU boards (ETX) ........................................................ 179
Table 79: Technical data - CPU boards 855GME (ETX) .................................................. 181
Table 80: Technical data - CPU boards 855GME (XTX) .................................................. 183
Table 81: Technical data - Heat sink................................................................................. 185
Table 82: Technical data - Main memory .......................................................................... 186
Table 83: Technical data - Add-on SSD - 5AC600.SSDI-00 ............................................. 188
Table 84: Technical data - Replacement SSD - 5MMSSD.0128-00 ................................. 192
Table 85: Technical data - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-00 ....................................... 195
Table 86: Technical data - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-01 ....................................... 198
Table 87: Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-02...................................... 201
Table 88: Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-03...................................... 204
Table 89: Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-04...................................... 207
Table 90: Technical data - Add-on hard disk 5AC600.HDDI-05 ....................................... 210
Table 91: Technical data - add-on hard disk - 5AC600.HDDI-06...................................... 213
Table 92: Technical data - Add-on CompactFlash slot 5AC600.CFSI-00 ......................... 216

832 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table index

Table 93: Technical data - Slide-in CD-ROM 5AC600.CDXS-00...................................... 218

Table 94: Technical data - Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW 5AC600.DVDS-00 ...................... 221
Table 95: Technical data - slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW - 5AC600.DVRS-00 revision D0
and higher ......................................................................................................... 224
Table 96: Technical data - slide-in DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW - 5AC600.DVRS-00 revision D0
and lower........................................................................................................... 225
Table 97: Technical data - Slide-in CF slot 2 - 5AC600.CFSS-00 .................................... 229
Table 98: Technical data - Slide-in USB diskette drive - 5AC600.FDDS-00 ..................... 231
Table 99: Technical data - Slide-in hard disk - 5AC600.HDDS-00.................................... 234
Table 100: Technical data - Slide-in hard disk - 5AC600.HDDS-01.................................... 237
Table 101: Technical data - Slide-in hard disk - 5AC600.HDDS-02.................................... 240
Table 102: Technical data - RAID controller - 5ACPCI.RAIC-00 ........................................ 243
Table 103: Contents of delivery - 5ACPCI.RAIC-00 ........................................................... 244
Table 104: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIS-00......................................... 246
Table 105: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIS-01......................................... 249
Table 106: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-01......................................... 252
Table 107: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-02......................................... 256
Table 108: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-03......................................... 260
Table 109: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-04......................................... 264
Table 110: Technical data - RAID Hard Disk - 5ACPCI.RAIC-05 ....................................... 268
Table 111: Technical data - RAID hard disk - 5MMHDD.0250-00 ...................................... 271
Table 112: Technical data - Add-on CAN interface - 5AC600.CANI-00.............................. 274
Table 113: Pin assignments - CAN ..................................................................................... 275
Table 114: Add-on CAN - I/O Adresse und IRQ ................................................................. 275
Table 115: CAN address register ........................................................................................ 275
Table 116: Bus length and transfer rate - CAN ................................................................... 276

Table index
Table 117: CAN cable requirements ................................................................................... 276
Table 118: Pin assignments - RS232/RS422...................................................................... 278
Table 119: Add-on RS232/422/485 - I/O address and IRQ ................................................ 278
Table 120: RS232 - Bus length and transfer rate................................................................ 279
Table 121: RS232 - Cable requirements............................................................................. 279
Table 122: RS422 - Bus length and transfer rate................................................................ 279
Table 123: RS422 - Cable requirements............................................................................. 280
Table 124: RS485 - Bus length and transfer rate................................................................ 281
Table 125: RS485 - Cable requirements............................................................................. 281
Table 126: Technical data - 5PC600.FA01-00.................................................................... 282
Table 127: Contents of delivery - 5PC600.FA01-00 ........................................................... 283
Table 128: Technical data - 5PC600.FA02-00.................................................................... 284
Table 129: Contents of delivery - 5PC600.FA02-00 ........................................................... 284
Table 130: Technical data - 5PC600.FA03-00.................................................................... 285
Table 131: Contents of delivery - 5PC600.FA03-00 ........................................................... 285
Table 132: Technical data - 5PC600.FA05-00.................................................................... 286
Table 133: Contents of delivery - 5PC600.FA05-00 ........................................................... 287
Table 134: Model numbers - AP Link graphics adapter ...................................................... 288
Table 135: AP Link slot (AP Link card inserted).................................................................. 288
Table 136: Pin assignment for AP Link connection............................................................. 289
Table 137: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables ................................................. 290

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 833

 Table index

Table 138: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer) ....... 290
Table 139: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment
(equalizer) ......................................................................................................... 291
Table 140: Drilling templates - 1 and 2 PCI slots ................................................................ 294
Table 141: Drilling templates - 3 and 5 PCI slots ................................................................ 295
Table 142: Drilling templates - APC620 embedded ............................................................ 296
Table 143: Selecting the display units................................................................................. 309
Table 144: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board ..................................... 310
Table 145: Link module for the configuration - One Automation Panel 900 via DVI ........... 311
Table 146: Cables for DVI configurations ........................................................................... 311
Table 147: Possible Automation Panel units, resolutions und segment lengths ................. 311
Table 148: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board ..................................... 313
Table 149: Link module for the configuration - One Automation Panel 900 via SDL .......... 314
Table 150: Cables for SDL configurations .......................................................................... 314
Table 151: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables ................................................. 315
Table 152: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer) ....... 315
Table 153: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment
(equalizer) ......................................................................................................... 316
Table 154: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board ..................................... 317
Table 155: Cables for SDL configurations .......................................................................... 318
Table 156: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables ................................................. 318
Table 157: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer) ....... 319
Table 158: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment
(equalizer) ......................................................................................................... 319
Table 159: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board ..................................... 320
Table 160: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables ................................................. 321
Table 161: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer) ....... 321
Table 162: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment
(equalizer) ......................................................................................................... 322
Table 163: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board ..................................... 323
Table 164: Link modules for the configuration: 4 Automation Panel 900 via SDL on 1 line 324
Table 165: Cables for SDL configurations .......................................................................... 324
Table 166: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables ................................................. 325
Table 167: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer) ....... 326
Table 168: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment
(equalizer) ......................................................................................................... 326
Table 169: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board ..................................... 328
Table 170: Link modules for the configuration: 1 Automation Panel 900 via SDL (optional) ....
329
Table 171: Cables for SDL configurations .......................................................................... 329
Table 172: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables ................................................. 330
Table 173: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer) ....... 330
Table 174: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment
(equalizer) ......................................................................................................... 331
Table 175: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board ..................................... 332
Table 176: Link modules for configuration: 4 Automation Panel 900 units via SDL (optional) on
1 line.................................................................................................................. 333

834 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table index

Table 177: Cables for SDL configurations .......................................................................... 333

Table 178: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables ................................................. 334
Table 179: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer) ....... 335
Table 180: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment
(equalizer) ......................................................................................................... 335
Table 181: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board ..................................... 337
Table 182: Link modules for the configuration: 2 Automation Panel 900 units via SDL and SDL
(optional) ........................................................................................................... 338
Table 183: Cables for SDL configurations .......................................................................... 338
Table 184: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables ................................................. 339
Table 185: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer) ....... 339
Table 186: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment
(equalizer) ......................................................................................................... 340
Table 187: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board ..................................... 342
Table 188: Link modules for configuration: 8 Automation Panel 900 units via SDL and SDL
(optional) ........................................................................................................... 342
Table 189: Cables for SDL configurations .......................................................................... 343
Table 190: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables ................................................. 343
Table 191: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer) ....... 344
Table 192: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment
(equalizer) ......................................................................................................... 345
Table 193: Possible combinations of system unit and CPU board ..................................... 347
Table 194: Link modules for configuration: 6 Automation Panel 900 units via SDL and SDL
(optional) ........................................................................................................... 347
Table 195: Segment lengths, resolutions and SDL cables ................................................. 348
Table 196: Requirements for SDL cable with automatic cable adjustment (equalizer) ....... 348

Table index
Table 197: Requirements for SDL cable with extender and automatic cable adjustment
(equalizer) ......................................................................................................... 349
Table 198: BIOS-relevant keys in the RAID Configuration Utility........................................ 351
Table 199: Evaluation example using an APC810 2-slot .................................................... 367
Table 200: Compatibility / improvements from 855GME (XTX) to 855GME (ETX)............. 368
Table 201: Keys relevant to 815E (ETX) BIOS during POST ............................................. 373
Table 202: Keys relevant to 815E (ETX) BIOS ................................................................... 373
Table 203: Overview of 815E (ETX) BIOS menu items ...................................................... 374
Table 204: 815E (ETX) Main setting options ...................................................................... 375
Table 205: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Master setting options ........................................... 377
Table 206: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Slave setting options ............................................. 378
Table 207: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Master setting options ........................................... 380
Table 208: 815E (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Slave setting options ............................................. 382
Table 209: 815E (ETX) Advanced Menu setting options .................................................... 384
Table 210: 815E (ETX) Advanced Chipset/Graphics Control setting options ..................... 386
Table 211: 815E (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration setting options ......................................... 387
Table 212: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #1 setting options ................................................ 389
Table 213: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #2 setting options ................................................ 390
Table 214: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #3 setting options ................................................ 391
Table 215: 815E (ETX) PCI device, slot #4 setting options ................................................ 392
Table 216: 815E (ETX) Memory Cache setting options ...................................................... 393

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 835

 Table index

Table 217: 815E (ETX) I/O Device Configuration setting options ....................................... 395
Table 218: 815E (ETX) Keyboard Features setting options................................................ 398
Table 219: 815E (ETX) CPU Board Monitor setting options ............................................... 399
Table 220: 815E (ETX) Miscellaneous setting options ....................................................... 400
Table 221: 815E (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features setting options ................................... 401
Table 222: 815E (ETX) Panel Control setting options ........................................................ 403
Table 223: 815E (ETX) Baseboard Monitor setting options ................................................ 404
Table 224: 815E (ETX) Legacy Devices setting options ..................................................... 405
Table 225: 815E (ETX) Security setting options ................................................................. 407
Table 226: 815E (ETX) Power setting options .................................................................... 409
Table 227: 815E (ETX) ACPI Control setting options ......................................................... 411
Table 228: 815E (ETX) Thermal Management ................................................................... 412
Table 229: 815E (ETX) Boot setting options ....................................................................... 414
Table 230: 815E (ETX) Exit setting options ........................................................................ 415
Table 231: 815E (ETX) Profile overview ............................................................................. 416
Table 232: 815E (ETX) Main Profile settings overview ....................................................... 417
Table 233: 815E (ETX) Advanced Chipset/Graphics Control Profile settings overview...... 418
Table 234: 815E (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration Profile settings overview .......................... 418
Table 235: 815E (ETX) Memory Cache Profile settings overview ...................................... 419
Table 236: 815E (ETX) I/O Device Configuration Profile settings overview........................ 419
Table 237: 815E (ETX) Keyboard Features Profile settings overview ................................ 420
Table 238: 815E (ETX) CPU Board Monitor Profile settings overview................................ 420
Table 239: 815E (ETX) Miscellaneous Profile settings overview ........................................ 420
Table 240: 815E (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features Profile settings overview .................... 421
Table 241: 815E (ETX) Security Profile settings overview.................................................. 422
Table 242: 815E (ETX) Power Profile settings overview .................................................... 423
Table 243: 815E (ETX) Boot Profile settings overview ....................................................... 424
Table 244: Keys relevant to 855GME (ETX) BIOS during POST ....................................... 427
Table 245: 855GME (ETX) - BIOS relevant keys................................................................ 427
Table 246: Overview of 855GME (ETX) BIOS menu items................................................. 427
Table 247: 855GME (ETX) Main setting options................................................................. 428
Table 248: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Master setting options ..................................... 430
Table 249: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 0 Slave setting options ....................................... 432
Table 250: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Master setting options ..................................... 434
Table 251: 855GME (ETX) IDE Channel 1 Slave setting options ....................................... 436
Table 252: 855GME (ETX) Advanced Menu setting options .............................................. 438
Table 253: 855GME (ETX) Advanced Chipset Control setting options............................... 439
Table 254: 855GME (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration setting options.................................... 442
Table 255: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #1 - setting options ...................................... 444
Table 256: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #2 - setting options ...................................... 445
Table 257: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #3 - setting options ...................................... 446
Table 258: 855GME (ETX) - PCI device, slot #4 - setting options ...................................... 447
Table 259: 855GME (ETX) Memory Cache setting options ................................................ 448
Table 260: 855GME (ETX) I/O Device Configuration setting options ................................. 450
Table 261: 855GME (ETX) Keyboard Features setting options .......................................... 453
Table 262: 855GME (ETX) - CPU board monitor - setting options ..................................... 454
Table 263: 855GME (ETX) miscellaneous - setting options ............................................... 455

836 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table index

Table 264: 855GME (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features setting options.............................. 456

Table 265: 855GME (ETX) Panel Control setting options................................................... 458
Table 266: 855GME (ETX) - baseboard monitor - setting options ...................................... 459
Table 267: 855GME (ETX) Legacy Devices setting options ............................................... 461
Table 268: 855GME (ETX) Security setting options ........................................................... 463
Table 269: 855GME (ETX) Main setting options................................................................. 465
Table 270: 855GME (ETX) ACPI Control setting options ................................................... 467
Table 271: 855GME (ETX) Boot setting options ................................................................. 469
Table 272: 855GME (ETX) - exit menu - setting options .................................................... 470
Table 273: 855GME (XTX) profile overview........................................................................ 472
Table 274: 855GME (ETX) - main - profile setting overview ............................................... 473
Table 275: 855GME (ETX) - advanced chipset/graphics control - profile settings overview.....
474
Table 276: 855GME (ETX) PCI/PNP Configuration Profile settings overview .................... 474
Table 277: 855GME (ETX) - memory cache - profile settings overview ............................. 475
Table 278: 855GME (ETX) I/O Device Configuration Profile settings overview.................. 476
Table 279: 855GME (ETX) - keyboard features - profile setting overview .......................... 476
Table 280: 855GME (ETX) - CPU board monitor - profile setting overview ........................ 477
Table 281: 855GME (ETX) - miscellaneous - profile setting overview ................................ 477
Table 282: 855GME (ETX) Baseboard/Panel Features profile settings overview............... 477
Table 283: 855GME (ETX) Security profile settings overview ............................................ 479
Table 284: 855GME (ETX) - power - profile setting overview ............................................. 479
Table 285: 855GME (ETX) - boot - profile setting overview................................................ 480
Table 286: 855GME (XTX) - keys relevant to BIOS during POST ...................................... 482
Table 287: 855GME (XTX) keys relevant to BIOS in the BIOS menu ................................ 482
Table 288: Overview of 855GME (XTX) BIOS menu items................................................. 483

Table index
Table 289: 855GME (XTX) Main menu setting options....................................................... 484
Table 290: 855GME (XTX) Advanced menu setting options .............................................. 485
Table 291: 855GME (XTX) Advanced ACPI Configuration setting options......................... 487
Table 292: 855GME (XTX) Advanced PCI Configuration setting options ........................... 488
Table 293: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Graphics Configuration setting options................... 490
Table 294: 855GME (XTX) Advanced CPU Configuration setting options.......................... 492
Table 295: 855GME (XTX) - advanced chipset - setting options ........................................ 493
Table 296: 855GME (XTX) Advanced I/O Interface Configuration setting options ............. 494
Table 297: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Clock Configuration setting options ........................ 496
Table 298: 855GME (XTX) Advanced IDE Configuration setting options ........................... 497
Table 299: 855GME (XTX) Primary IDE Master setting options ......................................... 499
Table 300: 855GME (XTX) - primary IDE slave - setting options........................................ 500
Table 301: 855GME (XTX) Secondary IDE Master setting options .................................... 502
Table 302: 855GME (XTX) Secondary IDE Slave setting options ...................................... 503
Table 303: 855GME (XTX) Advanced USB Configuration setting options.......................... 505
Table 304: 855GME (XTX) USB mass storage device configuration.................................. 507
Table 305: 855GME (XTX) - advanced keyboard/mouse configuration - setting options ... 508
Table 306: 855GME (XTX) - advanced remote access configuration - setting options....... 509
Table 307: 855GME (XTX) - advanced remote access configuration - setting options....... 511
Table 308: 855GME (XTX) Advanced Baseboard/Panel Features setting options............. 512
Table 309: 855GME (XTX) Panel Control setting options................................................... 514

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 837

 Table index

Table 310: 855GME (XTX) - baseboard monitor setting options ........................................ 515
Table 311: 855GME (XTX) Legacy Devices setting options ............................................... 516
Table 312: 855GME (XTX) Boot menu setting options ....................................................... 518
Table 313: 855GME (XTX) Security menu setting options ................................................. 520
Table 314: 855GME (XTX) Hard disk security user password............................................ 521
Table 315: 855GME (XTX) Hard disk security master password........................................ 522
Table 316: 855GME (XTX) Power menu setting options .................................................... 523
Table 317: 855GME - (XTX) Exit menu - Setting options ................................................... 525
Table 318: 855GME (XTX) Profile overview ....................................................................... 527
Table 319: 855GME (XTX) Main profile settings overview.................................................. 528
Table 320: 855GME (XTX) - advanced profile setting options ............................................ 528
Table 321: 855GME - (XTX) PCI configuration - profile setting overview ........................... 529
Table 322: 855GME - (XTX) Graphics configuration - profile setting overview................... 529
Table 323: 855GME - (XTX) CPU configuration - profile setting overview.......................... 530
Table 324: 855GME - (XTX) Chipset configuration - profile setting overview ..................... 530
Table 325: 855GME (XTX) - I/O interface configuration - profile settings overview............ 530
Table 326: 855GME - (XTX) Clock configuration - profile setting overview ........................ 530
Table 327: 855GME - (XTX) IDE configuration - profile setting overview ........................... 531
Table 328: 855GME - (XTX) USB configuration - profile setting overview.......................... 532
Table 329: 855GME (XTX) - keyboard/mouse configuration - profile setting overview....... 532
Table 330: 855GME - (XTX) remote access configuration - profile setting overview.......... 533
Table 331: 855GME (XTX) - CPU board monitor - profile setting overview ........................ 533
Table 332: 855GME (XTX) - baseboard/panel features -profile setting overview ............... 533
Table 333: 855GME (XTX) - boot - profile setting overview................................................ 535
Table 334: 855GME (XTX) - security - profile setting options ............................................. 535
Table 335: 855GME (XTX) - power - profile setting overview ............................................. 536
Table 336: BIOS post code messages BIOS 815E (ETX) and 855GME (ETX).................. 537
Table 337: BIOS post code messages BIOS 855GME (XTX) ............................................ 537
Table 338: RAM address assignment ................................................................................. 539
Table 339: DMA channel assignment ................................................................................. 539
Table 340: I/O address assignment .................................................................................... 540
Table 341: IRQ interrupt assignments in PCI mode............................................................ 541
Table 342: IRQ interrupt assignments in APIC mode ......................................................... 542
Table 343: Inter-IC (I²C) bus resources .............................................................................. 545
Table 344: Inter-IC (I²C) bus resources .............................................................................. 545
Table 345: CPU board software versions ........................................................................... 547
Table 346: Automation panel link software versions ........................................................... 547
Table 347: Differentiating between 815E (ETX) and 855GME (ETX / XTX) CPU boards... 548
Table 348: System unit support for buffering with Automation Runtime ............................. 564
Table 349: Visual Components video output with different system units ............................ 565
Table 350: Model numbers - MS-DOS ................................................................................ 566
Table 351: Tested resolutions and color depths for DVI and RGB signals ......................... 567
Table 352: Model numbers - Windows XP Professional ..................................................... 568
Table 353: Relationship between driver settings and graphics engine ............................... 573
Table 354: Relationship between driver settings and graphics engine ............................... 575
Table 355: Model numbers - Windows XP Embedded ....................................................... 584
Table 356: Device functions in Windows XP Embedded with FP2007 ............................... 585

838 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table index

Table 357: Model numbers - Windows Embedded Standard 2009..................................... 588

Table 358: Device functions in Windows Embedded Standard 2009 ................................. 589
Table 359: Model numbers - Windows CE.......................................................................... 591
Table 360: Windows CE 5.0 features.................................................................................. 592
Table 361: Windows CE 6.0 features.................................................................................. 593
Table 362: Overview of standards ...................................................................................... 609
Table 363: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for emissions .................................... 611
Table 364: Test requirements - Network-related emissions for industrial areas ................. 612
Table 365: : Test requirements - Electromagnetic emissions for industrial areas............... 613
Table 366: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for immunity...................................... 614
Table 367: Test requirements - Electrostatic discharge (ESD) ........................................... 615
Table 368: Test requirements - High-frequency electromagnetic fields (HF field) .............. 615
Table 369: Test requirements - High-speed transient electrical disturbances (burst) ......... 616
Table 370: Test requirements - Surge voltages .................................................................. 616
Table 371: Test requirements - Conducted disturbances ................................................... 616
Table 372: Test requirements - Magnetic fields with electrical frequencies ........................ 617
Table 373: Test requirements - Voltage dips, fluctuations, and short-term interruptions .... 618
Table 374: Test requirements - Damped vibration .............................................................. 618
Table 375: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for vibration....................................... 619
Table 376: Test requirements - Vibration during operation ................................................. 619
Table 377: Test requirements - Vibration during transport (packaged)............................... 620
Table 378: Test requirements - Shock during operation ..................................................... 620
Table 379: Test requirements - Shock during transport ...................................................... 620
Table 380: Test requirements - Toppling ............................................................................ 620
Table 381: Test requirements - Toppling ............................................................................ 621
Table 382: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for temperature and humidity ........... 622

Table index
Table 383: Test requirements - Worst case during operation ............................................. 622
Table 384: Test requirements - Dry heat ............................................................................ 622
Table 385: Test requirements - Dry cold ............................................................................. 622
Table 386: Test requirements - Large temperature fluctuations ......................................... 623
Table 387: Test requirements - Temperature fluctuations during operation ....................... 623
Table 388: Test requirements - Humid heat, cyclic ............................................................. 623
Table 389: Test requirements - Humid heat, constant (storage)......................................... 623
Table 390: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for safety .......................................... 624
Table 391: Test requirements - Ground resistance............................................................. 625
Table 392: Test requirements - Insulation resistance ......................................................... 625
Table 393: Test requirements - High voltage ...................................................................... 626
Table 394: Test requirements - Residual voltage ............................................................... 626
Table 395: Test requirements - Leakage current ................................................................ 626
Table 396: Test requirements - Overload ........................................................................... 627
Table 397: Test requirements - Defective component ........................................................ 627
Table 398: Test requirements - Voltage range.................................................................... 627
Table 399: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for other tests ................................... 628
Table 400: Test requirements - Protection .......................................................................... 628
Table 401: Test requirements - Degree of pollution ............................................................ 628
Table 402: International Certifications................................................................................. 631
Table 403: Model numbers - Accessories ........................................................................... 633

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 839

 Table index

Table 404: Order data - TB103 .......................................................................................... 638

Table 405: Technical data - TB103 supply plug .................................................................. 638
Table 406: Order data - 0TB704.9 and 0TB704.91............................................................ 640
Table 407: Technical data - TB103 supply plug .................................................................. 640
Table 408: Order data - Lithium batteries ........................................................................... 641
Table 409: Technical data - Lithium batteries ..................................................................... 641
Table 410: Order data - APC620 interface cover ................................................................ 643
Table 411: Order data - DVI - CRT adapter ........................................................................ 644
Table 412: Order data - CompactFlash cards ..................................................................... 645
Table 413: Technical data - 5CFCRD.xxxx-06 CompactFlash cards.................................. 646
Table 414: Order data - CompactFlash cards ..................................................................... 650
Table 415: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04.................................. 651
Table 416: Order data - CompactFlash cards ..................................................................... 655
Table 417: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-03.................................. 656
Table 418: Order data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02 ........................................ 659
Table 419: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-02.................................. 660
Table 420: Technical data - USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00 ...................................... 669
Table 421: Contents of delivery - USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-00.............................. 672
Table 422: Technical data - 5A5003.03 .............................................................................. 673
Table 423: Technical data - USB Media Drive 5MD900.USB2-01 ...................................... 676
Table 424: Contents of delivery - USB Media Drive - 5MD900.USB2-01 ........................... 679
Table 425: Technical data - 5A5003.03 .............................................................................. 680
Table 426: Order data - USB flash drives ........................................................................... 682
Table 427: Technical data - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.xxxx-00 ......................................... 683
Table 428: Technical data - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.2048-01 ........................................ 685
Table 429: Model number - HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD..................................................... 687
Table 430: Model number - APC620 internal supply cable ................................................. 692
Table 431: Technical data - 5CAMSC.0001-00 .................................................................. 692
Table 432: Model numbers - DVI cables ............................................................................. 693
Table 433: Technical data - DVI cable 5CADVI.0xxx-00 .................................................... 694
Table 434: Model numbers - SDL cables ............................................................................ 696
Table 435: Technical data - SDL cables 5CASDL.0xxx-00................................................. 697
Table 436: Model numbers - SDL cables with 45° plug ...................................................... 699
Table 437: Technical data - SDL cable with 45° plug 5CASDL.0xxx-01............................. 700
Table 438: Model numbers - SDL cable with extender ....................................................... 702
Table 439: Technical data - SDL cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-10............................ 703
Table 440: Model numbers - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03 ................................................. 706
Table 441: Technical data - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03 .................................................. 707
Table 442: Structure - SDL cable 5CASDL.0xxx-03 ........................................................... 709
Table 443: Model numbers - SDL flex cable with extender................................................. 711
Table 444: Technical data - SDL flex cable with extender 5CASDL.0x00-13 ..................... 712
Table 445: Model numbers - RS232 cables ........................................................................ 716
Table 446: Technical data - RS232 cables ......................................................................... 716
Table 447: Model numbers - USB cables ........................................................................... 718
Table 448: Technical data - USB cables ............................................................................. 718
Table 449: Order data - Uninterruptible power supply ........................................................ 721
Table 450: System unit revisions - Add-on UPS module .................................................... 721

840 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Table index

Table 451: Firmware and software required for the UPS .................................................... 722
Table 452: Technical data - 5AC600.UPSI-00 .................................................................... 724
Table 453: Technical data - 5AC600.UPSB-00................................................................... 726
Table 454: Technical data - UPS connection cable ............................................................ 730
Table 455: UPS - Order data .............................................................................................. 732
Table 456: Ethernet connection ETH .................................................................................. 733
Table 457: Ethernet connections ETH1, ETH2, ETH3 ........................................................ 735
Table 458: Model numbers - Replacement fan filters ......................................................... 737
Table 459: Technical data - 5AC600.SRAM-00 .................................................................. 738
Table 460: Single-phase power supplies ............................................................................ 742
Table 461: Three-phase power supplies ............................................................................. 742
Table 462: Meaning of battery status .................................................................................. 744
Table 463: Temperature sensor locations........................................................................... 791
Table 464: Revision information for connecting an external device .................................... 792
Table 465: Pin assignments - Connector on main board .................................................... 792
Table 466: Temperature limits for fan control ..................................................................... 796

Table index

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 841

 Table index

842 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Model number index

Model number index

0 5AC600.HDDS-02 ..............................41, 240

5AC600.HS01-00 ...............................39, 185
0AC201.91.........................43, 158, 633, 641 5AC600.HS01-01 ...............................39, 185
0PS102.0 ................................... 48, 637, 742 5AC600.HS01-02 ...............................39, 185
0PS104.0 ................................... 48, 637, 742 5AC600.HS02-01 ...............................39, 185
0PS105.1 ................................... 48, 637, 742 5AC600.HS02-02 ...............................39, 185
0PS105.2 ................................... 48, 637, 742 5AC600.HS03-01 ...............................39, 185
0PS110.1 ................................... 48, 637, 742 5AC600.ICOV-00....................... 47, 633, 643
0PS110.2 ................................... 48, 637, 742 5AC600.SDL0-00 ...............................42, 288
0PS120.1 ................................... 48, 637, 742 5AC600.SRAM-00 ..................... 47, 633, 738
0PS305.1 ................................... 48, 637, 742 5AC600.SSDI-00 ................................40, 187
0PS310.1 ................................... 48, 637, 742 5AC600.UPSB-00..... 47, 633, 721, 722, 726
0PS320.1 ................................... 48, 637, 742 5AC600.UPSI-00 ............... 47, 633, 721, 724
0PS340.1 ................................... 48, 637, 742 5AC900.1000-00 ....................... 47, 633, 644
0TB103.9 ................................... 42, 633, 638 5ACPCI.ETH1-01 ...................... 47, 633, 733
0TB103.91 ................................. 42, 633, 638 5ACPCI.ETH3-01 ...................... 47, 633, 735
0TB704.9 ......................................... 633, 640 5ACPCI.RAIC-00................................41, 243
0TB704.91 ....................................... 633, 640 5ACPCI.RAIC-01....................... 41, 251, 252
5ACPCI.RAIC-02....................... 41, 256, 257
4 5ACPCI.RAIC-03............... 41, 259, 260, 268
5ACPCI.RAIC-04............... 41, 264, 265, 272
4A0006.00-000 ..................43, 158, 633, 641 5ACPCI.RAIC-05...................................... 267
5ACPCI.RAIS-00 ................................41, 245
5ACPCI.RAIS-01 ............... 41, 248, 249, 250
5 5CADVI.0018-00 ....................... 45, 634, 693
5A5003.03 .........................47, 633, 673, 680 5CADVI.0050-00 ....................... 45, 634, 693
5AC600.485I-00..........................................42 5CADVI.0100-00 ....................... 45, 634, 693
5AC600.CANI-00 ........................................42 5CAMSC.0001-00 ..................... 45, 633, 692
5AC600.CDXS-00.............................. 41, 218 5CASDL.0018-00 ...................... 45, 634, 696
5AC600.CFSI-00 ............................... 41, 216 5CASDL.0018-01 ...................... 45, 634, 699
5AC600.CFSS-00 .............................. 41, 228 5CASDL.0018-03 ...................... 45, 634, 706
5AC600.DVDS-00.............................. 41, 221 5CASDL.0050-00 ...................... 45, 634, 696
5AC600.DVRS-00...................... 41, 224, 225 5CASDL.0050-01 ...................... 45, 634, 699
Model number index

5AC600.FA01-00 ....................... 47, 637, 737 5CASDL.0050-03 ...................... 45, 634, 706
5AC600.FA02-00 ....................... 48, 637, 737 5CASDL.0100-00 ...................... 45, 634, 696
5AC600.FA03-00 ....................... 48, 637, 737 5CASDL.0100-01 ...................... 46, 634, 699
5AC600.FA05-00 ....................... 48, 637, 737 5CASDL.0100-03 ...................... 46, 634, 706
5AC600.FDDS-00.............................. 41, 231 5CASDL.0150-00 ...................... 46, 634, 696
5AC600.HDDI-00............................... 40, 195 5CASDL.0150-01 ...................... 46, 634, 699
5AC600.HDDI-01............................... 40, 198 5CASDL.0150-03 ...................... 46, 634, 706
5AC600.HDDI-02............................... 40, 201 5CASDL.0200-00 ...................... 46, 634, 696
5AC600.HDDI-03............................... 40, 204 5CASDL.0200-03 ...................... 46, 634, 706
5AC600.HDDI-04............................... 40, 207 5CASDL.0250-00 ...................... 46, 634, 696
5AC600.HDDI-05............................... 40, 210 5CASDL.0250-03 ...................... 46, 634, 706
5AC600.HDDI-06............................... 40, 213 5CASDL.0300-00 ...................... 46, 634, 696
5AC600.HDDS-00 ......................................41 5CASDL.0300-03 ...................... 46, 634, 706
5AC600.HDDS-01 ............................. 41, 237 5CASDL.0300-10 ...................... 46, 634, 702

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 843

 Model number index

5CASDL.0300-13....................... 46, 634, 711 650

5CASDL.0400-10....................... 46, 635, 702 5CFCRD.8192-06...................... 43, 635, 645
5CASDL.0400-13....................... 46, 635, 711 5MD900.USB2-00 ..................... 47, 636, 668
5CAUPS.0005-00 ..............47, 635, 721, 730 5MD900.USB2-01 ..................... 47, 636, 675
5CAUPS.0030-00 ..............47, 635, 721, 730 5MMDDR.0256-00..............................40, 186
5CAUSB.0018-00 ...................... 46, 635, 718 5MMDDR.0512-00..............................40, 186
5CAUSB.0050-00 ...................... 46, 635, 718 5MMDDR.1024-00..............................40, 186
5CFCRD.0032-02 ...................... 44, 636, 659 5MMHDD.0250-00.................................... 271
5CFCRD.0064-02 ...................... 44, 636, 659 5MMSDR.0128-01..............................40, 186
5CFCRD.0064-03 .... 44, 152, 153, 155, 635, 5MMSDR.0256-01..............................40, 186
655 5MMSDR.0512-01..............................40, 186
5CFCRD.0128-02 ...................... 44, 636, 659 5MMSSD.0128-00 ..............................40, 191
5CFCRD.0128-03 .... 44, 152, 153, 155, 636, 5MMUSB.0128-00 ..................... 45, 636, 682
655 5MMUSB.0256-00 ..................... 45, 636, 682
5CFCRD.016G-04 ... 44, 152, 153, 155, 635, 5MMUSB.0512-00 ..................... 45, 636, 682
650 5MMUSB.1024-00 ..................... 45, 636, 682
5CFCRD.016G-06 ..................... 43, 635, 645 5MMUSB.2048-00 ..................... 45, 636, 682
5CFCRD.0256-02 ...................... 44, 636, 659 5MMUSB.2048-01 ..................... 45, 637, 682
5CFCRD.0256-03 .... 44, 152, 153, 155, 636, 5PC600.E815-00 ................................38, 179
655 5PC600.E815-02 ................................38, 179
5CFCRD.032G-06 ..................... 43, 635, 645 5PC600.E815-03 ................................38, 179
5CFCRD.0512-02 ...................... 44, 636, 659 5PC600.E855-00 ................................38, 181
5CFCRD.0512-03 .... 44, 152, 153, 155, 636, 5PC600.E855-01 ................................38, 181
655 5PC600.E855-02 ................................38, 181
5CFCRD.0512-04 .... 43, 152, 153, 155, 635, 5PC600.E855-03 ................................38, 181
650 5PC600.E855-04 ................................38, 181
5CFCRD.0512-06 ...................... 43, 635, 645 5PC600.E855-05 ................................38, 181
5CFCRD.1024-02 ...................... 44, 636, 659 5PC600.FA01-00................................42, 282
5CFCRD.1024-03 .... 44, 152, 153, 155, 636, 5PC600.FA02-00................................42, 283
655 5PC600.FA03-00................................42, 285
5CFCRD.1024-04 .... 43, 152, 153, 155, 635, 5PC600.FA05-00................................42, 286
650 5PC600.SE00-00........................................ 37
5CFCRD.1024-06 ...................... 43, 635, 645 5PC600.SE00-01........................................ 37
5CFCRD.2048-02 ...................... 44, 636, 659 5PC600.SE00-02........................................ 37
5CFCRD.2048-03 .... 44, 152, 153, 155, 636, 5PC600.SF03-00................................37, 174
655 5PC600.SX01-00................................37, 174
5CFCRD.2048-04 .... 43, 152, 153, 155, 635, 5PC600.SX02-00................................37, 174
650 5PC600.SX02-01................................37, 174
5CFCRD.2048-06 ...................... 43, 635, 645 5PC600.SX05-00................................37, 174
5CFCRD.4096-03 .... 44, 152, 153, 155, 636, 5PC600.SX05-01................................37, 174
655 5PC600.X855-00 ................................39, 183
5CFCRD.4096-04 .... 43, 152, 153, 155, 635, 5PC600.X855-01 ................................39, 183
650 5PC600.X855-02 ................................39, 183
5CFCRD.4096-06 ...................... 43, 635, 645 5PC600.X855-03 ................................39, 183
5CFCRD.8192-03 .... 44, 152, 153, 155, 636, 5PC600.X855-04 ................................39, 183
655 5PC600.X855-05 ................................39, 183
5CFCRD.8192-04 .... 43, 152, 153, 155, 635, 5SWHMI.0000-00 ...................... 48, 637, 687

844 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Model number index

5SWWCE.0512-ENG......................... 50, 591 9A0014.05 ................................. 46, 635, 716

5SWWCE.0513-ENG......................... 50, 591 9A0014.10 ................................. 46, 635, 716
5SWWCE.0612-ENG......................... 50, 591 9A0017.01 ................................................ 732
5SWWCE.0613-ENG......................... 50, 591 9A0017.02 ................................................ 732
5SWWCE.0812-ENG......................... 50, 591 9A0100.11 ................................................ 732
5SWWCE.0813-ENG......................... 50, 591 9A0100.14 ................................................ 732
5SWWXP.0412-ENG......................... 49, 584 9A0100.15 ................................................ 732
5SWWXP.0413-ENG......................... 49, 584 9S0000.01-010 ...................................48, 566
5SWWXP.0500-ENG......................... 49, 568 9S0000.01-020 ...................................49, 566
5SWWXP.0500-GER......................... 49, 568 9S0000.08-010 ...................................49, 568
5SWWXP.0500-MUL ......................... 49, 569 9S0000.08-020 ...................................49, 568
5SWWXP.0600-ENG......................... 49, 568 9S0000.09-090 ...................................49, 568
5SWWXP.0600-GER......................... 49, 568 9S0001.19-020 ...................................49, 584
5SWWXP.0600-MUL ......................... 49, 568 9S0001.20-020 ...................................49, 584
5SWWXP.0712-ENG......................... 50, 588 9S0001.27-020 ...................................49, 584
5SWWXP.0713-ENG......................... 50, 588 9S0001.28-020 ...................................49, 584
9S0001.29-020 ........................................... 50
9S0001.32-020 ........................................... 50
9
9S0001.34-020 ........................................... 50
9A0014.02 ................................. 46, 635, 716 9S0001.36-020 ........................................... 50

Model number index

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 845

 Model number index

846 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Index

Index

A Barcodes ................................................. 163

Battery ............................................. 158, 641
AC97 sound 54, 144, 174, 176, 396, 451, 566 Change ................................................. 743
ACPI 409, 411, 465, 467, 541, 542, 566, 803 Battery operation ..................................... 599
Add-on .............................58, 62, 89, 95, 145 Battery settings ................................ 601, 603
Add-on CAN interface ..............................274 Battery status ................................... 158, 744
Add-on CompactFlash slot ......................216 Battery unit ................................ 47, 633, 726
Add-on hard disk ..............................195, 198 Lifespan ................................................ 726
Add-on RS232/422/485 interface ............278 Maintenance interval ............................ 726
Add-on UPS .......................................54, 146 Baud rate ................................................. 803
Add-on UPS module ........................721, 724 Beep codes .............................................. 537
Address register .......................................275 Beeping code ........................................... 537
ADI ...........................................595, 793, 794 BIOS ........................................................ 803
.NET SDK .............................................801 BIOS 815E (ETX) .................................... 371
Development kit ....................................799 ACPI control ......................................... 411
Drivers ..................................................595 Advanced ............................................. 384
Administrative Tools ................................607 Advanced chipset/graphics control ...... 385
Air circulation ...........................................297 BIOS setup keys .................................. 373
Ambient temperature .................................89 Boot ...................................................... 414
815E CPU board (ETX) ..........................89 CPU board monitor .............................. 399
855GME CPU board (ETX) ....................93 Exit ....................................................... 415
855GME CPU board (XTX) ....................93 I/O Device Configuration ...................... 395
AP Link ......................................58, 147, 288 IDE channel 0 master ........................... 376
AP Link cards ...........................................288 IDE channel 0 slave ............................. 378
AP Link Slot .............................................147 IDE channel 1 master ........................... 380
APC .........................................................803 IDE channel 1 slave ............................. 382
APC620 embedded ...........................83, 121 Keyboard Features ............................... 398
APC620 UPS ...........................................720 Legacy devices .................................... 405
APC620, 1 PCI slot variant ........................60 Main ..................................................... 375
APC620, 2 PCI slot variant ........................66 Main board monitor .............................. 404
APC620, 3 PCI slot variant ........................72 Main Board/Panel Features ................. 401
APC620, 5 PCI slot variant ........................77 Memory cache ...................................... 393
API ...........................................................803 Miscellaneous ...................................... 400
ATX power supply ....................................156 Panel control ........................................ 403
Audio driver ..............................................582 PCI device, slot #1 ............................... 389
Installation ............................................582 PCI device, slot #2 ............................... 390
Automation Device Interface ....................595 PCI device, slot #3 ............................... 391
Automation Runtime ................564, 739, 803 PCI device, slot #4 ............................... 392
PCI/PNP Configuration ........................ 387
B Power ................................................... 409
Profile overview .................................... 416
B&R Automation Device Interface ...........595 Security ................................................ 407
B&R Automation Runtime ........................804 Summary screen .................................. 373
Index

B&R Control Center .................................595 Thermal management .......................... 412

B&R Embedded OS Installer ...................594 BIOS 855GME (ETX) .............................. 425
B&R Key Editor ........................................797 ACPI control ......................................... 467
Backup battery .................................158, 641 Advanced ............................................. 438

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 847

 Index

Advanced chipset/graphics control .......439 Panel control ........................................ 514

Boot ......................................................469 PCI Configuration ................................. 488
CPU board monitor ...............................454 Power ................................................... 523
Exit .......................................................470 Primary IDE Master .............................. 498
I/O Device Configuration ......................450 Primary IDE slave ................................ 500
IDE channel 0 master ...........................430 Profile overview .................................... 527
IDE channel 0 slave .............................432 Remote access configuration ............... 509
IDE channel 1 master ...........................434 Secondary IDE Master ......................... 501
IDE channel 1 slave .............................436 Secondary IDE slave ............................ 503
Keyboard features ................................453 Security ................................................ 520
Legacy devices .....................................461 USB configuration ................................ 504
Main ......................................................428 USB mass storage device configuration ....
Main board monitor ..............................459 507
Main Board/Panel Features ..................456 BIOS default settings ............................... 416
Memory cache ......................................448 BIOS Error signals ................................... 537
Miscellaneous .......................................455 BIOS 815E (ETX) and 855GME (ETX) 537
Panel control ........................................458 BIOS 855GME (XTX) ........................... 537
PCI device, slot #1 ...............................444 BIOS Extension ROM ...................... 255, 263
PCI device, slot #2 ...............................445 BIOS upgrade .......................................... 547
PCI device, slot #3 ...............................446 Bit ............................................................ 803
PCI device, slot #4 ...............................447 Bit rate ..................................................... 803
PCI/PNP Configuration .........................441 Block diagram .......................................... 165
Power ...................................................465 System unit 5PC600.SE00-00 ............. 171
Profile overview ....................................472 System unit 5PC600.SE00-01 ............. 172
Security ................................................463 System unit 5PC600.SE00-02 ............. 173
Setup keys ............................................427 System unit 5PC600.SF03-00 .............. 168
Summary screen ..................................426 System unit 5PC600.SX01-00 ............. 165
BIOS 855GME (XTX) System unit 5PC600.SX02-00 ............. 166
ACPI configuration ...............................486 System unit 5PC600.SX02-01 ............. 167
Advanced .............................................485 System unit 5PC600.SX05-00 ............. 169
BIOS setup keys ...................................482 System unit 5PC600.SX05-01 ............. 170
Boot ......................................................518 Boot diskette ............................................ 558
Chipset configuration ............................493 Creating with Windows XP ................... 558
Clock Configuration ..............................496 Bootstrap loader ...................................... 804
CPU board monitor ...............................511 Buffer duration ......................................... 158
CPU configuration ................................492 Burst ........................................................ 616
Exit .......................................................525 Bus length ................................................ 276
Graphics configuration .........................490 Bus structure ........................................... 277
Hard disk security master password ....522 Button cell ................................................ 641
Hard disk security user password ........521 Byte ......................................................... 804
I/O interface configuration ....................494
IDE Configuration .................................497
C
Keyboard/mouse configuration .............508
Legacy devices .....................................516 Cable drag chain ..................................... 630
Main ......................................................484 Cable type ............................... 276, 279, 280
Main board monitor ..............................515 Cables ..................................................... 692
Main Board/Panel Features ..................512 DVI ....................................................... 693

848 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Index

RS232 ..................................................716 D
SDL ......................................................696
SDL w/ extender ...................................702 Damped vibration .................................... 618
SDL with 45° plug .................................699 Data loss ............ 61, 67, 73, 78, 84, 156, 817
USB ......................................................718 Data register ............................................ 275
Cache ..............................179, 181, 183, 804 DCD ......................................................... 806
Cage clamps ............................135, 638, 640 Deep discharge cycles ...................... 27, 727
CAN ...................................54, 125, 145, 804 Deep discharge protection ....................... 721
Bus length ............................................276 Deep discharge voltage ........................... 726
Cable type ............................................276 Defective component ............................... 627
Terminating resistor ..............................277 Degree of pollution .................................. 628
CAN address register ..............................275 Derating ............................................... 91, 95
CAN controller .........................................274 Development kit ....................................... 799
CAN node ID ............................................126 Device ID ................................................. 739
CAN terminating switch ...........................126 Device interfaces ..................................... 121
CD-ROM ..................................................804 Dial-up ..................................................... 806
CE mark ...................................................804 Dimension standards ................................. 36
Certifications ............................................631 Dimensions ................................................ 65
Chipset .....................................................179 1 PCI slot variant .................................... 65
Climate conditions ...................................622 2 PCI slot variant .................................... 71
CMOS ......................................................805 3 PCI slot variant .................................... 76
CMOS battery ..........................................641 5 PCI slot variant .................................... 82
COM ........................................................805 620 embedded variant ........................... 88
COM1 ..............................................123, 805 DIMM ....................................................... 806
COM2 ..............................................124, 805 DIP switch ................................................ 546
COM3 ......................................................805 Direction of air flow .......... 748, 751, 754, 758
CompactFlash ..................................659, 805 Directives ................................................... 36
Calculating the lifespan ........................662 Display Clone .......................................... 308
Dimensions ...................648, 653, 658, 661 Disposal ..................................................... 35
General information ......645, 650, 655, 659 Distribution of resources .......................... 539
Order data ....................645, 650, 655, 659 DMA channel assignment .................... 539
Technical data ..............646, 651, 656, 659 I/O address assignment ....................... 540
CompactFlash slot ...................152, 153, 155 Interrupt assignments ................... 541, 542
Conducted disturbances ..........................616 RAM address assignment .................... 539
Configure .................................................723 DMA ......................................................... 806
Connection cycles ............................138, 288 Dongle ..................................... 160, 397, 452
Connection examples ..............................308 Double layer .................................... 224, 676
Control Center .........................595, 600, 791 DRAM ...................................................... 806
CPU .........................................................805 Drilling templates ..................................... 294
CPU board 815E (ETX) ...........................179 Drives ...................................................... 187
CPU board 855GME (ETX) .....................181 Dry cold ................................................... 622
CPU board 855GME (XTX) .....................183 Dry heat ................................................... 622
Creating a CompactFlash card for B&R DS1425 .................................................... 160
Index

upgrade files ............................................562 DSR ......................................................... 806

CTS ..........................................................806 DTR ......................................................... 806
Dual display clone .. 316, 331, 340, 345, 349,
570, .......................................... 575, 578, 580

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 849

 Index

DVD .........................................................807 Fan kit replacement ................................. 747

DVI .............................54, 142, 288, 291, 807 Fan kits .................................................... 282
DVI - CRT adapter ...................................644 1 PCI variant ........................................ 282
DVI - Monitor adapter ..............................644 2 PCI variant ........................................ 283
DVI cable .................................................693 5 PCI variant ........................................ 286
Cable specifications .............................695 Fastening bolts ........................................ 748
DVI-A .......................................................807 FDD ......................................................... 808
DVI-D .......................................................807 Features .................................................... 54
DVI-I .........................................................807 Fiber optic cable ...................................... 150
Fiber optics .............................................. 808
FIFO ........................................................ 808
E
Filter clasp ................................. 42, 752, 756
ECSD .......................................................442 Firmware .................................. 555, 722, 808
EDID ........................................................807 Flex radius ............... 306, 630, 716, 718, 730
Data ......................................386, 439, 440 Floating Point Unit ................... 179, 181, 183
EIDE ........................................................807 Floppy ...................................................... 808
Electromagnetic emissions ......................613 FPC ......................................................... 809
Electrostatic discharge .............................615 FPD ......................................................... 809
Embedded OS Installer ............................594 Free fall .................................................... 621
EMC .........................................................807 Front cover ...................................... 673, 680
Emissions ........................................611, 613 Front side bus .......................................... 179
Energy options .........................................607 FTP .......................................................... 809
Entire device ..............................................60 Full size ..................................................... 27
EPROM ....................................................807 Full Speed ....................................... 133, 134
Equalizer ..................................................598
Error signals .............................................537 G
ESD ...................................................32, 615
Electrical components with housing .......32 GB ........................................................... 809
Electrical components without housing ..32 Graphics .................................. 180, 182, 184
Individual components ............................33 Graphics driver installation ...................... 570
Packaging ...............................................32 815E CPU board .................................. 570
Proper handling ......................................32 Graphics driver settings .. 312, 316, 319, 322,
ETH1 ................130, 396, 451, 462, 467, 583 327, .......................... 331, 336, 340, 345, 349
ETH2 ........................132, 406, 462, 467, 583 Graphics drivers ...................................... 570
Ethernet .............................................54, 808 Graphics engine 1 .. 418, 439, 440, 474, 573,
Ethernet cable lengths .............................131 575
ETX ..........................................................808 Graphics engine 2 ... 440, 474, 566, 573, 575
European directives .................................609 Ground resistance ................................... 625
Extended desktop .....58, 308, 316, 331, 337, Grounding concept .................................. 307
340, ..........341, 345, 346, 349, 573, 578, 793
H
F
Half-size ..................................................... 54
Fan connection cable ...............................749 Handshake .............................................. 809
Fan kit cover ............................................757 Hard Disk ......... 153, 175, 195, 198, 233, 236
Fan kit installation ....................................747 Hardware Security Key ............................ 160

850 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Index

HDD .................................................150, 809 Jumper ..................................................... 810

Heat sink ..................................................185
Exchanging ...........................................185
K
Types ....................................................185
HF field ....................................................615 KCF ......................................................... 576
Hibernate .........................................150, 151 Key configuration file ............................... 576
High speed .......................................133, 134 Key editor ................................................ 797
High voltage .............................................626 Keyboard ................................................. 157
High-frequency electromagnetic fields .....615
High-speed transient elect. disturbance value
616 L
Hot Plug ...................................................157 L1 cache .................................. 179, 181, 183
Hot surface ..........................................66, 72 L2 cache .................................. 179, 181, 183
Humid heat, constant ...............................623 LCD ......................................................... 810
Humid heat, cyclic ....................................623 Leakage current ....................................... 626
LED .................................................. 150, 810
I Lifespan
CompactFlash ...................................... 662
I/O address assignment ...........................540 Line IN ..................................................... 144
IDE ...........................................................809 Line OUT ................................................. 144
Identification .............................................163 Lithium battery ......................................... 158
Immunity ..................................................614 Locking time ............................................ 576
Individual components .............................174 Low battery shutdown .............................. 608
AP Link cards .......................................288 Low speed ....................................... 133, 134
CPU boards 815E (ETX) ......................179 LPT .......................................................... 810
CPU boards 855GME (ETX) ................181
CPU boards 855GME (XTX) ................183
Drives ...................................................187 M
Fan kits .................................................282 Magnetic fields with electrical frequencies ....
Heat sink ..............................................185 617
Interface options ...................................274 Main memory ..................................... 54, 186
Main memory ........................................186 Maintenance Controller Extended .. 175, 177,
RAID system ........................................242 793
System unit ...........................................174 Maintenance free rechargeable batteries 721
Installation ................................................297 Maintenance interval ......................... 27, 726
Installing the UPS service ........................599 Manual history ........................................... 23
Insulation resistance ................................625 MAXIM ..................................................... 160
Interface cover .........................................643 Maximum memory capacity ..................... 186
Interface options ......................................274 MB ........................................................... 810
Interrupt assignments ......................541, 542 Mechanical conditions ............................. 619
ISA ...........................................................809 Memory capacity ..................................... 186
ISO ...........................................................809 Messages ........................................ 537, 607
Index

MIC .......................................................... 144

J Microprocessor ........................................ 811
MIPS ........................................................ 811
Jitter .........................................................810 Mkey ........................................................ 811

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 851

 Index

Model numbers ..........................................37 PCI configuration space .......................... 739

Monitor / Panel .........................................138 PCI Ethernet card ............................ 733, 735
Motherboard ............................................811 PCI half-size standard ............................. 147
Mounting orientation ........................293, 297 PCI slot .................................................... 147
Optional mounting ................................299 PCMCIA ................................................... 812
Standard mounting ...............................297 Permanent magnet ............ 61, 67, 73, 78, 84
Mounting plates .......................................293 PLC .......................................................... 812
Mounting rail brackets ......................668, 675 PnP .......................................................... 812
Mounting screws ..................................66, 72 POH ......................................................... 812
Mounting the side cover ...........................781 POST ....................................................... 813
APC620 with 1 PCI slot ........................781 Post codes ............................................... 537
APC620 with 2 PCI slot ........................782 Power ................................ 97, 101, 150, 151
APC620 with 3 PCI slot ........................783 APC620 systems, 1 PCI slot .................. 97
APC620 with 5 PCI slot ........................784 APC620 systems, 2 PCI slots .............. 101
Mouse ......................................................157 APC620 systems, 3 PCI slots .............. 107
MS-DOS ..................................................566 APC620 systems, 5 PCI slots .............. 109
MS-DOS Boot diskette .............................558 Power button 97, 99, 101, 104, 107, 109, 113,
MTBF .......................................................811 .......................... 117, 156, 175, 177, 410, 466
MTCX .......................156, 175, 177, 793, 811 Power management .......................... 97, 101
Multi-language .........................................568 Power supplies ........................................ 741
Multitasking ..............................................811 Power supply ........................................... 741
POWERLINK ....................... 53, 54, 127, 813
Station number ..................................... 129
N
Status / Error LED ................................ 127
Network driver ..........................................583 Procedure following power failure ........... 608
Installation ............................................583 Programs ................................................... 35
Network-related emissions ......................612 Protection type ......................................... 628
NMI ..........................................................274 PS/2 ......................................................... 157
Keyboard .............................................. 157
Mouse .................................................. 157
O Y-cable ................................................. 157
OEM .........................................................811
OPC .........................................................811 Q
OPC server ..............................................812
Optional mounting orientations ................299 QUXGA .................................................... 813
Over-current shutdown ............................608 QVGA ...................................................... 813
Overload ..........................................135, 627 QWUXGA ................................................ 813
QXGA ...................................................... 815
P
R
Panel ........................................................812
Panel locking time ....................576, 578, 580 RAID ........................................ 251, 259, 267
Parallel port ..............................................160 RAM ......................................................... 813
Part subject to wear 158, 282, 283, 284, 285, Real time ................................................. 813
286, ..........................................641, 726, 737 Real-time clock . 54, 158, 175, 177, 179, 182,
PCI ...........................................................812 184

852 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Index

Removal strips .................................744, 745 Cable specifications ............................. 698

Replacement fan ......................................737 SDL equalizer .......................................... 598
Replacement PCI SATA RAID HDD ........271 SDL flex cable with extender ................... 711
Replacing the main memory ....................186 SDRAM ............................................ 186, 814
Requirements for emissions ....................611 Security Key ............................................ 160
Requirements for immunity to disturbances .. Selection guide .......................................... 56
614 Self discharging ............................... 158, 743
Reset button ............................156, 175, 177 Sequential Function Chart ....................... 814
Residual voltage ......................................626 Serial number .......................................... 163
Reverse polarity protection ......................135 Services ................................................... 607
RGB ...........54, 138, 142, 288, 567, 569, 576 SFC ......................................................... 814
ROM ........................................................814 Shock during operation ............................ 620
RS232 ..............................................279, 814 Shock during transport ............................ 620
Bus length ............................................279 Short circuit protection ............................. 724
Cable type ............................................279 Short-term interruptions ........................... 618
RS232 cable ............................................716 Shutting down .......................................... 607
Cable specifications .............................717 Side cover ................................................ 757
RS232/422/485 ........................................145 Single-phase power supplies ................... 742
RS422 ..............................................279, 814 Slide-in CD-ROM ..................................... 217
Bus length ............................................279 Slide-in CF 2-slot ..................................... 228
Cable type ............................................279 Slide-in DVD-ROM/CD-RW ..................... 220
RS485 ..............................................280, 814 Slide-in hard disk ..................... 233, 236, 239
Bus length ............................................280 Slide-in slot 1 ........................................... 161
Cable type ............................................280 Slide-in slot 2 ........................................... 162
RTC ...........54, 158, 175, 177, 179, 182, 184 Slide-in USB FDD .................................... 230
RTS ..........................................................814 Slot PLC .................................................. 815
RXD .........................................................814 Smart Display Link ............. 54, 138, 143, 292
SO-DIMM ................................................. 186
Soft-off ............................................. 150, 151
S
SoftPLC ................................................... 815
Safety .......................................................624 SRAM ........................................ 47, 633, 815
Safety notices ............................................32 SRAM module ......................................... 738
Dust, humidity, aggressive gases ...........34 Driver support ....................................... 739
Environmentally-friendly disposal ...........35 Installation ............................................ 740
Installation ..............................................34 Technical data ...................................... 738
Intended use ...........................................32 Standard keypad module ......................... 815
Operation ................................................34 Standard mounting .................................. 297
Organization ...........................................36 Standard shutdown .................................. 608
Policy and procedures ............................33 Standards ................................................ 609
Protection against electrostatic discharges Overview .............................................. 609
32 Standards and certifications .................... 609
Transport and storage ............................33 Starting current ........................ 136, 175, 177
SATA ...............................242, 251, 259, 267 Station number ........................................ 129
Index

Screw clamps ..........................135, 638, 640 Status LED .............................................. 150

SDL ..........................................143, 288, 292 CF ........................................................ 151
SDL cable with extender ..........................702 HDD ..................................................... 150
SDL cables ..............................696, 699, 706 Link ....................................................... 151

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 853

 Index

Link 1 ............................................150, 151 U

Link 2 ....................................................150
Power ...........................................150, 151 UART ....................................................... 816
Status LEDs .............................................151 UDMA ...................................................... 816
Status LEDs CAN / X2X ..........................127 Uninterruptible power supply ................... 720
Structure ....................................................55 UPS 47, 54, 97, 99, 101, 104, 107, 110, 114,
Supply voltage ...................................54, 135 117, .......................... 146, 150, 555, 765, 817
Supply voltage connectors .......................638 UPS configuration .................................... 599
Surface temperature .60, 66, 72, 77, 83, 218, UPS connection cable ..................... 722, 730
222 UPS driver ............................................... 600
Surge .......................................................616 UPS installation ............................... 725, 765
Surge voltages .........................................616 APC620, 1 PCI slot ...................... 765, 774
Suspend-to-disk ...............................150, 151 APC620, 2 PCI slot ...................... 768, 776
SUXGA ....................................................815 APC620, 5 PCI slot ...................... 771, 778
SVGA .......................................................815 UPS monitor ............................................ 600
Switch ......................................................815 UPS status ............................................... 608
Switching power supply ...........................741 UPS status values ................................... 600
SXGA .......................................................815 UPS system settings ............................... 604
SXGA+ .....................................................815 USB ......................................................... 817
System units ............................................815 USB 2.0 ........................................... 133, 134
USB cable ................................................ 718
Cable specifications ............................. 719
T USB flash drive ........................................ 682
Task .........................................................816 General information .............................. 682
TCP/IP .....................................................816 Order data ............................................ 682
Temperature ............................................791 Technical data .............................. 683, 685
Temperature fluctuations .........................623 USB flash drive for B&R update files ....... 560
Operation ..............................................623 USB Media Drive ............................. 668, 675
Temperature monitoring ......................92, 96 Dimensions .................................. 671, 678
Temperature sensor ........................721, 791 Dimensions with front cover ......... 672, 679
Temperature sensor locations .................791 Installation .................................... 673, 680
Terminating LED ......................................126 Interfaces ..................................... 672, 679
Terminating resistor .........................126, 277 Mounting orientation ..................... 673, 680
Terminating switch ...................................126 Technical data .............................. 669, 676
TFT display ..............................................816 USB peripheral devices ........................... 359
Three-phase power supplies ...................742 USB port .......................................... 133, 134
Toppling ...................................................620 User serial ID ........................... 402, 457, 513
Torsion .....................................................629 UXGA ...................................................... 817
Touch driver settings 312, 316, 319, 322, 327,
..................................331, 336, 340, 345, 349 V
Touch screen ...........................................816
Touch screen driver Vendor ID ................................................ 739
Dual display clone ................................580 Ventilation holes ...................................... 293
Extended desktop .................................578 VGA ......................................................... 817
Touch screen driver installation ...............578 Vibration during transport ........................ 620
Turn-off time ............................................607 Vibration operation .................................. 619
TXD ..........................................................816 Video signals ........................................... 138

854 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68

 Index

Viruses .......................................................35 Graphics drivers ................................... 586

Voltage dips .............................................618 Installation ............................................ 586
Voltage fluctuations .................................618 Network driver ...................................... 587
Voltage range ..........................................627 Touch screen driver ..................... 586, 590
Windows XP Professional ....................... 568
Audio driver .......................................... 582
W
FAQ .............................................. 569, 576
Wake On LAN ..........................................467 Graphics drivers ................................... 570
White Paper .............................................662 Installation ............................................ 569
Windows CE ....................................591, 817 Network driver ...................................... 583
Embedded OS Installer ........................594 Touch screen driver ............................. 578
General information ..............................591 Worst case ............................................... 622
Installation ............................................594 WSXGA ................................................... 817
Windows CE 5.0 WUXGA ................................................... 817
Features ...............................................592 WXGA ...................................................... 818
Windows CE 6.0
Features ...............................................593 X
Windows XP Embedded ..........................584
Audio driver ..........................................586 X2X .............................................. 53, 54, 125
FAQ ......................................................587 XGA ......................................................... 818
General information ..............................584 XTX .......................................................... 818

Index

Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68 855

 Index

856 Automation PC 620 User's Manual V 2.68